This is a modern-English version of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th Edition, "Gyantse" to "Hallel": Volume 12, Slice 7, originally written by Various. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Transcriber’s note: A few typographical errors have been corrected. They appear in the text like this, and the explanation will appear when the mouse pointer is moved over the marked passage. Sections in Greek will yield a transliteration when the pointer is moved over them, and words using diacritic characters in the Latin Extended Additional block, which may not display in some fonts or browsers, will display an unaccented version.

Links to other EB articles: Links to articles residing in other EB volumes will be made available when the respective volumes are introduced online.
 

THE ENCYCLOPÆDIA BRITANNICA

A DICTIONARY OF ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE AND GENERAL INFORMATION

ELEVENTH EDITION

 

VOLUME XII SLICE VII

Gyantse to Hallel


 

Articles in This Slice

Articles in This Section

GYANTSE HAHNEMANN, SAMUEL CHRISTIAN FRIEDRICH
GYGES HAHN-HAHN, IDA
GYLIPPUS HAI
GYLLEMBOURG-EHRENSVÄRD, THOMASINE CHRISTINE HAIBAK
GYLLENSTJERNA, JOHAN HAIDA
GYMKHANA HAIDINGER, WILHELM KARL
GYMNASTICS AND GYMNASIUM HAIDUK
GYMNOSOPHISTS HAIFA
GYMNOSPERMS HAIK
GYMNOSTOMACEAE HAIL
GYMPIE HAILES, DAVID DALRYMPLE
GYNAECEUM HAILSHAM
GYNAECOLOGY HAINAN
GYÖNGYÖSI, ISTVÁN HAINAU
GYÖR HAINAUT
GYP HAINBURG
GYPSUM HAINICHEN
GYROSCOPE AND GYROSTAT HAI-PHONG
GYTHIUM HAIR
GYULA-FEHÉRVÁR HAIR-TAIL
H HAITI
HAAG, CARL HAJIPUR
HAAKON HAJJ
HAARLEM HĀJJĪ KHALĪFA
HAARLEM LAKE HAKE, EDWARD
HAASE, FRIEDRICH HAKE, THOMAS GORDON
HAASE, FRIEDRICH GOTTLOB HAKE
HAAST, SIR JOHANN FRANZ JULIUS VON HAKKAS
HABABS HAKLUYT, RICHARD
HABAKKUK HAKODATE
HABDALA HAL
HABEAS CORPUS HALA
HABERDASHER HALAESA
HABINGTON, WILLIAM HALAKHA
HABIT HALBERSTADT
HABITAT HALBERT
HABSBURG HALDANE, JAMES ALEXANDER
HACHETTE, JEAN NICOLAS PIERRE HALDANE, RICHARD BURDON
HACHETTE, JEANNE HALDANE, ROBERT
HACHETTE, LOUIS CHRISTOPHE FRANÇOIS HALDEMAN, SAMUEL STEHMAN
HACHURE HALDIMAND, SIR FREDERICK
HACIENDA HALE, EDWARD EVERETT
HACKBERRY HALE, HORATIO
HACKENSACK HALE, JOHN PARKER
HACKET, JOHN HALE, SIR MATTHEW
HACKETT, HORATIO BALCH HALE, NATHAN
HACKETT, JAMES HENRY HALE, WILLIAM GARDNER
HACKLÄNDER, FRIEDRICH WILHELM VON HALEBID
HACKNEY (borough of London) HALES, JOHN (d. 1571)
HACKNEY (riding-horse) HALES, JOHN (1584-1656)
HADAD HALES, STEPHEN
HADDINGTON, EARL OF HALESOWEN
HADDINGTON HALEVI, JUDAH BEN SAMUEL
HADDINGTONSHIRE HALÉVY, JACQUES FRANÇOIS FROMENTAL ÉLIE
HADDOCK HALÉVY, LUDOVIC
HADDON HALL HALFPENNY, WILLIAM
HADEN, SIR FRANCIS SEYMOUR HALF-TIMBER WORK
HADENDOA HALFWAY COVENANT
HADERSLEBEN HALHED, NATHANIEL BRASSEY
HADING, JANE HALIBURTON, THOMAS CHANDLER
HADLEIGH HALIBUT
HADLEY, ARTHUR TWINING HALICARNASSUS
HADLEY, JAMES HALICZ
HADLEY HALIFAX, CHARLES MONTAGUE
HADRAMUT HALIFAX, GEORGE MONTAGU DUNK
HADRIA HALIFAX, GEORGE SAVILE
HADRIAN HALIFAX (Canada)
HADRIAN'S WALL HALIFAX (Yorkshire, England)
HADRUMETUM ḤALIṢAH
HAECKEL, ERNST HEINRICH HALKETT, HUGH
HAEMATITE HALL, BASIL
HAEMATOCELE HALL, CARL CHRISTIAN
HAEMOPHILIA HALL, CHARLES FRANCIS
HAEMORRHAGE HALL, CHRISTOPHER NEWMAN
HAEMORRHOIDS HALL, EDWARD
HAEMOSPORIDIA HALL, FITZEDWARD
HAETZER, LUDWIG HALL, ISAAC HOLLISTER
HĀFIZ HALL, SIR JAMES
HAG HALL, JAMES (American judge)
HAGEDORN, FRIEDRICH VON HALL, JAMES (American geologist)
HAGEN, FRIEDRICH HEINRICH VON DER HALL, JOSEPH
HAGEN HALL, MARSHALL
HAGENAU HALL, ROBERT
HAGENBACH, KARL RUDOLF HALL, SAMUEL CARTER
HAGENBECK, CARL HALL, WILLIAM EDWARD
HAGERSTOWN HALL (spa of Austria)
HAG-FISH HALL (town of Germany)
HAGGADA HALL (of a mansion)
HAGGAI HALLAM, HENRY
HAGGARD, HENRY RIDER HALLAM, ROBERT
HAGGIS HALLÉ, SIR CHARLES
HAGIOLOGY HALLE
HAGIOSCOPE HALLECK, FITZ-GREENE
HAGONOY HALLECK, HENRY WAGER
HAGUE, THE HÄLLEFLINTA
HAHN, AUGUST HALLEL

750

750

GYANTSE, one of the large towns of Tibet. It lies S.E. of Shigatse, 130 m. from the Indian frontier and 145 m. from Lhasa. Its central position at the junction of the roads from India and Bhutan with those from Ladakh and Central Asia leading to Lhasa makes it a considerable distributing trade centre. Its market is the third largest in Tibet, coming after Lhasa and Shigatse, and is especially celebrated for its woollen cloth and carpet manufactures. Here caravans come from Ladakh, Nepal and upper Tibet, bringing gold, borax, salt, wool, musk and furs, to exchange for tea, tobacco, sugar, cotton goods, 751 broadcloth and hardware. The town is compactly built of stone houses, with wooden balconies facing the main street, whence narrow lanes strike off into uninviting slums, and contains a fort and monastery. In the British expedition of 1904 Gyantse formed the first objective of the advance, and the force was besieged here in the mission post of Changlo for some time. The Tibetans made a night attack on the post, and were beaten off with some difficulty, but subsequently the British attacked and stormed the fort or jong. Under the treaty of 1904 a British trade agent is stationed at Gyantse.

GYANTSE, is one of the major towns in Tibet. It is located southeast of Shigatse, 130 miles from the Indian border and 145 miles from Lhasa. Its central location at the crossroads of roads from India and Bhutan, as well as those from Ladakh and Central Asia leading to Lhasa, makes it an important trade hub. Its market is the third largest in Tibet, following Lhasa and Shigatse, and is particularly known for its woolen cloth and carpet production. Caravans arrive here from Ladakh, Nepal, and upper Tibet, bringing gold, borax, salt, wool, musk, and furs to trade for tea, tobacco, sugar, cotton goods, 751 broadcloth, and hardware. The town is densely built with stone houses featuring wooden balconies that face the main street, from which narrow alleys lead into less appealing slums, and it also includes a fort and a monastery. During the British expedition in 1904, Gyantse was the first target of the advance, and the troops were besieged at the mission post of Changlo for a while. The Tibetans launched a nighttime attack on the post, and after some struggle, they were repelled, but later the British counterattacked and captured the fort, or jong. According to the treaty of 1904, a British trade agent is stationed in Gyantse.


GYGES, founder of the third or Mermnad dynasty of Lydian kings, he reigned 687-652 B.C. according to H. Geizer, 690-657 B.C. according to H. Winckler. The chronology of the Lydian kings given by Herodotus has been shown by the Assyrian inscriptions to be about twenty years in excess. Gyges was the son of Dascylus, who, when recalled from banishment in Cappadocia by the Lydian king Sadyattes—called Candaules “the Dog-strangler” (a title of the Lydian Hermes) by the Greeks—sent his son back to Lydia instead of himself. Gyges soon became a favourite of Sadyattes and was despatched by him to fetch Tudo, the daughter of Arnossus of Mysia, whom the Lydian king wished to make his queen. On the way Gyges fell in love with Tudo, who complained to Sadyattes of his conduct. Forewarned that the king intended to punish him with death, Gyges assassinated Sadyattes in the night and seized the throne with the help of Arselis of Mylasa, the captain of the Carian bodyguard, whom he had won over to his cause. Civil war ensued, which was finally ended by an appeal to the oracle of Delphi and the confirmation of the right of Gyges to the crown by the Delphian god. Further to secure his title he married Tudo. Many legends were told among the Greeks about his rise to power. That found in Herodotus, which may be traced to the poet Archilochus of Paros, described how “Candaules” insisted upon showing Gyges his wife when unrobed, which so enraged her that she gave Gyges the choice of murdering her husband and making himself king, or of being put to death himself. Plato made Gyges a shepherd, who discovered a magic ring by means of which he murdered his master and won the affection of his wife (Hdt. i. 8-14; Plato, Rep. 359; Justin i. 7; Cicero, De off. iii. 9). Once established on the throne Gyges devoted himself to consolidating his kingdom and making it a military power. The Troad was conquered, Colophon captured from the Greeks, Smyrna besieged and alliances entered into with Ephesus and Miletus. The Cimmerii, who had ravaged Asia Minor, were beaten back, and an embassy was sent to Assur-bani-pal at Nineveh (about 650 B.C.) in the hope of obtaining his help against the barbarians. The Assyrians, however, were otherwise engaged, and Gyges turned to Egypt, sending his faithful Carian troops along with Ionian mercenaries to assist Psammetichus in shaking off the Assyrian yoke (660 B.C.). A few years later he fell in battle against the Cimmerii under Dugdammē (called Lygdamis by Strabo i. 3. 21), who took the lower town of Sardis. Gyges was succeeded by his son Ardys.

GYGES, was the founder of the third or Mermnad dynasty of Lydian kings, reigning from 687-652 BCE according to H. Geizer, and 690-657 BCE according to H. Winckler. The timeline of the Lydian kings provided by Herodotus has been shown through Assyrian inscriptions to be about twenty years longer than accurate. Gyges was the son of Dascylus, who, when he was called back from exile in Cappadocia by the Lydian king Sadyattes—referred to by the Greeks as Candaules “the Dog-strangler” (a title of the Lydian Hermes)—sent his son back to Lydia instead of going himself. Gyges quickly became a favorite of Sadyattes and was sent to fetch Tudo, the daughter of Arnossus of Mysia, whom the Lydian king wanted as his queen. On the journey, Gyges fell in love with Tudo, who reported his behavior to Sadyattes. After being warned that the king planned to kill him, Gyges assassinated Sadyattes at night and seized the throne with the support of Arselis of Mylasa, the captain of the Carian bodyguard, whom he had managed to persuade to join his cause. This triggered a civil war, which ended with an appeal to the oracle of Delphi, leading to the Delphian god confirming Gyges's right to the crown. To further secure his title, he married Tudo. Many legends circulated among the Greeks about his rise to power. The one found in Herodotus, which traces back to the poet Archilochus of Paros, tells how “Candaules” insisted on showing Gyges his wife while she was undressed, which angered her so much that she gave Gyges the option to either kill her husband and become king or face execution himself. Plato depicted Gyges as a shepherd who discovered a magical ring that allowed him to kill his master and win the love of his wife (Hdt. i. 8-14; Plato, Rep. 359; Justin i. 7; Cicero, De off. iii. 9). Once he was established on the throne, Gyges focused on strengthening his kingdom and turning it into a military power. He conquered the Troad, captured Colophon from the Greeks, besieged Smyrna, and formed alliances with Ephesus and Miletus. The Cimmerii, who had devastated Asia Minor, were pushed back, and an embassy was sent to Assur-bani-pal in Nineveh (around 650 BCE) seeking his help against the invaders. However, the Assyrians were preoccupied with other matters, leading Gyges to turn to Egypt, sending his loyal Carian troops along with Ionian mercenaries to help Psammetichus in breaking free from Assyrian control (660 BCE). A few years later, he was killed in battle against the Cimmerii led by Dugdammē (known as Lygdamis by Strabo i. 3. 21), who captured the lower town of Sardis. Gyges was succeeded by his son Ardys.

See Nicolaus Damascenus, quoting from the Lydian historian Xanthus, in C. Müller, Fragmenta historicorum Graecorum, iii.; R. Schubert, Geschichte der Könige von Lydien (1884); M. G. Radet, La Lydie et le monde grec au temps de Mermnades (1892-1893): H. Gelzer, “Das Zeitalter des Gyges” (Rhein. Mus., 1875); H. Winckler, Altorientalische Forschungen, i. (1893); Macan’s edition of Herodotus.

See Nicolaus Damascenus, quoting from the Lydian historian Xanthus, in C. Müller, Fragmenta historicorum Graecorum, iii.; R. Schubert, Geschichte der Könige von Lydien (1884); M. G. Radet, La Lydie et le monde grec au temps de Mermnades (1892-1893): H. Gelzer, “Das Zeitalter des Gyges” (Rhein. Mus., 1875); H. Winckler, Altorientalische Forschungen, i. (1893); Macan’s edition of Herodotus.

(A. H. S.)

GYLIPPUS, a Spartan general of the 5th century B.C.; he was the son of Cleandridas, who had been expelled from Sparta for accepting Athenian bribes (446 B.C.) and had settled at Thurii. His mother was probably a helot, for Gylippus is said to have been, like Lysander and Callicratidas, a mothax (see Helot). When Alcibiades urged the Spartans to send a general to lead the Syracusan resistance against the Athenian expedition, Gylippus was appointed, and his arrival was undoubtedly the turning point of the struggle (414-413). Though at first his long hair, his threadbare cloak and his staff furnished the subject of many a jest, and his harsh and overbearing manner caused grave discontent, yet the rapidity and decisiveness of his movements, won the sympathy and respect of the Syracusans. Diodorus (xiii. 28-32), probably following Timaeus, represents him as inducing the Syracusans to pass sentence of death on the captive Athenian generals, but we need have no hesitation in accepting the statement of Philistus (Plutarch, Nicias, 28), a Syracusan who himself took part in the defence, and Thucydides (vii. 86), that he tried, though without success, to save their lives, wishing to take them to Sparta as a signal proof of his success. Gylippus fell, as his father had done, through avarice; entrusted by Lysander with an immense sum which he was to deliver to the ephors at Sparta, he could not resist the temptation to enrich himself and, on the discovery of his guilt, went into exile.

GYLIPPUS, a Spartan general from the 5th century BCE; he was the son of Cleandridas, who had been kicked out of Sparta for taking bribes from the Athenians (446 BCE) and had settled in Thurii. His mother was likely a helot, since Gylippus is said to have been, like Lysander and Callicratidas, a mothax (see Helot). When Alcibiades urged the Spartans to send a general to lead the Syracusan resistance against the Athenian expedition, Gylippus was appointed, and his arrival was definitely a turning point in the struggle (414-413). Although at first his long hair, worn-out cloak, and staff were the subject of many jokes, and his harsh and overbearing manner caused significant discontent, the speed and decisiveness of his actions won the sympathy and respect of the Syracusans. Diodorus (xiii. 28-32), likely following Timaeus, represents him as convincing the Syracusans to execute the captured Athenian generals, but we can confidently accept the account of Philistus (Plutarch, Nicias, 28), a Syracusan who participated in the defense, and Thucydides (vii. 86), that he attempted, though unsuccessfully, to save their lives, wanting to take them to Sparta as a clear sign of his success. Gylippus fell, like his father, due to greed; entrusted by Lysander with a large amount of money meant for the ephors in Sparta, he could not resist the temptation to enrich himself and, upon the discovery of his wrongdoing, went into exile.

Thucydides vi. 93. 104, vii.; Plutarch, Nicias, 19, 21, 27, 28, Lysander, 16, 17; Diodorus xiii. 7, 8, 28-32; Polyaenus i. 39. 42. See Syracuse (for the siege operations), commentaries on Thucydides and the Greek histories.

Thucydides vi. 93. 104, vii.; Plutarch, Nicias, 19, 21, 27, 28, Lysander, 16, 17; Diodorus xiii. 7, 8, 28-32; Polyaenus i. 39. 42. See Syracuse (for the siege operations), commentaries on Thucydides and the Greek histories.


GYLLEMBOURG-EHRENSVÄRD, THOMASINE CHRISTINE, Baroness (1773-1856), Danish author, was born on the 9th of November 1773, at Copenhagen. Her maiden name was Buntzen. Her great beauty early attracted notice, and before she was seventeen she married the famous writer Peter Andreas Heiberg. To him she bore in the following year a son, afterwards illustrious as the poet and critic Johan Ludvig Heiberg. In 1800 her husband was exiled, and she obtained a divorce, marrying in December 1801 the Swedish Baron K. F. Ehrensvärd, himself a political fugitive. Her second husband, who presently adopted the name of Gyllembourg, died in 1815. In 1822 she followed her son to Kiel, where he was appointed professor, and in 1825 she returned with him to Copenhagen. In 1827 she first appeared as an author by publishing her romance of The Polonius Family in her son’s newspaper Flyvende Post. In 1828 the same journal contained The Magic Ring, which was immediately followed by En Hverdags historie (An Everyday Story). The success of this anonymous work was so great that the author adopted until the end of her career the name of “The Author of An Everyday Story.” In 1833-1834 she published three volumes of Old and New Novels. New Stories followed in 1835 and 1836. In 1839 appeared two novels, Montanus the Younger and Ricida; in 1840, One in All; in 1841, Near and Far; in 1843, A Correspondence; in 1844, The Cross Ways; in 1845, Two Generations. From 1849 to 1851 the Baroness Ehrensvärd-Gyllembourg was engaged in bringing out a library edition of her collected works in twelve volumes. On the 2nd of July 1856 she died in her son’s house at Copenhagen. Not until then did the secret of her authorship transpire; for throughout her life she had preserved the closest reticence on the subject even with her nearest friends. The style of Madame Ehrensvärd-Gyllembourg is clear and sparkling; for English readers no closer analogy can be found than between her and Mrs Gaskell, and Cranford might well have been written by the witty Danish authoress.

GYLLEMBOURG-EHRENSVÄRD, THOMASINE CHRISTINE, Baroness (1773-1856), Danish author, was born on November 9, 1773, in Copenhagen. Her maiden name was Buntzen. Her great beauty caught attention early on, and before she turned seventeen, she married the famous writer Peter Andreas Heiberg. She had a son with him the following year, who later became known as the poet and critic Johan Ludvig Heiberg. In 1800, her husband was exiled, and she got a divorce, marrying the Swedish Baron K. F. Ehrensvärd in December 1801, who was also a political fugitive. Her second husband, who soon took the name Gyllembourg, died in 1815. In 1822, she followed her son to Kiel, where he was appointed professor, and in 1825, she returned with him to Copenhagen. In 1827, she made her author debut by publishing her romance The Polonius Family in her son’s newspaper, Flyvende Post. In 1828, the same journal featured The Magic Ring, which was immediately followed by En Hverdags historie (An Everyday Story). The success of this anonymous work was so great that she continued to be known as “The Author of An Everyday Story” for the rest of her career. From 1833 to 1834, she published three volumes of Old and New Novels. New Stories came out in 1835 and 1836. In 1839, she released two novels, Montanus the Younger and Ricida; in 1840, One in All; in 1841, Near and Far; in 1843, A Correspondence; in 1844, The Cross Ways; and in 1845, Two Generations. From 1849 to 1851, Baroness Ehrensvärd-Gyllembourg worked on a library edition of her collected works in twelve volumes. She passed away on July 2, 1856, in her son’s house in Copenhagen. It was only then that the secret of her authorship was revealed; throughout her life, she had kept it quiet even from her closest friends. The style of Madame Ehrensvärd-Gyllembourg is clear and vibrant; for English readers, a close comparison can be made with Mrs. Gaskell, and Cranford could easily have been written by this witty Danish author.

See J. L. Heiberg, Peter Andreas Heiberg og Thomasine Gyllembourg (Copenhagen, 1882), and L. Kornelius-Hybel, Nogle Bemaerkninger om P. A. Heiberg og Fru Gyllembourg (Copenhagen, 1883).

See J. L. Heiberg, Peter Andreas Heiberg and Thomasine Gyllembourg (Copenhagen, 1882), and L. Kornelius-Hybel, Some Remarks on P. A. Heiberg and Mrs. Gyllembourg (Copenhagen, 1883).


GYLLENSTJERNA, JOHAN, Count (1635-1680), Swedish statesman, completed his studies at Upsala and then visited most of the European states and laid the foundations of that deep insight into international politics which afterwards distinguished him. On his return home he met King Charles X. in the Danish islands and was in close attendance upon him till the monarch’s death in 1660. He began his political career at the diet which assembled in the autumn of the same year. An aristocrat by birth and inclination, he was nevertheless a true patriot and demanded the greatest sacrifices from his own order in the national interests. He was therefore one of those who laboured most zealously for the recovery of the crown lands. In the Upper House he was the spokesman of the gentry against the magnates, whose inordinate privileges he would have curtailed or abolished. His adversaries vainly endeavoured to gain him by favour, for as court-marshal and senator he was still more hostile to the dominant patricians who followed the adventurous policy of Magnus de la Gardie. Thus he opposed the French alliance which de la Gardie carried through in 1672, and consistently advocated economy in domestic and neutrality in foreign affairs. On the outbreak of the war in 1675 he was the 752 most loyal and energetic supporter of the young Charles XI., and finally his indispensable counsellor. Indeed, it may be said, that the political principles which he instilled into the youthful monarch were faithfully followed by Charles during the whole of his reign. In 1679 Gyllenstjerna was appointed the Swedish plenipotentiary at the peace congress of Lund. The alliance which he then concluded with Denmark bound the two northern realms together in a common foreign policy, and he sought besides to facilitate their harmonious co-operation by every means in his power. In 1680, after bringing home Charles XI.’s Danish bride from Copenhagen, he was appointed governor-general of Scania (Skåne), but expired a few weeks later.

GYLLENSTJERNA, JOHAN, Count (1635-1680), Swedish statesman, finished his studies at Upsala and then traveled to most of the European countries, which gave him a deep understanding of international politics that later defined him. Upon his return, he met King Charles X in the Danish islands and remained close to the king until the monarch’s death in 1660. He started his political career at the diet that convened in the autumn of that same year. Although he was an aristocrat by birth and inclination, he was a true patriot who demanded significant sacrifices from his own class for the sake of the nation. He was one of the key figures working hard to reclaim the crown lands. In the Upper House, he represented the gentry against the magnates, whose excessive privileges he wanted to limit or eliminate. His opponents unsuccessfully tried to win him over, as he was even more opposed to the influential patricians who supported the ambitious policies of Magnus de la Gardie. He opposed the French alliance that de la Gardie established in 1672, advocating for economic restraint in domestic matters and neutrality in foreign affairs. When war broke out in 1675, he was the most loyal and dedicated supporter of the young Charles XI, ultimately becoming his crucial advisor. It can be said that the political principles he instilled in the young monarch were faithfully followed by Charles throughout his reign. In 1679, Gyllenstjerna was appointed as Sweden's plenipotentiary at the peace congress of Lund. The alliance he negotiated with Denmark united the two northern kingdoms in a common foreign policy, and he worked tirelessly to ensure their cooperation. In 1680, after bringing Charles XI’s Danish bride back from Copenhagen, he was appointed governor-general of Scania (Skåne), but passed away just a few weeks later.

See M. Höjer, Öfversigt af Sveriges yttre politik under åren 1676-1680 (Upsala, 1875).

See M. Höjer, Overview of Sweden's Foreign Policy from 1676 to 1680 (Uppsala, 1875).

(R. N. B.)

GYMKHANA, a display of miscellaneous sports, originally at the military stations of India. The word would seem to be a colloquial remodelling of the Hindustani gend-khana, ball-house or racquet-court, by substituting for gend the first syllable of the English word “gymnastics.” The definition given in Yule’s Glossary is as follows: “A place of public resort at a station, where the needful facilities for athletics and games ... are provided.” The name of the place was afterwards applied to the games themselves, and the word is now used almost exclusively in this sense. According to Yule the first use of it that can be traced was, on the authority of Major John Trotter, at Rurki in the year 1861, when a gymkhana was instituted there. Gymkhana sports were invented to relieve the monotony of Indian station life, and both officers and men from the ranks took part in them. The first meetings consisted of promiscuous horse and pony races at catch weights. To these were soon added a second variety, originally called the pāgŏl (funny races), the one generally known outside India, which consisted of miscellaneous races and competitions of all kinds, some serious and some amusing, on horseback, on foot and on bicycles. Among these may be mentioned the usual military sports; such as tent-pegging, lemon-cutting and obstacle racing; rickshaw racing; tilting at the ring sack, pillion, hurdle, egg-and-spoon, blindfold, threading-the-needle and many other kinds of races depending upon the inventive powers of the committees in charge.

GYMKHANA, a showcase of various sports, originally at military stations in India. The term seems to be a casual adaptation of the Hindustani gend-khana, meaning ball-house or racquet-court, by swapping out gend for the first syllable of the English word “gymnastics.” Yule’s Glossary defines it as: “A place of public gathering at a station, where the necessary facilities for athletics and games ... are provided.” The name was later applied to the games themselves, and now it’s primarily used in that sense. According to Yule, the earliest recorded use was, based on Major John Trotter's account, at Rurki in 1861, when a gymkhana was set up there. Gymkhana sports were created to break the monotony of life in Indian stations, with participation from both officers and enlisted personnel. The initial events included mixed horse and pony races at catch weights. Soon, a second type was added, originally called pāgŏl (funny races), which consists of a variety of races and competitions of all kinds—some serious, some funny—on horseback, on foot, and on bicycles. These included the usual military sports like tent-pegging, lemon-cutting, and obstacle racing; rickshaw racing; and various races like tilting at the ring, sack races, pillion races, hurdle races, egg-and-spoon races, blindfold races, threading-the-needle, and many others based on the creativity of the organizing committees.


GYMNASTICS AND GYMNASIUM, terms signifying respectively a system of physical exercises practised either for recreation or for the purpose of promoting the health and development of the body, and the building where such exercises are carried on. The gymnasium of the Greeks was originally the school where competitors in the public games received their training, and was so named from the circumstance that these competitors exercised naked (γυμνός). The gymnasium was a public institution as distinguished from the palaestra, which was a private school where boys were trained in physical exercises, though the term palaestra is also often used for the part of a gymnasium specially devoted to wrestling and boxing. The athletic contests for which the gymnasium supplied the means of training and practice formed part of the social life of the Greeks from the earliest times. They were held in honour of heroes and gods; sometimes forming part of a periodic festival, sometimes of the funeral rites of a deceased chief. In course of time the Greeks grew more attached to such sports; their free active life, spent to a great extent in the open air, fostered the liking almost into a passion. The victor in any athletic contest, though he gained no money prize, was rewarded with the honour and respect of his fellow citizens; and a victory in the great religious festivals was counted an honour for the whole state. In these circumstances the training of competitors for the greater contests became a matter of public concern; and accordingly special buildings were provided by the state, and their management entrusted to public officials. The regulation of the gymnasium at Athens is attributed by Pausanias (i. 39. 3) to Theseus. Solon made several laws on the subject; but according to Galen it was reduced to a system in the time of Cleisthenes. Ten gymnasiarchs, one from each tribe, were appointed annually. These performed in rotation the duties of their office, which were to maintain and pay the persons who were training for public contests, to conduct the games at the great Athenian festivals, to exercise general supervision over the morals of the youths, and to adorn and keep up the gymnasium. This office was one of the ordinary λειτουργίαι (public services), and great expense was entailed on the holders. Under them were ten sophronistae, whose duty was to watch the conduct of the youths at all times, and especially to be present at all their games. The practical teaching and selecting of the suitable exercises for each youth were in the hands of the paedotribae and gymnastae, the latter of whom also superintended the effect on the constitution of the pupils, and prescribed for them when they were unwell. The aleiptae oiled and rubbed dust on the bodies of the youths, acted as surgeons, and administered the drugs prescribed. According to Galen there was also a teacher of the various games of ball. The gymnasia built to suit these various purposes were large buildings, which contained not merely places for each kind of exercise, but also a stadium, baths, covered porticos for practice in bad weather, and outer porticos where the philosophers and men of letters read public lectures and held disputations.

GYM AND GYMNASIUM, terms referring to a system of physical exercises done for fun or to improve health and fitness, and the space where these exercises take place. The Greek gymnasium was originally a school where athletes training for public competitions received their education, named for the fact that these competitors trained naked (naked). The gymnasium was a public institution, unlike the palaestra, which was a private school for training boys in physical activities, although "palaestra" is also used to refer to the section of a gymnasium dedicated to wrestling and boxing. The athletic events that the gymnasium prepared athletes for were integral to Greek social life from early on. They honored heroes and gods and were sometimes part of festivals or funeral ceremonies for notable leaders. Over time, the Greeks became increasingly passionate about these sports; their active, outdoor lifestyle nurtured this enthusiasm. Winning any athletic contest, even without a monetary prize, brought honor and respect from fellow citizens, and victories in major religious festivals were considered a triumph for the whole state. Consequently, training competitors for larger events became a public priority, leading the state to provide special facilities managed by public officials. According to Pausanias (i. 39. 3), the regulation of the Athenian gymnasium dates back to Theseus. Solon enacted several laws regarding it, but Galen notes that it was fully systematized during Cleisthenes' time. Each year, ten gymnasiarchs, one from each tribe, were appointed to take on responsibilities that included funding and supporting people preparing for public contests, organizing events at major Athenian festivals, overseeing the morals of the youths, and maintaining and beautifying the gymnasium. This role was one of the regular functions (public services), which imposed considerable costs on those who held the position. Under them were ten sophronistae, whose job was to monitor the conduct of the youths at all times, especially during competitions. The practical training and selection of appropriate exercises for each youth were managed by the paedotribae and gymnastae, the latter also overseeing the students' health and offering remedies when they felt unwell. The aleiptae oiled and dusted the bodies of the youths, acted as surgeons, and provided prescribed medications. According to Galen, there was also an instructor for various ball games. The gymnasia built for these multiple purposes were large facilities, equipped with spaces for different types of exercise, a stadium, baths, covered areas for practice in inclement weather, and outer porticos where philosophers and scholars gave public lectures and held discussions.

The gymnasium of the Greeks did not long remain an institution exclusively devoted to athletic exercises. It soon began to be applied to other uses even more important. The development arose naturally through the recognition by the Greeks of the important place in education occupied by physical culture, and of the relation between exercise and health. The gymnasium accordingly became connected with education on the one hand and with medicine on the other. Due training of the body and maintenance of the health and strength of children were the chief part of earlier Greek education. Except the time devoted to letters and music, the education of boys was conducted in the gymnasia, where provision was made, as already mentioned, for their moral as well as their physical training. As they grew older, conversation and social intercourse took the place of the more systematic discipline. Philosophers and sophists assembled to talk and to lecture in the gymnasia, which thus became places of general resort for the purpose of all less systematic intellectual pursuits, as well as for physical exercises. In Athens there were three great public gymnasia—Academy, Lyceum and Cynosarges—each of which was consecrated to a special deity with whose statue it was adorned; and each was rendered famous by association with a celebrated school of philosophy. Plato’s teaching in the Academy has given immortality to that gymnasium; Aristotle conferred lustre on the Lyceum; and the Cynosarges was the resort of the Cynics. Plato when treating of education devotes much consideration to gymnastics (see especially Rep. iii. and various parts of Laws); and according to Plato it was the sophist Prodicus who first pointed out the connexion between gymnastics and health. Having found such exercises beneficial to his own weak health, he formulated a method which was adopted generally, and which was improved by Hippocrates. Galen lays the greatest stress on the proper use of gymnastics, and throughout ancient medical writers we find that special exercises are prescribed as the cure for special diseases.

The gym of the ancient Greeks quickly expanded beyond just a place for sports. It naturally evolved to serve more significant purposes as the Greeks recognized the essential role of physical education in overall learning and the link between exercise and health. The gym became tied to education on one side and medicine on the other. Proper body training and maintaining the health and strength of children were central to early Greek education. Aside from time spent on academics and music, boys' education mainly took place in gyms, which provided facilities for both their moral and physical development. As they got older, discussions and social interactions replaced more structured training. Philosophers and sophists gathered to converse and lecture in these gyms, making them popular spots for both casual intellectual activities and physical exercises. In Athens, there were three major public gyms—Academy, Lyceum, and Cynosarges—each dedicated to a specific deity, with its statue prominently displayed; each became famous for its association with a renowned school of philosophy. Plato's teachings at the Academy immortalized that gym; Aristotle brought fame to the Lyceum; and Cynosarges was known as a haven for the Cynics. When discussing education, Plato emphasizes gymnastics (see especially Rep. iii. and various parts of Laws), and he credits the sophist Prodicus with highlighting the connection between gymnastics and health. After discovering the benefits of these exercises for his own poor health, Prodicus developed a method that gained widespread acceptance and was later refined by Hippocrates. Galen emphasized the correct use of gymnastics, and throughout ancient medical texts, specific exercises were recommended as remedies for specific ailments.

The Greek institution of the gymnasium never became popular with the Romans, who regarded the training of boys in gymnastics with contempt as conducive to idleness and immorality, and of little use from a military point of view; though at Sparta gymnastic training had been chiefly valued as encouraging warlike tastes and promoting the bodily strength needed for the use of weapons and the endurance of hardship. Among the Romans of the republic, the games in the Campus Martius, the duties of camp life, and the enforced marches and other hardships of actual warfare, served to take the place of the gymnastic exercises required by the Greeks. The first public gymnasium at Rome was built by Nero and another by Commodus. In the middle ages, though jousts and feats of horsemanship and field sports of various kinds were popular, the more systematic training of the body which the Greeks had associated with the gymnasium fell into neglect; while the therapeutic value of special exercises as understood by Hippocrates and Galen appears to have been lost sight of. Rousseau, in his Émile, was the first in modern times to call attention to the injurious consequences of such 753 indifference, and he insisted on the importance of physical culture as an essential part of education. It was probably due in some measure to his influence that F. L. Jahn and his followers in Germany, encouraged by the Prussian minister Stein, established the Turnplätze, or gymnastic schools, which played an important part during the War of Liberation, and in the political agitations which followed the establishment of the German confederation by the Congress of Vienna. The educational reformers Pestalozzi and Froebel emphasized the need for systematic physical training in any complete scheme of education.

The Greek system of gymnasiums never caught on with the Romans, who looked down on training boys in gymnastics, seeing it as promoting laziness and immorality, and not very useful for military purposes. In Sparta, however, gymnastic training was mostly valued for fostering a warrior spirit and building the physical strength needed for combat and enduring hardships. For Romans during the republic, activities in the Campus Martius, camp duties, forced marches, and the real-life challenges of warfare replaced the gymnastics that the Greeks required. The first public gymnasium in Rome was established by Nero, followed by another built by Commodus. During the Middle Ages, even though jousts, horseback riding, and various field sports were popular, the more organized body training the Greeks linked to the gymnasium fell out of favor, and the therapeutic benefits of specific exercises as understood by Hippocrates and Galen seemed to be forgotten. Rousseau, in his Émile, was the first in modern times to highlight the harmful effects of such disregard, insisting that physical culture is a vital part of education. His influence likely contributed to the establishment of Turnplätze, or gymnastic schools, by F. L. Jahn and his followers in Germany, supported by the Prussian minister Stein, which played a significant role during the War of Liberation and in the political movements that followed the creation of the German confederation by the Congress of Vienna. Educational reformers Pestalozzi and Froebel stressed the necessity of systematic physical training as part of any comprehensive education plan.

The later development of the classical gymnasium (when it had become the school of Intellectual culture rather than of exclusively physical exercise), and not the original idea, has been perpetuated in the modern use of the word in Germany, where the name “gymnasium” is given to the highest grade of secondary school, and the association of the word with athleticism has been entirely abandoned. On the other hand, in England, France and elsewhere in Europe, as well as in America, the history of the word has been precisely the reverse; the connexion of the gymnasium with philosophy and mental culture has been dropped, and it indicates a building exclusively intended for the practice of physical exercises. But whereas the Greeks received training in the gymnasium for contests which are now designated as athletic sports (q.v.), gymnastics in the modern sense is a term restricted to such exercises as are usually practised indoors, with or without the aid of mechanical appliances, as distinguished from sports or games practised in the open air.

The later evolution of the classical gymnasium (when it became more about intellectual culture than just physical exercise) is what has continued in the modern use of the term in Germany, where “gymnasium” refers to the highest level of secondary school, completely losing its connection to athletics. In contrast, in England, France, and other parts of Europe, as well as in America, the history of the word has been quite the opposite; the link between the gymnasium and philosophy or mental training has been removed, and it now refers specifically to a building meant solely for physical exercises. However, while the Greeks trained in the gymnasium for what we now call athletic sports (q.v.), modern gymnastics is a term that applies only to exercises typically performed indoors, with or without equipment, unlike the outdoor sports or games.

It was not until near the end of the 19th century that gymnastics were recognized in England as anything more than a recreation; their value as a specifically therapeutic agent, or as an article in the curriculum of elementary schools, was not realized. More recently, however, educationists have urged with increasing insistence the need for systematic physical training, and their views received greater attention when evidence of deterioration in the physique of the people began to accumulate. During the first decade of the 20th century more than one commission reported to parliament in England in favour of more systematic and general physical training being encouraged or even made compulsory by public authority. Voluntary associations were formed for encouraging such training and providing facilities for it. Gymnastics had already for several years been an essential part of the training of army recruits with exceedingly beneficial results, and gymnasia had been established at Aldershot and other military centres. Physical exercises, although not compulsory, obtained a permanent place in the code for elementary schools in Great Britain; and much care has been taken to provide a syllabus of exercises adapted for the improvement of the physique of the children. These exercises are partly gymnastic and partly of the nature of drill; they do not in most cases require the use of appliances, and are on that account known as “free movements,” which numbers of children go through together, accompanied whenever possible by music. On the other hand at the larger public schools and universities there are elaborate gymnasia equipped with a great variety of apparatus, the skilful use of which demands assiduous practice; and this is encouraged by annual contests between teams of gymnasts representing rival institutions.

It wasn't until the late 19th century that gymnastics were acknowledged in England as more than just a pastime; their benefits as a therapeutic tool or as part of the elementary school curriculum were not recognized. More recently, educators have increasingly emphasized the need for structured physical training, especially when evidence showed a decline in the physical health of the population. In the first decade of the 20th century, several commissions reported to the English parliament advocating for more organized and widespread physical training, suggesting it be encouraged or even mandated by public authorities. Voluntary groups were formed to promote this training and create facilities for it. Gymnastics had already been a key part of army recruit training for several years, yielding very positive results, and gymnasiums had been established at Aldershot and other military sites. While physical exercises were not mandatory, they secured a lasting position in the curriculum for elementary schools in Great Britain, with great care taken to develop a syllabus of exercises aimed at improving children's physical health. These exercises included both gymnastics and drills; they generally didn't require any equipment, which is why they are called “free movements,” and many children perform them together, often to music when possible. Meanwhile, larger public schools and universities have sophisticated gymnasiums filled with a wide range of equipment, whose effective use requires dedicated practice; this is further promoted by annual competitions among teams of gymnasts from competing institutions.

The appliances vary to some extent in different gymnasia, some of the more complicated requiring a greater amount of space and involving a larger cost than is often practicable. But where these considerations are negligible, substantial uniformity is to be found in the equipment Gymnastic apparatus. of gymnasia not designed for specifically medical purposes. The simplest, and in many respects the most generally useful, of all gymnastic apparatus is the dumb-bell. It was in use in England as early as the time of Elizabeth, and it has the advantage that it admits of being exactly proportioned to the individual strength of each learner, and can be adjusted in weight as his strength increases. The exercises that may be performed with the dumb-bell, combined with a few simple drill-like movements, give employment to all parts of the body and to both sides equally. Dumb-bell exercises, therefore, when arranged judiciously and with knowledge, are admirably suited for developing the physique, and are extensively employed in schools both for boys and girls. The bar-bell is merely a two-handed dumb-bell, and its use is similar in principle. The Indian club is also in use in most gymnasia; but the risk of overstraining the body by its unskilful handling makes it less generally popular than the dumb-bell. All these appliances may be, and often are, used either in ordinary schoolrooms or elsewhere outside the gymnasium. The usual fixed sorts of apparatus, the presence of which (or of some of them) in a building may be said to constitute it a gymnasium, are the following: a leaping-rope; a leaping-pole; a vaulting-horse; a horizontal bar, so mounted between two upright posts that its height from the ground may be adjusted as desired; parallel bars, used for exercises to develop the muscles of the trunk and arms; the trapeze consisting of a horizontal bar suspended by ropes at a height of 4 to 5 ft. from the ground; the bridge ladder; the plank; the inclined plane; the mast; swinging rings; the prepared wall; the horizontal beam.

The equipment varies somewhat in different gyms, with some of the more complex machines needing more space and costing more than is usually practical. However, where those factors don't matter, there is considerable consistency in the equipment of gyms not specifically meant for medical purposes. The simplest and often the most useful piece of gym equipment is the dumbbell. It was used in England as far back as the time of Elizabeth, and it has the benefit of being precisely suited to the individual strength of each user, with adjustable weights as their strength grows. The exercises that can be done with the dumbbell, along with a few basic drill-like movements, work all parts of the body and both sides equally. Therefore, dumbbell exercises, when organized thoughtfully and knowledgeably, are great for building muscle and are widely used in schools for both boys and girls. The barbell is just a two-handed dumbbell, and its use is similar in concept. The Indian club is also found in most gyms, but the risk of injury from poor handling makes it less popular than the dumbbell. All these tools can be and often are used in regular classrooms or outside the gymnasium. The typical fixed types of equipment, which can be said to define a gym, include the following: a jump rope; a vaulting pole; a vaulting horse; a horizontal bar mounted between two vertical posts so its height can be adjusted; parallel bars for exercises that strengthen the trunk and arm muscles; a trapeze made of a horizontal bar suspended by ropes 4 to 5 feet above the ground; a bridge ladder; a plank; an inclined plane; a mast; swinging rings; a climbing wall; and a horizontal beam.

Before the end of the 19th century the therapeutic value of gymnastics was fully realized by the medical profession; and a number of medical or surgical gymnasia came into existence, provided with specially devised apparatus for the treatment of different physical defects or weaknesses. The exercises practised in them are arranged upon scientific principles based on anatomical and physiological knowledge; and these principles have spread thence to influence largely the practice of gymnastics in schools and in the army. A French medical writer enumerates seven distinct groups of maladies, each including a number of different complaints, for which gymnastic exercises are a recognized form of treatment; and there are many malformations of the human body, formerly believed to be incurable, which are capable of being greatly remedied if not entirely corrected by regular gymnastic exercises practised under medical direction.

Before the end of the 19th century, the medical profession fully recognized the therapeutic value of gymnastics. As a result, several medical or surgical gyms were established, equipped with specially designed apparatus for treating various physical defects or weaknesses. The exercises performed in these facilities are based on scientific principles rooted in anatomical and physiological knowledge, and these principles have significantly influenced gymnastics practices in schools and the military. A French medical writer lists seven distinct categories of ailments, each containing several different conditions, for which gymnastic exercises are a recognized treatment method. Additionally, there are many physical deformities that were once thought to be untreatable but can be greatly improved, if not completely corrected, through regular gymnastic exercises conducted under medical supervision.

The value of gymnastics both for curing defects, and still more for promoting health and the development of normal physique, is recognized even more clearly on the continent of Europe than in Great Britain. In Germany the government not only controls the practice of gymnastics but makes it compulsory for every child and adult to undergo a prescribed amount of such physical training. In France also, physical training by gymnastics is under state control; in Sweden, Denmark, Switzerland, Italy, Russia, systems more or less distinct enjoy a wide popularity; and in Finland gymnastics are practised on lines that exhibit national peculiarities. The Finns introduce an exceptional degree of variety into their exercises as well as into the appliances devised to assist them; women are scarcely less expert than men in the performance of them; and the enthusiasm with which the system is supported produces the most beneficial results in the physique of the people. International gymnastic contests have become a feature of the revived Olympic Games (see Athletic Sports), and in those held at Athens in 1906 a team of Danish ladies took part in the competition and proved by their skilful performance that gymnastics may be practised with as much success by women as by men.

The importance of gymnastics for correcting physical issues and, even more so, for enhancing health and developing a healthy body is more clearly recognized on the European continent than in Great Britain. In Germany, the government not only regulates gymnastics but also mandates that every child and adult participate in a specified amount of physical training. In France, physical training through gymnastics is also state-regulated; in Sweden, Denmark, Switzerland, Italy, and Russia, various systems enjoy widespread popularity; and in Finland, gymnastics is practiced in ways that reflect national characteristics. The Finns incorporate an exceptional variety into their exercises, as well as into the tools created to support them; women are nearly as skilled as men in performing them; and the enthusiasm backing the system leads to very positive outcomes for the people's physique. International gymnastics competitions have become a highlight of the revived Olympic Games (see Athletic Sports), and at the Games held in Athens in 1906, a team of Danish women participated and demonstrated through their impressive performance that gymnastics can be just as successfully practiced by women as by men.

The chief work on the ancient gymnastics is Krause, Gymnastik und Agonistik der Hellenen (1841); of more recent works mention may be made of Jäger, Gymnastik der Hellenen (1881); L. Grasberger, Erziehung und Unterricht im klassischen Altertum (1881); J. P. Mahaffy, Old Greek Education (1883); A. S. Wilkins, National Education in Greece (1873); E. Paz, Histoire de la gymnastique (1886); Wickenhagen, Antike und moderne Gymnastik (1891); Becker-Göll, Charicles ii.; Brugsma, Gymnasiorum apud Graecos descriptio (1855); Petersen, Das Gymnasium der Griechen (1858). See also N. Laisné, Gymnastique pratique (Paris, 1879); Collineau, La Gymnastique (Paris, 1884); L’Hygiène à l’école (Paris, 1889); P. de Coubertin, La Gymnastique utilitaire (Paris, 1905); H. Nissen, Rational Home Gymnastics (Boston, 1903).

The main work on ancient gymnastics is Krause, Gymnastik und Agonistik der Hellenen (1841); for more recent works, we can mention Jäger, Gymnastik der Hellenen (1881); L. Grasberger, Erziehung und Unterricht im klassischen Altertum (1881); J. P. Mahaffy, Old Greek Education (1883); A. S. Wilkins, National Education in Greece (1873); E. Paz, Histoire de la gymnastique (1886); Wickenhagen, Antike und moderne Gymnastik (1891); Becker-Göll, Charicles ii.; Brugsma, Gymnasiorum apud Graecos descriptio (1855); Petersen, Das Gymnasium der Griechen (1858). See also N. Laisné, Gymnastique pratique (Paris, 1879); Collineau, La Gymnastique (Paris, 1884); L’Hygiène à l’école (Paris, 1889); P. de Coubertin, La Gymnastique utilitaire (Paris, 1905); H. Nissen, Rational Home Gymnastics (Boston, 1903).

(R. J. M.)

GYMNOSOPHISTS (Lat. gymnosophistae, from Gr. γυμνός, σοφιστής, “naked philosophers”), the name given by the Greeks to certain ancient Hindu philosophers who pursued asceticism to the point of regarding food and clothing as detrimental to purity of thought. From the fact that they often 754 lived as hermits in forests, the Greeks also called them Hylobioi (cf. the Vāna-prasthās in Sanskrit writings). Diogenes Laërtius (ix. 61 and 63) refers to them, and asserts that Pyrrho of Elis, the founder of pure scepticism, came under their influence, and on his return to Elis imitated their habits of life, to what extent does not appear. Strabo (xv. 711, 714) divides them into Brahmans and Sarmans (or Shamans). See Jains.

GYMNOSOPHISTS (Lat. gymnosophistae, from Gr. naked, sophist, “naked philosophers”), is the term the Greeks used to describe certain ancient Hindu philosophers who took asceticism to such an extreme that they viewed food and clothing as obstacles to pure thought. Because they often lived as hermits in forests, the Greeks also referred to them as Hylobioi (compare the Vāna-prasthās in Sanskrit texts). Diogenes Laërtius (ix. 61 and 63) mentions them and claims that Pyrrho of Elis, the founder of pure skepticism, was influenced by them and adopted their lifestyle upon returning to Elis, although the specifics of this are unclear. Strabo (xv. 711, 714) categorizes them into Brahmans and Sarmans (or Shamans). See Jains.


GYMNOSPERMS, in Botany. The Gymnosperms, with the Angiosperms, constitute the existing groups of seed-bearing plants or Phanerogams: the importance of the seed as a distinguishing feature in the plant kingdom may be emphasized by the use of the designation Spermophyta for these two groups, in contrast to the Pteridophyta and Bryophyta in which true seeds are unknown. Recent discoveries have, however, established the fact that there existed in the Palaeozoic era fern-like plants which produced true seeds of a highly specialized type; this group, for which Oliver and Scott proposed the term Pteridospermae in 1904, must also be included in the Spermophyta. Another instance of the production of seeds in an extinct plant which further reduces the importance of this character as a distinguishing feature is afforded by the Palaeozoic genus Lepidocarpon described by Scott in 1901; this lycopodiaceous type possessed an integumented megaspore, to which the designation seed may be legitimately applied (see Palaeobotany: Palaeozoic).

GYMNOSPERMS, in Botany. Gymnosperms, along with Angiosperms, make up the current groups of seed-bearing plants or Phanerogams. The significance of the seed as a distinguishing feature in the plant kingdom can be highlighted by calling these two groups Spermophyta, in contrast to Pteridophyta and Bryophyta, which do not have true seeds. Recent findings have confirmed that during the Palaeozoic era, there were fern-like plants that produced true seeds in a highly specialized form; this group, which Oliver and Scott named Pteridospermae in 1904, should also be included in the Spermophyta. Another example of seed production in an extinct plant that further diminishes the importance of this characteristic as a distinguishing feature is the Palaeozoic genus Lepidocarpon, described by Scott in 1901; this lycopodiaceous type had an integumented megaspore, to which the term seed can rightfully apply (see Palaeobotany: Palaeozoic).

As the name Gymnosperm (Gr. γυμνός, naked, σπέρμα, seed) implies, one characteristic of this group is the absence of an ovary or closed chamber containing the ovules. It was the English botanist Robert Brown who first recognized this important distinguishing feature in conifers and cycads in 1825; he established the gymnospermy of these seed-bearing classes as distinct from the angiospermy of the monocotyledons and dicotyledons. As Sachs says in his history of botany, “no more important discovery was ever made in the domain of comparative morphology and systematic botany.” As Coulter and Chamberlain express it, “the habitats of the Gymnosperms to-day indicate that they either are not at home in the more genial conditions affected by Angiosperms, or have not been able to maintain themselves in competition with this group of plants.”

As the name Gymnosperm (Gr. naked, naked, sperm, seed) suggests, one key feature of this group is the lack of an ovary or closed chamber that holds the ovules. The English botanist Robert Brown was the first to identify this significant difference in conifers and cycads in 1825; he separated the gymnosperms from the angiosperms of monocots and dicots. As Sachs mentions in his history of botany, “no more important discovery was ever made in the domain of comparative morphology and systematic botany.” As Coulter and Chamberlain put it, “the habitats of the Gymnosperms today indicate that they either are not suited to the more favorable conditions influenced by Angiosperms, or have not been able to compete with this group of plants.”

These naked-seeded plants are of special interest on account of their great antiquity, which far exceeds that of the Angiosperms, and as comprising different types which carry us back to the Palaeozoic era and to the forests of the coal period. The best known and by far the largest division of the Gymnosperms is that of the cone-bearing trees (pines, firs, cedars, larches, &c.), which play a prominent part in the vegetation of the present day, especially in the higher latitudes of the northern hemisphere; certain members of this class are of considerable antiquity, but the conifers as a whole are still vigorous and show but little sign of decadence. The division known as the Cycadophyta is represented by a few living genera of limited geographical range and by a large number of extinct types which in the Mesozoic era (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic) played a conspicuous part in the vegetation of the world. Among existing Cycadophyta we find surviving types which, in their present isolation, their close resemblance to fossil forms, and in certain morphological features, constitute links with the past that not only connect the present with former periods in the earth’s history, but serve as sign-posts pointing the way back along one of the many lines which evolution has followed.

These naked-seeded plants are particularly fascinating due to their ancient history, which far predates that of Angiosperms. They include various types that take us back to the Palaeozoic era and the coal forest period. The most well-known and largest group of Gymnosperms is the cone-bearing trees (like pines, firs, cedars, larches, etc.), which play a significant role in today’s vegetation, especially in the higher latitudes of the northern hemisphere. Some members of this group are quite ancient, but overall, conifers remain robust and show little sign of decline. The division known as Cycadophyta is represented by a few living genera with a limited geographical range and many extinct types that were prominent during the Mesozoic era (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic) in the world's vegetation. Among the existing Cycadophyta, we find surviving types that, in their current isolation, their strong resemblance to fossil forms, and certain morphological features, act as links to the past. They not only connect the present with earlier times in the earth’s history but also serve as signposts pointing back along one of the many paths that evolution has taken.

It is needless to discuss at length the origin of the Gymnosperms. The two views which find most favour in regard to the Coniferales and Cycadophyta are: (1) that both have been derived from remote filicinean ancestors; (2) that the cycads are the descendants of a fern-like stock, while conifers have been evolved from lycopodiaceous ancestors. The line of descent of recent cycads is comparatively clear in so far as they have undoubted affinity with Palaeozoic plants which combined cycadean and filicinean features; but opinion is much more divided as to the nature of the phylum from which the conifers are derived. The Cordaitales (see Palaeobotany: Palaeozoic) are represented by extinct forms only, which occupied a prominent position in the Palaeozoic period; these plants exhibit certain features in common with the living Araucarias, and others which invite a comparison with the maidenhair tree (Ginkgo biloba), the solitary survivor of another class of Gymnosperms, the Ginkgoales (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic). The Gnetales are a class apart, including three living genera, of which we know next to nothing as regards their past history or line of descent. Although there are several morphological features in the three genera of Gnetales which might seem to bring them into line with the Angiosperms, it is usual to regard these resemblances as parallel developments along distinct lines rather than to interpret them as evidence of direct relationship.

It’s unnecessary to discuss the origin of Gymnosperms in detail. The two main theories about Coniferales and Cycadophyta are: (1) that both came from ancient fern-like ancestors; (2) that cycads descend from a fern-like lineage, while conifers evolved from lycopodiaceous ancestors. The lineage of recent cycads is relatively clear as they show definite connections to Paleozoic plants that had both cycadean and fern-like traits; however, opinions are much more divided regarding the phylum from which conifers originated. The Cordaitales (see Palaeobotany: Palaeozoic) are known only from extinct forms, which were prominent during the Paleozoic era; these plants share certain characteristics with living Araucarias and others that can be compared to the maidenhair tree (Ginkgo biloba), the lone survivor of another Gymnosperm class, the Ginkgoales (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic). The Gnetales stand out as a separate class, including three living genera, about which we know very little regarding their history or lineage. While there are several morphological traits in the three Gnetales genera that might suggest a connection to Angiosperms, these similarities are typically seen as parallel developments along separate paths rather than evidence of a direct relationship.

Gymnospermae.—Trees or shrubs; leaves vary considerably in size and form. Flowers unisexual, except in a few cases (Gnetales) without a perianth. Monoecious or dioecious. Ovules naked, rarely without carpellary leaves, usually borne on carpophylls, which assume various forms. The single megaspore enclosed in the nucellus is filled with tissue (prothallus) before fertilization, and contains two or more archegonia, consisting usually of a large egg-cell and a small neck, rarely of an egg-cell only and no neck (Gnetum and Welwitschia). Microspore spherical or oval, with or without a bladder-like extension of the exine, containing a prothallus of two or more cells, one of which produces two non-motile or motile male cells. Cotyledons two or several. Secondary xylem and phloem produced by a single cambium, or by successive cambial zones; no true vessels (except in the Gnetales) in the wood, and no companion-cells in the phloem.

Gymnospermae.—Trees or shrubs; leaves vary greatly in size and shape. Flowers are unisexual, except in a few cases (Gnetales) where there is no perianth. They can be monoecious or dioecious. Ovules are naked, occasionally without carpellary leaves, usually located on carpophylls that come in different forms. The single megaspore, enclosed in the nucellus, is filled with tissue (prothallus) before fertilization and contains two or more archegonia, typically made up of a large egg cell and a small neck, though sometimes just an egg cell without a neck (Gnetum and Welwitschia). The microspore is spherical or oval, with or without a bladder-like extension of the exine, containing a prothallus made up of two or more cells, one of which produces two non-motile or motile male cells. There are two or several cotyledons. Secondary xylem and phloem are produced by a single cambium or by successive cambial zones; there are no true vessels (except in the Gnetales) in the wood, and no companion cells in the phloem.

I. Pteridospermae (see Palaeobotany, Palaeozoic).
II. Cycadophyta.
     A. Cycadales (recent and extinct).
     B. Bennettitales (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic).
III. Cordaitales (see Palaeobotany: Palaeozoic).
IV. Ginkgoales (recent and extinct).
V. Coniferales.
     A. Taxaceae.
     B. Pinaceae.

There is no doubt that the result of recent research and of work now in progress will be to modify considerably the grouping of the conifers. The family Araucarieae, represented by Araucaria and Agathis, should perhaps be separated as a special class and a rearrangement of other genera more in accord with a natural system of classification will soon be possible; but for the present its twofold subdivision may be retained.

There’s no doubt that the findings from recent research and ongoing work will significantly change how we classify conifers. The family Araucarieae, which includes Araucaria and Agathis, might need to be classified as a separate group. A reorganization of other genera to fit a more natural classification system will likely be possible soon; however, for now, we can keep its current two-part division.

VI. Gnetales.
     A. Ephedroideae.
     B. Gnetoideae.
     C. Welwitschioideae (Tumboideae).

Cycadophyta.—A. Cycadales.—Stems tuberous or columnar, not infrequently branched, rarely epiphytic (Peruvian species of Zamia); fronds pinnate, bi-pinnate in the Australian genus Bowenia. Dioecious; flowers in the form of cones, except the female flowers of Cycas, which consist of a rosette of leaf-like carpels at the apex of the stem. Seeds albuminous, with one integument; the single embryo, usually bearing two partially fused cotyledons, is attached to a long tangled suspensor. Stems and roots increase in diameter by secondary thickening, the secondary wood being produced by one cambium or developed from successive cambium-rings.

Cycads.—A. Cycadales.—Stems are tuberous or columnar, often branched, and rarely grow as epiphytes (like the Peruvian species of Zamia); fronds are pinnate, and bi-pinnate in the Australian genus Bowenia. They are dioecious; flowers appear as cones, except for the female flowers of Cycas, which form a rosette of leaf-like carpels at the top of the stem. Seeds have albumen, with one integument; the single embryo, usually with two partially fused cotyledons, is connected to a long, tangled suspensor. Stems and roots grow in diameter through secondary thickening, with secondary wood produced by a single cambium or developed from successive cambium rings.

Fig. 1.—Stem of Cycas. F, foliage-leaf bases; S, scale-leaf bases.
Fig. 2.Cycas siamensis.

The cycads constitute a homogeneous group of a few living members confined to tropical and sub-tropical regions. As a fairly typical and well-known example of the Cycadaceae, a species of the genus Cycas (e.g. C. circinalis, C. revoluta, &c.) is briefly described. The stout columnar stem may reach a height of 20 metres, and a diameter of half a metre; it remains either unbranched or divides near the summit into several short and thick branches, each branch terminating in a crown of long pinnate leaves. The surface of the stem is covered with rhomboidal areas, which represent the persistent bases of foliage- and scale-leaves. In some species of Cycas there is a well-defined alternation of transverse zones on the stem, consisting of larger areas representing foliage-leaf bases, and similar but smaller areas formed by the bases of scale-leaves (F and S, fig. 1). The scale-leaves clothing the terminal bud are linear-lanceolate in form, and of a brown or yellow colour; they are pushed aside as the stem-axis elongates and becomes shrivelled, finally falling off, leaving projecting bases which are eventually cut off at a still lower level. Similarly, the dead fronds fall off, leaving a ragged petiole, which is afterwards separated from the stem by an absciss-layer a short distance above the base. In some species of Cycas the leaf-bases do not persist as a permanent covering to the stem, but the surface 755 is covered with a wrinkled bark, as in Cycas siamensis, which has a stem of unusual form (fig. 2). Small tuberous shoots, comparable on a large scale with the bulbils of Lycopodium Selago, are occasionally produced in the axils of some of the persistent leaf-bases; these are characteristic of sickly plants, and serve as a means of vegetative reproduction. In the genus Cycas the female flower is peculiar among cycads in consisting of a terminal crown of separate leaf-like carpels several inches in length; the apical portion of each carpellary leaf may be broadly triangular in form, and deeply dissected on the margins into narrow woolly appendages like rudimentary pinnae. From the lower part of a carpel are produced several laterally placed ovules, which become bright red or orange on ripening; the bright fleshy seeds, which in some species are as large as a goose’s egg, and the tawny spreading carpels produce a pleasing combination of colour in the midst of the long dark-green fronds, which curve gracefully upwards and outwards from the summit of the columnar stem. In Cycas the stem apex, after producing a cluster of carpellary leaves, continues to elongate and produces more bud-scales, which are afterwards pushed aside as a fresh crown of fronds is developed. The young leaves of Cycas consist of a straight rachis bearing numerous linear pinnae, traversed by a single midrib; the pinnae are circinately coiled like the leaf of a fern (fig. 3). The male flower of Cycas conforms to the type of structure characteristic of the cycads, and consists of a long cone of numerous sporophylls bearing many oval pollen-sacs on their lower faces. The type described serves as a convenient representative of its class. There are eight other living genera, which may be classified as follows:—

The cycads are a uniform group of a few living members found in tropical and subtropical regions. A typical and well-known example from the Cycadaceae family is a species from the genus Cycas (e.g., C. circinalis, C. revoluta, etc.). The thick, column-shaped stem can grow up to 20 meters tall and half a meter wide; it either stays unbranched or splits near the top into several short, thick branches, each topped with a crown of long, feathery leaves. The stem's surface is covered with diamond-shaped areas that are the leftover bases of foliage and scale leaves. In some species of Cycas, there’s a clear pattern of horizontal bands on the stem, consisting of larger sections that represent foliage-leaf bases and smaller sections made up of scale-leaf bases (F and S, fig. 1). The scale leaves surrounding the terminal bud are long and lance-shaped, and brown or yellow in color; they get pushed aside as the stem grows longer and shrivels, eventually falling off and leaving behind protruding bases that are eventually cut off at a lower point. Similarly, the dead fronds drop off, leaving a ragged petiole, which is later separated from the stem by an abscission layer just above the base. In some Cycas species, the leaf bases don’t remain as a permanent covering on the stem but are instead replaced by a wrinkled bark, as seen in Cycas siamensis, which has a uniquely shaped stem (fig. 2). Small tuber-like shoots, comparable to the bulbils of Lycopodium Selago, can sometimes form in the axils of some leaf bases; these are typical of unhealthy plants and help with vegetative reproduction. In the genus Cycas, the female flower is unique among cycads as it features a terminal cluster of separate leaf-like carpels several inches long; the top part of each carpellary leaf may be broad and triangular and deeply dissected along the edges into narrow, fuzzy extensions resembling small pinnae. Several ovules develop along the side of each carpel, turning bright red or orange when ripe; the bright, fleshy seeds, which in some species can be as big as a goose egg, together with the tawny spreading carpels, create a beautiful contrast against the long dark-green fronds that gracefully curve upwards and outwards from the top of the columnar stem. In Cycas, after the apex of the stem produces a cluster of carpellary leaves, it continues to grow taller and forms more bud scales, which are later pushed aside as a new crown of fronds develops. The young leaves of Cycas consist of a straight central stalk that holds many linear pinnae with a single midrib; the pinnae are coiled like fern leaves (fig. 3). The male flower of Cycas follows the typical structure of cycads, consisting of a long cone filled with numerous sporophylls that have many oval pollen sacs on their lower sides. The described type serves as a convenient example of its class. There are eight other living genera that can be classified as follows:—

Fig. 3Cycas. Young Frond.

Classification.—A. Cycadeae.—Characterized by (a) the alternation of scale- and foliage-leaves (fig. 1) on the branched or unbranched stem; (b) the growth of the main stem through the female flower; (c) the presence of a prominent single vein in the linear pinnae; (d) the structure of the female flower, which is peculiar in not having the form of a cone, but consists of numerous independent carpels, each of which bears two or more lateral ovules. Represented by a single genus, Cycas. (Tropical Asia, Australia, &c.).

Classification.—A. Cycadeae.—Characterized by (a) the alternation of scale and foliage leaves (fig. 1) on the branched or unbranched stem; (b) the growth of the main stem through the female flower; (c) the presence of a prominent single vein in the linear pinnae; (d) the structure of the female flower, which is unique in not having the shape of a cone, but consists of numerous independent carpels, each of which holds two or more lateral ovules. Represented by a single genus, Cycas. (Tropical Asia, Australia, etc.).

B. Zamieae.—The stem does not grow through the female flower; both male and female flowers are in the form of cones. (a) Stangerieae.—Characterized by the fern-like venation of the pinnae, which have a prominent midrib, giving off at a wide angle simple or forked and occasionally anastomosing lateral veins. A single genus, Stangeria, confined to South Africa, (b) Euzamieae.—The pinnae are traversed by several parallel veins. Bowenia, an Australian cycad, is peculiar in having bi-pinnate fronds (fig. 5). The various genera are distinguished from one another by the shape and manner of attachment of the pinnae, the form of the carpellary scales, and to some extent by anatomical characters. Encephalartos (South and Tropical Africa).—Large cones; the carpellary scales terminate in a peltate distal expansion. Macrozamia (Australia).—Similar to Encephalartos except in the presence of a spinous projection from the swollen distal end of the carpels. Zamia (South America, Florida, &c.).—Stem short and often divided into several columnar branches. Each carpel terminates in a peltate head. Ceratozamia (Mexico).—Similar in habit to Macrozamia, but distinguished by the presence of two horn-like spinous processes on the apex of the carpels. Microcycas (Cuba).—Like Zamia, except that the ends of the stamens are flat, while the apices of the carpels are peltate. Dioon (Mexico) (fig. 4).—Characterized by the woolly scale-leaves and carpels; the latter terminate in a thick laminar expansion of triangular form, bearing two placental cushions, on which the ovules are situated. Bowenia (Australia).—Bi-pinnate fronds; stem short and tuberous (fig. 5).

B. Zamieae.—The stem doesn’t grow through the female flower; both male and female flowers are shaped like cones. (a) Stangerieae.—This group is known for the fern-like pattern of the pinnae, which have a noticeable midrib that branches out at a wide angle into either simple or forked and sometimes interconnected lateral veins. There is a single genus, Stangeria, found only in South Africa, (b) Euzamieae.—The pinnae feature several parallel veins. Bowenia, a cycad from Australia, is unique because it has bi-pinnate fronds (fig. 5). The different genera are distinguished by the shape and attachment of the pinnae, the form of the carpellary scales, and to some extent by anatomical traits. Encephalartos (South and Tropical Africa).—These have large cones; the carpellary scales end in a broad peltate expansion. Macrozamia (Australia).—Similar to Encephalartos, but with a spinous projection from the swollen distal end of the carpels. Zamia (South America, Florida, etc.).—The stem is short and often splits into multiple columnar branches. Each carpel ends with a peltate head. Ceratozamia (Mexico).—Similar in structure to Macrozamia, but has two horn-like spinous processes at the top of the carpels. Microcycas (Cuba).—Like Zamia, except the ends of the stamens are flat, while the tips of the carpels are peltate. Dioon (Mexico) (fig. 4).—Recognized by the woolly scale-leaves and carpels; the carpels end in a thick triangular laminar expansion that has two placental cushions where the ovules are located. Bowenia (Australia).—Features bi-pinnate fronds; the stem is short and tuberous (fig. 5).

From a photograph of a plant in Peradeniya Gardens, Ceylon, by Professor R. H. Yapp. Fig. 5.Bowenia spectabilis: frond.
Fig. 4.Dioon edule.  
Fig. 6.Macrozamia heteromera. A, part of frond; B, single pinna.

The stems of cycads are often described as unbranched; it is true that in comparison with conifers, in which the numerous branches, springing from the main stem, give a characteristic form to the tree, the tuberous or columnar stem of the Cycadaceae Stem and leaf. constitutes a striking distinguishing feature. Branching, however, occurs not infrequently: in Cycas the tall stem often produces several candelabra-like arms; in Zamia the main axis may break up near the base into several cylindrical branches; in species of Dioon (fig. 4) lateral branches are occasionally produced. The South African Encephalartos frequently produces several branches. Probably the oldest example of this genus in cultivation is in the Botanic Garden of Amsterdam, its age is considered by Professor de Vries to be about two thousand years: although an accurate determination of age is impossible, there is no doubt that many cycads grow very slowly and are remarkable for longevity. The thick armour of petiole-bases enveloping the stem is a characteristic Cycadean feature; in Cycas the alternation of scale-leaves and fronds is more clearly shown than in other cycads; in Encephalartos, Dioon, &c., the persistent scale-leaf bases are almost equal in size to those of the foliage-leaves, and there is no regular alternation of zones such as characterizes some species of Cycas. Another type of stem is illustrated by Stangeria and Zamia, also by a few forms of Cycas (fig. 2), in which the fronds fall off completely, leaving a comparatively smooth stem. The Cyas type of frond, except as regards the presence of a midrib in each pinna, characterizes the cycads generally, except Bowenia and Stangeria. In the monotypic genus Bowenia the large fronds, borne singly on the short and thick stem, are bi-pinnate (fig. 5); the segments, which are broadly ovate or rhomboidal, have several forked spreading veins, and resemble the large pinnules of some species of Adiantum. In Stangeria, also a genus represented by one species (S. paradoxa of South Africa), the long and comparatively broad pinnae, with an entire or irregularly incised margin, are very fern-like, a circumstance which led Kunze to describe the plant in 1835 as a species of the fern Lomaria. In rare cases the pinnae of cycads are lobed or branched: in Dioon spinulosum (Central America) the margin of the segments bears numerous spinous processes; in some species of Encephalartos, e.g. E. horridus, the lamina is deeply lobed; and in a species of the Australian genus Macrozamia, M. heteromera, the narrow pinnae are dichotomously branched almost to the base (fig. 6), and resemble the frond of some species of the fern Schizaea, or the fossil genus Baiera (Ginkgoales). An interesting species of Cycas, C. Micholitzii, has recently been described by Sir William Thiselton-Dyer from Annam, where it was collected by one of Messrs Sanders & Son’s collectors, in which the pinnae instead of being of the usual simple type are 756 dichotomously branched as in Macrozamia heteromera. In Ceratozamia the broad petiole-base is characterized by the presence of two lateral spinous processes, suggesting stipular appendages, comparable, on a reduced scale, with the large stipules of the Marattiaceae among Ferns. The vernation varies in different genera; in Cycas the rachis is straight and the pinnae circinately coiled (fig. 3); in Encephalartos, Dioon, &c., both rachis and segments are straight; in Zamia the rachis is bent or slightly coiled, bearing straight pinnae. The young leaves arise on the stem-apex as conical protuberances with winged borders on which the pinnae appear as rounded humps, usually in basipetal order; the scale-leaves in their young condition resemble fronds, but the lamina remains undeveloped. A feature of interest in connexion with the phylogeny of cycads is the presence of long hairs clothing the scale-leaves, and forming a cap on the summit of the stem-apex or attached to the bases of petioles; on some fossil cycadean plants these outgrowths have the form of scales, and are identical in structure with the ramenta (paleae) of the majority of ferns.

The stems of cycads are often described as unbranched; it's true that compared to conifers, which have numerous branches coming off the main stem giving the tree its characteristic shape, the tuberous or columnar stem of the Cycadaceae is a striking distinguishing feature. However, branching isn't uncommon: in Cycas, the tall stem often produces several candelabra-like arms; in Zamia, the main stem can break up near the base into several cylindrical branches; in species of Dioon (fig. 4), lateral branches occasionally appear. The South African Encephalartos often has multiple branches. Probably the oldest example of this genus in cultivation is in the Botanic Garden of Amsterdam, which Professor de Vries estimates to be around two thousand years old. Although it's impossible to determine age accurately, it's clear that many cycads grow very slowly and are remarkable for their longevity. The thick layer of petiole-bases covering the stem is a characteristic feature of cycads; in Cycas, the alternation of scale-leaves and fronds is more evident than in other cycads; in Encephalartos, Dioon, etc., the persistent scale-leaf bases are almost the same size as the foliage leaves, and there’s no regular alternation of zones like in some species of Cycas. Another type of stem is seen in Stangeria and Zamia, as well as certain forms of Cycas (fig. 2), where the fronds completely fall off, leaving a relatively smooth stem. The Cycas type of frond, except for the presence of a midrib in each pinna, is typical of most cycads, except for Bowenia and Stangeria. In the monotypic genus Bowenia, the large fronds, borne singly on the short and thick stem, are bi-pinnate (fig. 5); the segments, which are broadly ovate or rhomboidal, have several forked spreading veins, resembling the large pinnules of some species of Adiantum. In Stangeria, also represented by one species (S. paradoxa from South Africa), the long and comparatively broad pinnae, with either entire or irregularly incised edges, appear very fern-like, which led Kunze to describe the plant in 1835 as a species of the fern Lomaria. In rare instances, the pinnae of cycads are lobed or branched: in Dioon spinulosum (Central America), the edges of the segments have numerous spiny processes; in some species of Encephalartos, such as E. horridus, the lamina is deeply lobed; and in a species of the Australian genus Macrozamia, M. heteromera, the narrow pinnae split almost to the base (fig. 6), resembling the frond of certain species of the fern Schizaea, or the fossil genus Baiera (Ginkgoales). An interesting species of Cycas, C. Micholitzii, was recently described by Sir William Thiselton-Dyer from Annam, where it was collected by one of Messrs Sanders & Son’s collectors. In this species, the pinnae, instead of being the usual simple type, are dichotomously branched like in Macrozamia heteromera. In Ceratozamia, the broad petiole-base has two lateral spiny processes, resembling stipular appendages, comparable, on a smaller scale, to the large stipules of the Marattiaceae among ferns. The vernation varies among different genera; in Cycas, the rachis is straight and the pinnae are coiled like a spiral (fig. 3); in Encephalartos, Dioon, etc., both the rachis and segments are straight; in Zamia, the rachis is bent or slightly coiled, with straight pinnae. The young leaves emerge at the apex of the stem as conical protrusions with winged edges, where the pinnae appear as rounded bumps, usually in basipetal order; the scale-leaves in their young stage resemble fronds, but the lamina remains undeveloped. A noteworthy feature related to the phylogeny of cycads is the presence of long hairs covering the scale-leaves, forming a cap at the tip of the stem or attached to the bases of petioles; on some fossil cycad plants, these outgrowths take the form of scales and are structurally identical to the ramenta (paleae) found in most ferns.

The male flowers of cycads are constructed on a uniform plan, and in all cases consist of an axis bearing crowded, spirally disposed sporophylls. These are often wedge-shaped and angular; in some cases they consist of a short, thick Flower. stalk, terminating in a peltate expansion, or prolonged upwards in the form of a triangular lamina. The sporangia (pollen-sacs), which occur on the under-side of the stamens, are often arranged in more or less definite groups or sori, interspersed with hairs (paraphyses); dehiscence takes place along a line marked out by the occurrence of smaller and thinner-walled cells bounded by larger and thicker-walled elements, which form a fairly prominent cap-like “annulus” near the apex of the sporangium, not unlike the annulus characteristic of the Schizaeaceae among ferns. The sporangial wall, consisting of several layers of cells, encloses a cavity containing numerous oval spores (pollen-grains). In structure a cycadean sporangium recalls those of certain ferns (Marattiaceae, Osmundaceae and Schizaeaceae), but in the development of the spores there are certain peculiarities not met with among the Vascular Cryptogams. With the exception of Cycas, the female flowers are also in the form of cones, bearing numerous carpellary scales. In Cycas revoluta and C. circinalis each leaf-like carpel may produce several laterally attached ovules, but in C. Normanbyana the carpel is shorter and the ovules are reduced to two; this latter type brings us nearer to the carpels of Dioon, in which the flower has the form of a cone, and the distal end of the carpels is longer and more leaf-like than in the other genera of the Zamieae, which are characterized by shorter carpels with thick peltate heads bearing two ovules on the morphologically lower surface. The cones of cycads attain in some cases (e.g. Encephalartos) a considerable size, reaching a length of more than a foot. Cases have been recorded (by Thiselton-Dyer in Encephalartos and by Wieland in Zamia) in which the short carpellary cone-scales exhibit a foliaceous form. It is interesting that no monstrous cycadean cone has been described in which ovuliferous and staminate appendages are borne on the same axis: in the Bennettitales (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic) flowers were produced bearing on the same axis both androecium and gynoecium.

The male flowers of cycads follow a consistent design, and they typically feature an axis with tightly packed, spirally arranged sporophylls. These sporophylls are often wedge-shaped and angular; sometimes they consist of a short, thick stalk that ends in a broadened, disc-like section, or extends upward in the shape of a triangular leaf. The sporangia (pollen sacs), located on the underside of the stamens, are often grouped in defined patterns or sori, interspersed with hair-like structures (paraphyses); they open along a line defined by smaller, thinner-walled cells next to larger, thicker-walled ones, creating a prominent cap-like “annulus” near the top of the sporangium, which is similar to the annulus found in the Schizaeaceae ferns. The wall of the sporangium, made up of several cell layers, encloses a cavity filled with numerous oval spores (pollen grains). The structure of a cycad sporangium is reminiscent of certain ferns (like Marattiaceae, Osmundaceae, and Schizaeaceae), but there are unique features in the development of the spores that are not seen in Vascular Cryptogams. Aside from Cycas, the female flowers also take on a cone shape, which has many carpellary scales. In Cycas revoluta and C. circinalis, each leaf-like carpel can produce several ovules attached on the side, whereas in C. Normanbyana, the carpel is shorter, with only two ovules; this form is more similar to the carpels of Dioon, where the flower forms a cone, and the end of the carpels is longer and more leaf-like compared to those in other Zamieae genera, which have shorter carpels with thick, disc-like heads supporting two ovules on their lower surface. The cones of cycads can grow quite large in some cases (e.g. Encephalartos), reaching over a foot in length. There have been reports (by Thiselton-Dyer in Encephalartos and by Wieland in Zamia) of the short carpel cone scales appearing leaf-like. Interestingly, no abnormal cycad cones have been documented with both ovule-bearing and staminate structures on the same axis: in the Bennettitales (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic), flowers were formed that had both androecium and gynoecium on the same axis.

Fig. 7.Zamia. Part of Ovule in longitudinal section. (After Webber.)

P, Prothallus.

P, Prothallus.

A, Archegonia.

A, Archegonia.

N, Nucellus.

N, Nucellus.

C, Pollen-chamber.

C, Pollen chamber.

Pt, Pollen-tube.

Pt, pollen tube.

Pg, Pollen-grain.

Pg, Pollen grain.

G, Generative cell (second cell of pollen-tube).

G, Generative cell (the second cell of the pollen tube).

Fig. 8.Zamia. Proximal end of Pollen-tube, a, a, Spermatozoids from G of fig. 7; Pg, pollen-grain; c, proximal cell (first cell). (After Webber.)

The pollen-grains when mature consist of three cells, two small and one large cell; the latter grows into the pollen-tube, as in the Coniferales, and from one of the small cells two large ciliated spermatozoids are eventually produced. A Microspores and megaspores. remarkable exception to this rule has recently been recorded by Caldwell, who found that in Microcycas Calocoma the body-cells may be eight or even ten in number and the sperm-cells twice as numerous. One of the most important discoveries made during the latter part of the 19th century was that by Ikeno, a Japanese botanist, who first demonstrated the existence of motile male cells in the genus Cycas. Similar spermatozoids were observed in some species of Zamia by H. J. Webber, and more recent work enables us to assume that all cycads produce ciliated male gametes. Before following the growth of the pollen-grain after pollination, we will briefly describe the structure of a cycadean ovule. An ovule consists of a conical nucellus surrounded by a single integument. At an early stage of development a large cell makes its appearance in the central region of the nucellus; this increases in size and eventually forms three cells; the lowest of these grows vigorously and constitutes the megaspore (embryo-sac), which ultimately absorbs the greater part of the nucellus. The megaspore-nucleus divides repeatedly, and cells are produced from the peripheral region inwards, which eventually fill the spore-cavity with a homogeneous tissue (prothallus); some of the superficial cells at the micropylar end of the megaspore increase in size and divide by a tangential wall into two, an upper cell which gives rise to the short two-celled neck of the archegonium, and a lower cell which develops into a large egg-cell. Each megaspore may contain 2 to 6 archegonia. During the growth of the ovum nourishment is supplied from the contents of the cells immediately surrounding the egg-cell, as in the development of the ovum of Pinus and other conifers. Meanwhile the tissue in the apical region of the nucellus has been undergoing disorganization, which results in the formation of a pollen-chamber (fig. 7, C) immediately above the megaspore. Pollination in cycads has always been described as anemophilous, but according to recent observations by Pearson on South African species it seems probable that, at least in some cases, the pollen is conveyed to the ovules by animal agency. The pollen-grains find their way between the carpophylls, which at the time of pollination are slightly apart owing to the elongation of the internodes of the flower-axis, and pass into the pollen-chamber; the large cell of the pollen-grain grows out into a tube (Pt), which penetrates the nucellar tissue and often branches repeatedly; the pollen-grain itself, with the prothallus-cells, projects freely into the pollen-chamber (fig. 7). The nucleus of the outermost (second) small cell (fig. 7, G) divides, and one of the daughter-nuclei passes out of the cell, and may enter the lowest (first) small cell. The outermost cell, by the division of the remaining nucleus, produces two large spermatozoids (fig. 8, a, a). In Microcycas 16 sperm-cells are produced. In the course of division two bodies appear in the cytoplasm, and behave as centrosomes during the karyokinesis; they gradually become threadlike and coil round each daughter nucleus. This thread gives rise to a spiral ciliated band lying in a depression on the body of each spermatozoid; the large spermatozoids eventually escape from the pollen-tube, and are able to perform ciliary movements in the watery liquid which occurs between the thin papery remnant of nucellar tissue and the archegonial necks. Before fertilization a neck-canal cell is formed by the division of the ovum-nucleus. After the body of a spermatozoid has coalesced with the egg-nucleus the latter divides repeatedly and forms a mass of tissue which grows more vigorously in the lower part of the fertilized ovum, and extends upwards towards the apex of the ovum as a peripheral layer of parenchyma surrounding a central space. By further growth this tissue gives rise to a proembryo, which consists, at the micropylar end, of a sac; the tissue at the chalazal end grows into a long and tangled suspensor, terminating in a mass of cells, which is eventually differentiated into a radicle, plumule and two cotyledons. In the ripe seed the integument assumes the form of a fleshy envelope, succeeded internally by a hard woody shell, internal to which is a thin papery membrane—the apical portion of the nucellus—which is easily dissected out as a conical cap covering the apex of the endosperm. A thorough examination of cycadean seeds has recently been made by Miss Stopes, more particularly with a view to a comparison of their vascular supply with that in Palaeozoic gymnospermous seeds (Flora, 1904). The first leaves borne on the seedling axis are often scale-like, and these are followed by two or more larger laminae, which foreshadow the pinnae of the adult frond.

The mature pollen grains consist of three cells: two small ones and one large cell. The large cell extends into the pollen tube, similar to what's seen in the Coniferales, and one of the small cells eventually produces two large ciliated sperm cells. A noteworthy exception to this is what Caldwell recently observed in Microcycas Calocoma, where the body cells can be eight or even ten in number, with the sperm cells being twice that amount. One of the major discoveries in the late 19th century was made by Japanese botanist Ikeno, who first showed that motile male cells exist in the genus Cycas. H. J. Webber also observed similar sperm cells in some species of Zamia, and more recent studies suggest that all cycads produce ciliated male gametes. Before we track the development of the pollen grain after pollination, let’s briefly describe the structure of a cycadean ovule. An ovule has a conical nucellus surrounded by a single integument. Early in development, a large cell appears in the center of the nucellus; this cell grows and eventually forms three cells. The lowest of these cells grows significantly and becomes the megaspore (embryo sac), which ultimately absorbs most of the nucellus. The megaspore nucleus divides many times, producing cells from the outer region inwards, which eventually fill the spore cavity with a homogeneous tissue (prothallus). Some of the outer cells at the micropylar end of the megaspore increase in size and divide by a tangential wall into two: one becomes a short two-celled neck of the archegonium, and the other develops into a large egg cell. Each megaspore can contain 2 to 6 archegonia. As the ovum grows, it gets nourishment from the surrounding cells, like in the development of the ovum in Pinus and other conifers. Meanwhile, the tissue in the apical region of the nucellus breaks down, forming a pollen chamber (fig. 7, C) just above the megaspore. Pollination in cycads has typically been described as anemophilous, but recent observations by Pearson on South African species indicate that, at least in some cases, animals may help transport the pollen to the ovules. The pollen grains move between the carpophylls, which are slightly apart during pollination due to the elongation of the flower's internodes, and enter the pollen chamber. The large cell of the pollen grain extends into a tube (Pt) that penetrates the nucellar tissue and often branches out. The pollen grain itself, along with the prothallus cells, extends freely into the pollen chamber (fig. 7). The nucleus of the outermost (second) small cell (fig. 7, G) divides, and one of the daughter nuclei exits the cell, possibly entering the lowest (first) small cell. The outermost cell, having divided the remaining nucleus, produces two large sperm cells (fig. 8, a, a). In Microcycas, 16 sperm cells are produced. During the division, two structures appear in the cytoplasm and act as centrosomes during karyokinesis; they gradually become threadlike and coil around each daughter nucleus. This thread leads to a spiral ciliated band located in a depression on each sperm cell's body; the large sperm cells eventually escape from the pollen tube and can move using cilia in the watery liquid between the thin papery remains of the nucellar tissue and the archegonial necks. Before fertilization, a neck-canal cell forms from the division of the ovum nucleus. After a sperm cell merges with the egg nucleus, the latter divides repeatedly, forming a mass of tissue that grows more vigorously in the lower part of the fertilized ovum, extending upwards toward the ovum's apex as a peripheral layer of parenchyma surrounding a central space. As this tissue continues to grow, it forms a proembryo, which at the micropylar end consists of a sac; the tissue at the chalazal end develops into a long, tangled suspensor that ends in a mass of cells, eventually differentiating into a radicle, plumule, and two cotyledons. In the mature seed, the integument transforms into a fleshy covering, followed internally by a hard woody shell, and then a thin papery membrane—the apical portion of the nucellus—which can be easily dissected out as a conical cap that covers the apex of the endosperm. Miss Stopes has recently conducted a detailed examination of cycadean seeds, especially to compare their vascular supply with that of Palaeozoic gymnosperm seeds (Flora, 1904). The first leaves that appear on the seedling axis are often scale-like and are then followed by two or more larger laminae that anticipate the pinnae of the adult frond.

Fig. 9.Macrozamia. Diagrammatic transverse section of part of Stem. (After Worsdell.)

pd, Periderm in leaf-bases.

pd, Periderm in leaf bases.

lt, Leaf-traces in cortex.

Leaf traces in cortex.

ph, Phloem.

Phloem.

x, Xylem.

x, Xylem.

m, Medullary bundles.

Medullary bundles.

c, Cortical bundles.

Cortical bundles.

Fig. 10.Ginkgo biloba. Leaves.
Fig. 11.Ginkgo adiantoides. Fossil (Eocene) leaf from the Island of Mull.

The anatomical structure of the vegetative organs of recent cycads is of special interest as affording important evidence of relationship with extinct types, and with other groups of recent plants. Brongniart, who Anatomy. was the first to investigate in detail the anatomy of a cycadean stem, recognized an agreement, as regards the secondary wood, with Dicotyledons and Gymnosperms, rather than with Monocotyledons. He drew attention also to certain structural similarities between Cycas and Ginkgo. The main anatomical features of a cycad stem may be summarized as follows: the centre is occupied by a large parenchymatous pith traversed by numerous secretory canals, and in some genera by cauline vascular bundles (e.g. Encephalartos and Macrozamia). In addition to these cauline strands (confined to the stem and not connected with the leaves), collateral bundles are often met with in the pith, which form the vascular supply of terminal flowers borne at intervals on the apex of the stem. These latter bundles may be seen in sections of old stems to pursue a more or less horizontal course, passing outwards through the main woody cylinder. This lateral course is due to the more vigorous growth of the axillary branch formed near the base of each flower, which is a terminal structure, and, except in the female flower of Cycas, puts a limit to the apical growth of the stem. The vigorous lateral branch therefore continues the line of the main axis. The pith is encircled by a cylinder of secondary wood, consisting of single or multiple radial rows of tracheids separated by broad medullary rays composed of large parenchymatous cells; the tracheids bear numerous bordered 757 pits on the radial walls. The large medullary rays give to the wood a characteristic parenchymatous or lax appearance, which is in marked contrast to the more compact wood of a conifer. The protoxylem-elements are situated at the extreme inner edge of the secondary wood, and may occur as small groups of narrow, spirally-pitted elements scattered among the parenchyma which abuts on the main mass of wood. Short and reticulately-pitted tracheal cells, similar to tracheids, often occur in the circummedullary region of cycadean stems. In an old stem of Cycas, Encephalartos or Macrozamia the secondary wood consists of several rather unevenly concentric zones, while in some other genera it forms a continuous mass as in conifers and normal dicotyledons. These concentric rings of secondary xylem and phloem (fig. 9) afford a characteristic cycadean feature. After the cambium has been active for some time producing secondary xylem and phloem, the latter consisting of sieve-tubes, phloem-parenchyma and frequently thick-walled fibres, a second cambium is developed in the pericycle; this produces a second vascular zone, which is in turn followed by a third cambium, and so on, until several hollow cylinders are developed. It has been recently shown that several cambium-zones may remain in a state of activity, so that the formation of a new cambium does not necessarily mark a cessation of growth in the more internal meristematic rings. It occasionally happens that groups of xylem and phloem are developed internally to some of the vascular rings; these are characterized by an inverse orientation of the tissues, the xylem being centrifugal and the phloem centripetal in its development. The broad cortical region, which contains many secretory canals, is traversed by numerous vascular bundles (fig. 9, c) some of which pursue a more or less vertical course, and by frequent anastomoses with one another form a loose reticulum of vascular strands; others are leaf-traces on their way from the stele of the stem to the leaves. Most of these cortical bundles are collateral in structure, but in some the xylem and phloem are concentrically arranged; the secondary origin of these bundles from procambium-strands was described by Mettenius in his classical paper of 1860. During the increase in thickness of a cycadean stem successive layers of cork-tissue are formed by phellogens in the persistent bases of leaves (fig. 9, pd), which increase in size to adapt themselves to the growth of the vascular zones. The leaf-traces of cycads are remarkable both on account of their course and their anatomy. In a transverse section of a stem (fig. 9) one sees some vascular bundles following a horizontal or slightly oblique course in the cortex, stretching for a longer or shorter distance in a direction concentric with the woody cylinder. From each leaf-base two main bundles spread right and left through the cortex of the stem (fig. 9, lt), and as they curve gradually towards the vascular ring they present the appearance of two rather flat ogee curves, usually spoken of as the leaf-trace girdles (fig. 9, lt). The distal ends of these girdles give off several branches, which traverse the petiole and rachis as numerous collateral bundles. The complicated girdle-like course is characteristic of the leaf-traces of most recent cycads, but in some cases, e.g. in Zamia floridana, the traces are described by Wieland in his recent monograph on American fossil cycads (Carnegie Institution Publications, 1906) as possessing a more direct course similar to that in Mesozoic genera. A leaf-trace, as it passes through the cortex, has a collateral structure, the protoxylem being situated at the inner edge of the xylem; when it reaches the leaf-base the position of the spiral tracheids is gradually altered, and the endarch arrangement (protoxylem internal) gives place to a mesarch structure (protoxylem more or less central and not on the edge of the xylem strand). In a bundle examined in the basal portion of a leaf the bulk of the xylem is found to be centrifugal in position, but internally to the protoxylem there is a group of centripetal tracheids; higher up in the petiole the xylem is mainly centripetal, the centrifugal wood being represented by a small arc of tracheids external to the protoxylem and separated from it by a few parenchymatous elements. Finally, in the pinnae of the frond the centrifugal xylem may disappear, the protoxylem being now exarch in position and abutting on the phloem. Similarly in the sporophylls of some cycads the bundles are endarch near the base and mesarch near the distal end of the stamen or carpel. The vascular system of cycadean seedlings presents some features worthy of note; centripetal xylem occurs in the cotyledonary bundles associated with transfusion-tracheids. The bundles from the cotyledons pursue a direct course to the stele of the main axis, and do not assume the girdle-form characteristic of the adult plant. This is of interest from the point of view of the comparison of recent cycads with extinct species (Bennettites), in which the leaf-traces follow a much more direct course than in modern cycads. The mesarch structure of the leaf-bundles is met with in a less pronounced form in the flower peduncles of some cycads. This fact is of importance as showing that the type of vascular structure, which characterized the stems of many Palaeozoic genera, has not entirely disappeared from the stems of modern cycads; but the mesarch bundle is now confined to the leaves and peduncles. The roots of some cycads Roots. resemble the stems in producing several cambium-rings; they possess 2 to 8 protoxylem-groups, and are characterized by a broad pericyclic zone. A common phenomenon in cycads is the production of roots which grow upwards (apogeotropic), and appear as coralline branched structures above the level of the ground; some of the cortical cells of these roots are hypertrophied, and contain numerous filaments of blue-green Algae (Nostocaceae), which live as endoparasites in the cell-cavities.

The anatomical structure of the vegetative organs of modern cycads is especially interesting as it provides key evidence of their relationships with extinct types and with other groups of current plants. Brongniart, who was the first to thoroughly study the anatomy of a cycad stem, noted that the secondary wood shares similarities with Dicotyledons and Gymnosperms rather than Monocotyledons. He also pointed out certain structural resemblances between Cycas and Ginkgo. The main anatomical features of a cycad stem can be summarized as follows: the center is filled with a large parenchymatous pith crossed by numerous secretory canals, and in some genera by cauline vascular bundles (e.g. Encephalartos and Macrozamia). Besides these cauline strands (which are limited to the stem and not connected to the leaves), collateral bundles are often found in the pith, providing the vascular supply for terminal flowers that grow periodically at the top of the stem. These bundles can be seen in sections of old stems taking a more or less horizontal path, moving outward through the main woody cylinder. This lateral trajectory is due to the more vigorous growth of the axillary branch formed near the base of each flower, which is a terminal structure and, except for the female flower of Cycas, limits the vertical growth of the stem. Consequently, the strong lateral branch continues the main axis line. The pith is surrounded by a cylinder of secondary wood, made up of single or multiple radial rows of tracheids separated by broad medullary rays composed of large parenchymatous cells; the tracheids have numerous bordered pits on their radial walls. The large medullary rays give the wood a characteristic parenchymatous or loose appearance, which is in sharp contrast to the denser wood of a conifer. The protoxylem elements are situated at the extreme inner edge of the secondary wood and can appear as small groups of narrow, spirally pitted elements scattered among the parenchyma that adjoins the main wood mass. Short and reticulately pitted tracheal cells, similar to tracheids, often appear in the circummedullary region of cycad stems. In an old stem of Cycas, Encephalartos, or Macrozamia, the secondary wood consists of several rather unevenly concentric zones, while in some other genera, it forms a continuous mass like in conifers and regular dicotyledons. These concentric rings of secondary xylem and phloem (fig. 9) are a distinctive feature of cycads. After the cambium has been active for some time producing secondary xylem and phloem, the latter consisting of sieve-tubes, phloem-parenchyma, and frequently thick-walled fibers, a second cambium develops in the pericycle; this produces a second vascular zone, which is followed by a third cambium, and so on, until multiple hollow cylinders are formed. It has been recently shown that several cambium zones can remain active, so the formation of a new cambium doesn't necessarily indicate a stop in growth in the inner meristematic rings. Occasionally, groups of xylem and phloem form inside some of the vascular rings; these are characterized by an inverse orientation of the tissues, with the xylem being centrifugal and the phloem being centripetal in development. The broad cortical region, which contains many secretory canals, is crossed by numerous vascular bundles (fig. 9, c), some of which take a mostly vertical path, and through frequent interconnections with one another form a loose network of vascular strands; others are leaf traces on their way from the stem's stele to the leaves. Most of these cortical bundles are collateral in structure, but in some, the xylem and phloem are arranged concentrically; the secondary origin of these bundles from procambium strands was described by Mettenius in his classic paper from 1860. As the thickness of a cycad stem increases, successive layers of cork tissue are produced by phellogens at the persistent bases of leaves (fig. 9, pd), which grow in size to accommodate the growth of the vascular zones. The leaf traces of cycads are noteworthy both because of their path and their anatomy. In a cross-section of a stem (fig. 9), some vascular bundles follow a horizontal or slightly slanted path in the cortex, extending for varying distances in a concentric direction with the woody cylinder. From each leaf base, two main bundles spread outwards through the cortex of the stem (fig. 9, lt), and as they curve gradually toward the vascular ring, they take on the shape of two relatively flat ogee curves, often referred to as leaf-trace girdles (fig. 9, lt). The distal ends of these girdles give off multiple branches that travel through the petiole and rachis as numerous collateral bundles. The complex girdle-like path is typical of the leaf traces of most modern cycads, but in some cases, such as in Zamia floridana, the traces are described by Wieland in his recent monograph on American fossil cycads (Carnegie Institution Publications, 1906) as having a more direct path similar to that in Mesozoic genera. A leaf trace, as it moves through the cortex, has a collateral structure, with the protoxylem located at the inner edge of the xylem; when it reaches the leaf base, the position of the spiral tracheids gradually changes, and the endarch arrangement (protoxylem internal) transitions to a mesarch structure (protoxylem more or less central and not at the edge of the xylem strand). In a bundle examined at the base of a leaf, most of the xylem is found to be centrifugal in position, but within the protoxylem, there is a group of centripetal tracheids; higher up in the petiole, the xylem is mainly centripetal, with the centrifugal wood represented by a small arc of tracheids external to the protoxylem, separated by a few parenchymatous elements. Finally, in the pinnae of the frond, the centrifugal xylem may disappear, with the protoxylem now positioned as exarch and coming into contact with the phloem. Similarly, in the sporophylls of some cycads, the bundles are endarch near the base and mesarch near the distal end of the stamen or carpel. The vascular system of cycad seedlings has some noteworthy features; centripetal xylem occurs in the cotyledonary bundles along with transfusion tracheids. The bundles from the cotyledons take a direct path to the stele of the main axis and do not form the girdle shape typical of the adult plant. This is interesting for comparing modern cycads with extinct species (Bennettites), in which the leaf traces follow a much more direct course than in current cycads. The mesarch structure of the leaf bundles is found in a less pronounced form in the flower peduncles of some cycads. This is important as it shows that the type of vascular structure that characterized the stems of many Paleozoic genera has not completely vanished from the stems of modern cycads; however, the mesarch bundle is now limited to the leaves and peduncles. The roots of some cycads resemble the stems in producing several cambium rings; they have 2 to 8 protoxylem groups and are distinguished by a broad pericyclic zone. A common phenomenon in cycads is the formation of roots that grow upwards (apogeotropic), appearing as coralline branched structures above ground level; some of the cortical cells of these roots become hypertrophied and contain numerous filaments of blue-green algae (Nostocaceae), which live as endoparasites in the cell cavities.

Fig. 12.Ginkgo biloba. A, Male flower; B, C, single stamens; D, female flower.

Ginkgoales.—This class-designation has been recently proposed to give emphasis to the isolated position of the genus Ginkgo (Salisburia) among the Gymnosperms. Ginkgo biloba, the maidenhair tree, has usually been placed by botanists in the Taxeae in the neighbourhood of the yew (Taxus), but the proposal by Eichler in 1852 to institute a special family, the Salisburieae, indicated a recognition of the existence of special characteristics which distinguish the genus from other members of the Coniferae. The discovery by the Japanese botanist Hirase of the development of ciliated spermatozoids in the pollen-tube of Ginkgo, in place of the non-motile male cells of typical conifers, served as a cogent argument in favour of separating the genus from the Coniferales and placing it in a class of its own. In 1712 Kaempfer published a drawing of a Japanese tree, which he described under the name Ginkgo; this term was adopted in 1771 by Linnaeus, who spoke of Kaempfer’s plant as Ginkgo biloba. In 1797 Smith proposed to use the name Salisburia adiantifolia in preference to the “uncouth” genus Ginkgo and “incorrect” specific term biloba. Both names are still in common use. On account of the resemblance of the leaves to those of some species of Adiantum, the appellation maidenhair tree has long been given to Ginkgo biloba. Ginkgo is of special interest on account of its isolated position among existing plants, its restricted geographical distribution, and its great antiquity (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic). This solitary survivor of an ancient stock is almost extinct, but a few old and presumably wild trees are recorded by travellers in parts of China. Ginkgo is common as a sacred tree in the gardens of temples in the Far East, and often cultivated in North America and Europe. Ginkgo biloba, which may reach a height of over 30 metres, forms a tree of pyramidal shape with a smooth grey bark. The leaves (figs. 10 and 11) have a long, slender petiole terminating in a fan-shaped lamina, which may be entire, divided by a median incision into two wedge-shaped lobes, or subdivided into several narrow segments. The venation is like that of many ferns, e.g. Adiantum; the lowest vein in each half of the lamina follows a course parallel to the edge, and gives off numerous branches, which fork repeatedly as they spread in a palmate manner towards the leaf margin. The foliage-leaves occur either scattered on long shoots of unlimited growth, or at the apex of short shoots (spurs), which may eventually elongate into long shoots.

Ginkgo trees.—This classification was recently introduced to highlight the unique position of the genus Ginkgo (Salisburia) among Gymnosperms. Ginkgo biloba, known as the maidenhair tree, has typically been categorized by botanists within the Taxeae group, close to the yew (Taxus). However, Eichler’s proposal in 1852 to create a separate family called Salisburieae acknowledged distinct traits that set the genus apart from other members of the Coniferae. The discovery by Japanese botanist Hirase of ciliated sperm in the pollen tube of Ginkgo, instead of the typical non-motile male cells found in conifers, provided strong evidence for classifying the genus separately from Coniferales. In 1712, Kaempfer published a drawing of a Japanese tree, naming it Ginkgo; this name was later adopted by Linnaeus in 1771 when he referred to Kaempfer’s plant as Ginkgo biloba. In 1797, Smith suggested using the name Salisburia adiantifolia instead of the "awkward" genus Ginkgo and the "incorrect" species name biloba. Both names are still widely used today. Due to the similarity of its leaves to some species of Adiantum, the nickname maidenhair tree has long been associated with Ginkgo biloba. Ginkgo is particularly interesting because of its unique status among living plants, its limited geographic range, and its ancient history (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic). This lone survivor from an ancient lineage is nearly extinct, but some old and likely wild trees can still be found in parts of China. Ginkgo is common as a sacred tree in temple gardens in the Far East and is often cultivated in North America and Europe. Ginkgo biloba, which can grow over 30 meters tall, has a pyramidal shape with smooth gray bark. The leaves (figs. 10 and 11) have long, slender petioles that end in a fan-shaped blade, which can be whole, split down the middle into two wedge-shaped lobes, or divided into several narrow segments. The leaf venation resembles that of many ferns, such as Adiantum; the lowest vein in each half of the blade runs parallel to the edge and branches out, forking repeatedly as it spreads in a palmate manner towards the leaf margin. The leaves can be scattered along long shoots that keep growing indefinitely or clustered at the ends of short shoots (spurs), which may eventually develop into long shoots.

758

758

Fig. 13.Ginkgo. Apex of Ovule, and Pollen-grain. (After Hirase.)

p, Pollen-tube (proximal end).

Pollen tube (proximal end).

c, Pollen-chamber.

Pollen chamber.

e, Upward prolongation of megaspore.

e, Upward extension of megaspore.

a, Archegonia.

a, Archegonia.

Pg, Pollen-grain.

Pg, Pollen grain.

Ex, Exine.

Ex, Exine.

The flowers are dioecious. The male flowers (fig. 12), borne in the axil of scale-leaves, consist of a stalked central axis bearing loosely disposed stamens; each stamen consists of a slender filament terminating in a small apical scale, which bears Flowers. usually two, but not infrequently three or four pollen-sacs (fig. 12, C). The axis of the flower is a shoot bearing leaves in the form of stamens. A mature pollen-grain contains a prothallus of 3 to 5 cells (Fig. 13, Pg); the exine extends over two-thirds of the circumference, leaving a thin portion of the wall, which on collapsing produces a longitudinal groove similar to the median depression on the pollen-grain of a cycad. The ordinary type of female flower has the form of a long, naked peduncle bearing a single ovule on either side of the apex (fig. 12), the base of each being enclosed by a small, collar-like rim, the nature of which has been variously interpreted. A young ovule consists of a conical nucellus surrounded by a single integument terminating as a two-lipped micropyle. A large pollen-chamber occupies the apex of the nucellus; immediately below this, two or more archegonia (fig. 13, a) are developed in the upper region of the megaspore, each consisting of a large egg-cell surmounted by two neck-cells and a canal-cell which is cut off shortly before fertilization. After the entrance of the pollen-grain the pollen-chamber becomes roofed over by a blunt protuberance of nucellar tissue. The megaspore (embryo-sac) continues to grow after pollination until the greater part of the nucellus is gradually destroyed; it also gives rise to a vertical outgrowth, which projects from the apex of the megaspore as a short, thick column (fig. 13, e) supporting the remains of the nucellar tissue which forms the roof of the pollen-chamber (fig. 13, c). Surrounding the pitted wall of the ovum there is a definite layer of large cells, no doubt representing a tapetum, which, as in cycads and conifers, plays an important part in nourishing the growing egg-cell. The endosperm detached from a large Ginkgo ovule after fertilization bears a close resemblance to that of a cycad; the apex is occupied by a depression, on the floor of which two small holes mark the position of the archegonia, and the outgrowth from the megaspore apex projects from the centre as a short peg. After pollination the pollen-tube grows into the nucellar tissue, as in cycads, and the pollen-grain itself (fig. 13, Pg) hangs down into the pollen-chamber; two large spirally ciliated spermatozoids are produced, their manner of development agreeing very closely with that of the corresponding cells in Cycas and Zamia. After fertilization the ovum-nucleus divides and cell-formation proceeds rapidly, especially in the lower part of the ovum, in which the cotyledon and axis of the embryo are differentiated; the long, tangled suspensor of the cycadean embryo is not found in Ginkgo. It is often stated that fertilization occurs after the ovules have fallen, but it has been demonstrated by Hirase that this occurs while the ovules are still attached to the tree. The ripe seed, which grows as large as a rather small plum, is enclosed by a thick, fleshy envelope covering a hard woody shell with two or rarely three longitudinal keels. A papery remnant of nucellus lines the inner face of the woody shell, and, as in cycadean seeds, the apical portion is readily separated as a cap covering the summit of the endosperm.

The flowers are dioecious. The male flowers (fig. 12), found in the axil of scale leaves, consist of a stalked central axis with loosely arranged stamens; each stamen has a slender filament that ends in a small apical scale, which typically has two, but sometimes three or four pollen sacs (fig. 12, C). The axis of the flower is a shoot that has leaves shaped like stamens. A mature pollen grain contains a prothallus with 3 to 5 cells (Fig. 13, Pg); the exine covers about two-thirds of the circumference, leaving a thin part of the wall that collapses, creating a longitudinal groove similar to the median depression on the pollen grain of a cycad. The standard type of female flower looks like a long, bare peduncle with one ovule on each side of the tip (fig. 12), with the base of each ovule surrounded by a small, collar-like rim, which has been interpreted in various ways. A young ovule contains a conical nucellus covered by a single integument that ends in a two-lipped micropyle. A large pollen chamber occupies the tip of the nucellus; just below this, two or more archegonia (fig. 13, a) develop in the upper part of the megaspore, each having a large egg cell topped by two neck cells and a canal cell that gets cut off shortly before fertilization. After the pollen grain enters, the pollen chamber gets covered by a blunt protrusion of nucellar tissue. The megaspore (embryo sac) keeps growing after pollination until most of the nucellus is gradually destroyed; it also produces a vertical outgrowth that extends from the tip of the megaspore as a short, thick column (fig. 13, e) supporting the remnants of the nucellar tissue that forms the roof of the pollen chamber (fig. 13, c). Surrounding the pitted wall of the ovum is a distinct layer of large cells, likely representing a tapetum, which, like in cycads and conifers, plays a crucial role in nourishing the growing egg cell. The endosperm detached from a large Ginkgo ovule after fertilization closely resembles that of a cycad; the top has a depression with two small holes on the floor indicating the position of the archegonia, and the outgrowth from the megaspore apex sticks out from the center as a short peg. After pollination, the pollen tube grows into the nucellar tissue, just like in cycads, with the pollen grain itself (fig. 13, Pg) hanging down into the pollen chamber; two large spirally ciliated spermatozoids are produced, developing in a way that closely matches the corresponding cells in Cycas and Zamia. After fertilization, the ovum nucleus divides, and cell formation happens quickly, especially in the lower part of the ovum, where the cotyledon and axis of the embryo are differentiated; the long, tangled suspensor found in the cycadean embryo is absent in Ginkgo. It’s often suggested that fertilization happens after the ovules have fallen, but Hirase has shown that it occurs while the ovules are still attached to the tree. The mature seed, which can grow as large as a small plum, is enclosed by a thick, fleshy layer covering a hard woody shell with two or sometimes three longitudinal keels. A papery remnant of the nucellus lines the inner side of the woody shell, and, like in cycadean seeds, the upper part can easily detach as a cap covering the top of the endosperm.

Fig. 14.Ginkgo. Abnormal female Flowers. A, Peduncle; b, scaly bud; B, leaf bearing marginal ovule. (After Fujii.)

The morphology of the female flowers has been variously interpreted by botanists; the peduncle bearing the ovules has been described as homologous with the petiole of a foliage-leaf and as a shoot-structure, the collar-like envelope at the base of the ovules being referred to as a second integument or arillus, or as the representative of a carpel. The evidence afforded by normal and abnormal flowers appears to be in favour of the following interpretation: The peduncle is a shoot bearing two or more carpels. Each ovule is enclosed at the base by an envelope or collar homologous with the lamina of a leaf; the fleshy and hard coats of the nucellus constitute a single integument. The stalk of an ovule, considerably reduced in normal flowers and much larger in some abnormal flowers, is homologous with a leaf-stalk, with which it agrees in the structure and number of vascular bundles. The facts on which this description is based are derived partly from anatomical evidence, and in part from an account given by a Japanese botanist, Fujii, of several abnormal female flowers; in some cases the collar at the base of an ovule, often described as an arillus, is found to pass gradually into the lamina of a leaf bearing marginal ovules (fig. 14, B). The occurrence of more than two ovules on one peduncle is by no means rare; a particularly striking example is described by Fujii, in which an unusually thick peduncle bearing several stalked ovules terminates in a scaly bud (fig. 14, A, b). The frequent occurrence of more than two pollen-sacs and the equally common occurrence of additional ovules have been regarded by some authors as evidence in favour of the view that ancestral types normally possessed a greater number of these organs than are usually found in the recent species. This Anatomy. view receives support from fossil evidence. Close to the apex of a shoot the vascular bundles of a leaf make their appearance as double strands, and the leaf-traces in the upper part of a shoot have the form of distinct bundles, which in the older part of the shoot form a continuous ring. Each double leaf-trace passes through four internodes before becoming a part of the stele; the double nature of the trace is a characteristic feature. Secretory sacs occur abundantly in the leaf-lamina, where they appear as short lines between the veins; they are abundant also in the cortex and pith of the shoot, in the fleshy integument of the ovule, and elsewhere. The secondary wood of the shoot and root conforms in the main to the coniferous type; in the short shoots the greater breadth of the medullary rays in the more internal part of the xylem recalls the cycadean type. The secondary phloem contains numerous thick-walled fibres, parenchymatous cells, and large sieve-tubes with plates on the radial walls; swollen parenchymatous cells containing crystals are commonly met with in the cortex, pith and medullary-ray tissues. The wood consists of tracheids, with circular bordered pits on their radial walls, and in the late summer wood pits are unusually abundant on the tangential walls. A point of anatomical interest is the occurrence in the vascular bundles of the cotyledons, scale-leaves, and elsewhere of a few centripetally developed tracheids, which give to the xylem-strands a mesarch structure such as characterizes the foliar bundles of cycads. The root is diarch in structure, but additional protoxylem-strands may be present at the base of the main root; the pericycle consists of several layers of cells.

The structure of female flowers has been interpreted in various ways by botanists. The stalk that holds the ovules has been described as being similar to the stem of a leaf and as a shoot structure; the collar-like cover at the base of the ovules is referred to as a second integument or arillus, or as a part of a carpel. Evidence from both normal and abnormal flowers supports this interpretation: The stalk is a shoot that bears two or more carpels. Each ovule is covered at the base by a collar that is similar to the flat part of a leaf; the fleshy and hard layers of the nucellus form a single integument. The stalk of an ovule, which is significantly smaller in normal flowers and much larger in some abnormal flowers, is similar to a leaf stalk, matching it in structure and the number of vascular bundles. The facts supporting this description come partly from anatomical evidence and partly from observations made by a Japanese botanist, Fujii, of various abnormal female flowers; in some cases, the collar at the base of an ovule, often called an arillus, gradually transitions into the flat part of a leaf bearing side ovules (fig. 14, B). It’s not uncommon to find more than two ovules on one stalk; a particularly striking example noted by Fujii involves an unusually thick stalk with several stalked ovules that ends in a scaly bud (fig. 14, A, b). The frequent presence of more than two pollen sacs and the common occurrence of additional ovules have led some authors to suggest that ancestral types originally had a greater number of these organs than are typically seen in recent species. This view is supported by fossil evidence. Near the tip of a shoot, the vascular bundles of a leaf appear as double strands, and the leaf traces in the upper part of a shoot form distinct bundles, which in the lower part of the shoot create a continuous ring. Each double leaf trace passes through four internodes before joining the stele; the double nature of the trace is a notable feature. Secretory sacs are plentiful in the leaf’s flat part, appearing as short lines between the veins; they are also abundant in the cortex and pith of the shoot, in the fleshy coat of the ovule, and elsewhere. The secondary wood of the shoot and root mainly follows the conifer type; in the short shoots, the wider medullary rays in the inner part of the xylem resemble the cycads type. The secondary phloem contains many thick-walled fibers, parenchyma cells, and large sieve tubes with plates on their radial walls; swollen parenchyma cells containing crystals are commonly found in the cortex, pith, and medullary ray tissues. The wood consists of tracheids with circular bordered pits on their radial walls, and during late summer, pits are unusually common on the tangential walls. A point of anatomical interest is the presence in the vascular bundles of the cotyledons, scale leaves, and elsewhere of a few centipetal developed tracheids, giving the xylem strands a mesarch structure akin to that of cycads’ foliar bundles. The root is structured as diarch, but there may be additional protoxylem strands at the base of the main root; the pericycle is made up of several layers of cells.

This is not the place to discuss in detail the past history of Ginkgo (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic). Among Palaeozoic genera there are some which bear a close resemblance to the recent type in the form of the leaves; and petrified Palaeozoic seeds, Geological history. almost identical with those of the maidenhair tree, have been described from French and English localities. During the Triassic and Jurassic periods the genus Baiera—no doubt a representative of the Ginkgoales—was widely spread throughout Europe and in other regions; Ginkgo itself occurs abundantly in Mesozoic and Tertiary rocks, and was a common plant in the Arctic regions as elsewhere during the Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous periods. Some unusually perfect Ginkgo leaves have been found in the Eocene leaf-beds between the lava-flows exposed in the cliffs of Mull (fig. 11). From an evolutionary point of view, it is of interest to note the occurrence of filicinean and cycadean characters in the maidenhair tree. The leaves at once invite a comparison with ferns; the numerous long hairs which form a delicate woolly covering on young leaves recall the hairs of certain ferns, but agree more closely with the long filamentous hairs of recent cycads. The spermatozoids constitute the most striking link with both cycads and ferns. The structure of the seed, the presence of two neck-cells in the archegonia, the late development of the embryo, the partially-fused cotyledons and certain anatomical characters, are features common to Ginkgo and the cycads. The maidenhair tree is one of the most interesting survivals from the past; it represents a type which, in the Palaeozoic era, may have been merged into the extinct class Cordaitales. Through the succeeding ages the Ginkgoales were represented by numerous forms, which gradually became more restricted in their distribution and fewer in number during the Cretaceous and Tertiary periods, terminating at the present day in one solitary survivor.

This isn't the right place to go into detail about the history of Ginkgo (see Palaeobotany: Mesozoic). Among Paleozoic genera, there are some that closely resemble the current type in the shape of their leaves; and fossilized Paleozoic seeds, Geological history. nearly identical to those of the maidenhair tree, have been found in France and England. During the Triassic and Jurassic periods, the genus Baiera—likely a representative of the Ginkgoales—was widespread across Europe and other areas; Ginkgo itself was abundant in Mesozoic and Tertiary rocks, and was a common plant in the Arctic and elsewhere during the Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous periods. Some exceptionally well-preserved Ginkgo leaves have been discovered in the Eocene leaf beds between lava flows exposed in the cliffs of Mull (fig. 11). From an evolutionary standpoint, it's interesting to note the presence of fern-like and cycad-like traits in the maidenhair tree. The leaves immediately draw a comparison to ferns; the many long hairs forming a fine, woolly layer on young leaves resemble those of certain ferns, but align more closely with the long, threadlike hairs of modern cycads. The sperm cells represent the most noticeable connection to both cycads and ferns. The structure of the seed, the presence of two neck cells in the archegonia, the delayed development of the embryo, the partially fused cotyledons, and certain anatomical features are characteristics common to Ginkgo and cycads. The maidenhair tree is one of the most fascinating survivors from the past; it represents a type that, during the Paleozoic era, may have been part of the now-extinct class Cordaitales. Over the ages, the Ginkgoales were represented by many forms, which gradually became more limited in distribution and fewer in numbers during the Cretaceous and Tertiary periods, leading to one solitary survivor today.

Coniferales.—Trees and shrubs characterized by a copious branching of the stem and frequently by a regular pyramidal form. Leaves simple, small, linear or short and scale-like, usually persisting for more than one year. Flowers monoecious or dioecious, unisexual, without a perianth, often in the form of cones, but never terminal on the main stem.

Conifers.—Trees and shrubs known for their abundant branching and often for having a regular pyramidal shape. The leaves are simple, small, linear or short and scale-like, typically lasting more than one year. The flowers can be either monoecious or dioecious, unisexual, lacking a perianth, and usually appear in the form of cones, but are never found at the top of the main stem.

The plants usually included in the Coniferae constitute a less homogeneous class than the Cycadaceae. Some authors use the term Coniferae in a restricted sense as including those genera which have the female flowers in the form of cones, External features. the other genera, characterized by flowers of a different type, being placed in the Taxaceae, and often spoken of as Taxads. 759 In order to avoid confusion in the use of the term Coniferae, we may adopt as a class-designation the name Coniferales, including both the Coniferae—using the term in a restricted sense—and the Taxaceae. The most striking characteristic of the majority of the Coniferales is the regular manner of the monopodial branching and the pyramidal shape. Araucaria imbricata, the Monkey-puzzle tree, A. excelsa, the Norfolk Island pine, many pines and firs, cedars and other genera illustrate the pyramidal form. The mammoth redwood tree of California, Sequoia (Wellingtonia) gigantea, which represents the tallest Gymnosperm, is a good example of the regular tapering main stem and narrow pyramidal form. The cypresses afford instances of tall and narrow trees similar in habit to Lombardy poplars. The common cypress (Cupressus sempervirens), as found wild in the mountains of Crete and Cyprus, is characterized by long and spreading branches, which give it a cedar-like habit. A pendulous or weeping habit is assumed by some conifers, e.g. Picea excelsa var. virgata represents a form in which the main branches attain a considerable horizontal extension, and trail themselves like snakes along the ground. Certain species of Pinus, the yews (Taxus) and some other genera grow as bushes, which in place of a main mast-like stem possess several repeatedly-branched leading shoots. The unfavourable conditions in Arctic regions have produced a dwarf form, in which the main shoots grow close to the ground. Artificially induced dwarfed plants of Pinus, Cupressus, Sciadopitys (umbrella pine) and other genera are commonly cultivated by the Japanese. The dying off of older branches and the vigorous growth of shoots nearer the apex of the stem produce a form of tree illustrated by the stone pine of the Mediterranean region (Pinus Pinea), which Turner has rendered familiar in his “Childe Harold’s Pilgrimage” and other pictures of Italian scenery. Conifers are not infrequently seen in which a lateral branch has bent sharply upwards to take the place of the injured main trunk. An upward tendency of all the main lateral branches, known as fastigiation, is common in some species, producing well-marked varieties, e.g. Cephalotaxus pedunculata var. fastigiata; this fastigiate habit may arise as a sport on a tree with spreading branches. Another departure from the normal is that in which the juvenile or seedling form of shoot persists in the adult tree; the numerous coniferous plants known as species of Retinospora are examples of this. The name Retinospora, therefore, does not stand for a true genus, but denotes persistent young forms of Juniperus, Thuja, Cupressus, &c., in which the small scaly leaves of ordinary species are replaced by the slender, needle-like leaves, which stand out more or less at right angles from the branches. The flat branchlets of Cupressus, Thuja (arbor vitae), Thujopsis dolabrata (Japanese arbor vitae) are characteristic of certain types of conifers; in some cases the horizontal extension of the branches induces a dorsiventral structure. A characteristic feature of the genus Agathis (Dammara) the Kauri pine of New Zealand, is the deciduous habit of the branches; these become detached from the main trunk leaving a well-defined absciss-surface, which appears as a depressed circular scar on the stem. A new genus of conifers, Taiwania, has recently been described from the island of Formosa; it is said to agree in habit with the Japanese Cryptomeria, but the cones appear to have a structure which distinguishes them from those of any other genus.

The plants typically included in the Coniferae are a less uniform group than the Cycadaceae. Some authors use the term Coniferae in a limited way, referring only to those genera that have female flowers shaped like cones, while other genera with different types of flowers are classified under the Taxaceae and are often referred to as Taxads. To avoid confusion with the term Coniferae, we can use the class name Coniferales, which includes both the Coniferae (in the limited sense) and the Taxaceae. The most notable feature of most Coniferales is their regular pattern of monopodial branching and pyramidal shape. Araucaria imbricata, the Monkey-puzzle tree, A. excelsa, the Norfolk Island pine, along with many pines, firs, cedars, and other genera illustrate the pyramidal form. The massive redwood of California, Sequoia (Wellingtonia) gigantea, which is the tallest Gymnosperm, exemplifies the regular tapering main trunk and narrow pyramidal shape. The cypresses provide examples of tall and slender trees, similar in shape to Lombardy poplars. The common cypress (Cupressus sempervirens), found naturally in the mountains of Crete and Cyprus, is known for its long, spreading branches that give it a cedar-like appearance. Some conifers take on a pendulous or weeping form, for example, Picea excelsa var. virgata features main branches that extend horizontally and trail along the ground like snakes. Certain species of Pinus, yews (Taxus), and some other genera grow as bushes, lacking a single mast-like stem and instead having several repeatedly-branched leading shoots. The harsh conditions in Arctic regions have led to a dwarf form, where the main shoots grow close to the ground. The Japanese commonly cultivate artificially induced dwarf plants of Pinus, Cupressus, Sciadopitys (umbrella pine), and other genera. The die-off of older branches and the vigorous growth of shoots near the top of the stem create a tree shape seen in the stone pine of the Mediterranean region (Pinus Pinea), which Turner has famously depicted in his “Childe Harold’s Pilgrimage” and other works featuring Italian landscapes. Conifers frequently show instances where a lateral branch bends sharply upwards to replace an injured main trunk. An upward tendency in all the main lateral branches, known as fastigiation, is common in some species, leading to well-defined varieties, for example, Cephalotaxus pedunculata var. fastigiata; this fastigiate habit can occur as a mutation on a tree with spreading branches. Another variation from the norm is when the juvenile or seedling form persists in the adult tree; many coniferous plants recognized as species of Retinospora serve as examples of this. The name Retinospora does not represent a true genus but indicates persistent juvenile forms of Juniperus, Thuja, Cupressus, etc., in which the small scalelike leaves of typical species are replaced by slender, needle-like leaves that extend at more or less right angles from the branches. The flat branchlets of Cupressus, Thuja (arbor vitae), Thujopsis dolabrata (Japanese arbor vitae) are distinctive of certain conifer types; in some cases, the horizontal spread of the branches creates a dorsiventral structure. A notable feature of the genus Agathis (Dammara), the Kauri pine of New Zealand, is the deciduous nature of the branches; these detach from the main trunk, leaving a well-defined scar that appears as a depressed circular mark on the stem. A new conifer genus, Taiwania, has recently been identified from the island of Formosa; it is said to be similar in appearance to the Japanese Cryptomeria, but its cones have a structure that distinguishes them from those of any other genus.

With a few exceptions conifers are evergreen, and retain the leaves for several years (10 years in Araucaria imbricata, 8 to 10 in Picea excelsa, 5 in Taxus baccata; in Pinus the needles usually fall in October of their third year). The larch (Larix) Leaves. sheds its leaves in the autumn, in the Chinese larch (Pseudolarix Kaempferi) the leaves turn a bright yellow colour before falling. In the swamp cypress (Taxodium distichum) the tree assumes a rich brown colour in the autumn, and sheds its leaves together with the branchlets which bear them; deciduous branches occur also in some other species, e.g. Sequoia sempervirens (redwood), Thuja occidentalis, &c. The leaves of conifers are characterized by their small size, e.g. the needle-form represented by Pinus, Cedrus, Larix, &c., the linear flat or angular leaves, appressed to the branches, of Thuja, Cupressus, Libocedrus, &c. The flat and comparatively broad leaves of Araucaria imbricata, A. Bidwillii, and some species of the southern genus Podocarpus are traversed by several parallel veins, as are also the still larger leaves of Agathis, which may reach a length of several inches. In addition to the foliage-leaves several genera also possess scale-leaves of various kinds, represented by bud-scales in Pinus, Picea, &c., which frequently persist for a time at the base of a young shoot which has pushed its way through the yielding cap of protecting scales, while in some conifers the bud-scales adhere together, and after being torn near the base are carried up by the growing axis as a thin brown cap. The cypresses, araucarias and some other genera have no true bud-scales; in some species, e.g. Araucaria Bidwillii, the occurrence of small foliage-leaves, which have functioned as bud-scales, at intervals on the shoots affords a measure of seasonal growth. The occurrence of long and short shoots is a characteristic feature of many conifers. In Pinus the needles occur in pairs, or in clusters of 3 or 5 at the apex of a small and inconspicuous short shoot of limited growth (spur), which is enclosed at its base by a few scale-leaves, and borne on a branch of unlimited growth in the axil of a scale-leaf. In the Californian Pinus monophylla each spur bears usually one needle, but two are not uncommon; it would seem that rudiments of two needles are always produced, but, as a rule, only one develops into a needle. In Sciadopitys similar spurs occur, each bearing a single needle, which in its grooved surface and in the possession of a double vascular bundle bears traces of an origin from two needle-leaves. A peculiarity of these leaves is the inverse orientation of the vascular tissue; each of the two veins has its phloem next the upper and the xylem towards the lower surface of the leaf; this unusual position of the xylem and phloem may be explained by regarding the needle of Sciadopitys as being composed of a pair of leaves borne on a short axillary shoot and fused by their margins (fig. 15, A). Long and short shoots occur also in Cedrus and Larix, but in these genera the spurs are longer and stouter, and are not shed with the leaves; this kind of short shoot, by accelerated apical growth, often passes into the condition of a long shoot on which the leaves are scattered and separated by comparatively long internodes, instead of being crowded into tufts such as are borne on the ends of the spurs. In the genus Phyllocladus (New Zealand, &c.) there are no green foliage-leaves, but in their place flattened branches (phylloclades) borne in the axils of small scale-leaves. The cotyledons are often two in number, but sometimes (e.g. Pinus) as many as fifteen; these leaves are usually succeeded by foliage-leaves in the form of delicate spreading needles, and these primordial leaves are followed, sooner or later, by the adult type of leaf, except in Retinosporas, which retain the juvenile foliage. In addition to the first foliage-leaves and the adult type of leaf, there are often produced leaves which are intermediate both in shape and structure between the seedling and adult foliage. Dimorphism or heterophylly is fairly common. One of the best known examples is the Chinese juniper (Juniperus chinensis), in which branches with spinous leaves, longer and more spreading than the ordinary adult leaf, are often found associated with the normal type of branch. In some cases, e.g. Sequoia sempervirens, the fertile branches bear leaves which are less spreading than those on the vegetative shoots. Certain species of the southern hemisphere genus Dacrydium afford particularly striking instances of heterophylly, e.g. D. Kirkii of New Zealand, in which some branches bear small and appressed leaves, while in others the leaves are much longer and more spreading. A well-known fossil conifer from Triassic strata—Voltzia heterophylla—also illustrates a marked dissimilarity in the leaves of the same shoot. The variation in leaf-form and the tendency of leaves to arrange themselves in various ways on different branches of the same plant are features which it is important to bear in mind in the identification of fossil conifers. In this connexion we may note the striking resemblance between some of the New Zealand Alpine Veronicas, e.g. Veronica Hectori, V. cupressoides, &c. (also Polycladus cupressinus, a Composite), and some of the cypresses and other conifers with small appressed leaves. The long linear leaves of some species of Podocarpus, in which the lamina is traversed by a single vein, recall the pinnae of Cycas; the branches of some Dacrydiums and other forms closely resemble those of lycopods; these superficial resemblances, both between different genera of conifers and between conifers and other plants, coupled with the usual occurrence of fossil coniferous twigs without cones attached to them, render the determination of extinct types a very unsatisfactory and frequently an impossible task.

With a few exceptions, conifers are evergreen and keep their leaves for several years (10 years in Araucaria imbricata, 8 to 10 in Picea excelsa, and 5 in Taxus baccata; in Pinus, the needles usually fall off in October of their third year). The larch (Larix) loses its leaves in the autumn; in the Chinese larch (Pseudolarix Kaempferi), the leaves turn a bright yellow before falling. In the swamp cypress (Taxodium distichum), the tree takes on a rich brown color in the autumn and sheds its leaves along with the branchlets they grow on; some other species also have deciduous branches, such as Sequoia sempervirens (redwood), Thuja occidentalis, etc. The leaves of conifers are usually small, like the needle-shaped ones found in Pinus, Cedrus, Larix, etc., or the flat and angular leaves that are pressed against the branches in Thuja, Cupressus, Libocedrus, etc. The flat and relatively broad leaves of Araucaria imbricata, A. Bidwillii, and some species of the southern genus Podocarpus show several parallel veins, as do the even larger leaves of Agathis, which can reach several inches in length. Besides regular foliage leaves, several genera also have scale leaves of various types, represented by bud scales in Pinus, Picea, etc., which often remain for a while at the base of a new shoot that has broken through the protective scale cap. In some conifers, the bud scales stick together, and after being torn near the base, are carried up by the growing shoot as a thin brown cap. The cypresses, araucarias, and some other genera do not have true bud scales; in some species, like Araucaria Bidwillii, small foliage leaves that acted as bud scales appear intermittently on the shoots, indicating seasonal growth. The presence of long and short shoots is a key characteristic of many conifers. In Pinus, the needles grow in pairs or clusters of 3 or 5 at the tip of a small and inconspicuous short shoot with limited growth (spur), which is covered at its base by a few scale leaves and sits on a branch that can grow indefinitely in the axil of a scale leaf. In the Californian Pinus monophylla, each spur typically has one needle, but two are not uncommon; it appears that rudiments of two needles are always formed, but usually, just one develops into a needle. In Sciadopitys, similar spurs are found, each bearing a single needle that, due to its grooved surface and the presence of a double vascular bundle, shows evidence of having originated from two needle leaves. A unique feature of these leaves is the inverted arrangement of the vascular tissue; each of the two veins has its phloem next to the upper surface and the xylem towards the lower side of the leaf. This odd positioning of the xylem and phloem can be understood by viewing the needle of Sciadopitys as being made up of two leaves borne on a short axillary shoot and fused at their edges (fig. 15, A). Long and short shoots are also seen in Cedrus and Larix, but in these genera, the spurs are thicker and longer and do not fall with the leaves. This type of short shoot, due to accelerated apical growth, often transforms into a long shoot on which the leaves are scattered and spaced by relatively long internodes, rather than being tightly grouped as on the ends of the spurs. In the genus Phyllocladus (found in New Zealand, etc.), there are no green foliage leaves; instead, flattened branches (phylloclades) grow in the axils of small scale leaves. The cotyledons are often two in number, but sometimes (e.g., Pinus) can be as many as fifteen; these leaves are usually followed by foliage leaves that take the form of delicate spreading needles, and these initial leaves are eventually replaced, sooner or later, by the adult leaf type, except in Retinosporas, which keep their juvenile foliage. In addition to the first foliage leaves and the adult leaf type, there are often intermediate leaves that share characteristics of both the seedling and adult foliage. Dimorphism or heterophylly is relatively common. One well-known example is the Chinese juniper (Juniperus chinensis), where branches with spiky leaves that are longer and more spreading than the normal adult leaf are often found alongside the usual branch type. In some cases, like Sequoia sempervirens, the fertile branches have leaves that are less spreading than those on the vegetative shoots. Certain species of the southern hemisphere genus Dacrydium provide particularly striking examples of heterophylly, such as D. Kirkii from New Zealand, where some branches have small, pressed leaves while others feature much longer and spreading leaves. A well-known fossil conifer from Triassic layers — Voltzia heterophylla — also demonstrates notable differences in the leaves on the same shoot. The variation in leaf shape and the tendency for leaves to arrange themselves in different ways on various branches of the same plant are important features to consider when identifying fossil conifers. In this context, we can note the striking similarities between some of the New Zealand Alpine Veronicas, such as Veronica Hectori, V. cupressoides, etc. (also Polycladus cupressinus, a type of Composite) and some of the cypresses and other conifers with small, tightly pressed leaves. The long, narrow leaves of some Podocarpus species, where the lamina has a single vein, resemble the pinnae of Cycas; the branches of some Dacrydiums and other forms closely imitate those of lycopods. These surface similarities, both between different conifer genera and between conifers and other plants, along with the frequent occurrence of fossil conifer twigs without cones attached, make the identification of extinct types a very unsatisfactory and often impossible task.

A typical male flower consists of a central axis bearing numerous spirally-arranged sporophylls (stamens), each of which consists of a slender stalk (filament) terminating distally in a more or less prominent knob or triangular scale, and bearing Flowers. two or more pollen-sacs (microsporangia) on its lower surface. The pollen-grains of some genera (e.g. Pinus) are furnished with bladder-like extensions of the outer wall, which serve as aids to wind-dispersal. The stamens of Araucaria and Agathis are peculiar in bearing several long, and narrow free pollen-sacs; these may be compared with the sporangiophores of the horsetails (Equisetum); in Taxus (yew) the filament is attached to the centre of a large circular distal expansion, which bears several pollen-sacs on its under surface. In the conifers proper the female reproductive organs have the form of cones, which may be styled flowers or inflorescences according to different interpretations of their morphology. In the Taxaceae the flowers have a simpler structure. The female flowers of the Abietineae may be taken as representing a common type. A pine cone reaches maturity in two years; a single year suffices for the full development in Larix and several other genera. The axis of the cone bears numerous spirally disposed flat scales (cone-scales), each of which, if examined in a young cone, is found to be double, and to consist of a lower and an upper portion. The latter is a thin flat scale bearing a median ridge or keel (e.g. Abies), on each side of which is situated an inverted ovule, consisting of a nucellus surrounded by a single integument. As the cone grows in size and becomes woody the lower half of the cone-scale, which we may call the carpellary scale, may remain small, and is so far outgrown by the upper half (seminiferous scale) that it is hardly recognizable in the mature cone. In many species of Abies (e.g. Abies pectinata, &c.) the ripe cone differs from those of Pinus, Picea and Cedrus in the large size of the carpellary scales, which project as conspicuous thin appendages beyond the distal margins of the broader and more woody seminiferous scales; the long carpellary scale is a prominent feature also in the cone of the Douglas pine (Pseudotsuga Douglasii). The female flowers (cones) vary considerably in size; the largest are the more or less spherical cones of Araucaria—a single cone of A. imbricata may produce as many as 300 seeds, one seed to each fertile cone-scale—and the long pendent 760 cones, 1 to 2 ft. in length, of the sugar pine of California (Pinus Lambertiana) and other species. Smaller cones, less than an inch long, occur in the larch, Athrotaxis (Tasmania), Fitzroya (Patagonia and Tasmania), &c. In the Taxodieae and Araucarieae the cones are similar in appearance to those of the Abietineae, but they differ in the fact that the scales appear to be single, even in the young condition; each cone-scale in a genus of the Taxodiinae (Sequoia, &c.) bears several seeds, while in the Araucariinae (Araucaria and Agathis) each scale has one seed. The Cupressineae have cones composed of a few scales arranged in alternate whorls; each scale bears two or more seeds, and shows no external sign of being composed of two distinct portions. In the junipers the scales become fleshy as the seeds ripen, and the individual scales fuse together in the form of a berry. The female flowers of the Taxaceae assume another form; in Microcachrys (Tasmania) the reproductive structures are spirally disposed, and form small globular cones made up of red fleshy scales, to each of which is attached a single ovule enclosed by an integument and partially invested by an arillus; in Dacrydium the carpellary leaves are very similar to the foliage leaves—each bears one ovule with two integuments, the outer of which constitutes an arillus. Finally in the yew, as a type of the family Taxeae, the ovules occur singly at the apex of a lateral branch, enclosed when ripe by a conspicuous red or yellow fleshy arillus, which serves as an attraction to animals, and thus aids in the dispersal of the seeds.

A typical male flower has a central axis with many spirally arranged sporophylls (stamens). Each stamen has a slender stalk (filament) that ends in a noticeable knob or triangular scale and has two or more pollen-sacs (microsporangia) on its lower side. The pollen grains of some genera (e.g., Pinus) have bladder-like extensions of the outer wall, which help with wind dispersal. The stamens of Araucaria and Agathis are unique because they have several long, narrow free pollen-sacs; these can be compared to the sporangiophores of horsetails (Equisetum). In Taxus (yew), the filament connects to a large circular expansion at the end, which has several pollen-sacs on its underside. In true conifers, the female reproductive structures are cone-shaped, and depending on how you interpret their morphology, they may be called flowers or inflorescences. In the Taxaceae, the flowers have a simpler design. The female flowers of the Abietineae represent a common type. A pine cone takes two years to mature, while a single year is enough for full development in Larix and some other genera. The cone's axis

(C and D after Worsdell.)

Fig. 15.—Diagrammatic treatment of:

Fig. 15.—Diagram showing:

A, Double needle of Sciadopitys (a, a, leaves; b, shoot; Br, bract).

A, Double needle of Sciadopitys (a, a, leaves; b, shoot; Br, bract).

B, seminiferous scale as leaf of axillary shoot (b, shoot; Sc, seminiferous scale; Br, bract).

B, seminiferous scale as a leaf of the axillary shoot (b, shoot; Sc, seminiferous scale; Br, bract).

C, seminiferous scale as fused pair of leaves (l1, l2, l3, first, second and third leaves; b, shoot; Br, bract).

C, seminiferous scale as a fused pair of leaves (l1, l2, l3, first, second, and third leaves; b, shoot; Br, bract).

D, cone-scale of Araucaria (n, nucellus; i, integument; x, xylem).

D, cone-scale of Araucaria (n, nucellus; i, integument; x, xylem).

Fig. 16.—Abnormal Cone of Pinus rigida. (After Masters.)

It is important to draw attention to some structural features exhibited by certain cone-scales, in which there is no external sign indicative of the presence of a carpellary and a seminiferous scale. In Araucaria Cookii and some allied species each Morphology of female flower. scale has a small pointed projection from its upper face near the distal end; the scales of Cunninghamia (China) are characterized by a somewhat ragged membranous projection extending across the upper face between the seeds and the distal end of the scale; in the scales of Athrotaxis (Tasmania) a prominent rounded ridge occupies a corresponding position. These projections and ridges may be homologous with the seminiferous scale of the pines, firs, cedars, &c. The simplest interpretation of the cone of the Abietineae is that which regards it as a flower consisting of an axis bearing several open carpels, which in the adult cone may be large and prominent or very small, the scale bearing the ovules being regarded as a placental outgrowth from the flat and open carpel. In Araucaria the cone-scale is regarded as consisting of a flat carpel, of which the placenta has not grown out into the scale-like structure. The seminiferous scale of Pinus, &c., is also spoken of sometimes as a ligular outgrowth from the carpellary leaf. Robert Brown was the first to give a clear description of the morphology of the Abietineous cone in which carpels bear naked ovules; he recognized gymnospermy as an important distinguishing feature in conifers as well as in cycads. Another view is to regard the cone as an inflorescence, each carpellary scale being a bract bearing in its axil a shoot the axis of which has not been developed; the seminiferous scale is believed to represent either a single leaf or a fused pair of leaves belonging to the partially suppressed axillary shoot. In 1869 van Tieghem laid stress on anatomical evidence as a key to the morphology of the cone-scales; he drew attention to the fact that the collateral vascular bundles of the seminiferous scale are inversely orientated as compared with those of the carpellary scale; in the latter the xylem of each bundle is next the upper surface, while in the seminiferous scale the phloem occupies that position. The conclusion drawn from this was that the seminiferous scale (fig. 15, B, Sc) is the first and only leaf of an axillary shoot (b) borne on that side of the shoot, the axis of which is suppressed, opposite the subtending bract (fig. 15, A, B, C, Br). Another view is to apply to the seminiferous scale an explanation similar to that suggested by von Mohl in the case of the double needle of Sciadopitys, and to consider the seed-bearing scale as being made up of a pair of leaves (fig. 15, A, a, a) of an axillary shoot (b) fused into one by their posterior margins (fig. 15, A). The latter view receives support from abnormal cones in which carpellary scales subtend axillary shoots, of which the first two leaves (fig. 15, C, l1, l1) are often harder and browner than the others; forms have been described transitional between axillary shoots, in which the leaves are separate, and others in which two of the leaves are more or less completely fused. In a young cone the seminiferous scale appears as a hump of tissue at the base or in the axil of the carpellary scale, but Celakovský, a strong supporter of the axillary-bud theory, attaches little or no importance to this kind of evidence, regarding the present manner of development as being merely an example of a short cut adopted in the course of evolution, and replacing the original production of a branch in the axil of each carpellary scale. Eichler, one of the chief supporters of the simpler view, does not recognize in the inverse orientation of the vascular bundles an argument in support of the axillary-bud theory, but points out that the seminiferous scale, being an outgrowth from the surface of the carpellary scale, would, like outgrowths from an ordinary leaf, naturally have its bundles inversely orientated. In such cone-scales as show little or no external indication of being double in origin, e.g. Araucaria (fig. 15, D) Sequoia, &c., there are always two sets of bundles; the upper set, having the phloem uppermost, as in the seminiferous scale of Abies or Pinus, are regarded as belonging to the outgrowth from the carpellary scale and specially developed to supply the ovules. Monstrous cones are fairly common; these in some instances lend support to the axillary-bud theory, and it has been said that this theory owes its existence to evidence furnished by abnormal cones. It is difficult to estimate the value of abnormalities as evidence bearing on morphological interpretation; the chief danger lies perhaps in attaching undue weight to them, but there is also a risk of minimizing their importance. Monstrosities at least demonstrate possible lines of development, but when the abnormal forms of growth in various directions are fairly evenly balanced, trustworthy deductions become difficult. The occurrence of buds in the axils of carpellary scales may, however, simply mean that buds, which are usually undeveloped in the axils of sporophylls, occasionally afford evidence of their existence. Some monstrous cones lend no support to the axillary-bud theory. In Larix the axis of the cone often continues its growth; similarly in Cephalotaxus the cones are often proliferous. (In rare cases the proliferated portion produces male flowers in the leaf-axils.) In Larix the carpellary scale may become leafy, and the seminiferous scale may disappear. Androgynous cones may be produced, as in the cone of Pinus rigida (fig. 16), in which the lower part bears stamens and the upper portion carpellary and seminiferous scales. An interesting case has been figured by Masters, in which scales of a cone of Cupressus Lawsoniana bear ovules on the upper surface and stamens on the lower face. One argument that has been adduced in support of the axillary bud theory is derived from the Palaeozoic type Cordaites, in which each ovule occurs on an axis borne in the axil of a bract. The whole question is still unsolved, and perhaps insoluble. It may be that the interpretation of the female cone of the Abietineae as an inflorescence, which finds favour with many botanists, cannot be applied to the cones of Agathis and Araucaria. Without expressing any decided opinion as to the morphology of the double cone-scale of the Abietineae, preference may be felt in favour of regarding the cone-scale of the Araucarieae as a simple carpellary leaf bearing a single ovule. A discussion of this question may be found in a paper on the Araucarieae by Seward and Ford, published in the Transactions of the Royal Society of London (1906). Cordaites is an extinct type which in certain respects resembles Ginkgo, cycads and the Araucarieae, but its agreement with true conifers is probably too remote to justify our attributing much weight to the bearing of the morphology of its female flowers on the interpretation of that of the Coniferae. The greater simplicity of the Eichler theory may prejudice us in its favour; but, on the other hand, the arguments advanced in favour of the axillary-bud theories are perhaps not sufficiently cogent to lead us to accept an explanation based chiefly on the uncertain evidence of monstrosities.

It’s important to highlight some structural features found in certain cone scales that don’t show any external signs of having a carpellary or seminiferous scale. In Araucaria Cookii and related species, each scale has a small pointed projection from its upper face near the end; the scales of Cunninghamia (China) have a somewhat ragged membranous projection stretching across the upper face between the seeds and the end of the scale; in the scales of Athrotaxis (Tasmania), there’s a prominent rounded ridge in the same area. These projections and ridges may correspond to the seminiferous scale in pines, firs, cedars, etc. The simplest way to understand the cone of the Abietineae is to see it as a flower with an axis supporting several open carpels, which in the mature cone can be large and noticeable or very small, where the scale containing the ovules is viewed as a growth from the flat and open carpel. In Araucaria, the cone scale is seen as a flat carpel, where the placenta hasn’t grown into the scale-like structure. The seminiferous scale of Pinus and others is sometimes described as an outgrowth from the carpellary leaf. Robert Brown was the first to clearly describe the structure of the Abietineous cone, where carpels bear naked ovules; he recognized gymnospermy as an important distinguishing feature in both conifers and cycads. Another perspective views the cone as an inflorescence, with each carpellary scale acting as a bract that holds an axillary shoot whose axis hasn’t developed; the seminiferous scale is thought to represent either a single leaf or a fused pair of leaves from the partly suppressed axillary shoot. In 1869, van Tieghem emphasized anatomical evidence as crucial to understanding the morphology of cone scales; he pointed out that the collateral vascular bundles of the seminiferous scale are oriented differently compared to those of the carpellary scale; in the latter, the xylem of each bundle is next to the upper surface, while in the seminiferous scale, the phloem is in that position. The conclusion was that the seminiferous scale (fig. 15, B, Sc) is the first and only leaf of an axillary shoot (b) on that side of the shoot, where its axis is suppressed, opposite the bract (fig. 15, A, B, C, Br). Another theory applies a similar explanation to the seminiferous scale as that which von Mohl suggested for the double needle of Sciadopitys, considering the seed-bearing scale to be made up of a pair of leaves (fig. 15, A, a, a) from an axillary shoot (b) fused together at their back margins (fig. 15, A). This perspective is supported by abnormal cones where carpellary scales underneath are axillary shoots, of which the first two leaves (fig. 15, C, l1, l1) are often tougher and darker than the others; some forms show transition between separate axillary shoots and those where two leaves are mostly fused. In a young cone, the seminiferous scale appears as a lump of tissue at the base or in the axil of the carpellary scale, but Celakovský, a strong supporter of the axillary-bud theory, considers this evidence to be minor, viewing the current way of development as just a shortcut taken in evolution, replacing the original formation of a branch in the axil of each carpellary scale. Eichler, a key supporter of the simpler view, does not see the inverted arrangement of the vascular bundles as evidence supporting the axillary-bud theory, pointing out that the seminiferous scale, as a growth from the carpellary scale's surface, would have its bundles oriented inversely like any other normal leaf growth. In those cone scales that show little or no external sign of being double in origin, like Araucaria (fig. 15, D) or Sequoia, there are always two sets of bundles; the upper set, with the phloem on top, as in the seminiferous scale of Abies or Pinus, is considered part of the outgrowth from the carpellary scale tailored to provide for the ovules. Monstrous cones are relatively common; some of these lend support to the axillary-bud theory, and it has been stated that this theory exists partly due to evidence from abnormal cones. It’s tough to gauge the relevance of abnormalities as evidence impacting morphological interpretation; the main risk is perhaps giving them too much weight, but there’s also a danger in downplaying their significance. At the very least, monstrosities illustrate possible developmental pathways, yet when various abnormal growth patterns are balanced, reliable conclusions become hard to draw. The presence of buds in the axils of carpellary scales may simply mean that buds, which usually remain undeveloped in the axils of sporophylls, sometimes reveal their existence. Some monstrous cones do not support the axillary-bud theory. In Larix, the cone’s axis often continues to grow; likewise, in Cephalotaxus, cones often have proliferative growth. (In rare instances, the proliferated portion can produce male flowers in the leaf axils.) In Larix, the carpellary scale can become leafy, and the seminiferous scale may vanish. Androgynous cones can appear, as in the cone of Pinus rigida (fig. 16), where the lower part has stamens and the upper part has carpellary and seminiferous scales. An interesting case illustrated by Masters shows a cone of Cupressus Lawsoniana with ovules on the upper surface and stamens on the lower. One argument supporting the axillary bud theory comes from the Paleozoic type Cordaites, where each ovule appears on an axis found in the axil of a bract. This entire issue remains unresolved and may be unsolvable. It’s possible that the understanding of the female cone of the Abietineae as an inflorescence, a concept many botanists prefer, doesn’t apply to the cones of Agathis and Araucaria. Without taking a strong stance on the morphology of the double cone scale of the Abietineae, there seems to be a preference for viewing the cone scale of the Araucarieae as a simple carpellary leaf supporting a single ovule. This debate can be found in a paper on the Araucarieae by Seward and Ford, published in the Transactions of the Royal Society of London (1906). Cordaites is an extinct type that somewhat resembles Ginkgo, cycads, and the Araucarieae, but its similarity with true conifers is likely too distant to assign much significance to its morphological influence on that of Coniferae. The greater simplicity of the Eichler theory might skew our view in its favor; however, the arguments for the axillary-bud theories may not be convincing enough to accept an explanation primarily based on the uncertain evidence from monstrosities.

A pollen-grain when first formed from its mother-cell consists of a single cell; in this condition it may be carried to the nucellus of the ovule (e.g. Taxus, Cupressus, &c.), or more usually (Pinus, Larix, &c.) it reaches maturity before the dehiscence Micro-spores and megaspores. of the microsporangium. The nucleus of the microspore divides and gives rise to a small cell within the large cell, a second small cell is then produced; this is the structure of the ripe pollen-grain in some conifers (Taxus, &c.). The large cell grows out as a pollen-tube; the second of the two small cells (body-cell) wanders into the tube, followed by the nucleus of the first small cell (stalk-cell). In Taxus the body-cell eventually divides into two, in which the products of division are of unequal size, the larger constituting the male generative cell, which fuses with the nucleus of the egg-cell. In Juniperus the products of division of the 761 body-cell are equal, and both function as male generative cells. In the Abietineae cell-formation in the pollen-grain is carried farther. Three small cells occur inside the cavity of the microspore; two of them collapse and the third divides into two, forming a stalk-cell and a larger body-cell. The latter ultimately divides in the apex of the pollen-tube into two non-motile generative cells. Evidence has lately been adduced of the existence of numerous nuclei in the pollen-tubes of the Araucarieae, and it seems probable that in this as in several other respects this family is distinguished from other members of the Coniferales. The precise method of fertilization in the Scots Pine was followed by V. H. Blackman, who also succeeded in showing that the nuclei of the sporophyte generation contain twice as many chromosomes as the nuclei of the gametophyte. Other observers have in recent years demonstrated a similar relation in other genera between the number of chromosomes in the nuclei of the two generations. The ovule is usually surrounded by one integument, which projects beyond the tip of the nucellus as a wide-open lobed funnel, which at the time of pollination folds inwards, and so assists in bringing the pollen-grains on to the nucellus. In some conifers (e.g. Taxus, Cephalotaxus, Dacrydium, &c.) the ordinary integument is partially enclosed by an arillus or second integument. It is held by some botanists (Celakovský) that the seminiferous scale of the Abietineae is homologous with the arillus or second integument of the Taxaceae, but this view is too strained to gain general acceptance. In Araucaria and Saxegothaea the nucellus itself projects beyond the open micropyle and receives the pollen-grains direct. During the growth of the cell which forms the megaspore the greater part of the nucellus is absorbed, except the apical portion, which persists as a cone above the megaspore; the partial disorganization of some of the cells in the centre of the nucellar cone forms an irregular cavity, which may be compared with the larger pollen-chamber of Ginkgo and the cycads. In each ovule one megaspore comes to maturity, but, exceptionally, two may be present (e.g. Pinus sylvestris). It has been shown by Lawson that in Sequoia sempervirens (Annals of Botany, 1904) and by other workers in the genera that several megaspores may attain a fairly large size in one prothallus. The megaspore becomes filled with tissue (prothallus), and from some of the superficial cells archegonia are produced, usually three to five in number, but in rare cases ten to twenty or even sixty may be present. In the genus Sequoia there may be as many as sixty archegonia (Arnoldi and Lawson) in one megaspore; these occur either separately or in some parts of the prothallus they may form groups as in the Cupressineae; they are scattered through the prothallus instead of being confined to the apical region as in the majority of conifers. Similarly in the Araucarieae and in Widdringtonia the archegonia are numerous and scattered and often sunk in the prothallus tissue. In Libocedrus decurrens (Cupressineae) Lawson describes the archegonia as varying in number from 6 to 24 (Annals of Botany xxi., 1907). An archegonium consists of a large oval egg-cell surmounted by a short neck composed of one or more tiers of cells, six to eight cells in each tier. Before fertilization the nucleus of the egg-cell divides and cuts off a ventral canal-cell; this cell may represent a second egg-cell. The egg-cells of the archegonia may be in lateral contact (e.g. Cupressineae) or separated from one another by a few cells of the prothallus, each ovum being immediately surrounded by a layer of cells distinguished by their granular contents and large nuclei. During the development of the egg-cell, food material is transferred from these cells through the pitted wall of the ovum. The tissue at the apex of the megaspore grows slightly above the level of the archegonia, so that the latter come to lie in a shallow depression. In the process of fertilization the two male generative nuclei, accompanied by the pollen-tube nucleus and that of the stalk-cell, pass through an open pit at the apex of the pollen-tube into the protoplasm of the ovum. After fertilization the nucleus of the egg divides, the first stages of karyokinesis being apparent even before complete fusion of the male and female nuclei has occurred. The result of this is the production of four nuclei, which eventually take up a position at the bottom of the ovum and become separated from one another by vertical cell-walls; these nuclei divide again, and finally three tiers of cells are produced, four in each tier. In the Abietineae the cells of the middle tier elongate and push the lowest tier deeper into the endosperm; the cells of the bottom tier may remain in lateral contact and produce together one embryo, or they may separate (Pinus, Juniperus, &c.) and form four potential embryos. The ripe albuminous seed contains a single embryo with two or more cotyledons. The seeds of many conifers are provided with large thin wings, consisting in some genera (e.g. Pinus) of the upper cell-layers of the seminiferous scale, which have become detached and, in some cases, adhere loosely to the seed as a thin membrane; the loose attachment may be of use to the seeds when they are blown against the branches of trees, in enabling them to fall away from the wing and drop to the ground. The seeds of some genera depend on animals for dispersal, the carpellary scale (Microcachrys) or the outer integument being brightly coloured and attractive. In some Abietineae (e.g. Pinus and Picea)—in which the cone-scales persist for some time after the seeds are ripe—the cones hang down and so facilitate the fall of the seeds; in Cedrus, Araucaria and Abies the scales become detached and fall with the seeds, leaving the bare vertical axis of the cone on the tree. In all cases, except some species of Araucaria (sect. Colymbea) the germination is epigean. The seedling plants of some Conifers (e.g. Araucaria imbricata) are characterized by a carrot-shaped hypocotyl, which doubtless serves as a food-reservoir.

A pollen grain, when first formed from its mother cell, consists of a single cell. In this state, it may be carried to the nucellus of the ovule (e.g. Taxus, Cupressus, etc.), or more commonly (Pinus, Larix, etc.), it reaches maturity before the microsporangium opens. The nucleus of the microspore divides, resulting in a small cell inside the larger cell. A second small cell is then produced; this is the makeup of the ripe pollen grain in some conifers (Taxus, etc.). The large cell grows out to form a pollen tube; the second of the two small cells (body cell) moves into the tube, followed by the nucleus of the first small cell (stalk cell). In Taxus, the body cell eventually divides into two, with the products of division being of different sizes—the larger one becoming the male generative cell that fuses with the nucleus of the egg cell. In Juniperus, the products of division of the body cell are equal, and both act as male generative cells. In the Abietineae, cell formation in the pollen grain progresses further. Three small cells appear inside the microspore cavity; two of them collapse while the third divides into a stalk cell and a larger body cell. The latter ultimately divides at the tip of the pollen tube into two non-motile generative cells. Recently, evidence has been found of numerous nuclei in the pollen tubes of the Araucarieae, suggesting that this family is different from other members of the Coniferales in several ways. The exact method of fertilization in the Scots Pine was studied by V. H. Blackman, who also demonstrated that the nuclei of the sporophyte generation have twice as many chromosomes as those of the gametophyte. Other researchers have shown similar relationships in different genera regarding the number of chromosomes in the nuclei of the two generations. The ovule is typically surrounded by one integument, which extends beyond the tip of the nucellus as a wide-open lobed funnel; during pollination, it folds inward to help direct the pollen grains onto the nucellus. In some conifers (e.g. Taxus, Cephalotaxus, Dacrydium, etc.), the ordinary integument is partially covered by an arillus or second integument. Some botanists (Celakovský) argue that the seminiferous scale of the Abietineae is homologous with the arillus or second integument of the Taxaceae, but this idea is too far-fetched for widespread acceptance. In Araucaria and Saxegothaea, the nucellus extends beyond the open micropyle and directly receives the pollen grains. As the cell that forms the megaspore grows, most of the nucellus is absorbed, except for the apical part, which remains as a cone above the megaspore; the partial breakdown of some cells in the center of this nucellar cone forms an irregular cavity, comparable to the larger pollen chamber of Ginkgo and the cycads. In each ovule, one megaspore matures, but occasionally, two may be present (e.g. Pinus sylvestris). Lawson has shown that in Sequoia sempervirens (Annals of Botany, 1904) and by others in various genera, several megaspores may reach a considerable size in one prothallus. The megaspore fills with tissue (prothallus), and archegonia are produced from some of the superficial cells, usually numbering three to five, but in rare cases, ten to twenty or even sixty may be seen. In the genus Sequoia, there can be as many as sixty archegonia (Arnoldi and Lawson) in a single megaspore; these may occur separately or form groups in certain areas of the prothallus, similar to the Cupressineae; they are scattered throughout the prothallus instead of being restricted to the apical region as in most conifers. Similarly, in the Araucarieae and in Widdringtonia, the archegonia are numerous and scattered, often embedded in the prothallus tissue. In Libocedrus decurrens (Cupressineae), Lawson reports the archegonia numbering between 6 to 24 (Annals of Botany xxi., 1907). An archegonium consists of a large oval egg cell topped by a short neck made up of one or more layers of cells, six to eight cells in each layer. Before fertilization, the nucleus of the egg cell divides and forms a ventral canal cell, which might represent a second egg cell. The egg cells of the archegonia may be in close contact (e.g. Cupressineae) or separated by a few cells of the prothallus, with each ovum immediately surrounded by a layer of cells characterized by their granular contents and large nuclei. During the development of the egg cell, nutrients are transferred from these cells through the pitted wall of the ovum. The tissue at the apex of the megaspore grows slightly above the level of the archegonia, so that the latter lie in a shallow depression. In the fertilization process, the two male generative nuclei, along with the pollen tube nucleus and that of the stalk cell, pass through an open pit at the top of the pollen tube into the ovum's protoplasm. After fertilization, the egg nucleus divides; the early stages of karyokinesis are observable even before the complete fusion of the male and female nuclei occurs. This leads to the generation of four nuclei, which eventually position themselves at the bottom of the ovum, separated by vertical cell walls; these nuclei then divide again, resulting in three layers of cells, four in each layer. In the Abietineae, the cells of the middle layer elongate, pushing the bottom layer deeper into the endosperm; the cells of the bottom layer may remain in contact and form a single embryo, or they may separate (Pinus, Juniperus, etc.) to create four potential embryos. The mature albuminous seed contains one embryo with two or more cotyledons. The seeds of many conifers have large, thin wings, which in some genera (e.g. Pinus) consist of the upper cell layers of the seminiferous scale that have detached and, in some cases, loosely adhere to the seed as a thin membrane; this loose attachment may help the seeds to drop away from the wing and fall to the ground when blown against branches. Some genera depend on animals for seed dispersal, with the carpellary scale (Microcachrys) or the outer integument being brightly colored and attractive. In some Abietineae (e.g. Pinus and Picea)—where the cone scales remain for some time after the seeds ripen—the cones hang down, facilitating seed release; in Cedrus, Araucaria, and Abies, the scales detach and fall with the seeds, leaving the bare vertical axis of the cone on the tree. In all instances, except for some species of Araucaria (sect. Colymbea), germination occurs above ground. The seedlings of certain conifers (e.g. Araucaria imbricata) are marked by a carrot-shaped hypocotyl, which likely serves as a food reservoir.

The roots of many conifers possess a narrow band of primary xylem-tracheids with a group of narrow spiral protoxylem-elements at each end (diarch). A striking feature in the roots of several genera, excluding the Abietineae, is the occurrence Anatomy. of thick and somewhat irregular bands of thickening on the cell-walls of the cortical layer next to the endodermis. These bands, which may serve to strengthen the central cylinder, have been compared with the netting surrounding the delicate wall of an inflated balloon. It is not always easy to distinguish a root from a stem; in some cases (e.g. Sequoia) the primary tetrarch structure is easily identified in the centre of an old root, but in other cases the primary elements are very difficult to recognize. The sudden termination of the secondary tracheids against the pith-cells may afford evidence of root-structure as distinct from stem-structure, in which the radial rows of secondary tracheids pass into the irregularly-arranged primary elements next the pith. The annual rings in a root are often less clearly marked than in the stem, and the xylem-elements are frequently larger and thinner. The primary vascular bundles in a young conifer stem are collateral, and, like those of a Dicotyledon, they are arranged in a circle round a central pith and enclosed by a common endodermis. It is in the nature of the secondary xylem that the Coniferales are most readily distinguished from the Dicotyledons and Cycadaceae; the wood is homogeneous in structure, consisting almost entirely of tracheids with circular or polygonal bordered pits on the radial walls, more particularly in the late summer wood. In many genera xylem-parenchyma is present, but never in great abundance. A few Dicotyledons, e.g. Drimys (Magnoliaceae) closely resemble conifers in the homogeneous character of the wood, but in most cases the presence of large spring vessels, wood-fibres and abundant parenchyma affords an obvious distinguishing feature.

The roots of many conifers have a narrow band of primary xylem tracheids with a group of narrow spiral protoxylem elements at each end (diarch). A notable characteristic in the roots of several genera, excluding the Abietineae, is the presence of thick and somewhat irregular bands of thickening on the cell walls of the cortical layer next to the endodermis. These bands may help strengthen the central cylinder and have been compared to the netting that surrounds the delicate wall of an inflated balloon. It’s not always easy to tell a root from a stem; in some instances (e.g. Sequoia), the primary tetrarch structure is easily recognized in the center of an old root, but in other cases, the primary elements are very hard to identify. The abrupt end of the secondary tracheids against the pith cells may indicate root structure distinct from stem structure, where the radial rows of secondary tracheids merge into the irregularly arranged primary elements next to the pith. The annual rings in a root are often less distinct than in the stem, and the xylem elements are usually larger and thinner. The primary vascular bundles in a young conifer stem are collateral, and like those in a Dicotyledon, they are arranged in a circle around a central pith and enclosed by a common endodermis. The secondary xylem is what most easily differentiates the Coniferales from Dicotyledons and Cycadaceae; the wood has a homogeneous structure, mostly made up of tracheids with circular or polygonal bordered pits on the radial walls, especially evident in the late summer wood. In many genera, xylem parenchyma is present, but never in large quantities. A few Dicotyledons, like Drimys (Magnoliaceae), closely resemble conifers in the homogeneous nature of their wood, but in most cases, the presence of large spring vessels, wood fibers, and abundant parenchyma provides a clear distinguishing feature.

The abundance of petrified coniferous wood in rocks of various ages has led many botanists to investigate the structure of modern genera with a view to determining how far anatomical characters may be used as evidence of generic distinctions. There are a few well-marked types of wood which serve as convenient standards of comparison, but these cannot be used except in a few cases to distinguish individual genera. The genus Pinus serves as an illustration of wood of a distinct type characterized by the absence of xylem-parenchyma, except such as is associated with the numerous resin-canals that occur abundantly in the wood, cortex and medullary rays; the medullary rays are composed of parenchyma and of horizontal tracheids with irregular ingrowths from their walls. In a radial section of a pine stem each ray is seen to consist in the median part of a few rows of parenchymatous cells with large oval simple pits in their walls, accompanied above and below by horizontal tracheids with bordered pits. The pits in the radial walls of the ordinary xylem-tracheids occur in a single row or in a double row, of which the pits are not in contact, and those of the two rows are placed on the same level. The medullary rays usually consist of a single tier of cells, but in the Pinus type of wood broader medullary rays also occur and are traversed by horizontal resin-canals. In the wood of Cypressus, Cedrus, Abies and several other genera, parenchymatous cells occur in association with the xylem-tracheids and take the place of the resin-canals of other types. In the Araucarian type of wood (Araucaria and Agathis) the bordered pits, which occur in two or three rows on the radial walls of the tracheids, are in mutual contact and polygonal in shape, the pits of the different rows are alternate and not on the same level; in this type of wood the annual rings are often much less distinct than in Cupressus, Pinus and other genera. In Taxus, Torreya (California and the Far East) and Cephalotaxus the absence of resin-canals and the presence of spiral thickening-bands on the tracheids constitute well-marked characteristics. An examination of the wood of branches, stems and roots of the same species or individual usually reveals a fairly wide variation in some of the characters, such as the abundance and size of the medullary rays, the size and arrangement of pits, the presence of wood-parenchyma—characters to which undue importance has often been attached in systematic anatomical work. The phloem consists of sieve-tubes, with pitted areas on the lateral as well as on the inclined terminal walls, phloem-parenchyma and, in some genera, fibres. In the Abietineae the phloem consists of parenchyma and sieve-tubes only, but in most other forms tangential rows of fibres occur in regular alternation with the parenchyma and sieve-tubes. The characteristic companion-cells of Angiosperms are represented by phloem-parenchyma cells with albuminous contents; other parenchymatous elements of the bast contain starch or crystals of calcium oxalate. When tracheids occur in the medullary rays of the xylem these are replaced in the phloem-region by irregular parenchymatous cells known as albuminous cells. Resin-canals, which occur abundantly in the xylem, phloem or cortex, are not found in the wood of the yew. Cephalotaxus (Taxeae) is also peculiar in having resin-canals in the pith (cf. Ginkgo). One form of Cephalotaxus is characterized by the presence of short tracheids in the pith, in shape like ordinary parenchyma, but in the possession of bordered pits and lignified walls agreeing with ordinary xylem-tracheids; it is probable that these short tracheids serve as reservoirs for storing rather than for conducting water. The vascular bundle entering the stem from a leaf with a single vein passes by a more or less direct course into the 762 central cylinder of the stem, and does not assume the girdle-like form characteristic of the cycadean leaf-trace. In species of which the leaves have more than one vein (e.g. Araucaria imbricata, &c.) the leaf-trace leaves the stele of the stem as a single bundle which splits up into several strands in its course through the cortex. In the wood of some conifers, e.g. Araucaria, the leaf-traces persist for a considerable time, perhaps indefinitely, and may be seen in tangential sections of the wood of old stems. The leaf-trace in the Coniferales is simple in its course through the stem, differing in this respect from the double leaf-trace of Ginkgo. A detailed account of the anatomical characters of conifers has been published by Professor D. P. Penhallow of Montreal and Dr. Gothan of Berlin which will be found useful for diagnostic purposes. The characters of leaves most useful for diagnostic purposes are the position of the stomata, the presence and arrangement of resin-canals, the structure of the mesophyll and vascular bundles. The presence of hypodermal fibres is another feature worthy of note, but the occurrence of these elements is too closely connected with external conditions to be of much systematic value. A pine needle grown in continuous light differs from one grown under ordinary conditions in the absence of hypodermal fibres, in the absence of the characteristic infoldings of the mesophyll cell-walls, in the smaller size of the resin-canals, &c. The endodermis in Pinus, Picea and many other genera is usually a well-defined layer of cells enclosing the vascular bundles, and separated from them by a tissue consisting in part of ordinary parenchyma and to some extent of isodiametric tracheids; but this tissue, usually spoken of as the pericycle, is in direct continuity with other stem-tissues as well as the pericycle. The occurrence of short tracheids in close proximity to the veins is a characteristic of coniferous leaves; these elements assume two distinct forms—(1) the short isodiametric tracheids (transfusion-tracheids) closely associated with the veins; (2) longer tracheids extending across the mesophyll at right angles to the veins, and no doubt functioning as representatives of lateral veins. It has been suggested that transfusion-tracheids represent, in part at least, the centripetal xylem, which forms a distinctive feature of cycadean leaf-bundles; these short tracheids form conspicuous groups laterally attached to the veins in Cunninghamia, abundantly represented in a similar position in the leaves of Sequoia, and scattered through the so-called pericycle in Pinus, Picea, &c. It is of interest to note the occurrence of precisely similar elements in the mesophyll of Lepidodendron leaves. An anatomical peculiarity in the veins of Pinus and several other genera is the continuity of the medullary rays, which extend as continuous plates from one end of the leaf to the other. The mesophyll of Pinus and Cedrus is characterized by its homogeneous character and by the presence of infoldings of the cell-walls. In many leaves, e.g. Abies, Tsuga, Larix, &c., the mesophyll is heterogeneous, consisting of palisade and spongy parenchyma. In the leaves of Araucaria imbricata, in which palisade-tissue occurs in both the upper and lower part of the mesophyll, the resin-canals are placed between the veins; in some species of Podocarpus (sect. Nageia) a canal occurs below each vein; in Tsuga, Torreya, Cephalotaxus, Sequoia, &c., a single canal occurs below the midrib; in Larix, Abies, &c., two canals run through the leaf parallel to the margins. The stomata are frequently arranged in rows, their position being marked by two white bands of wax on the leaf-surface.

The large amount of petrified conifer wood found in rocks of different ages has prompted many botanists to study the structure of modern genera to see how much anatomical features can indicate generic differences. There are a few well-defined types of wood that serve as useful standards for comparison, but these can only be used in a limited number of cases to differentiate between individual genera. The genus Pinus is a good example, showcasing wood with a distinct type characterized by a lack of xylem-parenchyma except for that associated with the many resin canals that are present in abundance in the wood, cortex, and medullary rays. The medullary rays consist of parenchyma and horizontal tracheids with irregular protrusions from their walls. In a radial section of a pine stem, each ray appears to consist mainly of a few rows of parenchymatous cells with large oval simple pits in their walls, with horizontal tracheids containing bordered pits above and below. The pits in the radial walls of the regular xylem-tracheids appear in single or double rows, with the pits not touching each other, and the two rows sitting on the same level. Medullary rays typically consist of a single layer of cells, but in Pinus wood, broader medullary rays can also be present and are crossed by horizontal resin canals. In the wood of Cypressus, Cedrus, Abies, and several other genera, parenchymatous cells occur alongside the xylem-tracheids, replacing the resin canals found in other types. In the Araucarian type of wood (Araucaria and Agathis), the bordered pits found in two or three rows on the radial walls of the tracheids are in contact with each other and are polygonal in shape, with the pits in the different rows alternating and not being on the same level; in this wood type, the annual rings are often much less distinct than in Cupressus, Pinus, and other genera. In Taxus, Torreya (California and the Far East), and Cephalotaxus, the lack of resin canals and the presence of spiral thickening bands on the tracheids are notable features. An examination of the wood from branches, stems, and roots of the same species or individual usually shows a significant amount of variation in some characteristics, such as the abundance and size of the medullary rays, the size and arrangement of pits, and the presence of wood-parenchyma—characteristics that have often been given excessive importance in systematic anatomical studies. The phloem consists of sieve tubes, which have pitted areas on the lateral and inclined terminal walls, phloem-parenchyma, and in some genera, fibers. In the Abietineae, the phloem consists only of parenchyma and sieve tubes, but in most other forms, tangential rows of fibers alternate regularly with the parenchyma and sieve tubes. The characteristic companion cells of Angiosperms are represented by phloem-parenchyma cells containing albuminous substances; other parenchymatous elements in the bast contain starch or crystals of calcium oxalate. When tracheids are present in the medullary rays of the xylem, they are replaced in the phloem region by irregular parenchymatous cells known as albuminous cells. Resin canals, which are abundant in the xylem, phloem, or cortex, are absent in the wood of yew. Cephalotaxus (Taxeae) is also unique for having resin canals in the pith (cf. Ginkgo). One type of Cephalotaxus is notable for having short tracheids in the pith that resemble ordinary parenchyma but have bordered pits and lignified walls typical of regular xylem tracheids; it is likely that these short tracheids act as reservoirs for storing rather than conducting water. The vascular bundle entering the stem from a leaf with a single vein travels through the central cylinder of the stem in a relatively direct line, without taking on the girdle-like shape characteristic of cycadean leaf traces. In species with leaves that have more than one vein (e.g. Araucaria imbricata, etc.), the leaf trace leaves the stem's stele as a single bundle that divides into several strands as it passes through the cortex. In some conifer woods, such as Araucaria, the leaf traces persist for quite a while, possibly indefinitely, and can be seen in tangential sections of the wood of older stems. The leaf trace in Coniferales runs simply through the stem, unlike the double leaf trace of Ginkgo. A detailed account of the anatomical features of conifers has been published by Professor D. P. Penhallow of Montreal and Dr. Gothan of Berlin, which will be useful for diagnostic purposes. The leaf characteristics most helpful for identification include the placement of stomata, the presence and arrangement of resin canals, and the structure of the mesophyll and vascular bundles. The presence of hypodermal fibers is another noteworthy feature, but the occurrence of these elements is too closely related to external conditions to be of much systematic value. A pine needle grown under continuous light differs from one grown under normal conditions in that it lacks hypodermal fibers, has no characteristic infoldings of the mesophyll cell walls, has smaller resin canals, etc. The endodermis in Pinus, Picea, and many other genera is generally a well-defined layer of cells surrounding the vascular bundles, separated from them by a tissue made up partly of ordinary parenchyma and somewhat of isodiametric tracheids; however, this tissue, commonly referred to as the pericycle, is in direct continuity with other stem tissues as well as the pericycle. The presence of short tracheids close to the veins is a feature of conifer leaves; these elements exist in two distinct forms—(1) the short isodiametric tracheids (transfusion-tracheids) closely associated with the veins; (2) longer tracheids that extend across the mesophyll at right angles to the veins and likely function as lateral vein representatives. It has been suggested that transfusion-tracheids partially represent the centripetal xylem, which is a distinctive feature of cycadean leaf bundles; these short tracheids form noticeable groups laterally attached to the veins in Cunninghamia, are abundantly present in a similar arrangement in the leaves of Sequoia, and are scattered throughout the so-called pericycle in Pinus, Picea, etc. It is interesting to note the occurrence of precisely similar elements in the mesophyll of Lepidodendron leaves. An anatomical peculiarity in the veins of Pinus and several other genera is the connectivity of the medullary rays, which run as continuous plates from one end of the leaf to the other. The mesophyll of Pinus and Cedrus is characterized by its uniform nature and the presence of infoldings in the cell walls. In many leaves, such as those of Abies, Tsuga, Larix, etc., the mesophyll is heterogeneous, consisting of palisade and spongy parenchyma. In the leaves of Araucaria imbricata, where palisade tissue occurs in both the upper and lower sections of the mesophyll, the resin canals are located between the veins; in some species of Podocarpus (sect. Nageia), a canal exists below each vein; in Tsuga, Torreya, Cephalotaxus, Sequoia, etc., a single canal occurs beneath the midrib; in Larix, Abies, etc., two canals run parallel to the edges of the leaf. The stomata are often arranged in rows, marked by two white bands of wax on the leaf surface.

The chief home of the Coniferales is in the northern hemisphere, where certain species occasionally extend into the Arctic circle and penetrate beyond the northern limit of dicotyledonous trees. Wide areas are often exclusively occupied by Distribution. conifers, which give the landscape a sombre aspect, suggesting a comparison with the forest vegetation of the Coal period. South of the tree-limit a belt of conifers stretches across north Europe, Siberia and Canada. In northern Europe this belt is characterized by such species as Picea excelsa (spruce), which extends south to the mountains of the Mediterranean region; Pinus sylvestris (Scottish fir), reaching from the far north to western Spain, Persia and Asia Minor; Juniperus communis, &c. In north Siberia Pinus Cembra (Cembra or Arolla Pine) has a wide range; also Abies sibirica (Siberian silver fir), Larix sibirica and Juniperus Sabina (savin). In the North American area Picea alba, P. nigra, Larix americana, Abies balsamea (balsam fir), Tsuga canadensis (hemlock spruce), Pinus Strobus (Weymouth pine), Thuja occidentalis (white cedar), Taxus canadensis are characteristic species. In the Mediterranean region occur Cupressus sempervirens, Pinus Pinea (stone pine), species of juniper, Cedrus atlantica, C. Libani, Callitris quadrivalvis, Pinus montana, &c. Several conifers of economic importance are abundant on the Atlantic side of North America—Juniperus virginiana (red cedar, used in the manufacture of lead pencils, and extending as far south as Florida), Taxodium distichum (swamp cypress), Pinus rigida (pitch pine), P. mitis (yellow pine), P. taeda, P. palustris, &c. On the west side of the American continent conifers play a still more striking rôle; among them are Chamaecyparis nutkaensis, Picea sitchensis, Libocedrus decurrens, Pseudotsuga Douglasii (Douglas fir), Sequoia sempervirens, S. gigantea (the only two surviving species of this generic type are now confined to a few localities in California, but were formerly widely spread in Europe and elsewhere), Pinus Coulteri, P. Lambertiana, &c. Farther south, a few representatives of such genera as Abies, Cupressus, Pinus and juniper are found in the Mexican Highlands, tropical America and the West Indies. In the far East conifers are richly represented; among them occur Pinus densiflora, Cryptomeria japonica, Cephalotaxus, species of Abies, Larix, Thujopsis, Sciadopitys verticillata, Pseudolarix Kaempferi, &c. In the Himalaya occur Cedrus deodara, Taxus, species of Cupressus, Pinus excelsa, Abies Webbiana, &c. The continent of Africa is singularly poor in conifers. Cedrus atlantica, a variety of Abies Pinsapo, Juniperus thurifera, Callitris quadrivalvis, occur in the north-west region, which may be regarded as the southern limit of the Mediterranean region. The greater part of Africa north of the equator is without any representatives of the conifers; Juniperus procera flourishes in Somaliland and on the mountains of Abyssinia; a species of Podocarpus occurs on the Cameroon mountains, and P. milanjiana is widely distributed in east tropical Africa. Widdringtonia Whytei, a species closely allied to W. juniperoides of the Cedarberg mountains of Cape Colony, is recorded from Nyassaland and from N.E. Rhodesia; while a third species, W. cupressoides, occurs in Cape Colony. Podocarpus elongata and P. Thunbergii (yellow wood) form the principal timber trees in the belt of forest which stretches from the coast mountains of Cape Colony to the north-east of the Transvaal. Libocedrus tetragona, Fitzroya patagonica, Araucaria brasiliensis, A. imbricata, Saxegothaea and others are met with in the Andes and other regions in South America. Athrotaxis and Microcachrys are characteristic Australian types. Phyllocladus occurs also in New Zealand, and species of Dacrydium, Araucaria, Agathis and Podocarpus are represented in Australia, New Zealand and the Malay regions.

The main home of the Coniferales is in the northern hemisphere, where some species occasionally reach into the Arctic circle and go beyond the northern limit of dicotyledonous trees. Large areas are often exclusively populated by Distribution. conifers, which give the landscape a gloomy look, reminiscent of the forest vegetation from the Coal period. South of the tree limit, a band of conifers stretches across northern Europe, Siberia, and Canada. In northern Europe, this band is noted for species like Picea excelsa (spruce), which extends south to the mountains of the Mediterranean region; Pinus sylvestris (Scottish pine), found from the far north to western Spain, Persia, and Asia Minor; and Juniperus communis, among others. In northern Siberia, Pinus Cembra (Cembra or Arolla Pine) has a wide distribution, alongside Abies sibirica (Siberian silver fir), Larix sibirica, and Juniperus Sabina (savin). In North America, characteristic species include Picea alba, P. nigra, Larix americana, Abies balsamea (balsam fir), Tsuga canadensis (hemlock spruce), Pinus Strobus (Weymouth pine), Thuja occidentalis (white cedar), and Taxus canadensis. In the Mediterranean region, you'll find Cupressus sempervirens, Pinus Pinea (stone pine), various juniper species, Cedrus atlantica, C. Libani, Callitris quadrivalvis, Pinus montana, and others. Several economically important conifers are abundant on the Atlantic side of North America—Juniperus virginiana (red cedar, used for lead pencil manufacturing, extending as far south as Florida), Taxodium distichum (swamp cypress), Pinus rigida (pitch pine), P. mitis (yellow pine), P. taeda, P. palustris, etc. On the west side of the American continent, conifers take on an even more significant role; among them are Chamaecyparis nutkaensis, Picea sitchensis, Libocedrus decurrens, Pseudotsuga Douglasii (Douglas fir), Sequoia sempervirens, and S. gigantea (the only two remaining species of this type are now confined to a few locations in California, but were previously widespread in Europe and elsewhere), Pinus Coulteri, P. Lambertiana, and others. Further south, a few representatives of genera like Abies, Cupressus, Pinus, and juniper can be found in the Mexican Highlands, tropical America, and the West Indies. In the far East, conifers are well represented; among them are Pinus densiflora, Cryptomeria japonica, Cephalotaxus, various species of Abies, Larix, Thujopsis, Sciadopitys verticillata, Pseudolarix Kaempferi, etc. In the Himalayas, you can find Cedrus deodara, Taxus, species of Cupressus, Pinus excelsa, Abies Webbiana, and others. The African continent is notably low in conifers. Cedrus atlantica, a variety of Abies Pinsapo, Juniperus thurifera, and Callitris quadrivalvis occur in the northwest region, which can be seen as the southern limit of the Mediterranean area. Most of Africa north of the equator lacks conifer representatives; Juniperus procera thrives in Somaliland and on the mountains of Abyssinia; a species of Podocarpus exists on the Cameroon mountains, and P. milanjiana is widely found in east tropical Africa. Widdringtonia Whytei, a species related to W. juniperoides from the Cedarberg mountains of Cape Colony, is recorded from Nyassaland and northeastern Rhodesia; a third species, W. cupressoides, is found in Cape Colony. Podocarpus elongata and P. Thunbergii (yellowwood) are the main timber trees in the forest belt stretching from the coastal mountains of Cape Colony to the northeast of Transvaal. Libocedrus tetragona, Fitzroya patagonica, Araucaria brasiliensis, A. imbricata, Saxegothaea, and others are found in the Andes and other regions of South America. Athrotaxis and Microcachrys are characteristic types from Australia. Phyllocladus is also found in New Zealand, and species of Dacrydium, Araucaria, Agathis, and Podocarpus are represented in Australia, New Zealand, and the Malay regions.

Gnetales.—These are trees or shrubs with simple leaves. The flowers are dioecious, rarely monoecious, provided with one or two perianths. The wood is characterized by the presence of vessels in addition to tracheids. There are no resin-canals. The three existing genera, usually spoken of as members of the Gnetales, differ from one another more than is consistent with their inclusion in a single family; we may therefore better express their diverse characters by regarding them as types of three separate families—(1) Ephedroideae, genus Ephedra; (2) Welwitschioideae, genus Welwitschia; (3) Gnetoideae, genus Gnetum. Our knowledge of the Gnetales leaves much to be desired, but such facts as we possess would seem to indicate that this group is of special importance as foreshadowing, more than any other Gymnosperms, the Angiospermous type. In the more heterogeneous structure of the wood and in the possession of true vessels the Gnetales agree closely with the higher flowering plants. It is of interest to note that the leaves of Gnetum, while typically Dicotyledonous in appearance, possess a Gymnospermous character in the continuous and plate-like medullary rays of their vascular bundles. The presence of a perianth is a feature suggestive of an approach to the floral structure of Angiosperms; the prolongation of the integument furnishes the flowers with a substitute for a stigma and style. The genus Ephedra, with its prothallus and archegonia, which are similar to those of other Gymnosperms, may be safely regarded as the most primitive of the Gnetales. In Welwitschia also the megaspore is filled with prothallus-tissue, but single egg-cells take the place of archegonia. In certain species of Gnetum described by Karsten the megaspore contains a peripheral layer of protoplasm, in which scattered nuclei represent the female reproductive cells; in Gnetum Gnemon a similar state of things exists in the upper half of the megaspore, while the lower half agrees with the megaspore of Welwitschia in being full of prothallus-tissue, which serves merely as a reservoir of food. Lotsy has described the occurrence of special cells at the apex of the prothallus of Gnetum Gnemon, which he regards as imperfect archegonia (fig. 17, C, a); he suggests they may represent vestigial structures pointing back to some ancestral form beyond the limits of the present group. The Gnetales probably had a separate origin from the other Gymnosperms; they carry us nearer to the Angiosperms, but we have as yet no satisfactory evidence that they represent a stage in the direct line of Angiospermic evolution. It is not improbable that the three genera of this ancient phylum survive as types of a blindly-ending branch of the Gymnosperms; but be that as it may, it is in the Gnetales more than in any other Gymnosperms that we find features which help us to obtain a dim prospect of the lines along which the Angiosperms may have been evolved.

Gnetophytes.—These are trees or shrubs with simple leaves. The flowers are mostly separate-gender (dioecious), and rarely have both genders (monoecious), equipped with one or two perianths. The wood is unique because it has vessels in addition to tracheids. There are no resin canals. The three genera currently classified as Gnetales differ more from each other than would be expected in a single family; it’s more accurate to think of them as examples of three distinct families—(1) Ephedroideae, genus Ephedra; (2) Welwitschioideae, genus Welwitschia; (3) Gnetoideae, genus Gnetum. Our understanding of Gnetales is still lacking, but the information we do have suggests that this group is especially significant as a precursor, more so than any other Gymnosperms, to the Angiosperm type. In the more diverse structure of the wood and the presence of true vessels, the Gnetales closely resemble the more advanced flowering plants. It’s interesting to note that the leaves of Gnetum, while looking typically like Dicotyledons, have a Gymnosperm-like quality in the continuous and plate-like medullary rays of their vascular bundles. The presence of a perianth suggests a similarity to the flower structure of Angiosperms; the extension of the integument provides a substitute for a stigma and style. The genus Ephedra, with its prothallus and archegonia, which are similar to those of other Gymnosperms, can be considered the most primitive of the Gnetales. In Welwitschia, the megaspore is filled with prothallus tissue, but single egg cells replace the archegonia. In certain species of Gnetum described by Karsten, the megaspore has a peripheral layer of protoplasm, with scattered nuclei representing the female reproductive cells; in Gnetum Gnemon, a similar situation exists in the upper half of the megaspore, while the lower half, like that of Welwitschia, is filled with prothallus tissue, which serves only as a food reservoir. Lotsy described the presence of specific cells at the apex of the prothallus of Gnetum Gnemon, which he thinks are imperfect archegonia (fig. 17, C, a); he suggests they might be vestigial structures hinting at an ancestral form beyond the current group. The Gnetales likely originated separately from other Gymnosperms; they connect us more closely to the Angiosperms, but we still lack strong evidence that they represent a step in the direct line of Angiospermic evolution. It’s likely that the three genera of this ancient group exist as examples of a branch of Gymnosperms that has no further evolution; however, it’s within the Gnetales, more than in any other Gymnosperms, that we find features helping us glimpse the possible paths along which Angiosperms may have evolved.

Ephedra.—This genus is the only member of the Gnetales represented in Europe. Its species, which are characteristic of warm temperate latitudes, are usually much-branched shrubs. The finer branches are green, and bear a close resemblance to the stems of Equisetum and to the slender twigs of Casuarina; the surface of the long internodes is marked by fine longitudinal ribs, and at the nodes are borne pairs of inconspicuous scale-leaves. The flowers are small, and borne on axillary shoots. A single male flower consists of an axis enclosed at the base by an inconspicuous perianth formed of two concrescent leaves and terminating in two, or as many as eight, shortly stalked or sessile anthers. The female flower is enveloped in a closely fitting sac-like investment, which must be regarded as a perianth; within this is an orthotropous ovule surrounded by a single integument prolonged upwards as a beak-like micropyle. The flower may be described as a bud bearing a pair of leaves which become fused and constitute a perianth, the apex of the shoot forming an ovule. In function the perianth may be compared with a unilocular ovary containing a single ovule; the projecting integument, which at the time of pollination secretes a drop of liquid, serves the same purpose as the style and stigma of an angiosperm. The megaspore 763 is filled with tissue as in typical Gymnosperms, and from some of the superficial cells 3 to 5 archegonia are developed, characterized by long multicellular necks. The archegonia are separated from one another, as in Pinus, by some of the prothallus-tissue, and the cells next the egg-cells (tapetal layer) contribute food-material to their development. After fertilization, some of the uppermost bracts below each flower become red and fleshy; the perianth develops into a woody shell, while the integument remains membranous. In some species of Ephedra, e.g. E. altissima, the fertilized eggs grow into tubular proembryos, from the tip of each of which embryos begin to be developed, but one only comes to maturity. In Ephedra helvetica, as described by Jaccard, no proembryo or suspensor is formed; but the most vigorous fertilized egg, after undergoing several divisions, becomes attached to a tissue, termed the columella, which serves the purpose of a primary suspensor; the columella appears to be formed by the lignification of certain cells in the central region of the embryo-sac. At a later stage some of the cells in the upper (micropylar) end of the embryo divide and undergo considerable elongation, serving the purpose of a secondary suspensor. The secondary wood of Ephedra consists of tracheids, vessels and parenchyma; the vessels are characterized by their wide lumen and by the large simple or slightly-bordered pits on their oblique end-walls.

Ephedra.—This genus is the only member of the Gnetales found in Europe. Its species, which thrive in warm temperate regions, are typically highly branched shrubs. The finer branches are green and closely resemble the stems of Equisetum and the slender twigs of Casuarina; the surface of the long internodes has fine longitudinal ridges, and at the nodes, pairs of inconspicuous scale leaves appear. The flowers are small and grow on axillary shoots. A single male flower has an axis at its base surrounded by a subtle perianth made of two fused leaves and ends with two to eight lightly stalked or sessile anthers. The female flower is enveloped in a snug, sac-like structure that acts as a perianth; inside it is an orthotropous ovule surrounded by a single integument that extends upward into a beak-like micropyle. The flower can be seen as a bud with a pair of leaves that merge to form a perianth, while the shoot's apex develops into an ovule. Functionally, the perianth resembles a unilocular ovary that contains a single ovule; the projecting integument, which secretes a drop of liquid during pollination, serves a similar role to the style and stigma of an angiosperm. The megaspore 763 is filled with tissue like in typical Gymnosperms, and some of the outer cells develop 3 to 5 archegonia, which have long multicellular necks. The archegonia are separated by some prothallus tissue, similar to Pinus, and the cells next to the egg cells (tapetal layer) provide nourishment for their development. After fertilization, some of the topmost bracts below each flower turn red and fleshy; the perianth turns into a woody shell while the integument remains membranous. In some species of Ephedra, like E. altissima, the fertilized eggs develop into tubular proembryos, and from the tip of each, embryos begin to form, but only one matures. In Ephedra helvetica, as noted by Jaccard, no proembryo or suspensor is formed; instead, the most robust fertilized egg undergoes several divisions and attaches to a tissue known as the columella, which serves as a primary suspensor; the columella seems to develop from the lignification of specific cells in the center of the embryo sac. Later, some cells at the upper (micropylar) end of the embryo divide and elongate significantly, functioning as a secondary suspensor. The secondary wood of Ephedra contains tracheids, vessels, and parenchyma; the vessels are noted for their wide lumen and large, simple or slightly bordered pits on their slanted end walls.

Fig. 17.Gnetum Gnemon. (After Lotsy.)

A, Female Flower. a, Imperfect Archegonia.

A, Female Flower. a, Imperfect Archegonia.

n, Nucellus. e, Partially developed Megaspore.

n, Nucellus. e, Partially developed Megaspore.

pc, Pollen-chamber. F, Fertile half.

pc, Pollen chamber. F, Fertile half.

i, Integument. S, Sterile half.

i, Skin. S, Sterile half.

p′, Inner Perianth. pt, Pollen-tube.

p′, Inner Perianth. pt, Pollen tube.

p″, Outer Perianth. z, Zygote.

p″, Outer Perianth. z, Zygote.

B, C, Megaspore. z′, Prothallus.

B, C, Megaspore. z′, Prothallus.

a, Imperfect Archegonia.

a, Imperfect Archegonia.

e, Partially developed Megaspore.

Partially developed megaspore.

F, Fertile half.

F, Fertile half.

S, Sterile half.

Sterile half.

pt, Pollen-tube.

Pollen tube

z, Zygote.

z, Zygote.

z′, Prothallus.

z′, Prothallus.

Gnetum.—This genus is represented by several species, most of which are climbing plants, both in tropical America and in warm regions of the Old World. The leaves, which are borne in pairs at the tumid nodes, are oval in form and have a Dicotyledonous type of venation. The male and female inflorescences have the form of simple or paniculate spikes. The spike of an inflorescence bears whorls of flowers at each node in the axils of concrescent bracts accompanied by numerous sterile hairs (paraphyses); in a male inflorescence numerous flowers occur at each node, while in a female inflorescence the number of flowers at each node is much smaller. A male flower consists of a single angular perianth, through the open apex of which the flower-axis projects as a slender column terminating in two anthers. The female flowers, which are more complex in structure, are of two types, complete and incomplete; the latter occur in association with male flowers in a male inflorescence. A complete female flower consists of a nucellus (fig. 17, A, n), surrounded by a single integument (fig. 17, A, i), prolonged upwards as a narrow tube and succeeded by an inner and an outer perianth (fig. 17, A, p′ and p″). The whole flower may be looked upon as an adventitious bud bearing two pairs of leaves; each pair becomes concrescent and forms a perianth, the apex of the shoot being converted into an orthotropous ovule. The incomplete female flowers are characterized by the almost complete suppression of the inner perianth. Several embryo-sacs (megaspores) are present in the nucellus of a young ovule, but one only attains full size, the smaller and partially developed megaspores (fig. 17, B and C, e) being usually found in close association with the surviving and fully-grown megaspore. In Gnetum Gnemon, as described by Lotsy, a mature embryo-sac contains in the upper part a large central vacuole and a peripheral layer of protoplasm, including several nuclei, which take the place of the archegonia of Ephedra; the lower part of the embryo-sac, separated from the upper by a constriction, is full of parenchyma. The upper part of the megaspore may be spoken of as the fertile half (fig. 17, B and C, F) and the lower part, which serves only as food-reservoir for the growing embryo, may be termed the sterile half (fig. 17, B and C, S). (Coulter, Bot. Gazette, xlvi., 1908, regards this tissue as belonging to the nucellus.) At the time of pollination the long tubular integument secretes a drop of fluid at its apex, which holds the pollen-grains, brought by the wind, or possibly to some extent by insect agency, and by evaporation these are drawn on to the top of the nucellus, where partial disorganization of the cells has given rise to an irregular pollen-chamber (fig. 17, A, pc). The pollen-tube, containing two generative and one vegetative nucleus, pierces the wall of the megaspore and then becomes swollen (fig. 17, B and C, pt); finally the two generative nuclei pass out of the tube and fuse with two of the nuclei in the fertile half of the megaspore. As the result of fertilization, the fertilized nuclei of the megaspore become surrounded by a cell-wall, and constitute zygotes, which may attach themselves either to the wall of the megaspore or to the end of a pollen-tube (fig. 17, C, z and z′); they then grow into long tubes or proembryos, which make their way towards the prothallus (C, z′), and eventually embryos are formed from the ends of the proembryo tubes. One embryo only comes to maturity. The embryo of Gnetum forms an out-growth from the hypocotyl, which serves as a feeder and draws nourishment from the prothallus. The fleshy outer portion of the seed is formed from the outer perianth, the woody shell being derived from the inner perianth. The climbing species of Gnetum are characterized by the production of several concentric cylinders of secondary wood and bast, the additional cambium-rings being products of the pericycle, as in Cycas and Macrozamia. The structure of the wood agrees in the main with that of Ephedra.

Gnetum.—This genus includes several species, mostly climbing plants found in tropical America and warm regions of the Old World. The leaves, which grow in pairs at swollen nodes, are oval-shaped and have a Dicotyledonous type of vein structure. The male and female flower clusters appear as simple or branched spikes. Each spike has whorls of flowers at every node in the gaps of fused bracts, accompanied by numerous sterile hairs (paraphyses); in male clusters, many flowers appear at each node, while female clusters have significantly fewer flowers. A male flower consists of a single angular perianth, with the flower stem extending through the open top as a slender column that ends in two anthers. The female flowers are more complex and can be complete or incomplete; the latter occur alongside male flowers in a male cluster. A complete female flower features a nucellus (fig. 17, A, n), surrounded by a single integument (fig. 17, A, i) which extends upwards into a narrow tube, followed by an inner and outer perianth (fig. 17, A, p′ and p″). The entire flower can be seen as a side bud with two pairs of leaves; each pair fuses to create a perianth, while the top part of the shoot transforms into a straight ovule. The incomplete female flowers almost completely lack the inner perianth. Several embryo sacs (megaspores) are present in the nucellus of a young ovule, but usually, only one grows to full size, while the smaller, partially developed megaspores (fig. 17, B and C, e) are often found close to the fully-grown megaspore. In Gnetum Gnemon, as described by Lotsy, a mature embryo sac contains a large central vacuole at the top and a peripheral layer of protoplasm with several nuclei, resembling the archegonia found in Ephedra; the lower section, separated from the upper by a constriction, is filled with parenchyma. The upper part of the megaspore can be referred to as the fertile half (fig. 17, B and C, F), while the lower part, which serves solely as a food reservoir for the developing embryo, is termed the sterile half (fig. 17, B and C, S). (Coulter, Bot. Gazette, xlvi., 1908, considers this tissue part of the nucellus.) During pollination, the long tubular integument releases a drop of fluid at its tip, which captures pollen grains carried by the wind, or possibly by insects, and through evaporation, these get drawn to the top of the nucellus, where some cells have broken down, creating an irregular pollen chamber (fig. 17, A, pc). The pollen tube, which contains two generative and one vegetative nucleus, penetrates the wall of the megaspore and then expands (fig. 17, B and C, pt); ultimately, the two generative nuclei exit the tube and fuse with two of the nuclei in the fertile half of the megaspore. As a result of fertilization, the fertilized nuclei of the megaspore develop a cell wall, forming zygotes that can attach to either the megaspore wall or the end of a pollen tube (fig. 17, C, z and z′); then they grow into long tubes or proembryos that move toward the prothallus (C, z′), eventually leading to embryo formation from the ends of the proembryo tubes. Only one embryo reaches maturity. The embryo of Gnetum grows as an outgrowth from the hypocotyl, which acts as a feeder and draws nutrients from the prothallus. The fleshy outer part of the seed comes from the outer perianth, while the woody shell is formed from the inner perianth. The climbing species of Gnetum are noted for producing several concentric layers of secondary wood and bast, with additional cambium rings being derived from the pericycle, similar to Cycas and Macrozamia. The wood structure mostly matches that of Ephedra.

Welwitschia (Tumboa).—This is by far the most remarkable member of the Gnetales, both as regards habit and the form of its flowers. In a supplement to the systematic work of Engler and Prantl the well-known name Welwitschia, instituted by Hooker in 1864 in honour of Welwitsch, the discoverer of the plant, is superseded by that of Tumboa, originally suggested by Welwitsch. The genus is confined to certain localities in Damaraland and adjoining territory on the west coast of tropical South Africa. A well-grown plant projects less than a foot above the surface of the ground; the stem, which may have a circumference of more than 12 ft., terminates in a depressed crown resembling a circular table with a median groove across the centre and prominent broad ridges concentric with the margin. The thick tuberous stem becomes rapidly narrower, and passes gradually downwards into a tap-root. A pair of small strap-shaped leaves succeed the two cotyledons of the seedling, and persist as the only leaves during the life of the plant; they retain the power of growth in their basal portion, which is sunk in a narrow groove near the edge of the crown, and the tough lamina, 6 ft. in length, becomes split into narrow strap-shaped or thong-like strips which trail on the ground. Numerous circular pits occur on the concentric ridges of the depressed and wrinkled crown, marking the position of former inflorescences borne in the leaf-axil at different stages in the growth of the plant. An inflorescence has the form of a dichotomously-branched cyme bearing small erect cones; those containing the female flowers attain the size of a fir-cone, and are scarlet in colour. Each cone consists of an axis, on which numerous broad and thin bracts are arranged in regular rows; in the axil of each bract occurs a single flower; a male flower is enclosed by two opposite pairs of leaves, forming a perianth surrounding a central sterile ovule encircled by a ring of stamens united below, but free distally as short filaments, each of which terminates in a trilocular anther. The integument of the sterile ovule is prolonged above the nucellus as a spirally-twisted tube expanded at its apex into a flat stigma-like organ. A complete and functional female flower consists of a single ovule with two integuments, the inner of which is prolonged into a narrow tubular micropyle, like that in the flower of Gnetum. The megaspore of Welwitschia is filled with a prothallus-tissue before fertilization, and some of the prothallus-cells function as egg-cells; these grow upwards as long tubes into the apical region of the nucellus, where they come into contact with the pollen-tubes. After the egg-cells have been fertilized by the non-motile male cells they grow into tubular proembryos, producing terminal embryos. The stem is traversed by numerous collateral bundles, which have a limited growth, and are constantly replaced by new bundles developed from strands of secondary meristem. One of the best-known anatomical characteristics of the genus is the occurrence of numerous spindle-shaped or branched fibres with enormously-thickened walls studded with crystals of calcium oxalate. Additional information has been published by Professor Pearson of Cape Town based on material collected in Damaraland in 1904 and 1906-1907. In 1906 he gave an account of the early stages of development of the male and female organs and, among other interesting statements in regard to the general biology of Welwitschia, he expressed the opinion that, as Hooker suspected, the ovules are pollinated by insect-agency. In a later paper Pearson considerably extended our knowledge of the reproduction and gametophyte of this genus.

Welwitschia (Tumboa).—This is by far the most remarkable member of the Gnetales, both in terms of its growth form and flower structure. In a supplement to the systematic work of Engler and Prantl, the well-known name Welwitschia, introduced by Hooker in 1864 in honor of Welwitsch, the plant's discoverer, is replaced by the name Tumboa, which was originally suggested by Welwitsch. The genus is found only in specific locations in Damaraland and surrounding areas along the west coast of tropical South Africa. A fully grown plant stands less than a foot above ground; its stem, which can have a circumference of over 12 ft., ends in a flattened crown that looks like a round table with a central groove and prominent broad ridges that circle the edge. The thick tuberous stem quickly narrows and gradually transitions into a tap root. A pair of small strap-shaped leaves follows the two cotyledons of the seedlings and remains as the plant's only leaves throughout its life; they continue to grow at their base, which is set in a narrow groove near the crown's edge, and the tough leaf blade, 6 ft. long, eventually splits into narrow strap-like strips that trail on the ground. Numerous circular pits are found on the concentric ridges of the flat and wrinkled crown, indicating where former flower clusters grew in the leaf axils at different growth stages. A flower cluster takes the form of a branched cyme with small upright cones; those containing female flowers can grow as large as a fir cone and are scarlet in color. Each cone has an axis with numerous broad, thin bracts arranged in regular rows; in the axil of each bract is a single flower; a male flower is surrounded by two opposite pairs of leaves that form a perianth around a central sterile ovule encircled by a ring of stamens, which are fused at the base but free at the ends into short filaments, each with a trilocular anther. The coating of the sterile ovule extends above the nucellus as a spirally twisted tube that expands at the top into a flat stigma-like structure. A complete and functional female flower consists of a single ovule with two protective layers, the inner of which extends into a narrow tubular micropyle, similar to that found in Gnetum flowers. The megaspore of Welwitschia is filled with prothallus tissue before fertilization, and some prothallus cells act as egg cells; these grow upwards like long tubes into the top region of the nucellus, where they meet the pollen tubes. Once the egg cells are fertilized by the non-motile male cells, they develop into tubular proembryos, leading to the formation of terminal embryos. The stem contains numerous collateral bundles with limited growth, which are continuously replaced by new bundles formed from strands of secondary meristem. One of the best-known anatomical features of the genus is the presence of many spindle-shaped or branched fibers with heavily thickened walls filled with calcium oxalate crystals. Professor Pearson from Cape Town has published additional information based on specimens collected in Damaraland in 1904 and 1906-1907. In 1906, he reported on the early developmental stages of the male and female organs, and among other interesting insights regarding the biology of Welwitschia, he suggested that, as Hooker suspected, the ovules are pollinated by insects. In a later paper, Pearson greatly expanded our understanding of the reproduction and gametophyte of this genus.

Authorities.General: Bentham and Hooker, Genera Plantarum (London, 1862-1883); Engler and Prantl, Die natürlichen Pflanzenfamilien (Leipzig, 1889 and 1897); Strasburger, Die Coniferen und Gnetaceen (Jena, 1872); Die Angiospermen und die Gymnospermen (Jena, 1879); Histologische Beiträge, iv. (Jena, 1892); Coulter and Chamberlain, Morphology of Spermatophytes (New York, 1901); Rendle, The Classification of Flowering Plants, vol. i. (Cambridge, 1904); “The Origin of Gymnosperms” (A discussion at the Linnean Society; New Phytologist, vol. v., 1906). Cycadales: Mettenius, “Beiträge zur Anatomie der Cycadeen,” Abh. k. sächs. 764 Ges. Wiss. (1860); Treub, “Recherches sur les Cycadées,” Ann. Bot. Jard. Buitenzorg, ii. (1884); Solms-Laubach, “Die Sprossfolge der Stangeria, &c.,” Bot. Zeit. xlviii. (1896); Worsdell, “Anatomy of Macrozamia,” Ann. Bot. x. (1896) (also papers by the same author, Ann. Bot., 1898, Trans. Linn. Soc. v., 1900); Scott, “The Anatomical Characters presented by the Peduncle of Cycadaceae,” Ann. Bot. xi. (1897); Lang, “Studies in the Development and Morphology of Cycadean Sporangia, No. I.,” Ann. Bot. xi. (1897); No. II., Ann. Bot. xiv. (1900); Webber, “Development of the Antherozoids of Zamia,” Bot. Gaz. (1897); Ikeno, “Untersuchungen über die Entwickelung, &c., bei Cycas revoluta,” Journ. Coll. Sci. Japan, xii. (1898); Wieland, “American Fossil Cycads,” Carnegie Institution Publication (1906); Stopes, “Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Fortpflanzungsorgane der Cycadeen,” Flora (1904); Caldwell, “Microcycas Calocoma,” Bot. Gaz. xliv., 1907 (also papers on this and other Cycads in the Bot. Gaz., 1907-1909); Matte, Recherches sur l’appareil libéro-ligneux des Cycadacées (Caen, 1904). Ginkgoales: Hirase, “Études sur la fécondation, &c., de Ginkgo biloba,” Journ. Coll. Sci. Japan, xii. (1898); Seward and Gowan, “Ginkgo biloba,” Ann. Bot. xiv. (1900) (with bibliography); Ikeno, “Contribution à l’étude de la fécondation chez le Ginkgo biloba,” Ann. Sci. Nat. xiii. (1901); Sprecher, Le Ginkgo biloba (Geneva, 1907). Coniferales: “Report of the Conifer Conference” (1891) Journ. R. Hort. Soc. xiv. (1892); Beissner, Handbuch der Nadelholzkunde (Berlin, 1891); Masters, “Comparative Morphology of the Coniferae,” Journ. Linn. Soc. xxvii. (1891); ibid. (1896), &c.; Penhallow, “The Generic Characters of the North American Taxaceae and Coniferae,” Proc. and Trans. R. Soc. Canada, ii. (1896); Blackman, “Fertilization in Pinus sylvestris,” Phil. Trans. (1898) (with bibliography); Worsdell, “Structure of the Female Flowers in Conifers,” Ann. Bot. xiv. (1900) (with bibliography); ibid. (1899); Veitch, Manual of the Coniferae (London, 1900); Penhallow, “Anatomy of North American Coniferales,” American Naturalist (1904); Engler and Pilger, Das Pflanzenreich, Taxaceae (1903); Seward and Ford, “The Araucarieae, recent and extinct,” Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (1906) (with bibliography); Lawson, “Sequoia sempervirens,” Annals of Botany (1904); Robertson, “Torreya Californica,” New Phytologist (1904); Coker, “Gametophyte and Embryo of Taxodium,” Bot. Gazette (1903); E. C. Jeffrey, “The Comparative Anatomy and Phylogeny of the Coniferales, part i. The Genus Sequoia,” Mem. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. v. No. 10 (1903); Gothan, “Zur Anatomie lebender und fossiler Gymnospermen-Hölzer,” K. Preuss. Geol. Landes. (Berlin, 1905) (for more recent papers, see Ann. Bot., New Phytologist, and Bot. Gazette, 1906-1909). Gnetales: Hooker, “On Welwitschia mirabilis.” Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiv. (1864); Bower, “Germination, &., in Gnetum,” Journ. Mic. Sci. xxii. (1882); ibid. (1881); Jaccard, “Recherches embryologiques sur l’Ephedra helvetica,” Diss. Inaug. Lausanne (1894); Karsten, “Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Gattung Gnetum,” Cohn’s Beiträge, vi. (1893); Lotsy, “Contributions to the Life-History of the genus Gnetum,” Ann. Bot. Jard. Buitenzorg, xvi. (1899); Land, “Ephedra trifurca,” Bot. Gazette (1904); Pearson, “Some observations on Welwitschia mirabilis,” Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (1906); Pearson, “Further Observations on Welwitschia,” Phil. Trans. R. Soc. vol. 200 (1909).

Authorities.General: Bentham and Hooker, Genera Plantarum (London, 1862-1883); Engler and Prantl, Die natürlichen Pflanzenfamilien (Leipzig, 1889 and 1897); Strasburger, Die Coniferen und Gnetaceen (Jena, 1872); Die Angiospermen und die Gymnospermen (Jena, 1879); Histologische Beiträge, iv. (Jena, 1892); Coulter and Chamberlain, Morphology of Spermatophytes (New York, 1901); Rendle, The Classification of Flowering Plants, vol. i. (Cambridge, 1904); “The Origin of Gymnosperms” (A discussion at the Linnean Society; New Phytologist, vol. v., 1906). Cycadales: Mettenius, “Beiträge zur Anatomie der Cycadeen,” Abh. k. sächs. 764 Ges. Wiss. (1860); Treub, “Recherches sur les Cycadées,” Ann. Bot. Jard. Buitenzorg, ii. (1884); Solms-Laubach, “Die Sprossfolge der Stangeria, &c.,” Bot. Zeit. xlviii. (1896); Worsdell, “Anatomy of Macrozamia,” Ann. Bot. x. (1896) (also papers by the same author, Ann. Bot., 1898, Trans. Linn. Soc. v., 1900); Scott, “The Anatomical Characters presented by the Peduncle of Cycadaceae,” Ann. Bot. xi. (1897); Lang, “Studies in the Development and Morphology of Cycadean Sporangia, No. I.,” Ann. Bot. xi. (1897); No. II., Ann. Bot. xiv. (1900); Webber, “Development of the Antherozoids of Zamia,” Bot. Gaz. (1897); Ikeno, “Untersuchungen über die Entwickelung, &c., bei Cycas revoluta,” Journ. Coll. Sci. Japan, xii. (1898); Wieland, “American Fossil Cycads,” Carnegie Institution Publication (1906); Stopes, “Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Fortpflanzungsorgane der Cycadeen,” Flora (1904); Caldwell, “Microcycas Calocoma,” Bot. Gaz. xliv., 1907 (also papers on this and other Cycads in the Bot. Gaz., 1907-1909); Matte, Recherches sur l’appareil libéro-ligneux des Cycadacées (Caen, 1904). Ginkgoales: Hirase, “Études sur la fécondation, &c., de Ginkgo biloba,” Journ. Coll. Sci. Japan, xii. (1898); Seward and Gowan, “Ginkgo biloba,” Ann. Bot. xiv. (1900) (with bibliography); Ikeno, “Contribution à l’étude de la fécondation chez le Ginkgo biloba,” Ann. Sci. Nat. xiii. (1901); Sprecher, Le Ginkgo biloba (Geneva, 1907). Coniferales: “Report of the Conifer Conference” (1891) Journ. R. Hort. Soc. xiv. (1892); Beissner, Handbuch der Nadelholzkunde (Berlin, 1891); Masters, “Comparative Morphology of the Coniferae,” Journ. Linn. Soc. xxvii. (1891); ibid. (1896), &c.; Penhallow, “The Generic Characters of the North American Taxaceae and Coniferae,” Proc. and Trans. R. Soc. Canada, ii. (1896); Blackman, “Fertilization in Pinus sylvestris,” Phil. Trans. (1898) (with bibliography); Worsdell, “Structure of the Female Flowers in Conifers,” Ann. Bot. xiv. (1900) (with bibliography); ibid. (1899); Veitch, Manual of the Coniferae (London, 1900); Penhallow, “Anatomy of North American Coniferales,” American Naturalist (1904); Engler and Pilger, Das Pflanzenreich, Taxaceae (1903); Seward and Ford, “The Araucarieae, recent and extinct,” Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (1906) (with bibliography); Lawson, “Sequoia sempervirens,” Annals of Botany (1904); Robertson, “Torreya Californica,” New Phytologist (1904); Coker, “Gametophyte and Embryo of Taxodium,” Bot. Gazette (1903); E. C. Jeffrey, “The Comparative Anatomy and Phylogeny of the Coniferales, part i. The Genus Sequoia,” Mem. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc. v. No. 10 (1903); Gothan, “Zur Anatomie lebender und fossiler Gymnospermen-Hölzer,” K. Preuss. Geol. Landes. (Berlin, 1905) (for more recent papers, see Ann. Bot., New Phytologist, and Bot. Gazette, 1906-1909). Gnetales: Hooker, “On Welwitschia mirabilis.” Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiv. (1864); Bower, “Germination, &., in Gnetum,” Journ. Mic. Sci. xxii. (1882); ibid. (1881); Jaccard, “Recherches embryologiques sur l’Ephedra helvetica,” Diss. Inaug. Lausanne (1894); Karsten, “Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Gattung Gnetum,” Cohn’s Beiträge, vi. (1893); Lotsy, “Contributions to the Life-History of the genus Gnetum,” Ann. Bot. Jard. Buitenzorg, xvi. (1899); Land, “Ephedra trifurca,” Bot. Gazette (1904); Pearson, “Some observations on Welwitschia mirabilis,” Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (1906); Pearson, “Further Observations on Welwitschia,” Phil. Trans. R. Soc. vol. 200 (1909).

(A. C. Se.)

GYMNOSTOMACEAE, an order of Ciliate Infusoria (q.v.), characterized by a closed mouth, which only opens to swallow food actively, and body cilia forming a general or partial investment (rarely represented by a girdle of membranellae), but not differentiated in different regions. With the Aspirotrochaceae (q.v.) it formed the Holotricha of Stein.

GYMNOSTOMACEAE, is an order of ciliate microorganisms (see entry), defined by a mouth that is only closed, opening up solely for active feeding, and body cilia that provide a general or partial covering (rarely made up of a band of membranelles), but are not specialized in different areas. Together with the Aspirotrochaceae (see entry), it makes up the Holotricha as classified by Stein.


GYMPIE, a mining town of March county, Queensland, Australia, 107 m. N. of Brisbane, and 61 m. S. of Maryborough by rail. Pop. (1901) 11,959. Numerous gold mines are worked in the district, which also abounds in copper, silver, antimony, cinnabar, bismuth and nickel. Extensive undeveloped coal-beds lie 40 m. N. at Miva. Gympie became a municipality in 1880.

GYMPIE, is a mining town in March County, Queensland, Australia, located 107 miles north of Brisbane and 61 miles south of Maryborough by rail. The population in 1901 was 11,959. There are many gold mines operating in the area, which is also rich in copper, silver, antimony, cinnabar, bismuth, and nickel. Large undeveloped coal deposits are situated 40 miles north at Miva. Gympie was established as a municipality in 1880.


GYNAECEUM (Gr. γυναικεῖον, from γυνή, woman), that part in a Greek house which was specially reserved for the women, in contradistinction to the “andron,” the men’s quarters; in the larger houses there was an open court with peristyles round, and as a rule all the rooms were on the same level; in smaller houses the servants were placed in an upper storey, and this seems to have been the case to a certain extent in the Homeric house of the Odyssey. “Gynaeconitis” is the term given by Procopius to the space reserved for women in the Eastern Church, and this separation of the sexes was maintained in the early Christian churches where there were separate entrances and accommodation for the men and women, the latter being placed in the triforium gallery, or, in its absence, either on one side of the church, the men being on the other, or occasionally in the aisles, the nave being occupied by the men.

GYNAECEUM (Gr. woman, from woman, woman), the area in a Greek house that was specifically set aside for women, as opposed to the “andron,” the men’s quarters; in larger homes, there was an open courtyard surrounded by columns, and usually all the rooms were on the same level; in smaller homes, the servants were placed on an upper floor, which seems to have also been the case to some extent in the Homeric house of the Odyssey. “Gynaeconitis” is the term used by Procopius for the space reserved for women in the Eastern Church, and this separation of the sexes was upheld in early Christian churches where there were separate entrances and arrangements for men and women, with women typically placed in the triforium gallery, or, if that was not available, either on one side of the church with men on the other side, or sometimes in the aisles, while the nave was occupied by men.


GYNAECOLOGY (from Gr. γυνή, γυναικός, a woman, and λόγος, discourse), the name given to that branch of medicine which concerns the pathology and treatment of affections peculiar to the female sex.

GYNECOLOGY (from Gr. woman, of woman, meaning woman, and word, meaning discourse), is the term for the area of medicine that deals with the diagnosis and treatment of conditions specific to women.

Gynaecology may be said to be one of the most ancient branches of medicine. The papyrus of Ebers, which is one of the oldest known works on medicine and dates from 1550 B.C., contains references to diseases of women, and it is recorded that specialism in this branch was known amongst Egyptian medical practitioners. The Vedas contain a list of therapeutic agents used in the treatment of gynaecological diseases. The treatises on gynaecology formerly attributed to Hippocrates (460 B.C.) are now said to be spurious, but the wording of the famous oath shows that he was at least familiar with the use of gynaecological instruments. Diocles Carystius, of the Alexandrian school (4th century B.C.), practised this branch, and Praxagoras of Cos, who lived shortly after, opened the abdomen by laparotomy. While the Alexandrine school represented Greek medicine, Greeks began to practise in Rome, and in the first years of the Christian era gynaecologists were much in demand (Häser). A speculum for gynaecological purposes has been found in the ruins of Pompeii, and votive offerings of anatomical parts found in the temples show that various gynaecological malformations were known to the ancients. Writers who have treated of this branch are Celsus (50 B.C.-A.D. 7) and Soranus of Ephesus (A.D. 98-138), who refers in his works to the fact that the Roman midwives frequently called to their aid practitioners who made a special study of diseases of women. These midwives attended the simpler gynaecological ailments. This was no innovation, as in Athens, as mentioned by Hyginus, we find one Agnodice, a midwife, disguising herself in man’s attire so that she might attend lectures on medicine and diseases of women. After instruction she practised as a gynaecologist. This being contrary to Athenian law she was prosecuted, but was saved by the wives of some of the chief men testifying on her behalf. Besides Agnodice we have Sotira, who wrote a work on menstruation which is preserved in the library at Florence, while Aspasia is mentioned by Aetius as the author of several chapters of his work. It is evident that during the Roman period much of the gynaecological work was in the hands of women. Martial alludes to the “feminae medicae” in his epigram on Leda. These women must not be confounded with the midwives who on monuments are always described as “obstetrices.” Galen devotes the sixth chapter of his work De locis affectis to gynaecological ailments. During the Byzantine period may be mentioned the work of Oribasius (A.D. 325) and Moschion (2nd century A.D.) who wrote a book in Latin for the use of matrons and midwives ignorant of Greek.

Gynaecology is considered one of the oldest branches of medicine. The Ebers papyrus, one of the earliest known medical texts, dating back to 1550 B.C., mentions women's diseases, indicating that Egyptian medical practitioners had specialized knowledge in this field. The Vedas also list therapeutic agents used to treat gynaecological conditions. Although the gynaecological texts once attributed to Hippocrates (460 B.C.) are now thought to be false, the wording of his famous oath suggests he was at least familiar with gynaecological instruments. Diocles Carystius from the Alexandrian school (4th century B.C.) practiced this specialty, and shortly after, Praxagoras of Cos performed abdominal surgeries through laparotomy. While the Alexandrian school represented Greek medicine, Greeks began practicing in Rome, and by the early years of the Christian era, gynaecologists were in high demand (Häser). A speculum for gynaecological use was discovered in the ruins of Pompeii, and votive offerings of anatomical parts found in temples indicate that the ancients were aware of various gynaecological malformations. Notable writers on this subject include Celsus (50 B.C.-A.D. 7) and Soranus of Ephesus (A.D. 98-138), who noted that Roman midwives often called upon practitioners specializing in women's diseases for assistance. These midwives typically managed simpler gynaecological issues. This was not a new idea, as in Athens, Hyginus mentions Agnodice, a midwife who disguised herself as a man to attend medical lectures on women's diseases. After her education, she worked as a gynaecologist. This was against Athenian law, leading to her prosecution, but she was saved by the testimonies of prominent women's husbands on her behalf. Besides Agnodice, there was Sotira, who wrote a book on menstruation that is preserved in Florence, and Aspasia, mentioned by Aetius as the author of several chapters in his work. It's clear that during the Roman period, much of the gynaecological work was done by women. Martial references the “feminae medicae” in his poem about Leda. These women should not be confused with midwives, who are always referred to as “obstetrices” in historical monuments. Galen dedicates the sixth chapter of his work De locis affectis to gynaecological issues. In the Byzantine era, Oribasius (A.D. 325) and Moschion (2nd century A.D.) contributed works for the benefit of matron and midwives who did not know Greek.

In modern times James Parsons (1705-1770) published his Elenchus gynaicopathologicus et obstetricarius, and in 1755 Charles Perry published his Mechanical account and explication of the hysterical passion and of all other nervous disorders incident to the sex, with an appendix on cancers. In the early part of the 19th century fresh interest in diseases of women awakened. Joseph Récamier (1774-1852) by his writings and teachings advocated the use of the speculum and sound. This was followed in 1840 by the writings of Simpson in England and Huguier in France. In 1845 John Hughes Bennett published his great work on inflammation of the uterus, and in 1850 Tilt published his book on ovarian inflammation. The credit of being the first to perform the operation of ovariotomy is now credited to McDowell of Kentucky in 1809, and to Robert Lawson Tait (1845-1899) in 1883 the first operation for ruptured ectopic gestation.

In modern times, James Parsons (1705-1770) published his Elenchus gynaicopathologicus et obstetricarius, and in 1755, Charles Perry published his Mechanical account and explication of the hysterical passion and of all other nervous disorders incident to the sex, with an appendix on cancers. In the early part of the 19th century, there was a renewed interest in diseases affecting women. Joseph Récamier (1774-1852) used his writings and teachings to promote the use of the speculum and sound. This was followed in 1840 by the writings of Simpson in England and Huguier in France. In 1845, John Hughes Bennett published his major work on inflammation of the uterus, and in 1850, Tilt released his book on ovarian inflammation. The credit for being the first to perform ovariotomy is now given to McDowell of Kentucky in 1809, and to Robert Lawson Tait (1845-1899) for the first operation for ruptured ectopic pregnancy in 1883.

Menstruation.—Normal menstruation comprises the escape of from 4 to 6 oz. of blood together with mucus from the uterus at intervals of twenty-eight days (more or less). The flow begins at the age of puberty, the average age of which in England is between fourteen and sixteen years. It ceases between forty-five and fifty years of age, and this is called the menopause or climacteric period, commonly spoken of as “the change of life.” Both the age of puberty and that of the menopause may supervene earlier or later according to local conditions. At both times the menstrual flow may be replaced by haemorrhage from distant organs (epistaxis, haematemesis, haemoptysis); this is called vicarious menstruation. Menstruation is usually but not necessarily coincident with ovulation. The usual 765 disorders of menstruation are: (1) amenorrhoea (absence of flow), (2) dysmenorrhoea (painful flow), (3) menorrhagia (excessive flow), (4) metrorrhagia (excessive and irregular flow). Amenorrhoea may arise from physiological causes, such as pregnancy, lactation, the menopause; constitutional causes, such as phthisis, anaemia and chlorosis, febrile disorders, some chronic intoxications, such as morphinomania, and some forms of cerebral disease; local causes, which include malformations or absence of one or more of the genital parts, such as absence of ovaries, uterus or vagina, atresia of vagina, imperforate cervix, disease of the ovaries, or sometimes imperforate hymen. The treatment of amenorrhoea must be directed towards the cause. In anaemia and phthisis menstruation often returns after improvement in the general condition, with good food and good sanitary conditions, an outdoor life and the administration of iron or other tonics. In local conditions of imperforate hymen, imperforate cervix or ovarian disease, surgical interference is necessary. Amenorrhoea is permanent when due to absence of the genital parts. The causes of dysmenorrhoea are classified as follows: (1) ovarian, due to disease of the ovaries or Fallopian tubes; (2) obstructive, due to some obstacle to the flow, as stenosis, flexions and malpositions of the uterus, or malformations; (3) congestive, due to subinvolution, chronic inflammation of the uterus or its lining membrane, fibroid growths and polypi of the uterus, cardiac or hepatic disease; (4) neuralgic; (5) membranous. The foremost place in the treatment of dysmenorrhoea must be given to aperients and purgatives administered a day or two before the period is expected. By this means congestion is reduced. Hot baths are useful, and various drugs such as hyoscyanus, cannabis indica, phenalgin, ammonol or phenacetin have been prescribed. Medicinal treatment is, however, only palliative, and flexions and malpositions of the uterus must be corrected, stenosis treated by dilatation, fibroid growths if present removed, and endometritis when present treated by local applications or curetting according to its severity. Menorrhagia signifies excessive bleeding at the menstrual periods. Constitutional causes are purpura, haemophilia, excessive food and alcoholic drinks and warm climates; while local causes are congestion and displacements of the uterus, endometritis, subinvolution, retention of the products of conception, new growths in the uterus such as mucous and fibroid polypi, malignant growths, tubo-ovarian inflammation and some ovarian tumours. Metrorrhagia is a discharge of blood from the uterus, independent of menstruation. It always arises from disease of the uterus or its appendages. Local causes are polypi, retention of the products of conception, extra uterine gestation, haemorrhages in connexion with pregnancy, and new growths in the uterus. In the treatment of both menorrhagia and metrorrhagia the local condition must be carefully ascertained. When pregnancy has been excluded, and constitutional causes treated, efforts should be made to relieve congestion. Uterine haemostatics, as ergot, ergotin, tincture of hydrastis or hamamelis, are of use, together with rest in bed. Fibroid polypi and other new growths must be removed. Irregular bleeding in women over forty years of age is frequently a sign of early malignant disease, and should on no account be neglected.

Menstruation.—Normal menstruation involves the release of about 4 to 6 ounces of blood along with mucus from the uterus approximately every twenty-eight days (give or take). The flow usually starts at puberty, which in England typically occurs between the ages of fourteen and sixteen. It stops between the ages of forty-five and fifty, a phase known as menopause or the climacteric period, commonly referred to as “the change of life.” Both puberty and menopause can happen earlier or later depending on various local factors. At both stages, menstrual flow might be replaced by bleeding from other body parts (like nosebleeds, vomiting blood, or coughing up blood); this is referred to as vicarious menstruation. Menstruation generally coincides with ovulation, but not necessarily. The common 765 disorders related to menstruation include: (1) amenorrhoea (absence of flow), (2) dysmenorrhoea (painful flow), (3) menorrhagia (heavy flow), (4) metrorrhagia (irregular and heavy flow). Amenorrhoea can be caused by physiological reasons, like pregnancy, breastfeeding, or menopause; constitutional factors such as tuberculosis, anemia and chlorosis, fever, some chronic poisonings like morphine addiction, and certain brain diseases; or local causes like abnormalities or absence of reproductive organs including missing ovaries, uterus, or vagina, vaginal blockage, blocked cervix, ovarian disease, or occasionally a blocked hymen. Treating amenorrhoea should focus on its underlying cause. In cases of anemia and tuberculosis, menstruation often returns with improvements in overall health through good nutrition, sanitation, outdoor activities, and iron or other tonics. For local issues like a blocked hymen, cervix, or ovarian disease, surgery may be needed. Amenorrhoea is permanent when it stems from missing reproductive organs. Dysmenorrhoea causes can be categorized as follows: (1) ovarian, where there is disease of the ovaries or fallopian tubes; (2) obstructive, which is due to issues like narrowed passages or uterine malposition; (3) congestive, resulting from conditions like chronic inflammation or growths in the uterus; (4) neuralgic; (5) membranous. The primary treatment for dysmenorrhoea involves using laxatives a day or two before the expected period, as this can help reduce congestion. Hot baths can be helpful, along with various medications like hyoscyamus, cannabis indica, phenalgin, ammonol, or phenacetin. However, medicinal treatment is typically only a temporary relief, and it’s important to correct any uterine malpositions, treat any blockages, remove fibroid tumors if present, and address any endometritis based on its severity. Menorrhagia refers to excessive bleeding during menstrual periods. Causes can be constitutional, such as purpura, hemophilia, overeating, and drinking alcohol in warm climates; local causes include congestion, uterine displacements, endometritis, complications from retained pregnancy tissue, new growths in the uterus like polyps or fibroids, cancerous growths, tubo-ovarian inflammation, and some ovarian tumors. Metrorrhagia is bleeding from the uterus that occurs outside of menstruation, always stemming from a uterine or appendage illness. Local causes include polyps, retained pregnancy products, ectopic pregnancy, bleeding related to pregnancy, and new uterine growths. When treating both menorrhagia and metrorrhagia, it’s vital to identify the local condition. After excluding pregnancy and addressing any underlying causes, efforts should be made to alleviate congestion. Uterine hemostatics such as ergot, ergotin, tincture of hydrastis, or hamamelis can be helpful, along with bed rest. Fibroid polyps and other growths need to be removed. Irregular bleeding in women over forty often signals the potential for early malignant disease and should never be ignored.

Diseases of the External Genital Organs.—The vulva comprises several organs and structures grouped together for convenience of description (see Reproductive System). The affections to which these structures are liable may be classified as follows: (1) Injuries to the vulva, either accidental or occurring during parturition; these are generally rupture of the perinaeum. (2) Vulvitis. Simple Vulvitis is due to want of cleanliness, or irritating discharges, and in children may result from threadworms. The symptoms are heat, itching and throbbing, and the parts are red and swollen. The treatment consists of rest, thorough cleanliness and fomentations. Infective vulvitis is nearly always due to gonorrhoea. The symptoms are the same as in simple vulvitis, with the addition of mucopurulent yellow discharge and scalding pain on micturition; if neglected, extension of the disease may result. The treatment consists of rest in bed, warm medicated baths several times a day or fomentations of boracic acid. The parts must be kept thoroughly clean and discharges swabbed away. Diphtheritic vulvitis occasionally occurs, and erysipelas of the vulva may follow wounds, but since the use of antiseptics is rarely seen. (3) Vascular disturbances may occur in the vulva, including varix, haematoma, oedema and gangrene; the treatment is the same as for the same disease in other parts. (4) The vulva is likely to be affected by a number of cutaneous affections, the most important being erythema, eczema, herpes, lichen, tubercle, elephantiasis, vulvitis pruriginosa, syphilis and kraurosis. These affections present the same characters as in other parts of the body. Kraurosis vulvae, first described by Lawson Tait in 1875, is an atrophic change accompanied by pain and a yellowish discharge; the cause is unknown. Pruritis vulvae is due to parasites, or to irritating discharges, as leucorrhoea, and is frequent in diabetic subjects. The hymen may be occasionally imperforate and require incision. Cysts and painful carunculae may occur on the clitoris. Any part of the vulva may be the seat of new growths, simple or malignant.

Diseases of the External Genital Organs.—The vulva includes several organs and structures grouped together for easy understanding (see Reproductive System). The conditions that affect these structures can be classified as follows: (1) Injuries to the vulva, which can be accidental or happen during childbirth; these usually involve a rupture of the perineum. (2) Vulvitis. Simple vulvitis is caused by poor hygiene or irritating discharges, and in children, it may result from threadworms. Symptoms include heat, itching, and throbbing, with the affected areas appearing red and swollen. Treatment involves rest, thorough cleanliness, and warm compresses. Infective vulvitis is most often caused by gonorrhea. The symptoms are similar to simple vulvitis but also include a mucopurulent yellow discharge and a burning sensation while urinating; if left untreated, the condition may worsen. Treatment includes bed rest, warm medicated baths several times a day, or boracic acid compresses. The affected areas must be kept completely clean, and any discharge should be wiped away. Diphtheritic vulvitis can occasionally occur, and erysipelas of the vulva may follow injuries, though with the use of antiseptics, it is rarely seen now. (3) Vascular issues can occur in the vulva, such as varicose veins, hematomas, swelling, and gangrene; treatment is the same as for these issues in other areas of the body. (4) The vulva can be affected by various skin conditions, the most significant being erythema, eczema, herpes, lichen, tubercle, elephantiasis, vulvitis pruriginosa, syphilis, and kraurosis. These conditions present similar characteristics as they do in other body parts. Kraurosis vulvae, first described by Lawson Tait in 1875, involves atrophic changes along with pain and a yellowish discharge; the cause is unknown. Pruritis vulvae can be due to parasites or irritating discharges like leucorrhea and is common in individuals with diabetes. Occasionally, the hymen may be imperforate and need surgical intervention. Cysts and painful growths may develop on the clitoris. Any part of the vulva can develop growths, whether benign or malignant.

Diseases of the Vagina.—(1) Malformations. The vagina may be absent in whole or in part or may present a septum. Stenosis of the vagina may be a barrier to menstruation. (2) Displacements of the vagina; (a) cystocele, which is a hernia of the bladder into the vagina; (b) rectocele, a hernia of the rectum into the vagina. The cause of these conditions is relaxation of the tissues due to parturition. The palliative treatment consists in keeping up the parts by the insertion of a pessary; when this fails operative interference is called for. (3) Fistulae may form between the vagina and bladder or vagina and rectum; they are generally caused by injuries during parturition or the late stages of carcinoma. Persistent fistulae require operative treatment. The vagina normally secretes a thin opalescent acid fluid derived from the lymph serum and the shedding of squamous epithelium. This fluid normally contains the vagina bacillus. In pathological conditions of the vagina this secretion undergoes changes. For practical purposes three varieties of vaginitis may be described: (a) simple catarrhal vaginitis is due to the same causes as simple vulvitis, and occasionally in children is important from a medico-legal aspect when it is complicated by vulvitis. The symptoms are heat and discomfort with copious mucopurulent discharge. The only treatment required is rest, with vaginal douches of warm unirritating lotions such as boracic acid or subacetate of lead. (b) Gonorrhoeal vaginitis is most common in adults. The patient complains of pain and burning, pain on passing water and discharge which is generally green or yellow. The results of untreated gonorrhoeal vaginitis are serious and far-reaching. The disease may spread up the genital passages, causing endometritis, salpingitis and septic peritonitis, or may extend into the bladder, causing cystitis. Strict rest should be enjoined, douches of carbolic acid (1 in 40) or of perchloride of mercury (1 in 2000) should be ordered morning and evening, the vagina being packed with tampons of iodoform gauze. Saline purgatives and alkaline diuretics should be given, (c) Chronic vaginitis (leucorrhoea or “the whites”) may follow acute conditions and persist indefinitely. The vagina is rarely the seat of tumours, but cysts are common.

Diseases of the Vagina.—(1) Malformations. The vagina may be completely or partially absent, or it may have a septum. Narrowing of the vagina can prevent menstruation. (2) Displacements of the vagina; (a) cystocele, which is a hernia of the bladder into the vagina; (b) rectocele, a hernia of the rectum into the vagina. These conditions are caused by relaxation of the tissues due to childbirth. The basic treatment involves supporting the area with a pessary; if this is ineffective, surgical intervention is needed. (3) Fistulas may develop between the vagina and bladder or the vagina and rectum; they are usually caused by injuries during childbirth or advanced stages of cancer. Persistent fistulas require surgical treatment. The vagina normally produces a thin, opalescent acidic fluid derived from lymph serum and the shedding of squamous epithelium. This fluid usually contains the vaginal bacillus. In abnormal conditions, this secretion changes. For practical purposes, three types of vaginitis can be described: (a) simple catarrhal vaginitis, which has the same causes as simple vulvitis and can be significant from a medico-legal standpoint when complicated by vulvitis, especially in children. Symptoms include heat, discomfort, and a copious mucopurulent discharge. The treatment involves rest and vaginal douches with warm, non-irritating solutions like boric acid or lead subacetate. (b) Gonorrheal vaginitis is most common in adults. Patients experience pain, burning, pain while urinating, and a discharge that is typically green or yellow. The consequences of untreated gonorrheal vaginitis can be severe and widespread, potentially spreading to the upper genital tract and causing endometritis, salpingitis, and septic peritonitis, or extending to the bladder and resulting in cystitis. Strict bed rest is recommended, with douches of carbolic acid (1 in 40) or mercuric chloride (1 in 2000) given morning and evening, while packing the vagina with iodoform gauze tampons. Saline laxatives and alkaline diuretics should also be administered. (c) Chronic vaginitis (leucorrhea or “the whites”) may follow acute conditions and persist indefinitely. The vagina is rarely the site of tumors, but cysts are commonly found.

Diseases of the Uterus.—The uterus undergoes important changes during life, chiefly at puberty and at the menopause. At puberty it assumes the pear shape characteristic of the mature uterus. At the menopause it shares in the general atrophy of the reproductive organs. It is subject to various disorders and misplacements. (a) Displacements of the Uterus.—The normal position of the uterus, when the bladder is empty, is that of anteversion. We have therefore to consider the following conditions as pathological: anteflexion, retroflexion, retroversion, inversion, prolapse and procidentia. Slight anteflexion or bending forwards is normal; when exaggerated it gives rise to dysmenorrhoea, sterility and reflex nervous phenomena. This condition is usually congenital and is often associated with under-development of the uterus, from which the sterility results. The treatment is by dilatation of the canal or by a plastic operation. Retroflexion is a bending over of the uterus backwards, and occurs as a complication of retroversion (or displacement backwards). The causes are (1) any cause tending to make the fundus or upper part of the uterus extra heavy, such as tumours or congestion, (2) loss of tone of the uterine walls, (3) adhesions formed after cellulitis, (4) violent muscular efforts, (5) weakening of the uterine supports from parturition. The symptoms are dysmenorrhoea, pain on defaecation and constipation from the pressure of the fundus on the rectum; the patient is often sterile. The treatment is the replacing of the uterus in position, where it can be kept by the insertion of a pessary; failing this, operative treatment may be required. Retroversion when pathological is rarer than retroflexion. It may be the result of injury or is associated with pregnancy or a fibroid. The symptoms are those of retroflexion with feeling of pain and weight in the pelvis and desire to micturate followed by retention of urine due to the pressure of the cervix against the base of the bladder. The uterus must be skilfully replaced in position; when pessaries fail to keep it there the operation of hysteropexy gives excellent results.

Diseases of the Uterus.—The uterus goes through significant changes during a woman's life, primarily at puberty and menopause. At puberty, it takes on the typical pear shape of a mature uterus. During menopause, it undergoes the overall shrinkage of the reproductive organs. The uterus can experience various disorders and displacements. (a) Displacements of the Uterus.—The normal position of the uterus, when the bladder is empty, is anteversion. Therefore, we need to consider the following conditions as abnormal: anteflexion, retroflexion, retroversion, inversion, prolapse, and procidentia. A slight anteflexion, or bending forward, is normal; when it's excessive, it can lead to painful periods, infertility, and reflex nerve symptoms. This condition is usually congenital and is often linked to underdevelopment of the uterus, which causes infertility. Treatment involves dilating the canal or performing a reconstructive surgery. Retroflexion is when the uterus bends backward and can occur as a complication of retroversion (displacement backward). The causes include (1) anything that makes the top part of the uterus heavier, like tumors or swelling, (2) a loss of tone in the uterine walls, (3) adhesions from prior infections, (4) intense physical strain, (5) weakening of the uterine supports after childbirth. Symptoms include painful periods, pain during bowel movements, and constipation due to pressure from the uterus on the rectum; the patient may often be infertile. Treatment involves repositioning the uterus, which can be maintained with a pessary; if that doesn't work, surgical intervention may be necessary. Pathological retroversion is less common than retroflexion. It may result from an injury or be associated with pregnancy or fibroids. The symptoms are similar to those of retroflexion, including pelvic pain and heaviness, along with a frequent urge to urinate followed by difficulty emptying the bladder due to pressure from the cervix against the bladder. The uterus must be carefully repositioned; if pessaries can't hold it in place, the surgical procedure of hysteropexy often yields excellent results.

Inversion occurs when the uterus is turned inside out. It is only possible when the cavity is dilated, either after pregnancy or by a polypus. The greater number of cases follow delivery and are acute. Chronic inversions are generally due to the weight of a polypus. The symptoms are menorrhagia, metrorrhagia and bladder troubles; on examination a tumour-like mass occupies the vagina. Reduction of the condition is often difficult, particularly when the condition has lasted for a long time. The tumour which has caused the inversion must be excised. Prolapse and procidentia are different degrees of the same variety of displacement. When the uterus lies in the vagina it is spoken of as prolapse, when it protrudes through the vulva it is procidentia. The causes are directly due to increased intra-abdominal pressure, increased weight of the uterus by fibroids, violent straining, chronic cough and weakening of the supporting structures of the pelvic floor, such as laceration of the vagina and perinaeum. Traction on the uterus from below (as a cervical tumour) may be a cause; advanced age, laborious occupations and frequent pregnancies are indirect causes. The symptoms are a “bearing down” feeling, pain and fatigue in walking, trouble with micturition and defaecation. The condition is generally obvious on examination. As a rule the uterus is easy to replace in position. A rubber ring pessary will often serve to keep it there. If the perinaeum is very much torn it may be necessary to repair it. Various operations for retaining the uterus in position are described. (b) Enlargements of the Uterus (hypertrophy or hyperplasia). This condition may sometimes involve the uterus as a whole or may be most marked in the body or in the cervix. It follows chronic congestion or inflammatory 766 prolapse, or any condition interfering with the circulation. The symptoms comprise local discomfort and sometimes dysmenorrhoea, leucorrhoea or menorrhagia. When the elongation occurs in the cervical portion the only possible treatment is amputation of the cervix. Atrophy of the uterus is normal after the menopause. It may follow the removal of the tubes and ovaries. Some constitutional diseases produce the same result, as tuberculosis, chlorosis, chronic morphinism and certain diseases of the central nervous system.

Inversion happens when the uterus turns inside out. This can only occur when the cavity is dilated, either after childbirth or due to a polyp. Most cases happen after delivery and are acute. Chronic inversions are usually caused by the weight of a polyp. Symptoms include heavy menstrual bleeding (menorrhagia), abnormal bleeding (metrorrhagia), and bladder issues; during an examination, a tumor-like mass is found in the vagina. Reducing the condition is often challenging, especially if it has persisted for a long time. The tumor causing the inversion needs to be removed. Prolapse and procidentia are different levels of the same problem with displacement. When the uterus is positioned in the vagina, it's called prolapse; when it protrudes through the vulva, it's known as procidentia. The causes are typically due to increased pressure within the abdomen, the added weight of the uterus from fibroids, intense straining, chronic coughing, and weakening of the pelvic floor support structures, like tearing of the vagina and perineum. Pulling on the uterus from below (like with a cervical tumor) could also be a cause; factors like advanced age, physically demanding jobs, and frequent pregnancies are indirect causes. Symptoms include a "bearing down" feeling, pain and fatigue while walking, difficulty urinating, and issues with bowel movements. The condition is usually apparent upon examination. Generally, it's easy to reposition the uterus. A rubber ring pessary often works to keep it in place. If the perineum is significantly torn, repair may be necessary. There are various surgical options available for stabilizing the uterus. (b) Enlargements of the Uterus (hypertrophy or hyperplasia). This condition can involve the entire uterus or be more pronounced in the body or cervix. It typically follows chronic congestion, inflammatory prolapse, or any issue that disrupts circulation. Symptoms include local discomfort and sometimes painful periods (dysmenorrhea), vaginal discharge (leucorrhea), or heavy menstrual bleeding (menorrhagia). If elongation occurs in the cervical area, the only treatment option is to amputate the cervix. Uterine atrophy is normal after menopause and can also occur after the removal of the fallopian tubes and ovaries. Certain chronic diseases, such as tuberculosis, chlorosis, chronic morphine addiction, and specific central nervous system disorders, can produce a similar effect.

(c) Injuries and Diseases resultant from Pregnancy.—The most frequent of these injuries is laceration of the cervix uteri, which is frequent in precipitate labour. Once the cervix is torn the raw surfaces become covered by granulations and later by cicatricial tissue, but as a rule they do not unite. The torn lips may become unhealthy, and the congestion and oedema spread to the body of the uterus. A lacerated cervix does not usually give rise to symptoms; these depend on the accompanying endometritis, and include leucorrhoea, aching and a feeling of weight. Lacerations are to be felt digitally. As lacerations predispose to abortion the operation of trachelorraphy or repair of the cervix is indicated. Perforation of the uterus may occur from the use of the sound in diseased conditions of the uterine walls. Superinvolution means premature atrophy following parturition. Subinvolution is a condition in which the uterus fails to return to its normal size and remains enlarged. Retention of the products of conception may cause irregular haemorrhages and may lead to a diagnosis of tumour. The uterus should be carefully explored.

(c) Injuries and Diseases Resulting from Pregnancy.—The most common injury is tearing of the cervical tissue, which often occurs in rapid labor. Once the cervix is torn, the raw surfaces are covered by granulation tissue and later by scar tissue, but typically they do not heal together. The torn lips may become unhealthy, and swelling and congestion can extend to the body of the uterus. A lacerated cervix usually doesn’t produce symptoms; any symptoms are usually due to accompanying endometritis and may include abnormal discharge, pain, and a feeling of heaviness. Lacerations can be detected through a digital examination. Since lacerations can lead to miscarriage, a procedure called trachelorraphy or cervix repair is recommended. Uterine perforation may occur from the use of a sound in abnormal conditions of the uterine walls. Superinvolution refers to premature shrinkage after childbirth. Subinvolution is when the uterus doesn't return to its normal size and remains enlarged. Retained pregnancy tissue can cause irregular bleeding and may be mistaken for a tumor. The uterus should be carefully examined.

(d) Inflammations Acute and Chronic.—The mucous membrane lining the cervical canal and body of the uterus is called the endometrium. Acute inflammation or endometritis may attack it. The chief causes are sepsis following labour or abortion, extension of a gonorrhoeal vaginitis, or gangrene or infection of a uterine myoma. The puerperal endometritis following labour is an avoidable disease due to lack of scrupulous aseptic precautions.

(d) Acute and Chronic Inflammations.—The mucous membrane that lines the cervical canal and the body of the uterus is known as the endometrium. Acute inflammation, or endometritis, can affect it. The main causes are sepsis after childbirth or abortion, the spread of gonorrheal vaginitis, or infection of a uterine fibroid. Puerperal endometritis that occurs after childbirth is a preventable condition caused by inadequate aseptic practices.

Gonorrhoeal endometritis is an acute form associated with copious purulent discharge and well-marked constitutional disturbance. The temperature ranges from 99° to 105° F., associated with pelvic pain, and rigors are not uncommon. The tendency is to recovery with more or less protracted convalescence. The most serious complications are extension of the disease and later sterility. Rest in bed and intrauterine irrigation, followed by the introduction of iodoform pencils into the uterine cavity, should be resorted to, while pain is relieved by hot fomentations and sitz baths. Chronic endometritis may be the sequela of the acute form, or may be septic in origin, or the result of chronic congestion, acute retroflection or subinvolution following delivery or abortion. The varieties are glandular, interstitial, haemorrhagic and senile. The symptoms are disturbance of the menstrual function, headache, pain and pelvic discomfort, and more or less profuse thick leucorrhoeal discharge. The treatment consists in attention to the general health, with suitable laxatives and local injections, and in obstinate cases curettage is the most effectual measure. The disease is frequently associated with adenomatous disease of the cervix, formerly called erosion. In this disease there is a new formation of glandular elements, which enlarge and multiply, forming a soft velvety areola dotted with pink spots. This was formerly erroneously termed ulceration. The cause is unknown. It occurs in virgins as well as in mothers, but it often accompanies lacerations of the cervix. The symptoms are indefinite pain and leucorrhoea. The condition is visible on inspection with a speculum. The treatment is swabbing with iodized phenol or curettage. The body of the uterus may also be the seat of adenomatous disease. Tuberculosis may attack the uterus; this usually forms part of a general tuberculosis.

Gonorrheal endometritis is an acute condition characterized by a large amount of pus-filled discharge and significant overall symptoms. The fever typically ranges from 99° to 105° F., often accompanied by pelvic pain, and chills are not uncommon. Recovery is generally expected but may take some time. The most serious complications include the spread of the disease and potential future infertility. Treatment should include bed rest and intrauterine irrigation, followed by the insertion of iodoform pencils into the uterus, while pain relief can be managed with hot compresses and sitz baths. Chronic endometritis can develop from the acute form, may be caused by infection, or result from chronic congestion, acute uterine tilting, or incomplete recovery after childbirth or abortion. The types include glandular, interstitial, hemorrhagic, and senile. Symptoms include menstrual irregularities, headaches, pelvic pain, and varying degrees of thick, white discharge. Treatment focuses on overall health improvement, appropriate laxatives, and local injections; in stubborn cases, curettage is the most effective approach. This condition is often linked with adenomatous disease of the cervix, previously referred to as erosion. In this illness, there is a new growth of glandular tissue that enlarges and multiplies, creating a soft, velvety area with pink spots. This was once mistakenly labeled as ulceration. The exact cause is unknown. It can occur in both virgins and mothers but often happens alongside cervical lacerations. Symptoms include vague pain and discharge. This condition can be seen during an examination with a speculum. Treatment may involve swabbing with iodized phenol or curettage. Adenomatous disease can also affect the body of the uterus. Tuberculosis can impact the uterus as well, usually as part of a broader tuberculosis infection.

(e) New Growths in the Uterus.—The uterus is the most common seat of new growths. From the researches of von Gurlt, compiled from the Vienna Hospital Reports, embracing 15,880 cases of tumour, females exceed males in the proportion of seven to three, and of this large majority uterine growths account for 25%. When we consider its periodic monthly engorgements and the alternate hypertrophy and involution it undergoes in connexion with pregnancy, we can anticipate the special proneness of the uterus to new growths. Tumours of the uterus are divided into benign and malignant. The benign tumours known as fibroids or myomata are very common. They are stated by Bayle to occur in 20% of women over 35 years of age, but happily in a great number of cases they are small and give rise to no symptoms. They are definitely associated with the period of sexual activity and occur more frequently in married women than in single, in the proportion of two to one (Winckel). It is doubtful if they ever originate after the menopause. Indeed if uncomplicated by changes in them they share in the general atrophy of the sexual organs which then takes place. They are divided according to their position in the tissues into intramural, subserous and submucous (the last when it has a pedicle forms a polypus), or as to the part of the uterus in which they develop into fibroids of the cervix and fibroids of the body. Intramural and submucous fibroids give rise to haemorrhage. The menses may be so increased that the patient is scarcely ever free from haemorrhage. The pressure of the growth may cause dysmenorrhoea, or pressure on the bladder and rectum may cause dysuria, retention or rectal tenesmus. The uterus may be displaced by the weight of the tumour. Secondary changes take place in fibroids, such as mucous degeneration, fatty metamorphosis, calcification, septic infection (sloughing fibroid) and malignant (sarcomatous) degeneration.

(e) New Growths in the Uterus.—The uterus is the most common site for new growths. Research by von Gurlt, compiled from the Vienna Hospital Reports, covering 15,880 cases of tumors, shows that females outnumber males in a ratio of seven to three, with uterine growths accounting for 25% of this significant majority. Considering its monthly swelling and the changes it undergoes during pregnancy, it's easy to understand why the uterus is particularly susceptible to new growths. Uterine tumors are classified as benign or malignant. The benign tumors, known as fibroids or myomata, are quite common. Bayle reported that they occur in 20% of women over 35 years old, but fortunately, in many cases, they are small and cause no symptoms. These tumors are definitely linked to the period of sexual activity and are more common in married women than in single ones, at a ratio of two to one (Winckel). It's uncertain if they develop after menopause. In fact, if they don't undergo complications, they participate in the general decline of the sexual organs that occurs after that period. They are categorized based on their location in the tissues as intramural, subserous, and submucous (the latter forming a polypus if it has a pedicle), or based on the part of the uterus where they grow, into fibroids of the cervix and fibroids of the body. Intramural and submucous fibroids can lead to heavy bleeding. Menstrual periods may become so excessive that the patient is almost constantly experiencing bleeding. The pressure from the growth may cause painful periods, or pressure on the bladder and rectum could lead to painful urination, retention, or rectal discomfort. The weight of the tumor may cause the uterus to shift from its normal position. Secondary changes can occur in fibroids, such as mucous degeneration, fatty changes, calcification, septic infections (sloughing fibroid), and malignant (sarcomatous) transformation.

The modes in which fibroids imperil life are haemorrhage (the commonest of all), septic infection, which is one of the most dangerous, impaction when it fits the true pelvis so tightly that the tumour cannot rise, twisting of the pedicle by rotation, leading to sloughing and intestinal and urinary obstruction. When fibroids are complicated by pregnancy, impaction and consequent abortion may take place, or a cervical myoma may offer a mechanical obstacle to delivery or lead to serious post partem haemorrhage. In the treatment of fibroids various drugs (ergot, hamamelis, hydrastis canadensis) may be tried to control the haemorrhage, and repose and the injection of hot water (120° F.) are sometimes successful, together with electrical treatment. Surgical measures are needed, however, in severe recurrent haemorrhage, intestinal obstruction, sloughing and the co-existence of pregnancy. An endeavour must be made if possible to enucleate the fibroid, or hysterectomy (removal of the uterus) may be required. The operation of removal of the ovaries to precipitate the menopause has fallen into disuse.

The ways in which fibroids can threaten health include heavy bleeding (the most common issue), septic infection, which is very dangerous, blockage when the fibroid fits so tightly in the pelvis that it can’t move, and twisting of the blood supply that can cause tissue death and blockage of the intestines and urinary tract. When fibroids are complicated by pregnancy, blockage and subsequent miscarriage can occur, or a cervical fibroid can create a physical barrier to delivery or result in serious bleeding after childbirth. In treating fibroids, various medications (like ergot, witch hazel, and goldenseal) may be used to manage the bleeding, and rest along with hot water injections (at 120°F) can sometimes help, along with electrical treatments. However, surgical intervention is necessary in cases of severe recurrent bleeding, intestinal blockage, tissue death, and during pregnancy. If possible, efforts should be made to remove the fibroid; however, a hysterectomy (removal of the uterus) may be needed. The practice of removing the ovaries to induce menopause has become less common.

(f) Malignant Disease of the Uterus.—The varieties of malignant disease met with in the uterus are sarcoma, carcinoma and chorion-epithelioma malignum. Sarcomata may occur in the body and in the neck. They occur at an earlier age than carcinomata. Marked enlargement and haemorrhage are the symptoms. The differential diagnosis is microscopic. Extirpation of the uterus is the only chance of prolonging life. The age at which women are most subject to carcinoma (cancer) of the uterus is towards the decline of sexual life. Of 3385 collected cases of cancer of the uterus 1169 occurred between 40 and 50, and 856 between 50 and 60. In contradistinction to fibroid tumours it frequently arises after the menopause. It may be divided into cancer of the body and cancer of the neck (cervix). Cancer of the neck of the uterus is almost exclusively confined to women who have been pregnant (Bland-Sutton). Predisposing causes may be injuries during delivery. The symptoms which induce women to seek medical aid are haemorrhage, foetid discharge, and later pain and cachexia. An unfortunate belief amongst the public that the menopause is associated with irregular bleeding and offensive discharges has prevented many women from seeking medical advice until too late. It cannot be too widely understood that cancer of the cervix is in its early stages a purely local disease, and if removed in this stage usually results in cure. So important is the recognition of this fact in the saving of human life that at the meeting of the British Medical Association in April 1909 the council issued for publication a special appeal to medical practitioners, midwives and nurses, and directed it to be published in British and colonial medical and nursing journals. It will be useful to quote here a part of the appeal directed to midwives and nurses: “Cancer may occur at any age and in a woman who looks quite well, and who may have no pain, no wasting, no foul discharge and no profuse bleeding. To wait for pain, wasting, foul discharge or profuse bleeding is to throw away the chance of successful treatment. The early symptoms of cancer of the womb are:—(1) bleeding which occurs after the change of life, (2) bleeding after sexual intercourse or after a vaginal douche, (3) bleeding, slight or abundant, even in young women, if occurring between the usual monthly periods, and especially when accompanied by a bad-smelling or watery blood-tinged discharge, (4) thin watery discharge occurring at any age.” On examination the cervix presents certain characteristic signs, though these may be modified according to the variety of cancer present. Hard nodules or definite loss of substance, extreme friability and bleeding after slight manipulation, are suspicious. Epithelial cancer of the cervix may assume a proliferating ulcerative type, forming the well-known “cauliflower” excrescence. The treatment of cancer of the cervix is free removal at the earliest possible moment. Cancer of the body of the uterus is rare before the 45th year. It is most frequent at or subsequent to the menopause. The majority of the patients are nulliparae (Bland-Sutton). The signs are fitful haemorrhages after the menopause, followed by profuse and offensive discharges. The uterus on examination often feels enlarged. The diagnosis being made, hysterectomy (removal of the uterus) is the only treatment. Cancer of the body of the uterus may complicate fibroids. Chorion-epithelioma malignum (deciduoma) was first described in 1889 by Sänger and Pfeiffer. It is a malignant disease presenting microscopic characters resembling decidual tissue. It occurs in connexion with recent pregnancy, and particularly with the variety of abortion termed hydatid mole. In many cases it destroys life with a rapidity unequalled by any other kind of growth. It quickly ulcerates and infiltrates the uterine tissues, forming metastatic growths in the lung and vagina. Clinically it is recognized by the occurrence after pregnancy of violent haemorrhages, progressive cachexia and fever with rigors. Recent suggestions have been made as to chorion-epithelioma being the result of pathological changes in the lutein tissue of the ovary. The growth is usually primary in the uterus, but may be so in the Fallopian tubes and in the vagina. A few cases have been recorded unconnected with pregnancy. The virulence of chorion-epithelioma varies, but in the present state of our knowledge immediate removal of the primary growth along with the affected organ is the only treatment.

(f) Malignant Disease of the Uterus.—The types of malignant disease found in the uterus include sarcoma, carcinoma, and chorion-epithelioma malignum. Sarcomas can develop in both the body and the neck of the uterus and tend to occur at a younger age than carcinomas. Symptoms include significant enlargement and bleeding. The distinction between them is made through microscopic examination. The only chance to extend life is to remove the uterus. Women are most susceptible to uterine carcinoma (cancer) as they approach the end of their reproductive years. Out of 3,385 collected cases of uterine cancer, 1,169 occurred between ages 40 and 50, and 856 between ages 50 and 60. Unlike fibroid tumors, it often appears after menopause. It can be categorized into cancer of the body and cancer of the neck (cervix). Cervical cancer is almost exclusively found in women who have been pregnant (Bland-Sutton). Factors that may predispose include injuries sustained during childbirth. The symptoms that prompt women to seek medical help are bleeding, foul discharge, and later pain along with cachexia. A harmful misconception among the public is that menopause is linked to irregular bleeding and bad discharges, causing many women to wait too long to seek medical advice. It is crucial to understand that early-stage cervical cancer is primarily a local disease, and if treated at this stage, often leads to a cure. Recognizing this fact is so important for saving lives that at the British Medical Association meeting in April 1909, the council published a special appeal to medical practitioners, midwives, and nurses, which was shared in British and colonial medical and nursing journals. It’s helpful to mention part of the appeal directed at midwives and nurses: “Cancer can occur at any age in a woman who appears completely healthy and may have no pain, no weight loss, no foul discharge, and no heavy bleeding. Waiting for pain, weight loss, foul discharge, or heavy bleeding is risking the chance for successful treatment. The early symptoms of womb cancer are:—(1) bleeding that happens after menopause, (2) bleeding after sex or after a vaginal wash, (3) bleeding, whether slight or heavy, in young women between their regular monthly periods, especially when accompanied by a bad-smelling or watery, blood-tinged discharge, (4) thin, watery discharge at any age.” Upon examination, the cervix shows certain characteristic signs, though these may vary based on the type of cancer present. Hard nodules or significant tissue loss, extreme fragility, and bleeding after light touch are concerning. Epithelial cancer of the cervix can present as a proliferative ulcerative type, forming the familiar “cauliflower” growth. The treatment for cervical cancer is to remove it as soon as possible. Cancer of the body of the uterus is rare before age 45 and is most common during or after menopause. Most patients are women who have never given birth (Bland-Sutton). Signs include unpredictable bleeding after menopause, followed by heavy and foul discharges. Upon examination, the uterus often feels enlarged. Once diagnosed, hysterectomy (removal of the uterus) is the only treatment option. Cancer of the body of the uterus may occur alongside fibroids. Chorion-epithelioma malignum (deciduoma) was first described in 1889 by Sänger and Pfeiffer. It is a malignant condition with microscopic features resembling decidual tissue. It is associated with recent pregnancy, particularly with a specific type of abortion known as hydatid mole. In many instances, it can be rapidly fatal, outpacing any other type of growth. It quickly damages and spreads into the uterine tissues, leading to secondary growths in the lungs and vagina. Clinically, it is identified by severe bleeding after pregnancy, progressive weight loss, and fever with chills. Recent theories suggest that chorion-epithelioma may stem from pathological changes in the lutein tissue of the ovary. While the growth is primarily located in the uterus, it can also occur in the Fallopian tubes and vagina. A few cases have been reported that are unrelated to pregnancy. The aggressiveness of chorion-epithelioma varies, but based on current knowledge, immediate removal of the primary growth along with the affected organ is the only treatment.

Diseases of the Fallopian Tubes.—The Fallopian tubes or oviducts 767 are liable to inflammatory affections, tuberculosis, sarcomata, cancer, chorion-epithelioma and tubal pregnancy. Salpingitis (inflammation of the oviducts) is nearly always secondary to septic infection of the genital tract. The chief causes are septic endometritis following labour or abortion, gangrene of a myoma, gonorrhoea, tuberculosis and cancer of the uterus; it sometimes follows the specific fevers. When the pus escapes from the tubes into the coelom it sets up pelvic peritonitis. When the inflammation is adjacent to the ostium it leads to the matting together of the tubal fimbriae and glues them to an adjacent organ. This seals the ostium. The occluded tube may now have an accumulation of pus in it (pyosalpinx). When in consequence of the sealing of the ostium the tube becomes distended with serous fluid it is termed hydrosalpinx. Haematosalpinx is a term applied to the non-gravid tube distended with blood; later the tubes may become sclerosed. Acute septic salpingitis is ushered in by a rigor, the temperature rising to 103°, 104° F., with severe pain and constitutional disturbance. The symptoms may become merged in those of general peritonitis. In chronic disease there is a history of puerperal trouble followed by sterility, with excessive and painful menstruation. Acute salpingitis requires absolute rest, opium suppositories and hot fomentations. With urgent symptoms removal of the inflamed adnexa must be resorted to. Chronic salpingitis often renders a woman an invalid. Permanent relief can only be afforded by surgical intervention. Tuberculous salpingitis is usually secondary to other tuberculous infections. The Fallopian tubes may be the seat of malignant disease. This is rarely primary. By far the most important of the conditions of the Fallopian tubes is tubal pregnancy (or ectopic gestation). It is now known that fertilization of the human ovum by the spermatozoon may take place even when the ovum is in its follicle in the ovary, for oosperms have been found in the ovary and Fallopian tubes as well as in the uterus. Belief in ovarian pregnancy is of old standing, and had been regarded as possible but unproved, no case of an early embryo in its membranes in the sac of an ovary being forthcoming, until the remarkable case published by Dr Catherine van Tussenboek of Amsterdam in 1899 (Bland-Sutton). Tubal pregnancy is most frequent in the left tube; it sometimes complicates uterine pregnancy; rarely both tubes are pregnant. When the oosperm lodges in the ampulla or isthmus it is called tubal gestation; when it is retained in the portion traversing the uterine wall it is called tubo-uterine gestation. Wherever the fertilized ovum remains and implants its villi the tube becomes turgid and swollen, and the abdominal ostium gradually closes. The ovum in this situation is liable to apoplexy, forming tubal mole. When the abdominal ostium remains pervious the ovum may escape into the coelomic cavity (tubal abortion); death from shock and haemorrhage into the abdominal cavity may result. When neither of these occurrences has taken place the ovum continues to grow inside the tube, the rupture of the distended tube usually taking place between the sixth and the tenth week. The rupture of the tube may be intraperitoneal or extraperitoneal. The danger is death from haemorrhage occurring during the rupture, or adhesions may form, the retained blood forming a haematocele. The ovum may be destroyed or may continue to develop. In rare cases rupture may not occur, the tube bulging into the peritoneal cavity; and the foetus may break through the membranes and lie free among the intestines, where it may die, becoming encysted or calcified. The tubal placenta possesses foetal structures, the true decidua forming in the uterus. The signs suggestive of tubal pregnancy before rupture are missed periods, pelvic pains and the presence of an enlarged tube. When rupture takes place it is attended in both varieties with sudden and severe pain and more or less marked collapse, and a tumour may or may not be felt according to the situation of the rupture. There is a general “feeling of something having given way.” If diagnosed before rupture, the sac must be removed by abdominal section. In intraperitoneal rupture immediate operation affords the only chance of saving life. In extraperitoneal rupture the foetus may occasionally remain alive until full term and be rescued by abdominal section, if the condition is recognized, or a false labour may take place, accompanied by death of the foetus.

Diseases of the Fallopian Tubes.—The Fallopian tubes, or oviducts, 767 are prone to inflammatory conditions, tuberculosis, sarcomas, cancer, chorion-epithelioma, and ectopic pregnancies. Salpingitis (inflammation of the oviducts) is almost always a result of a septic infection in the genital tract. The main causes include septic endometritis following childbirth or abortion, gangrene of a myoma, gonorrhea, tuberculosis, and cancer of the uterus; it can sometimes occur after certain types of fevers. When pus leaks from the tubes into the abdominal cavity, it leads to pelvic peritonitis. If the inflammation is near the opening, it can cause the fimbriae of the tube to stick together and form adhesions to nearby organs, sealing the opening. The blocked tube may then accumulate pus (pyosalpinx). If the tube becomes swollen with clear fluid due to the sealed opening, it's called hydrosalpinx. Haematosalpinx refers to a non-gravid tube filled with blood; ultimately, the tubes may become hardened (sclerosed). Acute septic salpingitis typically starts with chills and a temperature spike to 103° or 104° F., accompanied by severe pain and general illness. The symptoms may resemble those of a widespread abdominal infection (general peritonitis). In chronic cases, patients often report a history of post-childbirth complications followed by infertility and heavy, painful periods. Acute salpingitis requires total rest, opium suppositories, and hot compresses. If symptoms are severe, removal of the inflamed tissue is necessary. Chronic salpingitis can leave a woman unable to function normally. Permanent relief is only possible through surgery. Tuberculous salpingitis usually follows other tuberculosis infections. The Fallopian tubes can also be affected by malignant diseases, though this is rare as a primary condition. The most significant issue related to the Fallopian tubes is ectopic pregnancy (or tubal pregnancy). It's now understood that the human ovum can be fertilized by sperm even while it's still in the ovarian follicle, as oosperms have been found in the ovaries and Fallopian tubes, as well as in the uterus. The idea of ovarian pregnancies has been around for a long time and was considered possible yet unproven until Dr. Catherine van Tussenbroek of Amsterdam published a noteworthy case in 1899 (Bland-Sutton). Tubal pregnancy is most common in the left tube; it can sometimes complicate uterine pregnancies, though it's rare for both tubes to be affected. When the fertilized egg lodges in the ampulla or isthmus, it's called tubal gestation; if it's retained in the section that goes through the uterine wall, it's termed tubo-uterine gestation. Wherever the fertilized egg stays and implants, the tube becomes swollen, and the abdominal opening gradually closes. The egg in this position may suffer from internal bleeding, forming a tubal mole. If the abdominal opening stays open, the egg may escape into the abdominal cavity (tubal abortion), which can lead to death from shock and internal bleeding. If neither of these things happens, the egg continues to grow inside the tube, usually rupturing between the sixth and tenth week. The rupture can be intraperitoneal or extraperitoneal. The danger lies in the risk of fatal bleeding during the rupture, or adhesions may develop, resulting in a blood-filled cyst (haematocele). The egg may be destroyed or may keep developing. In rare cases, rupture might not occur, and the tube bulges into the pelvic cavity, where the fetus could break through the membranes and lie freely among the intestines, potentially dying and becoming encapsulated or calcified. The tubal placenta has fetal structures, while the true decidua develops in the uterus. Signs of ectopic pregnancy before rupture include missed periods, pelvic pain, and an enlarged tube. When rupture occurs, it causes sudden, severe pain and varying degrees of shock, and a mass may or may not be felt depending on the rupture's location. There is a general sensation of "something having given way." If diagnosed before rupture, the sac must be removed via abdominal surgery. In the case of an intraperitoneal rupture, immediate surgery is the only chance to save a life. In an extraperitoneal rupture, the fetus may sometimes survive until full term and can be rescued through abdominal surgery if the condition is recognized, or there may be false labor, leading to the fetus's death.

Diseases of the Ovaries and Parovarium.—The ovaries undergo striking changes at puberty, and again at the menopause, after which there is a gradual shrinkage. One or both may be absent or malformed, or they are subject to displacements, being either undescended, contained in a hernia or prolapsed. Either of these conditions, if a source of pain, may necessitate their removal. The ovary is also subject to haemorrhage or apoplexy. Acute inflammations (oöphorites) are constantly associated with salpingitis or other septic conditions of the genital tract or with an attack of mumps. The relation of oöphoritis to mumps is at present unknown. Acute oöphoritis may culminate in abscess but more usually adhesions are formed. The surgical treatment is that of pyosalpinx. Chronic inflammation may follow acute or be consequent on pelvic cellulitis. Its constant features are more or less pain followed by sterility. The ovary may be the seat of tuberculosis, which is generally secondary to other lesions. Suppuration and abscess of the ovary also occur. Perioöphoritis, or chronic inflammation in the neighbourhood, may also involve the gland. The cause of cirrhosis of the ovaries is unknown, though it may be associated with cirrhotic liver. The change is met with in women between 20 and 40 years of age, the ovaries being in a shrunken, hard, wrinkled condition. Under ovarian neuralgia are grouped indefinite painful symptoms occurring frequently in neurotic and alcoholic subjects, and often worse during menstruation. The treatment, whether local or operative, is usually unsatisfactory. The ovary is frequently the seat of tumours, dermoids and cysts. Cysts may be simple, unilocular or multilocular, and may attain an enormous size. The largest on record was removed by Dr Elizabeth Reifsnyder of Shanghai, and contained 100 litres of fluid, and the patient recovered. The operation is termed ovariotomy. Dermoid cysts containing skin, bones, teeth and hair, are of frequent growth in the ovary, and have attained the weight of from 20 to 40 kilogrammes. In one case a girl weighed 27 kilogrammes and her tumour 44 kilogrammes (Keen). Papillomatous cysts also occur in the ovary. Parovarian and Gärtnerian cysts are found, and adenomata form 20% of all ovarian cysts. Occasionally the tunic of peritoneum surrounding the ovary becomes distended with serous fluid. This is termed ovarian hydrocele. Ovarian fibroids occur, and malignant disease (sarcoma and carcinoma) is fairly frequent, sarcoma being the most usual ovarian tumour occurring before puberty. Carcinoma of the ovary is rarely primary, but it is a common situation for secondary cancer to that of the breast, gall-bladder or gastro-intestinal tract. The treatment of all rapidly-growing tumours of the ovary is removal.

Diseases of the Ovaries and Parovarium.—The ovaries undergo significant changes at puberty and again at menopause, after which they gradually shrink. One or both ovaries may be absent or malformed, or they may experience displacements, such as being undescended, contained in a hernia, or prolapsed. If any of these conditions cause pain, surgery may be necessary to remove them. The ovaries can also experience bleeding or apoplexy. Acute inflammation (oophoritis) is often linked to salpingitis, other infections in the genital tract, or an episode of mumps. The connection between oophoritis and mumps is currently unclear. Acute oophoritis can lead to an abscess, but it more commonly results in adhesions. Surgical treatment is focused on pyosalpinx. Chronic inflammation may develop after an acute episode or as a result of pelvic cellulitis. Its main symptoms include persistent pain and infertility. The ovary can also be affected by tuberculosis, usually secondary to other issues. Pus formation and abscesses can occur in the ovary as well. Perioophoritis, or chronic inflammation in the surrounding area, can also involve the gland. The cause of ovarian cirrhosis is unknown, but it may be linked to cirrhosis of the liver. This condition typically occurs in women aged 20 to 40, with the ovaries appearing shrunken, hard, and wrinkled. Ovarian neuralgia encompasses various painful symptoms that often occur in neurotic and alcoholic individuals, and are usually more severe during menstruation. Treatment, whether local or surgical, is often not effective. The ovary is commonly the site of tumors, dermoids, and cysts. Cysts can be simple, unilocular, or multilocular, and can grow to very large sizes. The largest on record was removed by Dr. Elizabeth Reifsnyder in Shanghai and contained 100 liters of fluid, with the patient making a full recovery. This procedure is called ovariotomy. Dermoid cysts, which contain skin, bone, teeth, and hair, frequently develop in the ovary and can weigh between 20 to 40 kilograms. In one case, a girl weighed 27 kilograms, and her tumor weighed 44 kilograms (Keen). Papillomatous cysts can also be found in the ovary. Parovarian and Gärtnerian cysts are present, and adenomata account for 20% of all ovarian cysts. Occasionally, the peritoneum surrounding the ovary becomes filled with serous fluid, which is referred to as ovarian hydrocele. Ovarian fibroids can develop, and malignant diseases (sarcoma and carcinoma) are quite common, with sarcoma being the most typical ovarian tumor before puberty. Primary carcinoma of the ovary is rare, but it's a common site for secondary cancer from the breast, gallbladder, or gastrointestinal tract. The treatment for all rapidly growing ovarian tumors is surgical removal.

Diseases of the Pelvic Peritoneum and Connective Tissue.—Women are excessively liable to peritoneal infections. (1) Septic infection often follows acute salpingitis and may give rise to pelvic peritonitis (perimetritis), which may be adhesive, serous or purulent. It may follow the rupture of ovarian or dermoid cysts, rupture of the uterus, extra uterine pregnancy or extension from pyosalpinx. The symptoms are severe pain, fever, 103° F. and higher, marked constitutional disturbances, vomiting, restlessness, even delirium. The abdomen is fixed and tympanitic. Its results are the formation of adhesions causing abnormal positions of the organs, or chronic peritonitis may follow. The treatment is rest in bed, opium, hot stupes to the abdomen and quinine. (2) Epithelial infections take place in the peritoneum in connexion with other malignant growths. (3) Hydroperitoneum, a collection of free fluid in the abdominal cavity, may be due to tumours of the abdominal viscera or to tuberculosis of the peritoneum. (4) Pelvic cellulitis (parametritis) signifies the inflammation of the connective tissue between the folds of the broad ligament (mesometrium). The general causes are septic changes following abortion, delivery at term (especially instrumental delivery), following operations on the uterus or salpingitis. The symptoms are chill followed by severe intrapelvic pain and tension, fever 100° to 102° F. There may be nausea and vomiting, diarrhoea, rectal tenseness and dysuria. If consequent on parturition the lochia cease or become offensive. On examination there is tenderness and swelling in one flank and the uterus becomes fixed and immovable in the exudate as if embedded in plaster of Paris. The illness may go to resolution if treated by rest, opium, hot stupes or icebags and glycerine tampons, or may go on to suppuration forming pelvic abscess, which signifies a collection of pus between the layers of the broad ligament. The pus in a pelvic abscess may point and escape through the walls of the vagina, rectum or bladder. It occasionally points in the groin. If the pus can be localized an incision should be made and the abscess drained. The tumours which arise in the broad ligament are haematocele, solid tumours (as myomata, lipomata and sarcomata), and echinnococcus colonies (hydatids).

Diseases of the Pelvic Peritoneum and Connective Tissue.—Women are particularly prone to peritoneal infections. (1) Septic infections often follow acute salpingitis and can lead to pelvic peritonitis (perimetritis), which may be adhesive, serous, or purulent. This condition can result from the rupture of ovarian or dermoid cysts, uterine rupture, ectopic pregnancies, or extension from pyosalpinx. Symptoms include severe pain, fever (103° F. and higher), significant constitutional disturbances, vomiting, restlessness, and even delirium. The abdomen becomes rigid and swollen. Potential outcomes include the formation of adhesions that cause abnormal organ positioning or chronic peritonitis. Treatment involves bed rest, opium, hot compresses on the abdomen, and quinine. (2) Epithelial infections can occur in the peritoneum in relation to other malignant growths. (3) Hydroperitoneum, which is the accumulation of free fluid in the abdominal cavity, may arise from tumors in the abdominal organs or tuberculosis of the peritoneum. (4) Pelvic cellulitis (parametritis) refers to the inflammation of the connective tissue between the folds of the broad ligament (mesometrium). Common causes include septic changes after abortion, delivery at term (especially with instruments), and surgeries on the uterus or salpingitis. Symptoms include chills followed by intense pelvic pain and tension, as well as fever ranging from 100° to 102° F. Nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, rectal tightness, and painful urination may occur. If related to childbirth, lochia may stop or become foul-smelling. Upon examination, there is tenderness and swelling in one side, and the uterus may become fixed and immovable in the fluid as if encased in plaster of Paris. The illness can resolve with treatment including rest, opium, hot compresses or ice packs, and glycerin tampons, or it might progress to suppuration, creating a pelvic abscess, which is a pus collection between the layers of the broad ligament. The pus from a pelvic abscess may drain through the vaginal wall, rectum, or bladder, and at times, it may point in the groin. If the pus can be localized, an incision should be made to drain the abscess. Tumors that arise in the broad ligament include hematomas, solid tumors (such as fibroids, lipomas, and sarcomas), and echinococcus colonies (hydatids).

Bibliography.—Albutt, Playfair and Eden, System of Gynaecology (1906); McNaughton Jones, Manual of Diseases of Women (1904); Bland-Sutton and Giles, Diseases of Women (1906); C. Lockyer, “Lutein Cysts in association with Chorio-Epithelioma,” Journal of Obstetrics and Gynaecology (January, 1905); W. Stewart McKay, History of Ancient Gynaecology; Hart and Barbour, Diseases of Women; Howard Kelly, Operative Gynaecology.

References.—Albutt, Playfair and Eden, System of Gynaecology (1906); McNaughton Jones, Manual of Diseases of Women (1904); Bland-Sutton and Giles, Diseases of Women (1906); C. Lockyer, “Lutein Cysts in association with Chorio-Epithelioma,” Journal of Obstetrics and Gynaecology (January, 1905); W. Stewart McKay, History of Ancient Gynaecology; Hart and Barbour, Diseases of Women; Howard Kelly, Operative Gynaecology.

(H. L. H.)

GYÖNGYÖSI, ISTVÁN [Stephen] (1620-1704), Hungarian poet, was born of poor but noble parents in 1620. His abilities early attracted the notice of Count Ferencz Wesselényi, who in 1640 appointed him to a post of confidence in Fülek castle. Here he remained till 1653, when he married and became an assessor of the judicial board. In 1681 he was elected as a representative of his county at the diet held at Soprony (Oedenburg). From 1686 to 1693, and again from 1700 to his death in 1704, he was deputy lord-lieutenant of the county of Gömör. Of his literary works the most famous is the epic poem Murányi Venus (Caschau, 1664), in honour of his benefactor’s wife Maria Szécsi, the heroine of Murány. Among his later productions the best known are Rózsa-Koszorú, or Rose-Wreath (1690), Kemény-János (1693), Cupidó (1695), Palinodia (1695) and Chariklia (1700).

GYÖNGYÖSI, ISTVÁN [Stephen] (1620-1704), Hungarian poet, was born to poor but noble parents in 1620. His talents quickly caught the attention of Count Ferencz Wesselényi, who in 1640 appointed him to a trusted position at Fülek castle. He stayed there until 1653, when he got married and became an assessor on the judicial board. In 1681, he was elected as a representative of his county at the diet in Soprony (Oedenburg). From 1686 to 1693, and again from 1700 until his death in 1704, he served as deputy lord-lieutenant of Gömör county. Among his literary works, the most famous is the epic poem Murányi Venus (Caschau, 1664), dedicated to his benefactor’s wife, Maria Szécsi, the heroine of Murány. His later works include the well-known Rózsa-Koszorú or Rose-Wreath (1690), Kemény-János (1693), Cupidó (1695), Palinodia (1695), and Chariklia (1700).

The earliest edition of his collected poetical works is by Dugonics (Pressburg and Pest, 1796); the best modern selection is that of Toldy, entitled Gyöngyösi István válogatott poétai munkái (Select poetical works of Stephen Gyöngyösi, 2 vols., 1864-1865).

The earliest edition of his collected poetry is by Dugonics (Pressburg and Pest, 1796); the best modern selection is by Toldy, titled Gyöngyösi István válogatott poétai munkái (Selected poetry of Stephen Gyöngyösi, 2 vols., 1864-1865).


GYÖR (Ger. Raab), a town of Hungary, capital of a county of the same name, 88 m. W. of Budapest by rail. Pop. (1900) 768 27,758. It is situated at the confluence of the Raab with the Danube, and is composed of the inner town and three suburbs. Györ is a well-built town, and is the seat of a Roman Catholic bishop. Amongst its principal buildings are the cathedral, dating from the 12th century, and rebuilt in 1639-1654; the bishop’s palace; the town hall; the Roman Catholic seminary for priests and several churches. There are manufactures of cloth, machinery and tobacco, and an active trade in grain and horses. Twenty miles by rail W. S. W. of the town is situated Csorna, a village with a Premonstratensian abbey, whose archives contain numerous valuable historical documents.

GYŐR (Ger. Raab), a town in Hungary and the capital of a county of the same name, is located 88 miles west of Budapest by train. Population (1900) 768 is 27,758. It sits at the meeting point of the Raab River and the Danube and consists of the main town and three suburbs. Györ is well-constructed and is the seat of a Roman Catholic bishop. Some of its main buildings include the cathedral, which dates back to the 12th century and was rebuilt between 1639 and 1654; the bishop’s palace; the town hall; the Roman Catholic seminary for priests; and several churches. The town has factories producing cloth, machinery, and tobacco, and is also active in trading grain and horses. Twenty miles west-southwest of the town is Csorna, a village with a Premonstratensian abbey, whose archives contain many valuable historical documents.

Györ is one of the oldest towns in Hungary and occupies the site of the Roman Arabona. It was already a place of some importance in the 10th century, and its bishopric was created in the 11th century. It was a strongly fortified town which resisted successfully the attacks of the Turks, into whose hands it fell by treachery in 1594, but they retained possession of it only for four years. Montecucculi made Györ a first-class fortress, and it remained so until 1783, when it was abandoned. At the beginning of the 19th century, the fortifications were re-erected, but were easily taken by the French in 1809, and were again stormed by the Austrians on the 28th of June 1849.

Györ is one of the oldest towns in Hungary and stands on the site of the Roman Arabona. It was already significant in the 10th century, and its bishopric was established in the 11th century. The town was heavily fortified and successfully defended against Turkish attacks, although it fell into their hands through treachery in 1594, but they only held it for four years. Montecucculi turned Györ into a top-tier fortress, and it remained that way until 1783 when it was abandoned. At the start of the 19th century, the fortifications were rebuilt but were easily taken by the French in 1809, and then retaken by the Austrians on June 28, 1849.

About 11 m. S.E. of Györ on a spur of the Bakony Forest lies the famous Benedictine abbey of Pannonhalma (Ger. St Martinsberg; Lat. Mons Sancti Martini), one of the oldest and wealthiest abbeys of Hungary. It was founded by King St Stephen, and the original deed from 1001 is preserved in the archives of the abbey. The present building is a block of palaces, containing a beautiful church, some of its parts dating from the 12th century, and lies on a hill 1200 ft. high. The church has a tower 130 ft. high. In the convent there are a seminary for priests, a normal school, a gymnasium and a library of 120,000 vols. The chief abbot has the rank of a bishop, and is a member of the Upper House of the Hungarian parliament, while in spiritual matters he is subordinate immediately to the Roman curia.

About 11 miles southeast of Györ, on a ridge of the Bakony Forest, is the famous Benedictine abbey of Pannonhalma (Ger. St Martinsberg; Lat. Mons Sancti Martini), one of the oldest and wealthiest abbeys in Hungary. It was established by King St. Stephen, and the original deed from 1001 is kept in the abbey's archives. The current building is a complex of palaces, featuring a beautiful church with parts dating back to the 12th century, situated on a hill 1,200 feet high. The church has a tower that stands 130 feet tall. Within the convent, there is a seminary for priests, a normal school, a gymnasium, and a library with 120,000 volumes. The chief abbot holds the rank of a bishop and is a member of the Upper House of the Hungarian parliament, while in spiritual matters, he reports directly to the Roman curia.


GYP, the pen name of Sibylle Gabrielle Marie Antoinette Riqueti de Mirabeau, Comtesse de Martel de Janville (1850-  ) French writer, who was born at the château of Koetsal in the Morbihan. Her father, who was the grandson of the vicomte de Mirabeau and great-nephew of the orator, served in the Papal Zouaves, and died during the campaign of 1860. Her mother, the comtesse de Mirabeau, in addition to some graver compositions, contributed to the Figaro and the Vie parisienne, under various pseudonyms, papers in the manner successfully developed by her daughter. Under the pseudonym of “Gyp” Madame de Martel, who was married in 1869, sent to the Vie parisienne, and later to the Revue des deux mondes, a large number of social sketches and dialogues, afterwards reprinted in volumes. Her later work includes stories of a more formal sort, essentially differing but little from the shorter studies. The following list includes some of the best known of Madame de Martel’s publications, nearly seventy in number: Petit Bob (1882); Autour du mariage (1883); Ce que femme veut (1883); Le Monde à côté (1884), Sans voiles (1885); Autour du divorce (1886); Dans le train (1886); Mademoiselle Loulou (1888); Bob au salon (1888-1889); L’Education d’un prince (1890); Passionette (1891); Ohé! la grande vie (1891); Une Élection à Tigre-sur-mer (1890), an account of “Gyp’s” experiences in support of a Boulangist candidate; Mariage civil (1892); Ces bons docteurs (1892); Du haut en bas (1893); Mariage de chiffon (1894); Leurs âmes (1895); Le Cœur d’Ariane (1895); Le Bonheur de Ginette (1896); Totote (1897); Lune de miel (1898); Israël (1898); L’Entrevue (1899); Le Pays des champs (1900); Trop de chic (1900); Le Friquet (1901); La Fée (1902); Un Mariage chic (1903); Un Ménage dernier cri (1903); Maman (1904); Le Cœur de Pierrette (1905). From the first “Gyp,” writing of a society to which she belonged, displayed all the qualities which have given her a distinct, if not pre-eminent, position among writers of her class. Those qualities included an intense faculty of observation, much skill in innuendo, a mordant wit combined with some breadth of humour, and a singular power of animating ordinary dialogues without destroying the appearance of reality. Her Parisian types of the spoiled child, of the precocious schoolgirl, of the young bride, and of various masculine figures in the gay world, have become almost classical, and may probably survive as faithful pictures of luxurious manners in the 19th century. Some later productions, inspired by a violent anti-Semitic and Nationalist bias, deserve little consideration. An earlier attempt to dramatize Autour du mariage was a failure, not owing to the audacities which it shares with most of its author’s works, but from lack of cohesion and incident. More successful was Mademoiselle Ève (1895), but indeed “Gyp’s” successes are all achieved without a trace of dramatic faculty. In 1901 Madame de Martel furnished a sensational incident in the Nationalist campaign during the municipal elections in Paris. She was said to have been the victim of a kidnapping outrage or piece of horseplay provoked by her political attitude, but though a most circumstantial account of the outrages committed on her and of her adventurous escape was published, the affair was never clearly explained or verified.

GYP,, the pen name of Sibylle Gabrielle Marie Antoinette Riqueti de Mirabeau, Comtesse de Martel de Janville (1850-  ), was a French writer born at the château of Koetsal in Morbihan. Her father, a grandson of the vicomte de Mirabeau and a great-nephew of the orator, served in the Papal Zouaves and died during the 1860 campaign. Her mother, the comtesse de Mirabeau, wrote some serious works and contributed to the Figaro and Vie parisienne under various pseudonyms, modeling her work on styles that her daughter would later successfully adopt. Writing under the name “Gyp,” Madame de Martel, who married in 1869, submitted numerous social sketches and dialogues to the Vie parisienne and later to the Revue des deux mondes, which were later collected into volumes. Her later writings included more formal stories that were not very different from her shorter pieces. The following list includes some of Madame de Martel’s best-known publications, totaling nearly seventy: Petit Bob (1882); Autour du mariage (1883); Ce que femme veut (1883); Le Monde à côté (1884); Sans voiles (1885); Autour du divorce (1886); Dans le train (1886); Mademoiselle Loulou (1888); Bob au salon (1888-1889); L’Education d’un prince (1890); Passionette (1891); Ohé! la grande vie (1891); Une Élection à Tigre-sur-mer (1890), an account of “Gyp’s” experiences supporting a Boulangist candidate; Mariage civil (1892); Ces bons docteurs (1892); Du haut en bas (1893); Mariage de chiffon (1894); Leurs âmes (1895); Le Cœur d’Ariane (1895); Le Bonheur de Ginette (1896); Totote (1897); Lune de miel (1898); Israël (1898); L’Entrevue (1899); Le Pays des champs (1900); Trop de chic (1900); Le Friquet (1901); La Fée (1902); Un Mariage chic (1903); Un Ménage dernier cri (1903); Maman (1904); Le Cœur de Pierrette (1905). From the start, “Gyp” showcased the qualities that earned her a notable, if not dominant, place among writers of her genre. These qualities included sharp observational skills, clever insinuations, a biting wit paired with a broad sense of humor, and a unique ability to bring normal conversations to life without losing the sense of reality. Her depictions of Parisian archetypes, such as the spoiled child, the precocious schoolgirl, the young bride, and various male figures in the vibrant social scene, have become almost classic and likely will endure as authentic representations of 19th-century luxurious lifestyles. Some of her later works, fueled by strong anti-Semitic and nationalist sentiments, hold little value. An earlier effort to adapt Autour du mariage for the stage failed, not because of the boldness typical of her work but due to a lack of coherence and drama. A more successful endeavor was Mademoiselle Ève (1895); however, “Gyp’s” successes consistently displayed no sign of dramatic talent. In 1901, Madame de Martel found herself at the center of a sensational incident during the nationalist campaign in the municipal elections in Paris. She allegedly became a victim of a kidnapping or prank linked to her political stance, but although a detailed account of the alleged wrongdoing and her escape was published, the issue was never clearly explained or verified.


GYPSUM, a common mineral consisting of hydrous calcium sulphate, named from the Gr. γύψος, a word used by Theophrastus to denote not only the raw mineral but also the product of its calcination, which was employed in ancient times, as it still is, as a plaster. When crystallized, gypsum is often called selenite, the σεληνίτης of Dioscorides, so named from σελήνη, “the moon,” probably in allusion to the soft moon-like reflection of light from some of its faces, or, according to a legend, because it is found at night when the moon is on the increase. The granular, marble-like gypsum is termed alabaster (q.v.).

GYPSUM, is a common mineral made up of hydrous calcium sulfate, named after the Greek word plaster, which Theophrastus used to refer to both the raw mineral and the product of its calcination. This material was used in ancient times and still is today, particularly as a plaster. When crystalized, gypsum is often called selenite, known as selenite by Dioscorides. It got this name from moon, meaning “the moon,” likely referring to the soft, moon-like glow that comes from some of its surfaces, or according to a legend, because it can be found at night when the moon is waxing. The granular, marble-like form of gypsum is referred to as alabaster (q.v.).

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

Gypsum crystallizes in the monoclinic system, the habit of the crystals being usually either prismatic or tabular; in the latter case the broad planes are parallel to the faces of the clinopinacoid. The crystals may become lenticular by curvature of certain faces. In the characteristic type represented in fig. 1, f represents the prism, l the hemi-pyramid and P the clinopinacoid. Twins are common, as in fig. 2, forming in some cases arrow-headed and swallow-tailed crystals. Cleavage is perfect parallel to the clinopinacoid, yielding thin plates, often diamond-shaped, with pearly lustre; these flakes are usually flexible, but may be brittle, as in the gypsum of Montmartre. Two other cleavages are recognized, but they are imperfect. Crystals of gypsum, when occurring in clay, may enclose much muddy matter; in other cases a large proportion of sand may be mechanically entangled in the crystals without serious disturbance of form; whilst certain crystals occasionally enclose cavities with liquid and an air-bubble. Gypsum not infrequently becomes fibrous. This variety occurs in veins, often running through gypseous marls, with the fibres disposed at right angles to the direction of the vein. Such gypsum when cut and polished has a pearly opalescence, or satiny sheen, whence it is called satin-spar (q.v.).

Gypsum crystallizes in the monoclinic system, and the crystals usually form either prismatic or tabular shapes; in the tabular case, the broad surfaces are parallel to the clinopinacoid faces. The crystals can also take on a lenticular shape due to the curvature of certain faces. In the typical type shown in fig. 1, f indicates the prism, l the hemi-pyramid, and P the clinopinacoid. Twins are common, as depicted in fig. 2, sometimes forming arrow-headed and swallow-tailed crystals. The cleavage is perfect along the clinopinacoid, producing thin plates that are often diamond-shaped with a pearly luster; these flakes are usually flexible but can be brittle, as seen in the gypsum from Montmartre. Two other types of cleavage are recognized, but they are imperfect. Gypsum crystals found in clay can often trap a lot of muddy material; in other situations, a significant amount of sand may get mechanically caught in the crystals without greatly altering their shape, while some crystals may even enclose cavities containing liquid and an air bubble. Gypsum sometimes develops a fibrous texture. This type often appears in veins that run through gypseous marls, with the fibers oriented at right angles to the vein's direction. When this fibrous gypsum is cut and polished, it displays a pearly opalescence or satiny sheen, which is why it's referred to as satin-spar (q.v.).

Gypsum is so soft as to be scratched even by the finger-nail (H = 1.5 to 2). Its specific gravity is about 2.3. The mineral is slightly soluble in water, one part of gypsum being soluble, according to G. K. Cameron, in 372 parts of pure water at 26° C. Waters percolating through gypseous strata, like the Keuper marls, dissolve the calcium sulphate and thus become permanently hard or “selenitic.” Such water has special value for brewing pale ale, and the water used by the Burton breweries is of this character; hence the artificial dissolving of gypsum in water for brewing purposes is known as “burtonization.” Deposits of gypsum are formed in boilers using selenitic water.

Gypsum is so soft that it can be scratched by a fingernail (H = 1.5 to 2). Its specific gravity is around 2.3. The mineral is slightly soluble in water, with one part of gypsum dissolving in about 372 parts of pure water at 26° C, according to G. K. Cameron. Water that flows through gypsum-rich layers, like the Keuper marls, dissolves calcium sulfate and becomes permanently hard, or “selenitic.” This type of water is particularly valuable for brewing pale ale, and the water used by the Burton breweries has this characteristic; therefore, the process of artificially dissolving gypsum in water for brewing is called “burtonization.” Gypsum deposits form in boilers that use selenitic water.

Pure gypsum is colourless or white, but it is often tinted, especially in the alabaster variety, grey, yellow or pink. Gypsum crystallizes with two molecules of water, equal to about 21% by 769 weight, and consequently has the formula CaSO4·2H2O. By exposure to strong heat all the water may be expelled, and the substance then has the composition of anhydrite (q.v.). When the calcination, however, is conducted at such a temperature that only about 75% of the water is lost, it yields a white pulverulent substance, known as “plaster of Paris,” which may readily be caused to recombine with water, forming a hard cement. The gypsum quarries of Montmartre, in the north of Paris, were worked in Tertiary strata, rich in fossils. Gypsum is largely quarried in England for conversion into plaster of Paris, whence it is sometimes known as “plaster stone,” and since much is sent to the Staffordshire potteries for making moulds it is also termed “potter’s stone.” The chief workings are in the Keuper marls near Newark in Nottinghamshire, Fauld in Staffordshire and Chellaston in Derbyshire. It is also worked in Permian beds in Cumberland and Westmorland, and in Purbeck strata near Battle in Sussex.

Pure gypsum is colorless or white, but it often has tints, especially in the alabaster variety, which can be grey, yellow, or pink. Gypsum crystallizes with two molecules of water, making up about 21% by weight, and thus has the formula CaSO4·2H2O. When exposed to high heat, all the water can be removed, resulting in anhydrite (q.v.). If the calcination is done at a temperature that only removes about 75% of the water, it produces a white powdery substance known as “plaster of Paris,” which can easily recombine with water to form a hard cement. The gypsum quarries in Montmartre, north of Paris, were mined in Tertiary layers rich in fossils. Gypsum is primarily quarried in England to be transformed into plaster of Paris, which is sometimes called “plaster stone,” and since much of it is sent to the Staffordshire potteries for making molds, it’s also referred to as “potter’s stone.” The main sites of extraction are in the Keuper marls near Newark in Nottinghamshire, Fauld in Staffordshire, and Chellaston in Derbyshire. It is also mined in Permian beds in Cumberland and Westmorland, and in Purbeck layers near Battle in Sussex.

Gypsum frequently occurs in association with rock-salt, having been deposited in shallow basins of salt water. Much of the calcium in sea-water exists as sulphate; and on evaporation of a drop of sea-water under the microscope this sulphate is deposited as acicular crystals of gypsum. In salt-lagoons the deposition of the gypsum is probably effected in most cases by means of micro-organisms. Waters containing sulphuretted hydrogen, on exposure to the air in the presence of limestone, may yield gypsum by the formation of sulphuric acid and its interaction with the calcium carbonate. In volcanic districts gypsum is produced by the action of sulphuric acid, resulting from the oxidation of sulphurous vapours, on lime-bearing minerals, like labradorite and augite, in the volcanic rocks: hence gypsum is common around solfataras. Again, by the oxidation of iron-pyrites and the action of the resulting sulphuric acid on limestone or on shells, gypsum may be formed; whence its origin in most clays. Gypsum is also formed in some cases by the hydration of anhydrite, the change being accompanied by an increase of volume to the extent of about 60%. Conversely gypsum may, under certain conditions, be dehydrated or reduced to anhydrite.

Gypsum often occurs alongside rock salt, having formed in shallow saltwater basins. Much of the calcium in seawater is found as sulfate; when a drop of seawater evaporates under a microscope, this sulfate crystallizes into acicular gypsum crystals. In salt lagoons, the deposition of gypsum is often facilitated by microorganisms. Waters that contain hydrogen sulfide can produce gypsum when exposed to air in the presence of limestone, leading to the formation of sulfuric acid, which then interacts with calcium carbonate. In volcanic areas, gypsum is generated through the action of sulfuric acid, created by the oxidation of sulfurous gases, on lime-containing minerals like labradorite and augite found in volcanic rocks; this is why gypsum is commonly found around solfataras. Additionally, the oxidation of iron pyrites and the subsequent action of the sulfuric acid produced on limestone or shells can lead to gypsum formation, explaining its presence in many clays. Gypsum can also form from the hydration of anhydrite, a process that results in about a 60% increase in volume. Conversely, under certain conditions, gypsum can be dehydrated or converted back to anhydrite.

Some of the largest known crystals of selenite have been found in southern Utah, where they occur in huge geodes, or crystal-lined cavities, in deposits from the old salt-lakes. Fine crystals, sometimes curiously bent, occur in the Permian rocks of Friedrichroda, near Gotha, where there is a grotto called the Marienglashöhle, close to Rheinhardsbrunn. Many of the best localities for selenite are in the New Red Sandstone formation (Trias and Permian), notably the salt-mines of Hall and Hallein, near Salzburg, and of Bex in Switzerland. Excellent crystals, usually of a brownish colour arranged in groups, are often found in the brine-chambers and the launders used in salt-works. Selenite also occurs in fine crystals in the sulphur-bearing marls of Girgenti and other Sicilian localities; whilst in Britain very bold crystals are yielded by the Kimeridge clay of Shotover Hill near Oxford. Twisted crystals and rosettes of gypsum found in the Mammoth Cave, Kentucky, have been called “oulopholites” (οὖλος, “woolly”; φωλεός, “cave”).

Some of the largest known selenite crystals have been discovered in southern Utah, where they are found in massive geodes, or crystal-lined cavities, from ancient salt lakes. Beautiful crystals, sometimes oddly bent, are located in the Permian rocks of Friedrichroda, near Gotha, where there is a cave called the Marienglashöhle, close to Rheinhardsbrunn. Many of the top spots for selenite are in the New Red Sandstone formation (Triassic and Permian), especially the salt mines of Hall and Hallein, near Salzburg, and Bex in Switzerland. Great crystals, often a brownish color and grouped together, can frequently be found in the brine chambers and launders used in salt production. Selenite also appears in fine crystals in the sulfur-rich marls of Girgenti and other places in Sicily; meanwhile, in Britain, large crystals are produced by the Kimmeridge clay of Shotover Hill near Oxford. Twisted crystals and rosettes of gypsum found in Mammoth Cave, Kentucky, are referred to as “oulopholites” (οὖλος, “woolly”; nook, “cave”).

In addition to the use of gypsum in cement-making, the mineral finds application as an agricultural agent in dressing land, and it has also been used in the manufacture of porcelain and glass. Formerly it was employed, in the form of thin cleavage-plates, for glazing windows, and seems to have been, with mica, called lapis specularis. It is still known in Germany as Marienglas and Fraueneis. Delicate cleavage-plates of gypsum are used in microscopic petrography for the determination of certain optical constants in the rock-forming minerals.

In addition to using gypsum in cement production, this mineral also serves as an agricultural agent for soil enrichment and has been utilized in making porcelain and glass. In the past, it was used in the form of thin cleavage plates for glazing windows and was known, along with mica, as lapis specularis. In Germany, it is still referred to as Marienglas and Fraueneis. Delicate cleavage plates of gypsum are used in microscopic petrography to determine specific optical constants in rock-forming minerals.

(F. W. R.*)

GYROSCOPE AND GYROSTAT. These are scientific models or instruments designed to illustrate experimentally the dynamics of a rotating body such as the spinning-top, hoop and bicycle, and also the precession of the equinox and the rotation of the earth.

GYROSCOPE AND GYROSTAT. These are scientific models or instruments created to demonstrate experimentally how a rotating body works, such as a spinning top, a hoop, and a bicycle, as well as the precession of the equinox and the Earth's rotation.

The gyroscope (Gr. γῦρος, ring, σκοπεῖν, to see) may be distinguished from the gyrostat (γῦρος, and στατικός, stationary) as an instrument in which the rotating wheel or disk is mounted in gimbals so that the principal axis of rotation always passes through a fixed point (fig. 1). It can be made to imitate the motion of a spinning-top of which the point is placed in a smooth agate cup as in Maxwell’s dynamical top (figs. 2, 3). (Collected Works, i. 248.) A bicycle wheel, with a prolongation of the axle placed in a cup, can also be made to serve (fig. 4).

The gyroscope (Gr. gyros, ring, σκοπεῖν, to see) can be differentiated from the gyrostat (gyros, and static, stationary) as a device where the rotating wheel or disk is mounted in gimbals, allowing the main axis of rotation to always go through a fixed point (fig. 1). It can mimic the motion of a spinning top, with the tip placed in a smooth agate cup, similar to Maxwell’s dynamical top (figs. 2, 3). (Collected Works, i. 248.) A bicycle wheel, with an extended axle placed in a cup, can also be used for this purpose (fig. 4).

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

The gyrostat is an instrument designed by Lord Kelvin (Natural Philosophy, § 345) to illustrate the more complicated state of motion of a spinning body when free to wander about on a horizontal plane, like a top spun on the pavement, or a hoop or bicycle on the road. It consists essentially of a massive fly-wheel concealed in a metal casing, and its behaviour on a table, or with various modes of suspension or support, described in Thomson and Tait, Natural Philosophy, serves to illustrate the curious reversal of the ordinary laws of statical equilibrium due to the gyrostatic domination of the interior invisible fly-wheel, when rotated rapidly (fig. 5).

The gyrostat is a device created by Lord Kelvin (Natural Philosophy, § 345) to demonstrate the more complex motion of a spinning object when it can move freely on a flat surface, like a spinning top on pavement or a hoop or bicycle on a road. It mainly consists of a heavy flywheel housed in a metal casing, and its behavior on a table, or with different types of suspension or support, as described in Thomson and Tait's Natural Philosophy, illustrates the interesting reversal of normal laws of static balance caused by the gyrostatic dominance of the inner, invisible flywheel when it spins quickly (fig. 5).

The toy shown in figs. 6 and 7, which can be bought for a shilling, is acting as a gyroscope in fig. 6 and a gyrostat in fig. 7.

The toy shown in figs. 6 and 7, which can be purchased for a shilling, is functioning as a gyroscope in fig. 6 and a gyrostat in fig. 7.

Fig. 3. Fig. 4.

The gyroscope, as represented in figs. 2 and 3 by Maxwell’s dynamical top, is provided with screws by which the centre of gravity can be brought into coincidence with the point of support. It can then be used to illustrate Poinsot’s theory of the motion of a body under no force, the gyroscope being made kinetically unsymmetrical by a setting of the screws. The discussion of this movement is required for Jacobi’s theorems on the allied motion of a top and of a body under no force (Poinsot, Théorie nouvelle de la rotation des corps, Paris, 1857; Jacobi, Werke, ii. Note B, p. 476).

The gyroscope, shown in figs. 2 and 3 through Maxwell’s dynamic top, has screws that allow the center of gravity to align with the point of support. This setup can then be used to demonstrate Poinsot’s theory of how a body moves without any forces acting on it, as the gyroscope is made kinetically unsymmetrical by adjusting the screws. Understanding this movement is necessary for Jacobi’s theorems regarding the related motion of a top and a body with no forces acting on it (Poinsot, Théorie nouvelle de la rotation des corps, Paris, 1857; Jacobi, Werke, ii. Note B, p. 476).

To imitate the movement of the top the centre of gravity is displaced from the point of support so as to give a preponderance. When the motion takes place in the neighbourhood of the downward vertical, the bicycle wheel can be made to serve again 770 mounted as in fig. 8 by a stalk in the prolongation of the axle, suspended from a universal joint at O; it can then be spun by hand and projected in any manner.

To copy the movement of the top, the center of gravity is shifted away from the support point to create a balance. When the motion occurs close to the downward vertical, the bicycle wheel can be used again 770 mounted as shown in fig. 8 with a stalk extending from the axle, suspended from a universal joint at O; it can then be spun by hand and launched in any way.

Fig. 5.
Fig. 6.
Fig. 7.
Fig. 8. Fig. 9.

The first practical application of the gyroscopic principle was invented and carried out (1744) by Serson, with a spinning top with a polished upper plane surface for giving an artificial horizon at sea, undisturbed by the motion of the ship, when the real horizon was obscured. The instrument has been perfected by Admiral Georges Ernest Fleuriais (fig. 9), and is interesting theoretically as showing the correction required practically for the rotation of the earth. Gilbert’s barogyroscope is devised for the same purpose of showing the earth’s rotation; a description of it, and of the latest form employed by Föppl, is given in the Ency. d. math. Wiss., 1904, with bibliographical references in the article “Mechanics of Physical Apparatus.” The rotation of the fly-wheel is maintained here by an electric motor, as devised by G. M. Hopkins, and described in the Scientific American, 1878. To demonstrate the rotation of the earth by the constancy in direction of the axis of a gyroscope is a suggestion that has often been made; by E. Sang in 1836, and others. The experiment was first carried out with success by Foucault in 1851, by a simple pendulum swung in the dome of the Pantheon, Paris, and it has been repeated frequently (Mémoires sur le pendule, 1889).

The first practical use of the gyroscopic principle was invented and implemented by Serson in 1744. He created a spinning top with a smooth upper surface to provide an artificial horizon at sea, unaffected by the ship's movement when the real horizon was blocked. Admiral Georges Ernest Fleuriais improved this instrument, which is theoretically interesting because it shows the adjustments needed for the Earth's rotation. Gilbert’s barogyroscope was designed for the same reason, demonstrating the Earth's rotation; a description of it and the latest version used by Föppl can be found in the Ency. d. math. Wiss. from 1904, along with bibliographical references in the article “Mechanics of Physical Apparatus.” The flywheel's rotation is kept going by an electric motor designed by G. M. Hopkins, as described in the Scientific American from 1878. The idea of demonstrating the Earth's rotation through the constant direction of a gyroscope's axis has been suggested many times, including by E. Sang in 1836, among others. The experiment was first successfully conducted by Foucault in 1851 using a simple pendulum that he swung in the dome of the Pantheon in Paris, and it has been repeated many times since (see Mémoires sur le pendule, 1889).

A gyroscopic fly-wheel will preserve its original direction in space only when left absolutely free in all directions, as required in the experiments above. If employed in steering, as of a torpedo, the gyroscope must act through the intermediary of a light relay; but if direct-acting, the reaction will cause precession of the axis, and the original direction is lost.

A gyroscopic flywheel will maintain its original direction in space only when it’s completely free to move in all directions, as required in the experiments mentioned above. If it’s used for steering, like in a torpedo, the gyroscope needs to work through a light relay; however, if it acts directly, the reaction will cause the axis to precess, and the original direction will be lost.

The gyrostatic principle, in which one degree of freedom is suppressed in the axis, is useful for imparting steadiness and stability in a moving body; it is employed by Schlick to mitigate the rolling of a ship and to maintain the upright position of Brennan’s monorail car.

The gyrostatic principle, where one degree of freedom is restricted along the axis, is helpful for providing steadiness and stability in a moving object; Schlick uses it to reduce a ship's rolling and to keep Brennan’s monorail car upright.

Lastly, as an application of gyroscopic theory, a stretched chain of fly-wheels in rotation was employed by Kelvin as a mechanical model of the rotary polarization of light in an electromagnetic field; the apparatus may be constructed of bicycle wheels connected by short links, and suspended vertically.

Lastly, as an application of gyroscopic theory, Kelvin used a stretched chain of rotating flywheels as a mechanical model for the rotary polarization of light in an electromagnetic field. The setup can be made using bicycle wheels linked by short connections and hung vertically.

Theory of the Symmetrical Top.

Theory of the Symmetrical Top.

1. The physical constants of a given symmetrical top, expressed in C.G.S. units, which are employed in the subsequent formulae, are denoted by M, h, C and A. M is the weight in grammes (g) as given by the number of gramme weights which equilibrate the top when weighed in a balance; h is the distance OG in centimetres (cm.) between G the centre of gravity and O the point of support, and Mh may be called the preponderance in g.-cm.; Mh and M can be measured by a spring balance holding up in a horizontal position the axis OC in fig. 8 suspended at O. Then gMh (dyne-cm. or ergs) is the moment of gravity about O when the axis OG is horizontal, gMh sin θ being the moment when the axis OG makes an angle θ with the vertical, and g = 981 (cm./s2) on the average; C is the moment of inertia of the top about OG, and A about any axis through O at right angles to OG, both measured in g-cm.2.

1. The physical constants of a symmetric top, measured in C.G.S. units, used in the following formulas are represented by M, h, C, and A. M is the weight in grams (g) as determined by the number of gram weights that balance the top when weighed in a scale; h is the distance OG in centimeters (cm) between G, the center of gravity, and O, the pivot point. Mh can be referred to as the preponderance in g-cm; Mh and M can be measured using a spring scale that holds the axis OC in figure 8 horizontal at O. Then, gMh (dyne-cm or ergs) is the moment of gravity about O when the axis OG is horizontal, with gMh sin θ being the moment when the axis OG makes an angle θ with the vertical, where g = 981 (cm/s²) on average; C is the moment of inertia of the top about OG, and A is about any axis through O that is perpendicular to OG, both measured in g-cm².

To measure A experimentally, swing the top freely about O in small plane oscillation, and determine the length, l cm., of the equivalent simple pendulum; then

To measure A experimentally, swing the top freely around O in small plane oscillation, and find the length, l cm, of the equivalent simple pendulum; then

l = A/Mh, A = Mhl.

l = A/Mh, A = Mhl.

(1)

Next make the top, or this simple pendulum, perform small conical revolutions, nearly coincident with the downward vertical position of equilibrium, and measure n, the mean angular velocity of the conical pendulum in radians / second; and T its period in seconds; then

Next, have the top, or this simple pendulum, perform small conical movements, closely aligned with the downward vertical position of equilibrium, and measure n, the average angular velocity of the conical pendulum in radians per second; and T its period in seconds; then

2/T2 = n2 = g/l = gMh/A;

2/T2 = n2 = g/l = gMh/A;

(2)

and f = n/2π is the number of revolutions per second, called the frequency, T = 2π/n is the period of a revolution, in seconds.

and f = n/2π is the number of revolutions per second, known as the frequency, T = 2π/n is the time it takes for one revolution, in seconds.

2. In the popular explanation of the steady movement of the top at a constant inclination to the vertical, depending on the composition of angular velocity, such as given in Perry’s Spinning Tops, or Worthington’s Dynamics of Rotation, Steady motion of the top. it is asserted that the moment of gravity is always generating an angular velocity about an axis OB perpendicular to the vertical plane COC′ through the axis of the top OC′; and this angular velocity, compounded with the resultant angular velocity about an axis OI, nearly coincident with OC′, causes the axes OI and OC′ to keep taking up a new position by moving at right angles to the plane COC′, at a constant precessional angular velocity, say μ rad./sec., round the vertical OC (fig. 4).

2. In the popular explanation of the constant movement of the top at a steady angle to the vertical, based on the composition of angular velocity, as described in Perry’s Spinning Tops and Worthington’s Dynamics of Rotation, Smooth spinning of the top. it is stated that the force of gravity is always creating an angular velocity around an axis OB that is perpendicular to the vertical plane COC′ that goes through the axis of the top OC′; and this angular velocity, combined with the overall angular velocity around an axis OI, which is almost aligned with OC′, causes the axes OI and OC′ to continuously adjust their position by moving at right angles to the plane COC′, at a constant precessional angular velocity, approximately μ rad./sec., around the vertical OC (fig. 4).

If, however, the axis OC′ is prevented from taking up this precessional velocity, the top at once falls down; thence all the ingenious attempts—for instance, in the swinging cabin of the Bessemer ship—to utilise the gyroscope as a mechanical directive agency have always resulted in failure (Engineer, October 1874), unless restricted to actuate a light relay, which guides the mechanism, as in steering a torpedo.

If the axis OC′ can't achieve this precessional speed, the top immediately falls over. Consequently, all the clever efforts—like in the swinging cabin of the Bessemer ship—to use the gyroscope as a mechanical guiding system have consistently failed (Engineer, October 1874), unless it's limited to activating a light relay that directs the mechanism, similar to how a torpedo is steered.

An experimental verification can be carried out with the gyroscope in fig. 1; so long as the vertical spindle is free to rotate in its socket, the rapidly rotating wheel will resist the impulse of tapping on the gimbal by moving to one side; but when the pinch screw prevents the rotation of the vertical spindle in the massive pedestal, this resistance to the tapping at once disappears, provided the friction of the table prevents the movement of the pedestal; and if the wheel has any preponderance, it falls down.

An experimental verification can be done with the gyroscope in fig. 1; as long as the vertical spindle can rotate freely in its socket, the rapidly spinning wheel will resist the force of tapping on the gimbal by moving sideways. However, when the pinch screw stops the vertical spindle from rotating in the heavy pedestal, this resistance to tapping disappears immediately, as long as the friction of the table stops the pedestal from moving; and if the wheel is unbalanced, it will fall over.

Familiar instances of the same principles are observable in the movement of a hoop, or in the steering of a bicycle; it is essential that the handle of the bicycle should be free to rotate to secure the stability of the movement.

Familiar examples of the same principles can be seen in the movement of a hoop or in steering a bicycle; it is essential that the handle of the bicycle be free to rotate to ensure the stability of the movement.

The bicycle wheel, employed as a spinning top, in fig. 4, can also be held by the stalk, and will thus, when rotated rapidly, convey a distinct muscular impression of resistance to change of direction, if brandished.

The bicycle wheel, used as a spinning top, in fig. 4, can also be held by the stalk, and will therefore, when spun quickly, give a clear muscular sense of resistance to changing direction, if swung around.

3. A demonstration, depending on the elementary principles of dynamics, of the exact conditions required for the Elementary demonstration of the condition of steady motion. axis OC′ of a spinning top to spin steadily at a constant inclination θ to the vertical OC, is given here before proceeding to the more complicated question of the general motion, when θ, the inclination of the axis, is varying by nutation.

3. A demonstration based on the basic principles of dynamics shows the exact conditions needed for the Basic demonstration of the state of steady motion. axis OC′ of a spinning top to spin steadily at a constant angle θ to the vertical OC. This is provided here before moving on to the more complex issue of general motion when θ, the angle of the axis, changes due to nutation.

It is a fundamental principle in dynamics that if OH is a vector representing to scale the angular momentum of a system, and if Oh is the vector representing the axis of the impressed couple or torque, then OH will vary so that the velocity of H is represented to scale by the impressed couple Oh, and if the top is moving freely about O, Oh is at right angles to the vertical plane COC′, and

It is a basic principle in dynamics that if OH is a vector that accurately reflects the angular momentum of a system, and if Oh is the vector representing the axis of the applied couple or torque, then OH will change so that the velocity of H is accurately represented by the applied couple Oh. If the top is spinning freely around O, Oh is perpendicular to the vertical plane COC′, and

Oh = gMh sin θ.

Oh = gMh sin θ.

(1)

771

771

In the case of the steady motion of the top, the vector OH lies in the vertical plane COC′, in OK suppose (fig. 4), and has a component OC = G about the vertical and a component OC′ = G′, suppose, about the axis OC; and G′ = CR, if R denotes the angular velocity of the top with which it is spun about OC′.

In the case of the steady motion of the top, the vector OH is in the vertical plane COC′, in OK suppose (fig. 4), and has a component OC = G about the vertical and a component OC′ = G′, suppose, about the axis OC; and G′ = CR, if R represents the angular velocity of the top with which it is spun about OC′.

If μ denotes the constant precessional angular velocity of the vertical plane COC′ the components of angular velocity and momentum about OA are μ sin θ and Aμ sin θ, OA being perpendicular to OC′ in the plane COC′; so that the vector OK has the components

If μ represents the constant precessional angular velocity of the vertical plane COC′, the components of angular velocity and momentum about OA are μ sin θ and Aμ sin θ, with OA being perpendicular to OC′ in the plane COC′; therefore, the vector OK has the components

OC′ = G′, and C′K = Aμ sin θ,

OC′ = G′, and C′K = Aμ sin θ,

(2)

and the horizontal component

and the horizontal part

CK = OC′ sin θ − C′K cos θ
= G′ sin θ − Aμ sin θ cos θ.

CK = OC′ sin θ − C′K cos θ
= G′ sin θ − Aμ sin θ cos θ.

(3)

The velocity of K being equal to the impressed couple Oh,

The speed of K is equal to the applied couple Oh,

gMh sin θ = μ·CK = sin θ (G′μ − Aμ2 cos θ),

gMh sin θ = μ·CK = sin θ (G′μ − Aμ2 cos θ),

(4)

and dropping the factor sin θ,

and eliminating the factor sin θ,

2 cos θ − G′μ + gMh = 0, or Aμ2 cos θ − CRμ + An2 = 0,

2 cos θ − G′μ + gMh = 0, or Aμ2 cos θ − CRμ + An2 = 0,

(5)

the condition for steady motion.

the requirement for steady movement.

Solving this as a quadratic in μ, the roots μ1, μ2 are given by

Solving this as a quadratic in μ, the roots μ1, μ2 are given by

μ1, μ2 = G′ sec θ [1 ± √ (1 − 4A2n2 cos θ) I'm sorry, but there doesn't seem to be any text provided for me to modernize. Please provide a short phrase or text of 5 words or fewer.;
2A G′2
(6)

and the minimum value of G′ = CR for real values of μ is given by

and the minimum value of G′ = CR for real values of μ is given by

G′2 = cos θ, CR 2√(cos θ);
4A2n2 An
(7)

for a smaller value of R the top cannot spin steadily at the inclination θ to the upward vertical.

for a smaller value of R, the top can't spin steadily at the angle θ to the upward vertical.

Interpreted geometrically in fig. 4

Interpreted geometrically in fig. 4

μ = gMh sin θ/CK = An2/KN, and μ = C′K/A sin θ = KM/A,

μ = gMh sin θ/CK = An2/KN, and μ = C′K/A sin θ = KM/A,

(8)

KM·KN = A2 n2,

KM·KN = A² n²,

(9)

so that K lies on a hyperbola with OC, OC′ as asymptotes.

so that K is located on a hyperbola with OC and OC′ as its asymptotes.

4. Suppose the top or gyroscope, instead of moving freely about the point O, is held in a ring or frame which is compelled Constrained motion of the gyroscope. to rotate about the vertical axis OC with constant angular velocity μ; then if N denotes the couple of reaction of the frame keeping the top from falling, acting in the plane COC’, equation (4) § 3 becomes modified into

4. Imagine the top or gyroscope, instead of spinning freely around point O, is secured in a ring or frame that must rotate around the vertical axis OC at a steady angular speed μ; then if N represents the couple of reaction from the frame that prevents the top from falling, acting in the plane COC’, equation (4) § 3 is modified to

gMh sin θ − N = μ·CK = sin θ G′μ − Aμ2 cos θ,

gMh sin θ − N = μ·CK = sin θ G′μ − Aμ2 cos θ,

(1)

N = sin θ (Aμ2 cos θ − G′μ + gMh)
= A sin θ cos θ (μ − μ1) (μ − μ2);

N = sin θ (Aμ2 cos θ − G′μ + gMh)
= A sin θ cos θ (μ − μ1) (μ − μ2);

(2)

and hence, as μ increases through μ2 and μ1, the sign of N can be determined, positive or negative, according as the tendency of the axis is to fall or rise.

and so, as μ increases through μ2 and μ1, the sign of N can be determined, positive or negative, depending on whether the axis tends to fall or rise.

When G′ = CR is large, μ2 is large, and

When G′ = CR is large, μ2 is large, and

μ1 ≈ gMh/G′ = An2/CR,

μ1 ≈ gMh/G' = An2/CR,

(3)
Fig. 10.

the same for all inclinations, and this is the precession observed in the spinning top and centrifugal machine of fig. 10 This is true accurately when the axis OC′ is horizontal, and then it agrees with the result of the popular explanation of § 2.

the same for all angles, and this is the precession seen in the spinning top and centrifugal machine shown in fig. 10. This is true particularly when the axis OC′ is horizontal, and it aligns with the outcome of the common explanation in § 2.

If the axis of the top OC′ is pointing upward, the precession is in the same direction as the rotation, and an increase of μ from μ1 makes N negative, and the top rises; conversely a decrease of the procession μ causes the axis to fall (Perry, Spinning Tops, p. 48).

If the axis of the top OC′ is facing upward, the precession is in the same direction as the rotation. An increase in μ from μ1 makes N negative, causing the top to rise. Conversely, a decrease in the precession μ makes the axis drop (Perry, Spinning Tops, p. 48).

If the axis points downward, as in the centrifugal machine with upper support, the precession is in the opposite direction to the rotation, and to make the axis approach the vertical position the precession must be reduced.

If the axis points downwards, like in the centrifugal machine with upper support, the precession goes in the opposite direction to the rotation. To get the axis closer to a vertical position, the precession needs to be lessened.

This is effected automatically in the Weston centrifugal machine (fig. 10) used for the separation of water and Centrifugal machine. molasses, by the friction of the indiarubber cushions above the support; or else the spindle is produced downwards below the drum a short distance, and turns in a hole in a weight resting on the bottom of the case, which weight is dragged round until the spindle is upright; this second arrangement is more effective when a liquid is treated in the drum, and wave action is set up (The Centrifugal Machine, C. A. Matthey).

This happens automatically in the Weston centrifugal machine (fig. 10), which is used to separate water and molasses. This is achieved by the friction of the rubber cushions above the support. Alternatively, the spindle is extended downwards a short distance below the drum and rotates in a hole in a weight that rests on the bottom of the case. This weight gets dragged around until the spindle is upright. This second setup is more effective when a liquid is processed in the drum, as it creates wave action. (The Centrifugal Machine, C. A. Matthey).

Similar considerations apply to the stability of the whirling bowl in a cream-separating machine.

Similar considerations apply to how stable the spinning bowl is in a cream separator machine.

We can write equation (1)

We can write equation (1).

N = An2 sin θ − μ·CK = (A2n2 − KM·KN) sin θ/A,

N = An2 sin θ − μ·CK = (A2n2 − KM·KN) sin θ/A,

(4)

so that N is negative or positive, and the axis tends to rise or fall according as K moves to the inside or outside of the hyperbola of free motion. Thus a tap on the axis tending to hurry the precession is equivalent to an impulse couple giving an increase to C′K, and will make K move to the interior of the hyperbola and cause the axis to rise; the steering of a bicycle may be explained in this way; but K1 will move to the exterior of the hyperbola, and so the axis will fall in this second more violent motion.

so that N can be either negative or positive, and the axis will rise or fall depending on whether K moves inside or outside the hyperbola of free motion. Therefore, a tap on the axis that speeds up the precession is similar to an impulse couple that increases C′K, causing K to move inside the hyperbola and making the axis rise; this can also explain how steering a bicycle works. However, K1 will shift outside the hyperbola, resulting in the axis falling during this second, more aggressive motion.

Friction on the point of the top may be supposed to act like a tap in the direction opposite to the precession; and so the axis of a top spun violently rises at first and up to the vertical position, but falls away again as the motion dies out. Friction considered as acting in retarding the rotation may be compared to an impulse couple tending to reduce OC′, and so make K and K1 both move to the exterior of the hyperbola, and the axis falls in both cases. The axis may rise or fall according to the direction of the frictional couple, depending on the shape of the point; an analytical treatment of the varying motion is very intractable; a memoir by E. G. Gallop may be consulted in the Trans. Camb. Phil. Soc., 1903.

Friction at the tip of a spinning top can be thought of as acting like a force opposite to the direction of precession. As a result, the axis of a spinning top initially rises and aligns vertically, but eventually tilts again as the motion slows down. When considering friction as something that slows down the rotation, it can be likened to a pair of forces that work to shorten OC′, causing both K and K1 to shift outward along the hyperbola, leading the axis to drop in both situations. The axis might rise or fall depending on how the friction is aligned, which is influenced by the shape of the tip; analyzing the changing motion mathematically is quite complex. For a detailed study, refer to a paper by E. G. Gallop in the Trans. Camb. Phil. Soc., 1903.

The earth behaves in precession like a large spinning top, of which the axis describes a circle round the pole of the ecliptic of mean angular radius θ, about 23½°, in a period of 26,000 years, so that R/μ = 26000 × 365; and the mean couple producing precession is

The earth acts like a giant spinning top, with its axis tracing a circular path around the ecliptic pole at an average angle of about 23½°, over a period of 26,000 years. Therefore, R/μ = 26000 × 365; and the average force causing precession is

CRμ sin θ = CR2 sin 23½° /26000 × 365,

CRμ sin θ = CR2 sin 23.5° / 26000 × 365,

(5)

one 12 millionth part of ½CR2, the rotation energy of the earth.

one 12 millionth of ½CR2, the rotational energy of the Earth.

5. If the preponderance is absent, by making the C·G coincide with O, and if Aμ is insensible compared with G′,

5. If the balance is missing, by aligning the center of gravity with point O, and if Aμ is negligible compared to G′,

N = −G′μ sin θ,

N = −G'μ sin θ,

(1)

the formula which suffices to explain most gyroscopic action.

the formula that explains most gyroscopic action.

Thus a carriage running round a curve experiences, in consequence Gyroscopic action of railway wheels. of the rotation of the wheels, an increase of pressure Z on the outer track, and a diminution Z on the inner, giving a couple, if a is the gauge,

Thus a carriage going around a curve experiences, because of the rotation of the wheels, an increase of pressure Z on the outer track and a decrease Z on the inner, creating a couple, if a is the gauge,

Za = G′μ,

Za = G′μ,

(2)

tending to help the centrifugal force to upset the train; and if c is the radius of the curve, b of the wheels, C their moment of inertia, and v the velocity of the train,

tending to help the centrifugal force to disrupt the train; and if c is the radius of the curve, b is the width of the wheels, C is their moment of inertia, and v is the speed of the train,

μ = v/c, G′ = Cv/b,

μ = v/c, G′ = Cv/b,

(3)

Z = Cv2/abc (dynes),

Z = Cv2/abc (dynes),

(4)

so that Z is the fraction C/Mab of the centrifugal force Mv2/c, or the fraction C/Mh of its transference of weight, with h the height of the centre of gravity of the carriage above the road. A Brennan carriage on a monorail would lean over to the inside of the curve at an angle α, given by

so that Z is the fraction C/Mab of the centrifugal force Mv2/c, or the fraction C/Mh of its weight transfer, with h representing the height of the center of gravity of the carriage above the road. A Brennan carriage on a monorail would tilt inward on the curve at an angle α, given by

tan α = G′μ/gMh = G′v/gMhc.

tan α = G′μ/gMh = G′v/gMhc.

(6)

The gyroscopic action of a dynamo, turbine, and other rotating machinery on a steamer, paddle or screw, due to its rolling and pitching, can be evaluated in a similar elementary manner (Worthington, Dynamics of Rotation), and Schlick’s gyroscopic apparatus is intended to mitigate the oscillation.

The gyroscopic effects of a dynamo, turbine, and other rotating machines on a steamer, whether it uses paddles or screws, due to its rolling and pitching, can be assessed in a similar straightforward way (Worthington, Dynamics of Rotation), and Schlick’s gyroscopic device is designed to reduce the oscillation.

6. If the axis OC in fig. 4 is inclined at an angle α to the vertical, the equation (2) § 4 becomes

6. If the axis OC in fig. 4 is tilted at an angle α to the vertical, the equation (2) § 4 becomes

N = sin θ (Aμ2 cos θ − G′μ) + gMh sin (α − θ).

N = sin θ (Aμ2 cos θ − G′μ) + gMh sin (α − θ).

(1)

Suppose, for instance, that OC is parallel to the earth’s axis, and that the frame is fixed in the meridian; then α is the co-latitude, and μ is the angular velocity of the earth, the square of which may be neglected; so that, putting N = 0, α − θ = E,

Suppose, for example, that OC is parallel to the earth's axis, and the frame is fixed in the meridian; then α is the co-latitude, and μ is the earth's angular velocity, which can be ignored in terms of its square; so that, setting N = 0, α − θ = E,

gMh sin E − G′μ sin (α − E) = 0,

gMh sin E − G′μ sin (α − E) = 0,

(2)
tan E = G′μ sin α G′μ sin α.
gMh + G′μ cos α gMh
(3)

This is the theory of Gilbert’s barogyroscope, described in Appell’s Mécanique rationnelle, ii. 387: it consists essentially of a rapidly The barogyroscope. rotated fly-wheel, mounted on knife-edges by an axis perpendicular to its axis of rotation and pointing east and west; spun with considerable angular momentum G′, and provided with a slight preponderance Mh, it should tilt to an angle E with the vertical, and thus demonstrate experimentally the rotation of the earth.

This is the theory of Gilbert’s barogyroscope, described in Appell’s Mécanique rationnelle, ii. 387: it consists mainly of a fast-spinning flywheel, mounted on knife edges with an axis perpendicular to its rotation axis and pointing east and west; when spun with a significant angular momentum G′, and having a slight weight imbalance Mh, it should tilt at an angle E with the vertical, thereby experimentally demonstrating the rotation of the earth.

In Foucault’s gyroscope (Comptes rendus, 1852; Perry, p. 105) Foucault’s gyroscope. the preponderance is made zero, and the axis points to the pole, when free to move in the meridian.

In Foucault’s gyroscope (Comptes rendus, 1852; Perry, p. 105) Foucault's gyroscope. the weight is balanced out, and the axis aligns with the pole when it can move freely along the meridian.

Generally, if constrained to move in any other plane, the axis seeks the position nearest to the polar axis, like a dipping needle with respect to the magnetic pole. (A gyrostatic working model of the magnetic compass, by Sir W. Thomson. British Association Report, Montreal, 1884. A. S. Chessin, St Louis Academy of Science, January 1902.)

Generally, if limited to moving in any other direction, the axis tries to align itself as closely as possible to the polar axis, similar to how a dipping needle points toward the magnetic pole. (A gyrostatic working model of the magnetic compass, by Sir W. Thomson. British Association Report, Montreal, 1884. A. S. Chessin, St Louis Academy of Science, January 1902.)

A spinning top with a polished upper plane surface will provide an artificial horizon at sea, when the real horizon is obscured. The first instrument of this kind was constructed by Serson, and is described in the Gentleman’s Magazine, Gyroscopic horizon. vol. xxiv., 1754; also by Segner in his Specimen theoriae turbinum (Halae, 1755). The inventor was sent to sea by the Admiralty to test his instrument, but he was lost in the wreck of the “Victory,” 1744. A copy of the Serson top, from the royal collection, is now in the Museum of King’s College, London. Troughton’s Nautical Top (1819) is intended for the same purpose.

A spinning top with a smooth, polished surface can create an artificial horizon at sea when the actual horizon is blocked. The first instrument of this type was made by Serson, and it's described in the Gentleman’s Magazine, Gyro horizon. vol. xxiv., 1754; it was also mentioned by Segner in his Specimen theoriae turbinum (Halae, 1755). The inventor was commissioned by the Admiralty to test his device at sea, but he tragically perished in the wreck of the “Victory” in 1744. A copy of Serson's top from the royal collection is currently housed in the Museum of King’s College, London. Troughton’s Nautical Top (1819) serves the same purpose.

The instrument is in favour with French navigators, perfected by 772 Admiral Fleuriais (fig. 9); but it must be noticed that the horizon given by the top is inclined to the true horizon at the angle E given by equation (3) above; and if μ1 is the precessional angular velocity as given by (3) § 4, and T = 2π/μ, its period in seconds,

The tool is popular among French navigators, improved by 772 Admiral Fleuriais (fig. 9); however, it's important to note that the horizon shown by the top is tilted relative to the true horizon at the angle E specified by equation (3) above. Additionally, if μ1 is the precessional angular velocity as defined by (3) § 4, then T = 2π/μ is its period in seconds.

tan E = μ cos lat = T cos lat , or E = T cos lat ,
μ1 86400
(4)

if E is expressed in minutes, taking μ = 2π/86400; thus making the true latitude E nautical miles to the south of that given by the top (Revue maritime, 1890; Comptes rendus, 1896).

if E is expressed in minutes, using μ = 2π/86400; thereby making the true latitude E nautical miles to the south of that indicated by the top (Revue maritime, 1890; Comptes rendus, 1896).

This can be seen by elementary consideration of the theory above, for the velocity of the vector OC′ of the top due to the rotation of the earth is

This can be seen by basic consideration of the theory above, for the speed of the vector OC' of the top caused by the rotation of the earth is

μ·OC′ cos lat = gMh sin E = μ1·OC′ sin E,

μ·OC′ cos lat = gMh sin E = μ1·OC′ sin E,

sin E = μ cos lat, E = T cos lat ,
μ1
(5)
Fig. 11.

in which 8π can be replaced by 25, in practice; so that the Fleuriais gyroscopic horizon is an illustration of the influence of the rotation of the earth and of the need for its allowance.

in which 8π can be replaced by 25, in practice; so that the Fleuriais gyroscopic horizon is an example of how the rotation of the earth affects things and the need to account for it.

7. In the ordinary treatment of the general theory of the gyroscope, the motion is referred to two sets of rectangular axes; the Euler’s coordinate angles. one Ox, Oy, Oz fixed in space, with Oz vertically upward and the other OX, OY, OZ fixed in the rotating wheel with OZ in the axis of figure OC.

7. In the usual discussion of the general theory of the gyroscope, the motion is referred to two sets of rectangular axes; the Euler's angles. One set, Ox, Oy, Oz, is fixed in space, with Oz pointing straight up, and the other set, OX, OY, OZ, is fixed in the rotating wheel, with OZ aligned along the figure's axis OC.

The relative position of the two sets of axes is given by means of Euler’s unsymmetrical angles θ, φ, ψ, such that the successive turning of the axes Ox, Oy, Oz through the angles (i.) ψ about Oz, (ii.) θ about OE, (iii.) φ about OZ, brings them into coincidence with OX, OY, OZ, as shown in fig. 11, representing the concave side of a spherical surface.

The arrangement of the two sets of axes is described using Euler’s unsymmetrical angles θ, φ, ψ. The axes Ox, Oy, Oz are rotated successively by (i.) ψ around Oz, (ii.) θ around OE, and (iii.) φ around OZ, which aligns them with OX, OY, OZ, as illustrated in fig. 11, showing the concave side of a spherical surface.

The component angular velocities about OD, OE, OZ are

The component angular velocities around OD, OE, OZ are

ψ sin θ, θ, φ + ψ cos θ;

ψ sin θ, θ, φ + ψ cos θ;

(1)

so that, denoting the components about OX, OY, OZ by P, Q, R,

so that, representing the components related to OX, OY, OZ as P, Q, R,

P = θ cos φ + ψ sin θ sin φ,
Q = θ sin φ + ψ sin θ cos φ,
R = φ + ψ cos θ.
(2)

Consider, for instance, the motion of a fly-wheel of preponderance Mh, and equatoreal moment of inertia A, of which the axis OC is held in a light ring ZCX at a constant angle γ with OZ, while OZ is held by another ring zZ, which constrains it to move round the vertical Oz at a constant inclination θ with constant angular velocity μ, so that

Consider, for example, the motion of a flywheel with weight Mh and an equatorial moment of inertia A, where the axis OC is fixed in a light ring ZCX at a constant angle γ with OZ. Meanwhile, OZ is restricted by another ring zZ, which keeps it rotating around the vertical Oz at a constant angle θ with a steady angular velocity μ, so that

θ = 0, ψ = μ;

θ = 0, ψ = μ;

(3)

P = μ sin θ sin φ, Q = μ sin θ cos φ, R = φ + μ cos θ.

P = μ sin θ sin φ, Q = μ sin θ cos φ, R = φ + μ cos θ.

(4)

With CXF a quadrant, the components of angular velocity and momentum about OF, OY, are

With CXF as a quadrant, the components of angular velocity and momentum about OF, OY, are

P cos γ − R sin γ, Q, and A (P cos γ − R sin γ), AQ,

P cos γ − R sin γ, Q, and A (P cos γ − R sin γ), AQ,

(5)

so that, denoting the components of angular momentum of the fly-wheel about OC, OX, OY, OZ by K or G′, h1, h2, h3,

so that, denoting the components of angular momentum of the flywheel about OC, OX, OY, OZ by K or G′, h1, h2, h3,

h1 = A (P cos γ − R sin γ) cos γ + K sin γ,

h1 = A (P cos γ − R sin γ) cos γ + K sin γ,

(6)

h2 = AQ,

h2 = AQ,

(7)

h3 = −A (P cos γ − R sin γ) sin γ + K cos γ;

h3 = −A (P cos γ − R sin γ) sin γ + K cos γ;

(8)

and the dynamical equation

and the dynamic equation

dh3 − h1Q + h2P = N,
dt
(9)

with K constant, and with preponderance downward

with K constant, and with a downward dominance

N = gMh cos zY sin γ = gMh sin γ sin θ cos φ,

N = gMh cos zY sin γ = gMh sin γ sin θ cos φ,

(10)

reduces to

simplifies to

A d2φ sin γ + Aμ2 sin γ sin2 θ sin φ cos φ
dt2

+ Aμ2 cos γ sin θ cos θ cos φ − (Kμ + gMh) sin θ cos φ = 0.

+ Aμ2 cos γ sin θ cos θ cos φ − (Kμ + gMh) sin θ cos φ = 0.

(11)

The position of relative equilibrium is given by

The state of relative equilibrium is indicated by

cos φ = 0, and sin φ = Kμ + gMh − Aμ2 cos γ cos θ .
2 sin γ sin θ
(12)

For small values of μ the equation becomes

For small values of μ, the equation becomes

A d2φ sin γ − (Kμ + gMh) sin θ cos φ = 0,
dt2
(13)

so that φ = ½π gives the position of stable equilibrium, and the period of a small oscillation is 2π √{A sin γ/(Kμ + gMh) sin θ}.

so that φ = ½π gives the position of stable equilibrium, and the period of a small oscillation is 2π √{A sin γ/(Kμ + gMh) sin θ}.

In the general case, denoting the periods of vibration about φ = ½π, −½π, and the sidelong position of equilibrium by 2π/(n1, n2, or n3), we shall find

In general, representing the periods of vibration around φ = ½π, −½π, and the sideways equilibrium position by 2π/(n1, n2, or n3), we will find

n12 = sin θ { gMh + Kμ − Aμ2 cos (γ − θ) },
A sin γ
(14)
n22 = sin θ { −gMh − Kμ + Aμ2 cos (γ + θ) },
A sin γ
(15)

n3 = n1 n2/μ sin θ.

n3 = n1 n2/μ sin θ.

(16)

The first integral of (11) gives

The first integral of (11) gives

½A Please provide the text for modernization. ) 2 sin γ + ½Aμ2 sin γ sin2 θ sin2 φ
dt  

− Aμ2 cos γ sin θ cos θ sin φ + (Kμ + gMh) sin θ sin φ − H = 0,

− Aμ2 cos γ sin θ cos θ sin φ + (Kμ + gMh) sin θ sin φ − H = 0,

(17)

and putting tan (¼π + ½φ) = z, this reduces to

and substituting tan (¼π + ½φ) = z, this simplifies to

dz n √Z
dt
(18)

where Z is a quadratic in z2, so that z is a Jacobian elliptic function of t, and we have

where Z is a quadratic in z2, so that z is a Jacobian elliptic function of t, and we have

tan (¼π + ½φ) = C (tn, dn, nc, or cn) nt,

tan (¼π + ½φ) = C (tn, dn, nc, or cn) nt,

(19)

according as the ring ZC performs complete revolutions, or oscillates about a sidelong position of equilibrium, or oscillates about the stable position of equilibrium φ = ±½π.

according to how the ring ZC makes complete turns, or swings around a sideways position of balance, or swings around the stable position of balance φ = ±½π.

Suppose Oz is parallel to the earth’s axis, and μ is the diurnal rotation, the square of which may be neglected, then if Gilbert’s barogyroscope of § 6 has the knife-edges turned in azimuth to make an angle β with E. and W., so that OZ lies in the horizon at an angle E·β·N., we must put γ = ½π, cos θ = sin α sin β; and putting φ = ½π − δ + E, where δ denotes the angle between Zz and the vertical plane Zζ through the zenith ζ,

Suppose Oz is parallel to the Earth's axis, and μ is the daily rotation, whose square can be ignored. Then, if Gilbert's barogyroscope from § 6 has the knife-edges positioned in azimuth to create an angle β with East and West, such that OZ is in the horizon at an angle E·β·N, we need to set γ = ½π, cos θ = sin α sin β; and setting φ = ½π − δ + E, where δ represents the angle between Zz and the vertical plane Zζ through the zenith ζ,

sin θ cos δ = cos α, sin θ sin δ = sin α cos β;

sin θ cos δ = cos α, sin θ sin δ = sin α cos β;

(20)

so that equations (9) and (10) for relative equilibrium reduce to

so that equations (9) and (10) for relative equilibrium simplify to

gMh sin E = KQ = Kμ sin θ cos φ = Kμ sin θ sin (δ − E),

gMh sin E = KQ = Kμ sin θ cos φ = Kμ sin θ sin (δ − E),

(21)

and will change (3) § 6 into

and will change (3) § 6 into

tan E = Kμ sin α cos β ,
gMh + Kμ cos α
(22)

a multiplication of (3) § 6 by cos β (Gilbert, Comptes rendus, 1882).

a multiplication of (3) § 6 by cos β (Gilbert, Comptes rendus, 1882).

Changing the sign of K or h and E and denoting the revolutions/second of the gyroscope wheel by F, then in the preceding notation, T denoting the period of vibration as a simple pendulum,

Changing the sign of K or h and E and representing the revolutions per second of the gyroscope wheel by F, then in the previous notation, T represents the period of vibration as a simple pendulum,

tan E = Kμ sin α cos β = F sin α cos β ,
gMh − Kμ cos α 86400 A/T2C − F cos α
(23)

so that the gyroscope would reverse if it were possible to make F cos α > 86400 A/T2C (Föppl, Münch. Ber, 1904).

so that the gyroscope would flip if it were possible to make F cos α > 86400 A/T2C (Föppl, Münch. Ber, 1904).

A gyroscopic pendulum is made by the addition to it of a fly-wheel, balanced and mounted, as in Gilbert’s barogyroscope, in a ring movable about an axis fixed in the pendulum, in the vertical plane of motion.

A gyroscopic pendulum is created by adding a flywheel, which is balanced and mounted, like in Gilbert’s barogyroscope, in a ring that can move around an axis fixed to the pendulum, within the vertical plane of motion.

As the pendulum falls away to an angle θ with the upward vertical, and the axis of the fly-wheel makes an angle φ with the vertical plane of motion, the three components of angular momentum are

As the pendulum swings out to an angle θ from the upward vertical, and the axis of the flywheel forms an angle φ with the vertical plane of motion, the three components of angular momentum are

h1 = K cos φ, h2 = Aθ + K sin φ, h3 = Aφ,

h1 = K cos φ, h2 = Aθ + K sin φ, h3 = Aφ,

(24)

where h3 is the component about the axis of the ring and K of the fly-wheel about its axis; and if L, M′, N denote the components of the couple of reaction of the ring, L may be ignored, while N is zero, with P = 0, Q = θ, R = 0, so that

where h3 is the component along the axis of the ring and K is for the flywheel around its axis; and if L, M′, N represent the components of the reaction couple of the ring, L can be ignored, while N is zero, with P = 0, Q = θ, R = 0, so that

M′ = h2 = Aθ + Kφ cos φ,

M′ = h2 = Aθ + Kφ cos φ,

(25)

0 = h3 − h1θ = Aφ − Kθ cos φ.

0 = h3 − h1θ = Aφ − Kθ cos φ.

(26)

For the motion of the pendulum, including the fly-wheel,

For the movement of the pendulum, including the flywheel,

MK2θ = gMH sin θ − M′ = gMH sin θ − Aθ − Kφ cos φ.

MK2θ = gMH sin θ − M′ = gMH sin θ − Aθ − Kφ cos φ.

(27)

If θ and φ remain small,

If θ and φ stay small,

Aφ = Kθ, Aφ = K(θ − α),

Aφ = Kθ, Aφ = K(θ − α),

(28)

(MK2 + A) θ + (K2/A) (θ − α) − gMHθ = 0;

(MK2 + A) θ + (K2/A) (θ − α) − gMHθ = 0;

(29)

so that the upright position will be stable if K2 > gMHA, or the rotation energy of the wheel greater than ½A/C times the energy acquired by the pendulum in falling between the vertical and horizontal position; and the vibration will synchronize with a simple pendulum of length

so that the upright position will be stable if K2 > gMHA, or the rotation energy of the wheel is greater than ½A/C times the energy gained by the pendulum falling between the vertical and horizontal position; and the vibration will synchronize with a simple pendulum of length

(MK2 + A) / [(K2/gA) − MH].

(MK2 + A) / [(K2/gA) − MH].

(30)

This gyroscopic pendulum may be supposed to represent a ship among waves, or a carriage on a monorail, and so affords an explanation of the gyroscopic action essential in the apparatus of Schlick and Brennan.

This gyroscopic pendulum can be seen as a representation of a ship bobbing in the waves, or a carriage on a monorail, and it helps explain the gyroscopic action that is crucial in the devices created by Schlick and Brennan.

8. Careful scrutiny shows that the steady motion of a top is not steady absolutely; it reveals a small nutation General motion of the top. superposed, so that a complete investigation requires a return to the equations of unsteady motion, and for the small oscillation to consider them in a penultimate form.

8. A close look reveals that the constant motion of a top isn’t completely steady; it shows a slight wobble Overall movement of the top. superimposed on it, so a thorough examination necessitates revisiting the equations of unsteady motion, and for the tiny oscillation, we need to consider them in a nearly final form.

In the general motion of the top the vector OH of resultant angular momentum is no longer compelled to lie in the vertical plane COC′ (fig. 4), but since the axis Oh of the gravity couple is always horizontal, H will describe a curve in a fixed horizontal plane through C. The vector OC′ of angular momentum about the axis will be constant in length, but vary in direction; and OK will be the component angular momentum in the vertical plane COC′, if the planes through C and C′ perpendicular to the lines OC and OC′ intersect in the line KH; and if KH is the component angular momentum perpendicular to the plane COC′, the resultant angular momentum OH has the three components OC′, C′K, KH, represented in Euler’s angles by

In the general motion of the top, the vector OH of total angular momentum no longer needs to stay in the vertical plane COC′ (fig. 4). However, since the axis Oh of the gravity couple is always horizontal, H will trace a curve in a fixed horizontal plane through C. The vector OC′ of angular momentum around the axis will remain constant in length but will change direction; and OK will be the component angular momentum in the vertical plane COC′, as long as the planes through C and C′ that are perpendicular to the lines OC and OC′ intersect in the line KH. If KH is the component angular momentum that's perpendicular to the plane COC′, then the total angular momentum OH has the three components OC′, C′K, KH, which are represented by Euler’s angles.

KH = A dθ/dt, C′K = A sin θd ψ/dt, OC′ = G′.

KH = A dθ/dt, C′K = A sin θd ψ/dt, OC′ = G′.

(1)

Drawing KM vertical and KN parallel to OC′, then

Drawing KM vertically and KN parallel to OC′, then

KM = A dψ/dt, KN = CR − A cos θ dψ/dt = (C − A) R + A dφ/dt

KM = A dψ/dt, KN = CR − A cos θ dψ/dt = (C − A) R + A dφ/dt

(2)

so that in the spherical top, with C = A, KN = A dφ/dt.

so that in the spherical top, with C = A, KN = A dφ/dt.

773

773

The velocity of H is in the direction KH perpendicular to the plane COC′, and equal to gMh sin θ or An2 sin θ, so that if a point in the axis OC′ at a distance An2 from O is projected on the horizontal plane through C in the point P on CK, the curve described by P, turned forwards through a right angle, will be the hodograph of H; this is expressed by

The speed of H is directed along KH, which is perpendicular to the plane COC′, and is equal to gMh sin θ or An2 sin θ. Therefore, if a point on the axis OC′ is projected onto the horizontal plane at a distance An2 from O, landing at point P on CK, the path traced by P, when rotated 90 degrees forward, will represent the hodograph of H; this is expressed by

An2 sin θ e(ψ + 1/2π)i = iAn2 sin θ eψi = d (ρeῶi)
dt
(3)

where ρeῶi is the vector CH; and so the curve described by P and the motion of the axis of the top is derived from the curve described by H by a differentiation.

where ρeῶi is the vector CH; and so the curve described by P and the motion of the axis of the top comes from the curve described by H through differentiation.

Resolving the velocity of H in the direction CH,

Resolving the velocity of H in the direction of CH,

d·CH/dt = An2 sin θ sin KCH = An2 sin θ KH/CH,

d·CH/dt = An2 sin θ sin KCH = An2 sin θ KH/CH,

(4)

d·½CH2/dt = A2n2sin θ dθ/dt.

d·½CH2/dt = A2n2sin θ dθ/dt.

(5)

and integrating

and integrating

½CH2 = A2n2 (E − cos θ),

½CH2 = A2n2 (E − cos θ),

(6)

½OH2 = A2n2 (F − cos θ),

½OH2 = A2n2 (F − cos θ),

(7)

½C′H2 = A2n2 (D − cos θ),

½C′H2 = A2n2 (D − cos θ),

(8)

where D, E, F are constants, connected by

where D, E, F are constants, connected by

F = E + G2/2A2n2 = D + G′2/2A2n2.

F = E + G2/2A2n2 = D + G′2/2A2n2.

(9)

Then

Then

KH2 = OH2 − OK2,

KH2 = OH2 − OK2,

(10)

OK2 sin2 θ = CC′2 = G2 − 2GG′ cos θ + G′2,

OK2 sin2 θ = CC′2 = G2 − 2GG′ cos θ + G′2,

(11)

A2 sin2 θ (dθ/dt)2 = 2A2n2 (F − cos θ) sin2 θ − G2 + 2GG′ cos θ − G′2;

A2 sin2 θ (dθ/dt)2 = 2A2n2 (F − cos θ) sin2 θ − G2 + 2GG′ cos θ − G′2;

(12)

and putting cos θ = z,

and setting cos θ = z,

Please provide the text for modernization. dz ( = 2n2 (F − z) (1 − z2) − (G2 − 2GG′z + G′2) /A2
dt
(13)

= 2n2 (E − z) (1 − z2) − (G′ − Gz)2 /A2

= 2n2 (E − z) (1 − z2) − (G′ − Gz)2 /A2

= 2n2 (D − z) (1 − z2) − (G − G′z)2 /A2

= 2n2 (D − z) (1 − z2) − (G − G′z)2 /A2

= 2n2 Z suppose.

= 2n₂ Z suppose.

Denoting the roots of Z = 0 by z1, z2, z3, we shall have them arranged in the order

Denoting the roots of Z = 0 by z1, z2, z3, we shall have them arranged

z1 > 1 > z2 > z > z3 > −1.

z1 > 1 > z2 > z > z3 > −1.

(14)

(dz/dt)2 = 2n2 (z1 − z) (z2 − z) (z − z3).

(dz/dt)2 = 2n2 (z1 − z) (z2 − z) (z − z3).

(15)

nt = zz3 dz/ √(2Z),

nt = zz3 dz/ √(2Z),

(16)

an elliptic integral of the first kind, which with

an elliptic integral of the first kind, which with

m = n z1 − z3 , κ2 = z2 − z3 ,
2 z1 − z2
(17)

can be expressed, when normalized by the factor √(z1 − z3)/2, by the inverse elliptic function in the form

can be expressed, when normalized by the factor √(z1 − z3)/2, by the inverse elliptic function in the form

mt = zz3 √ (z1 − z3) dz
√ [4 (z1 − z) (z2 − z) (z − z3)]
= sn−1 z − z3 = cn−1 z2 − z = dn−1 z1 − z .
z2 − z3 z2 − z3 z1 − z3
(18)

z − z3 = (z2 − z3) sn2mt, z2 − z = (z2 − z3) cn2mt, z1 − z = (z1 − z3) dn2mt.

z − z3 = (z2 − z3) sn2mt, z2 − z = (z2 − z3) cn2mt, z1 − z = (z1 − z3) dn2mt.

(19)

z = z2sn2mt + z3cn2mt.

z = z2sn2mt + z3cn2mt.

(20)

Interpreted dynamically, the axis of the top keeps time with the beats of a simple pendulum of length

Interpreted dynamically, the axis at the top keeps time with the beats of a simple pendulum of length

L = l/½ (z1 − z3),

L = l/½ (z1 − z3),

(21)

suspended from a point at a height ½ (z1 + z3)l above O, in such a manner that a point on the pendulum at a distance

suspended from a point at a height ½ (z1 + z3)l above O, in such a manner that a point on the swinging weight at a distance

½ (z1 − z3) l = l2/L

½ (z1 − z3) l = l2/L

(22)

from the point of suspension moves so as to be always at the same level as the centre of oscillation of the top.

from the point of suspension moves in such a way that it is always at the same level as the center of oscillation of the top.

The polar co-ordinates of H are denoted by ρ, ῶ in the horizontal plane through C; and, resolving the velocity of H perpendicular to CH,

The polar coordinates of H are represented by ρ and ῶ in the horizontal plane through C; and, breaking down the velocity of H that is perpendicular to CH,

ρdῶ/dt = An2 sin θ cos KCH.

ρdῶ/dt = An2 sin θ cos KCH.

(23)

ρ2dῶ/dt = An2 sin θ·CK = An2 (G′ − G cos θ)

ρ2dρ/dt = An2 sin θ·CK = An2 (G′ − G cos θ)

(24)
ῶ = ½ G′ − Gz   dt = z3 (G′ − Gz) / 2An   dz ,
E − z A E − z √ (2Z)
(25)

an elliptic integral, of the third kind, with pole at z = E; and then

an elliptic integral of the third kind, with a pole at z = E; and then

ῶ − ψ = KCH = tan−1 KH/CH

ῶ − ψ = KCH = tan−1 KH/CH

= tan−1 A sin θ dθ/dt = tan−1 √ (2Z) ,
G′ − G cos θ (G′ − Gz) / An
(26)

which determines ψ.

which determines psi.

Otherwise, from the geometry of fig. 4,

Otherwise, based on the geometry in fig. 4,

C′K sin θ = OC − OC′ cos θ,

C′K sin θ = OC − OC′ cos θ,

(27)

A sin2 θ dψ/dt = G − G′ cos θ,

A sin2 θ dψ/dt = G − G′ cos θ,

(28)
ψ = G − G′z   dt = ½ G − G′   dt + ½ G + G′   dt ,
1 − z2 A 1 − z A 1 + z A
(29)

the sum of two elliptic integrals of the third kind, with pole at z = ±1; and the relation in (25) (26) shows the addition of these two integrals into a single integral, with pole at z = E.

the sum of two elliptic integrals of the third kind, with poles at z = ±1; and the relation in (25) (26) shows how these two integrals can be combined into a single integral, with a pole at z = E.

The motion of a sphere, rolling and spinning in the interior of a spherical bowl, or on the top of a sphere, is found to be of the same character as the motion of the axis of a spinning top about a fixed point.

The movement of a sphere rolling and spinning inside a spherical bowl, or on the surface of a sphere, is similar to the motion of the axis of a spinning top around a fixed point.

The curve described by H can be identified as a Poinsot herpolhode, that is, the curve traced out by rolling a quadric surface with centre fixed at O on the horizontal plane through C; and Darboux has shown also that a deformable hyperboloid made of the generating lines, with O and H at opposite ends of a diameter and one generator fixed in OC, can be moved so as to describe the curve H; the tangent plane of the hyperboloid at H being normal to the curve of H; and then the other generator through O will coincide in the movement with OC′, the axis of the top; thus the Poinsot herpolhode curve H is also the trace made by rolling a line of curvature on an ellipsoid confocal to the hyperboloid of one sheet, on the plane through C.

The curve described by H can be identified as a Poinsot herpolhode, which is the path created by rolling a quadric surface with its center fixed at O on the horizontal plane through C. Darboux has also shown that a deformable hyperboloid made of the generating lines, with O and H at opposite ends of a diameter and one generator fixed in OC, can be adjusted to trace out curve H. The tangent plane of the hyperboloid at H is perpendicular to the curve of H. Additionally, the other generator through O will align during the movement with OC′, the axis of the top. Therefore, the Poinsot herpolhode curve H is also the path created by rolling a line of curvature on an ellipsoid that shares a focal point with the one-sheet hyperboloid on the plane through C.

Kirchhoff’s Kinetic Analogue asserts also that the curve of H is the projection of a tortuous elastica, and that the spherical curve of C′ is a hodograph of the elastica described with constant velocity.

Kirchhoff’s Kinetic Analogue also claims that the curve of H is the projection of a complicated elastica, and that the spherical curve of C′ is a hodograph of the elastica moving at constant speed.

Writing the equation of the focal ellipse of the Darboux hyperboloid through H, enlarged to double scale so that O is the centre,

Writing the equation of the focal ellipse of the Darboux hyperboloid through H, enlarged to double scale so that O is the center,

x22 + y22 + z2/O = 1,

x²/α² + y²/β² + z²/O = 1,

(30)

with α2 + λ, β2 + λ, λ denoting the squares of the semiaxes of a confocal ellipsoid, and λ changed into μ and ν for a confocal hyperboloid of one sheet and of two sheets.

with α2 + λ, β2 + λ, where λ represents the squares of the semi-axes of a confocal ellipsoid, and λ is transformed into μ and ν for a confocal hyperboloid of one sheet and two sheets.

λ > 0 > μ > −β2 > ν > −α2,

λ > 0 > μ > −β2 > ν > −α2,

(31)

then in the deformation of the hyperboloid, λ and ν remain constant at H; and utilizing the theorems of solid geometry on confocal quadrics, the magnitudes may be chosen so that

then in the deformation of the hyperboloid, λ and ν stay constant at H; and using the theorems of solid geometry on confocal quadrics, the sizes can be chosen so that

α2 + λ + β2 + μ + ν = OH2 = ½k2 (F − z) = ρ2 + OC2.

α2 + λ + β2 + μ + ν = OH2 = ½k2 (F − z) = ρ2 + OC2.

(32)

α2 + μ = ½k2 (z1 − z) = ρ2 − ρ12,

α2 + μ = ½k2 (z1 − z) = ρ2 − ρ12,

(33)

β2 + μ = ½k2 (z2 − z) = ρ2 − ρ22,

β2 + μ = ½k2 (z2 − z) = ρ2 − ρ22,

(34)

μ = ½k2 (z3 − z) = ρ2 − ρ32,

μ = ½k2 (z3 − z) = ρ2 − ρ32,

(35)

ρ12 < 0 < ρ22 < ρ2 < ρ32,

ρ12 < 0 < ρ22 < ρ2 < ρ32,

(36)

F = z1 + z2 + z3,

F = z1 + z2 + z3,

(37)

λ − 2μ + ν = k2z, λ − ν = k2,

λ − 2μ + ν = k2z, λ − ν = k2,

(38)
λ − μ = 1 + z , μ − ν = 1 − z
λ − ν 2 λ − ν 2
(39)

with z = cos θ, θ denoting the angle between the generating lines through H; and with OC = δ, OC′ = δ′, the length k has been chosen so that in the preceding equations

with z = cos θ, θ representing the angle between the generating lines through H; and with OC = δ, OC′ = δ′, the length k has been selected so that in the previous equations

δ/k = G/2An, δ′/k = G′/2An;

δ/k = G/2An, δ′/k = G′/2An;

(40)

and δ, δ′, k may replace G, G′, 2An; then

and δ, δ′, k can replace G, G′, 2An; then

2Z = 1 Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. I'm sorry, but there is no text provided for me to modernize. Please provide the text you'd like me to work on. 2 = 4KH2 ,
1 − z2 n2 dt   k2
(41)

while from (33-39)

while from (33-39)

2Z = 4 (α2 + μ) (β2 + μ) μ ,
1 − z2 k2 (μ − λ) (μ − ν)
(42)

which verifies that KH is the perpendicular from O on the tangent plane of the hyperboloid at H, and so proves Darboux’s theorem.

which verifies that KH is perpendicular from O to the tangent plane of the hyperboloid at H, thereby proving Darboux’s theorem.

Planes through O perpendicular to the generating lines cut off a constant length HQ = δ, HQ′ = δ′, so the line of curvature described by H in the deformation of the hyperboloid, the intersection of the fixed confocal ellipsoid λ and hyperboloid of two sheets ν, rolls on a horizontal plane through C and at the same time on a plane through C′ perpendicular to OC′.

Planes through O that are perpendicular to the generating lines cut off a constant length HQ = δ, HQ′ = δ′. Therefore, the line of curvature described by H in the deformation of the hyperboloid, which is the intersection of the fixed confocal ellipsoid λ and the hyperboloid of two sheets ν, rolls on a horizontal plane through C and at the same time on a plane through C′ that is perpendicular to OC′.

Produce the generating line HQ to meet the principal planes of the confocal system in V, T, P; these will also be fixed points on the generator; and putting

Produce the generating line HQ to meet the main planes of the confocal system in V, T, P; these will also be fixed points on the generator; and putting

(HV, HT, HP,)/HQ = D/(A, B, C,),

(HV, HT, HP,)/HQ = D/(A, B, C,),

(43)

then

then

Ax2 + By2 + Cz2 = Dδ2

Ax² + By² + Cz² = Dδ²

(44)

is a quadric surface with the squares of the semiaxes given by HV·HQ, HT·HQ, HP·HQ, and with HQ the normal line at H, and so touching the horizontal plane through C; and the direction cosines of the normal being

is a quadric surface with the squares of the semi-axes given by HV·HQ, HT·HQ, HP·HQ, and with HQ being the normal line at H, thus touching the horizontal plane through C; and the direction cosines of the normal being

x/HV, y/HT, z/HP,

x/HV, y/HT, z/HP,

(45)

A2x2 + B2y2 + C2z2 = D2δ2,

A2x2 + B2y2 + C2z2 = D2δ2,

(46)

the line of curvature, called the polhode curve by Poinsot, being the intersection of the quadric surface (44) with the ellipsoid (46).

the line of curvature, known as the polhode curve by Poinsot, is the intersection of the quadric surface (44) with the ellipsoid (46).

There is a second surface associated with (44), which rolls on the plane through C′, corresponding to the other generating line HQ′ through H, so that the same line of curvature rolls on two planes at a constant distance from O, δ and δ′; and the motion of the top is made up of the combination. This completes the statement of Jacobi’s theorem (Werke, ii. 480) that the motion of a top can be resolved into two movements of a body under no force.

There’s a second surface linked to (44), which rolls on the plane through C′, corresponding to the other generating line HQ′ through H, so the same curvature line rolls on two planes at a constant distance from O, δ and δ′; and the motion of the top consists of this combination. This wraps up Jacobi’s theorem (Werke, ii. 480) that the motion of a top can be broken down into two movements of a body with no external force acting on it.

Conversely, starting with Poinsot’s polhode and herpolhode given in (44) (46), the normal plane is drawn at H, cutting the principal axes of the rolling quadric in X, Y, Z; and then

Conversely, starting with Poinsot’s polhode and herpolhode given in (44) (46), the normal plane is drawn at H, cutting the principal axes of the rolling quadric in X, Y, Z; and then

α2 + μ = x·OX, β2 + μ = y·OY, μ = z·OZ,

α2 + μ = x·OX, β2 + μ = y·OY, μ = z·OZ,

(47)

this determines the deformable hyperboloid of which one generator through H is a normal to the plane through C; and the other generator is inclined at an angle θ, the inclination of the axis of the top, while the normal plane or the parallel plane through O revolves with angular velocity dψ/dt.

this determines the flexible hyperboloid where one generator through H is perpendicular to the plane through C; and the other generator is tilted at an angle θ, which is the inclination of the axis of the top, while the normal plane or the parallel plane through O rotates with an angular velocity of dψ/dt.

The curvature is useful in drawing a curve of H; the diameter of curvature D is given by

The curve is helpful in creating a curve of H; the diameter of curvature D is given by

774

774

D = dp2 = ½k2 sin3 θ , ½D = ¼k2 .
dp δ − δ′ p KM·KN
(48)

The curvature is zero and H passes through a point of inflexion when C′ comes into the horizontal plane through C; ψ will then be stationary and the curve described by C′ will be looped.

The curvature is zero, and H goes through a point of inflection when C′ enters the horizontal plane through C; ψ will then be stationary, and the curve traced by C′ will form a loop.

In a state of steady motion, z oscillates between two limits z2 and z3 which are close together; so putting z2 = z3 the coefficient of z in Z is

In a constant motion, z moves back and forth between two limits z2 and z3 that are close together; so by setting z2 = z3, the coefficient of z in Z is

2Z1z3 + z23 = −1 + GG′ = −1 + (OM cos θ + ON) (OM + ON cos θ) ,
A2n2 OM·ON
(49)
2z1z3 = OM2 + ON2 cos θ, z1 = OM2 + ON2 ,
OM·ON 2OM·ON
(50)
2 (z1 − z3) = OM2 − 2OM·ON cos θ + ON2 = MN2 .
OM·ON OM·ON
(51)

With z2 = z3, κ = 0, K = ½π; and the number of beats per second of the axis is

With z2 = z3, κ = 0, K = ½π; and the number of beats per second of the axis is

m = n z1 − z3 = MN   n ,
π π 2 √ (OM·ON)
(52)

beating time with a pendulum of length

beating time with a pendulum of length

L = l = 4OM·ON l.
½ (z1 − z3) MN2
(53)

The wheel making R/2π revolutions per second,

The wheel making R/2π revolutions per second,

beats/second = MN   n = C · MN ,
revolutions/second √ (OM·ON) R A OC′
(54)

from (8) (9) § 3; and the apsidal angle is

from (8) (9) § 3; and the apsidal angle is

μ ½π = · n ·½π = ON · 2√ (OM·ON) ·½π = ON π,
m An m √ (OM·ON) MN MN
(55)

and the height of the equivalent conical pendulum λ is given by

and the height of the equivalent conical pendulum λ is given by

λ = g = n2 = OM = KC = OL ,
l 2 μ2 ON KC′ OC′
(56)

if OR drawn at right angles to OK cuts KC′ in R, and RL is drawn horizontal to cut the vertical CO in L; thus if OC2 represents l to scale, then OL will represent λ.

if OR drawn at right angles to OK cuts KC′ in R, and RL is drawn horizontal to cut the vertical CO in L; thus if OC2 represents l to scale, then OL will represent λ.

9. The gyroscope motion in fig. 4 comes to a stop when the rim of the wheel touches the ground; and to realize the motion when the axis is inclined at a greater angle with the upward vertical, the stalk is pivoted in fig. 8 in a lug screwed to the axle of a bicycle hub, fastened vertically in a bracket bolted to a beam. The wheel can now be spun by hand, and projected in any manner so as to produce a desired gyroscopic motion, undulating, looped, or with cusps if the stalk of the wheel is dropped from rest.

9. The gyroscope motion in fig. 4 stops when the edge of the wheel hits the ground; to see the motion when the axis is tilted at a steeper angle from vertical, the stalk is attached in fig. 8 to a bracket screwed onto a bike hub axle, secured vertically to a beam. The wheel can now be spun by hand and launched in any way to create the desired gyroscopic motion, whether it's undulating, looping, or with points if the wheel's stalk is released from a standstill.

As the principal part of the motion takes place now in the neighbourhood of the lowest position, it is convenient to measure the angle θ from the downward vertical, and to change the sign of z and G.

As the main part of the motion is now occurring near the lowest point, it’s easier to measure the angle θ from the downward vertical, and to switch the signs of z and G.

Equation (18) § 8 must be changed to

Equation (18) § 8 must be changed to

mt = nt z3 − z1 = z3z √ (z3 − z1) dz ,
2 √ (4Z)
(1)

Z = (z − F) (1 − z2) − (G2 − 2GG′z + G′2) / 2A2n2

Z = (z − F) (1 − z²) − (G² − 2GG′z + G′²) / 2A²n²

= (z − D) (1 − z2) − (G − G′z)2 / 2A2n2

= (z − D) (1 − z2) − (G − G′z)2 / 2A2n2

= (z − E) (1 − z2) − (G′ − Gz)2 / 2A2n2

= (z − E) (1 − z2) − (G′ − Gz)2 / 2A2n2

= (z3 − z) (z − z2) (z − z1),

= (z3 − z) (z − z2) (z − z1),

(2)

1 > z3 > z > z2 > −1, D, E > z1,

1 > z3 > z > z2 > −1, D, E > z1,

(3)

z1 + z2 + z3 = F = D − G′2 / 2A2n2 = E − G2 / 2A2n2,

z1 + z2 + z3 = F = D − G′2 / 2A2n2 = E − G2 / 2A2n2,

(4)

and expressed by the inverse elliptic function

and expressed by the inverse elliptic function

mt = sn−1 z3 − z = cn−1 z − z2 = dn−1 z − z1 ,
z3 − z2 z3 − z2 z3 − z1
(5)

z = z2sn2mt + z3cn2mt, κ2 = (z3 − z2) / (z3 − z1).

z = z2sn2mt + z3cn2mt, κ2 = (z3 − z2) / (z3 − z1).

(6)

Equation (25) and (29) § 8 is changed to

Equation (25) and (29) § 8 has been updated to

ῶ = ½ G′ − Gz   dt = ½ G′ − GE   dt Gt ,
z − E A z − E A 2A
(7)
ψ = G′z − G   dt = ½ G′ + G   dt − ½ G′ − G   dt ,
1 − z2 A 1 − z A 1 + z A
(8)

while ψ and ῶ change places in (26).

while ψ and ῶ switch places in (26).

The Jacobian elliptic parameter of the third elliptic integral in (7) can be given by ν, where

The Jacobian elliptic parameter of the third elliptic integral in (7) can be represented by ν, where

v = z3E √ (z3 − z1) dz = z3z2 + z2E = K + (1 − f) Ki′,
√ (4Z)
(9)

where f is a real fraction,

where f is a real number fraction,

(1 − f) K′ = z2E √ (z3 − z1) dz,
√ (−4Z)
(10)
fK′ = Ez1 √ (z3 − z1) dz,
√ (−4Z)
= sn−1 E − z1 = cn−1 z2 − E = dn−1 z3 − E ,
z2 − z1 z2 − z1 z3 − z1
(11)

with respect to the comodulus κ′.

with respect to the comodulus κ′.

Then, with z = E, and

Then, with z = E, and

2ZE = −{ (G′ − GE) / An}2,

2ZE = −{ (G′ − GE) / An}2,

(12)

if II denotes the apsidal angle of ῶ, and T the time of a single beat of the axle, up or down,

if II represents the apsidal angle of ῶ, and T is the time for a single beat of the axle, whether up or down,

II + GT = z3z2 √ (−2ZE)   dz ,
2A z − E √ (2Z)

= ½πf + Kznf K′,

= ½πf + Kznf K′,

(13)

in accordance with the theory of the complete elliptic integral of the third kind.

in line with the theory of the complete elliptic integral of the third kind.

Interpreted geometrically on the deformable hyperboloid, flattened in the plane of the focal ellipse, if OQ is the perpendicular from the centre on the tangent HP, AOQ = amfK′, and the eccentric angle of P, measured from the minor axis, is am(1 − f) K′, the eccentricity of the focal ellipse being the comodulus κ′.

Interpreted geometrically on the flexible hyperboloid, flattened in the plane of the focal ellipse, if OQ is the perpendicular from the center to the tangent HP, then AOQ = amfK′, and the eccentric angle of P, measured from the minor axis, is am(1 − f) K′, with the eccentricity of the focal ellipse being the comodulus κ′.

A point L is taken in QP such that

A point L is chosen in QP such that

QL/OA = znfK′,

QL/OA = znfK′,

(14)

QV, QT, QP = OA (zs, zc, zd) fK′;

QV, QT, QP = OA (zs, zc, zd) fK′;

(15)

and with

and with

mT = K, m/n = √ (z3 − z1) /2 = OA/k,

mT = K, m/n = √ (z3 − z1) /2 = OA/k,

(16)
GT = G · k K = QH K,
2A 2An OA OA
(17)
II = ½πf + QL + QH K = ½πf + HL K.
OA OA
(18)

By choosing for f a simple rational fraction, such as ½, 13, ¼, 15, ... an algebraical case of motion can be constructed (Annals of Mathematics, 1904).

By selecting a basic rational fraction, like ½, 1/3, ¼, or 1/5, ... a mathematical case of motion can be created (Annals of Mathematics, 1904).

Thus with G′ − GE = 0, we have E = z1 or z2, never z3; f = 0 or 1; and P is at A or B on the focal ellipse; and then

Thus with G′ − GE = 0, we have E = z1 or z2, never z3; f = 0 or 1; and P is at A or B on the focal ellipse; and then

ῶ = −pt, p = G/2A,

ῶ = −pt, p = G/2A,

(19)
ψ + pt = tan−1 n√ (2Z) ,
2p (z − E)
(20)

sin θ exp (ψ + pt) i = i√ [(−z2 − z3) (z − z1)] + √ [(z3 − z) (z − z2)],

sin θ exp (ψ + pt) i = i√ [(−z2 − z3) (z − z1)] + √ [(z3 − z) (z − z2)],

z1 = 1 + z2 z3 , −z2 − z3 = G = p = G′ , or
z2 + z3 2 2An n 2Anz1
(21)

sin θ exp (ψ + pt)i = i√ [(−z1 − z3) (z − z2)] + √ [(z3 − z) (z − z1)],

sin θ exp (ψ + pt)i = i√ [(−z1 − z3) (z − z2)] + √ [(z3 − z) (z − z1)],

z2 = 1 + z1 z3 , −z1 − z3 = G = p = G′ .
z1 + z3 2 2An n 2Anz1
(22)

Thus z2 = 0 in (22) makes G′ = 0; so that if the stalk is held out horizontally and projected with angular velocity 2p about the vertical axis OC without giving any spin to the wheel, the resulting motion of the stalk is like that of a spherical pendulum, and given by

Thus z2 = 0 in (22) makes G′ = 0; so that if the stalk is held out horizontally and projected with angular velocity 2p about the vertical axis OC without giving any spin to the wheel, the resulting motion of the stalk is like that of a spherical pendulum, and given by

sin θ exp (ψ + pt)i = i ( 2p2 cos θ ) + Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. sin2 θ − 2 p2 cos θ Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.,
n2 n2

= i sin α √ (sec α cos θ) + √ [(sec α + cos θ) (cos α − cos θ)],

= i sin α √ (sec α cos θ) + √ [(sec α + cos θ) (cos α − cos θ)],

(23)

if the axis falls in the lowest position to an angle α with the downward vertical.

if the axis is in the lowest position at an angle α with the downward vertical.

With z3 = 0 in (21) and z2 = −cos β, and changing to the upward vertical measurement, the motion is given by

With z3 = 0 in (21) and z2 = −cos β, and switching to the upward vertical measurement, the motion is described by

sin θ eψi = eint √ ½ cos β [√ (1 − cos β cos θ) + i√ (cos β cos θ − cos2 θ)],

sin θ eψi = eint √ ½ cos β [√ (1 − cos β cos θ) + i√ (cos β cos θ − cos2 θ)],

(24)

and the axis rises from the horizontal position to a series of cusps; and the mean precessional motion is the same as in steady motion with the same rotation and the axis horizontal.

and the axis moves up from the horizontal position to a series of peaks; and the average precessional motion is the same as in steady motion with the same rotation and the axis horizontal.

The special case of f = ½ may be stated here; it is found that

The specific case of f = ½ can be mentioned here; it is discovered that

p exp (ῶ − pt) i = (1 + x) (κ − x) + i (1 − x) (κ + x) ,
a 2 2
(25)

ρ2 = a2 (κ − x2),

ρ² = a² (κ − x²),

(26)
½λ2 sin θ exp (ψ − pt) i = (L − 1 + κ − x) (1 − x) (κ + x
2
+ i (L − 1 + κ + x) (1 + x) (κ − x) ,
2
(27)

L = ½ (1 − κ) + λp/n,

L = ½ (1 − κ) + λp/n,

(28)

so that p = 0 and the motion is made algebraical by taking L = ½ (1 − κ).

so that p = 0 and the motion is expressed algebraically by taking L = ½ (1 − κ).

The stereoscopic diagram of fig. 12 drawn by T. I. Dewar shows these curves for κ = 1517, 35, and 13 (cusps).

The 3D diagram in fig. 12 created by T. I. Dewar illustrates these curves for κ = 1517, 35, and 13 (cusps).

10. So far the motion of the axis OC’ of the top has alone been considered; for the specification of any point of the body, Euler’s third angle φ must be introduced, representing the angular displacement of the wheel with respect to the stalk. This is given by

10. Until now, we've only looked at the motion of the axis OC’ of the top; to specify any point of the body, we need to introduce Euler’s third angle φ, which represents the angular displacement of the wheel in relation to the stalk. This is given by

+ cos θ = R,
dt dt
(1)
d(φ + ψ) = ) 1 − C ) R + G′ + G ,
dt A A (1 + cos θ)
d(φ − ψ) = Please provide the text you would like modernized. 1 − C It seems there's no text provided to modernize. Please provide a short phrase for me to work with. R + G′ − G .
dt A A (1 − cos θ)
(2)

It will simplify the formulas by cancelling a secular term if we make C = A, and the top is then called a spherical top; OH becomes the axis of instantaneous angular velocity, as well as of resultant angular momentum.

It will make the formulas easier by canceling a non-rotating term if we set C = A, and the top is then called a spherical top; OH becomes the axis of instant angular velocity, as well as the axis of total angular momentum.

When this secular term is restored in the general case, the axis OI of angular velocity is obtained by producing Q′H to I, making

When this secular term is reintroduced in the general case, the axis OI of angular velocity is obtained by extending Q′H to I, making

HI = A − C , HI = A − C ,
Q′H C Q′I A
(3)

775

775

and then the four vector components OC′, C′K, KH, HI give a resultant vector OI, representing the angular velocity ω, such that

and then the four vector components OC′, C′K, KH, HI create a resultant vector OI, representing the angular velocity ω, so that

OI/Q′I = ω/R.

OI/Q′I = ω/R.

(4)
Fig. 12.

The point I is then fixed on the generating line Q′H of the deformable hyperboloid, and the other generator through I will cut the fixed generator OC of the opposite system in a fixed point O′, such that IO′ is of constant length, and may be joined up by a link, which constrains I to move on a sphere.

The point I is then placed on the generating line Q′H of the deformable hyperboloid, and the other generator passing through I will intersect the fixed generator OC of the opposite system at a fixed point O′, such that IO′ is of constant length and can be connected by a link, which restricts I to move on a sphere.

In the spherical top then,

In the round top then,

½ (φ + ψ)= G′ + G   dt ,   ½ (φ − ψ)= G′ − G   dt
1 + z 2A 1 − z 2A
(5)

depending on the two elliptic integrals of the third kind, with pole at z = ±1; and measuring θ from the downward vertical, their elliptic parameters are:—

depending on the two elliptic integrals of the third kind, with a pole at z = ±1; and measuring θ from the downward vertical, their elliptic parameters are:—

v1 = 1 √ (z3 − z1) dz = f1K′i,
√ (4Z)
(6)
v2 = −1−∞ √ (z3 − z1) dz K + (1 − f2) K′i,
√ (4Z)
(7)
f1K′ = 1 √ (z3 − z1) dz
√ ( −4Z)
= sn−1 z3 − z1 = cn−1 1 − z3 = dn−1 1 − z2 ,
1 − z1 1 − z1 1 − z1
(8)
(1 − f2) K′ = −1z1 √ (z3 − z1) dz
√ ( −4Z)
= sn−1 −1 − z1 = cn−1 1 + z2 = dn−1 1 + z3 .
z2 − z1 z2 − z1 z3 − z1
(9)

Then if v′ = K + (1 − f′)K′i is the parameter corresponding to z = D, we find

Then if v′ = K + (1 − f′)K′i is the parameter corresponding to z = D, we find

f = f2 − f1, f′ = f2 + f1,

f = f2 − f1, f′ = f2 + f1,

(10)

v = v1 + v2, v′ = v1 − v2.

v = v1 + v2, v′ = v1 − v2.

(11)

The most symmetrical treatment of the motion of any point fixed in the top will be found in Klein and Sommerfeld, Theorie des Kreisels, to which the reader is referred for details; four new functions, α, β, γ, δ, are introduced, defined in terms of Euler’s angles, θ, ψ, φ, by

The most balanced approach to the motion of any point fixed at the top can be found in Klein and Sommerfeld's "Theorie des Kreisel," which the reader should consult for more information. Four new functions, α, β, γ, and δ, are introduced and defined in terms of Euler’s angles, θ, ψ, and φ, by

α = cos ½θ exp ½ (φ + ψ) i,

α = cos ½θ exp ½ (φ + ψ) i,

(12)

β = i sin ½θ exp ½ (−φ + ψ) i,

β = i sin ½θ exp ½ (−φ + ψ) i,

(13)

γ = i sin ½θ exp ½ (φ − ψ) i,

γ = i sin ½θ e^(½(φ − ψ)i),

(14)

δ = cos ½θ exp ½ (−φ − ψ) i.

δ = cos ½θ exp ½ (−φ − ψ) i.

(15)

Next Klein takes two functions or co-ordinates λ and Λ, defined by

Next, Klein takes two functions or coordinates λ and Λ, defined by

λ = x + yi = r + z ,
r − z x − yi
(16)

and Λ the same function of X, Y, Z, so that λ, Λ play the part of stereographic representations of the same point (x, y, z) or (X, Y, Z) on a sphere of radius r, with respect to poles in which the sphere is intersected by Oz and OZ.

and λ the same function of X, Y, Z, so that λ, Λ serve as stereographic representations of the same point (x, y, z) or (X, Y, Z) on a sphere of radius r, relative to the poles where the sphere is intersected by Oz and OZ.

These new functions are shown to be connected by the bilinear relation

These new functions are shown to be linked by the bilinear relation.

λ = αΛ + β ,   αδ − βγ = 1,
γΛ + δ
(17)

in accordance with the annexed scheme of transformation of co-ordinates—

in line with the attached coordinate transformation scheme—

  Ξ Η Ζ
ξ α2 β2 2αβ
η γ2 δ2 2γδ
ζ αγ βδ αδ + βγ

where

where

ξ = x + yi,   η = −x + yi,   ζ = −z,
Ξ = X + Yi,   Η = −X + Yi,   Ζ = −Z;

ξ = x + yi,   η = −x + yi,   ζ = −z,
Ξ = X + Yi,   Η = −X + Yi,   Ζ = −Z;

(18)

and thus the motion in space of any point fixed in the body defined by Λ is determined completely by means of α, β, γ, δ; and in the case of the symmetrical top these functions are elliptic transcendants, to which Klein has given the name of multiplicative elliptic functions; and

and so the movement in space of any point fixed in the body defined by Λ is fully determined by α, β, γ, δ; and in the case of the symmetrical top, these functions are elliptic transcendants, which Klein has called multiplicative elliptic functions; and

αδ = cos2 ½θ,   βγ = −sin2 ½θ,
αδ − βγ = 1,   αδ + βγ = cos θ,
√ ( −4αβγδ) = sin θ;

αδ = cos2 ½θ,   βγ = −sin2 ½θ,
αδ − βγ = 1,   αδ + βγ = cos θ,
√ ( −4αβγδ) = sin θ;

(19)

while, for the motion of a point on the axis, putting Λ = 0, or ∞,

while, for the movement of a point on the axis, setting Λ = 0 or ∞,

λ = β/δ = i tan ½θeψi, or λ = α/γ = −i cot ½θeψi,

λ = β/δ = i tan ½θeψi, or λ = α/γ = −i cot ½θeψi,

(20)

and

and

αβ = ½i sin θeψi, αγ = ½i sin θeψi,

αβ = ½i sin θeψi, αγ = ½i sin θeψi,

(21)

giving orthogonal projections on the planes GKH, CHK; and

giving orthogonal projections on the planes GKH, CHK; and

α β = n ρ eῶi,
dt dt k
(22)

the vectorial equation in the plane GKH of the herpolhode of H for a spherical top.

the vector equation in the plane GKH of the herpolhode of H for a spherical top.

When f1 and f2 in (9) are rational fractions, these multiplicative elliptic functions can be replaced by algebraical functions, qualified by factors which are exponential functions of the time t; a series of quasi-algebraical cases of motion can thus be constructed, which become purely algebraical when the exponential factors are cancelled by a suitable arrangement of the constants.

When f1 and f2 in (9) are rational fractions, these multiplicative elliptic functions can be substituted with algebraic functions, modified by factors that are exponential functions of time t. This allows for the creation of a series of almost algebraic cases of motion, which turn into purely algebraic ones when the exponential factors are eliminated through a proper arrangement of the constants.

Thus, for example, with f = 0, f′ = 1, f1 = ½, f2 = ½, as in (24) § 9, where P and P′ are at A and B on the focal ellipse, we have for the spherical top

Thus, for example, with f = 0, f′ = 1, f1 = ½, f2 = ½, as in (24) § 9, where P and P′ are at A and B on the focal ellipse, we have for the spherical top

(1 + cos θ) exp (φ + ψ − qt) i
= √ (sec β − cos θ) √ (cos β − cos θ) + i (√ sec β + √ cos β) √ cos θ,

(1 + cos θ) exp (φ + ψ − qt) i
= √ (sec β − cos θ) √ (cos β − cos θ) + i (√ sec β + √ cos β) √ cos θ,

(23)

(1 − cos θ) exp (φ − ψ − q′t) i
= √ (sec β − cos θ) √ (cos β − cos θ) + i (√sec β − √ cos β) √ cos θ,

(1 − cos θ) exp (φ − ψ − q't) i
= √ (sec β − cos θ) √ (cos β − cos θ) + i (√sec β − √ cos β) √ cos θ,

(24)

q, q′ = n√ (2 sec β) ± n√ (2 cos β);

q, q′ = n√ (2 sec β) ± n√ (2 cos β);

(25)

and thence α, β, γ, δ can be inferred.

and from there α, β, γ, δ can be inferred.

The physical constants of a given symmetrical top have been denoted in § 1 by M, h, A, C, and l, n, T; to specify a given state of general motion we have G, G′ or CR, D, E, or F, which may be called the dynamical constants; or κ, v, w, v1, v2, or f, f′, f1, f2, the analytical constants; or the geometrical constants, such as α, β, δ, δ′, k of a given articulated hyperboloid.

The physical constants of a specific symmetrical top are referred to in § 1 as M, h, A, C, and l, n, T. To define a certain state of general motion, we use G, G′ or CR, D, E, or F, known as the dynamical constants. Alternatively, we have κ, v, w, v1, v2, or f, f′, f1, f2, which are the analytical constants; or the geometrical constants like α, β, δ, δ′, k of a specific articulated hyperboloid.

There is thus a triply infinite series of a state of motion; the choice of a typical state can be made geometrically on the hyperboloid, flattened in the plane of the local ellipse, of which κ is the ratio of the semiaxes α and β, and am(1 − f) K′ is the eccentric angle from the minor axis of the point of contact P of the generator HQ, so that two analytical constants are settled thereby; and the point H may be taken arbitrarily on the tangent line PQ, and HQ′ is then the other tangent of the focal ellipse; in which case θ3 and θ2 are the angles between the tangents HQ, HQ′, and between the focal distances HS, HS′, and k2 will be HS·HS′, while HQ, HQ′ are δ, δ′. 776 As H is moved along the tangent line HQ, a series of states of motion can be determined, and drawn with accuracy.

There is a triply infinite range of motion states; you can choose a typical state geometrically on the hyperboloid, which is flattened in the plane of the local ellipse, with κ being the ratio of the semi-axes α and β. The term am(1 − f) K′ represents the eccentric angle from the minor axis at the point of contact P of the generator HQ, thus defining two analytical constants. Point H can be placed anywhere on the tangent line PQ, and HQ′ will be the other tangent of the focal ellipse. In this case, θ3 and θ2 are the angles between the tangents HQ, HQ′, and the focal distances HS, HS′, while k2 will be HS·HS′, with HQ, HQ′ represented as δ, δ′. 776 As H moves along the tangent line HQ, a range of motion states can be determined and accurately illustrated.

Fig. 13.

11. Equation (5) § 3 with slight modification will serve with the same notation for the steady rolling motion at a constant inclination α to the vertical of a body of revolution, such as a disk, hoop, wheel, cask, wine-glass, plate, dish, bowl, spinning top, gyrostat, or bicycle, on a horizontal plane, or a surface of revolution, as a coin in a conical lamp-shade.

11. Equation (5) § 3, with a few changes, will work with the same notation for the steady rolling motion at a constant angle α to the vertical of a body of revolution, like a disk, hoop, wheel, cask, wine glass, plate, dish, bowl, spinning top, gyrostat, or bicycle, on a flat surface or a surface of revolution, like a coin in a conical lampshade.

The point O is now the intersection of the axis GC′ with the vertical through the centre B of the horizontal circle described by the centre of gravity, and through the centre M of the horizontal circle described by P, the point of contact (fig. 13). Collected into a particle at G, the body swings round the vertical OB as a conical pendulum, of height AB or GL equal to g/μ2 = λ, and GA would be the direction of the thread, of tension gM(GA/GL) dynes. The reaction with the plane at P will be an equal parallel force; and its moment round G will provide the couple which causes the velocity of the vector of angular momentum appropriate to the steady motion; and this moment will be gM·Gm dyne-cm. or ergs, if the reaction at P cuts GB in m.

The point O is now where the axis GC′ intersects the vertical line through the center B of the horizontal circle made by the center of gravity, and through the center M of the horizontal circle made by P, the point of contact (fig. 13). Collected into a particle at G, the body swings around the vertical OB like a conical pendulum, with a height AB or GL equal to g/μ2 = λ, and GA would be the direction of the thread, with a tension of gM(GA/GL) dynes. The reaction with the plane at P will be an equal parallel force; and its moment around G will create the couple that produces the velocity of the angular momentum vector necessary for steady motion; and this moment will be gM·Gm dyne-cm, or ergs, if the reaction at P intersects GB at m.

Draw GR perpendicular to GK to meet the horizontal AL in R, and draw RQC′K perpendicular to the axis Gz, and KC perpendicular to LG.

Draw GR at a right angle to GK to meet the horizontal line AL at R, and draw RQC′K at a right angle to the axis Gz, and KC at a right angle to LG.

The velocity of the vector GK of angular momentum is μ times the horizontal component, and

The speed of the vector GK of angular momentum is μ times the horizontal component, and

horizontal component /Aμ sin α = KC/KC′,

horizontal component /Aμ sin α = KC/KC′,

(1)

so that

to ensure

gM·Gm = Aμ2 sin α(KC/KC′),

gM·Gm = Aμ2 sin α(KC/KC′),

(2)
A = KC′   g Gm = GQ·Gm.
M KC μ2 sin α
(3)

The instantaneous axis of rotation of the case of a gyrostat would be OP; drawing GI parallel to OP, and KK′ parallel to OG, making tan K′GC′ = (A/C) tan IGC’1; then if GK represents the resultant angular momentum, K′K will represent the part of it due to the rotation of the fly-wheel. Thus in the figure for the body rolling as a solid, with the fly-wheel clamped, the points m and Q move to the other side of G. The gyrostat may be supposed swung round the vertical at the end of a thread PA′ fastened at A′ where Pm produced cuts the vertical AB, and again at the point where it crosses the axis GO. The discussion of the small oscillation superposed on the state of steady motion requisite for stability is given in the next paragraph.

The instantaneous axis of rotation for the gyrostat case is OP. By drawing GI parallel to OP and KK' parallel to OG, we have tan K'GC' = (A/C) tan IGC’1; if GK represents the total angular momentum, then K'K will show the portion due to the flywheel's rotation. In the diagram for a solid body rolling with the flywheel secured, the points m and Q shift to the opposite side of G. We can imagine the gyrostat swung around the vertical at the end of a thread PA' attached at A', where Pm extended meets the vertical AB, and where it intersects the axis GO. The discussion on the small oscillations added to the stable steady motion necessary for stability is covered in the next paragraph.

12. In the theoretical discussion of the general motion General motion of a gyrostat rolling on a plane. of a gyrostat rolling on a horizontal plane the safe and shortest plan apparently is to write down the most general equations of motion, and afterwards to introduce any special condition.

12. In the theoretical discussion of the general motion The overall movement of a gyrostat rolling on a flat surface. of a gyrostat rolling on a horizontal plane, the safest and most efficient approach seems to be to first write down the most general equations of motion, and then to add any specific conditions later.

Drawing through G the centre of gravity any three rectangular axes Gx, Gy, Gz, the notation employed is

Drawing through G, the center of gravity, any three rectangular axes Gx, Gy, Gz, the notation used is

u, v, w, the components of linear velocity of G;
p, q, r, the components of angular velocity about the axes;
h1, h2, h3, the components of angular momentum;
θ1, θ2, θ3, the components of angular velocity of the coordinate axes;
x, y, z, the co-ordinates of the point of contact with the horizontal plane;
X, Y, Z, the components of the reaction of the plane;
α, β, γ, the direction cosines of the downward vertical.

The geometrical equations, expressing that the point of contact is at rest on the plane, are

The geometric equations, showing that the point of contact is stationary on the plane, are

u − ry + qz = 0,

u − ry + qz = 0,

(1)

v − pz + rx = 0,

v − pz + rx = 0,

(2)

w − qx + py = 0.

w − qx + py = 0.

(3)

The dynamical equations are

The dynamic equations are

du/dt − θ3v + θ2w = gα + X/M,

du/dt − θ3v + θ2w = gα + X/M,

(4)

dv/dt − θ1w + θ2u = gβ + Y/M,

dv/dt − θ1w + θ2u = gβ + Y/M,

(5)

dw/dt − θ2u + θ1v = gγ + Z/M,

dw/dt − θ2u + θ1v = gγ + Z/M,

(6)

and

and

dh1/dt − θ3h2 + θ2h3 = yZ − zY,

dh1/dt − θ3h2 + θ2h3 = yZ − zY,

(7)

dh2/dt − θ1h3 + θ3h1 = zX − xZ,

dh2/dt − θ1h3 + θ3h1 = zX − xZ,

(8)

dh3/dt − θ2h1 + θ1h2 = xY − yX.

dh3/dt − θ2h1 + θ1h2 = xY − yX.

(9)

In the special case of the gyrostat where the surface is of revolution round Gz, and the body is kinetically symmetrical about Gz, we take Gy horizontal and Gzx through the point of contact so that y = 0; and denoting the angle between Gz and the downward vertical by θ (fig. 13)

In the specific case of the gyrostat where the surface revolves around Gz, and the body is symmetrically balanced about Gz, we set Gy to horizontal and Gzx to pass through the contact point so that y = 0; and we denote the angle between Gz and the downward vertical as θ (fig. 13).

α = sin θ,   β = 0,   γ = cos θ.

α = sin θ,   β = 0,   γ = cos θ.

(10)

The components of angular momentum are

The components of angular momentum are

h1 = Ap,   h2 = Aq,   h3 = Cr + K,

h1 = Ap,   h2 = Aq,   h3 = Cr + K,

(11)

where A, C denote the moment of inertia about Gx, Gz, and K is the angular momentum of a fly-wheel fixed in the interior with its axis parallel to Gz; K is taken as constant during the motion.

where A, C represent the moment of inertia around Gx, Gz, and K is the angular momentum of a flywheel that is fixed inside with its axis parallel to Gz; K is considered constant throughout the motion.

The axis Gz being fixed in the body,

The axis Gz is fixed in the body,

θ1 = p,   θ2 = q = −dθ/dt,   θ3 = p cot θ.

θ1 = p,   θ2 = q = −dθ/dt,   θ3 = p cot θ.

(12)

With y = 0, (1), (2), (3) reduce to

With y = 0, (1), (2), (3) reduce to

u = −qz,   v = pz − rx,   w = qx;

u = −qz,   v = pz − rx,   w = qx;

(13)

and, denoting the radius of curvature of the meridian curve of the rolling surface by ρ,

and, denoting the radius of curvature of the meridian curve of the rolling surface by ρ,

dx = ρ cos θ = −q ρ cos θ, dz = −ρ sin θ = q ρ sin θ;
dt dt dt dt
(14)

so that

to ensure

du = − dq z − q2ρ sin θ,
dt dt
(15)
dv = dp z − dr x + pqρ sin θ + qrρ sin θ,
dt dt dt
(16)
dw = dq x − q2ρ cos θ.
dt dt
(17)

The dynamical equations (4)...(9) can now be reduced to

The dynamic equations (4)...(9) can now be simplified to

X = − dq z − p2z cotθ + q2 (x − ρ sin θ) + prx cot θ − g sin θ,
M dt
(18)
Y = dp z − dr x − pq (x + z cot θ − ρ sin θ) + qrp cos θ,
M dt dt
(19)
Z = dq x + q2 (z − ρ cos θ) + p2z − prx − g cos θ,
M dt
(20)
−zY = A dp − Apq cot θ + qh3,
dt
(21)
−zX − xZ = A dq + Ap2 cot θ − ph3,
dt
xY = dh3 = C dr = −Cq d .
dt dt
(23)

Eliminating Y between (19) and (23),

Eliminating Y between (19) and (23),

( C + x2 I'm sorry, but there is no text provided for me to modernize. Please provide the text you'd like me to work on. dr − xz dp + pqx (x + z cot θ − ρ sin θ) − qrxρ cos θ = 0,
M dt dt
(24)
( C + x2 ) dr − xz dp − px (x + z cot θ − ρ sin θ) + rxρ cos θ = 0.
M
(A)

Eliminating Y between (19) and (21)

Eliminating Y between (19) and (21)

( A + z2 ) dp − xz dr A pq cot θ + q h3
M dt dt M M

− pqz (x + z cot θ − ρ sin θ) + qrzρ cos θ = 0,

− pqz (x + z cot θ − ρ sin θ) + qrzρ cos θ = 0,

(25)
−xz dr + I'm ready to assist! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. A + z2 Please provide a short piece of text for modernization. dp + A p cot θ − h3
M M M

+ pz (x + z cot θ − ρ sin θ) + rzρ cos θ = 0.

+ pz (x + z cot θ − ρ sin θ) + rzρ cos θ = 0.

(B)

In the special case of a gyrostat rolling on the sharp edge of a circle passing through G, z = 0, ρ = 0, (A) and (B) reduce to

In the specific situation of a gyrostat rolling along the sharp edge of a circle that goes through G, where z = 0 and ρ = 0, (A) and (B) simplify to

p = ( C + 1 I'm sorry, but there doesn't appear to be any text provided for me to modernize. Please provide a short piece of text for me to assist you with. dr = It seems that your input was incomplete. Please provide me with the phrase you would like modernized, and I will assist you accordingly! 1 + 1 Got it! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. dh3 ,
Mx2 Mx2 C
(26)
dp + p cot θ = h3 ,   d·p sin θ = h3 sin θ ;
A A
(27)
d2h3 + dh3 cot θ = CMx2 h3,
2 A (Mx2 + C)
(28)

a differential equation of a hypergeometric series, of the form of Legendre’s zonal harmonic of fractional order n, given by

a differential equation of a hypergeometric series, in the form of Legendre’s zonal harmonic of fractional order n, given by

n (n + 1) = CMx2 / A (Mx2 + C).

n (n + 1) = CMx2 / A (Mx2 + C).

(29)

For a sharp point, x = 0, ρ = 0, and the previous equations are obtained of a spinning top.

For a sharp point, x = 0, ρ = 0, and the earlier equations are derived from a spinning top.

The elimination of X and Z between (18) (20) (22), expressed symbolically as

The removal of X and Z between (18) (20) (22), shown symbolically as

(22) − z(18) + x(20) = 0,

(22) − z(18) + x(20) = 0,

(30)

gives

gives

I'm sorry, but there doesn't seem to be any short piece of text provided for me to modernize. Please provide the text you'd like me to work on. A + x2 + z2 ( dq − p h3 + It seems there was an error in your request. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. A + z2 I'm sorry, but there doesn't seem to be any text provided for me to modernize. Please provide the text you would like me to work on. p2 cot θ + p2xz
M dt M M

+ q2ρ (x cos θ − z sin θ) − prx (x + z cot θ) − g (x cos θ − z sin θ) = 0,

+ q2ρ (x cos θ − z sin θ) − prx (x + z cot θ) − g (x cos θ − z sin θ) = 0,

(C)

and this combined with (A) and (B) will lead to an equation the integral of which is the equation of energy.

and this, together with (A) and (B), will result in an equation the integral of which represents the equation of energy.

13. The equations (A) (B) (C) are intractable in this general form; but the restricted case may be considered when the axis moves in steady motion at a constant inclination α to the vertical; and the stability is secured if a small nutation of the axis can be superposed.

13. The equations (A) (B) (C) are difficult to deal with in this general form; however, we can look at the limited case where the axis moves steadily at a constant angle α to the vertical. Stability is maintained if a slight wobble of the axis can be added on.

It is convenient to put p = Ω sin θ, so that Ω is the angular velocity of the plane Gzx about the vertical; (A) (B) (C) become

It is convenient to set p = Ω sin θ, where Ω is the angular velocity of the plane Gzx around the vertical; (A) (B) (C) become

777

777

Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. C + x2 Please provide the text for me to modernize. dr − xz sin θ
M

− Ωx (x sin θ − 2z cos θ − ρ sin2 θ) + rxρ cos θ = 0,

− Ωx (x sin θ − 2z cos θ − ρ sin2 θ) + rxρ cos θ = 0,

(A*)
−xz dr + ( A + z2 It seems there is no text provided for me to modernize. Please provide the short phrases you would like me to work on. sin θ h3 + 2Ω ) A + z2 ( cos θ
M M M

+ Ωz sin θ (x − ρ sin θ) − rzρ cos θ = 0,

+ Ωz sin θ (x − ρ sin θ) − rzρ cos θ = 0,

(B*)
( A + x2 + z2 ) dq + q2p (x cos θ − z sin θ) − Ω h3 sin θ
M dt M
+ Ω2 It appears that the text you provided is incomplete. Please provide a complete phrase or sentence for me to assist you in modernizing it. A + z2 ) sin θ cos θ + Ω2xz sin2 θ
M

− Ωrx (x sin θ + z cos θ) − g (x cos θ − z sin θ) = 0.

− Ωrx (x sin θ + z cos θ) − g (x cos θ − z sin θ) = 0.

(C*)

The steady motion and nutation superposed may be expressed by

The constant motion and superimposed wobble can be expressed by

θ = α + L, sin θ = sin α + L cos α, cos θ = cos α − L sin α, Ω = μ + N, r = R + Q,

θ = α + L, sin θ = sin α + L cos α, cos θ = cos α − L sin α, Ω = μ + N, r = R + Q,

(1)

where L, N, Q are small terms, involving a factor enti, to express the periodic nature of the nutation; and then if a, c denote the mean value of x, z, at the point of contact

where L, N, Q are small terms that include a factor enti to show the periodic nature of the nutation; and then if a, c represent the average value of x, z, at the point of contact

x = a + Lρ cos α, z = c − Lρ sin α,

x = a + Lρ cos(α), z = c - Lρ sin(α),

(2)

x sin θ + z cos θ = a sin α + c cos α + L (a cos α − c sin α),

x sin θ + z cos θ = a sin α + c cos α + L (a cos α − c sin α),

(3)

x cos θ − z sin θ = a cos α − c sin α − L (a sin α + c cos α − ρ).

x cos θ − z sin θ = a cos α − c sin α − L (a sin α + c cos α − ρ).

(4)

Substituting these values in (C*) with dq/dt = −d2θ/dt2 = n2L, and ignoring products of the small terms, such as L2, LN, ...

Substituting these values in (C*) with dq/dt = −d2θ/dt2 = n2L, and ignoring products of the small terms, like L2, LN, ...

The text appears to be incomplete. Please provide a short phrase (5 words or fewer) for modernization. A + a2 + c2 I'm sorry, but there doesn't seem to be any short piece of text provided for me to modernize. Please provide a phrase for me to work on. Ln2 − (μ + N) ) CR + K + CQ I'm ready to assist! Please provide the text you want me to modernize. (sin α + L cos α)
M M M

+ (μ2 + 2μN) (A/M + c2 − 2Lρc sin α) (sin α cos α + L cos α)

+ (μ2 + 2μN) (A/M + c2 − 2Lρc sin α) (sin α cos α + L cos α)

+ (μ2 + 2μN) [ac − Lρ (a sin α − c sin α)] (sin2 α + L sin 2α)

+ (μ2 + 2μN) [ac − Lρ (a sin α − c sin α)] (sin2 α + L sin 2α)

− (μ + N) (R + Q) (a + Lρcos α) [a sin α + c cos α + L (a cos α − c sin α)]

− (μ + N) (R + Q) (a + Lρcos α) [a sin α + c cos α + L (a cos α − c sin α)]

− g (a cos α − c sin α) + gL (a sin α + c cos α − ρ) = 0,

− g (a cos α − c sin α) + gL (a sin α + c cos α − ρ) = 0,

(C**)

which is equivalent to

which equals

−μ CR + K sin α + μ2 Please provide the text for modernization. A + c2 ) sin αcos α
M M

+ μ2 ac sin2 α − μRa (a sin α + c cos α) − g (a cos α − c sin α) = 0,

+ μ2 ac sin2 α − μRa (a sin α + c cos α) − g (a cos α − c sin α) = 0,

(5)

the condition of steady motion; and

the state of constant motion; and

DL + EQ + FN = 0,

DL + EQ + FN = 0,

(6)

where

where

D = I'm sorry, but it seems your message was incomplete. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. A + a2 + c2 ) n2 − μ CK + K cos α − 2μ2ρc sin2 α cos α
M M

+ μ2 (A/M + c2) cos α − μ2ρ (a sin α − c cos α) sin2 α

+ μ2 (A/M + c2) cos α − μ2ρ (a sin α − c cos α) sin2 α

+ μ2ac sin 2α − μRρ cos α (a sin α + c cos α)

+ μ2ac sin 2α − μRρ cos α (a sin α + c cos α)

− μRa (a cos α − c sin α) + g (a sin α + c cos α − ρ),

− μRa (a cos α − c sin α) + g (a sin α + c cos α − ρ),

(7)
E = −μ C sin α − μa (a sin α + c cos α),
M
(8)
F = − CR + K sin α + 2μ ( A + c2 ) sin α cos α
M M

+ 2μac sin2 α − Ra (a sin α + c cos α).

+ 2μac sin2 α − Ra (a sin α + c cos α).

(9)

With the same approximation (A*) and (B*) are equivalent to

With the same approximation, (A*) and (B*) are equivalent to

( C + a2 ) Q − ac sin α N − μa (a sin α + 2c cos α − ρ sin2 α) + Raρ cos α = 0,
M L L
(A**)
−ac Q + Please provide the text you would like to have modernized. A + c2 The text is unchanged. sin α N CR + K + 2μ Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. ( A + c2 ) cos α
L M L M M

+ μc sin α (a − ρ sin α) − Rcρ cos α = 0.

+ μc sin α (a − ρ sin α) − Rcρ cos α = 0.

(B**)

The elimination of L, Q, N will lead to an equation for the determination of n2, and n2 must be positive for the motion to be stable.

The removal of L, Q, N will result in an equation to determine n2, and n2 needs to be positive for the motion to be stable.

If b is the radius of the horizontal circle described by G in steady motion round the centre B,

If b is the radius of the horizontal circle that G moves around steadily at the center B,

b = v/μ = (cP − aR) / μ = c sin α − aR / μ,

b = v/μ = (cP − aR) / μ = c sin α − aR / μ,

(10)

and drawing GL vertically upward of length λ = g/μ2, the height of the equivalent conical pendulum, the steady motion condition may be written

and drawing GL straight up to a length λ = g/μ2, the height of the equivalent conical pendulum, the condition for steady motion can be written

(CR + K) μ sin α − μ2 sin α cos α = −gM (a cos α − c sin α)

(CR + K) μ sin α − μ2 sin α cos α = −gM (a cos α − c sin α)

+ M (μ2c sin α − μRa) (a sin α + c cos α)

+ M (μ2c sin α − μRa) (a sin α + c cos α)

= gM [bλ−1 (a sin α + c cos α) − a cos α + c sin α]

= gM [bλ−1 (a sin α + c cos α) − a cos α + c sin α]

= gM·PT,

= gM·PT,

(11)

LG produced cuts the plane in T.

LG produced cuts the plane in T.

Interpreted dynamically, the left-hand side of this equation represents the velocity of the vector of angular momentum about G, so that the right-hand side represents the moment of the applied force about G, in this case the reaction of the plane, which is parallel to GA, and equal to gM·GA/GL; and so the angle AGL must be less than the angle of friction, or slipping will take place.

Interpreted dynamically, the left side of this equation represents the velocity of the angular momentum vector around G, while the right side represents the moment of the applied force around G, which in this case is the plane's reaction, parallel to GA and equal to gM·GA/GL; therefore, the angle AGL must be less than the angle of friction, or slipping will occur.

Spinning upright, with α = 0, a = 0, we find F = 0, Q = 0, and

Spinning upright, with α = 0, a = 0, we find F = 0, Q = 0, and

CR + K + 2μ ( A + c2 ( − Rcp = 0,
M M
(12)
Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. A + c2 Sure! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. n2 = μ CR + K − μ2 ) A + c2 ) + μRρc − g (c − ρ),
M M M
(13)
( A + c2 ) 2 n2 = ¼ ( CK + R + Rcρ ) 2 − g The text appears to be missing. Please provide a short piece of text for me to modernize. A + c2 ) (c − ρ).
M   M   M
(14)

Thus for a top spinning upright on a rounded point, with K = 0, the stability requires that

Thus for a top spinning upright on a rounded point, with K = 0, the stability requires that

R > 2k′√ {g (c − ρ)} / (k2 + cρ),

R > 2k'√ {g (c − ρ)} / (k2 + cρ),

(15)

where k, k′ are the radii of gyration about the axis Gz, and a perpendicular axis at a distance c from G; this reduces to the preceding case of § 3 (7) when ρ = 0.

where k, k′ are the radii of gyration about the axis Gz, and a perpendicular axis at a distance c from G; this reduces to the previous case of § 3 (7) when ρ = 0.

Generally, with α = 0, but a ± 0, the condition (A) and (B) becomes

Generally, with α = 0, but a ± 0, the condition (A) and (B) becomes

Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. C + a2 ) Q = 2μac − Raρ,
M L
−ac Q = CR + K + Rcρ − 2μ ( A + a2 I'm sorry, but there seems to be no text provided for me to modernize. Please provide a phrase of 5 words or fewer.,
L M M
(16)

so that, eliminating Q/L,

so that, removing Q/L,

2 [( A + c2 )( C + a2 ) − a2c2 ] μ = Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. C + a2 )( CR + K ) + C Rcρ,
M M M M M
(17)

the condition when a coin or platter is rolling nearly flat on the table.

the situation when a coin or plate is rolling almost flat on the table.

Rolling along in a straight path, with α = ½π, c = 0, μ = 0, E = 0; and

Rolling along a straight path, with α = ½π, c = 0, μ = 0, E = 0; and

N/L = (CR + K)/A,

N/L = (CR + K)/A,

(18)
D = ) A + a2 ) n2 + g (a − ρ),
M
F = − CR + K − Ra2,
M
(19)
N = − D =
( A + a2 It seems there is no text to modernize. Please provide a phrase or text you would like me to work on. n2 + g (a − ρ)
M
,
L F
Please provide the text for modernizing. C + a2 ) R + K
M M
(20)
The text appears to be incomplete. Please provide a complete phrase or sentence for modernizing. A + a2 ) n2 = (CR + K) [( C + a2 ) R + K ] − g (a − ρ).
M A M M
(21)

Thus with K = 0, and rolling with velocity V = Ra, stability requires

Thus with K = 0, and rolling with velocity V = Ra, stability requires

V2 > a − ρ > ½ A   a − ρ ,
2g 2C/A (C/Ma2 + 1) C C/Ma2 + 1
(22)

or the body must have acquired velocity greater than attained by rolling down a plane through a vertical height ½ (a − ρ) A/C.

or the body must have gained a speed greater than that achieved by rolling down a slope through a vertical height ½ (a − ρ) A/C.

On a sharp edge, with ρ = 0, a thin uniform disk or a thin ring requires

On a sharp edge, with ρ = 0, a thin uniform disk or a thin ring requires

V2/2g > a/6 or a/8.

V2/2g > a/6 or a/8.

(23)

The gyrostat can hold itself upright on the plane without advance when R = 0, provided

The gyrostat can maintain its upright position on the plane without moving forward when R = 0, as long as

K2/AM − g (a − ρ) is positive.

K2/AM − g (a − ρ) is positive.

(24)

For the stability of the monorail carriage of § 5 (6), ignoring the rotary inertia of the wheels by putting C = 0, and replacing K by G′ the theory above would require

For the stability of the monorail carriage in § 5 (6), ignoring the rotary inertia of the wheels by setting C = 0, and substituting K with G′, the theory mentioned above would require

G′ Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. aV + G′ ) > gh.
A A

For further theory and experiments consult Routh, Advanced Rigid Dynamics, chap. v., and Thomson and Tait, Natural Philosophy, § 345; also Bourlet, Traité des bicycles (analysed in Appell, Mécanique rationnelle, ii. 297, and Carvallo, Journal de l’école polytechnique, 1900); Whipple, Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, vol. xxx., for mathematical theories of the bicycle, and other bodies.

For more theory and experiments, check out Routh, Advanced Rigid Dynamics, chapter 5, and Thomson and Tait, Natural Philosophy, section 345; also Bourlet, Traité des bicycles (discussed in Appell, Mécanique rationnelle, ii. 297, and Carvallo, Journal de l’école polytechnique, 1900); Whipple, Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, vol. 30, for mathematical theories related to bicycles and other objects.

14. Lord Kelvin has studied theoretically and experimentally the vibration of a chain of stretched gyrostats (Proc. London Math. Soc., 1875; J. Perry, Spinning Tops, Gyrostatic chain. for a diagram). Suppose each gyrostat to be equivalent dynamically to a fly-wheel of axial length 2a, and that each connecting link is a light cord or steel wire of length 2l, stretched to a tension T.

14. Lord Kelvin has examined both theoretically and experimentally the vibration of a series of stretched gyrostats (Proc. London Math. Soc., 1875; J. Perry, Spinning Tops, Gyroscopic chain. for a diagram). Assume each gyrostat functions dynamically like a flywheel with an axial length of 2a, and that each connecting link is a lightweight cord or steel wire measuring 2l, stretched to a tension T.

Denote by x, y the components of the slight displacement from the central straight line of the centre of a fly-wheel; and let p, q, 1 denote the direction cosines of the axis of a fly-wheel, and r, s, 1 the direction cosines of a link, distinguishing the different bodies by a suffix.

Denote by x, y the components of the small displacement from the central straight line of the center of a flywheel; and let p, q, 1 represent the direction cosines of the axis of a flywheel, and r, s, 1 the direction cosines of a link, indicating the different bodies with a suffix.

Then with the previous notation and to the order of approximation required,

Then, with the previous notation and to the level of approximation needed,

θ1 = −dq/dt, θ2 = dp/dt,

θ1 = -dq/dt, θ2 = dp/dt,

(1)

h1 = Aθ1, h2 = Aθ2, h3 = K,

h1 = Aθ1, h2 = Aθ2, h3 = K,

(2)

to be employed in the dynamical equations

to be used in the dynamic equations

dh1 − θ3h2 + θ2h3 = L, ...
dt
(3)

in which θ3h1 and θ3h2 can be omitted.

in which θ3h1 and θ3h2 can be dropped.

For the kth fly-wheel

For the kth flywheel

−Aqk + Kpk = Ta (qk − sk) + Ta (qk − sk+1),

−Aqk + Kpk = Ta (qk − sk) + Ta (qk − sk+1),

(4)

Apk + Kqk = −Ta (pk − rk) − Ta (pk − rk+1);

Apk + Kqk = −Ta (pk − rk) − Ta (pk − rk+1);

(5)

and for the motion of translation

and for the act of moving

Mxk = T (rk+1 − rk), Myk = T (sk+1 − sk);

Mxk = T (rk+1 − rk), Myk = T (sk+1 − sk);

(6)

while the geometrical relations are

while the geometric relations are

xk+1 − xk = a (pk+1 + pk) + 2lrk+1,

xk+1 − xk = a (pk+1 + pk) + 2lrk+1,

(7)

yk+1 − yk = a (qk+1 + qk) + 2lsk+1.

yk+1 − yk = a (qk+1 + qk) + 2lsk+1.

(8)

Putting

Putting

x + yi = w, p + qi = ω, r + si = σ,

x + yi = w, p + qi = ω, r + si = σ,

(9)

778

778

these three pairs of equations may be replaced by the three equations

these three pairs of equations can be replaced by the three equations

Ak − Kki + 2Taῶk − Ta (σk+1 + σk) = 0,

Aōk − Kōki + 2Taōk − Ta (σk+1 + σk) = 0,

(10)

Mk − T (σk+1 − σk) = 0,

Mk − T (σk+1 − σk) = 0,

(11)

ωk+1 − ωk − a(ῶk+1 + ῶk − 2lσk+1) = 0.

ωk+1 − ωk − a(ῶk+1 + ῶk − 2lσk+1) = 0.

(12)

For a vibration of circular polarization assume a solution

For a vibration with circular polarization, let's assume a solution

ωk, ῶk, σk = (L, P, Q) exp (nt + kc) i,

ωk, ῶk, σk = (L, P, Q) exp (nt + kc) i,

(13)

so that c/n is the time-lag between the vibration of one fly-wheel and the next; and the wave velocity is

so that c/n is the time delay between the vibration of one flywheel and the next; and the wave velocity is

U = 2 (a + l) n/c.

U = 2 (a + l) n/c.

(14)

Then

Then

P (−An2 + Kn + 2Ta) − QTa (eci + 1) = 0,

P (−An2 + Kn + 2Ta) − QTa (eci + 1) = 0,

(15)

−LMn2 − QT (eci − 1) = 0,

−LMn2 − QT (eci − 1) = 0,

(16)

L (eci − 1) − Pa (eci + 1) − 2Qleci = 0,

L (eci − 1) − Pa (eci + 1) − 2Qleci = 0,

(17)

leading, on elimination of L, P, Q, to

leading, by removing L, P, Q, to

cos c = (2 Ta + Kn − An2) (1 − Mn2l/T) − Mna2 ,
2Ta + Kn − An2 + Mna2
(18)
2 sin2 ½c = Mn2 2Ta (a + l) + KNl − An2l .
T 2Ta + Kn − An2 + Mn2a2
(19)

With K = 0, A = 0, this reduces to Lagrange’s condition in the vibration of a string of beads.

With K = 0, A = 0, this simplifies to Lagrange’s condition in the vibration of a string of beads.

Putting

Putting

ρ = M/2 (a + l),   the mass per unit length of the chain,

ρ = M/2 (a + l),   the mass per unit length of the chain,

(20)

κ = K/2 (a + l),   the gyrostatic angular momentum per unit length,

κ = K/2 (a + l),   the gyrostatic angular momentum per unit length,

(21)

α = A/2 (a + l),   the transverse moment of inertia per unit length,

α = A/2 (a + l),   the transverse moment of inertia per unit length,

(22)

1/2c = (a + l) n/U,

1/2c = (a + l) n/U,

(23)

equation (19) can be written

equation (19) can be expressed

{sin (a + l) n/U}2

{sin (a + l) n/U}2

= (a + l)2n2 ρ · Ta + κnl − αn2l ,
T Ta + κn (a + l) − αn2 (a + l) + ρn2a2 (a + l)
(24)
{ (a + l) n } 2
sin (a + l) n/U  
= T · T + (κn − αn2) (1 + l/a) + ρn2a (a + l) .
ρ T + (κn − an2) l/a
(25)

In a continuous chain of such gyrostatic links, with a and l infinitesimal,

In a continuous series of these gyrostatic links, with a and l being infinitesimal,

U2 = T I am ready to assist. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. 1 + κn − αn2 }
ρ T + (κn − αn2 l/a)
(26)

for the vibration of helical nature like circular polarization.

for the helical vibration similar to circular polarization.

Changing the sign of n for circular polarization in the opposite direction

Changing the sign of n for circular polarization in the reverse direction

U′2 = T Your input seems to be incomplete. Please provide the text you'd like modernized. 1 − κn + αn2 }
ρ T − (κn + αn2 l/a)
(27)

In this way a mechanical model is obtained of the action of a magnetized medium on polarized light, κ representing the equivalent of the magnetic field, while α may be ignored as insensible (J. Larmor, Proc. Lond. Math. Soc., 1890; Aether and Matter, Appendix E).

In this way, a mechanical model is created to show how a magnetized medium affects polarized light, with κ representing the equivalent of the magnetic field, while α can be disregarded as negligible (J. Larmor, Proc. Lond. Math. Soc., 1890; Aether and Matter, Appendix E).

We notice that U2 in (26) can be positive, and the gyrostatic chain stable, even when T is negative, and the chain is supporting a thrust, provided κn is large enough, and the thrust does not exceed

We see that U2 in (26) can be positive, allowing the gyrostatic chain to be stable, even when T is negative, and the chain is under thrust, as long as κn is sufficiently large and the thrust doesn’t exceed

(κn − an2) (1 + l/a);

(κn − an2) (1 + l/a);

(28)

while U′2 in (27) will not be positive and the straight chain will be unstable unless the tension exceeds

while U′2 in (27) will not be positive and the straight chain will be unstable unless the tension exceeds

(κn + αn2) (1 + l/a).

(κn + αn2) (1 + l/a).

(29)

15. Gyrostat suspended by a Thread.—In the discussion of the small vibration of a single gyrostat fly-wheel about the vertical position when suspended by a single thread of length 2l = b, the suffix k can be omitted in the preceding equations of § 14, and we can write

15. Gyrostat suspended by a Thread.—In the discussion of the small vibrations of a single gyrostat flywheel around the vertical position when it's hung by a single thread of length 2l = b, we can drop the suffix k in the previous equations of § 14, and we can write

A − Ki + Taῶ − Taσ = 0,

Aα − Kωi + Taα − Taσ = 0,

(1)

Mw + Tσ = 0, with T = gM,

Mw + Tσ = 0, with T = gM,

(2)

w − aῶ − bσ = 0.

w − aῶ − bσ = 0.

(3)

Assuming a periodic solution of these equations

Assuming a recurring solution to these equations

w, ῶ, σ, = (L, P, Q) exp nti,

w, ῶ, σ, = (L, P, Q) exp nti,

(4)

and eliminating L, P, Q, we obtain

and eliminating L, P, Q, we get

(−An2 + Kn + gMa) (g − n2b) − gMn2a2 = 0,

(−An2 + Kn + gMa) (g − n2b) − gMn2a2 = 0,

(5)

and the frequency of a vibration in double beats per second is n/2π, where n is a root of this quartic equation.

and the frequency of a vibration in double beats per second is n/2π, where n is a solution to this quartic equation.

For upright spinning on a smooth horizontal plane, take b = ∞ and change the sign of a, then

For upright spinning on a smooth horizontal surface, set b = ∞ and reverse the sign of a. Then

An2 − Kn + gMa = 0,

An2 − Kn + gMa = 0,

(6)

so that the stability requires

so that stability requires

K2 > 4gAMa.

K2 > 4gAMa.

(7)

Here A denotes the moment of inertia about a diametral axis through the centre of gravity; when the point of the fly-wheel is held in a small smooth cup, b = 0, and the condition becomes

Here A represents the moment of inertia around a diametral axis through the center of gravity; when the flywheel's point is held in a small smooth cup, b = 0, and the condition becomes.

(A + Ma2) n2 − Kn + gMa = 0,

(A + Ma2) n2 − Kn + gMa = 0,

(8)

requiring for stability, as before in § 3,

requiring for stability, just like before in § 3,

K2 > 4g (A + M2) Ma.

K2 > 4g (A + M2) Ma.

(9)

For upright spinning inside a spherical surface of radius b, the sign of a must be changed to obtain the condition at the lowest point, as in the gyroscopic horizon of Fleuriais.

For upright spinning inside a spherical surface with a radius of b, the sign of a must be changed to meet the condition at the lowest point, similar to the gyroscopic horizon of Fleuriais.

For a gyrostat spinning upright on the summit of a sphere of radius b, the signs of a and b must be changed in (5), or else the sign of g, which amounts to the same thing.

For a gyrostat spinning upright at the top of a sphere with a radius of b, the signs of a and b in (5) need to be switched, or alternatively, the sign of g, which is essentially the same thing.

Denoting the components of horizontal displacement of the point of the fly-wheel by ξ, η, then

Denoting the components of horizontal displacement of the point of the fly-wheel as ξ and η, then

br = ξ, bs = η, bσ = ξ + ηi = λ (suppose),

br = ξ, bs = η, bσ = ξ + ηi = λ (let's assume),

(10)

ω = αῶ + λ.

ω = αῶ + λ.

(11)

If the point is forced to take the motion (ξ, η, ζ) by components of force X, Y, Z, the equations of motion become

If the point is pushed to move in the (ξ, η, ζ) directions by the forces X, Y, Z, the equations of motion become

−Aq + Kp =    Ya − Zaq,

−Aq + Kp =    Ya − Zaq,

(12)

Ap + Kq =    −Xa + Zap,

Ap + Kq = −Xa + Zap,

(13)

M = X + Yi, M (ζ − g) = Z;

M = X + Yi, M (ζ − g) = Z;

(14)

so that

so that

A − Ki + gMaῶ + Maw = Maῶζ,

A − Ki + gMaῶ + Maw = Maῶζ,

(15)

or

or

(A + Ma2) − Ki + gMaῶ + Maλ = Maῶζ.

(A + Ma2)o − Koi + gMao + Maλ = Maoz.

(16)

Thus if the point of the gyrostat is made to take the periodic motion given by λ = R exp nti, ζ = 0, the forced vibration of the axis is given by ῶ = P exp nti, where

Thus if the point of the gyrostat is made to take the periodic motion given by λ = R exp nti, ζ = 0, the forced vibration of the axis is given by ῶ = P exp nti, where

P { −(A + Ma2) n2 + Kn + gMa} − RMn2a = 0;

P { −(A + Ma2) n2 + Kn + gMa} − RMn2a = 0;

(17)

and so the effect may be investigated on the Fleuriais gyroscopic horizon of the motion of the ship.

and so the effect can be examined on the Fleuriais gyroscopic horizon of the ship's movement.

Suppose the motion λ is due to the suspension of the gyrostat from a point on the axis of a second gyrostat suspended from a fixed point.

Suppose the motion λ is caused by hanging the gyrostat from a point on the axis of a second gyrostat that is suspended from a fixed point.

Distinguishing the second gyrostat by a suffix, then λ = bῶ1, if b denotes the distance between the points of suspension of the two gyrostats; and the motion of the second gyrostat influenced by the reaction of the first, is given by

Distinguishing the second gyrostat with a suffix, then λ = bῶ1, where b represents the distance between the suspension points of the two gyrostats; and the motion of the second gyrostat, affected by the reaction of the first, is specified by

(A1 + M1h12)1 − K11i

(A1 + M1h12)1 − K11i

= −g (M1h1 + Mb) ῶ1 − b (X + Yi)

= −g (M1h1 + Mb) ῶ1 − b (X + Yi)

= −g (M1h1 + Mb) ῶ1 − Mb(a + λ);

= −g (M1h1 + Mb) ῶ1 − Mb(a + λ);

(18)

so that, in the small vibration,

so that, in the slight vibration,

R { −(A1 + M1h12) n2 + K1n + g (M1h1 + Mb) Sure, please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. = Mn2b (aP + R),
b
(19)

R { −(A1 + M1h12 + Mb2) n2 + K1n + g (M1h1 + Mb)} − PMn2ab2 = 0.

R { −(A1 + M1h12 + Mb2) n2 + KBelown + g (M1h1 + Mb)} − PMn2ab2 = 0.

(20)

Eliminating the ratio of P to R, we obtain

Eliminating the ratio of P to R, we obtain

{ −(A + Ma2) n2 + Kn + gMa}

{ −(A + Ma2) n2 + Kn + gMa}

× { −(A1 + M1h12 + Mb2) n2 + K1n + g (M1h1 + Mb)} − M2n4a2b2 = 0,

× { −(A1 + M1h12 + Mb2) n2 + K1n + g (M1h1 + Mb)} − M2n4a2b2 = 0,

(21)

a quartic for n, giving the frequency n/2π of a fundamental vibration.

a quartic for n, giving the frequency n/2π of a fundamental vibration.

Change the sign of g for the case of the gyrostats spinning upright, one on the top of the other, and so realize the gyrostat on the top of a gyrostat described by Maxwell.

Change the sign of g for the scenario where the gyrostats are spinning upright, one on top of the other, and thus achieve the gyrostat on top of the gyrostat described by Maxwell.

In the gyrostatic chain of § 14, the tension T may change to a limited pressure, and U2 may still be positive, and the motion stable; and so a motion is realized of a number of spinning tops, superposed in a column.

In the gyrostatic chain of § 14, the tension T can change to a limited pressure, and U2 can still be positive, keeping the motion stable. This results in the motion of several spinning tops stacked in a column.

16. The Flexure Joint.—In Lord Kelvin’s experiment the gyrostats are joined up by equal light rods and short lengths of elastic wire with rigid attachment to the rod and case of a gyrostat, so as to keep the system still, and free from entanglement and twisting due to pivot friction of the fly-wheels.

16. The Flexure Joint.—In Lord Kelvin’s experiment, the gyrostats are connected by equal light rods and short sections of elastic wire that are firmly attached to both the rod and the case of a gyrostat. This setup keeps the system stable and prevents any tangling or twisting caused by the pivot friction of the flywheels.

When this gyrostatic chain is made to revolve with angular velocity n in relative equilibrium as a plane polygon passing through Oz the axis of rotation, each gyrostatic case moves as if its axis produced was attached to Oz by a flexure joint. The instantaneous axis of resultant angular velocity bisects the angle π − θ, if the axis of the case makes an angle θ with Oz, and, the components of angular velocity being n about Oz, and −n about the axis, the resultant angular velocity is 2n cos½ (π − θ) =2n sin½θ; and the components of this angular velocity are

When this gyrostatic chain spins at an angular velocity of n in a state of relative equilibrium as a plane polygon passing through Oz, the rotation axis, each gyrostatic unit acts as if its axis were connected to Oz by a flexible joint. The instantaneous axis of the resulting angular velocity bisects the angle π − θ, where the axis of the unit forms an angle θ with Oz. With the components of angular velocity being n around Oz and -n around the axis, the overall angular velocity is 2n cos½ (π − θ) = 2n sin½θ; and the components of this angular velocity are

(1) −2n sin ½θ sin ½θ = −n (1 − cos θ), along the axis, and

(1) −2n sin ½θ sin ½θ = −n (1 − cos θ), along the axis, and

(2) −2n sin ½θ cos ½θ = −n sin θ, perpendicular to the axis of the case. The flexure joint behaves like a pair of equal bevel wheels engaging.

(2) −2n sin ½θ cos ½θ = −n sin θ, which is perpendicular to the axis of the case. The flexure joint acts like a pair of equal bevel gears engaging.

The component angular momentum in the direction Ox is therefore

The component of angular momentum in the Ox direction is therefore

L = −An sin θ cos θ − Cn (1 − cos θ) sin θ + K sin θ,

L = -An sin θ cos θ - Cn (1 - cos θ) sin θ + K sin θ,

(3)

and Ln is therefore the couple acting on the gyrostat.

and Ln is therefore the couple acting on the gyrostat.

If α denotes the angle which a connecting link makes with Oz, and T denotes the constant component of the tension of a link parallel to Oz, the couple acting is

If α represents the angle that a connecting link forms with Oz, and T indicates the constant component of the tension in a link that is parallel to Oz, then the couple acting is

Ta cos θk (tan αk+1 + tan αk) − 2Tα sin θk,

Ta cos θk (tan αk+1 + tan αk) − 2Tα sin θk,

(4)

which is to be equated to Ln, so that

which is to be equated to Ln, so that

−An2 sin θk cos θk − Cn (1 − cos θk) sin θk + Kn sin θk
−Ta cos θk (tan αk+1 + tan αk) + 2Tα sin θk = 0.

−An2 sin θk cos θk − Cn (1 − cos θk) sin θk + Kn sin θk
−Ta cos θk (tan αk+1 + tan αk) + 2Tα sin θk = 0.

(5)

In addition

Additionally

Mn2xk + T (tan αk+1 − tan αk) = 0,

Mn2xk + T (tan αk+1 − tan αk) = 0,

(6)

with the geometrical relation

with the geometric relation

xk+1 − xk − a (sin θk+1 + sin θk) − 2l sin αk+1 = 0.

xk+1 − xk − a (sin θk+1 + sin θk) − 2l sin αk+1 = 0.

(7)

When the polygon is nearly coincident with Oz, these equations can be replaced by

When the polygon is almost overlapping with Oz, these equations can be replaced by

779

779

(−An2 + Kn + 2Ta) θk − Ta (αk+1 + αk) = 0,

(−An2 + Kn + 2Ta) θk − Ta (αk+1 + αk) = 0,

(8)

Mn2xk + T (αk+1 − αk) = 0,

Mn2xk + T (αk+1 − αk) = 0,

(9)

xk+1 − xk − a (θk+1 + θk) − 2lak = 0,

xk+1 − xk − a (θk+1 + θk) − 2lak = 0,

(10)

and the rest of the solution proceeds as before in § 14, putting

and the rest of the solution goes as before in § 14, putting

xk, θk, αk = (L, P, Q) exp cki.

xk, θk, αk = (L, P, Q) exp cki.

(11)

A half wave length of the curve of gyrostats is covered when ck = π, so that π/c is the number of gyrostats in a half wave, which is therefore of wave length 2π (a + l)/c.

A half wavelength of the gyrostats curve is covered when ck = π, making π/c the number of gyrostats in a half wave, which is therefore of wavelength 2π (a + l)/c.

A plane polarized wave is given when exp cki is replaced by exp (nt + ck) i, and a wave circularly polarized when w, ῶ, σ of § 14 replace this x, θ, α.

A plane polarized wave is represented when exp cki is replaced by exp (nt + ck) i, and a wave that is circularly polarized when w, ῶ, σ of § 14 replace this x, θ, α.

Gyroscopic Pendulum.—The elastic flexure joint is useful for supporting a rod, carrying a fly-wheel, like a gyroscopic pendulum.

Gyroscopic Pendulum.—The flexible elastic joint is helpful for supporting a rod that holds a flywheel, similar to a gyroscopic pendulum.

Expressed by Euler’s angles, θ, φ, ψ, the kinetic energy is

Expressed in terms of Euler’s angles, θ, φ, ψ, the kinetic energy is

T = ½A (θ2 + sin2 θψ2) + ½C′ (1 − cos θ)2ψ2 + ½C (φ + ψ cos θ)2,

T = ½A (θ² + sin² θψ²) + ½C′ (1 − cos θ)²ψ² + ½C (φ + ψ cos θ)²,

(12)

where A refers to rod and gyroscope about the transverse axis at the point of support, C′ refers to rod about its axis of length, and C refers to the revolving fly-wheel.

where A refers to the rod and gyroscope around the transverse axis at the support point, C′ refers to the rod around its length axis, and C refers to the revolving flywheel.

The elimination of ψ between the equation of conservation of angular momentum about the vertical, viz.

The removal of ψ from the equation of conservation of angular momentum regarding the vertical, i.e.,

(13) A sin2 θψ − C′ (1 − cos θ) cos θψ + C(φ + ψ cos θ) cos θ = G, a constant, and the equation of energy, viz.

(13) A sin2 θψ − C′ (1 − cos θ) cos θψ + C(φ + ψ cos θ) cos θ = G, a constant, and the equation of energy, namely:

(14) T − gMh cos θ = H, a constant, with θ measured from the downward vertical, and

(14) T − gMh cos θ = H, a constant, with θ measured from the downward vertical, and

(15) φ + ψ cos θ = R, a constant, will lead to an equation for dθ/dt, or dz/dt, in terms of cos θ or z, the integral of which is of hyperelliptic character, except when A = C′.

(15) φ + ψ cos θ = R, a constant, will create an equation for dθ/dt, or dz/dt, expressed in terms of cos θ or z, the integral of which is of hyperelliptic nature, unless A = C′.

In the suspension of fig. 8, the motion given by φ is suppressed in the stalk, and for the fly-wheel φ gives the rubbing angular velocity of the wheel on the stalk; the equations are now

In the suspension of fig. 8, the motion caused by φ is limited in the stalk, and for the fly-wheel, φ represents the rubbing angular velocity of the wheel on the stalk; the equations are now

T = ½A (θ2 + sin2 θψ2) + ½C′ cos2 θψ2 + ½CR2 = H + gMh cos θ,

T = ½A (θ² + sin² θψ²) + ½C′ cos² θψ² + ½CR² = H + gMh cos θ,

(16)

A sin2 θψ + C′ cos2 θψ + CR cos θ = G,

A sin2 θψ + C′ cos2 θψ + CR cos θ = G,

(17)

and the motion is again of hyperelliptic character, except when A = C′, or C′ = 0. To realize a motion given completely by the elliptic function, the suspension of the stalk must be made by a smooth ball and socket, or else a Hooke universal joint.

and the motion is once again hyperelliptic, except when A = C′, or C′ = 0. To achieve a motion fully described by the elliptic function, the suspension of the stalk must be done with a smooth ball and socket, or alternatively, a Hooke universal joint.

Finally, there is the case of the general motion of a top with a spherical rounded point on a smooth plane, in which the centre of gravity may be supposed to rise and fall in a vertical line. Here

Finally, there’s the situation with the overall motion of a top that has a rounded spherical point on a smooth surface, where the center of gravity can be thought of as moving up and down in a vertical line. Here

T = ½ (A + Mh2 sin2 θ) θ2 + ½A sin2 θψ2 + ½CR2 = H − gMh cos θ,

T = ½ (A + Mh² sin² θ) θ² + ½A sin² θ ψ² + ½CR² = H − gMh cos θ,

(18)

with θ measured from the upward vertical, and

with θ measured from the upward vertical, and

A sin2 θψ + CR cos θ = G,

A sin2 θψ + CR cos θ = G,

(19)

where A now refers to a transverse axis through the centre of gravity. The elimination of ψ leads to an equation for z, = cos θ, of the form

where A now refers to a cross-axis through the center of gravity. The removal of ψ results in an equation for z, = cos θ, in the form

Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. dz ) 2 = 2 g   Z = 2 g   (z1 − z) (z2 − z) (z3 − z) ,
dt   h 1 − z2 + A/Mh2 h (z4 − z) (z − z5)
(20)

with the arrangement

with the setup

z1, z4 > / > z2 > z > z3 > − / > z5;

z1, z4 > / > z2 > z > z3 > − / > z5;

(21)

so that the motion is hyperelliptic.

so that the motion is hyperelliptic.

Authorities.—In addition to the references in the text the following will be found useful:—Ast. Notices, vol. i.; Comptes rendus, Sept. 1852; Paper by Professor Magnus translated in Taylor’s Foreign Scientific Memoirs, n.s., pt. 3, p. 210; Ast. Notices, xiii. 221-248; Theory of Foucault’s Gyroscope Experiments, by the Rev. Baden Powell, F.R.S.; Ast. Notices, vol. xv.; articles by Major J. G. Barnard in Silliman’s Journal, 2nd ser., vols. xxiv. and xxv.; E. Hunt on “Rotatory Motion,” Proc. Phil. Soc. Glasgow, vol. iv.; J. Clerk Maxwell, “On a Dynamical Top,” Trans. R.S.E. vol. xxi.; Phil. Mag. 4th ser. vols. 7, 13, 14; Proc. Royal Irish Academy, vol. viii.; Sir William Thomson on “Gyrostat,” Nature, xv. 297; G. T. Walker, “The Motion of a Celt,” Quar. Jour. Math., 1896; G. T. Walker, Math. Ency. iv. 1, xi. 1; Gallop, Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc. xii. 82, pt. 2, 1903, “Rise of a Top”; Price’s Infinitesimal Calculus, vol. iv.; Worms, The Earth and its Mechanism; Routh, Rigid Dynamics; A. G. Webster, Dynamics (1904); H. Crabtree, Spinning Tops and Gyroscopic Motion (1909). For a complete list of the mathematical works on the subject of the Gyroscope and Gyrostat from the outset, Professor Cayley’s Report to the British Association (1862) on the Progress of Dynamics should be consulted. Modern authors will be found cited in Klein and Sommerfeld, Theorie des Kreisels (1897), and in the Encyclopädie der mathematischen Wissenschaften.

Authorities.—Along with the references in the text, the following may be helpful:—Ast. Notices, vol. i.; Comptes rendus, Sept. 1852; a paper by Professor Magnus translated in Taylor’s Foreign Scientific Memoirs, n.s., pt. 3, p. 210; Ast. Notices, xiii. 221-248; Theory of Foucault’s Gyroscope Experiments, by Rev. Baden Powell, F.R.S.; Ast. Notices, vol. xv.; articles by Major J. G. Barnard in Silliman’s Journal, 2nd ser., vols. xxiv. and xxv.; E. Hunt on “Rotatory Motion,” Proc. Phil. Soc. Glasgow, vol. iv.; J. Clerk Maxwell, “On a Dynamical Top,” Trans. R.S.E. vol. xxi.; Phil. Mag. 4th ser. vols. 7, 13, 14; Proc. Royal Irish Academy, vol. viii.; Sir William Thomson on “Gyrostat,” Nature, xv. 297; G. T. Walker, “The Motion of a Celt,” Quar. Jour. Math., 1896; G. T. Walker, Math. Ency. iv. 1, xi. 1; Gallop, Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc. xii. 82, pt. 2, 1903, “Rise of a Top”; Price’s Infinitesimal Calculus, vol. iv.; Worms, The Earth and its Mechanism; Routh, Rigid Dynamics; A. G. Webster, Dynamics (1904); H. Crabtree, Spinning Tops and Gyroscopic Motion (1909). For a complete list of mathematical works on the topic of the Gyroscope and Gyrostat from the beginning, check Professor Cayley’s Report to the British Association (1862) on the Progress of Dynamics. Modern authors can be found cited in Klein and Sommerfeld, Theorie des Kreisels (1897), and in the Encyclopädie der mathematischen Wissenschaften.

(G. G.)

GYTHIUM, the harbour and arsenal of Sparta, from which it was some 30 m. distant. The town lay at the N.W. extremity of the Laconian Gulf, in a small but fertile plain at the mouth of the Gythius. Its reputed founders were Heracles and Apollo, who frequently appear on its coins: the former of these names may point to the influence of Phoenician traders, who, we know, visited the Laconian shores at a very early period. In classical times it was a community of perioeci, politically dependent on Sparta, though doubtless with a municipal life of its own. In 455 B.C., during the first Peloponnesian War, it was burned by the Athenian admiral Tolmides. In 370 B.C. Epaminondas besieged it unsuccessfully for three days. Its fortifications were strengthened by the tyrant Nabis, but in 195 B.C. it was invested and taken by Titus and Lucius Quintius Flamininus, and, though recovered by Nabis two or three years later, was recaptured immediately after his murder (192 B.C.) by Philopoemen and Aulus Atilius and remained in the Achaean League until its dissolution in 146 B.C. Subsequently it formed the most important of the Eleutherolaconian towns, a group of twenty-four, later eighteen, communities leagued together to maintain their autonomy against Sparta and declared free by Augustus. The highest officer of the confederacy was the general (στρατηγός), who was assisted by a treasurer (ταμίας), while the chief magistrates of the several communities bore the title of ephors (ἔφοροι).

GYTHIUM, was the harbor and arsenal of Sparta, located about 30 miles away. The town was at the northwest edge of the Laconian Gulf, in a small but fertile plain at the mouth of the Gythius. It was believed to be founded by Heracles and Apollo, who often appeared on its coins. The name Heracles might indicate the influence of Phoenician traders who visited the Laconian shores quite early on. During classical times, it was a community of perioeci, politically dependent on Sparta, though it likely had its own municipal life. In 455 BCE, during the first Peloponnesian War, the Athenian admiral Tolmides burned it down. In 370 B.C.E., Epaminondas unsuccessfully besieged it for three days. The tyrant Nabis strengthened its fortifications, but in 195 BCE it was captured by Titus and Lucius Quintius Flamininus. Although Nabis regained control two or three years later, it was recaptured immediately after his assassination (192 BCE) by Philopoemen and Aulus Atilius and remained part of the Achaean League until its dissolution in 146 BCE Later, it became the most significant of the Eleutherolaconian towns, a group of twenty-four, and eventually eighteen, communities united to maintain their independence from Sparta and were declared free by Augustus. The highest official of the confederacy was the general (general), assisted by a treasurer (cashier), while the chief magistrates of the various communities were called ephors (overseers).

Pausanias (iii. 21 f.) has left us a description of the town as it existed in the reign of Marcus Aurelius, the agora, the Acropolis, the island of Cranae (Marathonisi) where Paris celebrated his nuptials with Helen, the Migonium or precinct of Aphrodite Migonitis (occupied by the modern town of Marathonisi or Gythium), and the hill Larysium (Koumaro) rising above it. The numerous remains extant, of which the theatre and the buildings partially submerged by the sea are the most noteworthy, all belong to the Roman period.

Pausanias (iii. 21 f.) has given us a description of the town as it was during the reign of Marcus Aurelius, including the agora, the Acropolis, the island of Cranae (Marathonisi) where Paris celebrated his wedding with Helen, the Migonium or precinct of Aphrodite Migonitis (now part of the modern towns of Marathonisi or Gythium), and the hill Larysium (Koumaro) rising above it. The many remains still visible, especially the theater and the buildings partially underwater, all date back to the Roman period.

The modern town is a busy and flourishing port with a good harbour protected by Cranae, now connected by a mole with the mainland: it is the capital of the prefecture (νομός) of Λακωνική with a population in 1907 of 61,522.

The modern town is a busy and thriving port with a good harbor protected by Cranae, now connected by a mole to the mainland: it is the capital of the prefecture (region) of Brief with a population in 1907 of 61,522.

See G. Weber, De Gytheo et Lacedaemoniorum rebus navalibus (Heidelberg, 1833); W. M. Leake, Travels in the Morea, i. 244 foll.; E. Curtius, Peloponnesos, ii. 267 foll. Inscriptions: Le Bas-Foucart, Voyage archéologique, ii. Nos. 238-248 f.; Collitz-Bechtel, Sammlung d. griech. Dialekt-Inschriften, iii. Nos. 4562-4573; British School Annual, x. 179 foll. Excavations: Ἀ. Σκιᾶς, Πρακτικὰ τῆς Ἀρχ. Ἑταιρείας, 1891, 69 foll.

See G. Weber, De Gytheo et Lacedaemoniorum rebus navalibus (Heidelberg, 1833); W. M. Leake, Travels in the Morea, i. 244 foll.; E. Curtius, Peloponnesos, ii. 267 foll. Inscriptions: Le Bas-Foucart, Voyage archéologique, ii. Nos. 238-248 f.; Collitz-Bechtel, Sammlung d. griech. Dialekt-Inschriften, iii. Nos. 4562-4573; British School Annual, x. 179 foll. Excavations: A. Skias, Practical of the Arch. Company, 1891, 69 foll.

(M. N. T.)

GYULA-FEHÉRVÁR (Ger. Karlsburg), a town of Hungary, in Transylvania, in the county of Alsó-Feliér, 73 m. S. of Kolozsvár by rail. Pop. (1900) 11,507. It is situated on the right bank of the Maros, on the outskirts of the Transylvanian Erzgebirge or Ore Mountains, and consists of the upper town, or citadel, and the lower town. Gyula-Fehérvár is the seat of a Roman Catholic bishop, and has a fine Roman Catholic cathedral, built in the 11th century in Romanesque style, and rebuilt in 1443 by John Hunyady in Gothic style. It contains among other tombs that of John Hunyady. Near the cathedral is the episcopal palace, and in the same part of the town is the Batthyaneum, founded by Bishop Count Batthyány in 1794. It contains a valuable library with many incunabula and old manuscripts, amongst which is one of the Nibelungenlied, an astronomical observatory, a collection of antiquities, and a mineral collection. Gyula-Fehérvár carries on an active trade in cereals, wine and cattle.

GYULA-FEHÉRVÁR (Ger. Karlsburg), a town in Hungary, located in Transylvania, in the county of Alsó-Feliér, 73 km south of Kolozsvár by rail. Population (1900) was 11,507. It's on the right bank of the Maros River, at the edge of the Transylvanian Erzgebirge or Ore Mountains, and consists of the upper town, or citadel, and the lower town. Gyula-Fehérvár is home to a Roman Catholic bishop and features a beautiful Roman Catholic cathedral, built in the 11th century in Romanesque style and rebuilt in 1443 by John Hunyady in Gothic style. It houses several tombs, including that of John Hunyady. Next to the cathedral is the episcopal palace, and in the same area of the town is the Batthyaneum, founded by Bishop Count Batthyány in 1794. It contains a valuable library with many incunabula and old manuscripts, including one of the Nibelungenlied, an astronomical observatory, a collection of antiquities, and a mineral collection. Gyula-Fehérvár has an active trade in cereals, wine, and cattle.

Gyula-Fehérvár occupies the site of the Roman colony Apulum. Many Roman relics found here, and in the vicinity, are preserved in the museum of the town. The bishopric was founded in the 11th century by King Ladislaus I. (1078-1095). In the 16th century, when Transylvania separated from Hungary, the town became the residence of the Transylvanian princes. From this period dates the castle, and also the buildings of the university, founded by Gabriel Bethlen, and now used as barracks. After the reversion of Transylvania in 1713 to the Habsburg monarchy the actual strong fortress was built in 1716-1735 by the emperor Charles VI., whence the German name of the town.

Gyula-Fehérvár is located where the Roman colony Apulum once stood. Many Roman artifacts found here and in the nearby area are housed in the town's museum. The bishopric was established in the 11th century by King Ladislaus I. (1078-1095). In the 16th century, when Transylvania broke away from Hungary, the town became the residence of the Transylvanian princes. This is when the castle was built, along with the university buildings founded by Gabriel Bethlen, which are now used as barracks. After Transylvania was returned to the Habsburg monarchy in 1713, the strong fortress we see today was constructed from 1716 to 1735 by Emperor Charles VI., which is why the town has a German name.

780

780


H The eighth symbol in the Phoenician alphabet, as in its descendants, has altered less in the course of ages than most alphabetic symbols. From the beginning of Phoenician records it has consisted of two uprights connected by transverse bars, at first either two or three in number. The uprights are rarely perpendicular and the cross bars are not so precisely arranged as they are in early Greek and Latin inscriptions. In these the symbol takes the form of two rectangles out of which the ordinary develops by the omission of the cross bars at top and bottom. It is very exceptional for this letter to have more than three cross bars, though as many as five are occasionally found in N.W. Greece. Within the same inscription the appearance of the letter often varies considerably as regards the space between and the length of the uprights. When only one bar is found it regularly crosses the uprights about the middle. In a few cases the rectangle is closed at top and bottom but has no middle cross bar . The Phoenician name for the letter was Heth (Hēt). According to Semitic scholars it had two values, (1) a glottal spirant, a very strong h, (2) an unvoiced velar spirant like the German ch in ach. The Greeks borrowed it with the value of the ordinary aspirate and with the name ἧτα. Very early in their history, however, most of the Greeks of Asia Minor lost the aspirate altogether, and having then no further use for the symbol with this value they adopted it to represent the long e-sound, which was not originally distinguished by a different symbol from the short sound (see ). With this value its name has always been ἧτα in Greek. The alphabet of the Asiatic Greeks was gradually adopted elsewhere. In official documents at Athens H represented the rough breathing or aspirate ‘ till 403 B.C.; henceforth it was used for η. The Western Greeks, however, from whom the Romans obtained their alphabet, retained their aspirate longer than those of Asia Minor, and hence the symbol came to the Romans with the value not of a long vowel but of the aspirate, which it still preserves. The Greek aspirate was itself the first or left-hand half of this letter , while the smooth breathing ’ was the right-hand portion . At Tarentum is found for in inscriptions. The Roman aspirate was, however, a very slight sound which in some words where it was etymologically correct disappeared at an early date. Thus the cognate words of kindred languages show that the Lat. anser “goose” ought to begin with h, but nowhere is it so found. In none of the Romance languages is there any trace of initial or medial h, which shows that vulgar Latin had ceased to have the aspirate by 240 B.C. The Roman grammarians were guided to its presence by the Sabine forms where f occurred; as the Sabines said fasena (sand), it was recognised that the Roman form ought to be harena, and so for haedus (goat), hordeum (barley), &c. Between vowels h was lost very early, for ne-hemo (no man) is throughout the literature nēmo, bi-himus (two winters old) bīmus. In the Ciceronian age greater attention was paid to reproducing the Greek aspirates in borrowed words, and this led to absurd mistakes in Latin words, mistakes which were satirized by Catullus in his epigram (84) upon Arrius, who said chommoda for commoda and hinsidias for insidias. In Umbrian h was often lost, and also used without etymological value to mark length, as in comohota (= Lat. commota), a practice to which there are some doubtful parallels in Latin.

H The eighth letter in the Phoenician alphabet, like its successors, has changed less over the centuries than most alphabetic characters. Since the beginning of Phoenician records, it has featured two vertical lines connected by horizontal bars, originally either two or three in number. The vertical lines are rarely straight up and down, and the crossbars aren't arranged as neatly as they are in early Greek and Latin inscriptions. In these inscriptions, the symbol appears as two rectangles from which the typical is formed by removing the top and bottom crossbars. It's quite rare for this letter to have more than three crossbars, although up to five can sometimes be found in Northwest Greece. Within a single inscription, the appearance of the letter often varies significantly in terms of the spacing and length of the vertical lines. When there is only one bar, it usually crosses the verticals around the middle. In some cases, the rectangle is closed at the top and bottom but doesn’t have a middle crossbar . The Phoenician name for the letter was Heth (Hēt). According to Semitic scholars, it had two pronunciations: (1) a glottal spirant, a strong h, and (2) an unvoiced velar spirant like the German ch in ach. The Greeks borrowed it with the value of the ordinary aspirate and called it ἧτα. Early on in their history, however, many of the Greeks in Asia Minor completely lost the aspirate, and since they had no further use for the symbol as an aspirate, they repurposed it to represent the long e-sound, which was originally not indicated by a distinct symbol from the short sound (see ). With this new value, its name has always been ηττημένος in Greek. The alphabet of the Asiatic Greeks was gradually adopted in other regions. In official documents in Athens, H represented the rough breathing or aspirate ‘ until 403 BCE; afterward, it was used for η. The Western Greeks, from whom the Romans got their alphabet, kept their aspirate longer than their Asian counterparts, so the symbol came to the Romans not as a long vowel but as an aspirate, which it still retains. The Greek aspirate was originally the first or left half of this letter , while the smooth breathing ’ was the right half . In Tarentum, appears for in inscriptions. However, the Roman aspirate was a very slight sound, which in some words where it was etymologically correct disappeared early on. Thus, similar words in closely related languages show that the Latin anser "goose" should begin with h, but it never does. None of the Romance languages show any trace of initial or medial h, indicating that vulgar Latin had stopped using the aspirate by 240 BCE The Roman grammarians identified its presence by the Sabine forms where f appeared; since the Sabines said fasena (sand), it was recognized that the Roman form should be harena, and similarly for haedus (goat), hordeum (barley), etc. Between vowels, h was lost very early, as in ne-hemo (no man) appearing throughout literature as nēmo, bi-himus (two winters old) as bīmus. During the Ciceronian era, more attention was paid to reproducing Greek aspirates in borrowed words, leading to absurd mistakes in Latin words, which Catullus satirized in his epigram (84) about Arrius, who said chommoda for commoda and hinsidias for insidias. In Umbrian, h was often dropped and also used without etymological significance to indicate length, as in comohota (= Lat. commota), a practice with some dubious parallels in Latin.

In English the history of h is very similar to that in Latin. While the parts above the glottis are in position to produce a vowel, an aspirate is produced without vibration of the vocal chords, sometimes, like the pronunciation of Arrius, with considerable effort as a reaction against the tendency to “drop the h’s.” Though h survives in Scotland, Ireland and America as well as in the speech of cultivated persons, the sound in most of the vulgar dialects is entirely lost. Where it is not ordinarily lost, it disappears in unaccented syllables, as “Give it ’im” and the like. Where it is lost, conscious attempts to restore it on the part of uneducated speakers lead to absurd misplacements of h and to its restoration in Romance words when it never was pronounced, as humble (now recognized as standard English), humour and even honour.

In English, the history of h is quite similar to that in Latin. When the parts above the vocal cords are ready to produce a vowel, an aspirate sound is made without the vocal cords vibrating, sometimes requiring significant effort, like how Arrius pronounced it, as a reaction to the tendency to “drop the h’s.” While h is still used in Scotland, Ireland, and America, as well as by more educated speakers, the sound is completely lost in most common dialects. Where it isn’t typically lost, it vanishes in unstressed syllables, such as in “Give it ’im” and similar phrases. In cases where it is lost, uneducated speakers’ attempts to restore it often result in odd misplacements of h and its restoration in Romance words where it was never pronounced, such as humble (now recognized as standard English), humour, and even honour.

(P. Gi.)

HAAG, CARL (1820-  ), a naturalized British painter, court painter to the duke of Saxe-Coburg and Gotha, was born in Bavaria, and was trained in the academies at Nuremburg and Munich. He practised first as an illustrator and as a painter, in oil, of portraits and architectural subjects; but after he settled in England, in 1847, he devoted himself to water colours, and was elected associate of the Royal Society of Painters in Water Colours in 1850 and member in 1853. He travelled much, especially in the East, and made a considerable reputation by his firmly drawn and carefully elaborated paintings of Eastern subjects. Towards the end of his professional career Carl Haag quitted England and returned to Germany.

HAAG, CARL (1820-  ), a naturalized British painter, court painter to the duke of Saxe-Coburg and Gotha, was born in Bavaria and trained at the academies in Nuremberg and Munich. He initially worked as an illustrator and a painter of portraits and architectural subjects in oil; however, after moving to England in 1847, he focused on watercolors and became an associate of the Royal Society of Painters in Water Colours in 1850, and a full member in 1853. He traveled extensively, especially in the East, and gained significant recognition for his well-drafted and intricately detailed paintings of Eastern themes. Toward the end of his career, Carl Haag left England and returned to Germany.

See A History of the “Old Water-Colour” Society, now the Royal Society of Painters in Water Colours, by John Lewis Roget (2 vols., London, 1891).

See A History of the “Old Water-Colour” Society, now the Royal Society of Painters in Water Colours, by John Lewis Roget (2 vols., London, 1891).


HAAKON (Old Norse Hákon), the name of several kings of Norway, of whom the most important are the following:—

HAAKON (Old Norse Hákon), the name of several kings of Norway, of whom the most important are the following:—

Haakon I., surnamed “the Good” (d. 961), was the youngest son of Harald Haarfager. He was fostered by King Aethelstan of England, who brought him up in the Christian religion, and on the news of his father’s death in 933 provided him with ships and men for an expedition against his half-brother Erik, who had been proclaimed king. On his arrival in Norway Haakon gained the support of the landowners by promising to give up the rights of taxation claimed by his father over inherited real property. Erik fled, and was killed a few years later in England. His sons allied themselves with the Danes, but were invariably defeated by Haakon, who was successful in everything he undertook except in his attempt to introduce Christianity, which aroused an opposition he did not feel strong enough to face. He was killed at the battle of Fitje in 961, after a final victory over Erik’s sons. So entirely did even his immediate circle ignore his religion that a court skald composed a poem on his death representing his welcome by the heathen gods into Valhalla.

Haakon I., known as “the Good” (d. 961), was the youngest son of Harald Haarfager. He was raised by King Aethelstan of England, who educated him in the Christian faith. When Haakon learned of his father's death in 933, Aethelstan provided him with ships and men to challenge his half-brother Erik, who had been declared king. Upon reaching Norway, Haakon won the support of the landowners by promising to relinquish his father's claims to tax inherited property. Erik fled and was later killed in England. His sons teamed up with the Danes but were consistently defeated by Haakon, who succeeded in every endeavor except for his efforts to promote Christianity, which faced resistance he felt was too strong to overcome. He was killed at the battle of Fitje in 961, after achieving a final victory over Erik's sons. His closest associates were so dismissive of his faith that a court skald wrote a poem about his death, depicting his reception by the pagan gods in Valhalla.

Haakon IV., surnamed “the Old” (1204-1263), was declared to be the son of Haakon III., who died shortly before the former’s birth in 1204. A year later the child was placed under the protection of King Inge, after whose death in 1217 he was chosen king; though until 1223 the church refused to recognize him, on the ground of illegitimacy, and the Pope’s dispensation for his coronation was not gained until much later. In the earlier part of his reign much of the royal power was in the hands of Earl Skule, who intrigued against the king until 1239, when he proceeded to open hostility and was put to death. From this time onward Haakon’s reign was marked by more peace and prosperity than Norway had known for many years, until in 1263 a dispute with the Scottish king concerning the Hebrides, a Norwegian possession, induced Haakon to undertake an expedition to the west of Scotland. A division of his army seems to have repulsed a large Scottish force at Largs (though the later Scottish accounts claim this battle as a victory), and, having won back the Norwegian possessions in Scotland, Haakon was wintering in the Orkneys, when he was taken ill and died on the 15th of December 1263. A great part of his fleet had been scattered and destroyed by storms. The most important event in his reign was the voluntary submission of the Icelandic commonwealth. Worn out by internal strife fostered by Haakon’s emissaries, the Icelandic chiefs acknowledged the Norwegian king as overlord in 1262. Their example was followed by the colony of Greenland.

Haakon IV, nicknamed “the Old” (1204-1263), was recognized as the son of Haakon III., who passed away shortly before his birth in 1204. A year later, the child came under King Inge's protection, and after Inge's death in 1217, he was chosen as king. However, the church refused to acknowledge him until 1223, citing illegitimacy, and the Pope's approval for his coronation took much longer to obtain. During the early part of his reign, much of the royal power was held by Earl Skule, who plotted against the king until 1239, when he openly revolted and was executed. After that, Haakon’s reign saw more peace and prosperity than Norway had experienced in many years, until in 1263, a conflict with the Scottish king over the Hebrides, a Norwegian territory, led Haakon to launch an expedition to the west of Scotland. A portion of his army reportedly fended off a large Scottish force at Largs (although later Scottish accounts claim this battle as a victory), and after regaining Norwegian territories in Scotland, Haakon was spending the winter in the Orkneys when he fell ill and died on December 15, 1263. A significant part of his fleet had been scattered and destroyed by storms. The most notable event of his reign was the voluntary submission of the Icelandic commonwealth. Exhausted by internal conflicts encouraged by Haakon’s agents, the Icelandic chiefs recognized the Norwegian king as their overlord in 1262. Their decision was mirrored by the colony of Greenland.

Haakon VII. (1872-  ), the second son of Frederick VIII., king of Denmark, was born on the 3rd of August 1872, and was usually known as Prince Charles of Denmark. When in 1905 Norway decided to separate herself from Sweden the Norwegians 781 offered their crown to Charles, who accepted it and took the name of Haakon VII., being crowned at Trondhjem in June 1906. The king married Maud, youngest daughter of Edward VII., king of Great Britain, their son, Prince Olav, being born in 1903.

Haakon VII. (1872-  ), the second son of Frederick VIII., king of Denmark, was born on August 3, 1872, and was commonly known as Prince Charles of Denmark. When Norway decided to separate from Sweden in 1905, the Norwegians offered their crown to Charles, who accepted it and took the name Haakon VII., being crowned in Trondhjem in June 1906. The king married Maud, the youngest daughter of Edward VII., king of Great Britain, and their son, Prince Olav, was born in 1903.


HAARLEM, a town of Holland in the province of North Holland, on the Spaarne, having a junction station 11 m. by rail W. of Amsterdam. It is connected by electric and steam tramways with Zandvoort, Leiden, Amsterdam and Alkmaar. Pop. (1900) 65,189. Haarlem is the seat of the governor of the province of North Holland, and of a Roman Catholic and a Jansenist bishopric. In appearance it is a typical Dutch town, with numerous narrow canals and quaintly gabled houses. Of the ancient city gates the Spaarnewouder or Amsterdam gate alone remains. Gardens and promenades have taken the place of the old ramparts, and on the south the city is bounded by the Frederiks and the Flora parks, between which runs the fine avenue called the Dreef, leading to the Haarlemmer Hout or wood. In the Frederiks Park is a pump-room supplied with a powerful chalybeate water from a spring, the Wilhelminabron, in the Haarlemmer Polder not far distant, and in connexion with this there is an orthopaedic institution adjoining. In the great market place in the centre of the city are gathered together the larger number of the most interesting buildings, including the quaint old Fleshers’ Hall, built by Lieven de Key in 1603, and now containing the archives; the town hall; the old Stadsdoelen, where the burgesses met in arms; the Groote Kerk, or Great Church; and the statue erected in 1856 to Laurenz Janszoon Koster, the printer. The Great Church, dedicated to St Bavo, with a lofty tower (255 ft.), is one of the most famous in Holland, and dates from the end of the 15th and the beginning of the 16th centuries. Its great length (460 ft.) and the height and steepness of its vaulted cedar-wood roof (1538) are very impressive. The choir-stalls and screen (1510) are finely carved, and of further interest are the ancient pulpit sounding-board (1432), some old stained glass, and the small models of ships, copies dating from 1638 of yet earlier models originally presented by the Dutch-Swedish Trading Company. The church organ was long considered the largest and finest in existence. It was constructed by Christian Müller in 1738, and has 4 keyboards, 64 registers and 5000 pipes, the largest of which is 15 in. in diameter and 32 ft. long. Among the monuments in the church are those of the poet Willem Bilderdyk (d. 1831) and the engineer Frederik Willem Conrad (d. 1808), who designed the sea-sluices at Katwyk. In the belfry are the damiaatjes, small bells presented to the town, according to tradition, by William I., count of Holland (d. 1222), the crusader. The town hall was originally a palace of the counts of Holland, begun in the 12th century, and some old 13th-century beams still remain; but the building was remodelled in the beginning of the 17th century. It contains a collection of antiquities (including some beautiful goblets) and a picture gallery which, though small, is celebrated for its fine collection of paintings by Frans Hals. The town library contains several incunabula and an interesting collection of early Dutch literature. At the head of the scientific institutions of Haarlem may be placed the Dutch Society of Sciences (Hollandsche Maatschappij van Wetenschappen), founded in 1752, which possesses valuable collections in botany, natural history and geology. Teyler’s Stichting (i.e. foundation), enlarged in modern times, was instituted by the will of Pieter Teyler van der Hulst (d. 1778), a wealthy merchant, for the study of theology, natural science and art, and has lecture-theatres, a large library, and a museum containing a physical and a geological cabinet, as well as a collection of paintings, including many modern pictures, and a valuable collection of drawings and engravings by old masters. The Dutch Society for the Promotion of Industry (Nederlaandsche Maatschappij ter Bevordering van Nijverheid), founded in 1777, has its seat in the Pavilion Welgelegen, a villa on the south side of the Frederiks Park, built by the Amsterdam banker John Hope in 1778, and afterwards acquired by Louis Bonaparte, king of Holland. The colonial museum and the museum of industrial art were established in this villa by the society in 1871 and 1877 respectively. Besides these there are a museum of ecclesiastical antiquities, chiefly relating to the bishopric of Haarlem; the old weigh-house (1598) and the orphanage for girls (1608), originally an almshouse for old men, both built by the architect Lieven de Key of Ghent.

HAARLEM, is a town in North Holland, located on the Spaarne river, about 11 miles west of Amsterdam by rail. It has electric and steam tram connections to Zandvoort, Leiden, Amsterdam, and Alkmaar. The population in 1900 was 65,189. Haarlem is the governor's seat of North Holland and hosts Roman Catholic and Jansenist bishops. Visually, it’s a classic Dutch town with many narrow canals and uniquely gabled houses. Only the Spaarnewouder or Amsterdam gate remains from the old city gates. Gardens and promenades have replaced the ancient ramparts, and the city is bordered on the south by Frederiks and Flora parks, with the lovely avenue called the Dreef leading to Haarlemmer Hout or wood. Frederiks Park features a pump-room that offers a strong chalybeate spring water from the Wilhelminabron in nearby Haarlemmer Polder, and there’s an orthopedic institution next to it. In the main market square in the city center, you’ll find many of the most interesting buildings, such as the charming old Fleshers’ Hall, built by Lieven de Key in 1603, which now houses the archives; the town hall; the old Stadsdoelen where the citizens gathered to arm themselves; the Groote Kerk or Great Church; and the statue erected in 1856 in honor of Laurenz Janszoon Koster, the printer. The Great Church, dedicated to St. Bavo, has a tall tower (255 ft.) and is one of the most renowned churches in Holland, dating back to the late 15th and early 16th centuries. Its impressive dimensions include a length of 460 ft. and a high, steep vaulted cedar-wood roof (constructed in 1538). The choir stalls and screen (from 1510) are beautifully carved, and notable features include the ancient pulpit sounding-board (1432), some old stained glass, and small models of ships, which are copies dating from 1638 of earlier models originally presented by the Dutch-Swedish Trading Company. The church organ was long regarded as the largest and finest around, built by Christian Müller in 1738, featuring 4 keyboards, 64 registers, and 5,000 pipes, the largest being 15 in. in diameter and 32 ft. long. Inside the church, you’ll find monuments dedicated to poet Willem Bilderdyk (d. 1831) and engineer Frederik Willem Conrad (d. 1808), who designed the sea sluices at Katwyk. The belfry houses the damiaatjes, small bells traditionally presented to the town by William I, Count of Holland (d. 1222), the crusader. The town hall was originally a palace for the counts of Holland, built in the 12th century, with some old beams from the 13th century still intact, but it was remodeled in the early 17th century. It features a collection of antiques (including beautiful goblets) and a small but celebrated picture gallery with notable works by Frans Hals. The town library holds several incunabula and a fascinating collection of early Dutch literature. At the forefront of Haarlem's scientific community is the Dutch Society of Sciences (Hollandsche Maatschappij van Wetenschappen), founded in 1752, which boasts valuable collections in botany, natural history, and geology. Teyler’s Stichting (i.e. foundation), expanded in modern times, was established by the will of Pieter Teyler van der Hulst (d. 1778), a wealthy merchant, for studying theology, natural science, and art. It features lecture halls, a large library, and a museum with physical and geological cabinets, along with a collection of paintings, including many contemporary pieces, as well as valuable drawings and engravings by old masters. The Dutch Society for the Promotion of Industry (Nederlaandsche Maatschappij ter Bevordering van Nijverheid), founded in 1777, is based at the Pavilion Welgelegen, a villa on the southern edge of Frederiks Park, built by Amsterdam banker John Hope in 1778 and later owned by Louis Bonaparte, King of Holland. The colonial museum and the industrial art museum were established in this villa in 1871 and 1877, respectively. Additionally, there’s a museum of ecclesiastical antiquities mainly related to the Haarlem bishopric; the old weigh-house (1598) and the girls' orphanage (1608), originally an almshouse for the elderly, both designed by architect Lieven de Key of Ghent.

The staple industries of Haarlem have been greatly modified in the course of time. Cloth weaving and brewing, which once flourished exceedingly, declined in the beginning of the 16th century. A century later, silk, lace and damask weaving were introduced by French refugees, and became very important industries. But about the close of the 18th century this remarkable prosperity had also come to an end, and it was not till after the Belgian revolution of 1830-1831 that Haarlem began to develop the manufactures in which it is now chiefly engaged. Cotton manufacture, dyeing, printing, bleaching, brewing, type-founding, and the manufacture of tram and railway carriages are among the more important of its industries. One of the printing establishments has the reputation of being the oldest in the Netherlands, and publishes the oldest Dutch paper, De Opragte Haarlemmer Courant. Market-gardening, especially horticulture, is extensively practised in the vicinity, so that Haarlem is the seat of a large trade in Dutch bulbs, especially hyacinths, tulips, fritillaries, spiraeas and japonicas.

The main industries in Haarlem have changed a lot over time. Cloth weaving and brewing, which used to thrive, started to decline in the early 16th century. A century later, French refugees introduced silk, lace, and damask weaving, which became very important industries. However, by the end of the 18th century, this impressive prosperity also came to an end, and it wasn't until after the Belgian Revolution of 1830-1831 that Haarlem began to develop the industries it mainly engages in today. Cotton manufacturing, dyeing, printing, bleaching, brewing, type founding, and making tram and railway carriages are among its more significant industries. One of the printing companies is known as the oldest in the Netherlands and publishes the oldest Dutch newspaper, De Opragte Haarlemmer Courant. Market gardening, especially horticulture, is widely practiced in the area, making Haarlem a hub for a large trade in Dutch bulbs, particularly hyacinths, tulips, fritillaries, spiraeas, and japonicas.

Haarlem, which was a prosperous place in the middle of the 12th century, received its first town charter from William II., count of Holland and king of the Romans, in 1245. It played a considerable part in the wars of Holland with the Frisians. In 1492 it was captured by the insurgent peasants of North Holland, was re-taken by the duke of Saxony, the imperial stadholder, and deprived of its privileges. In 1572 Haarlem joined the revolt of the Netherlands against Spain, but on the 13th of July 1573, after a seven months’ siege, was forced to surrender to Alva’s son Frederick, who exacted terrible vengeance. In 1577 it was again captured by William of Orange and permanently incorporated in the United Netherlands.

Haarlem, which was a thriving city in the mid-12th century, received its first town charter from William II, count of Holland and king of the Romans, in 1245. It played a significant role in the wars between Holland and the Frisians. In 1492, it was taken over by the rebellious peasants of North Holland but was reclaimed by the duke of Saxony, the imperial stadholder, and lost its privileges. In 1572, Haarlem joined the Netherlands' revolt against Spain; however, on July 13, 1573, after a seven-month siege, it was forced to surrender to Alva’s son Frederick, who exacted brutal revenge. In 1577, it was again captured by William of Orange and permanently integrated into the United Netherlands.

See Karl Hegel, Städte und Gilden (Leipzig, 1891); Allan, Geschiedenis en beschrijving van Haarlem (Haarlem, 1871-1888).

See Karl Hegel, Städte und Gilden (Leipzig, 1891); Allan, Geschiedenis en beschrijving van Haarlem (Haarlem, 1871-1888).


HAARLEM LAKE (Dutch Harlemmer Meer), a commune of the province of North Holland, constituted by the law of the 16th of July 1855. It has an area of about 46,000 acres, and its population increased from 7237 in 1860 to 16,621 in 1900. As its name indicates, the commune was formerly a lake, which is said to have been a relic of a northern arm of the Rhine which passed through the district in the time of the Romans. In 1531 the Haarlemmer Meer had an area of 6430 acres, and in its vicinity were three smaller sheets of water—the Leidsche Meer or Leiden Lake, the Spiering Meer, and the Oude Meer or Old Lake, with a united area of about 7600 acres. The four lakes were formed into one by successive inundations, whole villages disappearing in the process, and by 1647 the new Haarlem Lake had an area of about 37,000 acres, which a century later had increased to over 42,000 acres. As early as 1643 Jan Adriaanszoon Leeghwater proposed to endike and drain the lake; and similar schemes, among which those of Nikolaas Samuel Cruquius in 1742 and of Baron van Lijnden van Hemmen in 1820 are worthy of special mention, were brought forward from time to time. But it was not till a furious hurricane in November 1836 drove the waters as far as the gates of Amsterdam, and another on Christmas Day sent them in the opposite direction to submerge the streets of Leiden, that the mind of the nation was seriously turned to the matter. In August 1837 the king appointed a royal commission of inquiry; the scheme proposed by the commission received the sanction of the Second Chamber in March 1839, and in the following May the work was begun. A canal was first dug round the lake for the reception of the water and the accommodation of the great traffic which had previously been carried on. This canal was 38 m. in length, 123-146 ft. wide, and 8 ft. deep, and the earth which was taken out of it was used to build a dike from 30 to 54 yds. broad containing the lake. The area enclosed by the canal was rather more than 70 sq. m., and the average depth of the lake 13 ft. 1½ in., and as the water had no natural outfall it was calculated that probably 1000 million tons would have to be raised by mechanical means. 782 This amount was 200 million tons in excess of that actually discharged. Pumping by steam-engines began in 1848, and the lake was dry by the 1st of July 1852. At the first sale of the highest lands along the banks on the 16th of August 1853, about £28 per acre was paid; but the average price afterwards was less. The whole area of 42,096 acres recovered from the waters brought in 9,400,000 florins, or about £780,000, exactly covering the cost of the enterprise; so that the actual cost to the nation was only the amount of the interest on the capital, or about £368,000. The soil is of various kinds, loam, clay, sand and peat; most of it is sufficiently fertile, though in the lower portions there are barren patches where the scanty vegetation is covered with an ochreous deposit. Mineral springs occur containing a very high percentage (3.245 grams per litre) of common salt; and in 1893 a company was formed for working them. Corn, seeds, cattle, butter and cheese are the principal produce. The roads which traverse the commune are bordered by pleasant-looking farm-houses built after the various styles of Holland, Friesland or Brabant. Hoofddorp, Venneperdorp or Nieuw Vennep, Abbenes and the vicinities of the pumping-stations are the spots where the population has clustered most thickly. The first church was built in 1855; in 1877 there were seven. In 1854 the city of Leiden laid claim to the possession of the new territory, but the courts decided in favour of the nation.

HAARLEM LAKE (Dutch Harlemmer Meer) is a municipality in North Holland, established by law on July 16, 1855. It covers around 46,000 acres, and its population grew from 7,237 in 1860 to 16,621 in 1900. As its name suggests, the municipality used to be a lake, believed to be a remnant of a northern branch of the Rhine that flowed through the area during Roman times. In 1531, Haarlemmer Meer spanned 6,430 acres, and nearby were three smaller lakes—the Leidsche Meer (Leiden Lake), the Spiering Meer, and the Oude Meer (Old Lake)—with a combined area of roughly 7,600 acres. Over time, the four lakes merged into one due to successive floods that swallowed whole villages. By 1647, the newly formed Haarlem Lake covered about 37,000 acres, which increased to over 42,000 acres a century later. As early as 1643, Jan Adriaanszoon Leeghwater proposed draining the lake, and various similar plans were suggested over the years, including notable proposals by Nikolaas Samuel Cruquius in 1742 and Baron van Lijnden van Hemmen in 1820. However, it wasn't until a violent storm in November 1836 pushed the waters to Amsterdam's gates, followed by another storm on Christmas Day that flooded the streets of Leiden, that serious attention was given to the issue. In August 1837, the king set up a royal inquiry commission; the commission's plan was approved by the Second Chamber in March 1839, and work began in May of the same year. A canal was first created around the lake to manage water and facilitate the heavy traffic that had previously occurred. This canal measured 38 meters long, 123-146 feet wide, and 8 feet deep, with the excavated earth used to build a dike that was 30 to 54 yards wide, containing the lake. The area enclosed by the canal was slightly over 70 square miles, and the average lake depth was 13 feet 1½ inches. Since the water had no natural outlet, it was estimated that approximately 1 billion tons would need to be pumped out mechanically. 782 This figure was 200 million tons more than what was actually drained. Steam-powered pumping began in 1848, and the lake was dried up by July 1, 1852. During the initial sale of the highest lands along the banks on August 16, 1853, the selling price was about £28 per acre, but the average price afterward was lower. The total area of 42,096 acres reclaimed from the water generated 9,400,000 florins, or about £780,000, covering the entire cost of the project. Therefore, the actual expense to the nation was only the interest on the capital, which was around £368,000. The soil consists of various types, including loam, clay, sand, and peat; most of it is reasonably fertile, although some lower areas have barren spots where sparse vegetation is coated with a yellowish deposit. Mineral springs with a high concentration (3.245 grams per liter) of common salt were found, leading to the formation of a company in 1893 to exploit them. Corn, seeds, livestock, butter, and cheese are the primary agricultural products. The roads running through the municipality are lined with attractive farmhouses built in the various architectural styles of Holland, Friesland, or Brabant. Hoofddorp, Venneperdorp or Nieuw Vennep, Abbenes, and the areas around the pumping stations are where the population has clustered the most. The first church was built in 1855; by 1877, there were seven. In 1854, the city of Leiden claimed ownership of the new territory, but the courts ruled in favor of the nation.


HAASE, FRIEDRICH (1827-  ), German actor, was born on the 1st of November 1827, in Berlin, the son of a valet to King Frederick William IV., who became his godfather. He was educated for the stage under Ludwig Tieck and made his first appearance in 1846 in Weimar, afterwards acting at Prague (1849-1851) and Karlsruhe (1852-1855). From 1860 to 1866 he played in St Petersburg, then was manager of the court theatre in Coburg, and in 1869 (and again in 1882-1883) visited the United States. He was manager of the Stadt Theater in Leipzig from 1870 to 1876, when he removed to Berlin, where he devoted his energies to the foundation and management of the Deutsches Theater. He finally retired from the stage in 1898. Haase’s aristocratic appearance and elegant manner fitted him specially to play high comedy parts. His chief rôles were those of Rocheferrier in the Partie Piquet; Richelieu; Savigny in Der feiner Diplomat, and der Fürst in Der geheime Agent. He is the author of Ungeschminkte Briefe and Was ich erlebte 1846-1898 (Berlin, 1898).

HAASE, FRIEDRICH (1827-  ), a German actor, was born on November 1, 1827, in Berlin, the son of a valet to King Frederick William IV., who became his godfather. He trained for the stage under Ludwig Tieck and made his first appearance in 1846 in Weimar, later performing in Prague (1849-1851) and Karlsruhe (1852-1855). From 1860 to 1866, he acted in St Petersburg, then became the manager of the court theater in Coburg. He visited the United States in 1869 (and again in 1882-1883). Haase managed the Stadt Theater in Leipzig from 1870 to 1876, after which he moved to Berlin, dedicating his efforts to establishing and managing the Deutsches Theater. He ultimately retired from the stage in 1898. Haase’s aristocratic appearance and graceful demeanor made him particularly suited for high comedy roles. His main characters included Rocheferrier in the Partie Piquet; Richelieu; Savigny in Der feiner Diplomat, and der Fürst in Der geheime Agent. He is also the author of Ungeschminkte Briefe and Was ich erlebte 1846-1898 (Berlin, 1898).

See Simon, Friedrich Haase (Berlin, 1898).

See Simon, Friedrich Haase (Berlin, 1898).


HAASE, FRIEDRICH GOTTLOB (1808-1867), German classical scholar, was born at Magdeburg on the 4th of January 1808. Having studied at Halle, Greifswald and Berlin, he obtained in 1834 an appointment at Schulpforta, from which he was suspended and sentenced to six years’ imprisonment for identifying himself with the Burschenschaften (students’ associations). Having been released after serving one year of his sentence, he visited Paris, and on his return in 1840 he was appointed professor at Breslau, where he remained till his death on the 16th of August 1867. He was undoubtedly one of the most successful teachers of his day in Germany, and exercised great influence upon all his pupils.

HAASE, FRIEDRICH GOTTLOB (1808-1867), a German classical scholar, was born in Magdeburg on January 4, 1808. After studying at Halle, Greifswald, and Berlin, he got a job at Schulpforta in 1834, but he was suspended and sentenced to six years in prison for being involved with the Burschenschaften (student associations). He was released after serving one year of his sentence, visited Paris, and upon returning in 1840, he became a professor at Breslau, where he remained until his death on August 16, 1867. He was undoubtedly one of the most effective teachers of his time in Germany and had a significant impact on all his students.

He edited several classic authors: Xenophon (Λακεδαιμονίων πολιτεία, 1833); Thucydides (1840); Velleius Paterculus (1858); Seneca the philosopher (2nd ed., 1872, not yet superseded); and Tacitus (1855), the introduction to which is a masterpiece of Latinity. His Vorlesungen über lateinische Sprachwissenschaft was published after his death by F. A. Eckstein and H. Peter (1874-1880). See C Bursian, Geschichte der klassischen Philologie in Deutschland (1883); G. Fickert, Friderici Haasii memoria (1868), with a list of works; T. Oelsner in Rübezahl (Schlesische Provinzialblätter), vii. Heft 3 (Breslau, 1868).

He edited several classic authors: Xenophon (Spartan government, 1833); Thucydides (1840); Velleius Paterculus (1858); Seneca the philosopher (2nd ed., 1872, not yet replaced); and Tacitus (1855), whose introduction is a masterpiece of Latin style. His Vorlesungen über lateinische Sprachwissenschaft was published after his death by F. A. Eckstein and H. Peter (1874-1880). See C Bursian, Geschichte der klassischen Philologie in Deutschland (1883); G. Fickert, Friderici Haasii memoria (1868), which includes a list of works; T. Oelsner in Rübezahl (Schlesische Provinzialblätter), vii. Heft 3 (Breslau, 1868).


HAAST, SIR JOHANN FRANZ JULIUS VON (1824-1887), German and British geologist, was born at Bonn on the 1st of May 1824. He received his early education partly in that town and partly in Cologne, and then entered the university at Bonn, where he made a special study of geology and mineralogy. In 1858 he started for New Zealand to report on the suitability of the colony for German emigrants. He then became acquainted with Dr von Hochstetter, and rendered assistance to him in the preliminary geological survey which von Hochstetter had undertaken. Afterwards Dr Haast accepted offers from the governments of Nelson and Canterbury to investigate the geology of those districts, and the results of his detailed labours greatly enriched our knowledge with regard to the rocky structure, the glacial phenomena and the economic products. He discovered gold and coal in Nelson, and he carried on important researches with reference to the occurrence of Dinornis and other extinct wingless birds (Moas). His Geology of the Provinces of Canterbury and Westland, N.Z., was published in 1879. He was the founder of the Canterbury museum at Christchurch, of which he became director, and which he endeavoured to render the finest collection in the southern hemisphere. He was surveyor-general of Canterbury from 1861 to 1871, and professor of geology at Canterbury College. He was elected F.R.S. in 1867; and he was knighted for his services at the time of the colonial exhibition in London in 1887. He died at Wellington, N.Z., on the 15th of August 1887.

HAAST, SIR JOHANN FRANZ JULIUS VON (1824-1887), German and British geologist, was born in Bonn on May 1, 1824. He received his early education in Bonn and Cologne before entering the University of Bonn, where he focused on geology and mineralogy. In 1858, he traveled to New Zealand to assess the colony's suitability for German emigrants. There, he met Dr. von Hochstetter and assisted him with the initial geological survey he was conducting. Later, Dr. Haast accepted offers from the governments of Nelson and Canterbury to study the geology of those regions. His detailed work greatly enhanced our understanding of the geological structure, glacial phenomena, and economic resources. He discovered gold and coal in Nelson and conducted significant research regarding the presence of Dinornis and other extinct flightless birds (Moas). His book, Geology of the Provinces of Canterbury and Westland, N.Z., was published in 1879. He founded the Canterbury Museum in Christchurch, where he became the director and aimed to make it the best collection in the southern hemisphere. He served as the surveyor-general of Canterbury from 1861 to 1871 and was a professor of geology at Canterbury College. He was elected F.R.S. in 1867 and was knighted for his contributions during the colonial exhibition in London in 1887. He died in Wellington, N.Z., on August 15, 1887.


HABABS (Az-Hibbehs), a nomadic pastoral people of Hamitic stock, living in the coast region north-west of Massawa. Physically they are Beja, by language and traditions Abyssinians. They were Christians until the 19th century, but are now Mahommedans. Their sole wealth consists in cattle.

HABABS (Az-Hibbehs) are a nomadic pastoral group of Hamitic descent, residing in the coastal area northwest of Massawa. Physically, they resemble the Beja, but their language and traditions are rooted in Abyssinian culture. They practiced Christianity until the 19th century, but now they are Muslims. Their only source of wealth comes from cattle.


HABAKKUK, the name borne by the eighth book of the Old Testament “Minor Prophets.” It occurs twice in the book itself (i. 1, iii. 1) in titles, but nowhere else in the Old Testament. The meaning of the name is uncertain. If Hebrew, it might be derived from the root חבק (to embrace) as an intensive term of affection. It has also been connected more plausibly with an Assyrian plant name, ḫambaḱūḱu (Delitzsch, Assyrisches Handwörterbuch, p. 281). The Septuagint has Ἀμβακούμ. Of the person designated, no more is known than may be inferred from the writing which bears his name. Various legends are connected with him, of which the best known is given in the Apocryphal story of “Bel and the Dragon” (v. 33-39); but none of these has any historic value.1

HABAKKUK, is the name of the eighth book of the Old Testament, called “Minor Prophets.” It appears twice in the book itself (i. 1, iii. 1) in titles, but is not mentioned anywhere else in the Old Testament. The meaning of the name is unclear. If it's Hebrew, it might come from the root Hug (to embrace), suggesting a term of deep affection. It has also been more convincingly linked to an Assyrian plant name, ḫambaḱūḱu (Delitzsch, Assyrisches Handwörterbuch, p. 281). In the Septuagint, it's written as Amos. There’s not much else known about the person this book refers to beyond what can be gathered from the text that carries his name. Several legends are associated with him, the most famous being told in the Apocryphal story of “Bel and the Dragon” (v. 33-39); however, none of these has any historical significance.1

The book itself falls into three obvious parts, viz. (1) a dialogue between the prophet and God (i. 2-ii. 4); (2) a series of five woes pronounced on wickedness (ii. 5-ii. 20); (3) a poem describing the triumphant manifestation of God (iii.). There is considerable difficulty in regard to the interpretation of (1), on which that of (2) will turn; while (3) forms an independent section, to be considered separately.

The book is clearly divided into three parts: (1) a dialogue between the prophet and God (i. 2-ii. 4); (2) a set of five woes delivered against wickedness (ii. 5-ii. 20); (3) a poem depicting the triumphant appearance of God (iii.). There is significant difficulty in interpreting (1), which will influence the understanding of (2); meanwhile, (3) stands alone and will be examined separately.

In the dialogue, the prophet cries to God against continued violence and injustice, though it is not clear whether this is done within or to Israel (i. 2-4). The divine answer declares that God raises up the Chaldaeans, whose formidable resources are invincible (i. 5-11). The prophet thereupon calls God’s attention to the tyranny which He apparently allows to triumph, and declares his purpose to wait till an answer is given to his complaint (i. 12-ii. 2). God answers by demanding patience, and by declaring that the righteous shall live by his faithfulness (ii. 3-4).

In the dialogue, the prophet calls out to God about the ongoing violence and injustice, although it's unclear if this is happening within or to Israel (i. 2-4). The divine response states that God is raising up the Chaldeans, whose impressive resources are unbeatable (i. 5-11). The prophet then points out the oppression that God seems to allow to succeed and expresses his determination to wait for a response to his complaint (i. 12-ii. 2). God replies by asking for patience and declares that the righteous will live by their faithfulness (ii. 3-4).

The interpretation of this dialogue which first suggests itself is that the prophet is referring to wickedness within the nation, which is to be punished by the Chaldaeans as a divine instrument; in the process, the tyranny of the instrument itself calls for punishment, which the prophet is bidden to await in patient fidelity. On this view of the dialogue, the subsequent woes will be pronounced against the Chaldaeans, and the date assigned to the prophecy will be about 600 B.C., i.e. soon after the battle of Carchemish (605 B.C.), when the Chaldaean victory over Egypt inaugurated a period of Chaldaean supremacy which lasted till the Chaldaeans themselves were overthrown by Cyrus in 538 B.C. Grave objections, however, confront this interpretation, as is admitted even by such recent defenders of it as Davidson and Driver. Is it likely that a prophet would begin a complaint against Chaldaean tyranny (admittedly central in the prophecy) by complaining of that wickedness of his fellow-countrymen which seems partly to justify it? Are not the terms of reference in 783 i. 2 f. and 1. 12 f. too similar for the supposition that two distinct, even contradictory, complaints are being made (cf. “wicked” and “righteous” in i. 4 and i. 13, interchanged in regard to Israel, on above theory)? And if i. 5-11 is a genuine prophecy of the raising up of the Chaldaeans, whence comes that long experience of their rule required to explain the detailed denunciation of their tyranny? To meet the last objection, Davidson supposes i. 5-11 to be really a reference to the past, prophetic in form only, and brings down the whole section to a later period of Chaldaean rule, “hardly, one would think, before the deportation of the people under Jehoiachin in 597” (p. 49). Driver prefers to bisect the dialogue by supposing i. 2-11 to be written at an earlier period than i. 12 f. (p. 57). The other objections, however, remain, and have provoked a variety of theories from Old Testament scholars, of which three call for special notice. (1) The first of these, represented by Giesebrecht,2 Nowack and Wellhausen, refers i. 2-4 to Chaldaean oppression of Israel, the same subject being continued in i. 12 f. Obviously, the reference to the Chaldaeans as a divine instrument could not then stand in its present place, and it is accordingly regarded as a misplaced earlier prophecy. This is the minimum of critical procedure required to do justice to the facts. (2) Budde, followed by Cornill, also regards i. 2-4 as referring to the oppression of Israel by a foreign tyrant, whom, however, he holds to be Assyria. He also removes i. 5-11 from its present place, but makes it part of the divine answer, following ii. 4. On this view, the Chaldaeans are the divine instrument for punishing the tyranny of the Assyrians, to whom the following woes will therefore refer. The date would fall between Josiah’s reformation (621) and his death (609). This is a plausible and even attractive theory; its weakness seems to lie in the absence of any positive evidence in the prophecy itself, as is illustrated by the fact that even G. A. Smith, who follows it, suggests “Egypt from 608-605” as an alternative to Assyria (p. 124). (3) Marti (1904) abandons the attempt to explain the prophecy as a unity, and analyses it into three elements, viz. (a) The original prophecy by Habakkuk, consisting of i. 5-10, 14 f., belonging to the year 605, and representing the emergent power of the Chaldaeans as a divine scourge of the faithless people; (b) Woes against the Chaldaeans, presupposing not only tyrannous rule over many peoples, but the beginning of their decline and fall, and therefore of date about 540 B.C. (ii. 5-19); (c) A psalm of post-exilic origin, whose fragments, i. 2-4, 12 a, 13, ii. 1-4, have been incorporated into the present text from the margins on which they were written, its subject being the suffering of the righteous. Each of these three theories3 encounters difficulties of detail; none can be said to have secured a dominant position. The great variety of views amongst competent critics is significant of the difficulty of the problem, which can hardly be regarded as yet solved; this divergence of opinion perhaps points to the impossibility of maintaining the unity of chs. i. and ii., and throws the balance of probability towards some such analysis as that of Marti, which is therefore accepted in the present article.

The interpretation of this dialogue that first comes to mind is that the prophet is talking about wrongdoing within the nation, which is to be punished by the Chaldeans as a divine tool; meanwhile, the tyranny of this tool itself calls for punishment, which the prophet is instructed to await with patient faithfulness. From this perspective, the subsequent woes will be directed against the Chaldeans, and the prophecy is dated around 600 BCE, i.e. shortly after the battle of Carchemish (605 B.C.E.), when the Chaldean victory over Egypt marked the beginning of a period of Chaldean dominance that lasted until they were overthrown by Cyrus in 538 BCE However, there are significant objections to this interpretation, as even recent supporters like Davidson and Driver admit. Would a prophet really start a complaint against Chaldean tyranny (which is central to the prophecy) by pointing out the wrongdoing of his countrymen that seems to partly justify it? Are not the references in 783 i. 2 f. and 1. 12 f. too similar for us to assume that two separate, even contradictory, complaints are being made (consider "wicked" and "righteous" in i. 4 and i. 13, swapped regarding Israel, based on the earlier theory)? And if i. 5-11 is a genuine prophecy about the rise of the Chaldeans, where does the extensive experience of their rule come from that is needed to explain the detailed condemnation of their tyranny? To address the last objection, Davidson suggests that i. 5-11 actually refers to the past, only taking a prophetic form, and he places the entire section in a later period of Chaldean rule, “hardly, one would think, before the deportation of the people under Jehoiachin in 597” (p. 49). Driver prefers to split the dialogue by suggesting that i. 2-11 was written at an earlier time than i. 12 f. (p. 57). However, the other objections remain and have led to various theories from Old Testament scholars, of which three deserve special mention. (1) The first of these, represented by Giesebrecht, Nowack, and Wellhausen, connects i. 2-4 to Chaldean oppression of Israel, the same topic being continued in i. 12 f. Clearly, the mention of the Chaldeans as a divine tool could not fit in its current position, so it is seen as an earlier prophecy placed incorrectly. This is the minimum critical approach needed to do justice to the facts. (2) Budde, followed by Cornill, also views i. 2-4 as referring to Israel's oppression by a foreign tyrant, whom he believes to be Assyria. He also moves i. 5-11 from its current spot, but includes it as part of the divine response that follows ii. 4. From this perspective, the Chaldeans are the divine instrument for punishing the tyranny of the Assyrians, to whom the forthcoming woes will thus refer. The timeframe would be between Josiah’s reform (621) and his death (609). This theory is plausible and even appealing; its weakness seems to lie in the lack of positive evidence within the prophecy itself, as even G. A. Smith, who supports it, suggests “Egypt from 608-605” as an alternative to Assyria (p. 124). (3) Marti (1904) abandons the effort to explain the prophecy as a cohesive unit and breaks it down into three elements: (a) The original prophecy by Habakkuk, consisting of i. 5-10, 14 f., from the year 605, depicting the rising power of the Chaldeans as a divine scourge of the unfaithful people; (b) Woes against the Chaldeans, assuming not only oppressive rule over many nations but also the beginning of their decline and fall, hence roughly dated to 540 BCE (ii. 5-19); (c) A psalm of post-exilic origin, with its fragments, i. 2-4, 12 a, 13, ii. 1-4, incorporated into the current text from the margins where they were originally written, focusing on the suffering of the righteous. Each of these three theories encounters detailed difficulties; none has established a dominant position. The wide range of views among qualified critics highlights the complexity of the problem, which can hardly be considered solved yet; this diversity of opinion may indicate the challenge of maintaining the unity of chapters i. and ii., and leans towards some analysis like Marti's, which is therefore accepted in this article.

In regard to the poem which forms the third and closing chapter of the present book of Habakkuk, there is much more general agreement. Its most striking characteristic lies in the superscription (“A prayer of Habakkuk the prophet, set to Shigionoth”), the subscription (“For the chief musician, on my stringed instruments”), and the insertion of the musical term “Selah” in three places (v. 3, 9, 13). These liturgical notes make extremely probable the supposition that the poem has been taken from some collection like that of our present book of Psalms, probably on the ground of the authorship asserted by the superscription there attached to it. It cannot, however, be said that the poem itself supports this assertion, which carries no more intrinsic weight than the Davidic titles of the Psalms. The poem begins with a prayer that God will renew the historic manifestation of the exodus, which inaugurated the national history and faith; a thunderstorm moving up from the south is then described, in which God is revealed (3-7); it is asked whether this manifestation, whose course is further described, is against nature only (8-11); the answer is given that it is for the salvation of Israel against its wicked foes (12-15); the poet describes the effect in terror upon himself (16) and declares his confidence in God, even in utter agricultural adversity (17-19). As Wellhausen says (p. 171): “The poet appears to believe that in the very act of describing enthusiastically the ancient deed of deliverance, he brings home to us the new; we are left sometimes in doubt whether he speaks of the past to suggest the new by analogy, or whether he is concerned directly with the future, and simply paints it with the colours of the past.” In any case, there is nothing in this fine poem to connect it with the conception of the Chaldaeans as a divine instrument. It is the nation that speaks through the poet (cf. v. 14), but at what period of its post-exilic history we have no means of inferring.

In relation to the poem that makes up the third and final chapter of this book of Habakkuk, there is much greater consensus. Its most notable feature is the superscription (“A prayer of Habakkuk the prophet, set to Shigionoth”), the subscription (“For the chief musician, on my stringed instruments”), and the use of the musical term “Selah” in three places (v. 3, 9, 13). These liturgical notes strongly suggest that the poem was taken from a collection similar to our current book of Psalms, likely based on the authorship noted in the superscription attached to it. However, it cannot be said that the poem itself validates this assertion, which holds no more inherent value than the Davidic titles of the Psalms. The poem starts with a prayer asking God to renew the historic event of the exodus, which marked the beginning of the national history and faith; then it describes a thunderstorm approaching from the south, in which God is revealed (3-7); it questions whether this manifestation, whose progression is further depicted, is merely against nature (8-11); the answer is given that it is for the salvation of Israel against its wicked enemies (12-15); the poet describes the terror it instills in him (16) and expresses his confidence in God, even in extreme agricultural hardship (17-19). As Wellhausen states (p. 171): “The poet seems to believe that by enthusiastically describing the ancient act of deliverance, he brings the new to life for us; we are sometimes left uncertain whether he refers to the past to suggest the new by analogy, or if he is directly addressing the future, simply coloring it with the hues of the past.” In any case, there’s nothing in this beautiful poem that links it to the idea of the Chaldeans as a divine instrument. It is the nation that speaks through the poet (cf. v. 14), but we have no way of determining at what point in its post-exilic history this is happening.

Our estimate of the theological teaching of this book will naturally be influenced by the particular critical theory which is adopted. The reduction of the book to four originally independent sections requires that the point of each be stated separately. When this is done, it will, however, be found that there is a broad unity of subject, and of natural development in its treatment, such as to some extent justifies the instinct or the judgment of those who were instrumental in effecting the combination of the separate parts. (1) The poem (iii.), though possibly latest in date,4 claims first consideration, because it avowedly moves in the circle of primitive ideas, and supplicates a divine intervention, a direct and immediate manifestation of the transcendent God. He is conceived as controlling or overcoming the forces of nature; and though an earlier mythology has supplied some of the ideas, yet, as with the opening chapters of Genesis, they are transfigured by the moral purpose which animates them, the purpose to subdue all things that could frustrate the destiny of God’s anointed (v. 13). The closing verses strike that deep note of absolute dependence on God, which is the glory of the religion of the Old Testament and its chief contribution to the spirit of the Gospels. (2) The prophecy of the Chaldaeans as the instruments of the divine purpose involves a different, yet related, conception of the divine providence. The philosophy of history, by which Hebrew prophets could read a deep moral significance into national disaster and turn the flank of resistless attack, became one of the most important elements in the nation’s faith. If the world-powers were hard as flint in their dealings with Israel, the people of God were steeled to such moral endurance that each clash of their successive onsets kindled some new flame of devotion. Through the Chaldaeans God worked a work which required centuries of life and literature to disclose its fulness (i. 5). (3) When we turn from this view of the Chaldaeans to the denunciation of their tyranny in “taunt songs” (ii. 5-20), we have simply a practical application of the doctrine of divine government. God being what He is, at once moral and all-powerful, the immoral life is doomed to overthrow, whether the immorality consist in grasping rapacity, proud self-aggrandizement, cruel exaction, exulting triumph or senseless idolatry. (4) Yet, because the doom so often tarries, there arises the problem of the suffering of the innocent and the upright. How can God look down with tolerance that seems favour on so much that conflicts with His declared will and character? This is the great problem of Israel, finding its supreme expression for all time in the book of Job (q.v.). In that book the solution of the problem of innocent suffering lies hidden from the sufferer, even to the end, for he is not admitted with the reader to the secret of the prologue; it is the practical solution of faithfulness resting on faith which is offered to us. So here, with the principle of ii. 4, “the righteous shall live by his faithfulness.” The different application of these words in the New Testament to “faith” 784 is well known (Rom. i. 17; Gal. iii. 11; Heb. x. 38) though the difference is apt to be exaggerated by those who forget how much of the element of אמונה: lies in Paul’s conception of πίστις. In G. A. Smith’s words, “as Paul’s adaptation, ‘the just shall live by faith,’ has become the motto of evangelical Christianity, so we may say that Habakkuk’s original of it has been the motto and the fame of Judaism: ‘the righteous shall live by his faithfulness.’”

Our understanding of the theological teachings in this book will inevitably be shaped by the specific critical approach we take. When we break the book down into four originally independent sections, it's necessary to explain the key point of each one individually. However, once this is done, we will see that there is a strong overarching theme and natural progression in its discussion, which somewhat validates the intuition or judgment of those who helped combine these separate parts. (1) The poem (iii.), while potentially the most recent addition, deserves our initial focus because it clearly operates within the realm of fundamental ideas and seeks a divine intervention, a direct and immediate manifestation of the transcendent God. He is viewed as controlling or overcoming the forces of nature; although earlier mythology has contributed some ideas, much like the opening chapters of Genesis, they are transformed by the moral purpose that drives them—the purpose to conquer anything that could obstruct the destiny of God’s chosen one (v. 13). The concluding verses resonate with a profound sense of complete dependence on God, which is the hallmark of Old Testament religion and its key contribution to the essence of the Gospels. (2) The prophecy regarding the Chaldaeans as tools of divine purpose introduces a different, yet connected, understanding of divine providence. The philosophy of history, which enabled Hebrew prophets to discern deep moral significance in national disasters and respond to overwhelming assaults, became a cornerstone of the nation's faith. Even if worldly powers were unyielding in their treatment of Israel, God’s people developed such moral resilience that each confrontation with their oppressors ignited a new flame of devotion. Through the Chaldaeans, God accomplished a task that would take centuries of life and literature to fully reveal (i. 5). (3) When we shift our focus from the Chaldaeans to the condemnation of their tyranny in "taunt songs" (ii. 5-20), we see a practical application of the concept of divine governance. Since God is both moral and all-powerful, any immoral life is destined for downfall, whether that immorality manifests as greed, arrogant self-promotion, cruel exploitation, triumphant boasting, or mindless idolatry. (4) However, because this downfall often seems delayed, we encounter the issue of innocent and upright suffering. How can God overlook, with a tolerance that appears supportive, so much that contradicts His stated will and nature? This is the central struggle of Israel, finding its ultimate expression for all time in the book of Job (q.v.). In that book, the resolution to the problem of undeserved suffering remains hidden from the sufferer until the end, as he is not privy to the secret revealed to the reader in the prologue; instead, we are presented with the practical solution of faithfulness grounded in faith. Thus, we see the principle in ii. 4, “the righteous shall live by his faithfulness.” The variation of these words in the New Testament to refer to “faith” is well recognized (Rom. i. 17; Gal. iii. 11; Heb. x. 38), although this difference is sometimes overstated by those who overlook how much of the element of Belief is present in Paul's understanding of faith. As G. A. Smith said, “just as Paul’s adaptation, ‘the just shall live by faith,’ has become the motto of evangelical Christianity, we can say that Habakkuk’s original—‘the righteous shall live by his faithfulness’—has been the motto and the pride of Judaism.”

The Hebrew text of this impressive and varied book is unfortunately corrupt in many places; even so cautious a critic as Driver accepts or favourably notices eighteen textual emendations in the three chapters, and suspects the text in at least seven other cases. For the interpretation of the book in detail, the English reader will find Driver’s commentary (1906) the most useful.

The Hebrew text of this impressive and diverse book is unfortunately corrupted in many places; even a careful critic like Driver accepts or positively notes eighteen textual corrections in the three chapters and suspects the text in at least seven other instances. For a detailed interpretation of the book, English readers will find Driver’s commentary (1906) to be the most helpful.

References to earlier literature will be found in the following noteworthy studies of recent date: Davidson, “Nahum, Habakkuk and Zephaniah,” in Cambridge Bible (1896); Nowack, Die kleinen Propheten (Hdkr.) (1897); Wellhausen, Die kleinen Propheten3 (1898); G. A. Smith, “The Book of the Twelve Prophets,” in The Expositor’s Bible, vol. ii. (1898); Driver, article “Habakkuk” in Hastings’ Dictionary of the Bible, vol. ii. pp. 269-272 (1900); Budde, article “Habakkuk” in Ency. Biblica, vol. ii., c. 1921-1928 (1901); Stevenson, “The Interpretation of Habakkuk,” in The Expositor (1902), pp. 388-401; Peake, The Problem of Suffering in the Old Testament (1904), pp. 4-11 and app. A, “Recent Criticism of Habakkuk”; Marti, Dodekapropheton (K. H. C.) (1904); Driver, “Minor Prophets,” vol. ii., in Century Bible (1906); Duhm, Das Buch Habakkuk (Text, Übersetzung und Efklärung), 1906 (regards the book as a unity belonging to the time of Alexander the Great). Max L. Margolis discusses the anonymous Greek version of Habakkuk iii. in a volume of Old Test. and Semitic Studies: in Memory of William Rainey Harper (Chicago, 1908).

References to earlier literature can be found in the following significant recent studies: Davidson, “Nahum, Habakkuk and Zephaniah,” in Cambridge Bible (1896); Nowack, Die kleinen Propheten (Hdkr.) (1897); Wellhausen, Die kleinen Propheten3 (1898); G. A. Smith, “The Book of the Twelve Prophets,” in The Expositor’s Bible, vol. ii. (1898); Driver, article “Habakkuk” in Hastings’ Dictionary of the Bible, vol. ii. pp. 269-272 (1900); Budde, article “Habakkuk” in Ency. Biblica, vol. ii., c. 1921-1928 (1901); Stevenson, “The Interpretation of Habakkuk,” in The Expositor (1902), pp. 388-401; Peake, The Problem of Suffering in the Old Testament (1904), pp. 4-11 and app. A, “Recent Criticism of Habakkuk”; Marti, Dodekapropheton (K. H. C.) (1904); Driver, “Minor Prophets,” vol. ii., in Century Bible (1906); Duhm, Das Buch Habakkuk (Text, Übersetzung und Efklärung), 1906 (considers the book as a unity from the time of Alexander the Great). Max L. Margolis discusses the anonymous Greek version of Habakkuk iii. in a volume of Old Test. and Semitic Studies: in Memory of William Rainey Harper (Chicago, 1908).

(H. W. R.*)

1 These legends are collected in Hastings, D. B. vol. ii. p. 272. He is the watchman of Is. xxi. 6 (cf. Hab. ii. 1); the son of the Shunammite (2 Kings iv. 16); and is miraculously lifted by his hair to carry his own dinner to Daniel in the lions’ den (supra).

1 These legends are gathered in Hastings, D. B. vol. ii. p. 272. He is the watcher of Is. xxi. 6 (cf. Hab. ii. 1); the son of the Shunammite (2 Kings iv. 16); and is supernaturally lifted by his hair to bring his own dinner to Daniel in the lions’ den (supra).

2 Followed by Peake in The Problem of Suffering, pp. 4 f., 151 f., to whose appendix (A) reference may be made for further details of recent criticism.

2 Followed by Peake in The Problem of Suffering, pp. 4 f., 151 f., to which the appendix (A) can be referred for more information on recent criticism.

3 For the less probable theories of Rothstein, Lauterburg, Happel and Peiser (amongst others), cf. Marti’s Commentary, pp. 328 f. and 332. Stevenson (The Expositor, 1902) states clearly the difficulties for those who regard ch. i. as a unity. He sees two independent sections, 2-4 + 12-13, and 5-11 + 14-17.

3 For the less likely theories of Rothstein, Lauterburg, Happel, and Peiser (among others), see Marti’s Commentary, pp. 328 f. and 332. Stevenson (The Expositor, 1902) clearly outlines the challenges for those who view ch. i. as a single unit. He identifies two distinct sections: 2-4 + 12-13, and 5-11 + 14-17.

4 Earlier, however, than Ps. lxxvii. 17-20, which is drawn from it.

4 Earlier, however, than Ps. lxxvii. 17-20, which is drawn from it.


HABDALA (lit. “separation”), a Hebrew term chiefly appropriated to ceremonies at the conclusion of Sabbath and festivals, marking the separation between times sacred and secular. On the Saturday night the ceremony consists of three items: (a) benediction over a cup of wine (common to many other Jewish functions); (b) benediction over a lighted taper, of which possibly the origin is utilitarian, as no light might be kindled on the Sabbath day, but the rite may be symbolical; and (c) benediction over a box of sweet-smelling spices. The origin of the latter has been traced to the bowl of burning spice which in Talmudic times was introduced after each meal. But here too symbolic ideas must be taken into account. Both the light and the spices would readily fit into the conception of the Sabbath “Over-soul” of the mystics.

Havdalah (literally "separation"), is a Hebrew term mainly used for ceremonies at the end of the Sabbath and festivals, highlighting the distinction between sacred and secular times. On Saturday night, the ceremony involves three elements: (a) a blessing over a cup of wine (which is common in many other Jewish rituals); (b) a blessing over a lit candle, which may have a practical origin since no fire can be lit on the Sabbath, although the ritual may also hold symbolic meaning; and (c) a blessing over a box of fragrant spices. The origins of the spices trace back to a bowl of burning spice that was used after each meal in Talmudic times. However, symbolic interpretations must also be considered. Both the light and the spices align with the mystics' idea of the Sabbath "Over-soul."

(I. A.)

HABEAS CORPUS, in English law, a writ issued out of the High Court of Justice commanding the person to whom it is directed to bring the body of a person in his custody before that or some other court for a specified purpose.

HABEAS CORPUS, in English law, is a legal order issued by the High Court of Justice that requires the person holding someone in custody to bring that person before the court or another specified court for a particular reason.

There are various forms of the writ, of which the most famous is that known as habeas corpus ad subjiciendum, the well-established remedy for violation of personal liberty. From the earliest records of the English law no free man could be detained in custody except on a criminal charge or conviction or for a civil debt. That right is expressed in the Great Charter in the words: “Nullus liber homo capiatur vel imprisonetur aut dissaisietur aut utlagetur, aut exuletur aut aliquo modo destruatur nec super eum ibimus nec super eum mittemus, nisi per legale judicium parium suorum, vel per legem terrae.1 The writ is a remedial mandatory writ of right existing by the common law, i.e. it is one of the extraordinary remedies—such as mandamus, certiorari and prohibitions, which the superior courts may grant. While “of right,” it is not “of course,” and is granted only on application to the High Court or a judge thereof, supported by a sworn statement of facts setting up at least a probable case of illegal confinement. It is addressed to the person in whose custody another is detained, and commands him to bring his prisoner before the court immediately after the receipt of the writ, together with the day and cause of his being taken and detained, to undergo and receive (ad subjiciendum et recipiendum) whatsoever the court awarding the writ “may consider of concerning him in that behalf.”

There are different types of the writ, the most well-known being habeas corpus ad subjiciendum, which is a well-established remedy for violations of personal liberty. According to the earliest records of English law, no free person could be held in custody unless it was due to a criminal charge or conviction, or for a civil debt. This right is stated in the Great Charter with the words: “Nullus liber homo capiatur vel imprisonetur aut dissaisietur aut utlagetur, aut exuletur aut aliquo modo destruatur nec super eum ibimus nec super eum mittemus, nisi per legale judicium parium suorum, vel per legem terrae.1 The writ is a mandatory legal remedy that exists under common law, meaning it is one of the extraordinary remedies—like mandamus, certiorari, and prohibitions—that superior courts can grant. While it is “of right,” it is not granted automatically and is only given upon application to the High Court or a judge, supported by a sworn statement of facts that shows at least a probable case of illegal confinement. It is directed to the person holding another in custody and commands them to bring their prisoner before the court immediately upon receiving the writ, along with the date and reason for their arrest and detention, to undergo and receive (ad subjiciendum et recipiendum) whatever the court awarding the writ “may consider regarding him in that matter.”

It is often stated that the writ is founded on the article of the Great Charter already quoted; but there are extant instances of the issue of writs of habeas corpus before the charter. Other writs having somewhat similar effect were in use at an early date, e.g. the writ de odio et atiâ, used as early as the 12th century to prevent imprisonment on vexatious appeals of felony, and the writ of mainprise (de manucaptione), long obsolete if not abolished in England but which it was attempted to use in India so late as 1870. In the ease of imprisonment on accusation of crime the writ issued from the court of king’s bench (or from the chancery), and on its return the court judged of the legality of the imprisonment, and discharged the prisoner or admitted him to bail or remanded him to his former custody according to the result of the examination.

It is often said that the writ is based on the article of the Great Charter that has already been mentioned; however, there are existing examples of writs of habeas corpus being issued before the charter. Other writs that had a somewhat similar purpose were used early on, for example, the writ de odio et atiâ, which was used as far back as the 12th century to prevent imprisonment from frivolous felony appeals, and the writ of mainprise (de manucaptione), which has long been outdated if not abolished in England, but was attempted to be used in India as late as 1870. When it came to imprisonment based on a criminal accusation, the writ was issued from the king’s bench court (or from the chancery), and upon its return, the court determined the legality of the imprisonment and either released the prisoner, allowed them bail, or sent them back to their previous custody based on the findings of the examination.

By the time of Charles I. the writ was fully established as the appropriate process for checking illegal imprisonment by inferior courts or by public officials. But it acquired its full and present constitutional importance by legislation.

By the time of Charles I, the writ was firmly established as the correct way to address unlawful imprisonment by lower courts or public officials. However, it gained its full and current constitutional significance through legislation.

In Darnel’s case (1627) the judges held that the command of the king was a sufficient answer to a writ of habeas corpus. The House of Commons thereupon passed resolutions to the contrary, and after a conference with the House of Lords the measure known as the Petition of Right was passed (1627, 3 Car. I. c. i.) which, inter alia, recited (s. 5) that, contrary to the Great Charter and the good laws and statutes of the realm, divers of the king’s subjects had of late been imprisoned without any cause shown, and when they were brought up on habeas corpus ad subjiciendum, and no cause was shown other than the special command of the king signified by the privy council, were nevertheless remanded to prison, and enacted “that no freeman in any such manner as is before mentioned be imprisoned or detained.” The Petition of Right was disregarded in Selden’s case (1629), when it was successfully returned to a habeas corpus that Selden and others were committed by the king’s special command “for notable contempts against the king and his government and for stirring up sedition against him.”2 This led to legislation in 1640 by which, after abolishing the Star Chamber, the right to a habeas corpus was given to test the legality of commitments by command or warrant of the king or the privy council.3

In Darnel’s case (1627), the judges decided that the king’s command was a valid response to a writ of habeas corpus. The House of Commons then passed resolutions against this, and after a discussion with the House of Lords, the Petition of Right was passed (1627, 3 Car. I. c. i.), which stated (s. 5) that, contrary to the Great Charter and the good laws and statutes of the realm, many of the king’s subjects had recently been imprisoned without any reason given. When they were brought up on habeas corpus ad subjiciendum and no reason was provided other than the special command of the king conveyed by the privy council, they were still sent back to prison. It was enacted that “no freeman in any such manner as mentioned above be imprisoned or detained.” The Petition of Right was ignored in Selden’s case (1629), when it was successfully argued that Selden and others were committed by the king’s special command “for significant contempt against the king and his government and for inciting sedition against him.”2 This prompted legislation in 1640 that, after abolishing the Star Chamber, granted the right to a habeas corpus to challenge the legality of commitments by order or warrant of the king or the privy council.3

The reign of Charles II. was marked by further progress towards securing the freedom of the subject from wrongful imprisonment. Lord Clarendon was impeached, inter alia, for causing many persons to be imprisoned against law and to be conveyed in custody to places outside England. In 1668 a writ of habeas corpus was issued to test the legality of an imprisonment in Jersey. Though the authority of the courts had been strengthened by the Petition of Right and the act of 1640, it was still rendered insufficient by reason of the insecurity of judicial tenure, the fact that only the chancellor (a political as well as a legal officer) and the court of king’s bench had undoubted right to issue the writ, and the inability or hesitation of the competent judges to issue the writ except during the legal term, which did not cover more than half the year. A series of bills was passed through the Commons between 1668 and 1675, only to be rejected by the other House. In Jenkes’s case (1676) Lord Chancellor Nottingham refused to issue the writ in vacation in a case in which a man had been committed by the king in council for a speech at Guildhall, and could get neither bail nor trial. In 1679, but rather in consequence of Lord Clarendon’s arbitrary proceedings4 than of Jenkes’s case, a fresh bill was introduced which passed both Houses (it is said the upper House by the counting of one stout peer as ten) and became the famous Habeas Corpus Act of 1679 (31 Car. II. c. 2). The passing of the act was largely due to the experience and energy of Lord Shaftesbury, after whom it was for some time called. The act, while a most important landmark in the constitutional history of England, in no sense creates any right to personal freedom, but is essentially a procedure act for improving the legal mechanism by means of which that acknowledged right may be enforced.5 785 It declares no principles and defines no rights, but is for practical purposes worth a hundred articles guaranteeing constitutional liberty.6

The reign of Charles II was marked by further progress in securing people's freedom from wrongful imprisonment. Lord Clarendon was impeached, inter alia, for imprisoning many individuals unlawfully and transporting them outside England. In 1668, a writ of habeas corpus was issued to challenge the legality of an imprisonment in Jersey. Although the authority of the courts had been bolstered by the Petition of Right and the act of 1640, it was still inadequate due to the instability of judicial positions, the fact that only the chancellor (who held political and legal roles) and the court of king’s bench had the undisputed right to issue the writ, and the reluctance or inability of qualified judges to issue the writ outside of the legal terms, which spanned less than half the year. A series of bills was presented in the Commons between 1668 and 1675, but they were rejected by the other House. In Jenkes’s case (1676), Lord Chancellor Nottingham refused to issue the writ during vacation concerning a man committed by the king in council for a speech at Guildhall, who could neither obtain bail nor face trial. In 1679, more due to Lord Clarendon’s arbitrary actions than Jenkes’s case, a new bill was introduced that passed both Houses (reportedly the upper House counted one strong peer as ten) and became the famous Habeas Corpus Act of 1679 (31 Car. II. c. 2). The act’s passage was largely thanks to the experience and determination of Lord Shaftesbury, after whom it was named for a time. While the act is a significant milestone in England's constitutional history, it does not establish any right to personal freedom; rather, it is a procedural act aimed at enhancing the legal framework for enforcing that recognized right. 5 785 It declares no principles and defines no rights, but for practical purposes, it's worth a hundred articles guaranteeing constitutional liberty.6

In the manner characteristic of English legislation the act is limited to the particular grievances immediately in view and is limited to imprisonment for criminal or supposed criminal matters, leaving untouched imprisonment on civil process or by private persons. It recites that great delays have been used by sheriffs and gaolers in making returns of writs of habeas corpus directed to them; and for the prevention thereof, and the more speedy relief of all persons imprisoned for criminal or supposed criminal matters, it enacts in substance as follows: (1) When a writ of habeas corpus is directed to a sheriff or other person in charge of a prisoner, he must within 3, 10 or 20 days, according to the distance of the place of commitment, bring the body of his prisoner to the court, with the true cause of his detainer or imprisonment—unless the commitment was for treason or felony plainly expressed in the warrant of commitment. (2) If any person be committed for any crime—unless for treason or felony plainly expressed in the warrant—it shall be lawful for such person or persons (other than persons convicted or in execution by legal process) in time of vacation, to appeal to the lord chancellor as a judge, who shall issue a habeas corpus returnable immediately, and on the return thereof shall discharge the prisoner on giving security for his appearance before the proper court—unless the party so committed is detained upon a legal process or under a justice’s warrant for a non-bailable offence. Persons neglecting for two terms to pray for a habeas corpus shall have none in vacation. (3) Persons set at large on habeas corpus shall not be recommitted for the same offence unless by the legal order and process of the court having cognizance of the case. (4) A person committed to prison for treason or felony shall, if he requires it, in the first week of the next term or the first day of the next session of oyer and terminer, be indicted in that term or session or else admitted to bail, unless it appears on affidavit that the witnesses for the crown are not ready; and if he is not indicted and tried in the second term or session after commitment, or if after trial he is acquitted, he shall be discharged from imprisonment. (5) No inhabitant of England (except persons contracting, or, after conviction for felony, electing to be transported) shall be sent prisoner to Scotland, Ireland, Jersey, &c., or any place beyond the seas. Stringent penalties are provided for offences against the act. A judge delaying habeas corpus forfeits £500 to the party aggrieved. Illegal imprisonment beyond seas renders the offender liable in an action by the injured party to treble costs and damages to the extent of not less than £500, besides subjecting him to the penalties of praemunire and to other disabilities. “The great rank of those who were likely to offend against this part of the statute was,” says Hallam, “the cause of this unusual severity.” Indeed as early as 1591 the judges had complained of the difficulty of enforcing the writ in the case of imprisonment at the instance of magnates of the realm. The effect of the act was to impose upon the judges under severe sanction the duty of protecting personal liberty in the case of criminal charges and of securing speedy trial upon such charges when legally framed; and the improvement of their tenure of office at the revolution, coupled with the veto put by the Bill of Rights on excessive bail, gave the judicature the independence and authority necessary to enable them to keep the executive within the law and to restrain administrative development of the scope or penalties of the criminal law; and this power of the judiciary to control the executive, coupled with the limitations on the right to set up “act of state” as an excuse for infringing individual liberty is the special characteristic of English constitutional law.

In a way typical of English law, this act focuses on specific complaints and is limited to imprisonment for criminal or allegedly criminal issues, without addressing imprisonment due to civil processes or by private individuals. It notes the significant delays by sheriffs and jailers in responding to writs of habeas corpus sent to them; to prevent this and to provide quicker relief for all individuals imprisoned for criminal or supposed criminal reasons, it essentially establishes the following: (1) When a writ of habeas corpus is sent to a sheriff or another person responsible for a prisoner, they must bring the prisoner to court within 3, 10, or 20 days, depending on how far away the commitment location is, along with the true reason for their detention—unless the commitment is for treason or felony clearly stated in the warrant. (2) If anyone is imprisoned for a crime—unless it’s for treason or felony clearly stated in the warrant—they have the right, during vacation, to appeal to the lord chancellor as a judge, who must issue a habeas corpus returnable immediately, and once returned, shall release the prisoner upon providing security for their appearance in the appropriate court—unless the person is held under a legal process or a justice's warrant for a non-bailable offense. Anyone who fails to seek a habeas corpus for two terms will not have one during vacation. (3) Individuals released on habeas corpus cannot be re-arrested for the same offense unless by legal order and process from the court overseeing the case. (4) A person imprisoned for treason or felony must, if they request it, be indicted in the first week of the next term or on the first day of the next session of oyer and terminer, or else granted bail, unless an affidavit shows the crown's witnesses are not ready; if not indicted or tried in the second term or session after commitment, or if acquitted after trial, they must be released from imprisonment. (5) No resident of England (except those contracting or, after conviction for felony, choosing to be transported) can be sent to prison in Scotland, Ireland, Jersey, etc., or any place overseas. Strict penalties are imposed for violations of the act. A judge who delays habeas corpus forfeits £500 to the aggrieved party. Illegal imprisonment overseas makes the offender liable in an action by the injured party for triple costs and damages of no less than £500, in addition to being subject to the penalties of praemunire and other restrictions. “The high status of those likely to breach this part of the statute was,” says Hallam, “the reason for this unusual severity.” As early as 1591, judges complained about the challenges of enforcing the writ in cases of imprisonment instigated by powerful figures. The act’s impact was to compel judges, under severe penalties, to protect personal freedom in criminal cases and to ensure prompt trials for such charges when legally appropriate; the improvement of their job security during the revolution, along with the restrictions imposed by the Bill of Rights on excessive bail, provided judges the independence and authority needed to hold the executive accountable to the law and to limit the administrative expansion of criminal law’s scope or penalties; this power of the judiciary to check the executive, combined with the constraints on using “act of state” as an excuse for infringing individual liberties, is a distinctive feature of English constitutional law.

It is to be observed that neither at common law nor under the act of 1679 was the writ the appropriate remedy in the case of a person convicted either on indictment or summarily. It properly applied to persons detained before or without trial or sentence; and for convicted persons the proper remedy was by writs of error or certiorari to which a writ of habeas corpus might be used as ancillary.

It should be noted that neither under common law nor the 1679 act was the writ the right remedy for someone convicted either through indictment or summary proceedings. It was meant for people held before or without a trial or sentence; for convicted individuals, the appropriate remedy was through writs of error or certiorari, and a writ of habeas corpus could be used as a secondary option.

As regards persons imprisoned for debt or on civil process the writ was available at common law to test the legality of the detention: but the practice in these cases is unaffected by the act of 1679, and is of no present interest, since imprisonment on civil process is almost abolished. As regards persons in private custody, e.g. persons not sui juris detained by those not entitled to their guardianship or lunatics, or persons kidnapped, habeas corpus ad subjiciendum seems not to have been the ordinary common law remedy. The appropriate writ for such cases was that known as de homine replegiando. The use of this writ in most if not all criminal cases was forbidden in 1553; but it was used in the 17th century in a case of kidnapping (Designy’s case, 1682), and against Lord Grey for abducting his wife’s sister (1682), and in the earl of Banbury’s case to recover his wife (1704). The latest recorded instance of its use is Trebilcock’s case (1736), in which a ward sought to free himself from the custody of his guardian.

When it comes to people imprisoned for debt or through civil processes, the writ was available at common law to challenge the legality of their detention. However, the practices surrounding these cases remain unaffected by the act of 1679 and are no longer significant, as imprisonment for civil matters has almost been abolished. Regarding individuals held in private custody, such as those not legally capable of handling their own affairs who are kept by those not legally allowed to be their guardians, or the mentally ill, or kidnapping victims, habeas corpus ad subjiciendum doesn’t seem to have been the standard remedy at common law. Instead, the proper writ for such cases was known as de homine replegiando. The use of this writ in most, if not all, criminal cases was banned in 1553; however, it was utilized in the 17th century in a kidnapping case (Designy’s case, 1682), against Lord Grey for abducting his wife’s sister (1682), and in the case of the Earl of Banbury to recover his wife (1704). The most recent recorded use of it was in Trebilcock’s case (1736), where a ward sought to free himself from his guardian’s custody.

Since that date the habeas corpus ad subjiciendum has been used in cases of illegal detention in private custody. In 1758 questions arose as to its application to persons in naval or military custody, including pressed men, which led to the introduction of a bill in parliament and to the consultation by the House of Lords of the judges (see Wilmot’s Opinions, p. 77). In the same year the writ was used to release the wife of Earl Ferrers from his custody and maltreatment, and was unsuccessfully applied for by John Wilkes to get back his wife, who was separated from him by mutual agreement. But perhaps the most interesting instances of that period are the case of the negro Somerset (1771), who was released from a claim to hold him as a slave in England: and that of the Hottentot Venus (1810), where an alien woman on exhibition in England was brought before the court by Zachary Macaulay in order to ascertain whether she was detained against her will.

Since that date, the habeas corpus ad subjiciendum has been used in cases of illegal detention in private custody. In 1758, questions came up about its application to people in naval or military custody, including pressed men, which led to the introduction of a bill in parliament and the House of Lords consulting the judges (see Wilmot’s Opinions, p. 77). In the same year, the writ was used to free the wife of Earl Ferrers from his custody and mistreatment, while John Wilkes unsuccessfully tried to apply for it to get his wife back, who was separated from him by mutual agreement. But perhaps the most interesting cases from that period are the case of the black man Somerset (1771), who was freed from a claim to hold him as a slave in England, and the case of the Hottentot Venus (1810), where an alien woman on exhibit in England was brought before the court by Zachary Macaulay to determine if she was being held against her will.

The experience of the 18th century disclosed defects in the procedure for obtaining liberty in cases not covered by the act of 1679. But it was not till 1816 that further legislation was passed for more effectually securing the liberty of the subject. The act of 1816 (56 Geo. III. c. 100), does not touch cases covered by the act of 1679. It enacts (1) that a writ of habeas corpus shall be issued in vacation time in favour of a person restrained of his liberty otherwise than for some criminal or supposed criminal matter (except persons imprisoned for debt or by civil process); (2) that though the return to the writ be good and sufficient in law, the judge shall examine into the truth of the facts set forth in such return, and if they appear doubtful the prisoner shall be bailed; (3) that the writ shall run to any port, harbour, road, creek or bay on the coast of England, although not within the body of any county. The last clause was intended to meet doubts on the applicability of habeas corpus in cases of illegal detention on board ship, which had been raised owing to a case of detention on a foreign ship in an English port.

The events of the 18th century revealed flaws in the process of obtaining freedom in situations not addressed by the act of 1679. However, it wasn't until 1816 that more legislation was enacted to better protect individuals' liberty. The act of 1816 (56 Geo. III. c. 100) does not address cases already covered by the act of 1679. It states (1) that a writ of habeas corpus shall be issued during vacation time for someone whose freedom is restricted for reasons other than a criminal or allegedly criminal matter (except for those imprisoned for debt or through civil proceedings); (2) that even if the return to the writ is legally valid and sufficient, the judge must investigate the accuracy of the facts provided in that return, and if they seem questionable, the prisoner should be granted bail; (3) that the writ shall apply to any port, harbor, road, creek, or bay on the coast of England, even if it's not within the boundaries of any county. The final clause was meant to clarify concerns about the applicability of habeas corpus in cases of unlawful detention onboard a ship, which arose from a situation involving detention on a foreign ship in an English port.

It will appear from the foregoing statement that the issue and enforcement of the writ rests on the common law as strengthened by the acts of 1627, 1640, 1679 and 1816, and subject also to the regulations as to procedure contained in the Crown Office Rules, 1906. The effect of the statutes is to keep the courts always open for the issue of the writ. It is available to put an end to all forms of illegal detention in public or private custody. In the case of the Canadian prisoners (1839) it was used to obtain the release of persons sentenced in Canada for participating in the rebellion of 1837, who were being conveyed throughout England in custody on their way to imprisonment in another part of the empire, and it is matter of frequent experience for the courts to review the legality of commitments under the Extradition Acts and the Fugitive Offenders Act 1881, of fugitives from the justice of a foreign state or parts of the king’s dominions outside the British Islands.

It will be clear from the previous statement that the issue and enforcement of the writ are based on common law, supported by the acts of 1627, 1640, 1679, and 1816, and also subject to the procedural regulations outlined in the Crown Office Rules, 1906. The statutes ensure that the courts are always available to issue the writ. It can be used to end all types of illegal detention, whether in public or private custody. In the case of the Canadian prisoners (1839), it was used to secure the release of individuals sentenced in Canada for their involvement in the 1837 rebellion, who were being transported through England while in custody on their way to imprisonment in another part of the empire. It's common for the courts to review the legality of commitments made under the Extradition Acts and the Fugitive Offenders Act 1881, concerning fugitives fleeing justice from a foreign state or areas of the king’s dominions outside the British Islands.

In times of public danger it has occasionally been thought necessary to “suspend” the Habeas Corpus Act 1679 by special and temporary legislation. This was done in 1794 (by an act 786 annually renewed until 1801) and again in 1817, as to persons arrested and detained by his majesty for conspiring against his person and government. The same course was adopted in Ireland in 1866 during a Fenian rising. It has been the practice to make such acts annual and to follow their expiration by an act of indemnity. In cases where martial law exists the use of the writ is ex hypothesi suspended during conditions amounting to a state of war within the realm or the British possession affected (e.g. the Cape Colony and Natal during the South African War), and it would seem that the acts of courts martial during the period are not the subject of review by the ordinary courts. The so-called “suspension of the Habeas Corpus Act” bears a certain similarity to what is called in Europe “suspending the constitutional guarantees” or “proclaiming a state of siege,” but “is not in reality more than suspension of one particular remedy for the protection of personal freedom.”

In times of public danger, it has sometimes been seen as necessary to “suspend” the Habeas Corpus Act of 1679 through special and temporary legislation. This happened in 1794 (by an act 786 that was renewed every year until 1801) and again in 1817, regarding individuals arrested and held by the king for conspiring against his life and government. A similar approach was taken in Ireland in 1866 during a Fenian uprising. It has been standard practice to make these acts annual and follow their expiration with an act of indemnity. When martial law is in effect, the use of the writ is ex hypothesi suspended under conditions that are like a state of war within the realm or affected British territory (e.g., the Cape Colony and Natal during the South African War), and it seems that the actions of courts martial during this time are not subject to review by regular courts. The so-called “suspension of the Habeas Corpus Act” is somewhat similar to what is referred to in Europe as “suspending constitutional guarantees” or “proclaiming a state of siege,” but “is not really more than a suspension of one specific remedy for protecting personal freedom.”

There are various other forms of the writ according to the purpose for which it is granted. Thus habeas corpus ad respondendum is used to bring up a prisoner confined by the process of an inferior court in order to charge him in another proceeding (civil or criminal) in the superior court or some other court. As regards civil proceedings, this form of the writ is now rarely used, owing to the abolition of arrest on mesne process and the restriction of imprisonment for debt, or in execution of a civil judgment. The right to issue the writ depends on the common law, supplemented by an act of 1802. It is occasionally used for the purpose of bringing a person in custody for debt or on a criminal charge before a criminal court to be charged in respect of a criminal proceeding: but the same result may be obtained by means of an order of a secretary of state, made under s. 11 of the Prison Act 1898, or by the written order of a court of criminal jurisdiction before which he is required to take his trial on indictment (Criminal Law Amendment Act 30 & 31 Vict. c. 35, s. 10.)

There are different types of the writ depending on its intended purpose. For example, habeas corpus ad respondendum is used to retrieve a prisoner held by a lower court so that they can be accused in another case (either civil or criminal) in a higher court or another court. In terms of civil cases, this type of writ is now rarely used because the practice of arresting someone for civil matters has been abolished, along with the restrictions on imprisoning individuals for debt or for enforcing a civil judgment. The right to issue the writ is based on common law, along with a law from 1802. It is sometimes used to bring someone in custody for debt or a criminal charge before a criminal court for a criminal case. However, the same result can be achieved through an order from a secretary of state, as stated in section 11 of the Prison Act 1898, or through a written order from a criminal court where the individual is required to face trial on indictment (Criminal Law Amendment Act 30 & 31 Vict. c. 35, s. 10.)

Other forms are ad satisfaciendum; ad faciendum et recipiendum, to remove into a superior court proceedings under which the defendant is in custody: ad testificandum, where a prisoner is required as a witness, issued under an act of 1804 (s. 11), which is in practice replaced by orders under s. 11 of the Prison Act 1898 (supra) or the order of a judge under s. 9 of the Criminal Procedure Act 1853: and ad deliberandum et recipias, to authorize the transfer from one custody to another for purposes of trial, which is in practice superseded by the provisions of the Prison Acts 1865, 1871 and 1898, and the Criminal Law Amendment Act 1867 (supra).

Other forms are ad satisfaciendum; ad faciendum et recipiendum, to transfer to a higher court proceedings where the defendant is in custody: ad testificandum, when a prisoner is needed as a witness, issued under an act from 1804 (s. 11), which is now mostly replaced by orders under s. 11 of the Prison Act 1898 (supra) or an order from a judge under s. 9 of the Criminal Procedure Act 1853: and ad deliberandum et recipias, to permit the transfer from one custody to another for trial purposes, which is largely superseded by the provisions of the Prison Acts 1865, 1871, and 1898, and the Criminal Law Amendment Act 1867 (supra).

The above forms are now of little or no importance; but the procedure for obtaining them and the forms of writ are included in the Crown Office Rules 1906.

The forms mentioned above are now of little or no importance, but the process for acquiring them and the types of writ are included in the Crown Office Rules 1906.

Ireland.—The common law of Ireland as to the writs of habeas corpus is the same as that in England. The writ has in past times been issued from the English court of king’s bench into Ireland; but does not now so issue. The acts of 1803 and 1816 already mentioned apply to Ireland. The Petition of Right is not in terms applicable to Ireland. The Habeas Corpus Act 1679 does not apply to Ireland; but its equivalent is supplied by an act of 1781-1782 of the Irish parliament (21 & 22 Geo. III. c. 11). Sec. 16 contains a provision empowering the chief governor and privy council of Ireland by a proclamation under the great seal of Ireland to suspend the act during such time only as there shall be an actual invasion or rebellion in Ireland; and it is enacted that during the currency of the proclamation no judge or justices shall bail or try any person charged with being concerned in the rebellion or invasion without an order from the lord lieutenant or lord deputy and senior of the privy council. In Ireland by an act of 1881 the Irish executive was given an absolute power of arbitrary and preventive arrest on suspicion of treason or of an act tending to interfere with the maintenance of law and order: but the warrant of arrest was made conclusive. This act continued by annual renewals until 1906, when it expired.

Ireland.—The common law regarding writs of habeas corpus in Ireland is the same as in England. In the past, the writ was issued from the English court of king’s bench to Ireland; however, that is no longer the case. The acts of 1803 and 1816 mentioned earlier apply to Ireland. The Petition of Right is not specifically applicable to Ireland. The Habeas Corpus Act of 1679 does not apply to Ireland, but a similar law was enacted by the Irish parliament in 1781-1782 (21 & 22 Geo. III. c. 11). Section 16 includes a provision that allows the chief governor and privy council of Ireland to suspend the act through a proclamation under the great seal of Ireland during times of actual invasion or rebellion in Ireland. It is also stated that while the proclamation is in effect, no judge or justices shall bail or try anyone charged with involvement in the rebellion or invasion without an order from the lord lieutenant, lord deputy, and senior member of the privy council. In Ireland, an act of 1881 granted the Irish executive the absolute power of arbitrary and preventive arrest on suspicion of treason or actions that might disrupt law and order; however, the arrest warrant was made conclusive. This act was renewed annually until 1906, when it expired.

Scotland.—The writ of habeas corpus is unknown to Scots law, nor will it issue from English courts into Scotland. Under a Scots act of 1701 (c. 6) provision is made for preventing wrongous imprisonment and against undue delay in trials. It was applied to treason felony in 1848. The right to speedy trial is now regulated by s. 43 of the Criminal Procedure Scotland Act 1887. These enactments are as to Scotland equivalent to the English Act of 1679. Under the Court of Exchequer Scotland Act 1856 (19 & 20 V. c. 56) provision is made for bringing before the court of session persons and proceedings before inferior courts and public officers—which is analogous to the powers to issue habeas corpus in such cases out of the English court of exchequer (now the revenue side of the king’s bench division).

Scotland.—The writ of habeas corpus isn't recognized in Scots law, nor can it be issued from English courts into Scotland. A Scots act from 1701 (c. 6) establishes measures to prevent wrongful imprisonment and address unnecessary delays in trials. This was applied to treason felony in 1848. The right to a speedy trial is now governed by s. 43 of the Criminal Procedure Scotland Act 1887. These laws are equivalent to the English Act of 1679 for Scotland. The Court of Exchequer Scotland Act 1856 (19 & 20 V. c. 56) provides for bringing individuals and cases from lower courts and public officials before the Court of Session, which is similar to the powers to issue habeas corpus in such cases from the English Court of Exchequer (now the revenue side of the King’s Bench Division).

British Possessions.—The act of 1679 expressly applies to Wales, Berwick-on-Tweed, Jersey and Guernsey, and the act of 1816 also extends to the Isle of Man. The court of king’s bench has also issued the writ to the king’s foreign dominions beyond seas, e.g. to St Helena, and so late as 1861 to Canada (Anderson’s case 1861, 30 L.J.Q.B. 129). In consequence of the last decision it was provided by the Habeas Corpus Act 1862 that no writ of habeas corpus should issue out of England by authority of any court or judge “into any colony or foreign dominion of the crown where the crown has a lawfully established court of justice having authority to grant or issue the writ and to ensure its due execution in the ‘colony’ or dominion” (25 & 26 V. c. 20). The expression “foreign dominion” is meant to apply to places outside the British Islands, and does not include the Isle of Man or the Channel Islands (see re Brown [1864], 33 L.J.Q.B. 193).

British Possessions.—The act of 1679 specifically applies to Wales, Berwick-on-Tweed, Jersey, and Guernsey, and the act of 1816 also includes the Isle of Man. The court of king’s bench has issued the writ to the king’s overseas territories, e.g. to St Helena, and as recently as 1861 to Canada (Anderson’s case 1861, 30 L.J.Q.B. 129). Following the last decision, the Habeas Corpus Act 1862 stated that no writ of habeas corpus should be issued from England by any court or judge “into any colony or foreign territory of the crown where the crown has a lawfully established court of justice that has the authority to grant or issue the writ and to ensure its proper execution in the ‘colony’ or territory” (25 & 26 V. c. 20). The term “foreign dominion” refers to areas outside the British Islands and does not include the Isle of Man or the Channel Islands (see re Brown [1864], 33 L.J.Q.B. 193).

In Australasia and Canada and in most if not all the British possessions whose law is based on the common law, the power to issue and enforce the writ is possessed and is freely exercised by colonial courts, under the charters or statutes creating and regulating the courts. The writ is freely resorted to in Canada, and in 1905, 1906, two appeals came to the privy council from the dominion, one with reference to an extradition case, the other with respect to the right to expel aliens.

In Australasia, Canada, and in most, if not all, British territories where the law is based on common law, colonial courts have the power to issue and enforce the writ, which they actively use according to the charters or statutes that established and govern the courts. The writ is commonly utilized in Canada, and in 1905 and 1906, two cases were appealed to the Privy Council from the Dominion, one concerning an extradition matter and the other related to the authority to expel aliens.

Under the Roman-Dutch law as applied in British Guiana the writ was unknown and no similar process existed (2nd report of West Indian law commissioners). But by the Supreme Court Ordinance of 1893 that court possesses (inter alia) all the authorities, powers and functions belonging to or incident to a superior court of record in England, which appears to include the power to issue the writ of habeas corpus. Under the Roman-Dutch law as applied to South Africa free persons appear to have a right to release under a writ de libero homine exhibendo, which closely resembles the writ of habeas corpus, and the procedure described as “manifestation” used in the kingdom of Aragon (Hallam, Middle Ages, vol. ii., c. iv.). The writ of habeas corpus has not been formally adopted or the Habeas Corpus Acts formally extended to South Africa; but in the Cape Colony, under the charter of justice and colonial legislation, the supreme court on petition grants a remedy equivalent to that obtained in England by writ of habeas corpus; and the remedy is sometimes so described (Koke v. Balie, 1879, 9 Buchanan, 45, 64, arising out of a rising in Griqualand). During and after the South African War of 1899-1902 many attempts were made by this procedure to challenge or review the sentences of courts martial; see re Fourie (1900). 18 Cape Rep. 8.

Under Roman-Dutch law as applied in British Guiana, the writ was unknown and no similar process existed (2nd report of West Indian law commissioners). However, the Supreme Court Ordinance of 1893 grants that court (inter alia) all the authorities, powers, and functions associated with a superior court of record in England, which seems to include the power to issue the writ of habeas corpus. Under Roman-Dutch law as applied in South Africa, free individuals appear to have the right to release under a writ de libero homine exhibendo, which closely resembles the writ of habeas corpus, and the process known as “manifestation” used in the kingdom of Aragon (Hallam, Middle Ages, vol. ii., c. iv.). The writ of habeas corpus has not been formally adopted nor have the Habeas Corpus Acts been formally extended to South Africa; but in the Cape Colony, under the charter of justice and colonial legislation, the supreme court grants a remedy on petition that is equivalent to that obtained in England by writ of habeas corpus; and the remedy is sometimes referred to as such (Koke v. Balie, 1879, 9 Buchanan, 45, 64, arising out of a rising in Griqualand). During and after the South African War of 1899-1902, many attempts were made using this procedure to challenge or review the sentences of courts martial; see re Fourie (1900). 18 Cape Rep. 8.

The laws of Ceylon being derived from the Roman-Dutch law, the writ of habeas corpus is not indigenous: but, under s. 49 of the Supreme Court Ordinance 1889, the court or a judge has power to grant and issue “mandates in the nature of writs of habeas corpus.” The chartered high courts in India have power to issue and enforce the writ of habeas corpus. The earliest record of its use was in 1775, when it was directed to Warren Hastings. It has been used to test the question whether Roman Catholic religious orders could enter India, and in 1870 an attempt was made thereby to challenge the validity of a warrant in the nature of a lettre de cachet issued by the viceroy (Ind. L. Rep. 6 Bengal, 392, 456, 498), and it has also been applied to settle controversies between Hindus and missionaries as to the custody of a young convert (R. v. Vaughan, 1870, 5 Bengal, 418), and between a Mahommedan husband and his mother-in-law as to the custody of a girl-wife (Khatija Bibi, 1870, 5 Bengal, 557).

The laws of Ceylon come from Roman-Dutch law, so the writ of habeas corpus isn’t a native practice. However, under section 49 of the Supreme Court Ordinance 1889, the court or a judge can grant and issue “mandates in the nature of writs of habeas corpus.” The chartered high courts in India have the authority to issue and enforce the writ of habeas corpus. The first recorded use of it was in 1775, when it was directed at Warren Hastings. It has been used to challenge whether Roman Catholic religious orders could enter India, and in 1870, there was an effort to contest the validity of a warrant similar to a lettre de cachet issued by the viceroy (Ind. L. Rep. 6 Bengal, 392, 456, 498). It has also been used to resolve disputes between Hindus and missionaries over custody of a young convert (R. v. Vaughan, 1870, 5 Bengal, 418), and between a Muslim husband and his mother-in-law regarding custody of a young wife (Khatija Bibi, 1870, 5 Bengal, 557).

United States.—Before the Declaration of Independence some of the North American colonies had adopted the act of 1679; and the federal and the other state legislatures of the United States have founded their procedure on that act. The common law as to the writ of habeas corpus has been inherited from England, and has been generally made to apply to commitments and detentions of all kinds. Difficult questions, unknown to English law, have arisen from the peculiar features of the American state-system. Thus the constitution provides that “the privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended unless when, in cases of rebellion or invasion, the public safety may require it”; and it has been the subject of much dispute whether the power of suspension under this provision is vested in the president or the congress. The weight of opinion seems to lean to the latter alternative. Again, conflicts have arisen between the courts of individual states and the courts of the union. It seems that a state court has no right to issue a habeas corpus for the discharge of a person held under the authority of the federal government. On the other hand, the courts of the union issue the writ only in those cases in which the power is expressly conferred on them by the constitution.

United States.—Before the Declaration of Independence, some of the North American colonies adopted the act of 1679. Since then, the federal and state legislatures in the United States have based their procedures on that act. The common law regarding the writ of habeas corpus comes from England and generally applies to all types of commitments and detentions. Difficult questions have emerged due to the unique features of the American state system that aren't present in English law. The Constitution states that “the privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended unless, in cases of rebellion or invasion, the public safety may require it”; there has been much debate over whether the power to suspend it rests with the president or Congress. Most opinions suggest it leans toward Congress. Additionally, conflicts have arisen between state courts and federal courts. It appears that a state court cannot issue a habeas corpus for the release of a person held by the federal government. Conversely, federal courts can issue the writ only in cases where the Constitution explicitly grants them that power.

Authorities.—Paterson, Liberty of the Subject (1877); Short and Mellor, Crown Practice (1890); American: Church on Habeas Corpus (2nd ed. 1893).

Authorities.—Paterson, Liberty of the Subject (1877); Short and Mellor, Crown Practice (1890); American: Church on Habeas Corpus (2nd ed. 1893).

(W. F. C.)

1 See Hallam, Const. Hist. vol. i., c. vii. (12th ed.) p. 384.

1 See Hallam, Const. Hist. vol. i., c. vii. (12th ed.) p. 384.

2 Hallam, Const. Hist. vol. ii., c. viii. (12th ed.) p. 2.

2 Hallam, Const. Hist. vol. ii., c. viii. (12th ed.) p. 2.

3 Ibid. c. ix. (12th ed.) p. 98.

3 Same source. c. ix. (12th ed.) p. 98.

4 Ibid. vol. iii., c. xiii. (12th ed.) p. 12.

4 Ibid. vol. iii., c. xiii. (12th ed.) p. 12.

5 Dicey, Law of the Constitution (6th ed.), p. 217.

5 Dicey, Law of the Constitution (6th ed.), p. 217.

6 Dicey, Law of the Constitution (6th ed.), p. 195.

6 Dicey, Law of the Constitution (6th ed.), p. 195.


HABERDASHER, a name for a tradesman who sells by retail small articles used in the making or wearing of dress, such as sewing cottons or silks, tapes, buttons, pins and needles and the like. The sale of such articles is not generally carried on alone, and a “haberdashery counter” usually forms a department of 787 drapers’ shops. The word, found in Chaucer, and even earlier (1311), is of obscure origin; the suggestion that it is connected with an Icelandic haprtask, “haversack,” is, according to the New English Dictionary, impossible. Haperlas occurs in an early Anglo-French customs list, which includes articles such as were sold by haberdashers, but this word may itself have been a misspelling of “haberdash.” The obscurity of origin has left room for many conjectures such as that of Minsheu that “haberdasher” was perhaps merely a corruption of the German Habt ihr das? “Have you that?” or Habe das, Herr, “Have that, sir,” used descriptively for a general dealer in miscellaneous wares. The Haberdashers’ Company is one of the greater Livery Companies of the City of London. Originally a branch of the mercers, the fraternity took over the selling of “small wares,” which included not only articles similar to those sold as “haberdashery” now, but such things as gloves, daggers, glass, pens, lanterns, mousetraps and the like. They were thus on this side connected with the Milliners. On the other hand there was early a fusion with the old gild of the “Hurers,” or cap makers, and the hatters, and by the reign of Henry VII. the amalgamation was complete. There were long recognized two branches of the haberdashers, the haberdashers of “small wares,” and the haberdashers of hats (see further Livery Companies). The haberdashers are named, side by side with the capellarii, in the White Book (Liber Albus) of the city of London (see Munimenta Gildhallae Londiniensis, ed. H. T. Riley, Rolls Series, 12, 1859-1862), and a haberdasher forms one of the company of pilgrims in the Canterbury Tales (Prologue, 361).

HABERDASHER, a term for a tradesperson who sells small items used for making or wearing clothes, like sewing threads, tapes, buttons, pins, and needles. The sale of these items usually isn't done alone, and a "haberdashery counter" is typically part of 787 drapers' shops. The word, which appears in Chaucer and even earlier (1311), has an unclear origin; the idea that it's related to an Icelandic haprtask, meaning "haversack," is considered impossible by the New English Dictionary. Haperlas shows up in an early Anglo-French customs list, which includes items that haberdashers sold, but this word might have been a misspelling of "haberdash." The uncertainty around its origin has led to various theories, such as Minsheu's suggestion that "haberdasher" could simply be a corruption of the German Habt ihr das?, meaning "Have you that?" or Habe das, Herr, meaning "Have that, sir," used to describe a general seller of miscellaneous goods. The Haberdashers' Company is one of the major Livery Companies in the City of London. Originally a part of the mercers, this group took over the sale of "small wares," which included not only items similar to what's now called "haberdashery," but also gloves, daggers, glass, pens, lanterns, mousetraps, and more. This connected them with the Milliners. On the other hand, there was an early merging with the old guild of the "Hurers," or cap makers, and the hatters, leading to a full amalgamation by the reign of Henry VII. Two branches of haberdashers have been recognized for a long time: the haberdashers of "small wares" and the haberdashers of hats (see further Livery Companies). The haberdashers are mentioned alongside the capellarii in the White Book (Liber Albus) of the city of London (see Munimenta Gildhallae Londiniensis, ed. H. T. Riley, Rolls Series, 12, 1859-1862), and a haberdasher is one of the pilgrims in the Canterbury Tales (Prologue, 361).


HABINGTON, WILLIAM (1605-1654), English poet, was born at Hendlip Hall, Worcestershire, on the 4th of November 1605. He belonged to a well-known Catholic family. His father, Thomas Habington (1560-1647), an antiquary and historical scholar, had been implicated in the plots on behalf of Mary queen of Scots; his uncle, Edward Habington, was hanged in 1586 on the charge of conspiring against Elizabeth in connexion with Anthony Babington; while to his mother, Mary Habington, was attributed the revelation of the Gunpowder Plot. The poet was sent to the college at St Omer, but, pressure being brought to bear on him to induce him to become a Jesuit, he removed to Paris. He married about 1632 Lucy, second daughter of Sir William Herbert, first Baron Powys. This lady he had addressed in the volume of lyrical poems arranged in two parts and entitled Castara, published anonymously in 1634. In 1635 appeared a second edition enlarged by three prose characters, fourteen new lyrics and eight touching elegies on his friend and kinsman, George Talbot. The third edition (1640) contains a third part consisting of a prose character of “A Holy Man” and twenty-two devotional poems. Habington’s lyrics are full of the far-fetched “conceits” which were fashionable at court, but his verse is quite free from the prevailing looseness of morals. Indeed his reiterated praises of Castara’s virtue grow wearisome. He is at his best in his reflective poems on the uncertainty of human life and kindred topics. He also wrote a Historie of Edward the Fourth (1640), based on notes provided by his father; a tragi-comedy, The Queene of Arragon (1640), published without his consent by his kinsman, the earl of Pembroke, and revived at the Restoration; and six essays on events in modern history, Observations upon History (1641). Anthony à Wood insinuated that during the Commonwealth the poet “did run with the times, and was not unknown to Oliver the usurper.” He died on the 30th of November 1654.

HABINGTON, WILLIAM (1605-1654), English poet, was born at Hendlip Hall, Worcestershire, on November 4, 1605. He came from a prominent Catholic family. His father, Thomas Habington (1560-1647), an antiquarian and historical scholar, was involved in the plots for Mary Queen of Scots; his uncle, Edward Habington, was executed in 1586 for conspiring against Elizabeth in connection with Anthony Babington; and his mother, Mary Habington, was linked to the revelation of the Gunpowder Plot. The poet attended college at St Omer, but when he faced pressure to become a Jesuit, he moved to Paris. He married around 1632 Lucy, the second daughter of Sir William Herbert, first Baron Powys. He addressed her in the volume of lyrical poems organized in two parts and titled Castara, which was published anonymously in 1634. A second edition came out in 1635, expanded with three prose characters, fourteen new lyrics, and eight touching elegies for his friend and relative, George Talbot. The third edition (1640) included a third part with a prose character of “A Holy Man” and twenty-two devotional poems. Habington’s lyrics are filled with the elaborate “conceits” that were popular at court, but his verses are notably free from the prevailing moral looseness. In fact, his repeated praises of Castara’s virtue can become tiresome. He is at his best in his reflective poems about the uncertainty of human life and related themes. He also wrote a Historie of Edward the Fourth (1640), based on notes from his father; a tragi-comedy, The Queene of Arragon (1640), published without his permission by his relative, the Earl of Pembroke, and revived during the Restoration; and six essays on contemporary events, Observations upon History (1641). Anthony à Wood suggested that during the Commonwealth, the poet “did run with the times, and was not unknown to Oliver the usurper.” He died on November 30, 1654.

The works of Habington have not been collected. The Queene of Arragon was reprinted in Dodsley’s “Old Plays,” vol. ix. (1825); Castara was edited by Charles Elton (1812), and by E. Arber with a compact and comprehensive introduction (1870) for his “English Reprints.”

The works of Habington have not been gathered together. The Queene of Arragon was reprinted in Dodsley’s “Old Plays,” vol. ix. (1825); Castara was edited by Charles Elton (1812) and by E. Arber, who included a concise and thorough introduction (1870) for his “English Reprints.”


HABIT (through the French from Lat. habitus, from habere, to have, hold, or, in a reflective sense, to be in a certain condition; in many of the English senses the French use habitude, not habit), condition of body or mind, especially one that has become permanent or settled by custom or persistent repetition, hence custom, usage. In botany and zoology the term is used both in the above sense of instinctive action of animals and tendencies of plants, and also of the manner of growth or external appearance of a plant or animal. From the use of the word for external appearances comes its use for fashion in dress, and hence as a term for a lady’s riding dress and for the particular form of garment adopted by the members of a religious order, like “cowl” applied as the mark of a monk or nun.

HABIT (from French, which comes from Latin habitus, from habere, meaning to have, hold, or reflect on being in a certain state; in many English contexts, the French use habitude, not habit), refers to a state of body or mind, especially one that has become permanent or established through custom or repeated behavior, thus indicating custom or usage. In botany and zoology, the term is used both to describe the instinctive actions of animals and tendencies of plants, as well as the way a plant or animal grows or its external appearance. Because of its association with outward appearances, it has also come to refer to fashion in dress, and is thus used to mean a lady’s riding outfit and the specific type of clothing worn by members of a religious order, like “cowl” for a monk or nun.


HABITAT (a French word derived from habiter, Lat. habitare, to dwell), in botany and zoology, the term for the locality in which a particular species of plants or animals thrives.

HABITAT (a French word derived from habiter, Lat. habitare, to live), in botany and zoology, refers to the area where a specific species of plants or animals flourishes.


HABSBURG, or Hapsburg, the name of the famous family from which have sprung the dukes and archdukes of Austria from 1282, kings of Hungary and Bohemia from 1526, and emperors of Austria from 1804. They were also Roman emperors and German kings from 1438 to 1806, and kings of Spain from 1516 to 1700, while the minor dignities held by them at different times are too numerous to mention.

Habsburg, or Habsburg, is the name of the well-known family that produced the dukes and archdukes of Austria starting in 1282, kings of Hungary and Bohemia from 1526, and emperors of Austria from 1804. They were also Roman emperors and German kings from 1438 to 1806, as well as kings of Spain from 1516 to 1700, and the many minor titles they held over time are too numerous to list.

The name Habsburg, a variant of an older form, Habichtsburg (hawk’s castle), was taken from the castle of Habsburg, which was situated on the river Aar not far from its junction with the Rhine. The castle was built about 1020 by Werner, bishop of Strassburg, and his brother, Radbot, the founder of the abbey of Muri. These men were grandsons of a certain Guntram, who, according to some authorities, is identical with a Count Guntram who flourished during the reign of the emperor Otto the Great, and whose ancestry can be traced back to the time of the Merovingian kings. This conjecture, however, is extremely problematical. Among Radbot’s sons was one Werner, and Werner and his son Otto were called counts of Habsburg, Otto being probably made landgrave of upper Alsace late in the 11th or early in the 12th century. At all events Otto’s son Werner (d. 1167), and the latter’s son Albert (d. 1199), held this dignity, and both landgraves increased the area of the Habsburg lands. Albert became count of Zürich and protector of the monastery of Säckingen, and obtained lands in the cantons of Unterwalden and Lucerne; his son Rudolph, having assisted Frederick of Hohenstaufen, afterwards the emperor Frederick II., against the emperor Otto IV., received the county of Aargau. Both counts largely increased their possessions in the districts now known as Switzerland and Alsace, and Rudolph held an influential place among the Swabian nobility. After his death in 1232 his two sons, Albert and Rudolph, divided his lands and founded the lines of Habsburg-Habsburg and Habsburg-Laufenburg. Rudolph’s descendants, counts of Habsburg-Laufenburg, were soon divided into two branches, one of which became extinct in 1408 and the other seven years later. Before this date, however, Laufenburg and some other districts had been sold to the senior branch of the family, who thus managed to retain the greater part of the Habsburg lands.

The name Habsburg, a variation of an older term, Habichtsburg (hawk's castle), comes from the castle of Habsburg, located on the river Aar not far from where it joins the Rhine. The castle was constructed around 1020 by Werner, the bishop of Strassburg, and his brother, Radbot, who founded the abbey of Muri. These men were the grandsons of a certain Guntram, who, according to some sources, is the same as Count Guntram who was prominent during the reign of Emperor Otto the Great, and whose lineage can be traced back to the time of the Merovingian kings. However, this assumption is highly questionable. Among Radbot's sons was a Werner, and both Werner and his son Otto were known as counts of Habsburg, with Otto likely being named landgrave of upper Alsace in the late 11th or early 12th century. In any case, Otto's son Werner (d. 1167), and Werner's son Albert (d. 1199), held this title, and both landgraves expanded the Habsburg territories. Albert became count of Zürich and protector of the monastery of Säckingen, and acquired lands in the cantons of Unterwalden and Lucerne; his son Rudolph, having supported Frederick of Hohenstaufen, later Emperor Frederick II, against Emperor Otto IV, was granted the county of Aargau. Both counts significantly increased their holdings in the regions now known as Switzerland and Alsace, and Rudolph held a notable position among the Swabian nobility. After his death in 1232, his two sons, Albert and Rudolph, split his lands and established the lines of Habsburg-Habsburg and Habsburg-Laufenburg. Rudolph's descendants, counts of Habsburg-Laufenburg, soon split into two branches, one of which went extinct in 1408 and the other seven years later. Before this occurred, however, Laufenburg and some other areas had been sold to the senior branch of the family, allowing them to retain most of the Habsburg lands.

Rudolph’s brother Albert (d. 1239), landgrave of Alsace, married Hedwig of Kyburg (d. 1260), and from this union there was born in 1218 Rudolph, the founder of the greatness of the house of Habsburg, and the first of the family to ascend the German throne. Through his mother he inherited a large part of the lands of the extinct family of Zähringen; he added in other ways to his possessions, and was chosen German king in September 1273. Acting vigorously in his new office, he defeated and killed his most formidable adversary, Ottakar II., king of Bohemia, in 1278, and in December 1282 he invested his sons, Albert and Rudolph, with the duchies of Austria and Styria, which with other lands had been taken from Ottakar. This was an event of supreme moment in the history of the Habsburgs, and was the first and most important stage in the process of transferring the centre of their authority from western to eastern Europe, from the Rhine to the Danube. On Rudolph’s death in July 1291 the German crown passed for a time away from the Habsburgs, but in July 1298 it was secured by his son, Albert, whose reign, however, was short and uneventful. But before 1308, the year of Albert’s death, the long and troubled connexion of the Habsburgs with Bohemia had already begun. In 1306 Wenceslas III., the last Bohemian king of the Přmyslide dynasty, was murdered. Seizing the opportunity and declaring that the vacant kingdom was an imperial fief, King Albert 788 bestowed it upon his eldest son, Rudolph, and married this prince to Elizabeth, widow of Wenceslas II. and stepmother of Wenceslas III. But Rudolph died in 1307, and his father’s attempt to keep the country in his own hands was ended by his murder in 1308.

Rudolph’s brother Albert (d. 1239), landgrave of Alsace, married Hedwig of Kyburg (d. 1260), and from this union, Rudolph, the founder of the greatness of the Habsburg family, was born in 1218. He was the first of the family to take the German throne. Through his mother, he inherited a significant portion of the lands of the now-extinct Zähringen family; he also expanded his holdings through various means and was elected German king in September 1273. Acting decisively in his new role, he defeated and killed his most formidable opponent, Ottakar II, king of Bohemia, in 1278. In December 1282, he granted his sons, Albert and Rudolph, the duchies of Austria and Styria, which had been taken from Ottakar along with other territories. This was a crucial moment in the history of the Habsburgs and marked the first major step in shifting their center of power from western to eastern Europe, from the Rhine to the Danube. After Rudolph’s death in July 1291, the German crown temporarily left the Habsburgs, but in July 1298, it was secured by his son Albert, whose reign, however, was short and unremarkable. Before 1308, the year of Albert’s death, the long and troubled connection between the Habsburgs and Bohemia had already started. In 1306, Wenceslas III, the last Bohemian king of the Přemyslid dynasty, was assassinated. Seizing this opportunity and declaring the empty kingdom as an imperial fief, King Albert 788 granted it to his eldest son, Rudolph, and arranged his marriage to Elizabeth, the widow of Wenceslas II and stepmother of Wenceslas III. Unfortunately, Rudolph died in 1307, and his father’s efforts to retain control over the territory ended with his murder in 1308.

Albert’s successor as German king was Henry of Luxemburg (the emperor Henry VII.), and this election may be said to initiate the long rivalry between the houses of Habsburg and Luxemburg. But the immediate enemy of the Habsburgs was not a Luxemburg but a Wittelsbach. Without making any definite partition, Albert’s five remaining sons spent their time in governing their lands until 1314, when one of them, Frederick called the Fair, forsook this comparatively uneventful occupation and was chosen by a minority of the electors German king in succession to Henry VII. At the same time the Wittelsbach duke of Bavaria, Louis, known to history as the emperor Louis the Bavarian, was also chosen. War was inevitable, and the battle of Mühldorf, fought in September 1322, sealed the fate of Frederick. Louis was victorious: his rival went into an honourable captivity, and the rising Habsburg sun underwent a temporary eclipse.

Albert's successor as German king was Henry of Luxemburg (the emperor Henry VII.), and this election marked the beginning of the long rivalry between the Habsburg and Luxemburg houses. However, the immediate enemy of the Habsburgs was not a Luxemburg but a Wittelsbach. Without any clear division, Albert’s five remaining sons governed their territories until 1314, when one of them, Frederick known as the Fair, abandoned this relatively uneventful role and was elected German king by a minority of the electors following Henry VII. At the same time, the Wittelsbach duke of Bavaria, Louis, later known as the emperor Louis the Bavarian, was also elected. War was inevitable, and the battle of Mühldorf, fought in September 1322, determined Frederick's fate. Louis was victorious: his rival was taken captive honorably, and the rising Habsburg power faced a temporary setback.

For more than a century after Frederick’s death in 1330 the Habsburgs were exiles from the German throne. But they were not inactive. In 1335 his two surviving brothers, Albert and Otto, inherited Carinthia and part of Carniola by right of their mother, Elizabeth; in 1363 Albert’s son Rudolph received Tirol; and during the same century part of Istria, Trieste and other districts were acquired. All King Albert’s six sons had died without leaving male issue save Otto, whose family became extinct in 1344, and Albert, the ancestor of all the later Habsburgs. Of Albert’s four sons two also left no male heirs, but the remaining two, Albert III. and Leopold III., were responsible for a division of the family which is of some importance. By virtue of a partition made upon their brother Rudolph’s death in 1365 Albert and his descendants ruled over Austria, while Leopold and his sons took Styria, Carinthia and Tirol, Alsace remaining undivided as heretofore.

For over a century after Frederick's death in 1330, the Habsburgs were out of power in Germany. However, they didn't remain idle. In 1335, his two surviving brothers, Albert and Otto, inherited Carinthia and part of Carniola through their mother, Elizabeth. In 1363, Albert's son Rudolph received Tirol, and during the same century, they acquired parts of Istria, Trieste, and other regions. All six of King Albert's sons died without leaving male heirs, except for Otto, whose family became extinct in 1344, and Albert, who became the ancestor of all the later Habsburgs. Of Albert's four sons, two also left no male heirs, but the other two, Albert III and Leopold III, played a key role in a family division that is significant. Following the partition that occurred after their brother Rudolph's death in 1365, Albert and his descendants ruled over Austria, while Leopold and his sons took Styria, Carinthia, and Tirol, with Alsace remaining undivided as before.

Towards the middle of the 15th century the German throne had been occupied for nearly a hundred years by members of the Luxemburg family. The reigning emperor Sigismund, who was also king of Hungary and Bohemia, was without sons, and his daughter Elizabeth was the wife of Albert of Habsburg, the grandson and heir of Duke Albert III., who had died in 1395. Sigismund died in December 1437, leaving his two kingdoms to his son-in-law, who was crowned king of Hungary in January 1438 and king of Bohemia in the following June. Albert was also chosen and crowned German king in succession to Sigismund, thus beginning the long and uninterrupted connexion of his family with the imperial throne, a connexion which lasted until the dissolution of the Holy Roman Empire in 1806. He did not, however, enjoy his new dignities for long, as he died in October 1439 while engaged in a struggle with the Turks. Albert left no sons, but soon after his death one was born to him, called Ladislaus, who became duke of Austria and king of Hungary and Bohemia. Under the guardianship of his kinsman, the emperor Frederick III., the young prince’s reign was a troubled one, and when he died unmarried in 1457 his branch of the family became extinct, and Hungary and Bohemia passed away from the Habsburgs, who managed, however, to retain Austria.

Towards the middle of the 15th century, the German throne had been held for almost a hundred years by the Luxemburg family. The reigning emperor Sigismund, who was also king of Hungary and Bohemia, had no sons, and his daughter Elizabeth was married to Albert of Habsburg, the grandson and heir of Duke Albert III., who had died in 1395. Sigismund died in December 1437, leaving his two kingdoms to his son-in-law, who was crowned king of Hungary in January 1438 and king of Bohemia the following June. Albert was also selected and crowned German king after Sigismund, marking the start of his family's long and unbroken connection to the imperial throne, which lasted until the dissolution of the Holy Roman Empire in 1806. However, he didn’t hold his new titles for long, as he died in October 1439 while fighting the Turks. Albert had no sons, but shortly after his death, a son named Ladislaus was born to him, who became duke of Austria and king of Hungary and Bohemia. During the guardianship of his relative, Emperor Frederick III., the young prince’s reign was tumultuous, and when he died unmarried in 1457, his branch of the family went extinct, leading Hungary and Bohemia to separate from the Habsburgs, who managed to keep Austria.

Leopold III., duke of Carinthia and Styria, who was killed in 1386 at the battle of Sempach, had four sons, of whom two only, Frederick and Ernest, left male issue. Frederick and his only son, Sigismund, confined their attention mainly to Tirol and Alsace, leaving the larger destinies of the family in the hands of Ernest of Carinthia and Styria (d. 1424) and his sons, Frederick and Albert and after the death of King Ladislaus in 1457 these two princes and their cousin Sigismund were the only representatives of the Habsburgs. In February 1440 Frederick of Styria was chosen German king in succession to his kinsman Albert. He was a weak and incompetent ruler, but a stronger and abler man might have shrunk from the task of administering his heterogeneous and unruly realm. Although very important in the history of the house of Habsburg, Frederick’s long reign was a period of misfortune, and the motto which he assumed, A.E.I.O.U. (Austriae est imperare orbi universo), seemed at the time a particularly foolish boast. He acted as guardian both to Ladislaus of Hungary, Bohemia and Austria, and to Sigismund of Tirol, and in all these countries his difficulties were increased by the hostility of his brother Albert. Having disgusted the Tirolese he gave up the guardianship of their prince in 1446, while in Hungary and Bohemia he did absolutely nothing to establish the authority of his ward; in 1452 the Austrians besieged him in Vienna Neustadt and compelled him to surrender the person of Ladislaus, thus ending even his nominal authority. When the young king died in 1457 the Habsburgs lost Hungary and Bohemia, but they retained Austria, which, after some disputing, Frederick and Albert divided between themselves, the former taking lower and the latter upper Austria. This arrangement was of short duration. In 1461 Albert made war upon his brother and forced him to resign lower Austria, which, however, he recovered after Albert’s death in December 1463. Still more unfortunate was the German king in Switzerland. For many years the Swiss had chafed under the rule of the Habsburgs; during the reign of Rudolph I. they had shown signs of resentment as the kingly power increased; and the struggle which had been carried on for nearly two centuries had been almost uniformly in their favour. It was marked by the victory of Morgarten over Duke Leopold I. in 1315, and by that of Sempach over Leopold III. in 1386, by the conquest of Aargau at the instigation of the emperor Sigismund early in the 15th century, and by the final struggle for freedom against Frederick III. and Sigismund of Tirol. Taking advantage of some dissensions among the Swiss, the king saw an opportunity to recover his lost lands, and in 1443 war broke out. But his allies, the men of Zürich, were defeated, and when in August 1444 some French mercenaries, who had advanced to his aid, suffered the same fate at St Jakob, he was compelled to give up the struggle. A few years later Sigismund became involved in a war with the same formidable foemen; he too was worsted, and the “Perpetual Peace” of 1474 ended the rule of the Habsburgs in Switzerland. This humiliation was the second great step in the process of removing the Habsburgs from western to eastern Europe. In 1453, just after his coronation as emperor at Rome, Frederick legalized the use of the title archduke, which had been claimed spasmodically by the Habsburgs since 1361. This title is now peculiar to the house of Habsburg.

Leopold III, Duke of Carinthia and Styria, who was killed in 1386 at the Battle of Sempach, had four sons, but only two, Frederick and Ernest, had male heirs. Frederick and his only son, Sigismund, focused mainly on Tirol and Alsace, while the larger responsibilities of the family fell to Ernest of Carinthia and Styria (d. 1424) and his sons, Frederick and Albert. After King Ladislaus died in 1457, these two princes and their cousin Sigismund were the only remaining representatives of the Habsburgs. In February 1440, Frederick of Styria was elected German king in place of his relative Albert. He was a weak and ineffective ruler, and an even stronger individual might have hesitated to manage his diverse and rebellious realm. Although his long reign was significant for the Habsburg family, it was marked by misfortune, and the motto he adopted, A.E.I.O.U. (Austriae est imperare orbi universo), seemed particularly foolish at the time. He served as the guardian for Ladislaus of Hungary, Bohemia, and Austria, and for Sigismund of Tirol, but in every country he faced increased challenges due to his brother Albert's hostility. Displeased with the Tyroleans, he abandoned the guardianship of their prince in 1446, while in Hungary and Bohemia he did nothing to strengthen his ward's authority. In 1452, the Austrians besieged him in Vienna Neustadt and forced him to surrender Ladislaus, effectively ending his nominal authority. When the young king died in 1457, the Habsburgs lost Hungary and Bohemia but kept Austria, which Frederick and Albert divided after some disputes, with Frederick taking Lower Austria and Albert taking Upper Austria. This arrangement was short-lived. In 1461, Albert waged war against his brother and forced him to give up Lower Austria, although Frederick regained it after Albert's death in December 1463. The German king fared even worse in Switzerland. For many years, the Swiss had been unhappy under Habsburg rule; during Rudolph I's reign, they had shown resentment as the kingly power grew, and the nearly two-century struggle was mostly in their favor. It included the victory at Morgarten against Duke Leopold I in 1315, the defeat of Leopold III at Sempach in 1386, the conquest of Aargau at the instigation of Emperor Sigismund in the early 15th century, and the final fight for freedom against Frederick III and Sigismund of Tirol. Taking advantage of some divisions among the Swiss, the king saw a chance to regain his lost lands, leading to the outbreak of war in 1443. However, his allies from Zürich were defeated, and when some French mercenaries who came to assist him were likewise defeated at St Jakob in August 1444, he was forced to end the conflict. A few years later, Sigismund also got caught in a war with the same formidable enemies; he too was defeated, and the "Perpetual Peace" of 1474 marked the end of Habsburg rule in Switzerland. This humiliation represented the second significant step in the process of shifting the Habsburgs' focus from Western to Eastern Europe. In 1453, shortly after his coronation as emperor in Rome, Frederick formalized the use of the title archduke, which the Habsburgs had intermittently claimed since 1361. This title is now unique to the Habsburg family.

The reverses suffered by the Habsburgs during the reign of Frederick III. were many and serious, but an improvement was at hand. The emperor died in August 1493, and was followed on the imperial throne by his son Maximilian I., perhaps the most versatile and interesting member of the family. Before his father’s death Maximilian had been chosen German king, or king of the Romans, and had begun to repair the fortunes of his house. He had married Mary, daughter and heiress of Charles the Bold, duke of Burgundy; he had driven the Hungarians from Vienna and the Austrian archduchies, which Frederick had, perforce, allowed them to occupy; and he had received Tirol on the abdication of Sigismund in 1490. True it is that upon Mary’s death in 1482 part of her inheritance, the rich and prosperous Netherlands, held that her husband’s authority was at an end, while another part, the two Burgundies and Artois, had been seized by the king of France; nevertheless, after a protracted struggle the German king secured almost the whole of Charles the Bold’s lands for his son, the archduke Philip, the duchy of Burgundy alone remaining in the power of France after the conclusion of the peace of Senlis in 1493. Maximilian completed his work by adding a piece of Bavaria, Görz and then Gradiska to the Habsburg lands.

The setbacks faced by the Habsburgs during Frederick III's reign were numerous and significant, but there was a change on the horizon. The emperor passed away in August 1493, and his son Maximilian I ascended to the imperial throne, likely the most adaptable and intriguing member of the family. Before his father’s death, Maximilian had been elected as the German king, or king of the Romans, and he had begun to revitalize his family's fortunes. He married Mary, the daughter and heiress of Charles the Bold, duke of Burgundy; he expelled the Hungarians from Vienna and the Austrian archduchies, which Frederick had reluctantly allowed them to occupy; and he gained Tirol after Sigismund abdicated in 1490. It is true that after Mary’s death in 1482, part of her inheritance, the wealthy and thriving Netherlands, claimed that her husband's authority had ended, while another part, the two Burgundies and Artois, was taken by the king of France; however, after a lengthy struggle, the German king managed to secure almost all of Charles the Bold’s lands for his son, the archduke Philip, with only the duchy of Burgundy remaining under French control after the peace of Senlis in 1493. Maximilian rounded out his achievements by adding a portion of Bavaria, Görz, and then Gradiska to Habsburg lands.

After Sigismund’s death in 1496 Maximilian and Philip were the only living male members of the family. Philip married Joanna, daughter of Ferdinand and Isabella of Spain, and died in 1506 leaving two sons, Charles and Ferdinand. Charles succeeded his father in the Netherlands; he followed one grandfather, Ferdinand, as king of Spain in 1516, and when the other, 789 Maximilian, died in 1519 he became the emperor Charles V., and succeeded to all the hereditary lands of the Habsburgs. But provision had to be made for Ferdinand, and in 1521 this prince was given the Austrian archduchies, Austria, Styria, Carinthia and Carniola; in the same year he married Anne, daughter of Wladislaus, king of Hungary and Bohemia, and when his childless brother-in-law, King Louis, was killed at the battle of Mohacs in August 1526 he claimed the two kingdoms, both by right of his wife and by treaty. After a little trouble Bohemia passed under his rule, but Hungary was more recalcitrant. A long war took place between Ferdinand and John Zapolya, who was also crowned king of Hungary, but in 1538 a treaty was made and the country was divided, the Habsburg prince receiving the western and smaller portion. However, he was soon confronted with a more formidable foe, and he spent a large part of his subsequent life in defending his lands from the attacks of the Turks.

After Sigismund’s death in 1496, Maximilian and Philip were the only living male members of the family. Philip married Joanna, the daughter of Ferdinand and Isabella of Spain, and died in 1506, leaving behind two sons, Charles and Ferdinand. Charles succeeded his father in the Netherlands; he followed one grandfather, Ferdinand, as king of Spain in 1516, and when the other, 789 Maximilian, died in 1519, he became Emperor Charles V and inherited all the Habsburg lands. However, arrangements had to be made for Ferdinand, and in 1521, he was given the Austrian archduchies of Austria, Styria, Carinthia, and Carniola. In the same year, he married Anne, the daughter of Wladislaus, king of Hungary and Bohemia. When his brother-in-law, King Louis, died childless at the battle of Mohacs in August 1526, Ferdinand claimed both kingdoms, both through his wife and by treaty. After some initial conflict, Bohemia came under his rule, but Hungary was more resistant. A long war ensued between Ferdinand and John Zapolya, who was also crowned king of Hungary, but in 1538 a treaty was made, dividing the country, with the Habsburg prince receiving the western and smaller portion. However, he soon faced a more formidable enemy and spent much of his remaining life defending his lands from Turkish attacks.

The Habsburgs had now reached the summit of their power. The prestige which belonged to Charles as head of the Holy Roman Empire was backed by the wealth and commerce of the Netherlands and of Spain, and by the riches of the Spanish colonies in America. In Italy he ruled over Sardinia, Naples and Sicily, which had passed to him with Spain, and the duchy of Milan, which he had annexed in 1535; to the Netherlands he had added Friesland, the bishopric of Utrecht, Gröningen and Gelderland, and he still possessed Franche-Comté and the fragments of the Habsburg lands in Alsace and the neighbourhood. Add to this Ferdinand’s inheritance, the Austrian archduchies and Tirol, Bohemia with her dependent provinces, and a strip of Hungary, and the two brothers had under their sway a part of Europe the extent of which was great, but the wealth and importance of which were immeasurably greater. Able to scorn the rivalry of the other princely houses of Germany, the Habsburgs saw in the kings of the house of Valois the only foemen worthy of their regard.

The Habsburgs had now reached the peak of their power. The prestige that Charles held as the leader of the Holy Roman Empire was supported by the wealth and trade of the Netherlands and Spain, as well as the riches from the Spanish colonies in America. In Italy, he ruled over Sardinia, Naples, and Sicily, which he had received along with Spain, and the duchy of Milan, which he annexed in 1535. He had also added Friesland, the bishopric of Utrecht, Gröningen, and Gelderland to the Netherlands, and he still retained Franche-Comté and parts of Habsburg lands in Alsace and the surrounding areas. Adding to this was Ferdinand's inheritance, including the Austrian archduchies, Tirol, Bohemia with its dependent provinces, and a section of Hungary. Together, the two brothers controlled a significant part of Europe, not only in terms of size but also in wealth and importance, which were immeasurably greater. Able to disregard the rivalry of other noble families in Germany, the Habsburgs viewed the kings of the house of Valois as their only worthy opponents.

When Charles V. abdicated he was succeeded as emperor, not by his son Philip, but by his brother Ferdinand. Philip became king of Spain, ruling also the Netherlands, Franche-Comté, Naples, Sicily, Milan and Sardinia, and the family was definitely divided into the Spanish and Austrian branches. For Spain and the Spanish Habsburgs the 17th century was a period of loss and decay, the seeds of which were sown during the reign of Philip II. The northern provinces of the Netherlands were lost practically in 1609 and definitely by the treaty of Westphalia in 1648; Roussillon and Artois were annexed to France by the treaty of the Pyrenees in 1659, while Franche-Comté and a number of towns in the Spanish Netherlands suffered a similar fate by the treaty of Nijmwegen in 1678. Finally Charles II., the last Habsburg king of Spain, died childless in November 1700, and his lands were the prize of the War of the Spanish Succession. The Austrian Habsburgs fought long and valiantly for the kingdom of their kinsman, but Louis XIV. was too strong for them, and by the peace of Rastatt Spain passed from the Habsburgs to the Bourbons. However, the Austrian branch of the family received in 1714 the Italian possessions of Charles II., except Sicily, which was given to the duke of Savoy, and also the southern Netherlands, which are thus often referred to as the Austrian Netherlands; and retained the duchy of Mantua, which it had seized in 1708.

When Charles V abdicated, he was succeeded as emperor not by his son Philip, but by his brother Ferdinand. Philip became king of Spain, also ruling the Netherlands, Franche-Comté, Naples, Sicily, Milan, and Sardinia, leading to a clear division between the Spanish and Austrian branches of the family. For Spain and the Spanish Habsburgs, the 17th century was a time of loss and decline, with its roots in the reign of Philip II. The northern provinces of the Netherlands were practically lost in 1609 and permanently lost by the Treaty of Westphalia in 1648; Roussillon and Artois were annexed to France by the Treaty of the Pyrenees in 1659, while Franche-Comté and several towns in the Spanish Netherlands faced a similar fate by the Treaty of Nijmegen in 1678. Ultimately, Charles II, the last Habsburg king of Spain, died without an heir in November 1700, and his territories became the prize of the War of the Spanish Succession. The Austrian Habsburgs fought long and hard for the kingdom of their relative, but Louis XIV was too powerful for them, and through the Peace of Rastatt, Spain transferred from the Habsburgs to the Bourbons. However, the Austrian branch of the family acquired the Italian possessions of Charles II in 1714, except for Sicily, which went to the Duke of Savoy, and also gained the southern Netherlands, which are often called the Austrian Netherlands; they also kept the duchy of Mantua, which they had taken in 1708.

Ferdinand I., the founder of the line of the Austrian Habsburgs, arranged a division of his lands among his three sons before his death in 1564. The eldest, Maximilian II., received Austria, Bohemia and Hungary, and succeeded his father as emperor; he married Maria, a daughter of Charles V., and though he had a large family his male line became extinct in 1619. The younger sons were Ferdinand, ruler of Tirol, and Charles, archduke of Styria. The emperor Maximilian II. left five sons, two of whom, Rudolph and Matthias, succeeded in turn to the imperial throne, but, as all the brothers were without male issue, the family was early in the 17th century threatened with a serious crisis. Rudolph died in 1612, the reigning emperor Matthias was old and ill, and the question of the succession to the Empire, to the kingdoms of Hungary and Bohemia, and to the hereditary lands of the Habsburgs became acute. Turning to the collateral branches of the family, the sons of the archduke Ferdinand were debarred from the succession owing to their father’s morganatic marriage with Philippine Welser, and the only hope of the house was in the sons of Charles of Styria. To prevent the Habsburg monarchy from falling to pieces the emperor’s two surviving brothers renounced their rights, and it was decided that Ferdinand, a son of Charles of Styria, should succeed his cousin Matthias. The difficulties which impeded the completion of this scheme were gradually overcome, and the result was that when Matthias died in 1619 the whole of the lands of the Austrian Habsburgs was united under the rule of the emperor Ferdinand II. Tirol, indeed, a few years later was separated from the rest of the monarchy and given to the emperor’s brother, the archduke Leopold, but this separation was ended when Leopold’s son died in 1665.

Ferdinand I, the founder of the Austrian Habsburg dynasty, divided his lands among his three sons before his death in 1564. The oldest, Maximilian II, received Austria, Bohemia, and Hungary, becoming emperor after his father. He married Maria, the daughter of Charles V, and although he had a large family, his male line became extinct in 1619. The younger sons were Ferdinand, the ruler of Tirol, and Charles, archduke of Styria. Emperor Maximilian II had five sons, two of whom, Rudolph and Matthias, succeeded each other on the imperial throne. However, since all the brothers had no male heirs, the family faced a serious crisis early in the 17th century. Rudolph died in 1612, and the reigning emperor Matthias was old and ill, making the question of succession to the Empire, as well as to the kingdoms of Hungary and Bohemia, very pressing. Looking to the collateral branches of the family, the sons of archduke Ferdinand were excluded from succession due to their father's morganatic marriage to Philippine Welser, leaving the only hope for the dynasty in the sons of Charles of Styria. To prevent the Habsburg monarchy from crumbling, the emperor’s two surviving brothers gave up their rights, and it was decided that Ferdinand, a son of Charles of Styria, would succeed his cousin Matthias. The challenges that hindered this plan were gradually resolved, so that when Matthias died in 1619, all the lands of the Austrian Habsburgs were united under Emperor Ferdinand II. A few years later, Tirol was separated from the rest of the monarchy and given to the emperor’s brother, archduke Leopold, but this separation ended when Leopold’s son died in 1665.

The arbitrary measures which followed Ferdinand’s acquisition of the Bohemian crown contributed to the outbreak of the Thirty Years’ War, but in a short time the Bohemians were subdued, and in 1627, following a precedent set in 1547, the emperor declared the throne hereditary in the house of Habsburg. The treaty of Westphalia which ended this war took comparatively little from the Habsburgs, though they ceded Alsace to France; but the Empire was greatly weakened, and its ruler was more than ever compelled to make his hereditary lands in the east of Europe the base of his authority, finding that he derived more strength from his position as archduke of Austria than from that of emperor. Ferdinand III. succeeded his father Ferdinand II., and during the long reign of the former’s son, Leopold I., the Austrian, like the Spanish, Habsburgs were on the defensive against the aggressive policy of Louis XIV., and in addition they had to withstand the assaults of the Turks. In two ways they sought to strengthen their position. The unity of the Austrian lands was strictly maintained, and several marriages kept up a close and friendly connexion with Spain. A series of victories over the sultan during the later part of the 17th century rolled back the tide of the Turkish advance, and the peace of Karlowitz made in 1699 gave nearly the whole of Hungary to the Habsburgs. Against France Austria was less successful, and a number of humiliations culminated in 1714 in the failure to secure Spain, to which reference has already been made.

The arbitrary actions that followed Ferdinand's takeover of the Bohemian crown led to the start of the Thirty Years' War. However, the Bohemians were quickly defeated, and in 1627, following a precedent from 1547, the emperor declared the throne hereditary in the Habsburg family. The Treaty of Westphalia, which concluded this war, took relatively little from the Habsburgs, although they did give up Alsace to France. However, the Empire was significantly weakened, and its ruler was increasingly forced to rely on his hereditary lands in Eastern Europe for authority, finding more strength in his position as Archduke of Austria than as Emperor. Ferdinand III took over from his father, Ferdinand II, and during the long reign of his son, Leopold I, the Austrian Habsburgs, like their Spanish counterparts, were on the defensive against the aggressive policies of Louis XIV and also had to fend off attacks from the Turks. They tried to strengthen their position in two ways: by maintaining unity among the Austrian lands and by arranging several marriages to keep a close, friendly connection with Spain. A series of victories over the Sultan in the late 17th century pushed back the Turkish advance, and the Treaty of Karlowitz in 1699 granted nearly all of Hungary to the Habsburgs. Against France, Austria had less success, and a number of humiliations culminated in 1714 with their failure to secure Spain, which has been mentioned earlier.

The hostility of Austria and France, or rather of Habsburg and Bourbon, outlived the War of the Spanish Succession. In 1717 Spain conquered Sardinia, which was soon exchanged by Austria for Sicily; other struggles and other groupings of the European powers followed, and in 1735, by the treaty of Vienna, Austria gave up Naples and Sicily and received the duchies of Parma and Piacenza. These surrenders were doubtless inevitable, but they shook the position of the house of Habsburg in Italy. However, a domestic crisis was approaching which threw Italian affairs into the shade. Charles VI., who had succeeded his brother, Joseph I., as emperor in 1711, was without sons, and his prime object in life was to secure the succession of his elder daughter, Maria Theresa, to the whole of his lands and dignities. But in 1713, four years before the birth of Maria Theresa, he had first issued the famous Pragmatic Sanction, which declared that the Habsburg monarchy was indivisible and that in default of male heirs a female could succeed to it. Then after the death of his only son and the birth of Maria Theresa the emperor bent all his energies to securing the acceptance of the Pragmatic Sanction. Promulgated anew in 1724, it was formally accepted by the estates of the different Habsburg lands; in 1731 it was guaranteed by the imperial diet. By subordinating every other interest to this, Charles at length procured the assent of the various powers of Europe to the proposed arrangement; he married the young princess to Francis Stephen, duke of Lorraine, afterwards grand-duke of Tuscany, and when he died on the 20th of October 1740 he appeared to have realized his great ambition. With the emperor’s death the house of Habsburg, strictly speaking, became extinct, its place being taken by the house of Habsburg-Lorraine, which sprang from the union of Maria Theresa and Francis Stephen; and it is interesting to note that the present Habsburgs are only descended in the female line from Rudolph I. and Maximilian I.

The rivalry between Austria and France, or more specifically between the Habsburgs and Bourbons, continued long after the War of the Spanish Succession. In 1717, Spain took control of Sardinia, which soon got traded by Austria for Sicily. More conflicts and different alliances among European powers followed, and by 1735, under the treaty of Vienna, Austria ceded Naples and Sicily while gaining the duchies of Parma and Piacenza. Although these losses were likely unavoidable, they weakened the Habsburgs' position in Italy. Meanwhile, a domestic crisis was looming that overshadowed Italian issues. Charles VI., who became emperor in 1711 after his brother Joseph I., had no sons, and his main goal was to ensure that his elder daughter, Maria Theresa, inherited all of his lands and titles. However, in 1713, four years before Maria Theresa was born, he issued the famous Pragmatic Sanction, declaring the Habsburg monarchy indivisible and that in the absence of male heirs, a female could inherit it. After the death of his only son and the birth of Maria Theresa, the emperor dedicated all his efforts to getting the Pragmatic Sanction accepted. It was re-promulgated in 1724 and was formally recognized by the estates of different Habsburg territories; by 1731, it was guaranteed by the imperial diet. By prioritizing this above all else, Charles eventually gained the approval of various European powers for the plan; he arranged for his daughter to marry Francis Stephen, duke of Lorraine, who later became the grand-duke of Tuscany. When he died on October 20, 1740, it seemed he had achieved his major ambition. With the emperor’s death, the Habsburg line effectively ended, giving way to the Habsburg-Lorraine dynasty, formed by the union of Maria Theresa and Francis Stephen; interestingly, today’s Habsburgs are only descended through the female line from Rudolph I. and Maximilian I.

790

790

GENEALOGICAL TABLE OF THE HOUSE OF HABSBURG-LORRAINE.

GENEALOGICAL TABLE OF THE HOUSE OF HABSBURG-LORRAINE.

791

791

Immediately after the death of Charles the Pragmatic Sanction was forgotten. A crowd of claimants called for various parts of the Habsburg lands; Frederick the Great, talking less but acting more, invaded and conquered Silesia, and it seemed likely that the dissolution of the Habsburg monarchy would at no long interval follow the extinction of the Habsburg race. A Wittelsbach prince, Charles Albert, elector of Bavaria, the emperor Charles VII., and not Francis Stephen, was chosen emperor in January 1742, and by the treaty of Breslau, made later in the same year, nearly all Silesia was formally surrendered to Prussia. But the worst was now over, and when in 1748 the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle, which practically confirmed the treaty of Breslau, had cleared away the dust of war, Maria Theresa and her consort were found to occupy a strong position in Europe. In the first place, in September 1745, Francis had been chosen emperor; then the imperial pair ruled Hungary and Bohemia, although the latter kingdom was shorn of Silesia; in spite of French conquests the Austrian Netherlands remained in their hands; and in Italy Francis had added Tuscany to his wife’s heritage, although Parma and Piacenza had been surrendered to Spain and part of Milan to the king of Sardinia. The diplomatic volte-face and the futile attempts of Maria Theresa to recover Silesia which followed this treaty belong to the general history of Europe.

Immediately after the death of Charles, the Pragmatic Sanction was forgotten. A crowd of claimants demanded various parts of the Habsburg lands; Frederick the Great, who talked less but acted more, invaded and took Silesia, and it seemed likely that the dissolution of the Habsburg monarchy would soon follow the extinction of the Habsburg line. A Wittelsbach prince, Charles Albert, elector of Bavaria, was elected emperor in January 1742, becoming Charles VII, not Francis Stephen, and by the treaty of Breslau, signed later that year, almost all of Silesia was formally surrendered to Prussia. But the worst was now over, and when the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle in 1748, which practically confirmed the treaty of Breslau, settled the aftermath of the war, Maria Theresa and her husband found themselves in a strong position in Europe. First, in September 1745, Francis had been chosen emperor; then the imperial couple ruled Hungary and Bohemia, although the latter had lost Silesia; despite French conquests, the Austrian Netherlands remained under their control; and in Italy, Francis had added Tuscany to his wife's legacy, even though Parma and Piacenza had been surrendered to Spain and part of Milan to the king of Sardinia. The diplomatic flip-flop and the unsuccessful attempts by Maria Theresa to regain Silesia that followed this treaty are part of the broader history of Europe.

The emperor Francis I. died in 1765 and was succeeded by his son Joseph II., an ambitious and able prince, whose aim was to restore the Habsburgs and the Empire to their former great positions in Europe, and whose pride did not prevent him from learning from Frederick the Great, the despoiler of his house. His projects, however, including one of uniting Bavaria with Austria, which was especially cherished, failed completely, and when he died in February 1790 he left his lands in a state of turbulence which reflected the general condition of Europe. The Netherlands had risen against the Austrians, and in January 1790 had declared themselves independent; Hungary, angered by Joseph’s despotic measures, was in revolt, and the other parts of the monarchy were hardly more contented. But the 18th century saw a few successes for the Habsburgs. In 1718 a successful war with Turkey was ended by the peace of Passarowitz, which advanced the Austrian boundary very considerably to the east, and although by the treaty of Belgrade, signed twenty-one years later, a large part of this territory was surrendered, yet a residuum, the banate of Temesvar, was permanently incorporated with Hungary. The struggle over the succession to Bavaria, which was concluded in 1779 by the treaty of Teschen, was responsible for adding Innviertel, or the quarter of the Inn, to Austria; the first partition of Poland brought eastern Galicia and Lodomeria, and in 1777 the sultan ceded Bukovina. Joseph II. was followed by his brother, Leopold II., who restored the Austrian authority in the Netherlands, and the latter by his son Francis II., who resigned the crown of the Holy Roman Empire in August 1806, having two years before taken the title of emperor of Austria as Francis I.

The emperor Francis I died in 1765 and was succeeded by his son Joseph II, an ambitious and capable leader whose goal was to restore the Habsburgs and the Empire to their former prominence in Europe. His pride didn’t stop him from learning from Frederick the Great, who had robbed his family. However, his projects, particularly the cherished idea of uniting Bavaria with Austria, failed completely. When he died in February 1790, his lands were in turmoil, mirroring the general state of Europe. The Netherlands had revolted against the Austrians and declared their independence in January 1790. Hungary, upset by Joseph’s oppressive measures, was in rebellion, and other parts of the monarchy were hardly more content. Nevertheless, the 18th century brought some successes for the Habsburgs. In 1718, a successful war with Turkey ended with the peace of Passarowitz, significantly expanding the Austrian territory to the east. Although a large part of this land was given up in the treaty of Belgrade signed twenty-one years later, a remnant, the banate of Temesvar, was permanently added to Hungary. The struggle for succession in Bavaria, resolved in 1779 by the treaty of Teschen, led to the addition of Innviertel, or the quarter of the Inn, to Austria; the first partition of Poland brought eastern Galicia and Lodomeria, and in 1777, the sultan ceded Bukovina. Joseph II was succeeded by his brother, Leopold II, who restored Austrian authority in the Netherlands, followed by his son Francis II, who resigned from the crown of the Holy Roman Empire in August 1806, having two years earlier taken the title of emperor of Austria as Francis I.

Before the abdication of the emperor Francis in 1806 Austria had met and suffered from the fury of revolutionary France, but the cessions of territory made by her at the treaties of Campo Formio (1797), of Lunéville (1801) and of Pressburg (1805) were of no enduring importance. This, however, cannot be said for the treaties of Paris and of Vienna, which in 1814 and 1815 arranged the map of Europe upon the conclusion of the Napoleonic wars. These were highly favourable to the Habsburgs. In eastern and central Europe Austria regained her former position, the lands ceded to Bavaria and also eastern Galicia, which had been in the hands of Russia since 1809, being restored; she gave up the Austrian Netherlands, soon to be known as Belgium, to the new kingdom of the Netherlands, and acquiesced in the arrangement which had taken from her the Breisgau and the remnant of the Habsburg lands upon the Rhine. In return for these losses Austria became the dominant power In Italy. A mass of northern Italy, including her former possessions in Milan and the neighbourhood, and also the lands recently forming the republic of Venice, was made into the kingdom of Lombardy-Venetia, and this owned the emperor of Austria as king. Across the Adriatic Dalmatia was added to the Habsburg monarchy, the population of which, it has been estimated, was increased at this time by over four millions.

Before Emperor Francis abdicated in 1806, Austria faced the wrath of revolutionary France, suffering considerable losses. However, the territorial changes made at the treaties of Campo Formio (1797), Lunéville (1801), and Pressburg (1805) did not have lasting significance. In contrast, the treaties of Paris and Vienna, which were established in 1814 and 1815 following the Napoleonic Wars, had a significant impact on the map of Europe and were very favorable to the Habsburgs. In Eastern and Central Europe, Austria regained its former status, recovering territories ceded to Bavaria and eastern Galicia, which had been under Russian control since 1809. Austria relinquished the Austrian Netherlands, soon to be known as Belgium, to the new Kingdom of the Netherlands and accepted the loss of the Breisgau and the remaining Habsburg lands along the Rhine. In exchange for these losses, Austria emerged as the dominant power in Italy. A large portion of Northern Italy, including former territories in Milan and the surrounding areas, as well as the regions that had recently constituted the Republic of Venice, was consolidated into the Kingdom of Lombardy-Venetia, which was ruled by the Emperor of Austria as king. Across the Adriatic, Dalmatia was incorporated into the Habsburg monarchy, which has been estimated to have gained over four million people at this time.

The illiberal and oppressive character of the Austrian rule in Italy made it very unpopular; it was hardly less so in Hungary and Bohemia, and the advent of the year 1848 found the subject kingdoms eager to throw off the Habsburg yoke. The whole monarchy was quickly in a state of revolution, in the midst of which the emperor Ferdinand, who had succeeded his father Francis in 1835, abdicated, and his place was taken by his young nephew Francis Joseph. The position of the Habsburg monarchy now seemed desperate. But it was strong in its immemorial tradition, which was enough to make the efforts of the Frankfort parliament to establish German unity under Prussian hegemony abortive; it was strong also in the general loyalty to the throne of the imperial army; and its counsels were directed by statesmen who knew well how to exploit in the interests of the central power the national rivalries within the monarchy. With the crushing of the Hungarian revolt by the emperor Nicholas I. of Russia in 1849 the monarchy was freed from the most formidable of its internal troubles; in 1850 the convention of Olmütz restored its influence in Germany.

The harsh and oppressive nature of Austrian rule in Italy made it very unpopular; it was just as disliked in Hungary and Bohemia, and by 1848 the subject kingdoms were eager to shake off the Habsburg control. The entire monarchy quickly fell into revolution, during which Emperor Ferdinand, who had taken over from his father Francis in 1835, abdicated, and his young nephew Francis Joseph stepped in. The situation for the Habsburg monarchy now appeared dire. However, it was bolstered by its long-standing traditions, which rendered the efforts of the Frankfort parliament to create German unity under Prussian leadership unsuccessful; it also had the loyalty of the imperial army backing the throne. Its leaders were skilled statesmen who knew how to leverage the national rivalries within the monarchy for the benefit of central power. After the Hungarian revolt was crushed by Emperor Nicholas I of Russia in 1849, the monarchy was relieved of its most serious internal issues; by 1850, the convention of Olmütz had restored its influence in Germany.

Though the status quo was thus outwardly re-established, the revolutions of 1848 had really unchained forces which made its maintenance impossible. In Germany Prussia was steadily preparing for the inevitable struggle with Austria for the mastery; in France Napoleon III. was preparing to pose as the champion of the oppressed nationalities which had once more settled down sullenly under the Habsburg yoke. The alliance of the French emperor and the king of Sardinia, and the Italian war of 1859 ended in the loss of Lombardy to the Habsburgs. Seven years later the crushing defeat of Königgrätz not only ended their long rule in Italy, based on the tradition of the medieval empire, by leading to the cession of Venetia to the new Italian kingdom, but led to their final exclusion from the German confederation, soon to become, under the headship of Prussia, the German empire.

Though the status quo was outwardly restored, the revolutions of 1848 had really unleashed forces that made it impossible to maintain. In Germany, Prussia was steadily preparing for the inevitable conflict with Austria for dominance; in France, Napoleon III was getting ready to present himself as the supporter of the oppressed nationalities that had once again settled reluctantly under Habsburg control. The alliance between the French emperor and the king of Sardinia, along with the Italian war of 1859, resulted in the loss of Lombardy to the Habsburgs. Seven years later, the devastating defeat at Königgrätz not only ended their long rule in Italy, which was based on the tradition of the medieval empire, by leading to the cession of Venetia to the new Italian kingdom, but also resulted in their final exclusion from the German confederation, which would soon evolve, under Prussia's leadership, into the German empire.

By the loss of the predominance in Germany conceded to it by the treaties of Vienna, and by the shifting of its “centre of gravity” eastward, the Habsburg monarchy, however, perhaps gained more than it lost. One necessary result, indeed, was the composition (Ausgleich) with Hungary in 1867, by which the latter became an independent state (Francis Joseph being crowned king at Pest in June 1867) bound to the rest of the monarchy only by the machinery necessary for the carrying out of a common policy in matters of common interest. This at least restored the loyalty of the Hungarians to the Habsburg dynasty; it is too soon yet to say that it secured permanently the essential unity of the Habsburg monarchy. By the system of the Dual Monarchy the rest of the Austrian emperor’s dominions (Cis-Leithan) were consolidated under a single central government, the history of which has been mainly that of the rival races within the empire struggling for political predominance. Since the development of the constitution has been consistently in a democratic direction and the Slavs are in a great majority, the tendency has been for the German element—strong in its social status and tradition of predominance—to be swamped by what it regards as an inferior race; and a considerable number of Austrian “Germans” have learned to look not to their Habsburg rulers, but to the power of the German empire for political salvation. The tendency eastwards of the monarchy was increased when in 1878 the congress of Berlin placed Bosnia and Herzegovina under Austrian rule. Old ambitions were now revived at the expense of the Ottoman empire, the goal of which was the port of Salonica; and not the least menacing aspect of the question of the near East has been that the rivalry of Italy and the Habsburg monarchy has been transferred to the Balkan peninsula. Yet, in spite of internal 792 dissensions arising out of questions fundamentally insoluble, and in spite of the constant threat of external complications that may lead to war, the Habsburg monarchy as the result of the changes in the 19th and 20th centuries is seemingly stronger than ever. The shadow of universal claims to empire and sonorous but empty titles have vanished, but so have the manifold rivalries and entanglements which accompanied the Habsburg rule in Italy and the Netherlands and Habsburg preponderance in Germany. The monarchy is stronger because its sphere is more defined; because as preserving the pax Romana among the jostling races of eastern Europe, it is more than ever recognized as an essential element in the maintenance of European peace, and is recognized as necessary and beneficial even by the ambitious and restless nationalities that chafe under its rule.

By losing its dominance in Germany as granted by the treaties of Vienna and by shifting its “center of gravity” eastward, the Habsburg monarchy may have gained more than it lost. One important outcome was the compromise (Ausgleich) with Hungary in 1867, which made Hungary an independent state (with Francis Joseph crowned king in Pest in June 1867) connected to the rest of the monarchy only through the necessary mechanisms for a common policy on shared interests. This restored Hungarian loyalty to the Habsburg dynasty, but it’s too early to say it guaranteed the essential unity of the Habsburg monarchy. Through the Dual Monarchy system, the rest of the Austrian emperor’s territories (Cis-Leithan) were unified under a single central government, which has largely been characterized by the conflicts between various ethnic groups within the empire vying for political dominance. As the constitution developed in a more democratic direction and the Slavs became the majority, the German element—strong in social status and historical dominance—has started to feel overwhelmed by what it sees as an inferior race; many Austrian “Germans” have begun to look not to their Habsburg rulers for political support, but to the German empire. The monarchy’s shift eastward increased when the 1878 Berlin Congress placed Bosnia and Herzegovina under Austrian control. Old ambitions were revived at the cost of the Ottoman Empire, aiming toward the port of Salonica; one of the most concerning aspects of the situation in the Near East has been the transfer of rivalry between Italy and the Habsburg monarchy to the Balkan peninsula. Yet, despite internal conflicts arising from fundamentally unsolvable issues and the constant threat of external complications potentially leading to war, the Habsburg monarchy appears to be stronger than ever due to the changes in the 19th and 20th centuries. The shadow of universal imperial claims and grand but empty titles has disappeared, along with the various rivalries and complications that accompanied Habsburg rule in Italy, the Netherlands, and its dominance in Germany. The monarchy is stronger because its role is now clearer; by maintaining the pax Romana among the competing ethnic groups of Eastern Europe, it is recognized more than ever as a crucial element in maintaining peace in Europe, and even the ambitious and restless nationalities that are uneasy under its control acknowledge its necessity and benefits.

A few words must be said about the cadet branches of the Habsburg family. When, in 1765, Francis I. died and Joseph II. became emperor, the grand-duchy of Tuscany passed by special arrangement not to Joseph, but to his younger brother Leopold. Then in 1791, after Leopold had succeeded Joseph as emperor, he handed over the grand-duchy to his second son, Ferdinand (1769-1824). In 1801 this prince was deposed by Napoleon and Tuscany was seized by France. Restored to the Habsburgs in the person of Ferdinand in 1814, it remained under his rule, and then under that of his son Leopold (1797-1870), until the rising of 1859, when the Austrians were driven out and the grand-duchy was added to the kingdom of Sardinia. A similar fate attended the duchy of Modena, which had passed to the Habsburgs through the marriage of its heiress Mary Beatrice of Este (d. 1829) with the archduke Ferdinand (1754-1806), brother of the emperor Leopold II. From 1814 to 1846 this duchy was governed by Ferdinand’s son, Duke Francis IV., and from 1846 to 1859 by his grandson, Francis V. This family became extinct on the death of Francis V. in 1875.

A few words should be said about the cadet branches of the Habsburg family. When Francis I died in 1765 and Joseph II became emperor, the grand duchy of Tuscany went to his younger brother Leopold instead of Joseph, due to a special arrangement. Then in 1791, after Leopold succeeded Joseph as emperor, he passed the grand duchy to his second son, Ferdinand (1769-1824). In 1801, this prince was deposed by Napoleon, and Tuscany was taken over by France. It was restored to the Habsburgs in 1814 under Ferdinand and then governed by his son Leopold (1797-1870) until the uprising in 1859, when the Austrians were expelled and the grand duchy was incorporated into the kingdom of Sardinia. The duchy of Modena faced a similar fate; it passed to the Habsburgs through the marriage of its heiress Mary Beatrice of Este (d. 1829) to Archduke Ferdinand (1754-1806), the brother of Emperor Leopold II. From 1814 to 1846, this duchy was ruled by Ferdinand's son, Duke Francis IV, and from 1846 to 1859 by his grandson, Francis V. This family became extinct with the death of Francis V in 1875.

In addition to his successor Francis II., and to Ferdinand, grand-duke of Tuscany, the emperor Leopold II. had eight sons, five of whom, including the archduke John (1782-1859), who saw a good deal of service during the Napoleonic Wars and was chosen regent (Reichsverweser) of Germany in 1848, have now no living male descendants. Thus the existing branches of the family are descended from Leopold’s five other sons. The descendants of Leopold, the dispossessed grand-duke of Tuscany, were in 1909 represented by his son, Ferdinand (b. 1835), who still claimed the title of grand-duke of Tuscany, and his son and grandsons; by the numerous descendants of the archduke Charles Salvator (1830-1892); and by the archduke Louis Salvator (b. 1847), a great traveller and a voluminous writer. The grand-duke’s fourth son was the archduke John Nepomuck Salvator, who, after serving in the Austrian army, resigned all his rights and titles and under the name of Johann Orth took command of a sailing vessel. He is supposed to have been drowned off the coast of South America in 1891, but reports of his continued existence were circulated from time to time after that date. Of the emperor Leopold’s other sons the archduke Charles, perhaps the most distinguished soldier of the family, left four sons, including Albert, duke of Teschen (1817-1895), who inherited some of his father’s military ability. Charles’s family was in 1909 represented by his grandsons, the sons of the archduke Charles Ferdinand (1818-1874). The archduke Joseph (1776-1847), palatine of Hungary, was represented by a grandson, Joseph Augustus (b. 1872), and the archduke Rainer (1783-1853), viceroy of Lombardy-Venetia, by a son Rainer (b. 1827), and by several grandsons.

In addition to his successor Francis II and Ferdinand, the Grand Duke of Tuscany, Emperor Leopold II had eight sons. Five of them, including Archduke John (1782-1859), who served extensively during the Napoleonic Wars and was appointed regent of Germany in 1848, now have no living male descendants. Therefore, the existing branches of the family come from Leopold’s other five sons. As of 1909, Leopold’s descendants, the dispossessed Grand Duke of Tuscany, were represented by his son Ferdinand (b. 1835), who still claimed the title of Grand Duke of Tuscany, along with his son and grandsons; the many descendants of Archduke Charles Salvator (1830-1892); and Archduke Louis Salvator (b. 1847), a great traveler and prolific writer. The Grand Duke’s fourth son was Archduke John Nepomuck Salvator, who, after serving in the Austrian army, renounced all his rights and titles and, under the name Johann Orth, took command of a sailing vessel. He is believed to have drowned off the coast of South America in 1891, although reports of his continued existence surfaced occasionally after that. Of Emperor Leopold’s other sons, Archduke Charles, possibly the most distinguished soldier in the family, had four sons, including Albert, Duke of Teschen (1817-1895), who inherited some of his father’s military skills. Charles’s family was represented in 1909 by his grandsons, the sons of Archduke Charles Ferdinand (1818-1874). Archduke Joseph (1776-1847), Palatine of Hungary, was represented by his grandson Joseph Augustus (b. 1872), while Archduke Rainer (1783-1853), Viceroy of Lombardy-Venetia, was represented by his son Rainer (b. 1827) and several grandsons.

The eldest and reigning branch of the family was in 1909 represented by the emperor Francis Joseph, whose father was the archduke Francis Charles (1802-1878), and whose grandfather was the emperor Francis II. Francis Joseph’s only son Rudolph died in 1889; consequently the heir to the Habsburg monarchy was the emperor’s nephew Francis Ferdinand (b. 1863), the eldest of the three sons of his brother Charles Louis (1833-1896). In 1875 Francis Ferdinand inherited the wealth of the Este family and took the title of archduke of Austria-Este; in 1900 he contracted a morganatic marriage with Sophia, countess of Chotek, renouncing for his sons the succession to the monarchy. Thus after Francis Ferdinand this would pass to the sons of his brother, the archduke Otto (1865-1906). One of the emperor’s three brothers was Maximilian, emperor of Mexico from 1863 to 1867.

The oldest and ruling branch of the family in 1909 was represented by Emperor Francis Joseph, whose father was Archduke Francis Charles (1802-1878) and whose grandfather was Emperor Francis II. Francis Joseph’s only son, Rudolf, died in 1889; therefore, the heir to the Habsburg monarchy was the emperor’s nephew, Francis Ferdinand (b. 1863), the oldest of the three sons of his brother Charles Louis (1833-1896). In 1875, Francis Ferdinand inherited the fortune of the Este family and took the title of Archduke of Austria-Este. In 1900, he entered into a morganatic marriage with Sophia, Countess of Chotek, renouncing the succession to the monarchy for his sons. As a result, after Francis Ferdinand, the succession would go to the sons of his brother, Archduke Otto (1865-1906). One of the emperor’s three brothers was Maximilian, who was Emperor of Mexico from 1863 to 1867.

With the exception of Charles V. the Habsburgs have produced no statesmen of great ability, while several members of the family have displayed marked traces of insanity. Nevertheless they secured, and for over 350 years they kept, the first place among the potentates of Europe; a dignity in origin and theory elective becoming in practice hereditary in their house. This position they owe to some extent to the tenacity with which they have clung to the various lands and dignities which have passed into their possession, but they owe it much more to a series of fortunate marriages and opportune deaths. The union of Maximilian and Mary of Burgundy, of Philip the Handsome and Joanna of Spain, of Ferdinand and Anna of Hungary and Bohemia; the death of Ottakar of Bohemia, of John, the only son of Ferdinand and Isabella of Spain, of Louis of Hungary and Bohemia—these are the corner-stones upon which the Habsburg monarchy has been built.

With the exception of Charles V, the Habsburgs haven't produced many great statesmen, while several family members have shown clear signs of madness. Still, they maintained, for over 350 years, their top position among the rulers of Europe; a title that was originally and theoretically elective turned into a hereditary privilege for their family. They owe this status partly to their stubbornness in holding onto the various territories and titles that came into their control, but even more so to a series of lucky marriages and timely deaths. The union of Maximilian and Mary of Burgundy, Philip the Handsome and Joanna of Spain, Ferdinand and Anna of Hungary and Bohemia; along with the deaths of Ottakar of Bohemia, John, the only son of Ferdinand and Isabella of Spain, and Louis of Hungary and Bohemia—these are the foundation stones on which the Habsburg monarchy has been built.

For the origin and early history of the Habsburgs see G. de Roo, Annales rerum ab Austriacis Habsburgicae gentis principibus a Rudolpho I. usque ad Carolum V. gestarum (Innsbruck, 1592, fol.); M. Herrgott, Genealogia diplomatica augustae gentis Habsburgicae (Vienna, 1737-1738); E. M. Fürst von Lichnowsky, Geschichte des Hauses Habsburg (Vienna, 1836-1844); A. Schulte, Geschichte der Habsburger in den ersten drei Jahrhunderten (Innsbruck, 1887); T. von Liebenau, Die Anfänge des Hauses Habsburg (Vienna, 1883); W. Merz, Die Habsburg (Aarau, 1896); W. Gisi, Der Ursprung der Häuser Zähringen und Habsburg (1888); and F. Weihrich, Stammtafel zur Geschichte des Hauses Habsburg (Vienna, 1893). For the history of the Habsburg monarchy see Langl, Die Habsburg und die denkwürdigen Stätten ihrer Umgebung (Vienna, 1895); and E. A. Freeman, Historical Geography of Europe (1881). Two English books on the subject are J. Gilbart-Smith, The Cradle of the Hapsburgs (1907); and A. R. and E. Colquhoun, The Whirlpool of Europe, Austria-Hungary and the Hapsburgs (1906).

For the origins and early history of the Habsburgs, see G. de Roo, Annales rerum ab Austriacis Habsburgicae gentis principibus a Rudolpho I. usque ad Carolum V. gestarum (Innsbruck, 1592, fol.); M. Herrgott, Genealogia diplomatica augustae gentis Habsburgicae (Vienna, 1737-1738); E. M. Fürst von Lichnowsky, Geschichte des Hauses Habsburg (Vienna, 1836-1844); A. Schulte, Geschichte der Habsburger in den ersten drei Jahrhunderten (Innsbruck, 1887); T. von Liebenau, Die Anfänge des Hauses Habsburg (Vienna, 1883); W. Merz, Die Habsburg (Aarau, 1896); W. Gisi, Der Ursprung der Häuser Zähringen und Habsburg (1888); and F. Weihrich, Stammtafel zur Geschichte des Hauses Habsburg (Vienna, 1893). For the history of the Habsburg monarchy, see Langl, Die Habsburg und die denkwürdigen Stätten ihrer Umgebung (Vienna, 1895); and E. A. Freeman, Historical Geography of Europe (1881). Two English books on the subject are J. Gilbart-Smith, The Cradle of the Hapsburgs (1907); and A. R. and E. Colquhoun, The Whirlpool of Europe, Austria-Hungary and the Hapsburgs (1906).

(A. W. H.*)

HACHETTE, JEAN NICOLAS PIERRE (1769-1834), French mathematician, was born at Mézières, where his father was a bookseller, on the 6th of May 1769. For his early education he proceeded first to the college of Charleville, and afterwards to that of Reims. In 1788 he returned to Mézières, where he was attached to the school of engineering as draughtsman to the professors of physics and chemistry. In 1793 he became professor of hydrography at Collioure and Port-Vendre. While there he sent several papers, in which some questions of navigation were treated geometrically, to Gaspard Monge, at that time minister of marine, through whose influence he obtained an appointment in Paris. Towards the close of 1794, when the École Polytechnique was established, he was appointed along with Monge over the department of descriptive geometry. There he instructed some of the ablest Frenchmen of the day, among them S. D. Poisson, F. Arago and A. Fresnel. Accompanying Guyton de Morveau in his expedition, earlier in the year, he was present at the battle of Fleurus, and entered Brussels with the French army. In 1816, on the accession of Louis XVIII., he was expelled from his chair by government. He retained, however, till his death the office of professor in the faculty of sciences in the École Normale, to which he had been appointed in 1810. The necessary royal assent was in 1823 refused to the election of Hachette to the Académie des Sciences, and it was not till 1831, after the Revolution, that he obtained that honour. He died at Paris on the 16th of January 1834. Hachette was held in high esteem for his private worth, as well as for his scientific attainments and great public services. His labours were chiefly in the field of descriptive geometry, with its application to the arts and mechanical engineering. It was left to him to develop the geometry of Monge, and to him also is due in great measure the rapid advancement which France made soon after the establishment of the École Polytechnique in the construction of machinery.

HACHETTE, JEAN NICOLAS PIERRE (1769-1834), French mathematician, was born in Mézières, where his dad worked as a bookseller, on May 6, 1769. For his early education, he first went to the college in Charleville and then to the one in Reims. In 1788, he returned to Mézières, where he worked as a draughtsman for the professors of physics and chemistry at the engineering school. In 1793, he became a professor of hydrography in Collioure and Port-Vendre. While there, he sent several papers that geometrically addressed some navigation questions to Gaspard Monge, who was the minister of marine at the time and helped him get a position in Paris. Towards the end of 1794, when the École Polytechnique was founded, he was appointed alongside Monge to oversee the department of descriptive geometry. There, he taught some of the most talented Frenchmen of the era, including S. D. Poisson, F. Arago, and A. Fresnel. He accompanied Guyton de Morveau during an expedition earlier that year, attending the battle of Fleurus and entering Brussels with the French army. In 1816, when Louis XVIII came to power, he was dismissed from his position by the government. However, he kept his role as a professor in the faculty of sciences at the École Normale, a position he had been appointed to in 1810, until his death. The necessary royal approval for Hachette's election to the Académie des Sciences was denied in 1823, and it wasn’t until 1831, after the Revolution, that he received that honor. He passed away in Paris on January 16, 1834. Hachette was highly respected for both his personal integrity and his scientific achievements and significant public contributions. His work mainly focused on descriptive geometry and its applications in the arts and mechanical engineering. He developed Monge's geometry and played a crucial role in the rapid progress that France made right after the establishment of the École Polytechnique in machinery construction.

Hachette’s principal works are his Deux Supplements à la Géométrie descriptive de Monge (1811 and 1818); Éléments de géométrie à trois dimensions (1817); Collection des épures de géométrie, &c. 793 (1795 and 1817); Applications de géométrie descriptive (1817); Traité de géométrie descriptive, &c. (1822); Traité élémentaire des machines (1811); Correspondance sur l’École Polytechnique (1804-1815). He also contributed many valuable papers to the leading scientific journals of his time.

Hachette’s main works are his Deux Supplements à la Géométrie descriptive de Monge (1811 and 1818); Éléments de géométrie à trois dimensions (1817); Collection des épures de géométrie, & c. 793 (1795 and 1817); Applications de géométrie descriptive (1817); Traité de géométrie descriptive, & c. (1822); Traité élémentaire des machines (1811); Correspondance sur l’École Polytechnique (1804-1815). He also published many valuable papers in the top scientific journals of his time.

For a list of Hachette’s writings see the Catalogue of Scientific Papers of the Royal Society of London; also F. Arago, Œuvres (1855); and Silvestre, Notice sur J. N. P. Hachette (Bruxelles, 1836).

For a list of Hachette’s writings, check out the Catalogue of Scientific Papers of the Royal Society of London; also see F. Arago, Œuvres (1855); and Silvestre, Notice sur J. N. P. Hachette (Brussels, 1836).


HACHETTE, JEANNE, French heroine. Jeanne Lainé, or Fourquet, called Jeanne Hachette, was born about 1454. We have no precise information about her family or origin. She is known solely for her act of heroism which on the 27th of June 1472 saved Beauvais when it was on the point of being taken by the troops of Charles the Bold, duke of Burgundy. The town was defended by only 300 men-at-arms, commanded by Louis de Balagny. The Burgundians were making an assault, and one of their number had actually planted a flag upon the battlements, when Jeanne, axe in hand, flung herself upon him, hurled him into the moat, tore down the flag, and revived the drooping courage of the garrison. In gratitude for this heroic deed, Louis XI. instituted a procession in Beauvais called the Procession of the Assault, and married Jeanne to her chosen lover Colin Pilon, loading them with favours.

HACHETTE, JEANNE, French heroine. Jeanne Lainé, or Fourquet, known as Jeanne Hachette, was born around 1454. We don’t have detailed information about her family or background. She is famous only for her act of bravery on June 27, 1472, when she saved Beauvais from being captured by the troops of Charles the Bold, duke of Burgundy. The town was defended by just 300 soldiers, led by Louis de Balagny. The Burgundians were launching an attack, and one of them had even planted a flag on the battlements when Jeanne, axe in hand, charged at him, threw him into the moat, pulled down the flag, and boosted the morale of the garrison. In appreciation for this heroic act, Louis XI. established a parade in Beauvais known as the Procession of the Assault and married Jeanne to her beloved Colin Pilon, showering them with honors.

See Georges Vallat, Jeanne Hachette (Abbeville, 1898).

See Georges Vallat, *Jeanne Hachette* (Abbeville, 1898).


HACHETTE, LOUIS CHRISTOPHE FRANÇOIS (1800-1864), French publisher, was born at Rethel in the Ardennes on the 5th of May 1800. After studying three years at a normal school with the view of becoming a teacher, he was in 1822 on political grounds expelled from the seminary. He then studied law, but in 1826 he established in Paris a publishing business for the issue of works adapted to improve the system of school instruction, or to promote the general culture of the community. He published manuals in various departments of knowledge, dictionaries of modern and ancient languages, educational journals, and French, Latin and Greek classics annotated with great care by the most eminent authorities. Subsequently to 1850 he, in conjunction with other partners, published a cheap railway library, scientific and miscellaneous libraries, an illustrated library for the young, libraries of ancient literature, of modern foreign literature, and of modern foreign romance, a series of guide-books and a series of dictionaries of universal reference. In 1855 he also founded Le Journal pour tous, a publication with a circulation of 150,000 weekly. Hachette also manifested great interest in the formation of mutual friendly societies among the working classes, in the establishment of benevolent institutions, and in other questions relating to the amelioration of the poor, on which subjects he wrote various pamphlets; and he lent the weight of his influence towards a just settlement of the question of international literary copyright. He died on the 31st of July 1864.

HACHETTE, LOUIS CHRISTOPHE FRANÇOIS (1800-1864), French publisher, was born in Rethel, Ardennes, on May 5, 1800. After studying for three years at a teacher training school, he was expelled from the seminary in 1822 for political reasons. He then shifted to studying law, but in 1826, he founded a publishing business in Paris aimed at improving school instruction and promoting general culture within the community. He published manuals across various fields, dictionaries for modern and ancient languages, educational journals, and carefully annotated editions of French, Latin, and Greek classics by noted experts. After 1850, he partnered with others to publish inexpensive railway libraries, scientific and general libraries, illustrated books for young readers, collections of ancient literature, modern foreign works, and contemporary fiction, as well as a series of guidebooks and comprehensive dictionaries. In 1855, he also launched Le Journal pour tous, which had a weekly circulation of 150,000. Hachette showed a strong commitment to establishing mutual aid societies for the working class, creating charitable organizations, and addressing issues related to improving conditions for the poor, writing several pamphlets on these topics. He also supported fair international literary copyright arrangements. He passed away on July 31, 1864.


HACHURE (French for “hatching”), the term for the conventional lines used in hill or mountain shading upon a map (q.v.) to indicate the slope of the surface, the depth of shading being greatest where the slope is steepest. The method is less accurate than that of contour lines, but gives an indication of the trend and extent of a range or mountain system, especially upon small-scale maps.

HACHURE (French for “hatching”) refers to the traditional lines used in hill or mountain shading on a map (q.v.) to show the slope of the surface, with darker shading indicating steeper slopes. This method is not as precise as contour lines, but it provides a sense of the direction and size of a mountain range or system, especially on small-scale maps.


HACIENDA (O. Span, facienda, from the Latin, meaning “things to be done”), a Spanish term for a landed estate. It is commonly applied in Spanish America to a country estate, on which stock-raising, manufacturing or mining may be carried on, usually with a dwelling-house for the owner’s residence upon it. It is thus used loosely for a country house.

Hacienda (O. Span, facienda, from the Latin, meaning “things to be done”), is a Spanish term for a landholding. It’s often used in Spanish America to refer to a rural estate where livestock farming, manufacturing, or mining can take place, typically with a house for the owner’s residence on the property. It can also refer more generally to a country house.


HACKBERRY, a name given to the fruit of Celtis occidentalis, belonging to the natural botanical order Ulmaceae, to which also belongs the elm (Ulmus). It is also known under the name of “sugar-berry,” “beaver-wood” and “nettle-tree.” The hackberry tree is of middle size, attaining from 60 to 80 ft. in height (though sometimes reaching 130 ft.), and with the aspect of an elm. The leaves are ovate in shape, with a very long taper point, rounded and usually very oblique at the base, usually glabrous above and soft-pubescent beneath. The soft filmy flowers appear early in the spring before the expansion of the leaves. The fruit is oblong, about half to three-quarters of an inch long, of a reddish or yellowish colour when young, turning to a dark purple in autumn. This tree is distributed through the deep shady forests bordering river banks from Canada (where it is very rare) to the southern states. The fruit has a sweetish and slightly astringent taste, and is largely eaten in the United States. The seeds contain an oil like that of almonds. The bark is tough and fibrous like hemp, and the wood is heavy, soft, fragile and coarse-grained, and is used for making fences and furniture. The root has been used as a dye for linens.

HACKBERRY is the name for the fruit of Celtis occidentalis, which is part of the botanical family Ulmaceae, also including the elm (Ulmus). It's also called “sugar-berry,” “beaver-wood,” and “nettle-tree.” The hackberry tree is medium-sized, growing between 60 to 80 ft. tall (sometimes up to 130 ft.), and resembles an elm. The leaves are oval with a long pointed tip, rounded, and usually uneven at the base, typically smooth on top and soft with tiny hairs underneath. The delicate flowers bloom early in spring before the leaves open. The fruit is oblong, about half to three-quarters of an inch long, reddish or yellowish when young, and turns dark purple in autumn. This tree is found in the deep, shady forests along riverbanks from Canada (where it's quite rare) to the southern states. The fruit has a sweet yet slightly astringent flavor and is commonly eaten in the United States. The seeds contain an oil similar to that of almonds. The bark is tough and fibrous like hemp, while the wood is heavy, soft, fragile, and coarse-grained, used for making fences and furniture. The root has been used as a dye for linens.


HACKENSACK, a town and the county-seat of Bergen county, New Jersey, U.S.A., on the Hackensack river, 13 m. N. of Jersey City. Pop. (1890), 6004; (1900), 9443, of whom 2009 were foreign-born and 515 were negroes; (1905) 11,098; (1910) 14,050. It is served by the New York, Susquehanna & Western, and the New Jersey & New York railways, both being controlled by the Erie Company; and indirectly by the West Shore (at Bogota, ½ m. S.E.). Electric lines connect Hackensack with Newark, Passaic and Paterson, and with New York ferries. The town extends from the low bank of the river W. to the top of a ridge, about 40 ft. higher up, from which there are good views to the S. and E. Hackensack is principally a residential town, though there are a number of manufacturing establishments in and near it. Silk and silk goods and wall-paper are the principal manufactures. In 1905 the value of the town’s factory product was $1,488,358, an increase of 90.3% since 1900. There are an historic mansion-house and an interesting old Dutch church, both erected during the 18th century; and a monument marks the grave of General Enoch Poor (1736-1780), an officer in the War of Independence, who was born at Andover, Mass., entered the Continental Army from New Hampshire, and took part in the campaign against Burgoyne, in the battle of Monmouth and in General Sullivan’s expedition against the Iroquois. Hackensack was settled by the Dutch about 1640, and was named after the Hackensack Indians, a division of the Unami Delawares, who lived in the valleys of the Hackensack and Passaic rivers, and whose best-known chief was Oritany, a friend of the whites. Hackensack is coextensive with the township of New Barbadoes, first incorporated with considerably larger territory in 1693.

HACKENSACK, is a town and the county seat of Bergen County, New Jersey, USA, located on the Hackensack River, 13 miles north of Jersey City. The population was 6,004 in 1890; 9,443 in 1900, of which 2,009 were foreign-born and 515 were African American; 11,098 in 1905; and 14,050 in 1910. It is served by the New York, Susquehanna & Western and the New Jersey & New York railways, both controlled by the Erie Company, and indirectly by the West Shore (at Bogota, ½ mile southeast). Electric lines connect Hackensack with Newark, Passaic, Paterson, and the New York ferries. The town stretches from the low bank of the river west to the top of a ridge about 40 feet higher up, providing good views to the south and east. Hackensack is mainly a residential town, although there are several manufacturing establishments in and around it. Silk and silk products, as well as wallpaper, are the main industries. In 1905, the value of the town’s factory output was $1,488,358, an increase of 90.3% since 1900. There is a historic mansion and an interesting old Dutch church, both built in the 18th century; a monument marks the grave of General Enoch Poor (1736-1780), an officer in the War of Independence, who was born in Andover, Massachusetts, entered the Continental Army from New Hampshire, and participated in the campaign against Burgoyne, the Battle of Monmouth, and General Sullivan’s expedition against the Iroquois. Hackensack was settled by the Dutch around 1640 and was named after the Hackensack Indians, a group of the Unami Delawares who lived in the valleys of the Hackensack and Passaic rivers, and whose most well-known chief was Oritany, a friend of the settlers. Hackensack is coextensive with the township of New Barbadoes, which was first incorporated with a significantly larger territory in 1693.


HACKET, JOHN (1592-1670), bishop of Lichfield and Coventry, was born in London and educated at Westminster and Trinity College, Cambridge. On taking his degree he was elected a fellow of his college, and soon afterwards wrote the comedy of Loiola (London, 1648), which was twice performed before James I. He was ordained in 1618, and through the influence of John Williams (1582-1650) became rector in 1621 of Stoke Hammond, Bucks, and Kirkby Underwood, Lincolnshire. In 1623 he was chaplain to James, and in 1624 Williams presented him to the livings of St Andrew’s, Holborn, and Cheam, Surrey. When the so-called “root-and-branch bill” was before parliament in 1641, Hacket was selected to plead in the House of Commons for the continuance of cathedral establishments. In 1645 his living of St Andrew’s was sequestered, but he was allowed to retain the rectory of Cheam. On the accession of Charles II. his fortunes improved; he frequently preached before the king, and in 1661 was consecrated bishop of Lichfield and Coventry. His best-known book is the excellent biography of his patron, Archbishop Williams, entitled Scrinia reserata: a Memorial offered to the great Deservings of John Williams, D.D. (London, 1693).

HACKET, JOHN (1592-1670), bishop of Lichfield and Coventry, was born in London and educated at Westminster and Trinity College, Cambridge. After earning his degree, he became a fellow of his college and soon wrote the comedy Loiola (London, 1648), which was performed twice before James I. He was ordained in 1618, and thanks to the influence of John Williams (1582-1650), he became rector of Stoke Hammond, Bucks, and Kirkby Underwood, Lincolnshire, in 1621. In 1623, he was chaplain to James, and in 1624, Williams assigned him the positions of St Andrew’s, Holborn, and Cheam, Surrey. When the “root-and-branch bill” was presented to parliament in 1641, Hacket was chosen to advocate for maintaining cathedral establishments in the House of Commons. In 1645, his parish of St Andrew’s was taken away, but he was allowed to keep the rectory of Cheam. When Charles II came to power, his situation improved; he often preached before the king and was consecrated as bishop of Lichfield and Coventry in 1661. His most famous book is the excellent biography of his patron, Archbishop Williams, called Scrinia reserata: a Memorial offered to the great Deservings of John Williams, D.D. (London, 1693).


HACKETT, HORATIO BALCH (1808-1875), American biblical scholar, was born in Salisbury, Massachusetts, on the 27th of December 1808. He was educated at Phillips-Andover Academy, at Amherst College, where he graduated as valedictorian in 1830, and at Andover Theological Seminary, where he graduated in 1834. He was adjunct professor of Latin and Greek Languages and Literature at Brown University in 1835-1838 and professor of Hebrew Literature there in 1838-1839, was ordained to the Baptist ministry in 1839—he had become a Baptist at Andover as the result of preparing a paper on baptism in the New Testament and the Fathers—and in 1839-1868 he was professor of 794 Biblical literature and interpretation in Newton Theological Institution where his most important work was the introduction of the modern German methods of Biblical criticism, which he had learned from Moses Stuart at Andover and with which he made himself more familiar in Germany (especially under Tholuck at Halle) in 1841. He travelled in Egypt and Palestine in 1852, and in 1858-1859 in Greece, becoming proficient in modern Greek. From 1870 until his death in Rochester, New York, on the 2nd of November 1875, he was professor of Biblical literature and New Testament exegesis in the Rochester Theological Seminary. He was a great teacher but a greater critical and exegetical scholar.

HACKETT, HORATIO BALCH (1808-1875), an American biblical scholar, was born in Salisbury, Massachusetts, on December 27, 1808. He was educated at Phillips-Andover Academy, at Amherst College, where he graduated as valedictorian in 1830, and at Andover Theological Seminary, where he graduated in 1834. He served as adjunct professor of Latin and Greek Languages and Literature at Brown University from 1835 to 1838 and as professor of Hebrew Literature there from 1838 to 1839. He was ordained to the Baptist ministry in 1839—he had become a Baptist at Andover after writing a paper on baptism in the New Testament and the Fathers—and from 1839 to 1868, he was a professor of 794 Biblical literature and interpretation at Newton Theological Institution, where his most significant contribution was introducing modern German methods of Biblical criticism, which he learned from Moses Stuart at Andover and became more familiar with in Germany (especially under Tholuck at Halle) in 1841. He traveled in Egypt and Palestine in 1852 and in Greece from 1858 to 1859, becoming proficient in modern Greek. From 1870 until his death in Rochester, New York, on November 2, 1875, he was a professor of Biblical literature and New Testament exegesis at the Rochester Theological Seminary. He was a great teacher but an even greater critical and exegetical scholar.

He wrote Christian Memorials of the War (1864); an English version of Winer’s Grammar of the Chaldee Language (1844); Exercises in Hebrew Grammar (1847); and various articles on the Semitic language and literature in periodicals; but his best-known work was in general commentary on the Bible and translation, and in the special text study of the New Testament. Under these two headings fall: Illustrations of Scripture; suggested by a Tour through the Holy Land (1855); the American revision, with Ezra Abbot, of Smith’s Dictionary of the Bible, to the British edition of which he had contributed about thirty articles; Commentary on the Original Text of the Acts of the Apostles (1852; 2nd edition, 1858), for many years the best English commentary; Notes on the Greek Text of the Epistle of Paul to Philemon, and a Revised Version of Philemon, both published in 1860; the English versions, in Schaff’s edition of Lange’s Commentaries, of Van Oosterzee’s Philemon and Braune’s Philippians; and for the American Bible Union Version of the Bible he translated the books of Ruth and Judges, and aided T. J. Conant in editorial revision; and he was one of the American translators for the English Bible revision.

He wrote Christian Memorials of the War (1864); an English version of Winer’s Grammar of the Chaldee Language (1844); Exercises in Hebrew Grammar (1847); and various articles on Semitic language and literature in periodicals. But his most well-known work was in general commentary on the Bible and translation, particularly in the detailed study of the New Testament. Under these two categories are: Illustrations of Scripture; suggested by a Tour through the Holy Land (1855); the American revision, with Ezra Abbot, of Smith’s Dictionary of the Bible, to which he contributed about thirty articles for the British edition; Commentary on the Original Text of the Acts of the Apostles (1852; 2nd edition, 1858), which was the leading English commentary for many years; Notes on the Greek Text of the Epistle of Paul to Philemon, along with a Revised Version of Philemon, both published in 1860; the English translations, in Schaff’s edition of Lange’s Commentaries, of Van Oosterzee’s Philemon and Braune’s Philippians; and for the American Bible Union Version of the Bible, he translated the books of Ruth and Judges, and assisted T. J. Conant in editorial revision; and he was one of the American translators for the English Bible revision.

See Memorials of Horatio Batch Hackett (Rochester, N.Y., 1876), edited by G. H. Whittemore.

See Memorials of Horatio Batch Hackett (Rochester, N.Y., 1876), edited by G. H. Whittemore.


HACKETT, JAMES HENRY (1800-1871), American actor, was born in New York. After an unsuccessful entry into business, in 1826 he went on the stage, where he soon established a reputation as a player of eccentric character parts. As Falstaff he was no less successful in England than in America. At various times he went into management, and he was the author of Notes and Comments on Shakespeare (1863).

HACKETT, JAMES HENRY (1800-1871), American actor, was born in New York. After struggling in business, he stepped onto the stage in 1826, quickly earning a reputation for playing eccentric character roles. He was just as successful as Falstaff in England as he was in America. At different points, he took on management roles and wrote Notes and Comments on Shakespeare (1863).

His son, James Keteltas Hackett (1869-  ), born at Wolfe Island, Ontario, and educated at the College of the City of New York, also became an actor. He came into prominence at the Lyceum in Daniel Frohman’s company, and afterwards had considerable success in romantic parts. As a manager he stood outside the American syndicate of theatres, and organized several companies to play throughout the United States. In 1897 he married Mary Mannering, the Anglo-American actress.

His son, James Keteltas Hackett (1869-  ), was born on Wolfe Island, Ontario, and went to school at the College of the City of New York. He also became an actor. He rose to fame at the Lyceum in Daniel Frohman’s company and later found significant success in romantic roles. As a manager, he operated independently of the American theater syndicate and organized several companies to perform across the United States. In 1897, he married Mary Mannering, the Anglo-American actress.


HACKLÄNDER, FRIEDRICH WILHELM VON (1816-1877), German novelist and dramatist, was born at Burtscheid near Aix-la-Chapelle on the 1st of November 1816. Having served an apprenticeship in a commercial house, he entered the Prussian artillery, but, disappointed at not finding advancement, returned to business. A soldier’s life had a fascination for him, and he made his début as an author with Bilder aus dem Soldatenleben im Frieden (1841). After a journey to the east, he was appointed secretary to the crown prince of Württemberg, whom he accompanied on his travels. Wachtstubenabenteuer, a continuation of his first work, appeared in 1845, and it was followed by Bilder aus dem Soldatenleben im Kriege (1849-1850). As a result of a tour in Spain in 1854, appeared Ein Winter in Spanien (1855). In 1857 he founded, in conjunction with Edmund von Zoller, the illustrated weekly, Über Land und Meer. In 1859 Hackländer was appointed director of royal parks and public gardens at Stuttgart, and in this post did much towards the embellishment of the city. In 1859 he was attached to the headquarters staff of the Austrian army during the Italian war; in 1861 he was raised to an hereditary knighthood in Austria; in 1864 he retired into private life, and died on the 6th of July 1877. Hackländer’s literary talent is confined within narrow limits. There is much in his works of lively, adventurous and even romantic description, but the character-drawing is feeble and superficial.

HACKLÄNDER, FRIEDRICH WILHELM VON (1816-1877), German novelist and playwright, was born in Burtscheid near Aix-la-Chapelle on November 1, 1816. After training in a commercial business, he joined the Prussian artillery but, feeling disappointed by a lack of opportunities for advancement, he went back to the business world. The life of a soldier intrigued him, and he made his debut as an author with Bilder aus dem Soldatenleben im Frieden (1841). Following a trip to the East, he became the secretary to the Crown Prince of Württemberg, traveling with him on various journeys. Wachtstubenabenteuer, a sequel to his first work, was published in 1845, followed by Bilder aus dem Soldatenleben im Kriege (1849-1850). After a trip to Spain in 1854, he released Ein Winter in Spanien (1855). In 1857, he co-founded the illustrated weekly Über Land und Meer with Edmund von Zoller. In 1859, Hackländer was appointed director of royal parks and public gardens in Stuttgart, contributing significantly to the city’s beautification. That same year, he joined the headquarters staff of the Austrian army during the Italian war; in 1861, he was granted an hereditary knighthood in Austria; in 1864, he retired from public life and died on July 6, 1877. Hackländer’s literary talent is somewhat limited. His works are filled with lively, adventurous, and even romantic descriptions, but the character development is weak and superficial.

Hackländer was a voluminous writer; the most complete edition of his works is the third, published at Stuttgart in 1876, in 60 volumes. There is also a good selection in 20 volumes (1881). Among his novels, Namenlose Geschichten (1851); Eugen Stillfried (1852); Krieg und Frieden (1859), and the comedies Der geheime Agent (1850) and Magnetische Kuren (1851) may be specially mentioned. His autobiography appeared in 1878 under the title, Der Roman meines Lebens (2 vols.). See H. Morning, Erinnerungen an F. W. Hackländer (1878).

Hackländer was a prolific writer; the most complete edition of his works is the third, published in Stuttgart in 1876, with 60 volumes. There is also a good selection in 20 volumes from 1881. Among his novels, Namenlose Geschichten (1851); Eugen Stillfried (1852); Krieg und Frieden (1859), and the comedies Der geheime Agent (1850) and Magnetische Kuren (1851) are particularly noteworthy. His autobiography came out in 1878 under the title Der Roman meines Lebens (2 vols.). See H. Morning, Erinnerungen an F. W. Hackländer (1878).


HACKNEY, a north-eastern metropolitan borough of London, England, bounded W. by Stoke Newington and Islington, and S. by Shoreditch, Bethnal Green and Poplar, and extending N. and E. to the boundary of the county of London. Pop. (1901), 219,272. It is a poor and populous district, in which the main thoroughfares are Kingsland Road, continued N. as Stoke Newington Road and Stamford Hill; Mare Street, continued N.W. as Clapton Road to join Stamford Hill; and Lea Bridge Road running N.E. towards Walthamstow and Low Leyton. The borough includes the districts of Clapton in the north, Homerton in the east, and Dalston and part of Kingsland in the west. On the east lies the open flat valley of the Lea, which flows in several branches, and is bordered, immediately outside the confines of the borough, by the extensive reservoirs of the East London water-works. In these low lands lie the Hackney Marshes (338 acres; among several so-called marshes in the Lea valley), and the borough also contains part of Victoria Park and a number of open spaces collectively called the Hackney Commons, including Mill Fields, Hackney Downs, London Fields, &c. The total area of open spaces exceeds 500 acres. The tower of the ancient parish church of St Augustine, with the chapel of the Rowe family, still stands, and is the only historic building of importance. Among institutions are the German hospital, Dalston, Metropolitan hospital, Kingsland Road, and Eastern Fever hospital, Homerton; and the Hackney polytechnic institute, with which is incorporated the Sir John Cass institute. Cass (1666-1718), a merchant of the city of London, also a member of parliament and sheriff, bequeathed £1000 for the foundation of a free school; in 1732 the bequest was increased in accordance with an unfinished codicil to his will; and the income provided from it is now about £6000, some 250 boys and girls being educated. The parliamentary borough of Hackney comprises north, central and south divisions, each returning one member; and the northern division includes the metropolitan borough of Stoke Newington. The metropolitan borough of Hackney includes part of the Hornsey parliamentary division of Middlesex. The borough council consists of a mayor, 10 aldermen and 60 councillors. Area, 3288.9 acres.

HACKNEY, is a northeastern borough of London, England, bordered to the west by Stoke Newington and Islington, and to the south by Shoreditch, Bethnal Green, and Poplar, extending north and east to the county boundary of London. Population (1901): 219,272. It is a densely populated area with many low-income residents. The main roads include Kingsland Road, which continues north as Stoke Newington Road and Stamford Hill; Mare Street, which continues northwest as Clapton Road to connect with Stamford Hill; and Lea Bridge Road running northeast toward Walthamstow and Low Leyton. The borough includes the neighborhoods of Clapton in the north, Homerton in the east, and Dalston and part of Kingsland in the west. To the east lies the flat valley of the River Lea, which branches off into several streams and is bordered just outside the borough by the large reservoirs of the East London waterworks. In these lowlands are the Hackney Marshes (338 acres; among several marshes in the Lea valley), and the borough also includes part of Victoria Park and several open spaces collectively known as Hackney Commons, including Mill Fields, Hackney Downs, London Fields, etc. The total area of open spaces exceeds 500 acres. The tower of the old parish church of St Augustine, along with the Rowe family chapel, still stands and is the only significant historic building. Notable institutions include the German Hospital in Dalston, the Metropolitan Hospital on Kingsland Road, and the Eastern Fever Hospital in Homerton; as well as the Hackney Polytechnic Institute, which includes the Sir John Cass Institute. Cass (1666-1718), a London merchant, member of parliament, and sheriff, left £1000 for a free school, which was later increased in 1732 based on an unfinished codicil to his will. The income from this fund now totals about £6000, educating around 250 boys and girls. The parliamentary borough of Hackney is divided into north, central, and south divisions, each electing one member; the northern division includes the metropolitan borough of Stoke Newington. The metropolitan borough of Hackney also contains part of the Hornsey parliamentary division of Middlesex. The borough council is made up of a mayor, 10 aldermen, and 60 councillors. Area: 3288.9 acres.

In the 13th century the name appears as Hackenaye or Hacquenye, but no certain derivation is advanced. Roman and other remains have been found in Hackney Marshes. In 1290 the bishop of London was lord of the manor, which was so held until 1550, when it was granted to Thomas, Lord Wentworth. In 1697 it came into the hands of the Tyssen family. Extensive property in the parish also belonged to the priory of the Knights Hospitallers of St John of Jerusalem at Clerkenwell. From the 16th to the early 19th century there were many fine residences in Hackney. The neighbourhood of Hackney had at one time an evil reputation as the haunt of highwaymen.

In the 13th century, the name appears as Hackenaye or Hacquenye, but no clear origin has been established. Roman and other artifacts have been discovered in Hackney Marshes. In 1290, the bishop of London was the lord of the manor, which remained the case until 1550 when it was granted to Thomas, Lord Wentworth. In 1697, it was taken over by the Tyssen family. A significant amount of property in the parish also belonged to the priory of the Knights Hospitallers of St John of Jerusalem in Clerkenwell. From the 16th to the early 19th century, there were many impressive residences in Hackney. At one point, the Hackney area had a notorious reputation as a hangout for highwaymen.


HACKNEY (from Fr. haquenée, Lat. equus, an ambling horse or mare, especially for ladies to ride; the English “hack” is simply an abbreviation), originally a riding-horse. At the present day, however, the hackney (as opposed to a thoroughbred) is bred for driving as well as riding (see Horse: Breeds). From the hiring-out of hackneys, the word came to be associated with employment for hire (so “a hack,” as a general term for “drudge”), especially in combination, e.g. hackney-chair, hackney-coach, hackney-boat. The hackney-coach, a coach with four wheels and two horses, was a form of hired public conveyance (see Carriage).

HACKNEY (from Fr. haquenée, Lat. equus, an ambling horse or mare, especially designed for women to ride; the English “hack” is just a short form), originally referred to a riding horse. Nowadays, however, the hackney (as opposed to a thoroughbred) is bred for both driving and riding (see Horse: Breeds). The term came from the renting out of hackneys, leading to its association with hired work (thus “a hack,” as a general term for “drudge”), especially in combinations like e.g. hackney-chair, hackney-coach, hackney-boat. The hackney-coach, a four-wheeled coach pulled by two horses, was a type of hired public transport (see Carriage).


HADAD, the name of a Syrian deity, is met with in the Old Testament as the name of several human persons; it also occurs in compound forms like Benhadad and Hadadezer. The divinity primarily denoted by it is the storm-god who was known also as Ramman, Bir and Dadda. The Syrian kings of Damascus seem to have habitually assumed the title of Benhadad, or son of Hadad (three of this name are mentioned in Scripture), just as a series of Egyptian monarchs are known to have been 795 accustomed to call themselves sons of Amon-Ra. The word Hadadrimmon, for which the inferior reading Hadarrimmon is found in some MSS. in the phrase “the mourning of (or at) Hadadrimmon” (Zech. xii. 11), has been a subject of much discussion. According to Jerome and all the older Christian interpreters, the mourning for something that occurred at a place called Hadadrimmon (Maximianopolis) in the valley of Megiddo is meant, the event alluded to being generally held to be the death of Josiah (or, as in the Targum, the death of Ahab at the hands of Hadadrimmon); but more recently the opinion has been gaining ground that Hadadrimmon is merely another name for Adonis (q.v.) or Tammuz, the allusion being to the mournings by which the Adonis festivals were usually accompanied (Hitzig on Zech. xii. 11, Isa. xvii. 8; Movers, Phönizier, i. 196). T. K. Cheyne (Encycl. Bibl. s.v.) points out that the Septuagint reads simply Rimmon, and argues that this may be a corruption of Migdon (Megiddo), in itself a corruption of Tammuz-Adon. He would render the verse, “In that day there shall be a great mourning in Jerusalem, as the mourning of the women who weep for Tammuz-Adon” (Adon means lord).

HADAD, is the name of a Syrian god that appears in the Old Testament as the name of several people; it also shows up in combinations like Benhadad and Hadadezer. The deity mainly represented is the storm god, who was also known as Ramman, Bir, and Dadda. The Syrian kings of Damascus seem to have regularly taken the title of Benhadad, or son of Hadad (three of this name are mentioned in Scripture), just as various Egyptian rulers are known to have called themselves sons of Amon-Ra. The term Hadadrimmon, with the alternative spelling Hadarrimmon found in some manuscripts in the phrase “the mourning of (or at) Hadadrimmon” (Zech. xii. 11), has been widely debated. According to Jerome and many early Christian interpreters, the mourning refers to an event that took place at a location called Hadadrimmon (Maximianopolis) in the valley of Megiddo, typically thought to be the death of Josiah (or, as noted in the Targum, the death of Ahab at the hands of Hadadrimmon); however, more recently, the view has gained traction that Hadadrimmon is simply another name for Adonis (q.v.) or Tammuz, referring to the mourning associated with the Adonis festivals (Hitzig on Zech. xii. 11, Isa. xvii. 8; Movers, Phönizier, i. 196). T. K. Cheyne (Encycl. Bibl. s.v.) points out that the Septuagint reads simply Rimmon and suggests this may be a corruption of Migdon (Megiddo), which itself is a corruption of Tammuz-Adon. He would translate the verse as, “In that day there will be a great mourning in Jerusalem, like the mourning of the women who weep for Tammuz-Adon” (Adon means lord).


HADDINGTON, EARL OF, a Scottish title bestowed in 1627 upon Thomas Hamilton, earl of Melrose (1563-1637). Thomas, who was a member of the great family of Hamilton, being a son of Thomas Hamilton of Priestfield, was a lawyer who became a lord of session as Lord Drumcairn in 1592. He was on very friendly terms with James VI., his legal talents being useful to the king, and he was one of the eight men who, called the Octavians, were appointed to manage the finances of Scotland in 1596. Having also become king’s advocate in 1596, Hamilton was entrusted with a large share in the government of his country when James went to London in 1603; in 1612 he was appointed secretary of state for Scotland, and in 1613 he was created Lord Binning and Byres. In 1616 he became lord president of the court of session, and three years later was created earl of Melrose, a title which he exchanged in 1627 for that of earl of Haddington. After the death of James I. the earl resigned his offices of president of the court of session and secretary of state, but he served Charles I. as lord privy seal. He died on the 29th of May 1637. Haddington, who was both scholarly and wealthy, left a large and valuable collection of papers, which is now in the Advocates’ library at Edinburgh. James referred familiarly to his friend as Tam o’ the Cowgate, his Edinburgh residence being in this street.

HADDINGTON, EARL OF, is a Scottish title granted in 1627 to Thomas Hamilton, earl of Melrose (1563-1637). Thomas, a member of the prominent Hamilton family and son of Thomas Hamilton of Priestfield, was a lawyer who became a lord of session as Lord Drumcairn in 1592. He was on very friendly terms with James VI., whose legal skills he found useful, and he was one of the eight men known as the Octavians, chosen to manage Scotland's finances in 1596. After also becoming king’s advocate in 1596, Hamilton took on significant government responsibilities when James moved to London in 1603; in 1612, he was appointed secretary of state for Scotland, and in 1613 he was made Lord Binning and Byres. In 1616, he became lord president of the court of session, and three years later he was made earl of Melrose, a title he exchanged for earl of Haddington in 1627. After James I. died, the earl stepped down from his roles as president of the court of session and secretary of state, but he continued to serve Charles I. as lord privy seal. He passed away on May 29, 1637. Haddington, who was both knowledgeable and wealthy, left behind a large and valuable collection of papers, which is now housed in the Advocates’ library in Edinburgh. James referred to his friend affectionately as Tam o’ the Cowgate, since his Edinburgh residence was on this street.

The earl’s eldest son Thomas, the 2nd earl (1600-1640), was a covenanter and a soldier, being killed by an explosion at Dunglass castle on the 30th of August 1640. His sons, Thomas (d. 1645) and John (d. 1669), became respectively the 3rd and 4th earls of Haddington, and John’s grandson Thomas (1679-1735) succeeded his father Charles (c. 1650-1685), as 6th earl in 1685, although he was not the eldest but the second son. This curious circumstance arose from the fact that when Charles married Margaret (d. 1700), the heiress of the earldom of Rothes, it was agreed that the two earldoms should be left separate; thus the eldest son John became earl of Rothes while Thomas became earl of Haddington. Thomas was a supporter of George I. during the rising of 1715, and was a representative peer for Scotland from 1716 to 1734. He died on the 28th of November 1735.

The earl's oldest son Thomas, the 2nd earl (1600-1640), was a covenanter and a soldier, and he was killed in an explosion at Dunglass castle on August 30, 1640. His sons, Thomas (d. 1645) and John (d. 1669), became the 3rd and 4th earls of Haddington, respectively. John's grandson Thomas (1679-1735) succeeded his father Charles (c. 1650-1685) as the 6th earl in 1685, even though he was the second son and not the eldest. This unusual situation happened because when Charles married Margaret (d. 1700), the heiress of the earldom of Rothes, it was decided that the two earldoms would remain separate; therefore, the eldest son John became the earl of Rothes while Thomas became the earl of Haddington. Thomas supported George I during the rising of 1715 and served as a representative peer for Scotland from 1716 to 1734. He passed away on November 28, 1735.

The 6th earl was a writer, but in this direction his elder son, Charles, Lord Binning (1697-1732), is perhaps more celebrated. After fighting by his father’s side at Sheriffmuir in 1715 and serving as member of parliament for St Germans, Binning died at Naples on the 27th of December 1732. His eldest son, Thomas (c. 1720-1794), became the 7th earl in 1735, and the latter’s grandson Thomas (1780-1858) became the 9th earl in 1828. The 9th earl had been a member of parliament from 1802 to 1827, when he was made a peer of the United Kingdom as Baron Melros of Tyninghame, a title which became extinct upon his death. In 1834 he became lord-lieutenant of Ireland under Sir Robert Peel, leaving office in the following year, and in Peel’s second administration (1841-1846) he served as first lord of the admiralty and then as lord privy seal. When he died without sons on the 1st of December 1858 the earldom passed to his kinsman, George Baillie (1802-1870), a descendant of the 6th earl. This nobleman took the name of Baillie-Hamilton, and his son George (b. 1827) became 11th earl of Haddington in 1870.

The 6th earl was a writer, but his elder son, Charles, Lord Binning (1697-1732), is perhaps more well-known in that regard. After fighting alongside his father at Sheriffmuir in 1715 and serving as a member of parliament for St Germans, Binning passed away in Naples on December 27, 1732. His eldest son, Thomas (c. 1720-1794), became the 7th earl in 1735, and the latter’s grandson Thomas (1780-1858) became the 9th earl in 1828. The 9th earl was a member of parliament from 1802 to 1827, when he was granted a peerage in the United Kingdom as Baron Melros of Tyninghame, a title that ended with his death. In 1834, he became lord-lieutenant of Ireland under Sir Robert Peel, stepping down in the following year, and during Peel’s second administration (1841-1846) he served as first lord of the admiralty and then as lord privy seal. When he died without sons on December 1, 1858, the earldom went to his relative, George Baillie (1802-1870), a descendant of the 6th earl. This nobleman adopted the name Baillie-Hamilton, and his son George (b. 1827) became the 11th earl of Haddington in 1870.

See State Papers of Thomas, Earl of Melrose, published by the Abbotsford Club in 1837, and Sir W. Fraser, Memorials of the Earls of Haddington (1889).

See State Papers of Thomas, Earl of Melrose, published by the Abbotsford Club in 1837, and Sir W. Fraser, Memorials of the Earls of Haddington (1889).


HADDINGTON, a royal, municipal and police burgh, and county town of Haddingtonshire, Scotland. Pop. (1901), 3993. It is situated on the Tyne, 18 m. E. of Edinburgh by the North British railway, being the terminus of a branch line from Longniddry Junction. Five bridges cross the river, on the right bank of which lies the old and somewhat decayed suburb of Nungate, interesting as having contained the Giffordgate, where John Knox was born, and where also are the ruins of the pre-Reformation chapel of St Martin. The principal building in the town is St Mary’s church, a cruciform Decorated edifice in red sandstone, probably dating from the 13th century. It is 210 ft. long, and is surmounted by a square tower 90 ft. high. The nave, restored in 1892, is used as the parish church, but the choir and transepts are roofless, though otherwise kept in repair. In a vault is a fine monument in alabaster, consisting of the recumbent figures of John, Lord Maitland of Thirlestane (1545-1595), chancellor of Scotland, and his wife. The laudatory sonnet composed by James VI. is inscribed on the tomb. In the same vault John, duke of Lauderdale (1616-1682), is buried. In the choir is the tombstone which Carlyle erected over the grave of his wife, Jane Baillie Welsh (1801-1866), a native of the town. Other public edifices include the county buildings in the Tudor style, in front of which stands the monument to George, 8th marquess of Tweeddale (1787-1876), who was such an expert and enthusiastic coachman that he once drove the mail from London to Haddington without taking rest; the corn exchange, next to that of Edinburgh the largest in Scotland; the town house, with a spire 150 ft. high, in front of which is a monument to John Home, the author of Douglas; the district asylum to the north of the burgh; the western district hospital; the Tenterfield home for children; the free library and the Knox Memorial Institute. This last-named building was erected in 1879 to replace the old and famous grammar school, where John Knox, William Dunbar, John Major and possibly George Buchanan and Sir David Lindsay were educated. John Brown (1722-1787), a once celebrated dissenting divine, author of the Self-Interpreting Bible, ministered in the burgh for 36 years and is buried there; his son John the theologian (1754-1832), and his grandson Samuel (1817-1856), the chemist, noted for his inquiries into the atomic theory, were natives. Samuel Smiles (1812-1904), author of Character, Self-Help and other works, was also born there, and Edward Irving was for years mathematical master in the grammar school. In Hardgate Street is “Bothwell Castle,” the town house of the earl of Bothwell, where Mary Queen of Scots rested on her way to Dunbar. The ancient market cross has been restored. The leading industries are the making of agricultural implements, manufactures of woollens and sacking, brewing, tanning and coach-building, besides corn mills and engineering works.

HADDINGTON, is a royal, municipal, and police burgh, and the county town of Haddingtonshire, Scotland. Population (1901): 3,993. It's located on the Tyne, 18 miles east of Edinburgh by the North British railway, serving as the terminus of a branch line from Longniddry Junction. Five bridges cross the river, and on the right bank lies the old and somewhat rundown suburb of Nungate, notable for having the Giffordgate, where John Knox was born, as well as the ruins of the pre-Reformation chapel of St. Martin. The main building in town is St. Mary’s Church, a cruciform decorated structure in red sandstone, probably dating back to the 13th century. It is 210 feet long and topped by a 90-foot square tower. The nave, restored in 1892, serves as the parish church, while the choir and transepts are roofless but otherwise maintained. Inside a vault is an impressive alabaster monument featuring the reclining figures of John, Lord Maitland of Thirlestane (1545-1595), chancellor of Scotland, and his wife. A commendatory sonnet by James VI. is inscribed on the tomb. Also in the same vault is John, Duke of Lauderdale (1616-1682). In the choir is the gravestone that Carlyle placed over the grave of his wife, Jane Baillie Welsh (1801-1866), who was from the town. Other public buildings include the county buildings in the Tudor style, in front of which stands a monument to George, 8th Marquess of Tweeddale (1787-1876), who was such a skilled and passionate coachman that he once drove the mail from London to Haddington without resting; the corn exchange, which is the largest in Scotland after Edinburgh’s; the town house, featuring a 150-foot high spire, and in front of it is a monument to John Home, the author of Douglas; the district asylum to the north of the burgh; the western district hospital; the Tenterfield home for children; the free library, and the Knox Memorial Institute. This last building was established in 1879 to replace the old and famous grammar school, where John Knox, William Dunbar, John Major, and possibly George Buchanan and Sir David Lindsay were educated. John Brown (1722-1787), a once-renowned dissenting divine and author of the Self-Interpreting Bible, served in the burgh for 36 years and is buried there; his son John, the theologian (1754-1832), and grandson Samuel (1817-1856), the chemist known for his work on atomic theory, were also natives. Samuel Smiles (1812-1904), author of Character, Self-Help, and other works, was also born here, and Edward Irving served as the mathematical master at the grammar school for many years. On Hardgate Street is “Bothwell Castle,” the town house of the Earl of Bothwell, where Mary Queen of Scots rested on her way to Dunbar. The ancient market cross has been restored. The main industries include the production of agricultural tools, woollen and sack manufacturing, brewing, tanning, coach-building, as well as corn mills and engineering works.

The burgh is the retail centre for a large district, and its grain markets, once the largest in Scotland, are still of considerable importance. Haddington was created a royal burgh by David I. It also received charters from Robert Bruce, Robert II. and James VI. In 1139 it was given as a dowry to Ada, daughter of William de Warenne, earl of Surrey, on her marriage to Prince Henry, the only son of David I. It was occasionally the residence of royalty, and Alexander II. was born there in 1198. Lying in the direct road of the English invaders, the town was often ravaged. It was burned by King John in 1216 and by Henry III. in 1244. Fortified in 1548 by Lord Grey of Wilton, the English commander, it was besieged next year by the Scots and French, who forced the garrison to withdraw. So much slaughter had gone on during that period of storm and stress that it was long impossible to excavate in any direction without coming 796 on human remains. The town has suffered much periodically from floods. One of the most memorable of these occurred on the 4th of October 1775, when the Tyne rose 8 ft. 9 in. above its bed and inundated a great part of the burgh. An inscription in the centre of the town records the event and marks the point to which the water rose.

The town is the shopping hub for a large area, and its grain markets, once the biggest in Scotland, are still quite important. Haddington was established as a royal burgh by David I. It also received charters from Robert Bruce, Robert II, and James VI. In 1139, it was given as a dowry to Ada, daughter of William de Warenne, earl of Surrey, when she married Prince Henry, the only son of David I. It occasionally served as a royal residence, and Alexander II was born there in 1198. Located along the direct route of English invaders, the town was frequently attacked. It was burned by King John in 1216 and by Henry III in 1244. Fortified in 1548 by Lord Grey of Wilton, the English commander, it was besieged the following year by the Scots and French, who forced the garrison to retreat. So much bloodshed occurred during that chaotic time that it was long impossible to dig in any direction without uncovering human remains. The town has periodically suffered from floods. One of the most notable occurred on October 4, 1775, when the Tyne rose 8 feet 9 inches above its usual level and flooded a large part of the town. An inscription in the center of the town commemorates the event and marks the height of the water.

There are many interesting places within a few miles of Haddington. Five miles E. is Whittingehame House, and 5 m. N.E. is the thriving village of East Linton (pop. 919). About 2½ m. N. lies Athelstaneford (locally, Elshinford), so named from the victory of Hungus, king of the Picts, in the 8th century over the Northumbrian Athelstane. On a hill near Drem, 3½ m. N. by W., are traces of a Romano-British settlement, and the remains of the priest’s house of the Knights Templars, to whom the barony once belonged. On the coast is the pretty village of Aberlady on a fine bay, and in the neighbourhood are some of the finest golf links in Scotland, such as Luffness, Gullane, Archerfield and Muirfield. On Gosford Bay is Gosford House, an 18th-century mansion, the seat of the earl of Wemyss. At Gladsmuir, 3½ m. W. of Haddington, alleged by some to have been the birthplace of George Heriot. Principal Robertson was minister and wrote most of his History of Scotland. Of the old seat of the Douglases at Longniddry few traces remain, and in the chapel, now in ruins, at the eastern end of the village, John Knox is said to have preached occasionally. At Gifford, 4 m. to the S., John Witherspoon (1722-1794), president of the College of New Jersey (Princeton), and Charles Nisbet (1736-1804), president of Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pennsylvania, were born. A little to the south of Gifford are Yester House, a seat of the marquess of Tweeddale, finely situated in a park of old trees, and the ruins of Yester Castle. The cavern locally known as Hobgoblin Hall is described in Marmion, and is associated with all kinds of manifestations of the black art. Lennoxlove, 1½ m. to the S., a seat of Lord Blantyre, was originally called Lethington, and for a few centuries was associated with the Maitlands. Amisfield, adjoining Haddington on the N.E., is another seat of the earl of Wemyss.

There are many interesting places just a few miles from Haddington. Five miles east is Whittingehame House, and 5 miles northeast is the bustling village of East Linton (population 919). About 2.5 miles north is Athelstaneford (locally called Elshinford), named after the victory of Hungus, king of the Picts, over Northumbrian Athelstane in the 8th century. On a hill near Drem, 3.5 miles northwest, are traces of a Romano-British settlement and the remains of the priest’s house from the Knights Templars, to whom the barony once belonged. On the coast is the charming village of Aberlady situated by a beautiful bay, and nearby are some of the best golf courses in Scotland, such as Luffness, Gullane, Archerfield, and Muirfield. On Gosford Bay is Gosford House, an 18th-century mansion that serves as the residence of the Earl of Wemyss. At Gladsmuir, 3.5 miles west of Haddington, it is claimed by some to be the birthplace of George Heriot. Principal Robertson was the minister there and wrote most of his History of Scotland. Very few traces remain of the old Douglas seat at Longniddry, and in the now-ruined chapel at the eastern end of the village, John Knox is said to have preached occasionally. At Gifford, 4 miles to the south, John Witherspoon (1722-1794), president of the College of New Jersey (Princeton), and Charles Nisbet (1736-1804), president of Dickinson College in Carlisle, Pennsylvania, were born. A little south of Gifford are Yester House, a residence of the Marquess of Tweeddale, beautifully located in a park with old trees, and the ruins of Yester Castle. The cave known locally as Hobgoblin Hall is mentioned in Marmion and is linked to various manifestations of the black arts. Lennoxlove, 1.5 miles to the south, a residence of Lord Blantyre, was originally called Lethington and was associated with the Maitlands for several centuries. Amisfield, located next to Haddington to the northeast, is another seat of the Earl of Wemyss.


HADDINGTONSHIRE, or East Lothian, a south-eastern county of Scotland, bounded N. by the Firth of Forth, N.E. by the North Sea, E., S.E. and S. by Berwickshire, and S.W. and W. by Edinburghshire. It covers an area of 171,011 acres, or 267 sq. m. Its sea-coast measures 41 m. The Bass Rock and Fidra Isle belong to the shire, and there are numerous rocks and reefs off the shore, especially between Dunbar and Gullane Bay. Broadly speaking, the northern half of the shire slopes gently to the coast, and the southern half is hilly. Several of the peaks of the Lammermuirs exceed 1500 ft., and the more level tract is broken by Traprain Law (724) in the parish of Prestonkirk, North Berwick Law (612), and Garleton Hill (590) to the north of the county town. The only important river is the Tyne, which rises to the south-east of Borthwick in Mid-Lothian, and, taking a generally north-easterly direction, reaches the sea just beyond the park of Tynninghame House, after a course of 28 m., for the first 7 m. of which it belongs to its parent shire. It is noted for a very fine variety of trout, and salmon are sometimes taken below the linn at East Linton. The Whiteadder rises in the parish of Whittingehame, but, flowing towards the south-east, leaves the shire and at last joins the Tweed near Berwick. There are no natural lakes, but in the parish of Stenton is found Pressmennan Loch, an artificial sheet of water of somewhat serpentine shape, about 2 m. in length, with a width of some 400 yds., which was constructed in 1819 by damming up the ravine in which it lies. The banks are wooded and picturesque, and the water abounds with trout.

HADDINGTONSHIRE, or East Lothian, is a county in south-eastern Scotland. It's bordered to the north by the Firth of Forth, the north-east by the North Sea, and the east, south-east, and south by Berwickshire, while the south-west and west are bordered by Edinburghshire. The county covers an area of 171,011 acres, or 267 square miles. Its coastline is 41 miles long. The Bass Rock and Fidra Isle are part of the county, along with several rocks and reefs off the shore, particularly between Dunbar and Gullane Bay. Generally, the northern half of the county gently slopes down to the coast, while the southern half is hilly. Several peaks in the Lammermuirs rise over 1,500 feet, and the flatter areas are interrupted by Traprain Law (724 feet) in the Prestonkirk parish, North Berwick Law (612 feet), and Garleton Hill (590 feet) north of the county town. The main river is the Tyne, which starts southeast of Borthwick in Mid-Lothian. It flows generally in a north-easterly direction and reaches the sea just beyond Tynninghame House park, after a journey of 28 miles, the first 7 miles of which is in its parent county. The river is known for its excellent trout and occasionally salmon are caught below the linn at East Linton. The Whiteadder rises in the Whittingehame parish but flows southeast, leaving the county to eventually join the Tweed near Berwick. There are no natural lakes, but there is Pressmennan Loch in the Stenton parish. This artificial lake, about 2 miles long and 400 yards wide, was created in 1819 by damming a ravine. The banks are wooded and scenic, and the water is rich in trout.

Geology.—The higher ground in the south, including the Lammermuir Hills, is formed by shales, greywackes and grits of Ordovician and Silurian age; a narrow belt of the former lying on the north-western side of the latter, the strike being S.W. to N.E. The granitic mass of Priestlaw and other felsitic rocks have been intruded into these strata. The lower Old Red Sandstone has not been observed in this county, but the younger sandstones and conglomerates fill up ancient depressions in the Silurian and Ordovician, such as that running northward from Oldhamstocks towards Dunbar and the valley of Lauderdale. A faulted-in tract of the same formation, about 1 m. in breadth, runs westward from Dunbar to near Gifford. Carboniferous rocks form the remainder of the county. The Calciferous Sandstone series, shales, thin limestones and sandstones, is exposed on the south-eastern coast; but between Gifford and North Berwick and from Aberlady to Dunbar it is represented by a great thickness of volcanic rocks consisting of tuffs and coarse breccias in the lower beds, and of porphyritic and andesitic lavas above. These rocks are well exposed on the coast, in the Garleton Hills and Traprain Law; the latter and North Berwick Law are volcanic necks or vents. The Carboniferous Limestone series which succeeds the Calciferous Sandstone consists of a middle group of sandstones, shales, coals and ironstones, with a limestone group above and below. The coal-field is synclinal in structure, Port Seton being about the centre; it contains ten seams of coal, and the area covered by it is some 30 sq. m. Glacial boulder clay lies over much of the lower ground, and ridges of gravel and sand flank the hills and form extensive sheets. Traces of old raised sea-beaches are found at several points along the coast. At North Berwick, Tynninghame and elsewhere there are stretches of blown sand. Limestone is worked at many places, and hematite was formerly obtained from the Garleton Hills.

Geology.—The higher ground in the south, including the Lammermuir Hills, is made up of shales, greywackes, and grits from the Ordovician and Silurian periods; there's a narrow strip of the former on the north-western side of the latter, with the tilt going from southwest to northeast. The granitic mass of Priestlaw and other felsitic rocks intrude into these layers. The lower Old Red Sandstone hasn't been found in this county, but the younger sandstones and conglomerates fill ancient depressions in the Silurian and Ordovician, such as the one that runs north from Oldhamstocks toward Dunbar and the valley of Lauderdale. A faulted section of the same formation, about 1 mile wide, extends west from Dunbar to near Gifford. Carboniferous rocks make up the rest of the county. The Calciferous Sandstone series, shales, thin limestones, and sandstones are exposed on the south-eastern coast; however, between Gifford and North Berwick and from Aberlady to Dunbar, it is represented by a thick layer of volcanic rocks, including tuffs and coarse breccias in the lower layers, and porphyritic and andesitic lavas above. These rocks are prominently visible along the coast, in the Garleton Hills, and on Traprain Law; both Traprain Law and North Berwick Law are volcanic necks or vents. The Carboniferous Limestone series that comes after the Calciferous Sandstone includes a middle group of sandstones, shales, coals, and ironstones, along with limestone groups above and below. The coal field has a synclinal structure, with Port Seton at the center; it contains ten coal seams, and the area it covers is about 30 square miles. Glacial boulder clay covers much of the lower ground, and ridges of gravel and sand line the hills to create extensive sheets. Old raised sea beaches can be found at several points along the coast. In North Berwick, Tynninghame, and other locations, there are stretches of blown sand. Limestone is mined in many areas, and hematite was previously extracted from the Garleton Hills.

Climate and Agriculture.—Though the county is exposed to the full sweep of the east wind during March, April and May, the climate is on the whole mild and equable. The rainfall is far below the average of Great Britain, the mean for the year being 25 in., highest in midsummer and lowest in spring. The average temperature for the year is 47°.5 F., for January 38° and for July 59°. Throughout nearly the whole of the 19th century East Lothian agriculture was held to be the best in Scotland, not so much in consequence of the natural fertility of the soil as because of the enterprise of the cultivators, several of whom, like George Hope of Fenton Barns (1811-1876), brought scientific farming almost to perfection. Mechanical appliances were adopted with exceptional alacrity, and indeed some that afterwards came into general use were first employed in Haddington. Drill sowing of turnips dates from 1734. The threshing machine was introduced by Andrew Meikle (1719-1811) in 1787, the steam plough in 1862, and the reaping machine soon after its invention, while tile draining was first extensively used in the county. East Lothian is famous for the richness of its grain and green crops, the size of its holdings (average 200 acres) and the good housing of its labourers. The soils vary. Much of the Lammermuirs is necessarily unproductive, though the lower slopes are cultivated, a considerable tract of the land being very good. In the centre of the shire occurs a belt of tenacious yellow clay on a tilly subsoil which is not adapted for agriculture. Along the coast the soil is sandy, but farther inland it is composed of rich loam and is very fertile. The land about Dunbar is the most productive, yielding a potato—the “Dunbar red”—which is highly esteemed in the markets. Of the grain crops oats and barley are the principal, and their acreage is almost a constant, but wheat, after a prolonged decline, has experienced a revival. Turnips and potatoes are cultivated extensively, and with marked success, and constitute nearly all the green crops raised. Although pasture-land is below the average, live-stock are reared profitably. About one-sixteenth of the total area is under wood.

Climate and Agriculture.—Although the county faces the full impact of the east wind during March, April, and May, the overall climate is mild and stable. The annual rainfall is significantly below the average for Great Britain, totaling 25 inches—highest in midsummer and lowest in spring. The average yearly temperature is 47.5°F, with January at 38° and July at 59°. Throughout most of the 19th century, East Lothian was considered to have the best agriculture in Scotland, not only due to the natural fertility of the soil but also because of the initiative of the farmers. Some, like George Hope of Fenton Barns (1811-1876), brought scientific farming to near perfection. Mechanical tools were quickly adopted, and some machinery that later became widely used was first implemented in Haddington. Drill sowing of turnips began in 1734. The threshing machine was introduced by Andrew Meikle (1719-1811) in 1787, the steam plough in 1862, and the reaping machine soon after its invention, while tile drainage was first widely utilized in the county. East Lothian is known for the richness of its grain and green crops, the size of its farms (averaging 200 acres), and the quality housing provided for its laborers. The soils in the region vary. Much of the Lammermuirs is mostly unproductive, though the lower slopes are farmed and a good portion of the land is quite fertile. In the center of the county, there’s a band of stubborn yellow clay over a flinty subsoil that isn’t suitable for farming. The soil along the coast is sandy, but further inland, it consists of rich loam and is very productive. The area around Dunbar is the most fertile, producing a potato known as the “Dunbar red,” which is highly valued in the markets. Oats and barley are the primary grain crops, with their acreage remaining fairly consistent, although wheat, after a long decline, has made a comeback. Turnips and potatoes are widely and successfully cultivated, making up almost all the green crops grown. While pasture land is below average, livestock is raised profitably. About one-sixteenth of the total area is covered by wood.

Other Industries.—Fisheries are conducted from Dunbar, North Berwick, Port Seton and Prestonpans, the catch consisting chiefly of cod, haddock, whiting and shellfish. Fireclay as well as limestone is worked, and there are some stone quarries, but the manufactures are mainly agricultural implements, pottery, woollens, artificial manures, feeding-stuffs and salt, besides brewing. Coal of a very fair quality is extensively worked at Tranent, Ormiston, Macmerry and near Prestonpans, the coal-field having an area of about 30 sq. m. Limestone is found throughout the greater part of the shire. A vein of hematite of a peculiarly fine character was discovered in 1866 at Garleton Hill, and wrought for some years. Ironstone has been mined at Macmerry.

Other Industries.—Fisheries operate from Dunbar, North Berwick, Port Seton, and Prestonpans, with the catch mainly consisting of cod, haddock, whiting, and shellfish. Both fireclay and limestone are extracted, and there are several stone quarries. However, the primary industries focus on agricultural tools, pottery, wool products, artificial fertilizers, animal feeds, and salt, in addition to brewing. A good quality coal is extensively mined at Tranent, Ormiston, Macmerry, and near Prestonpans, covering an area of about 30 square miles. Limestone is present throughout much of the county. A particularly fine vein of hematite was discovered at Garleton Hill in 1866 and mined for several years. Ironstone has also been extracted at Macmerry.

The North British Company possess the sole running powers in the county, through which is laid their main line to Berwick and the south. Branches are sent off at Drem to North Berwick, at Longniddry to Haddington and also to Gullane, at Smeaton (in Mid-Lothian) to Macmerry, and at Ormiston to Gifford.

The North British Company has the exclusive rights to operate in the area, where their main line runs to Berwick and the south. They have branches that extend from Drem to North Berwick, from Longniddry to Haddington and Gullane, from Smeaton (in Mid-Lothian) to Macmerry, and from Ormiston to Gifford.

Population and Government.—The population was 37,377 in 1891, and 38,665 in 1901, when 459 persons spoke Gaelic and English, and 7 spoke Gaelic only. The chief towns are Dunbar (pop. in 1901, 3581), Haddington (3993), North Berwick (2899), Prestonpans (2614) and Tranent (2584). The county, which returns one member to Parliament, forms part of the sheriffdom of the Lothians and Peebles, and there is a resident sheriff-substitute at Haddington, who sits also at Dunbar, Tranent 797 and North Berwick. The shire is under school-board jurisdiction, and besides high schools at Haddington and North Berwick, some of the elementary schools earn grants for higher education. The county council spends a proportion of the “residue” grant in supporting short courses of instruction in technical subjects (chiefly agriculture), in experiments in the feeding of cattle and the growing of crops, and in defraying the travelling expenses of technical students.

Population and Government.—The population was 37,377 in 1891 and 38,665 in 1901, with 459 people speaking both Gaelic and English, and 7 speaking only Gaelic. The main towns are Dunbar (pop. in 1901, 3,581), Haddington (3,993), North Berwick (2,899), Prestonpans (2,614), and Tranent (2,584). The county sends one representative to Parliament and is part of the sheriffdom of the Lothians and Peebles, with a resident sheriff-substitute in Haddington who also serves in Dunbar, Tranent, 797 and North Berwick. The shire is managed by a school board, and in addition to high schools in Haddington and North Berwick, some elementary schools receive funding for higher education. The county council allocates part of the "residue" grant to support short technical courses (mainly in agriculture), conduct experiments on cattle feeding and crop cultivation, and cover travel expenses for technical students.

History.—Of the Celts, who were probably the earliest inhabitants, traces are found in a few place names and circular camps (in the parishes of Garvald and Whittinghame) and hill forts (in the parish of Bolton). After the Roman occupation, of which few traces remain, the district formed part of the Saxon kingdom of Northumbria until 1018, when it was joined to Scotland by Malcolm II. It was comparatively prosperous till the wars of Bruce and Baliol, but from that period down to the union of the kingdoms it suffered from its nearness to the Border and from civil strife. The last battles fought in the county were those of Dunbar (1650) and Prestonpans (1745).

History.—The Celts, likely the earliest inhabitants, are reflected in a few place names, circular camps (in the parishes of Garvald and Whittinghame), and hill forts (in the parish of Bolton). After the Roman occupation, which left few traces, the area became part of the Saxon kingdom of Northumbria until 1018, when it joined Scotland under Malcolm II. It was relatively prosperous until the wars of Bruce and Baliol, but from that time until the union of the kingdoms, it struggled due to its proximity to the Border and ongoing civil conflicts. The last battles fought in the county were those of Dunbar (1650) and Prestonpans (1745).

See J. Miller, History of Haddington (1844); D. Croal, Sketches of East Lothian (Haddington, 1873); John Martine, Reminiscences of the County of Haddington (Haddington, 1890, 1894); Dr Wallace James, Writs and Charters of Haddington (Haddington, 1898).

See J. Miller, History of Haddington (1844); D. Croal, Sketches of East Lothian (Haddington, 1873); John Martine, Reminiscences of the County of Haddington (Haddington, 1890, 1894); Dr. Wallace James, Writs and Charters of Haddington (Haddington, 1898).


HADDOCK (Gadus aeglefinus), a fish which differs from the cod in having the mental barbel very short, the first anal fin with 22 to 25 rays, instead of 17 to 20, and the lateral line dark instead of whitish; it has a large blackish spot above each pectoral fin—associated in legend with the marks of St Peter’s finger and thumb, the haddock being supposed to be the fish from whose mouth he took the tribute-money. It attains to a weight of 15 ℔ and is one of the most valuable food fishes of Europe, both fresh and smoked, the “finnan haddie” of Scotland being famous. It is common round the British and Irish coasts, and generally distributed along the shores of the North Sea, extending across the Atlantic to the coast of North America.

HADDOCK (Gadus aeglefinus) is a fish that differs from cod in having a very short mental barbel, the first anal fin with 22 to 25 rays instead of 17 to 20, and a dark lateral line instead of a whitish one. It features a large blackish spot above each pectoral fin, which is linked in legend to the marks of St. Peter’s finger and thumb, as the haddock is thought to be the fish from which he took the tribute money. It can weigh up to 15 pounds and is one of the most valuable food fish in Europe, both fresh and smoked, with Scotland’s “finnan haddie” being particularly renowned. It is commonly found around the coasts of Britain and Ireland and generally distributed along the shores of the North Sea, extending across the Atlantic to the North American coast.


HADDON HALL, one of the most famous ancient mansions in England. It lies on the left bank of the river Wye, 2 m. S.E. of Bakewell in Derbyshire. It is not now used as a residence, but the fabric is maintained in order. The building is of stone and oblong in form, and encloses two quadrangles separated by the great banqueting-hall and adjoining chambers. The greater part is of two storeys, and surmounted by battlements. To the south and south-east lie terraced gardens, and the south front of the eastern quadrangle is occupied by the splendid ball-room or long gallery. At the south-west corner of the mansion is the chapel; at the north-east the Peveril tower. The periods of building represented are as follows. Norman work appears in the chapel (which also served as a church for the neighbouring villagers), also in certain fundamental parts of the fabric, notably the Peveril tower. There are Early English and later additions to the chapel; the banqueting-hall, with the great kitchen adjacent to it, and part of the Peveril tower are of the 14th century. The eastern range of rooms, including the state-room, are of the 15th century; the western and north-western parts were built shortly after 1500. The ball-room is of early 17th-century construction, and the terraces and gardens were laid out at this time. A large number of interesting contemporary fittings are preserved, especially in the banqueting-hall and kitchen; and many of the rooms are adorned with tapestries of the 16th and 17th centuries, some of which came from the famous works at Mortlake in Surrey.

HADDON HALL, is one of the most famous historical mansions in England. It sits on the left bank of the river Wye, 2 miles southeast of Bakewell in Derbyshire. It's no longer used as a residence, but the structure is well maintained. The building is made of stone and is rectangular in shape, containing two courtyards divided by the grand banquet hall and adjoining rooms. Most of it has two stories and features battlements. To the south and southeast are terraced gardens, with the south front of the eastern courtyard featuring the impressive ballroom or long gallery. In the southwest corner of the mansion is the chapel, and in the northeast is the Peveril tower. The different building periods are as follows: Norman work can be seen in the chapel (which also served as a church for local villagers) and in some of the essential parts of the structure, particularly the Peveril tower. There are early English and later additions to the chapel; the banquet hall, along with the large kitchen next to it, and parts of the Peveril tower, date back to the 14th century. The eastern range of rooms, including the state room, are from the 15th century, while the western and northwest sections were built shortly after 1500. The ballroom was constructed in the early 17th century, and the terraces and gardens were designed at that time. A significant number of intriguing contemporary features are preserved, particularly in the banquet hall and kitchen, and many rooms are decorated with tapestries from the 16th and 17th centuries, some of which originate from the renowned works at Mortlake in Surrey.

A Roman altar was found and is preserved here, but no trace of Roman inhabitants has been discovered. Haddon was a manor which before the Conquest and at the time of the Domesday Survey belonged to the king, but was granted by William the Conqueror to William Peverel, whose son, another William Peverel, forfeited it for treason on the accession of Henry II. Before that time, however, the manor of Haddon had been granted to the family of Avenell, who continued to hold it until one William Avenell died without male issue and his property was divided between his two daughters and heirs, one of whom married Richard Vernon, whose successors acquired the other half of the manor in the reign of Edward III. Sir George Vernon, who died in 1561, was known as the “King of the Peak” on account of his hospitality. His daughter Dorothy married John Manners, second son of the earl of Rutland, who is said to have lived for some time in the woods round Haddon Hall, disguised as a gamekeeper, until he persuaded Dorothy to elope with him. On Sir George’s death without male issue Haddon passed to John Manners and Dorothy, who lived in the Hall. Their grandson John Manners succeeded to the title of earl of Rutland in 1641, and the duke of Rutland is still lord of the manor.

A Roman altar was discovered and is preserved here, but no evidence of Roman residents has been found. Haddon was a manor that belonged to the king before the Conquest and during the Domesday Survey, but it was granted by William the Conqueror to William Peverel. His son, also named William Peverel, lost it due to treason when Henry II came to power. However, before that, the manor of Haddon had been given to the Avenell family, who held it until one William Avenell died without male heirs. His property was split between his two daughters and heirs, one of whom married Richard Vernon, whose descendants acquired the other half of the manor during the reign of Edward III. Sir George Vernon, who died in 1561, was known as the “King of the Peak” because of his generosity. His daughter Dorothy married John Manners, the second son of the Earl of Rutland, who reportedly lived for a time in the woods around Haddon Hall, disguised as a gamekeeper, until he convinced Dorothy to run away with him. After Sir George died without male heirs, Haddon passed to John Manners and Dorothy, who resided in the Hall. Their grandson John Manners inherited the title of Earl of Rutland in 1641, and the Duke of Rutland is still the lord of the manor.

See Victoria County History, Derbyshire; S. Rayner, History and Antiquities of Haddon Hall (1836-1837); Haddon Hall, History and Antiquities of Haddon Hall (1867); G. le Blanc Smith, Haddon, the Manor, the Hall, its Lords and Traditions (London, 1906).

See Victoria County History, Derbyshire; S. Rayner, History and Antiquities of Haddon Hall (1836-1837); Haddon Hall, History and Antiquities of Haddon Hall (1867); G. le Blanc Smith, Haddon, the Manor, the Hall, its Lords and Traditions (London, 1906).


HADEN, SIR FRANCIS SEYMOUR (1818-1910), English surgeon and etcher, was born in London on the 16th of September 1818, his father, Charles Thomas Haden, being a well-known doctor and amateur of music. He was educated at University College school and University College, London, and also studied at the Sorbonne, Paris, where he took his degree in 1840. He was admitted as a member of the College of Surgeons in London in 1842. Besides his many-sided activities in the scientific world, during a busy and distinguished career as a surgeon, he followed the art of original etching with such vigour that he became not only the foremost British exponent of that art but was the principal cause of its revival in England. By his strenuous efforts and perseverance, aided by the secretarial ability of Sir W. R. Drake, he founded the Royal Society of Painter-Etchers and Engravers. As president he ruled the destinies of that society with a strong hand from its first beginnings in 1880. In 1843-1844, with his friends Duval, Le Cannes and Col. Guibout, he had travelled in Italy and made his first sketches from nature. Haden attended no art school and had no art teachers, but in 1845, 1846, 1847 and 1848 he studied portfolios of prints belonging to an old second-hand dealer named Love, who had a shop in Bunhill Row, the old Quaker quarter of London. These portfolios he would carry home, and arranging the prints in chronological order, he studied the works of the great original engravers, Dürer, Lucas van Leyden and Rembrandt. These studies, besides influencing his original work, led to his important monograph on the etched work of Rembrandt. By lecture and book, and with the aid of the memorable exhibition at the Burlington Fine Arts Club in 1877, he endeavoured to give a just idea of Rembrandt’s work, separating the true from the false, and giving altogether a nobler idea of the master’s mind by taking away from the list of his works many dull and unseemly plates that had long been included in the lists. His reasons are founded upon the results of a study of the master’s works in chronological order, and are clearly expressed in his monograph, The Etched Work of Rembrandt critically reconsidered, privately printed in 1877, and in The Etched Work of Rembrandt True and False (1895). Notwithstanding all this study of the old masters of his art, Haden’s own plates are perhaps more individual than any artist’s, and are particularly noticeable for a fine original treatment of landscape subjects, free and open in line, clear and well divided in mass, and full of a noble and dignified style of his own. Even when working from a picture his personality dominates the plate, as for example in the large plate he etched after J. M. W. Turner’s “Calais Pier,” which is a classical example of what interpretative work can do in black and white. Of his original plates, more than 250 in number, one of the most notable was the large “Breaking up of the Agamemnon.” An early plate, rare and most beautiful, is “Thames Fisherman.” “Mytton Hall” is broad in treatment, and a fine rendering of a shady avenue of yew trees leading to an old manor-house in sunlight. “Sub Tegmine” was etched in Greenwich Park in 1859; and “Early Morning—Richmond,” full of the poetry and freshness of the hour, was done, the artist has said, actually at sunrise. One of the rarest and most beautiful of his plates is “A By-Road in Tipperary”; “Combe Bottom” is another; and “Shere Mill Pond” (both the small study and the larger plate), “Sunset in 798 Ireland,” “Penton Hook,” “Grim Spain” and “Evening Fishing, Longparish,” are also notable examples of his genius. A catalogue of his works was begun by Sir William Drake and completed by Mr N. Harrington (1880). During later years Haden began to practise the sister art of mezzotint engraving, with a measure of the same success that he had already achieved in pure etching and in dry-point. Some of his mezzotints are: “An Early Riser,” a stag seen through the morning mists, “Grayling Fishing” and “A Salmon Pool on the Spey.” He also produced some remarkable drawings of trees and park-like country in charcoal.

HADEN, SIR FRANCIS SEYMOUR (1818-1910), English surgeon and etcher, was born in London on September 16, 1818. His father, Charles Thomas Haden, was a well-known doctor and music enthusiast. He was educated at University College School and University College, London, and also studied at the Sorbonne in Paris, where he earned his degree in 1840. He became a member of the College of Surgeons in London in 1842. Along with his diverse contributions to the scientific community during a busy and distinguished career as a surgeon, he pursued original etching with such passion that he became not only the leading British figure in that art but also a key reason for its revival in England. Through his tireless efforts and the support of Sir W. R. Drake, he established the Royal Society of Painter-Etchers and Engravers. As president, he guided the society firmly from its inception in 1880. In 1843-1844, he traveled to Italy with friends Duval, Le Cannes, and Col. Guibout, where he made his first sketches from nature. Haden did not attend any art school or have art teachers, but between 1845 and 1848, he studied portfolios of prints owned by a second-hand dealer named Love, who had a shop in Bunhill Row, an old Quaker district of London. He would bring these portfolios home, organize the prints chronologically, and study the work of great original engravers like Dürer, Lucas van Leyden, and Rembrandt. These studies not only influenced his own work but also led to his significant monograph on Rembrandt's etchings. Through lectures, books, and a notable exhibition at the Burlington Fine Arts Club in 1877, he aimed to present an accurate representation of Rembrandt's work, distinguishing the genuine from the fraudulent, and enhancing the understanding of the master’s vision by removing many mediocre and unattractive plates that had been included in the lists for so long. His reasoning is based on a chronological study of the master’s works, clearly articulated in his monograph, The Etched Work of Rembrandt Critically Reconsidered, privately published in 1877, and in The Etched Work of Rembrandt: True and False (1895). Despite all his studies of the old masters, Haden’s own plates stand out as particularly distinctive, especially known for their innovative approach to landscape subjects, characterized by fluid and open lines, clear and well-structured mass, and a unique, dignified style. Even when creating from a painting, his personality shines through his work, as seen in the large plate he etched after J. M. W. Turner’s “Calais Pier,” a classic example of interpretative work in black and white. Of his over 250 original plates, one of the most notable is the large “Breaking Up of the Agamemnon.” An early plate, rare and exquisite, is “Thames Fisherman.” “Mytton Hall” features a broad treatment and beautifully captures a shaded avenue of yew trees leading to a sunlit old manor house. “Sub Tegmine” was etched in Greenwich Park in 1859, and “Early Morning—Richmond,” brimming with the poetry and freshness of dawn, was completed by the artist at sunrise. One of his rarest and most stunning plates is “A By-Road in Tipperary”; “Combe Bottom” is another; and “Shere Mill Pond” (both the small study and the larger plate), “Sunset in Ireland,” “Penton Hook,” “Grim Spain,” and “Evening Fishing, Longparish” are also exceptional showcases of his talent. A catalogue of his works was initiated by Sir William Drake and finished by Mr. N. Harrington (1880). In later years, Haden began practicing the related art of mezzotint engraving, achieving a level of success similar to that achieved in etching and dry-point. Some of his mezzotints include: “An Early Riser,” depicting a stag through morning mists, “Grayling Fishing,” and “A Salmon Pool on the Spey.” He also created remarkable charcoal drawings of trees and park-like landscapes.

Other books by Haden not already mentioned are—Études à l’eau forte (Paris, 1865); About Etching (London, 1878-1879); The Art of the Painter-Etcher (London, 1890); The Relative Claims of Etching and Engraving to rank as Fine Arts and to be represented in the Royal Academy (London, 1883); Address to Students of Winchester School of Art (Winchester, 1888); Cremation: a Pamphlet (London, 1875); and The Disposal of the Dead, a Plea for Legislation (London, 1888). As the last two indicate, he was an ardent champion of a system of “earth to earth” burial.

Other books by Haden that haven't been mentioned yet include—Études à l’eau forte (Paris, 1865); About Etching (London, 1878-1879); The Art of the Painter-Etcher (London, 1890); The Relative Claims of Etching and Engraving to Rank as Fine Arts and to be Represented in the Royal Academy (London, 1883); Address to Students of Winchester School of Art (Winchester, 1888); Cremation: a Pamphlet (London, 1875); and The Disposal of the Dead, a Plea for Legislation (London, 1888). As the last two suggest, he was a strong advocate for a “earth to earth” burial system.

Among numerous distinctions he received the Grand Prix, Paris, in 1889 and 1900, and was made a member of the Institut de France, Académie des Beaux-Arts and Société des Artistes Français. He was knighted in 1894, and died on the 1st of June 1910. He married in 1847 a sister of the artist J. A. M. Whistler; and his elder son, Francis Seymour Haden (b. 1850), had a distinguished career as a member of the government in Natal from 1881 to 1893, being made a C.M.G. in 1890.

Among numerous distinctions, he received the Grand Prix in Paris in 1889 and 1900, and was made a member of the Institut de France, Académie des Beaux-Arts, and Société des Artistes Français. He was knighted in 1894 and died on June 1, 1910. He married in 1847 a sister of the artist J. A. M. Whistler, and his elder son, Francis Seymour Haden (b. 1850), had a distinguished career as a member of the government in Natal from 1881 to 1893, being appointed a C.M.G. in 1890.

(C. H.*)

HADENDOA (from Beja Hada, chief, and endowa, people), a nomad tribe of Africans of “Hamitic” origin. They inhabit that part of the eastern Sudan extending from the Abyssinian frontier northward nearly to Suakin. They belong to the Beja people, of which, with the Bisharin and the Ababda, they are the modern representatives. They are a pastoral people, ruled by a hereditary chief who is directly responsible to the (Anglo-Egyptian) Sudan government. Although the official capital of the Hadendoa country is Miktinab, the town of Fillik on an affluent of the Atbara is really their headquarters. A third of the total population is settled in the Suakin country. Osman Digna, one of the best-known chiefs during the Madhia, was a Hadendoa, and the tribe contributed some of the fiercest of the dervish warriors in the wars of 1883-98. So determined were they in their opposition to the Anglo-Egyptian forces that the name Hadendoa grew to be nearly synonymous with “rebel.” But this was the result of Egyptian misgovernment rather than religious enthusiasm; for the Hadendoa are true Beja, and Mahommedans only in name. Their elaborate hairdressing gained them the name of “Fuzzy-wuzzies” among the British troops. They earned an unenviable reputation during the wars by their hideous mutilations of the dead on the battlefields. After the reconquest of the Egyptian Sudan (1896-98) the Hadendoa accepted the new order without demur.

HADENDOA (from Beja Hada, meaning chief, and endowa, meaning people), is a nomadic tribe of Africans with “Hamitic” roots. They live in the eastern Sudan, stretching from the Abyssinian border northward almost to Suakin. They are part of the Beja people, alongside the Bisharin and the Ababda, and are their modern representatives. As a pastoral community, they are governed by a hereditary chief who is directly accountable to the (Anglo-Egyptian) Sudan government. While Miktinab is the official capital of the Hadendoa region, the town of Fillik, located on an affluent of the Atbara, serves as their actual headquarters. One-third of the total population resides in the Suakin area. Osman Digna, a prominent chief during the Mahdist uprising, was a Hadendoa, and the tribe contributed some of the fiercest dervish warriors during the wars from 1883 to 1898. Their fierce resistance to the Anglo-Egyptian forces made the name Hadendoa almost synonymous with “rebel.” However, this was more a result of poor governance by the Egyptians than a religious fervor; the Hadendoa are true Beja and are only nominally Muslims. Their complex hairstyles earned them the nickname “Fuzzy-wuzzies” among British troops. They gained a notorious reputation during the wars for their gruesome mutilation of the dead on the battlefields. After the reconquest of the Egyptian Sudan (1896-98), the Hadendoa accepted the new regime without protest.

See Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, edited by Count Gleichen (London, 1905); Sir F. R. Wingate, Mahdism and the Egyptian Sudan (London, 1891); G. Sergi, Africa: Anthropology of the Hamitic Race (1897); A. H. Keane, Ethnology of the Egyptian Sudan (1884).

See Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, edited by Count Gleichen (London, 1905); Sir F. R. Wingate, Mahdism and the Egyptian Sudan (London, 1891); G. Sergi, Africa: Anthropology of the Hamitic Race (1897); A. H. Keane, Ethnology of the Egyptian Sudan (1884).


HADERSLEBEN (Dan. Haderslev), a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Schleswig-Holstein, 31 m. N. from Flensburg. Pop. (1905) 9289. It lies in a pleasant valley on the Hadersleben fjord, which is about 9 m. in length, and communicates with the Little Belt, and at the junction of the main line of railway from Woyens with three vicinal lines. The principal buildings are the beautiful church of St Mary, dating from the 13th century, the theological seminary established in 1870, the gymnasium and the hospital. The industries include iron-founding, tanning, and the manufacture of machines, tobacco and gloves. The harbour is only accessible to small vessels.

HADERSLEBEN (Dan. Haderslev), a town in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Schleswig-Holstein, 31 miles north of Flensburg. Population (1905) 9,289. It sits in a picturesque valley along the Hadersleben fjord, which is about 9 miles long and connects to the Little Belt, and at the junction of the main railway line from Woyens with three local lines. The main attractions include the stunning St. Mary’s Church, which dates back to the 13th century, the theological seminary established in 1870, the gymnasium, and the hospital. Local industries include iron foundry work, tanning, and the manufacture of machinery, tobacco, and gloves. The harbor is only accessible to small boats.

Hadersleben is first mentioned in 1228, and received municipal rights from Duke Waldemar II. in 1292. It suffered considerably during the wars between Schleswig and Holstein in the 15th century. In November 1864 it passed with Schleswig to Prussia. Two Danish kings, Frederick II. and Frederick III., were born at Hadersleben.

Hadersleben is first mentioned in 1228 and was granted municipal rights by Duke Waldemar II in 1292. It suffered greatly during the 15th-century wars between Schleswig and Holstein. In November 1864, it became part of Prussia along with Schleswig. Two Danish kings, Frederick II and Frederick III, were born in Hadersleben.

See A. Sach, Der Ursprung der Stadt Hadersleben (Hadersleben, 1892).

See A. Sach, Der Ursprung der Stadt Hadersleben (Hadersleben, 1892).


HADING, JANE (1859-  ), French actress, whose real name was Jeanne Alfrédine Tréfouret, was born on the 25th of November 1859 at Marseilles, where her father was an actor at the Gymnase. She was trained at the local Conservatoire and was engaged in 1873 for the theatre at Algiers, and afterwards for the Khedivial theatre at Cairo, where she played, in turn, coquette, soubrette and ingénue parts. Expectations had been raised by her voice, and when she returned to Marseilles she sang in operetta, besides acting in Ruy Blas. Her Paris début was in La Chaste Suzanne at the Palais Royal, and she was again heard in operetta at the Renaissance. In 1883 she had a great success at the Gymnase in Le Maître de forges. In 1884 she married Victor Koning (1842-1894), the manager of that theatre, but divorced him in 1887. In 1888 she toured America with Coquelin, and on her return helped to give success to Lavedan’s Prince d’Aurec, at the Vaudeville. Her reputation as one of the leading actresses of the day was now established not only in France but in America and England. Her later répertoire included Le Demi-monde, Capus’s La Châtelaine, Maurice Donnay’s Retour de Jérusalem, La Princesse Georges by Dumas fils, and Émile Bergerat’s Plus que reine.

HADING, JANE (1859-  ), a French actress known by her real name, Jeanne Alfrédine Tréfouret, was born on November 25, 1859, in Marseilles, where her dad was an actor at the Gymnase. She trained at the local Conservatoire and got her first job in 1873 at the theatre in Algiers, then later performed at the Khedivial theatre in Cairo, playing roles like coquette, soubrette, and ingénue. People were excited about her singing, and when she went back to Marseilles, she sang in operetta while also acting in Ruy Blas. She made her Paris debut in La Chaste Suzanne at the Palais Royal and again showcased her singing in operetta at the Renaissance. In 1883, she had a huge success at the Gymnase in Le Maître de forges. In 1884, she married Victor Koning (1842-1894), the manager of that theatre, but they divorced in 1887. In 1888, she toured America with Coquelin, and after returning, she helped make Lavedan’s Prince d’Aurec a hit at the Vaudeville. By then, her reputation as one of the leading actresses of the time was solidified, not just in France but also in America and England. Her later repertoire included Le Demi-monde, Capus’s La Châtelaine, Maurice Donnay’s Retour de Jérusalem, La Princesse Georges by Dumas fils, and Émile Bergerat’s Plus que reine.


HADLEIGH, a market town in the Sudbury parliamentary division of Suffolk, England; 70 m. N.E. from London, the terminus of a branch of the Great Eastern railway. Pop. of Urban district (1901), 3245. It lies pleasantly in a well-wooded country on the small river Brett, a tributary of the Stour. The church of St Mary is of good Perpendicular work, with Early English tower and Decorated spire. The Rectory Tower, a turreted gate-house of brick, dates from c. 1495. The gild-hall is a Tudor building, and there are other examples of this period. There are a town-hall and corn exchange, and an industry in the manufacture of matting and in malting. Hadleigh was one of the towns in which the woollen industry was started by Flemings, and survived until the 18th century. Among the rectors of Hadleigh several notable names appear, such as Rowland Taylor, the martyr, who was burned at the stake outside the town in 1555, and Hugh James Rose, during whose tenancy of the rectory an initiatory meeting of the leaders of the Oxford Movement took place here in 1833.

HADLEIGH, is a market town in the Sudbury parliamentary division of Suffolk, England; 70 miles northeast of London, serving as the end of a branch of the Great Eastern railway. The population of the urban district (1901) was 3,245. It’s located in a pleasant, wooded area along the small River Brett, which is a tributary of the Stour. The church of St Mary features strong Perpendicular architecture, with an Early English tower and a Decorated spire. The Rectory Tower, a turreted gatehouse made of brick, dates back to around 1495. The guildhall is a Tudor building, and there are other examples from this period. The town has a town hall and corn exchange, and is involved in the production of matting and malting. Hadleigh was one of the towns where the wool industry was established by Flemish weavers and continued until the 18th century. Notable rectors of Hadleigh include Rowland Taylor, the martyr, who was executed outside the town in 1555, and Hugh James Rose, under whose leadership an initial meeting of the leaders of the Oxford Movement took place here in 1833.

Hadleigh, called by the Saxons Heapde-leag, appears in Domesday Book as Hetlega. About 885 Æthelflæd, lady of the Mercians, with the consent of Æthelred her husband, gave Hadleigh to Christ Church, Canterbury. The dean and chapter of Canterbury have held possession of it ever since the Dissolution. In the 17th century Hadleigh was famous for the manufacture of cloth, and in 1618 was sufficiently important to receive incorporation. It was constituted a free borough under the title of the mayor, aldermen and burgesses of Hadleigh. In 1635, in a list of the corporate towns of Suffolk to be assessed for ship money, Hadleigh is named as third in importance. In 1636, owing to a serious visitation of the plague, 200 families were thrown out of work, and in 1687 so much had its importance declined that it was deprived of its charter. An unsuccessful attempt to recover it was made in 1701. There is evidence of the existence of a market here as early as the 13th century. James I., in his charter of incorporation, granted fairs on Monday and Tuesday in Whitsun week, and confirmed an ancient fair at Michaelmas and a market on Monday.

Hadleigh, referred to by the Saxons as Heapde-leag, appears in the Domesday Book as Hetlega. Around 885, Æthelflæd, the lady of the Mercians, with the approval of her husband Æthelred, gave Hadleigh to Christ Church, Canterbury. The dean and chapter of Canterbury have owned it ever since the Dissolution. In the 17th century, Hadleigh became known for cloth manufacturing, and in 1618, it was significant enough to receive its incorporation. It was established as a free borough under the title of the mayor, aldermen, and burgesses of Hadleigh. In 1635, in a list of corporate towns in Suffolk to be taxed for ship money, Hadleigh was ranked as the third most important. In 1636, due to a serious outbreak of the plague, 200 families lost their jobs, and by 1687, its importance had declined so much that it lost its charter. An unsuccessful attempt to regain it was made in 1701. There is evidence of a market existing here as early as the 13th century. James I, in his incorporation charter, granted fairs on Monday and Tuesday during Whitsun week and confirmed an ancient fair at Michaelmas along with a market on Monday.


HADLEY, ARTHUR TWINING (1856-  ), American political economist and educationist, president of Yale University, was born in New Haven, Connecticut, on the 23rd of April 1856. He was the son of James Hadley, the philologist, from whom, as from his mother—whose brother, Alexander Catlin Twining (1801-1884), was an astronomer and authority on constitutional law—he inherited unusual mathematical ability. He graduated at Yale in 1876 as valedictorian, having taken prizes in English, classics and astronomy; studied political 799 science at Yale (1876-1877) and at Berlin (1878-1879); was a tutor at Yale in 1879-1883, instructor in political science in 1883-1886, professor of political science in 1886-1891, professor of political economy in 1891-1899, and dean of the Graduate School in 1892-1895; and in 1899 became president of Yale University—the first layman to hold that office. He was commissioner of the Connecticut bureau of labour statistics in 1885-1887. As an economist he first became widely known through his investigation of the railway question and his study of railway rates, which antedated the popular excitement as to rebates. His Railroad Transportation, its History and Laws (1885) became a standard work, and appeared in Russian (1886) and French (1887); he testified as an expert on transportation before the Senate committee which drew up the Interstate Commerce Law; and wrote on railways and transportation for the Ninth and Tenth Editions (of which he was one of the editors) of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, for Lalor’s Cyclopaedia of Political Science, Political Economy, and Political History of the United Stales (3 vols., 1881-1884), for The American Railway (1888), and for The Railroad Gazette in 1884-1891, and for other periodicals. His idea of the broad scope of economic science, especially of the place of ethics in relation to political economy and business, is expressed in his writings and public addresses. In 1907-1908 he was Theodore Roosevelt professor of American History and Institutions in the university of Berlin.

HADLEY, ARTHUR TWINING (1856-  ), American political economist and educator, president of Yale University, was born in New Haven, Connecticut, on April 23, 1856. He was the son of James Hadley, a philologist, from whom, along with his mother—whose brother, Alexander Catlin Twining (1801-1884), was an astronomer and expert on constitutional law—he inherited remarkable mathematical skills. He graduated from Yale in 1876 as valedictorian, earning prizes in English, classics, and astronomy; studied political science at Yale (1876-1877) and in Berlin (1878-1879); served as a tutor at Yale from 1879 to 1883, instructor in political science from 1883 to 1886, professor of political science from 1886 to 1891, professor of political economy from 1891 to 1899, and dean of the Graduate School from 1892 to 1895; and in 1899 he became president of Yale University—the first layperson to hold that position. He was commissioner of the Connecticut Bureau of Labor Statistics from 1885 to 1887. He gained wide recognition as an economist through his investigation of the railway issue and his study of railway rates, which preceded the public's concerns over rebates. His Railroad Transportation, its History and Laws (1885) became a standard reference work and was translated into Russian (1886) and French (1887); he testified as an expert on transportation before the Senate committee that drafted the Interstate Commerce Law; and he wrote about railways and transportation for the Ninth and Tenth Editions (of which he was one of the editors) of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, for Lalor’s Cyclopaedia of Political Science, Political Economy, and Political History of the United States (3 vols., 1881-1884), for The American Railway (1888), and for The Railroad Gazette from 1884 to 1891, along with various other periodicals. His belief in the broad scope of economic science, particularly regarding the role of ethics in political economy and business, is evident in his writings and public speeches. In 1907-1908, he served as the Theodore Roosevelt professor of American History and Institutions at the University of Berlin.

Among his other publications are: Economics: an Account of the Relations between Private Property and Public Welfare (1896); The Education of the American Citizen (1901); The Relations between Freedom and Responsibility in the Evolution of Democratic Government (1903, in Yale Lectures on the Responsibilities of Citizenship); Baccalaureate Addresses (1907); and Standards of Public Morality (1907), being the Kennedy Lectures for 1906.

Among his other publications are: Economics: an Account of the Relations between Private Property and Public Welfare (1896); The Education of the American Citizen (1901); The Relations between Freedom and Responsibility in the Evolution of Democratic Government (1903, in Yale Lectures on the Responsibilities of Citizenship); Baccalaureate Addresses (1907); and Standards of Public Morality (1907), which are the Kennedy Lectures for 1906.


HADLEY, JAMES (1821-1872), American scholar, was born on the 30th of March 1821 in Fairfield, Herkimer county, New York, where his father was professor of chemistry in Fairfield Medical College. At the age of nine an accident lamed him for life. He graduated from Yale in 1842, having entered the Junior class in 1840; studied in the Theological Department of Yale, and in 1844-1845 was a tutor in Middlebury College. He was tutor at Yale in 1845-1848, assistant professor of Greek in 1848-1851, and professor of Greek, succeeding President Woolsey, from 1851 until his death in Hew Haven on the 14th of November 1872. As an undergraduate he showed himself an able mathematician, but the influence of Edward Elbridge Salisbury, under whom Hadley and W. D. Whitney studied Sanskrit together, turned his attention toward the study of language. He knew Greek, Latin, Sanskrit, Hebrew, Arabic, Armenian, several Celtic languages and the languages of modern Europe; but he published little, and his scholarship found scant outlet in the college class-room. His most original written work was an essay on Greek accent, published in a German version in Curtius’s Studien zur griechischen und lateinischen Grammatik. Hadley’s Greek Grammar (1860; revised by Frederic de Forest Allen, 1884) was based on Curtius’s Schulgrammatik (1852, 1855, 1857, 1859), and long held its place in American schools. Hadley was a member of the American Committee for the revision of the New Testament, was president of the American Oriental Society (1871-1872), and contributed to Webster’s dictionary an essay on the History of the English Language. In 1873 were published his Introduction to Roman Law (edited by T. D. Woolsey) and his Essays, Philological and Critical (edited by W. D. Whitney).

HADLEY, JAMES (1821-1872), an American scholar, was born on March 30, 1821, in Fairfield, Herkimer County, New York, where his father was a chemistry professor at Fairfield Medical College. When he was nine, an accident left him with a lifelong disability. He graduated from Yale in 1842 after joining the Junior class in 1840; he studied in the Theological Department of Yale and was a tutor at Middlebury College during 1844-1845. He served as a tutor at Yale from 1845 to 1848, as an assistant professor of Greek from 1848 to 1851, and as a professor of Greek, succeeding President Woolsey, from 1851 until his death in New Haven on November 14, 1872. As an undergraduate, he proved to be an exceptional mathematician, but it was under the guidance of Edward Elbridge Salisbury that Hadley, alongside W. D. Whitney, focused on studying Sanskrit. He was fluent in Greek, Latin, Sanskrit, Hebrew, Arabic, Armenian, several Celtic languages, and various modern European languages; however, he published very little, and his scholarship received limited exposure in the classroom. His most original written work was an essay on Greek accent, published in a German edition in Curtius’s Studien zur griechischen und lateinischen Grammatik. Hadley’s Greek Grammar (1860; revised by Frederic de Forest Allen, 1884) was based on Curtius’s Schulgrammatik (1852, 1855, 1857, 1859) and remained a significant text in American schools for many years. Hadley was part of the American Committee for the revision of the New Testament, served as president of the American Oriental Society (1871-1872), and contributed an essay on the History of the English Language to Webster’s dictionary. In 1873, his Introduction to Roman Law (edited by T. D. Woolsey) and his Essays, Philological and Critical (edited by W. D. Whitney) were published.

See the memorial by Noah Porter in The New Englander, vol. xxxii. (Jan. 1873), pp. 35-55; and the sketch by his son, A. T. Hadley, in Biographical Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences, vol. v. (1905), pp. 247-254.

See the memorial by Noah Porter in The New Englander, vol. xxxii. (Jan. 1873), pp. 35-55; and the sketch by his son, A. T. Hadley, in Biographical Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences, vol. v. (1905), pp. 247-254.


HADLEY, a township of Hampshire county, Massachusetts, U.S.A., on the Connecticut river, about 20 m. N. of Springfield, served by the Boston & Maine railway. Pop. (1900), 1789; (1905, state census), 1895; (1910) 1999. Area, about 20 sq. m. The principal villages are Hadley (or Hadley Center) and North Hadley. The level country along the river is well adapted to tobacco culture, and the villages are engaged in the manufacture of tobacco and brooms. Hadley was settled in 1659 by members of the churches in Hartford and Wethersfield, Connecticut, who were styled “Strict Congregationalists” and withdrew from these Connecticut congregations because of ecclesiastical and doctrinal laxity there. At first the town was called Norwottuck, but within a year or two it was named after Hadleigh in England, and was incorporated under this name in 1661. Hopkins Academy (1815) developed from Hopkins school, founded here in 1664. The English regicides Edward Whalley and his son-in-law William Goffe found a refuge at Hadley from 1664 apparently until their deaths, and there is a tradition that Goffe or Whalley in 1675 led the people in repelling an Indian attack. From 1675 to 1713 Hadley, being in almost constant danger of attack from the Indians, was protected by a palisade enclosure and by stockades around the meeting-house. From Hadley, Hatfield was set apart in 1670, South Hadley in 1753, and Amherst in 1759.

HADLEY, is a town in Hampshire County, Massachusetts, U.S.A., located on the Connecticut River, about 20 miles north of Springfield, served by the Boston & Maine railway. Population: (1900) 1,789; (1905, state census) 1,895; (1910) 1,999. Area: about 20 square miles. The main villages are Hadley (or Hadley Center) and North Hadley. The flat land along the river is well-suited for growing tobacco, and the villages are involved in manufacturing tobacco and brooms. Hadley was settled in 1659 by members of churches in Hartford and Wethersfield, Connecticut, known as “Strict Congregationalists,” who left these Connecticut congregations due to perceived looseness in religious practices and beliefs. Initially, the town was called Norwottuck, but within a year or two, it was renamed after Hadleigh in England and was incorporated under this name in 1661. Hopkins Academy (established in 1815) developed from Hopkins school, which was founded here in 1664. The English regicides Edward Whalley and his son-in-law William Goffe found refuge in Hadley from 1664 until their deaths. There’s a tradition that Goffe or Whalley led the townspeople in defending against an Indian attack in 1675. From 1675 to 1713, Hadley was under constant threat of Indian attacks and was protected by a palisade and stockades around the meeting house. From Hadley, Hatfield was separated in 1670, South Hadley in 1753, and Amherst in 1759.

See Alice M. Walker, Historic Hadley (New York, 1906); and Sylvester Judd, History of Hadley (Northampton, 1863; new ed., 1905).

See Alice M. Walker, Historic Hadley (New York, 1906); and Sylvester Judd, History of Hadley (Northampton, 1863; new ed., 1905).


HADRAMUT, a district on the south coast of Arabia, bounded W. by Yemen, E. by Oman and N. by the Dahna desert. The modern Arabs restrict the name to the coast between Balhāf and Sihut, and the valley of the Wadi Hadramut in the interior; in its wider and commonly accepted signification it includes also the Mahra and Gāra coasts extending eastwards to Mirbat; thus defined, its limits are between 14° and 18° N. and 47° 30′ to 55° E., with a total length of 550 m. and a breadth of 150 m.

HADRAMOUT, is a district on the southern coast of Arabia, bordered to the west by Yemen, to the east by Oman, and to the north by the Dahna desert. Today, Arabs generally use the name to refer specifically to the coastline between Balhāf and Sihut, as well as the valley of the Wadi Hadramut inland; in a broader and more widely recognized sense, it also encompasses the Mahra and Gāra coasts stretching east to Mirbat. With these boundaries, its coordinates range from 14° to 18° N and 47° 30′ to 55° E, measuring a total length of 550 miles and a width of 150 miles.

The coastal plain is narrow, rarely exceeding 10 m. in width, and in places the hills extend to the seashore. The principal ports are Mukalla and Shihr, both considerable towns, and Kusair and Raida, small fishing villages; inland there are a few villages near the foot of the hills, with a limited area of cultivation irrigated by springs or wells in the hill torrent beds. Behind the littoral plain a range of mountains, or rather a high plateau, falling steeply to the south and more gently to the north, extends continuously from the Yemen highlands on the west to the mouth of the Hadramut valley, from which a similar range extends with hardly a break to the border of Oman. Its crest-line is generally some 30 m. from the coast, and its average height between 4000 and 5000 ft. A number of wadis or ravines cutting deeply into the plateau run northward to the main Wadi Hadramut, a broad valley lying nearly east and west, with a total length from its extreme western heads on the Yemen highlands to its mouth near Sihut of over 500 m. Beyond the valley and steadily encroaching on it lies the great desert extending for 300 m. to the borders of Nejd. The most westerly village in the main valley is Shabwa, in ancient days the capital, but now almost buried by the advancing desert. Lower down the first large villages are Henān and Ajlania, near which the wadis ’Amd, Duwān and el ’Ain unite, forming the W. Kasr. In the W. Duwān and its branches are the villages of Haura, el Hajrēn, Kaidun and al Khurēba. Below Haura for some 60 m. there is a succession of villages with fields, gardens and date groves; several tributaries join on either side, among which the W. bin Ali and W. Adim from the south contain numerous villages. The principal towns are Shibām, al Ghurfa, Saiyun, Tariba, el Ghuraf, Tarim, formerly the chief place, ’Ainat and el Kasm. Below the last-named place there is little cultivation Or settled population. The shrines of Kabr Sālih and Kabr Hud are looked on as specially sacred, and are visited by numbers of pilgrims. The former, which is in the Wadi Ser about 20 m. N.W. of Shibām, was explored by Theodore Bent in 1894; the tomb itself is of no interest, but in the neighbourhood there are extensive ruins with Himyaritic inscriptions on the stones. Kabr Hud is in the main valley some distance east of Kasm; not far from it is Bir Borhut, a natural grotto, where fumes of burning sulphur issue from a number of volcanic vents; al-Masudi mentions it in the 10th century as an active volcano. Except after heavy rain, there is no running water in the Hadramut valley, the cultivation therefore depends on artificial irrigation from wells. The principal crops are wheat, millet, indigo, dates and tobacco; this latter, known as Hamumi tobacco, is of excellent quality.

The coastal plain is narrow, rarely more than 10 meters wide, and in some areas, the hills reach right up to the shore. The main ports are Mukalla and Shihr, both significant towns, along with Kusair and Raida, which are small fishing villages. Inland, there are a few villages located at the base of the hills, with a small area for farming supported by springs or wells in the riverbeds. Behind the coastal plain, there is a mountain range, or more accurately, a high plateau, which drops steeply to the south and more gradually to the north. This range stretches continuously from the Yemen highlands in the west to the mouth of the Hadramut valley, and a similar range continues with few interruptions to the border of Oman. Its crest is generally about 30 meters from the coast, with an average height between 4,000 and 5,000 feet. Several ravines cut deeply into the plateau, running northward to the main Wadi Hadramut, which is a broad valley that runs almost east to west, extending over 500 meters from its far western heads on the Yemen highlands to its mouth near Sihut. Beyond the valley, steadily encroaching on it, lies a vast desert that stretches 300 meters to the borders of Nejd. The westernmost village in the main valley is Shabwa, which was the capital in ancient times but is now nearly buried by the advancing desert. Further down, the first large villages are Henān and Ajlania, where the wadis ’Amd, Duwān, and el ’Ain converge to form W. Kasr. In W. Duwān and its branches, you'll find the villages of Haura, el Hajrēn, Kaidun, and al Khurēba. Below Haura, for about 60 meters, a series of villages can be found with fields, gardens, and date groves; several tributaries join from either side, including W. bin Ali and W. Adim from the south, which contain numerous villages. The main towns are Shibām, al Ghurfa, Saiyun, Tariba, el Ghuraf, Tarim (formerly the main settlement), ’Ainat, and el Kasm. Below el Kasm, there is little farming or settled population. The shrines of Kabr Sālih and Kabr Hud are considered particularly sacred and are visited by many pilgrims. Kabr Sālih, located in Wadi Ser about 20 meters northwest of Shibām, was explored by Theodore Bent in 1894; the tomb itself is not particularly interesting, but nearby there are extensive ruins with Himyaritic inscriptions on the stones. Kabr Hud is located in the main valley some distance east of Kasm; not far from it is Bir Borhut, a natural grotto where sulfur fumes come from several volcanic vents; al-Masudi mentioned it in the 10th century as an active volcano. Except after heavy rain, there is no running water in the Hadramut valley, so cultivation relies on artificial irrigation from wells. The main crops are wheat, millet, indigo, dates, and tobacco; this latter, known as Hamumi tobacco, is of excellent quality.

Hadramut has preserved its name from the earliest times; it occurs in Genesis as Hazarmaveth and Hadoram, sons of Joktan; and the old Greek geographers mention Adramytta and Chadramotites in their accounts of the frankincense country. The numerous ruins discovered in the W. Duwān and Adim, as well as in the main valley, are evidences of its former prosperity and civilization.

Hadramut has kept its name since ancient times; it appears in Genesis as Hazarmaveth and Hadoram, the sons of Joktan; and the early Greek geographers refer to Adramytta and Chadramotites in their descriptions of the frankincense region. The many ruins found in W. Duwān and Adim, as well as in the main valley, are evidence of its past wealth and civilization.

The people, known as Hadrami (plural Ḣadārim), belong generally to the south Arabian stock, claiming descent from Ya‘rab bin Kahtān. There is, however, a large number of 800 Seyyids or descendants of the Prophet, and of townsmen of northern origin, besides a considerable class of African or mixed descent. Van den Berg estimates the total population of Hadramut (excluding the Mahra and Gāra) at 150,000, of which he locates 50,000 in the valley between Shibām and Tarim, 25,000 in the W. Duwān and its tributaries, and 25,000 in Mukalla, Shihr and the coast villages, leaving 50,000 for the non-agricultural population scattered over the rest of the country, probably an excessive estimate.

The people known as Hadrami (plural Ḣadārim) generally come from the south Arabian lineage and claim descent from Ya‘rab bin Kahtān. However, there is a significant number of Seyyids or descendants of the Prophet, as well as townspeople of northern origin, along with a considerable group of individuals of African or mixed descent. Van den Berg estimates the total population of Hadramut (excluding the Mahra and Gāra) at 150,000, with 50,000 located in the valley between Shibām and Tarim, 25,000 in W. Duwān and its tributaries, and 25,000 in Mukalla, Shihr, and the coastal villages, leaving 50,000 for the non-agricultural population scattered throughout the rest of the country, which is probably an overestimate.

The Seyyids, descendants of Ḥosain, grandson of Mahomet, form a numerous and highly respected aristocracy. They are divided into families, the chiefs of which are known as Munsibs, who are looked on as the religious leaders of the people, and are even in some cases venerated as saints. Among the leading families are the Sheikh Abu Bakr of Aināt, the el-Aidrus of Shihr and the Sakkāf of Saiyun. They do not bear arms, nor occupy themselves in trade or manual labour or even agriculture; though owning a large proportion of the land, they employ slaves or hired labourers to cultivate it. As compared with the other classes, they are well educated, and are strict in their observance of religious duties, and owing to the respect due to their descent, they exercise a strong influence both in temporal and spiritual affairs.

The Seyyids, who are descendants of Ḥosain, the grandson of Muhammad, make up a large and highly esteemed aristocracy. They are divided into families, whose leaders are known as Munsibs, regarded as the religious heads of the community, and in some cases, even revered as saints. Among the prominent families are Sheikh Abu Bakr of Aināt, the el-Aidrus of Shihr, and the Sakkāf of Saiyun. They do not bear arms, engage in trade, manual labor, or even farming; although they own a significant portion of the land, they hire slaves or laborers to work it. Compared to other classes, they are well-educated and diligent in their religious practices. Given the respect that comes with their lineage, they wield considerable influence in both worldly and spiritual matters.

The tribesmen, as in Arabia generally, are the predominant class in the population; all the adults carry arms; some of the tribes have settled towns and villages, others lead a nomadic life, keeping, however, within the territory which is recognized as belonging to the tribe. They are divided into sections or families, each headed by a chief or abu (lit. father), while the head of the tribe is called the mukaddam or sultan; the authority of the chief depends largely on his personality: he is the leader in peace and in war, but the tribesmen are not his subjects; he can only rule with their support. The most powerful tribe at present in Hadramut is the Kaiti, a branch of the Yāfa tribe whose settlements lie farther west. Originally invited by the Seyyids to protect the settled districts from the attacks of marauding tribes, they have established themselves as practically the rulers of the country, and now possess the coast district with the towns of Shihr and Mukalla, as well as Haura, Hajrēn and Shibām in the interior. The head of the family has accumulated great wealth, and risen to the highest position in the service of the nizam of Hyderabad in India, as Jamadar, or commander of an Arab levy composed of his tribesmen, numbers of whom go abroad to seek their fortune. The Kathiri tribe was formerly the most powerful; they occupy the towns of Saiyun, Tarim and el-Ghuraf in the richest part of the main Hadramut valley. The chiefs of both the Kaiti and Kathiri are in political relations with the British government, through the resident at Aden (q.v.). The ’Amudi in the W. Duwān, and the Nahdi, Awāmir and Tamimi in the main valley, are the principal tribes possessing permanent villages; the Saibān, Hamumi and Manāhil occupy the mountains between the main valley and coast.

The tribesmen, like in most of Arabia, are the main class in the population; all adults carry weapons. Some tribes have settled in towns and villages, while others live a nomadic lifestyle but stay within the territory recognized as theirs. They are divided into sections or families, each led by a chief or abu (which means father), while the head of the tribe is called the mukaddam or sultan; the chief's authority is largely based on his character: he leads in peace and in war, but the tribesmen are not his subjects; he can only lead with their support. The most powerful tribe in Hadramut right now is the Kaiti, a branch of the Yāfa tribe, which is located further west. They were originally invited by the Seyyids to protect the settled areas from attacks by raiding tribes, and they have basically established themselves as the rulers of the region, now controlling the coastal area with the towns of Shihr and Mukalla, as well as Haura, Hajrēn, and Shibām in the interior. The head of the family has amassed significant wealth and has risen to the top position in the service of the nizam of Hyderabad in India, as Jamadar, or commander of an Arab force made up of his tribesmen, many of whom go abroad to seek their fortunes. The Kathiri tribe was once the most powerful; they occupy the towns of Saiyun, Tarim, and el-Ghuraf in the richest part of the main Hadramut valley. The chiefs of both the Kaiti and Kathiri maintain political relations with the British government through the resident at Aden (q.v.). The ’Amudi in W. Duwān, and the Nahdi, Awāmir, and Tamimi in the main valley are the main tribes with permanent villages; the Saibān, Hamumi, and Manāhil live in the mountains between the main valley and the coast.

The townsmen are the free inhabitants of the towns and villages as distinguished from the Seyyids and the tribesmen: they do not carry arms, but are the working members of the community, merchants, artificers, cultivators and servants, and are entirely dependent on the tribes and chiefs under whose protection they live. The servile class contains a large African element, brought over formerly when the slave trade flourished on this coast; as in all Mahommedan countries they are well treated, and often rise to positions of trust.

The townspeople are the free residents of the towns and villages, unlike the Seyyids and the tribesmen. They don’t carry weapons but are the working members of the community—merchants, craftsmen, farmers, and servants—and rely completely on the tribes and leaders under whose protection they live. The lower class includes a significant African population, who were brought over during the height of the slave trade on this coast. As in all Muslim countries, they are treated well and often attain positions of trust.

As already mentioned, a large number of Arabs from Hadramut go abroad; the Kaiti tribesmen take service in India in the irregular troops of Hyderabad; emigration on a large scale has also gone on, to the Dutch colonies in Java and Sumatra, since the beginning of the 19th century. According to the census of 1885, quoted by Van den Berg in his Report published by the government of the Dutch East Indies in 1886, the number of Arabs in those colonies actually born in Arabia was 2500, while those born in the colonies exceeded 20,000; nearly all of the former are from the towns in the Hadramut valley between Shibām and Tarim. Mukalla and Shihr have a considerable trade with the Red Sea and Persian Gulf ports, as well as with the ports of Aden, Dhafar and Muscat; a large share of this is in the hands of Parsee and other British Indian traders who have established themselves in the Hadramut ports. The principal imports are wheat, rice, sugar, piece goods and hardware. The exports are small; the chief items are honey, tobacco and sharks’ fins. In the towns in the interior the principal industries are weaving and dyeing.

As mentioned earlier, many Arabs from Hadramut go abroad; the Kaiti tribesmen enlist in India in the irregular troops of Hyderabad. Since the early 19th century, there has also been significant emigration to the Dutch colonies in Java and Sumatra. According to the 1885 census, cited by Van den Berg in his Report published by the government of the Dutch East Indies in 1886, the number of Arabs in those colonies who were actually born in Arabia was 2,500, while those born in the colonies surpassed 20,000; nearly all of the former come from the towns in the Hadramut valley between Shibām and Tarim. Mukalla and Shihr have substantial trade with the ports of the Red Sea and Persian Gulf, as well as with the ports of Aden, Dhafar, and Muscat; a large portion of this trade is handled by Parsee and other British Indian traders who have set up in the Hadramut ports. The main imports include wheat, rice, sugar, textiles, and hardware. The exports are limited; the main items are honey, tobacco, and sharks’ fins. In the interior towns, the primary industries are weaving and dyeing.

The Mahra country adjoins the Hadramut proper, and extends along the coast from Sihut eastwards to the east of Kamar Bay, where the Gāra coast begins and stretches to Mirbat. The sultan of the Mahra, to whom Sokotra also belongs, lives at Kishin, a poor village consisting of a few scattered houses about 30 m. west of Rās Fartak. Sihut is a similar village 20 m. farther west. The mountains rise to a height of 4000 ft. within a short distance of the coast, covered in places with trees, among which are the myrrh- and frankincense-bearing shrubs. These gums, for which the coast was celebrated in ancient days, are still produced; the best quality is obtained in the Gāra country, on the northern slope of the mountains. Dhafar and the mountains behind it were visited and surveyed by Mr Bent’s party in 1894. There are several thriving villages on the coast, of which el-Hafa is the principal port of export for frankincense; 9000 cwt. is exported annually to Bombay.

The Mahra region borders the Hadramut area and stretches along the coast from Sihut to the east of Kamar Bay, where the Gāra coastline starts and continues to Mirbat. The sultan of the Mahra, who also oversees Sokotra, resides in Kishin, a small village with just a few scattered houses about 30 meters west of Rās Fartak. Sihut is a similar village located 20 meters further west. The mountains rise to a height of 4,000 feet not far from the coast, featuring areas covered with trees, including those that produce myrrh and frankincense. These resins, for which the coast was famous in ancient times, are still harvested today, with the best quality found in the Gāra region, on the northern slopes of the mountains. Dhafar and the mountains behind it were explored and surveyed by Mr. Bent’s group in 1894. There are several prosperous villages along the coast, with el-Hafa serving as the main port for exporting frankincense, with 9,000 hundredweight shipped annually to Bombay.

Ruins of Sabaean buildings were found by J. T. Bent in the neighbourhood of Dhafar, and a remarkable cove or small harbour was discovered at Khor Rori, which he identified with the ancient port of Moscha.

Ruins of Sabaean buildings were found by J. T. Bent near Dhafar, and an impressive cove or small harbor was discovered at Khor Rori, which he identified as the ancient port of Moscha.

Authorities.—L. Van den Berg, Le Hadramut et les colonies arabes (Batavia, 1885); L. Hirsch, Reise in Südarabien (Leiden, 1897); J. T. Bent, Southern Arabia (London, 1895); A. von Wrede, Reise in Hadhramut (Brunswick, 1870); H. J. Carter, Trans. Bombay As. Soc. (1845), 47-51; Journal R.G.S. (1837).

Authorities.—L. Van den Berg, Le Hadramut et les colonies arabes (Batavia, 1885); L. Hirsch, Reise in Südarabien (Leiden, 1897); J. T. Bent, Southern Arabia (London, 1895); A. von Wrede, Reise in Hadhramut (Brunswick, 1870); H. J. Carter, Trans. Bombay As. Soc. (1845), 47-51; Journal R.G.S. (1837).

(R. A. W.)

HADRIA [mod. Atri (q.v.)], perhaps the original terminal point of the Via Caecilia, Italy. It belonged to the Praetutii. It became a colony of Rome in 290 B.C. and remained faithful to Rome. The coins which it issued (probably during the Punic Wars), are remarkable. The crypt of the cathedral of the modern town was originally a large Roman cistern; another forms the foundation of the ducal palace; and in the eastern portion of the town there is a complicated system of underground passages for collecting and storing water.

HADRIA [mod. Atri (q.v.)], possibly the original endpoint of the Via Caecilia in Italy. It was part of the Praetutii. It became a Roman colony in 290 B.C. and remained loyal to Rome. The coins it issued (likely during the Punic Wars) are noteworthy. The crypt of the cathedral in the modern town was initially a large Roman cistern; another forms the base of the ducal palace, and in the eastern part of the town, there is a complex system of underground passages for collecting and storing water.

See Notizie degli scavi (1902), 3.

See *Notizie degli scavi* (1902), 3.

(T. As.)

HADRIAN (Publius Aelius Hadrianus), Roman emperor A.D. 117-138, was born on the 24th of January A.D. 76, at Italica in Hispania Baetica (according to others, at Rome), where his ancestors, originally from Hadria in Picenum, had been settled since the time of the Scipios. On his father’s death in 85 or 86 he was placed under the guardianship of two fellow-countrymen, his kinsman Ulpius Trajanus (afterwards the emperor Trajan), and Caelius Attianus (afterwards prefect of the praetorian guard). He spent the next five years at Rome, but at the age of fifteen he returned to his native place and entered upon a military career. He was soon, however, recalled to Rome by Trajan, and appointed to the offices of decemvir stlitibus judicandis, praefectus feriarum Latinarum, and sevir turmae equitum Romanorum. About 95 he was military tribune in lower Moesia. In 97 he was sent to upper Germany to convey the congratulations of the army to Trajan on his adoption by Nerva; and, in January of the following year, he hastened to announce the death of Nerva to Trajan at Cologne. Trajan, who had been set against Hadrian by reports of his extravagance, soon took him into favour again, chiefly owing to the goodwill of the empress Plotina, who brought about the marriage of Hadrian with (Vibia) Sabina, Trajan’s great-niece. In 101 Hadrian was quaestor, in 105 tribune of the people, in 106 praetor. He served with distinction in both Dacian campaigns: in the second Trajan presented him with a valuable ring which he himself had received from Nerva, a token of regard which seemed to designate Hadrian as his successor. In 107 Hadrian was legatus praetorius of lower Pannonia, in 108 consul suffectus, in 112 archon at Athens, legatus in the Parthian campaign (113-117), in 117 consul designatus for the following year, in 119 consul for the third and last time only for four months. When Trajan, owing to a severe illness, decided to return home from the East, he left Hadrian in command of the army and governor of Syria. On the 9th of August 117, Hadrian, at Antioch, was informed 801 of his adoption by Trajan, and, on the 11th, of the death of the latter at Selinus in Cilicia. According to Dio Cassius (lxix. 1) the adoption was entirely fictitious, the work of Plotina and Attianus, by whom Trajan’s death was concealed for a few days in order to facilitate the elevation of Hadrian. Whichever may have been the truth, his succession was confirmed by the army and the senate. He hastened to propitiate the former by a donative of twice the usual amount, and excused his hasty acceptance of the throne to the senate by alleging the impatient zeal of the soldiers and the necessity of an imperator for the welfare of the state.

HADRIAN (Hadrian), Roman emperor CE 117-138, was born on January 24, CE 76, at Italica in Hispania Baetica (some say Rome), where his ancestors, originally from Hadria in Picenum, had settled since the time of the Scipios. After his father's death in 85 or 86, he was placed under the guardianship of two compatriots, his relative Ulpius Trajanus (who would later become Emperor Trajan) and Caelius Attianus (who later became the prefect of the praetorian guard). He spent the next five years in Rome, but at fifteen, he returned to his hometown and began a military career. However, he was soon recalled to Rome by Trajan and appointed to the positions of decemvir stlitibus judicandis, praefectus feriarum Latinarum, and sevir turmae equitum Romanorum. Around 95, he was a military tribune in lower Moesia. In 97, he was sent to upper Germany to deliver the army's congratulations to Trajan for his adoption by Nerva; and in January of the following year, he rushed to inform Trajan of Nerva's death in Cologne. Trajan, who had initially been wary of Hadrian due to rumors of his extravagance, soon favored him again, largely because of the support of Empress Plotina, who arranged Hadrian's marriage to (Vibia) Sabina, Trajan’s great-niece. In 101, Hadrian was quaestor, in 105 tribune of the people, and in 106 praetor. He served distinguished roles in both Dacian campaigns: during the second campaign, Trajan presented him with a valuable ring he had received from Nerva, a mark of respect that seemed to signal Hadrian as his successor. In 107, Hadrian was legatus praetorius of lower Pannonia, in 108 consul suffectus, in 112 archon at Athens, legatus in the Parthian campaign (113-117), in 117 consul designatus for the next year, and in 119 consul for the third and final time, serving only four months. When Trajan, due to serious illness, decided to return from the East, he left Hadrian in command of the army and as governor of Syria. On August 9, 117, Hadrian was informed at Antioch of his adoption by Trajan, and on the 11th, of Trajan’s death at Selinus in Cilicia. According to Dio Cassius (lxix. 1), the adoption was completely staged, orchestrated by Plotina and Attianus, who concealed Trajan’s death for a few days to facilitate Hadrian’s elevation. Regardless of the truth, his succession was confirmed by the army and the senate. He quickly sought to win over the army with a bonus that was double the usual amount, and he explained his swift acceptance of the throne to the senate by citing the soldiers' urgent enthusiasm and the need for a leader for the state’s welfare.

Hadrian’s first important act was to abandon as untenable the conquests of Trajan beyond the Euphrates (Assyria, Mesopotamia and Armenia), a recurrence to the traditional policy of Augustus. The provinces were unsettled, the barbarians on the borders restless and menacing, and Hadrian wisely judged that the old limits of Augustus afforded the most defensible frontier. Mesopotamia and Assyria were given back to the Parthians, and the Armenians were allowed a king of their own. From Antioch Hadrian set out for Dacia to punish the Roxolani, who, incensed by a reduction of the tribute hitherto paid them, had invaded the Danubian provinces. An arrangement was patched up, and while Hadrian was still in Dacia he received news of a conspiracy against his life. Four citizens of consular rank were accused of being concerned in it, and were put to death by order of the senate before he could interfere. Hurrying back to Rome, Hadrian endeavoured to remove the unfavourable impression produced by the whole affair and to gain the goodwill of senate and people. He threw the responsibility for the executions upon the prefect of the praetorian guard, and swore that he would never punish a senator without the assent of the entire body, to which he expressed the utmost deference and consideration. Large sums of money and games and shows were provided for the people, and, in addition, all the arrears of taxation for the last fifteen years (about £10,000,000) were cancelled and the bonds burnt in the Forum of Trajan. Trajan’s scheme for the “alimentation” of poor children was carried out upon a larger scale under the superintendence of a special official called praefectus alimentorum.

Hadrian's first major action was to declare the conquests of Trajan beyond the Euphrates (Assyria, Mesopotamia, and Armenia) unmanageable, returning to the traditional policy of Augustus. The provinces were unstable, the border tribes were restless and threatening, and Hadrian wisely decided that the former limits set by Augustus provided the most defensible frontier. Mesopotamia and Assyria were returned to the Parthians, and the Armenians were allowed to have their own king. From Antioch, Hadrian headed to Dacia to deal with the Roxolani, who, angry about a reduction in the tribute they had previously received, had invaded the Danubian provinces. An agreement was reached, and while Hadrian was still in Dacia, he learned of a conspiracy against his life. Four citizens of consular rank were accused of involvement and were executed by the senate before he could step in. Rushing back to Rome, Hadrian tried to mitigate the negative perception from the incident and win the favor of the senate and the public. He shifted the blame for the executions onto the prefect of the praetorian guard and promised that he would never punish a senator without the senate's full approval, which he expressed utmost respect for. He provided large sums of money and organized games and spectacles for the people, and additionally, all outstanding tax debts from the past fifteen years (around £10,000,000) were forgiven, with the bonds destroyed in the Forum of Trajan. Trajan’s plan for the “support” of poor children was implemented on a larger scale under the management of a special official called praefectus alimentorum.

The record of Hadrian’s journeys1 through all parts of the empire forms the chief authority for the events of his life down to his final settlement in the capital during his last years. They can only be briefly touched upon here. His first great journey probably lasted from 121 to 126. After traversing Gaul he visited the Germanic provinces on the Rhine, and crossed over to Britain (spring, 122), where he built the great rampart from the Tyne to the Solway, which bears his name (see Britain: Roman). He returned through Gaul into Spain, and then proceeded to Mauretania, where he suppressed an insurrection. A war with the Parthians was averted by a personal interview with their king (123). From the Parthian frontier he travelled through Asia Minor and the islands of the Aegean to Athens (autumn, 125), where he introduced various political and commercial changes, was initiated at the Eleusinia, and presided at the celebration of the greater Dionysia. After visiting Central Greece and Peloponnesus, he returned by way of Sicily to Rome (end of 126). The next year was spent at Rome, and, after a visit to Africa, he set out on his second great journey (September 128). He travelled by way of Athens, where he completed and dedicated the buildings (see Athens) begun during his first visit, chief of which was the Olympieum or temple of Olympian Zeus, on which occasion Hadrian himself assumed the name of Olympius. In the spring of 129 he visited Asia Minor and Syria, where he invited the kings and princes of the East to a meeting (probably at Samosata). Having passed the winter at Antioch, he set out for the south (spring, 130). He ordered Jerusalem to be rebuilt (see Jerusalem) under the name of Aelia Capitolina, and made his way through Arabia to Egypt, where he restored the tomb of Pompey at Pelusium with great magnificence. After a short stay at Alexandria he took an excursion up the Nile, during which he lost his favourite Antinous. On the 21st of November 130, Hadrian (or at any rate his wife Sabina) heard the music which issued at sunrise from the statue of Memnon at Thebes (see Memnon). From Egypt Hadrian returned through Syria to Europe (his movements are obscure), but was obliged to hurry back to Palestine (spring, 133) to give his personal attention (this is denied by some historians) to the revolt of the Jews, which had broken out (autumn, 131, or spring, 132) after he had left Syria. The founding of a Roman colony on the site of Jerusalem (Dio Cass. lxix. 12) and the prohibition of circumcision (Spartianus, Hadrianus, 14) are said to have been the causes of the war, but authorities differ considerably as to this and as to the measures which followed the revolt (see art. Jews; also E. Schürer, Hist. of the Jewish People, Eng. tr., div. 1, vol. ii. p. 288; and S. Krauss in Jewish Encyc. s.v. “Hadrian”), which lasted till 135. Leaving the conduct of affairs in the hands of his most capable general, Julius Severus, in the spring of 134 Hadrian returned to Rome. The remaining years of his life were spent partly in the capital, partly in his villa at Tibur. His health now began to fail, and it became necessary for him to choose a successor, as he had no children of his own. Against the advice of his relatives and friends he adopted L. Ceionius Commodus under the name of L. Aelius Caesar, who was in a feeble state of health and died on the 1st of January 138, before he had an opportunity of proving his capabilities. Hadrian then adopted Arrius Antoninus (see Antoninus Pius) on condition that he should adopt M. Annius Verus (afterwards the emperor Marcus Aurelius) and the son of L. Aelius Caesar, L. Ceionius Commodus (afterwards the emperor Commodus). Hadrian died at Baiae on the 10th of July 138.

The record of Hadrian’s journeys1 across the empire serves as the main source for the events of his life until he settled in the capital during his later years. These journeys can only be briefly summarized here. His first major journey likely took place from 121 to 126. After traveling through Gaul, he visited the German provinces along the Rhine and crossed over to Britain (spring, 122), where he built the impressive wall from the Tyne to the Solway, which bears his name (see Britain: Roman). He returned through Gaul into Spain and then headed to Mauretania, where he put down a rebellion. A war with the Parthians was prevented through a face-to-face meeting with their king (123). From the Parthian border, he journeyed through Asia Minor and the Aegean islands to Athens (autumn, 125), where he implemented various political and commercial reforms, was initiated at the Eleusinia, and presided over the celebration of the greater Dionysia. After visiting Central Greece and the Peloponnesus, he returned via Sicily to Rome (end of 126). The following year was spent in Rome, and after a trip to Africa, he set off on his second major journey (September 128). He traveled through Athens, where he completed and dedicated the buildings (see Athens) that had begun during his first visit, the most notable being the Olympieum or temple of Olympian Zeus, at which Hadrian himself took the title of Olympius. In the spring of 129, he visited Asia Minor and Syria, where he invited the eastern kings and princes to a meeting (likely at Samosata). After spending the winter in Antioch, he headed south (spring, 130). He ordered Jerusalem to be rebuilt (see Jerusalem) under the name Aelia Capitolina and traveled through Arabia to Egypt, where he magnificently restored the tomb of Pompey at Pelusium. After a brief stay in Alexandria, he took a trip up the Nile, during which he lost his favorite, Antinous. On November 21, 130, Hadrian (or at least his wife, Sabina) heard the music that emanated at sunrise from the statue of Memnon at Thebes (see Memnon). After leaving Egypt, Hadrian returned through Syria to Europe (his movements are unclear) but had to rush back to Palestine (spring, 133) to personally address (which some historians dispute) the Jewish revolt that had erupted (autumn, 131, or spring, 132) after he left Syria. The establishment of a Roman colony on the site of Jerusalem (Dio Cass. lxix. 12) and the ban on circumcision (Spartianus, Hadrianus, 14) are said to have caused the war, but historians greatly differ on these points and on the actions taken following the revolt (see art. Jews; also E. Schürer, Hist. of the Jewish People, Eng. tr., div. 1, vol. ii. p. 288; and S. Krauss in Jewish Encyc. s.v. “Hadrian”), which lasted until 135. Leaving the management of affairs to his most capable general, Julius Severus, Hadrian returned to Rome in the spring of 134. The remaining years of his life were divided between the capital and his villa at Tibur. His health began to decline, making it necessary for him to choose a successor, as he had no children. Against the advice of his family and friends, he adopted L. Ceionius Commodus under the name L. Aelius Caesar, who was in poor health and died on January 1, 138, before he could demonstrate his abilities. Hadrian then adopted Arrius Antoninus (see Antoninus Pius) on the condition that he would adopt M. Annius Verus (later Emperor Marcus Aurelius) and the son of L. Aelius Caesar, L. Ceionius Commodus (later Emperor Commodus). Hadrian died at Baiae on July 10, 138.

He was without doubt one of the most capable emperors who ever occupied the throne, and devoted his great and varied talents to the interests of the state. One of his chief objects was the abolition of distinctions between the provinces and the mother country, finally carried out by Caracalla, while at the same time he did not neglect reforms that were urgently called for in Italy. Provincial governors were kept under strict supervision; extortion was practically unheard of; the jus Latii was bestowed upon several communities; special officials were instituted for the control of the finances; and the emperor’s interest in provincial affairs was shown by bis personal assumption of various municipal offices. New towns were founded and old ones restored; new streets were laid out, and aqueducts, temples and magnificent buildings constructed. In Italy itself the administration of justice and the finances required special attention. Four legati juridici (or simply juridici) of consular rank were appointed for Italy, who took over certain important judicial functions formerly exercised by local magistrates (cases of fideicommissa, the nomination of guardians). The judicial council (consiliarii Augusti, later called consistorium), composed of persons of the highest rank (especially jurists), became a permanent body of advisers, although merely consultative. Roman law owes much to Hadrian, who instructed Salvius Julianus to draw up an edictum perpetuum, to a great extent the basis of Justinian’s Corpus juris (see M. Schanz, Geschichte der römischen Literatur, iii. p. 167). In the administration of finance, in addition to the remission of arrears already mentioned, a revision of claims was ordered to be made every fifteen years, thereby anticipating the “indictions” (see Calendar; Chronology). Direct collection of taxes by imperial procurators was substituted for the system of farming, and a special official (advocatus fisci) was instituted to look after the interests of the imperial treasury. The gift of “coronary gold” (aurum coronarium), presented to the emperor on certain occasions, was entirely remitted in the case of Italy, and partly in the case of the provinces. The administration of the postal service throughout the empire was taken over by the state, and municipal officials were relieved from the burden of maintaining the imperial posts. Humane regulations as to the treatment of slaves were strictly 802 enforced; the master was forbidden to put his slave to death, but was obliged to bring him before a court of justice; if he ill-treated him it was a penal offence. The sale of slaves (male and female) for immoral and gladiatorial purposes was forbidden; the custom of putting all the household to death when their master was murdered was modified. The public baths were kept under strict supervision; the toga was ordered to be worn in public by senators and equites on solemn occasions; extravagant banquets were prohibited; rules were made to prevent the congestion of traffic in the streets. In military matters Hadrian was a strict disciplinarian, but his generosity and readiness to share their hardships endeared him to the soldiers. He effected a material and moral improvement in the conditions of service and mode of life, but in other respects he does not appear to have introduced any important military reforms. During his reign an advance was made in the direction of creating an organized body of servants at the disposal of the emperor by the appointment of equites to important administrative posts, without their having performed the militiae equestres (see Equites). Among these posts were various procuratorships (chief of which was that of the imperial fisc), and the offices ab epistulis, a rationibus and a libellis (secretary, accountant, receiver of petitions). The prefect of the praetorian guard was now the most important person in the state next to the emperor, and subsequently became a supreme judge of appeal. Among the magnificent buildings erected by Hadrian mention may be made of the following: In the capital, the temple of Venus and Roma; his splendid mausoleum, which formed the groundwork of the castle of St Angelo; the pantheon of Agrippa; the Basilica Neptuni; at Tibur the great villa 8 m. in extent, a kind of epitome of the world, with miniatures of the most celebrated places in the provinces. Athens, however, was the favourite site of his architectural labours; here he built the temple of Olympian Zeus, the Panhellenion, the Pantheon, the library, a gymnasium and a temple of Hera.

He was undoubtedly one of the most capable emperors to ever sit on the throne, dedicating his impressive and diverse skills to the state's interests. One of his main goals was to eliminate the differences between the provinces and the mother country, a change ultimately implemented by Caracalla, while he also addressed necessary reforms in Italy. Provincial governors were closely monitored; extortion was almost nonexistent; the jus Latii was granted to several communities; special officials were appointed to manage finances; and the emperor showed interest in provincial matters by personally taking on various municipal roles. New towns were established and old ones were restored; new streets were created, along with aqueducts, temples, and grand buildings. In Italy itself, the administration of justice and finances needed special focus. Four legati juridici (or simply juridici) of consular rank were assigned for Italy, assuming certain important judicial tasks previously handled by local magistrates (such as cases of fideicommissa and the nomination of guardians). The judicial council (consiliarii Augusti, later known as consistorium), made up of individuals of the highest rank (especially jurists), became a permanent advisory body, even though it was only consultative. Roman law owes much to Hadrian, who instructed Salvius Julianus to create an edictum perpetuum, which largely serves as the foundation of Justinian’s Corpus juris (see M. Schanz, Geschichte der römischen Literatur, iii. p. 167). In finance management, in addition to the cancellation of previously mentioned arrears, a review of claims was mandated every fifteen years, anticipating the “indictions” (see Calendar; Chronology). The direct collection of taxes by imperial procurators replaced the farming system, and a special official (advocatus fisci) was established to protect the interests of the imperial treasury. The offering of “coronary gold” (aurum coronarium), given to the emperor on certain occasions, was entirely waived in Italy and partially in the provinces. The state took over the administration of the postal service across the empire, relieving municipal officials of the responsibility of maintaining the imperial posts. Humane regulations regarding the treatment of slaves were strictly enforced; masters were prohibited from executing their slaves and were required to present them before a court of justice; mistreatment was considered a punishable offense. The sale of slaves (both male and female) for immoral and gladiatorial purposes was banned; the practice of killing all household members when their master was murdered was changed. Public baths were closely monitored; senators and equites were required to wear togas in public during formal occasions; lavish banquets were forbidden; and rules were established to prevent traffic jams in the streets. In military matters, Hadrian was a strict disciplinarian, yet his generosity and willingness to share hardships made him well-liked among soldiers. He brought about material and moral improvements in the conditions of service and lifestyle, but did not appear to introduce any significant military reforms. During his reign, an effort was made to create an organized group of servants available to the emperor by appointing equites to key administrative positions without requiring them to have served in militiae equestres (see Equites). Among these positions were various procuratorships (the most significant being that of the imperial fisc), as well as offices ab epistulis, a rationibus, and a libellis (secretary, accountant, receiver of petitions). The prefect of the praetorian guard became the most important official in the state after the emperor and eventually became the supreme judge of appeal. Notable buildings constructed by Hadrian include: in the capital, the temple of Venus and Roma; his magnificent mausoleum, which formed the basis for the castle of St. Angelo; the Pantheon of Agrippa; the Basilica Neptuni; and at Tibur, the vast villa spanning 8 miles, a kind of miniature version of the world, featuring replicas of the most notable sites in the provinces. However, Athens was his favorite location for architectural projects; here, he built the temple of Olympian Zeus, the Panhellenion, the Pantheon, a library, a gymnasium, and a temple of Hera.

Hadrian was fond of the society of learned men—poets, scholars, rhetoricians and philosophers—whom he alternately humoured and ridiculed. In painting, sculpture and music he considered himself the equal of specialists. The architect Apollodorus of Damascus owed his banishment and death to his outspoken criticism of the emperor’s plans. The sophist Favorinus was more politic; when reproached for yielding too readily to the emperor in some grammatical discussion, he replied that it was unwise to contradict the master of thirty legions. The Athenaeum (q.v.) owed its foundation to Hadrian. He was a man of considerable intellectual attainments, of prodigious memory, master of both Latin and Greek, and wrote prose and verse with equal facility. His taste, however, was curious; he preferred Cato the elder, Ennius and Caelius Antipater to Cicero, Virgil and Sallust, the obscure poet Antimachus to Homer and Plato. As a writer he displayed great versatility. He composed an autobiography, published under the name of his freedman Phlegon; wrote speeches, fragments of two of which are preserved in inscriptions (a panegyric on his mother-in-law Matidia, and an address to the soldiers at Lambaesis in Africa). In imitation of Antimachus he wrote a work called Catachannae, probably a kind of miscellanea. The Latin and Greek anthologies contain about a dozen epigrams under his name. The letter of Hadrian to the consul Servianus (in Vopiscus, Vita Saturnini, 8) is no longer considered genuine. Hadrian’s celebrated dying address to his soul may here be quoted:—

Hadrian enjoyed the company of learned individuals—poets, scholars, rhetoricians, and philosophers—whom he alternately entertained and mocked. In painting, sculpture, and music, he viewed himself as skilled as the experts. The architect Apollodorus of Damascus faced banishment and death due to his frank criticism of the emperor's plans. The sophist Favorinus was more tactful; when criticized for being too accommodating to the emperor during a grammatical debate, he responded that it was unwise to contradict the master of thirty legions. The Athenaeum (q.v.) was founded by Hadrian. He was a man of considerable intellectual achievements, with an incredible memory, proficient in both Latin and Greek, and he was comfortable writing both prose and poetry. However, his taste was unusual; he preferred Cato the Elder, Ennius, and Caelius Antipater over Cicero, Virgil, and Sallust, and chose the lesser-known poet Antimachus over Homer and Plato. As a writer, he showed great versatility. He wrote an autobiography, published under the name of his freedman Phlegon; authored speeches, of which fragments of two are preserved in inscriptions (a tribute to his mother-in-law Matidia and a speech to the soldiers at Lambaesis in Africa). Imitating Antimachus, he wrote a work called Catachannae, likely a type of miscellanea. The Latin and Greek anthologies include about a dozen epigrams attributed to him. The letter from Hadrian to the consul Servianus (in Vopiscus, Vita Saturnini, 8) is no longer thought to be authentic. Hadrian's famous deathbed address to his soul may be quoted here:—

“Animula vagula, blandula,

"Little wandering soul,"

Hospes comesque corporis,

Host and body companion,

Quae nunc abibis in loca

You will now go to places.

Pallidula, rigida, nudula;

Pale, stiff, bare;

Nec, ut soles, dabis iocos?”

“Will you make jokes, as usual?”

The character of Hadrian exhibits a mass of contradictions, well summed up by Spartianus (14, 11). He was grave and gay, affable and dignified, cruel and gentle, mean and generous, eager for fame yet not vain, impulsive and cautious, secretive and open. He hated eminent qualities in others, but gathered round him the most distinguished men of the state; at one time affectionate towards his friends, at another he mistrusted and put them to death. In fact, he was only consistent in his inconsistency (semper in omnibus varius). Although he endeavoured to win the popular favour, he was more feared than loved. A man of unnatural passions and grossly superstitious, he was an ardent lover of nature. But, with all his faults, he devoted himself so indefatigably to the service of the state, that the period of his reign could be characterized as a “golden age.”

The character of Hadrian shows a lot of contradictions, as Spartianus (14, 11) perfectly summarizes. He was serious and cheerful, friendly and dignified, cruel and kind, stingy and generous, eager for fame yet not vain, impulsive and cautious, secretive and open. He disliked outstanding qualities in others but surrounded himself with the most distinguished men of the state; at times he was loving towards his friends, while at other times he mistrusted them and had them killed. In fact, he was only consistent in his inconsistency (semper in omnibus varius). Although he tried to gain the public's favor, he was more feared than loved. A man of unnatural passions and deeply superstitious, he was a passionate lover of nature. Yet, despite all his flaws, he dedicated himself tirelessly to serving the state, so much so that his reign could be described as a “golden age.”

The chief ancient authorities for the reign of Hadrian are: the life by Aelius Spartianus in the Scriptores historiae Augustae (see Augustan History and bibliography); the epitome of Dio Cassius (lxix.) by Xiphilinus; Aurelius Victor, Epit. 14, probably based on Marius Maximus; Eutropius viii. 6; Zonaras xi. 23; Suidas, s.v. Ἀδριανός: and numerous inscriptions and coins. The autobiography was used by both Dio Cassius and Marius Maximus. Modern authorities: C. Merivale, Hist. of the Romans under the Empire, ch. lxvi.; H. Schiller, Geschichte der römischen Kaiserzeit, i. 2, p. 602 (1883); J. B. Bury, The Student’s Roman Empire (1893), where a concise table of the journeys is given; P. von Rohden, s.v. “Aelius” (No. 64) in Pauly-Wissowa’s Realencyclopädie, i. 1 (1894); J. Dürr, Die Reisen des Kaisers Hadrian (1881); F. Gregorovius, The Emperor Hadrian (Eng. tr. by Mary E. Robinson, 1898); A. Hausrath, Neutestamentliche Zeitgeschichte, iii. (1874); W. Schurz, De mutationibus in imperio ordinando ab imp. Hadr. factis, i. (Bonn, 1883); J. Plew, Quellenuntersuchungen zur Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrian (Strassburg, 1890); O. T. Schulz, “Leben des Kaisers Hadrian,” Quellenanalysen [of Spartianus’ Vita] (1904); E. Kornemann, Kaiser Hadrian und der letzte grosse Historiker von Rom (1905); W. Weber, Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrianus (1908); H. F. Hitzig, Die Stellung Kaiser Hadrians in der römischen Rechtsgeschichte (1892); C. Schultess, Bauten des Kaisers Hadrian (1898); G. Doublet, Notes sur les œuvres littéraires de l’empéreur Hadrien (Toulouse, 1893); J. B. Lightfoot, Apostolic Fathers, ii. 1, 476 seq.; Sir W. M. Ramsay, Church in the Roman Empire, pp. 320 seq.; V. Schultze, in Herzog-Hauck’s Realencyklopädie, vii. 315; histories of Roman literature by Teuffel-Schwabe and Schanz. On Aelius Caesar, see Class. Quart., 1908, i.

The main ancient sources for the reign of Hadrian are: the biography by Aelius Spartianus in the Scriptores historiae Augustae (see Augustan History and bibliography); the summary of Dio Cassius (lxix.) by Xiphilinus; Aurelius Victor, Epit. 14, likely based on Marius Maximus; Eutropius viii. 6; Zonaras xi. 23; Suidas, s.v. Hadrian; and many inscriptions and coins. The autobiography was referenced by both Dio Cassius and Marius Maximus. Modern sources include: C. Merivale, Hist. of the Romans under the Empire, ch. lxvi.; H. Schiller, Geschichte der römischen Kaiserzeit, i. 2, p. 602 (1883); J. B. Bury, The Student’s Roman Empire (1893), which includes a concise table of the journeys; P. von Rohden, s.v. “Aelius” (No. 64) in Pauly-Wissowa’s Realencyclopädie, i. 1 (1894); J. Dürr, Die Reisen des Kaisers Hadrian (1881); F. Gregorovius, The Emperor Hadrian (Eng. tr. by Mary E. Robinson, 1898); A. Hausrath, Neutestamentliche Zeitgeschichte, iii. (1874); W. Schurz, De mutationibus in imperio ordinando ab imp. Hadr. factis, i. (Bonn, 1883); J. Plew, Quellenuntersuchungen zur Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrian (Strassburg, 1890); O. T. Schulz, “Leben des Kaisers Hadrian,” Quellenanalysen [of Spartianus’ Vita] (1904); E. Kornemann, Kaiser Hadrian und der letzte grosse Historiker von Rom (1905); W. Weber, Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrianus (1908); H. F. Hitzig, Die Stellung Kaiser Hadrians in der römischen Rechtsgeschichte (1892); C. Schultess, Bauten des Kaisers Hadrian (1898); G. Doublet, Notes sur les œuvres littéraires de l’empéreur Hadrien (Toulouse, 1893); J. B. Lightfoot, Apostolic Fathers, ii. 1, 476 seq.; Sir W. M. Ramsay, Church in the Roman Empire, pp. 320 seq.; V. Schultze, in Herzog-Hauck’s Realencyklopädie, vii. 315; histories of Roman literature by Teuffel-Schwabe and Schanz. For Aelius Caesar, see Class. Quart., 1908, i.

(T. K.; J. H. F.)

1 The chronology of Hadrian’s journeys—indeed, of the whole reign—is confused and obscure. In the above the article by von Rohden in Pauly-Wissowa’s Realencyclopädie has been followed. Weber’s (see Bibliog.) is the most important discussion.

1 The timeline of Hadrian’s travels—and the entire reign—is messy and unclear. The above follows the article by von Rohden in Pauly-Wissowa’s Realencyclopädie. Weber’s (see Bibliog.) is the most significant analysis.


HADRIAN’S WALL, the name usually given to the remains of the Roman fortifications which defended the northern frontier of the Roman province of Britain, between the Tyne and the Solway. The works consisted of (1) a continuous defensive rampart with a ditch in front and a road behind; (2) various forts, blockhouses and towers along the rampart; and (3) an earthwork to the south of it, generally called the Vallum, of uncertain use. The defensive wall was probably first erected by Hadrian about A.D. 122 as a turf wall, and rebuilt in stone by Septimius Severus about A.D. 208. See further Britain: Roman.

HADRIAN'S WALL, typically refers to the ruins of the Roman fortifications that protected the northern border of the Roman province of Britain, between the Tyne and the Solway. The structure included (1) a continuous defensive wall with a ditch in front and a road behind; (2) various forts, blockhouses, and towers along the wall; and (3) an earthwork to the south of it, commonly known as the Vallum, whose purpose is unclear. The defensive wall was likely first built by Hadrian around CE 122 as a turf wall and later rebuilt in stone by Septimius Severus around CE 208. See further Britain: Roman.


HADRUMETUM, a town of ancient Africa on the southern extremity of the sinus Neapolitanus (mod. Gulf of Hammamet) on the east coast of Tunisia. The site is partly occupied by the modern town of Susa (q.v.). The form of the name Hadrumetum varied much in antiquity; the Greeks called it Ἀδρύμης, Ἀδρύμητος, Ἀδραμύτης, Ἀδράμητος: the Romans Adrumetum, Adrimetum, Hadrumetum, Hadrymetum, &c.; inscriptions and coins gave Hadrumetum. The town was originally a Phoenician colony founded by Tyrians long before Carthage (Sallust, Jug. 19). It became subject to Carthage, but lost none of its prosperity. Often mentioned during the Punic Wars, it was captured by Agathocles in 310, and was the refuge of Hannibal and the remnants of his army after the battle of Zama in 202. During the last Punic War it gave assistance to the Romans; after the fall of Carthage in 146 it received an accession of territory and the title of civitas libera (Appian, Punica, xciv.; C.I.L. i. p. 84). Caesar landed there in 46 B.C. on his way to the victory of Thapsus (De bello Afric. iii.; Suetonius, Div. Jul. lix.).

Hadrumetum, is a town from ancient Africa located at the southern end of the sinus Neapolitanus (now the Gulf of Hammamet) along the east coast of Tunisia. The site partially overlaps with the modern town of Susa (q.v.). The name Hadrumetum changed quite a bit in ancient times; the Greeks referred to it as Ἀδρύμης, Ἀδρύμητος, Ἀδραμύτης, Ἀδράμητος: the Romans used Adrumetum, Adrimetum, Hadrumetum, Hadrymetum, etc.; inscriptions and coins recorded it as Hadrumetum. The town was originally a Phoenician settlement established by Tyrians long before the rise of Carthage (Sallust, Jug. 19). It came under Carthaginian control but continued to thrive. Frequently mentioned during the Punic Wars, it was seized by Agathocles in 310, and served as a refuge for Hannibal and the remains of his army after the battle of Zama in 202. During the final Punic War, it provided support to the Romans; after the fall of Carthage in 146, it gained additional territory and the title of civitas libera (Appian, Punica, xciv.; C.I.L. i. p. 84). Caesar arrived there in 46 BCE on his way to winning at Thapsus (De bello Afric. iii.; Suetonius, Div. Jul. lix.).

In the organization of the African provinces Hadrumetum became a capital of the province of Byzacena. Its harbour was extremely busy and the surrounding country unusually fertile. Trajan made it a Latin colony under the title of Colonia Concordia Ulpia Trajana Augusta Frugifera Hadrumetina; a dedication to the emperor Gordian the Good, found by M. Cagnat at Susa in 1883 gives these titles to the town, and at the same time identifies it with Susa. Quarrels arose between Hadrumetum and its neighbour Thysdrus in connexion with the temple of Minerva situated on the borders of their respective territories (Frontinus, Gromatici, ed. Lachmannus, p. 57); Vespasian 803 when pro-consul of Africa had to repress a sedition among its inhabitants (Suetonius, Vesp. iv.; Tissot, Fastes de la prov. d’Afrique, p. 66); it was the birthplace of the emperor Albinus. At this period the metropolis of Byzacena was after Carthage the most important town in Roman Africa. It was the seat of a bishopric, and its bishops are mentioned at the councils of 258, 348, 393 and even later. Destroyed by the Vandals in 434 it was rebuilt by Justinian and renamed Justinianopolis (Procop. De aedif. vi. 6). The Arabic invasion at the end of the 7th century destroyed the Byzantine towns, and the place became the haunt of pirates, protected by the Kasbah (citadel); it was built on the substructions of the Punic, Roman and Byzantine acropolis, and is used by the French for military purposes. The Arabic geographer Bakri gave a description of the chief Roman buildings which were standing in his time (Bakri, Descr. de l’Afrique, tr. by de Slane, p. 83 et seq.). The modern town of Susa, despite its commercial prosperity, occupies only a third of the old site.

In the organization of the African provinces, Hadrumetum became the capital of Byzacena. Its harbor was very busy, and the surrounding land was remarkably fertile. Trajan established it as a Latin colony named Colonia Concordia Ulpia Trajana Augusta Frugifera Hadrumetina; a dedication to Emperor Gordian the Good, discovered by M. Cagnat in Susa in 1883, gives these titles to the city and also identifies it with Susa. Conflicts arose between Hadrumetum and its neighbor Thysdrus concerning the temple of Minerva located on the borders of their territories (Frontinus, Gromatici, ed. Lachmannus, p. 57); Vespasian, when pro-consul of Africa, had to quell a riot among its residents (Suetonius, Vesp. iv.; Tissot, Fastes de la prov. d’Afrique, p. 66); it was also the birthplace of Emperor Albinus. During this time, Byzacena's capital was, after Carthage, the most significant city in Roman Africa. It was the center of a bishopric, with its bishops mentioned at councils in 258, 348, 393, and even later. Destroyed by the Vandals in 434, it was rebuilt by Justinian and renamed Justinianopolis (Procop. De aedif. vi. 6). The Arabic invasion at the end of the 7th century destroyed the Byzantine towns, and the area became a hideout for pirates, protected by the Kasbah (citadel); it was constructed on the foundations of the Punic, Roman, and Byzantine acropolis, and is used by the French for military purposes. The Arabic geographer Bakri provided a description of the major Roman buildings that were still standing in his time (Bakri, Descr. de l’Afrique, tr. by de Slane, p. 83 et seq.). The modern town of Susa, despite its commercial success, occupies only a third of the old site.

In 1863 the French engineer, A. Daux, discovered the jetties and the moles of the commercial harbour, and the line of the military harbour (Cothon); both harbours, which were mainly artificial, are entirely silted up. There remains a fragment of the fortifications of the Punic town, which had a total length of 6410 metres, and remains of the substructions of the Byzantine acropolis, of the circus, the theatre, the water cisterns, and of other buildings, notably the interesting Byzantine basilica which is now used as an Arab café (Kahwat-el-Kubba). In the ruins there have been found numerous columns of Punic inscriptions, Roman inscriptions and mosaic, among which is one representing Virgil seated, holding the Aeneid in his hand; another represents the Cretan labyrinth with Theseus and the Minotaur (Héron de Villefosse, Revue de l’Afrique française, v., December 1887, pp. 384 and 394; Comptes rendus de l’Acad. des Inscr. et Belles-Lettres, 1892, p. 318; other mosaics, ibid., 1896, p. 578; Revue archéol., 1897). In 1904 Dr Carton and the abbé Leynaud discovered huge Christian catacombs with several miles of subterranean galleries to which access is obtained by a small vaulted chamber. In these catacombs we find numerous sarcophagi and inscriptions painted or engraved of the Roman and Byzantine periods (Comptes rendus de l’Acad. des Inscr. et Belles-Lettres, 1904-1907; Carton and Leynaud, Les Catacombes d’Hadrumète, Susa, 1905). We can recognize also the Punic and Pagan-Roman cemeteries (C. R. de l’Acad. des Inscr. et Belles-Lettres, 1887; Bull. archéol. du Comité, 1885, p. 149; 1903, p. 157). The town had no Punic coins, but under the Roman domination there were coins from the time of the Republic. These are of bronze and bear the name of the city in abbreviations, Hadr or Hadrvm accompanying the head of Neptune or the Sun. We find also the names of local duumvirs. Under Augustus the coins have on the obverse the imperial effigy, and on the reverse the names and often the effigies of the pro-consuls who governed the province, P. Quintilius Varus, L. Volusius Saturninus and Q. Fabius Maximus Africanus. After Augustus the mint was finally closed.

In 1863, the French engineer A. Daux found the jetties and moles of the commercial harbor, as well as the layout of the military harbor (Cothon); both harbors, which were mainly man-made, are completely silted up now. There’s a remnant of the fortifications from the Punic town, which spanned a total length of 6,410 meters, and ruins of the foundations of the Byzantine acropolis, the circus, the theater, the water cisterns, and other buildings, especially the notable Byzantine basilica that now serves as an Arab café (Kahwat-el-Kubba). Among the ruins, many columns with Punic and Roman inscriptions, as well as mosaics have been discovered, including one depicting Virgil seated with the Aeneid in his hand; another illustrates the Cretan labyrinth with Theseus and the Minotaur (Héron de Villefosse, Revue de l’Afrique française, v., December 1887, pp. 384 and 394; Comptes rendus de l’Acad. des Inscr. et Belles-Lettres, 1892, p. 318; other mosaics, ibid., 1896, p. 578; Revue archéol., 1897). In 1904, Dr. Carton and Abbé Leynaud discovered large Christian catacombs with several miles of underground galleries, accessed through a small vaulted chamber. Inside these catacombs, numerous sarcophagi and painted or engraved inscriptions from the Roman and Byzantine periods can be found (Comptes rendus de l’Acad. des Inscr. et Belles-Lettres, 1904-1907; Carton and Leynaud, Les Catacombes d’Hadrumète, Susa, 1905). We can also identify the Punic and Pagan-Roman cemeteries (C. R. de l’Acad. des Inscr. et Belles-Lettres, 1887; Bull. archéol. du Comité, 1885, p. 149; 1903, p. 157). The town had no Punic coins, but during Roman rule, there were coins from the Republican era. These are bronze coins that feature the city's name in abbreviations, Hadr or Hadrum, alongside the head of Neptune or the Sun. We also find names of local duumvirs. Under Augustus, the coins show the imperial portrait on one side and the names, and often the portraits, of the proconsuls who governed the province—P. Quintilius Varus, L. Volusius Saturninus, and Q. Fabius Maximus Africanus—on the flip side. After Augustus, the mint was finally closed.

Authorities.—A. Daux, Recherches sur l’origine et l’emplacement des emporia phéniciens dans le Zeugis et le Byzacium (Paris, 1869); Ch. Tissot, Géographie comparée de la province romaine d’Afrique, ii. p. 149; Cagnat, Explorations archéol. en Tunisie (2nd and 3rd fasc., 1885); Lud. Müller, Numismatique de l’Afrique ancienne, ii p. 51; M. Palat, in the Bulletin arch. du Comité des travaux historiques (1885), pp. 121 and 150; Revue archéologique (1884 and 1897); Bulletin des antiquités africaines (1884 and 1885); Bulletin de la Société archéologique de Sousse (first published in 1903); Atlas archéol. de Tunisie (4th fascicule, with the plan of Hadrumetum).

Authorities.—A. Daux, Research on the Origin and Location of Phoenician Emporia in the Zeugis and Byzacium (Paris, 1869); Ch. Tissot, Comparative Geography of the Roman Province of Africa, ii. p. 149; Cagnat, Archaeological Explorations in Tunisia (2nd and 3rd fasc., 1885); Lud. Müller, Numismatics of Ancient Africa, ii p. 51; M. Palat, in the Archaeological Bulletin of the Committee for Historical Work (1885), pp. 121 and 150; Archaeological Review (1884 and 1897); Bulletin of African Antiquities (1884 and 1885); Bulletin of the Archaeological Society of Sousse (first published in 1903); Archaeological Atlas of Tunisia (4th fascicle, including the plan of Hadrumetum).

(E. B.*)

HAECKEL, ERNST HEINRICH (1834-  ), German biologist, was born at Potsdam on the 16th of February 1834. He studied medicine and science at Würzburg, Berlin and Vienna, having for his masters such men as Johannes Müller, R. Virchow and R. A. Kölliker, and in 1857 graduated at Berlin as M.D. and M.Ch. At the wish of his father he began to practise as a doctor in that city, but his patients were few in number, one reason being that he did not wish them to be many, and after a short time he turned to more congenial pursuits. In 1861, at the instance of Carl Gegenbaur, he became Privatdozent at Jena; in the succeeding year he was chosen extraordinary professor of comparative anatomy and director of the Zoological Institute in the same university; in 1865 he was appointed to a chair of zoology which was specially established for his benefit. This last position he retained for 43 years, in spite of repeated invitations to migrate to more important centres, such as Strassburg or Vienna, and at Jena he spent his life, with the exception of the time he devoted to travelling in various parts of the world, whence in every case he brought back a rich zoological harvest.

HAECKEL, ERNST HEINRICH (1834-  ), German biologist, was born in Potsdam on February 16, 1834. He studied medicine and science in Würzburg, Berlin, and Vienna, learning from prominent figures like Johannes Müller, R. Virchow, and R. A. Kölliker. In 1857, he graduated from Berlin with an M.D. and M.Ch. At his father's request, he started working as a doctor in Berlin, but he had only a few patients—partly because he didn't want many. Shortly after, he shifted to more enjoyable pursuits. In 1861, following Carl Gegenbaur’s recommendation, he became a Privatdozent at Jena; the following year, he was appointed as an extraordinary professor of comparative anatomy and director of the Zoological Institute at the same university. In 1865, he was given a zoology chair that was specifically created for him. He held this position for 43 years, despite numerous offers to move to more prestigious places like Strassburg or Vienna. He spent his life in Jena, except for the time he traveled around the world, during which he always returned with a wealth of zoological findings.

As a field naturalist Haeckel displayed extraordinary power and industry. Among his monographs may be mentioned those on Radiolaria (1862), Siphonophora (1869), Monera (1870) and Calcareous Sponges (1872), as well as several Challenger reports, viz. Deep-Sea Medusae (1881), Siphonophora (1888), Deep-Sea Keratosa (1889) and Radiolaria (1887), the last being accompanied by 140 plates and enumerating over four thousand new species. This output of systematic and descriptive work would alone have constituted a good life’s work, but Haeckel in addition wrote copiously on biological theory. It happened that just when he was beginning his scientific career Darwin’s Origin of Species was published (1859), and such was the influence it exercised over him that he became the apostle of Darwinism in Germany. He was, indeed, the first German biologist to give a whole-hearted adherence to the doctrine of organic evolution and to treat it as the cardinal conception of modern biology. It was he who first brought it prominently before the notice of German men of science in his first memoir on the Radiolaria, which was completely pervaded with its spirit, and later at the congress of naturalists at Stettin in 1863. Darwin himself has placed on record the conviction that Haeckel’s enthusiastic propagandism of the doctrine was the chief factor of its success in Germany. His book on General Morphology (1866), published when he was only thirty-two years old, was called by Huxley a suggestive attempt to work out the practical application of evolution to its final results; and if it does not take rank as a classic, it will at least stand out as a landmark in the history of biological doctrine in the 19th century. Although it contains a statement of most of the views with which Haeckel’s name is associated, it did not attract much attention on its first appearance, and accordingly its author rewrote much of its substance in a more popular style and published it a year or two later as the Natural History of Creation (Natürliche Schöpfungsgeschichte), which was far more successful. In it he divided morphology into two sections—tectology, the science of organic individuality; and promorphology, which aims at establishing a crystallography of organic forms. Among other matters, he laid particular stress on the “fundamental biogenetic law” that ontogeny recapitulates phylogeny, that the individual organism in its development is to a great extent an epitome of the form-modifications undergone by the successive ancestors of the species in the course of their historic evolution. His well-known “gastraea” theory is an outcome of this generalization. He divided the whole animal creation into two categories—the Protozoa or unicellular animals, and the Metazoa or multicellular animals, and he pointed out that while the former remain single-celled throughout their existence, the latter are only so at the beginning, and are subsequently built up of innumerable cells, the single primitive egg-cell (ovum) being transformed by cleavage into a globular mass of cells (morula), which first becomes a hollow vesicle and then changes into the gastrula. The simplest multicellular animal he conceived to resemble this gastrula with its two primary layers, ectoderm and endoderm, and the earliest hypothetical form of this kind, from which the higher animals might be supposed to be actually descended, he called the “gastraea.” This theory was first put forward in the memoir on the calcareous sponges, which in its sub-title was described as an attempt at an analytical solution of the problem of the origin of species, and was subsequently elaborated in various Studies on the Gastraea Theory (1873-1884). Haeckel, again, was the first to attempt to draw up a genealogical tree (Stammbaum) exhibiting the relationship between the various orders of animals 804 with regard both to one another and their common origin. His earliest attempt in the General Morphology was succeeded by many others, and his efforts in this direction may perhaps be held to culminate in the paper he read before the fourth International Zoological Congress, held at Cambridge in 1898, when he traced the descent of the human race in twenty-six stages from organisms like the still-existing Monera, simple structureless masses of protoplasm, and the unicellular Protista, through the chimpanzees and the Pithecanthropus erectus, of which a few fossil bones were discovered in Java in 1894, and which he held to be undoubtedly an intermediate form connecting primitive man with the anthropoid apes.

As a field naturalist, Haeckel showed remarkable skill and dedication. Some of his notable monographs include those on Radiolaria (1862), Siphonophora (1869), Monera (1870), and Calcareous Sponges (1872), along with several reports from the Challenger expedition, namely Deep-Sea Medusae (1881), Siphonophora (1888), Deep-Sea Keratosa (1889), and Radiolaria (1887), the last of which included 140 plates and described over four thousand new species. This volume of systematic and descriptive work alone would have constituted a significant career, but Haeckel also wrote extensively on biological theory. Coincidentally, just as he was beginning his scientific career, Darwin’s Origin of Species was published (1859), which greatly inspired him to become the champion of Darwinism in Germany. He was, in fact, the first German biologist to fully embrace the concept of organic evolution and to treat it as the core idea of modern biology. He first highlighted this in his memoir on Radiolaria, infused with its essence, and later at the naturalists’ congress in Stettin in 1863. Darwin acknowledged that Haeckel’s passionate advocacy for the doctrine was a key factor in its success in Germany. His book, General Morphology (1866), published when he was just thirty-two, was regarded by Huxley as a thoughtful attempt to apply evolution practically to its ultimate outcomes; while it may not be considered a classic, it remains a significant milestone in 19th-century biological thought. Although it stated most of the concepts associated with Haeckel’s name, it initially received little attention, prompting the author to rewrite much of it in a more accessible style and publish it a year or two later as Natural History of Creation (Natürliche Schöpfungsgeschichte), which was much more successful. In this work, he divided morphology into two sections: tectology, the science of organic individuality, and promorphology, which seeks to establish a crystallography of organic forms. Among other topics, he emphasized the “fundamental biogenetic law” that ontogeny recapitulates phylogeny, arguing that the development of an individual organism largely reflects the form changes experienced by its ancestors throughout their evolutionary history. His famous “gastraea” theory stems from this generalization. He classified all animal life into two groups: the Protozoa or unicellular animals, and the Metazoa or multicellular animals, noting that while Protozoa remain single-celled throughout their lives, Metazoa are initially single-celled but later develop into complex structures made of countless cells, with the single primitive egg cell (ovum) transforming through cleavage into a mass of cells (morula), which first becomes a hollow vesicle and then evolves into the gastrula. He envisioned the simplest multicellular animals as resembling this gastrula with its two main layers, ectoderm and endoderm, and he named the earliest hypothetical form that higher animals might have descended from the “gastraea.” This theory was first introduced in his memoir on calcareous sponges, which was subtitled as an analytical attempt to solve the problem of species origin, and was later expanded in various Studies on the Gastraea Theory (1873-1884). Additionally, Haeckel was the first to attempt to create a genealogical tree (Stammbaum) showing the relationships between different animal orders concerning one another and their common ancestry. His initial try in General Morphology was followed by many others, culminating in a paper he presented at the fourth International Zoological Congress held in Cambridge in 1898, where he traced the evolution of the human race in twenty-six stages from organisms like the still-existing Monera, simple structureless masses of protoplasm, and the unicellular Protista, through chimpanzees and Pithecanthropus erectus, of which a few fossil bones were found in Java in 1894, which he considered a clear intermediate form linking primitive humans with anthropoid apes.

Not content with the study of the doctrine of evolution in its zoological aspects, Haeckel also applied it to some of the oldest problems of philosophy and religion. What he termed the integration of his views on these subjects he published under the title of Die Welträtsel (1899), which in 1901 appeared in English as The Riddle of the Universe. In this book, adopting an uncompromising monistic attitude, he asserted the essential unity of organic and inorganic nature. According to his “carbon-theory,” which has been far from achieving general acceptance, the chemico-physical properties of carbon in its complex albuminoid compounds are the sole and the mechanical cause of the specific phenomena of movement which distinguish organic from inorganic substances, and the first development of living protoplasm, as seen in the Monera, arises from such nitrogenous carbon-compounds by a process of spontaneous generation. Psychology he regarded as merely a branch of physiology, and psychical activity as a group of vital phenomena which depend solely on physiological actions and material changes taking place in the protoplasm of the organism in which it is manifested. Every living cell has psychic properties, and the psychic life of multicellular organisms is the sum-total of the psychic functions of the cells of which they are composed. Moreover, just as the highest animals have been evolved from the simplest forms of life, so the highest faculties of the human mind have been evolved from the soul of the brute-beasts, and more remotely from the simple cell-soul of the unicellular Protozoa. As a consequence of these views Haeckel was led to deny the immortality of the soul, the freedom of the will, and the existence of a personal God.

Not satisfied with just studying evolution from a biological perspective, Haeckel also applied it to some of the oldest questions in philosophy and religion. He published what he called the integration of his views on these topics under the title of Die Welträtsel (1899), which was released in English as The Riddle of the Universe in 1901. In this book, taking a firm monistic stance, he claimed that organic and inorganic nature are fundamentally unified. According to his "carbon-theory," which hasn't gained widespread acceptance, the chemical and physical properties of carbon in its complex protein compounds are the only mechanical cause of the specific movements that separate organic from inorganic substances. He argued that the first emergence of living protoplasm, as seen in the Monera, comes from nitrogenous carbon compounds through a process of spontaneous generation. He viewed psychology merely as a branch of physiology, with mental activity being a collection of life processes that rely solely on physiological actions and material changes happening in the organism's protoplasm. Every living cell has mental properties, and the psychic life of multicellular organisms is just the total of the mental functions of their individual cells. Furthermore, just as advanced animals have evolved from the simplest life forms, the highest human mental abilities arose from the instincts of animals and, even more distantly, from the simple cell-soul of unicellular protozoa. As a result of these beliefs, Haeckel rejected the immortality of the soul, the freedom of the will, and the existence of a personal God.

Haeckel’s literary output was enormous, and at the time of the celebration of his sixtieth birthday at Jena in 1894 he had produced 42 works with 13,000 pages, besides numerous scientific memoirs. In addition to the works already mentioned, he wrote Freie Wissenschaft und freie Lehre (1877) in reply to a speech in which Virchow objected to the teaching of the doctrine of evolution in schools, on the ground that it was an unproved hypothesis; Die systematische Phylogenie (1894), which has been pronounced his best book; Anthropogenie (1874, 5th and enlarged edition 1903), dealing with the evolution of man; Über unsere gegenwärtige Kenntnis vom Ursprung des Menschen (1898, translated into English as The Last Link, 1898); Der Kampf um den Entwickelungsgedanken (1905, English version, Last Words on Evolution, 1906); Die Lebenswunder (1904), a supplement to the Riddle of the Universe; books of travel, such as Indische Reisebriefe (1882) and Aus Insulinde (1901), the fruits of journeys to Ceylon and to Java; Kunstformen der Natur (1904), with plates representing beautiful marine animal forms; and Wanderbilder (1905), reproductions of his oil-paintings and water-colour landscapes.

Haeckel’s literary output was vast, and by the time of his sixtieth birthday celebration in Jena in 1894, he had produced 42 works totaling 13,000 pages, along with numerous scientific papers. Besides the works already mentioned, he wrote Freie Wissenschaft und freie Lehre (1877) in response to a speech where Virchow argued against teaching the theory of evolution in schools, claiming it was an unproven hypothesis; Die systematische Phylogenie (1894), regarded as his best book; Anthropogenie (1874, expanded 5th edition in 1903), which explores human evolution; Über unsere gegenwärtige Kenntnis vom Ursprung des Menschen (1898, translated into English as The Last Link, 1898); Der Kampf um den Entwickelungsgedanken (1905, English version titled Last Words on Evolution, 1906); Die Lebenswunder (1904), a supplement to the Riddle of the Universe; travel books like Indische Reisebriefe (1882) and Aus Insulinde (1901), resulting from trips to Ceylon and Java; Kunstformen der Natur (1904), featuring plates of stunning marine animal forms; and Wanderbilder (1905), showcasing reproductions of his oil paintings and watercolor landscapes.

There are biographies by W. Bölsche (Dresden, 1900, translated into English by Joseph McCabe, with additions, London, 1906) and by Breitenbach (Odenkirchen, 1904). See also Walther May, Ernst Haeckel; Versuch einer Chronik seines Lebens und Werkens (Leipzig, 1909).

There are biographies by W. Bölsche (Dresden, 1900, translated into English by Joseph McCabe, with additions, London, 1906) and by Breitenbach (Odenkirchen, 1904). See also Walther May, Ernst Haeckel; Attempt at a Chronicle of His Life and Work (Leipzig, 1909).


Fig. 1.
Fig. 2.

HAEMATITE, or Hematite, a mineral consisting of ferric oxide (Fe2O3), named from the Greek word αἷμα “blood,” in allusion to its typical colour, whence it is called also red iron ore. When crystallized, however, haematite often presents a dark colour, even iron-black; but on scratching the surface, the powder of the streak shows the colour of dried blood. Haematite crystallizes in the rhombohedral system, and is isomorphous with corundum (Al2O3). The habit of the crystals may be rhombohedral, pyramidal or tabular, rarely prismatic. In fig. 1 the crystal, from Elba, shows a combination of the fundamental rhombohedron (R), an obtuse rhombohedron (s), and the hexagonal bi-pyramid (n). Fig. 2 is a tabular crystal in which the basal pinacoid (o) predominates. Haematite has no distinct cleavage, but may show, in consequence of a lamellar structure, a tendency to parting along certain planes.

HAEMATITE, or Hematite, is a mineral made of ferric oxide (Fe2O3), named after the Greek word blood meaning “blood,” referring to its typical color, which is why it's also called red iron ore. When it crystallizes, hematite often appears dark, sometimes even black; however, when you scratch the surface, the powder shows a color similar to dried blood. Hematite crystallizes in the rhombohedral system and is isomorphic with corundum (Al2O3). The crystals can be rhombohedral, pyramidal, or tabular, but rarely prismatic. In fig. 1, the crystal from Elba shows a combination of the basic rhombohedron (R), an obtuse rhombohedron (s), and the hexagonal bi-pyramid (n). Fig. 2 displays a tabular crystal where the basal pinacoid (o) is dominant. Hematite doesn't have distinct cleavage but may exhibit a tendency to break along certain planes due to its lamellar structure.

Crystallized haematite, such as that from the iron-mines of Elba, presents a steel-grey or iron-black colour, with a brilliant metallic lustre, sometimes beautifully iridescent. The splendent surface has suggested for this mineral such names as specular iron ore, looking-glass ore, and iron glance (fer oligiste of French writers). The hardness of the crystallized haematite is about 6, and the specific gravity 5.2. The so-called “iron roses” (Eisenrosen) of Switzerland are rosette-like aggregates of hexagonal tabular crystals, from fissures in the gneissose rocks of the Alps. Specular iron ore occurs in the form of brilliant metallic scales on many lavas, as at Vesuvius and Etna, in the Auvergne and the Eifel, and notably in the Island of Ascension, where the mineral forms beautiful tabular crystals. It seems to be a sublimation-product formed in volcanoes by the interaction of the vapour of ferric chloride and steam.

Crystallized hematite, like that from the iron mines of Elba, displays a steel-grey or iron-black color with a brilliant metallic shine, sometimes showing beautiful iridescence. This shiny surface has led to names for this mineral such as specular iron ore, looking-glass ore, and iron glance (fer oligiste in French). The hardness of crystallized hematite is around 6, and its specific gravity is 5.2. The so-called “iron roses” (Eisenrosen) of Switzerland are rosette-like clusters of hexagonal tabular crystals found in fissures of the gneissose rocks of the Alps. Specular iron ore appears as shiny metallic flakes on many lava flows, such as those at Vesuvius and Etna, in the Auvergne and the Eifel, and especially in the Island of Ascension, where the mineral forms stunning tabular crystals. It seems to be a sublimation product created in volcanoes through the interaction of ferric chloride vapor and steam.

Specular haematite forms a constituent of certain schistose rocks, such as the Brazilian itabirite. In the Marquette district of Michigan (Lake Superior) schistose specular ore occurs in important deposits, associated with a jasper rock, in which the ore alternates with bands of red quartzite. Micaceous iron ore consists of delicate steel-grey scales of specular haematite, unctuous to the touch, used as a lubricant and also as a pigment. It is worked in Devonshire under the name of shining ore. Very thin laminae of haematite, blood-red by transmitted light, occur as microscopic enclosures in certain minerals, such as carnallite and sun-stone, to which they impart colour and lustre.

Specular haematite is part of certain schist rocks, like the Brazilian itabirite. In the Marquette area of Michigan (Lake Superior), schistose specular ore can be found in significant deposits, associated with jasper rock, where the ore alternates with layers of red quartzite. Micaceous iron ore consists of fine steel-grey scales of specular haematite that feel smooth to the touch, used as a lubricant and a pigment. In Devonshire, it is referred to as shining ore. Very thin layers of haematite, which look blood-red when light passes through them, occur as tiny inclusions in some minerals, like carnallite and sunstone, giving them color and shine.

Much haematite occurs in a compact or massive form, often mammillary, and presenting on fracture a fibrous structure. The reniform masses are known as kidney ore. Such red ore is generally neither so dense nor so hard as the crystals. It often passes into an earthy form, termed soft red ore, and when mixed with more or less clay constitutes red ochre, ruddle or reddle (Ger. Rötel).

Much hematite occurs in a compact or massive form, often with a mammillary texture, and shows a fibrous structure when fractured. The reniform masses are called kidney ore. This red ore is usually not as dense or hard as the crystals. It often turns into an earthy form known as soft red ore, and when mixed with varying amounts of clay, it becomes red ochre, ruddle, or reddle (Ger. Rötel).

The hard haematite is occasionally cut and polished as an ornamental stone, and certain kinds have been made into beads simulating black pearls. It was worked by the Assyrians for their engraved cylinder-seals, and was used by the gnostics for amulets. Some of the native tribes in the Congo basin employ it as a material for axes. The hard fibrous ore of Cumberland is known as pencil ore, and is employed for the burnishers used by bookbinders and others. Santiago de Compostela in Spain furnishes a considerable supply of haematite burnishers.

The hard hematite is sometimes cut and polished as a decorative stone, and certain types have been made into beads that imitate black pearls. The Assyrians used it for their engraved cylinder seals, and the Gnostics crafted it into amulets. Some indigenous tribes in the Congo Basin use it to make axes. The hard fibrous ore from Cumberland is called pencil ore and is used for the burnishers by bookbinders and others. Santiago de Compostela in Spain provides a significant supply of hematite burnishers.

Haematite is an important ore of iron (q.v.), and is extensively worked in Elba, Spain (Bilbao), Scandinavia, the Lake Superior region and elsewhere. In England valuable deposits occur in the Carboniferous Limestone of west Cumberland (Whitehaven district) and north Lancashire (Ulverston district). The hard ore is siliceous, and fine crystallized specimens occur in association with smoky quartz. The ore is remarkably free from phosphorus, and is consequently valued for the production of pig-iron to be converted into Bessemer steel.

Haematite is an important iron ore (q.v.) and is widely mined in Elba, Spain (Bilbao), Scandinavia, the Lake Superior region, and other locations. In England, there are significant deposits in the Carboniferous Limestone of west Cumberland (Whitehaven district) and north Lancashire (Ulverston district). The hard ore is siliceous, and finely crystallized specimens can be found alongside smoky quartz. This ore is notably low in phosphorus, making it highly valued for producing pig iron that is turned into Bessemer steel.

(F. W. R.*)

HAEMATOCELE (Gr. αἷμα, blood, and κήλη, tumour), the medical term for a localized collection of blood in the tunica vaginalis or cord. It is usually the result of a sudden blow or severe strain, but may arise from disease. At first it forms a smooth, fluctuating, opaque swelling, but later becomes hard and firm. In chronic cases the walls of the tunica vaginalis 805 undergo changes. The treatment of a case seen soon after the injury is directed towards keeping the patient at rest, elevating the parts, and applying an evaporating lotion or ice-bag. In chronic cases it may be necessary to lay open the cavity and remove the coagulum.

HAEMATOCELE (Gr. blood, blood, and Hernia, tumor), is the medical term for a localized pool of blood in the tunica vaginalis or cord. It's usually caused by a sudden impact or intense strain, but it can also result from illness. Initially, it appears as a smooth, shifting, opaque swelling, but over time it becomes hard and solid. In chronic cases, the walls of the tunica vaginalis 805 undergo changes. The treatment for a case seen soon after the injury focuses on keeping the patient at rest, elevating the affected area, and using an evaporating lotion or ice pack. In chronic cases, it might be necessary to surgically open the cavity and remove the clot.


HAEMOPHILIA, the medical term for a condition of the vascular system, often running in families, the members of which are known as “bleeders,” characterized by a disposition towards bleeding, whether with or without the provocation of an injury to the tissue. When this bleeding is spontaneous it comes from the mucous membranes, especially from the nose, but also from the mouth, bowel and bronchial tubes. Slight bruises are apt to be followed by extravasations of blood into the tissues; the swollen joints (knee especially) of a bleeder are probably due, in the first instance, to the escape of blood into the joint cavity or synovial membrane. It is always from the smallest vessels that the blood escapes, and may do so in such quantities as to cause death in a few hours.

HAEMOPHILIA, is the medical term for a condition affecting the vascular system, often running in families, with affected individuals referred to as “bleeders.” It’s characterized by a tendency to bleed, either with or without an injury to the tissue. When bleeding occurs spontaneously, it primarily comes from the mucous membranes, especially the nose, but can also originate from the mouth, bowel, and bronchial tubes. Minor bruises often lead to blood leaking into the surrounding tissues; swollen joints (particularly the knee) in a bleeder are likely due to blood escaping into the joint cavity or synovial membrane. Blood typically escapes from the smallest vessels, and this can occur in such amounts that it may lead to death within a few hours.


HAEMORRHAGE (Gr. αἷμα, blood, and ῥηγνύναι, to burst), a general term for any escape of blood from a blood-vessel (see Blood). It commonly results from injury, as the tearing or cutting of a blood-vessel, but certain forms result from disease, as in scurvy and purpura. The chief varieties of haemorrhage are arterial, venous and capillary. Bleeding from an artery is of a bright red colour, and escapes from the end of the vessel nearest the heart in jets synchronous with the heart’s beat. Bleeding from a vein is of a darker colour; the flow is steady, and the bleeding is from the distal end of the vessel. Capillary bleeding is a general oozing from a raw surface. By extravasation of blood is meant the pouring out of blood into the areolar tissues, which become boggy. This is termed a bruise or ecchymosis. Epistaxis is a term given to bleeding from the nose. Haematemesis is vomiting of blood, the colour of which may be altered by digestion, as is also the case in melaena, or passage of blood with the faeces, in which the blood becomes dark and tarry-looking from the action of the intestinal fluids. Haemoptysis denotes an escape of blood from the air-passages, which is usually bright red and frothy from admixture with air. Haematuria means passage of blood with the urine.

BLEEDING (Gr. blood, blood, and ῥηγνύναι, to burst), a general term for any escape of blood from a blood vessel (see Blood). It usually happens due to injury, like tearing or cutting of a blood vessel, but some forms are caused by disease, such as in scurvy and purpura. The main types of haemorrhage are arterial, venous, and capillary. Bleeding from an artery is bright red and comes out in jets from the end of the vessel closest to the heart, matching the heartbeat. Bleeding from a vein has a darker color; the flow is steady and comes from the far end of the vessel. Capillary bleeding is a general ooze from a raw surface. By extravasation of blood, we mean the release of blood into the surrounding tissues, which then become swollen and boggy. This is called a bruise or ecchymosis. Epistaxis refers to bleeding from the nose. Haematemesis is the vomiting of blood, which may change color due to digestion, similar to melaena, where blood passes with the feces and appears dark and tarry from the intestinal fluids. Haemoptysis indicates blood escaping from the air passages, usually appearing bright red and frothy due to mixing with air. Haematuria means blood in the urine.

Cessation of bleeding may take place from natural or from artificial means. Natural arrest of haemorrhage arises from (1) the coagulation of the blood itself, (2) the diminution of the heart’s action as in fainting, (3) changes taking place in the cut vessel causing its retraction and contraction. In the surgical treatment of haemorrhage minor means of arresting bleeding are: cold, which is most valuable in general oozing and local extravasations; very hot water, 130° to 160° F., a powerful haemostatic; position, such as elevation of the limb, valuable in bleeding from the extremities; styptics or astringents, applied locally, as perchloride of iron, tannic acid and others, the most valuable being suprarenal extract. In arresting haemorrhage temporarily the chief thing is to press directly on the bleeding part. The pressure to be effectual need not be severe, but must be accurately applied. If the bleeding point cannot be reached, the pressure should be applied to the main artery between the bleeding point and the heart. In small blood-vessels pressure will be sufficient to arrest haemorrhage permanently. In large vessels it is usual to pass a ligature round the vessel and tie it with a reef-knot. Apply the ligature, if possible, at the bleeding point, tying both ends of the cut vessel. If this cannot be done, the main artery of the limb must be exposed by dissection at the most accessible point between the wound and the heart, and there ligatured.

Cessation of bleeding can happen through natural or artificial means. Natural stopping of bleeding occurs due to (1) the blood clotting itself, (2) reduced heart activity as seen in fainting, (3) changes in the cut vessel that lead to its retraction and contraction. In surgical treatment of bleeding, minor methods for stopping hemorrhage include: cold, which is very effective for general oozing and local pooling; very hot water, between 130° to 160° F., a strong way to control bleeding; positioning, like elevating the limb, useful for bleeding from the extremities; and styptics or astringents applied locally, such as perchloride of iron, tannic acid, and others, with suprarenal extract being the most effective. To temporarily stop bleeding, the key action is to apply direct pressure on the bleeding area. The pressure doesn't need to be intense but must be applied accurately. If the bleeding point can't be reached, pressure should be applied to the main artery between the bleeding point and the heart. For small blood vessels, pressure alone can stop the bleeding permanently. For large vessels, it’s common to place a ligature around the vessel and tie it with a reef knot. The ligature should, if possible, be applied at the bleeding point, tying both ends of the cut vessel. If that’s not feasible, the main artery of the limb must be exposed by dissection at the most accessible spot between the wound and the heart and ligated there.

Haemorrhage has been classified as—(1) primary, occurring at the time of the injury; (2) reactionary, or within twenty-four hours of the accident, during the stage of reaction; (3) secondary, occurring at a later period and caused by faulty application of a ligature or septic condition of the wound. In severe haemorrhage, as from the division of a large artery, the patient may collapse and death ensue from syncope. In this case stimulants and strychnine may be given, but they should be avoided until it is certain the bleeding has been properly controlled, as they tend to increase it. Transfusion of blood directly from the vein of a healthy person to the blood-vessels of the patient, and infusion of saline solution into a vein, may be practised (see Shock). In a congenital condition known as haemophylia (q.v.) it is difficult to stop the flow of blood.

Haemorrhage is classified as follows: (1) primary, which occurs at the time of the injury; (2) reactionary, happening within twenty-four hours of the accident during the reaction phase; and (3) secondary, which occurs later due to improper application of a ligature or infection in the wound. In cases of severe haemorrhage, such as from a major artery being cut, the patient may faint and could die from shock. In this situation, stimulants and strychnine can be administered, but they should be avoided until it's confirmed that the bleeding has been effectively controlled, as they can actually worsen it. Blood transfusion directly from a healthy person’s vein to the patient's blood vessels, as well as saline solution infusion into a vein, can be performed (see Shock). In a congenital condition known as haemophilia (q.v.), it is challenging to stop the bleeding.

The surgical procedure for the treatment of an open wound is—(1) arrest of haemorrhage; (2) cleansing of the wound and removal of any foreign bodies; (3) careful apposition of its edges and surfaces—the edges being best brought in contact by sutures of aseptic silk or catgut, the surfaces by carefully applied pressure; (4) free drainage, if necessary, to prevent accumulation either of blood or serous effusion; (5) avoidance of sepsis; (6) perfect rest of the part. These methods of treatment require to be modified for wounds in special situations and for those in which there is much contusion and laceration. When a special poison has entered the wound at the time of its infliction or at some subsequent date, it is necessary to provide against septic conditions of the wound itself and blood-poisoning of the general circulation.

The surgical procedure for treating an open wound involves: (1) stopping any bleeding; (2) cleaning the wound and removing any foreign objects; (3) carefully bringing the edges and surfaces together—using aseptic silk or catgut sutures for the edges, and applying pressure for the surfaces; (4) ensuring free drainage if necessary, to prevent the buildup of blood or fluid; (5) preventing infection; and (6) allowing the area to rest completely. These treatment methods need to be adjusted for wounds in specific locations and those that have significant bruising and tearing. If a specific poison has entered the wound at the time of injury or later, it's crucial to take precautions against infection in the wound and blood poisoning in the overall system.


HAEMORRHOIDS, or Hemorrhoids (from Gr. αἷμα, blood, and ῥεῖν, to flow), commonly called piles, swellings formed by the dilatation of veins of the lowest part of the bowel, or of those just outside the margin of its aperture. The former, internal piles, are covered by mucous membrane; the latter, external piles, are just beneath the skin. As the veins of the lining of the bowel become dilated they form definite bulgings within the bowel, and, at last increasing in size, escape through the anus when a motion is being passed. Growing still larger, they may come down spontaneously when the individual is standing or walking, and they are apt to be a grave source of pain or annoyance. Eventually they may remain constantly protruded—nevertheless, they are still internal piles because they arise from the interior of the bowel. Though a pile is sometimes solitary, there are usually several of them. They are apt to become inflamed, and the inflammation is associated with heat, pain, discharge and general uneasiness; ulceration and bleeding are also common symptoms, hence the term “bleeding piles.” The external pile is covered by the thin dark-coloured skin of the anal margin. Severe pressure upon the large abdominal veins may retard the upward flow of blood to the heart and so give rise to piles; this is apt to happen in the case of disease of the liver, malignant and other tumours, and pregnancy. General weakness of the constitution or of the blood-vessels and habitual constipation may be predisposing causes of piles. The exciting cause may be vigorous straining at stool or exposure to damp, as from sitting on the wet ground. Piles are often only a symptom, and in their treatment this fact should be kept in view; if the cause is removed the piles may disappear. But in some cases it may be impossible to remove the cause, as when a widely-spreading cancerous growth of the rectum, or of the interior of the pelvis or abdomen, is blocking the upward flow of blood in the veins. Sometimes when a pile has been protruded, as during defaecation, it is tightly grasped by spasmodic contraction of the circular muscular fibres which guard the outlet of the bowel, and it then becomes swollen, engorged and extremely painful; the strangulation may be so severe that the blood in the vessels coagulates and the pile mortifies. This, indeed, is nature’s attempt at curing a pile, but it is distressing, and, as a rule, it is not entirely successful.

HAEMORRHOIDS, or Hemorrhoids (from Gr. blood, blood, and ῥεῖν, to flow), commonly called piles, are swellings caused by the enlargement of veins in the lower part of the bowel or just outside its opening. The former, known as internal piles, are covered by mucous membrane; the latter, called external piles, are just beneath the skin. When the veins in the bowel lining enlarge, they create noticeable bulges inside the bowel, which can eventually increase in size and protrude through the anus during a bowel movement. If they grow larger, they may drop down on their own when a person is standing or walking, often leading to significant pain or discomfort. They may eventually stay protruded all the time—yet they are still considered internal piles since they originate from within the bowel. While a pile can sometimes be singular, there are usually many. They can become inflamed, leading to symptoms like heat, pain, discharge, and general discomfort; ulceration and bleeding are also common, hence the term “bleeding piles.” The external pile is covered by the thin, dark skin at the edge of the anus. Heavy pressure on the large abdominal veins can hinder blood flow back to the heart, potentially causing piles; this can occur with liver disease, malignant tumors, or during pregnancy. Overall weakness in the body or blood vessels, along with chronic constipation, can contribute to the development of piles. The immediate trigger could be strenuous straining during bowel movements or exposure to dampness, such as sitting on wet ground. Piles often serve as a symptom, and it's important to keep this in mind during treatment; if the underlying cause is addressed, the piles may go away. However, sometimes it’s impossible to eliminate the cause, like in cases where widespread cancer in the rectum or pelvic region is blocking blood flow in the veins. Occasionally, when a pile protrudes during a bowel movement, it can be tightly squeezed by spasmodic contractions of the circular muscles around the bowel opening, causing it to swell, become engorged, and become extremely painful; the pressure can be so intense that it causes blood in the vessels to clot and the pile to die off. This is essentially nature's way of trying to treat the pile, but it can be distressing and is typically not entirely effective.

The palliative treatment of piles consists in obtaining a daily and easy action of the bowels, in rest, cold bathing, astringent injections, lotions and ointments. The radical treatment consists in their removal by operation, but this should not be contemplated until palliative treatment has failed. The operation consists in drawing the pile well down, and strangling the vessels entering and leaving its base, either by a strong ligature tightly applied, by crushing, or by cautery. Before dealing with the pile the anus is vigorously dilated in order that the pile may be dealt with with greater precision, and also that the temporary paralysis of the sphincter muscle, which follows the stretching, may prevent the occurrence of painful and spasmodic contractions subsequently. The ligatures by which the base of the piles are strangulated 806 slough off with the pile in about ten days, and in about ten days more the individual is, as a rule, well enough to return to his work. If, for one reason or another, no operation is to be undertaken, and the piles are troublesome, relief may be afforded by warm sponging and by sitz-baths, the pile being gently dried afterwards by a piece of soft linen, smeared with vaseline, and carefully returned into the bowel. Under surgical advice, cocaine or morphia may be brought in contact with the tender parts, either in the form of lotion, suppository or ointment. In operating upon internal piles it is undesirable to remove all the external piles around the anus, lest the contraction of the circumferential scar should cause permanent narrowing of the orifice. If, as often happens, blood clots in the vein of an external pile, the small, hard, tender swelling may be treated with anodyne fomentations, or it may be rendered insensitive by the ether spray and opened by a small incision, the clot being turned out.

The palliative treatment for hemorrhoids involves ensuring daily and easy bowel movements, along with rest, cold baths, and the use of astringent injections, lotions, and ointments. The definitive treatment is surgical removal, but this should only be considered after palliative measures have failed. The procedure involves pulling down the hemorrhoid and cutting off the blood vessels at its base with a strong ligature, crushing, or cautery. Before addressing the hemorrhoid, the anus is stretched to allow for more precise treatment and to temporarily paralyze the sphincter muscle, which helps prevent painful spasms later. The ligatures that strangle the base of the hemorrhoids generally dissolve along with the hemorrhoid in about ten days, and after about ten more days, the patient is usually able to return to work. If surgery isn’t an option for any reason and the hemorrhoids are bothersome, relief can be found through warm compresses and sitz baths, with the hemorrhoid being gently dried afterward using a soft cloth coated with Vaseline, and carefully put back into the bowel. Under medical guidance, cocaine or morphine may be applied to the sensitive areas, either as a lotion, suppository, or ointment. When surgically treating internal hemorrhoids, it’s not advisable to remove all external hemorrhoids around the anus, as this contraction can lead to permanent narrowing of the opening. If, as often occurs, a blood clot forms in the vein of an external hemorrhoid, the small, hard, tender lump can be treated with soothing compresses, or it can be numbed with an ether spray and opened with a small incision to remove the clot.

(E. O.*)

HAEMOSPORIDIA, in zoology, an order of Ectospora, which although comparatively few in number and very inconspicuous in size and appearance, have of late years probably attracted greater attention and been more generally studied than any other Sporozoa; the reason being that they include the organisms well known as malarial parasites. In spite, however, of much and careful recent research—to a certain extent, rather, as a result of it—it remains the case that the Haemosporidia are, in some respects, the group of the Ectospora about which our knowledge is, for the time being, in the most unsatisfactory condition. Such important questions, indeed, as the scope and boundaries of the group, its exact origin and affinities, the rank and interclassification of the forms admittedly included in it, are answered quite differently by different workers. For example, one well-known Sporozoan authority (M. Lühe) has recently united the two groups, Haemosporidia and Haemoflagellates, bodily into one, while others (e.g. Novy and McNeal) deny that there is any connexion whatever between “Cytozoa” and Trypanosomes. Again, the inclusion or exclusion of forms like Piroplasma and Halteridium is also the subject of much discussion. The present writer accepts here the view that the Haemosporidia are derived from Haemoflagellates which have developed a gregariniform (Sporozoan) phase at the expense, largely or entirely, of the flagelliform one. The not inconsiderable differences met with among different types are capable of explanation on the ground that certain forms have advanced farther than others along this particular line of evolution. In other words, it is most probable that the Haemosporidia are to be regarded as comprising various parasites which represent different stages intermediate between, on the one side, a Flagellate, and on the other, a typical chlamydospore-forming Ectosporan parasite. While, however, it is easy enough sharply to separate off all Haemosporidia from other Ectospora, it is a very difficult matter to define their limits on the former side. Two principal criteria which a doubtful haemal parasite might very well be required to satisfy in order to be considered as a Haemosporidian rather than a Haemoflagellate are (a) the occurrence of schizogony during the “corpuscular” phase in the Vertebrate host, and (b) the formation of many germs (“sporozoites”) from the zygote; so long as these conditions were complied with, the present writer, at all events, would not feel he was countenancing any protozoological heresy in allowing for the possibility of a Flagellate (perhaps trypaniform) phase or features being present at some period or other in the life-cycle.1 To render this article complete, however, one or two well-known parasites, hitherto referred to this order, must also be mentioned, which, judged by the above (arbitrary) standard, are, it may be, on the Haemoflagellate side of the dividing line (e.g. Halteridium, according to Schaudinn).

HAEMOSPORIDIA, in zoology, is an order of Ectospora. Although there are relatively few of them and they are quite small and inconspicuous, recently they've attracted more attention and been studied more than any other Sporozoa, primarily because they include the well-known malarial parasites. Despite extensive and thorough recent research—which has sometimes led to more confusion—our understanding of Haemosporidia remains, in some ways, the least satisfactory among the Ectospora. Important questions concerning the group's scope and limits, its exact origins and relationships, as well as the classification of the forms included in it, are answered inconsistently by different researchers. For instance, a prominent Sporozoan expert (M. Lühe) has recently merged the Haemosporidia and Haemoflagellates into one group, while others (e.g., Novy and McNeal) argue there is no connection at all between “Cytozoa” and Trypanosomes. Additionally, the inclusion or exclusion of forms such as Piroplasma and Halteridium is also widely debated. The author of this text believes that Haemosporidia evolved from Haemoflagellates which developed a gregariniform (Sporozoan) phase while largely or completely losing the flagelliform one. The significant differences observed among various types can be explained by the fact that some forms have evolved further than others in this specific evolutionary path. In simpler terms, Haemosporidia likely include various parasites that represent different stages between, on one side, a Flagellate and, on the other, a typical chlamydospore-forming Ectosporan parasite. While it is relatively straightforward to distinguish all Haemosporidia from other Ectospora, defining their limits on the former side is quite challenging. Two main criteria that a questionable haemal parasite might need to meet to be classified as a Haemosporidian rather than a Haemoflagellate are (a) the occurrence of schizogony during the “corpuscular” phase in the Vertebrate host, and (b) the production of many germs (“sporozoites”) from the zygote. As long as these conditions are met, the author doesn't feel they would be endorsing any protozoological misconception by acknowledging the possibility of a Flagellate (perhaps trypaniform) phase or characteristics at some point in the life-cycle.1 To make this article complete, however, a couple of well-known parasites, previously categorized under this order, must also be mentioned, which, based on the above (arbitrary) criteria, may actually fall on the Haemoflagellate side of the dividing line (e.g., Halteridium, according to Schaudinn).

The chief characters which distinguish the Haemosporidia from other Ectospora are the following. They are invariably blood parasites, and for part or all of the trophic period come into intimate relation with the cellular elements in the blood. There is always an alternation of hosts and of generations, an Invertebrate being the definitive host, in which sexual conjugation is undergone and which is to be regarded as the primary one, a Vertebrate being the intermediate or secondary one. The zygote or sporont is at first capable of movement and known as an ookinete. No resistant spores (chlamydospores) are formed, the ultimate germs or sporozoites always being free in the oocyst and not enclosed by sporocysts.

The main features that set the Haemosporidia apart from other Ectospora are as follows. They are always blood parasites and, for part or the entire trophic period, they have a close relationship with the cellular elements in the blood. There is always a switch between hosts and generations, with an Invertebrate serving as the definitive host, where sexual reproduction occurs and which is considered the primary host, while a Vertebrate acts as the intermediate or secondary host. The zygote or sporont is initially capable of movement and is known as an ookinete. No resistant spores (chlamydospores) are produced; the ultimate germs or sporozoites are always free within the oocyst and not surrounded by sporocysts.

To Sir E. Ray Lankester is due the honour of discovering the first Haemosporidian, a discovery which did not take place until after most of the other kinds of Sporozoa were known. In 1871 this author described the parasite of the frog, which he later termed Drepanidium ranarum. The next discovery was the great and far-reaching one of Laveran, who in 1883 described all the characteristic phases of the malarial parasite which are met with in human blood. While regarding the organism as the cause of the disease, Laveran did not at once recognize its animal and Sporozoan nature, but considered it rather as a vegetable, and termed it Oscillaria malariae. As in the case of the Trypanosomes, we owe to Danilewsky (1885-1889) the first serious attempts to study the comparative anatomy and life-history of these parasites, from a zoological point of view. Danilewsky first named them Haemosporidia, and distinguished between Haemocytozoa and Leucocytozoa. To the brilliant researches of R. Ross and Grassi in the closing years of the 19th century is due the realization of the essential part played by the gnat or mosquito in the life-cycle and transmission of the parasites; and to MacCallum belongs the credit of first observing the true sexual conjugation, in the case of a Halteridium. Since then, thanks to the labours of Argutinsky and Schaudinn, our knowledge of the malarial parasites has steadily increased. Until quite recently, however, very little was known about the Haemosporidia of cold-blooded Vertebrates; but in 1903 Siegel and Schaudinn demonstrated that the same rôle is performed in their case by a leech or a tick, and since then many new forms have been described.

To Sir E. Ray Lankester goes the credit for discovering the first Haemosporidian, a finding that came after most other types of Sporozoa were already known. In 1871, he described the parasite of the frog, which he later named Drepanidium ranarum. The next major discovery was by Laveran, who in 1883 detailed all the characteristic phases of the malarial parasite found in human blood. Although Laveran identified the organism as the cause of the disease, he didn't recognize its animal and Sporozoan nature right away, viewing it instead as a plant and calling it Oscillaria malariae. Similar to the case of Trypanosomes, we owe Danilewsky (1885-1889) the first significant attempts to study the comparative anatomy and life cycle of these parasites from a zoological perspective. Danilewsky first referred to them as Haemosporidia and differentiated between Haemocytozoa and Leucocytozoa. The remarkable research of R. Ross and Grassi in the late 19th century led to the understanding of the crucial role played by the gnat or mosquito in the life cycle and transmission of the parasites. MacCallum deserves credit for being the first to observe true sexual conjugation in a Halteridium. Since then, thanks to the work of Argutinsky and Schaudinn, our knowledge of malarial parasites has steadily expanded. However, until quite recently, very little was known about the Haemosporidia of cold-blooded vertebrates. In 1903, Siegel and Schaudinn showed that a leech or a tick performs a similar role in their case, and since then, many new forms have been described.

The Haemosporidia are widely distributed and of very general occurrence among the chief classes of Vertebrates. Among Invertebrates they are apparently limited to bloodsucking insects, ticks and leeches.2 As already stated, Occurrence: habitat; effects on host. the universal habitat of the parasites in the Vertebrate is the blood; as a result, of course, they are to be met with in the capillaries of practically all the important organs of the body; and it is to be noted that while certain phases (e.g. growing trophozoites, mature gametocytes) are found in the peripheral circulation, others (e.g. schizogonous “rosettes,” young gametocytes) occur in the internal organs, liver, kidneys, &c., where the circulation is sluggish. The relation of the parasites to the blood-cells varies greatly. Most attack, probably exclusively, the red blood corpuscles (haematids); a few, however, select the leucocytes, and are therefore known as Leucocytozoa. In the case of Mammalian and Avian forms (malarial parasites) Schaudinn and Argutinsky have shown that the trophic and schizogonic phases are not really endoglobular but closely attached to the corpuscle, hollowing out a depression or space into which they nestle; the gametocytes, on the other hand, are actually intercellular. Forms parasitic in cold-blooded Vertebrates, on the contrary, are always, so far as is known, endoglobular when in relation with the corpuscles; and the same is apparently the case with the Mammalian parasite, Piroplasma. Although in no instance so far described is the parasite actually intranuclear (as certain Coccidia are), in one or two cases (e.g. Karyolysus of lizards and certain species of Haemogregarina) it reacts markedly upon the nucleus and soon causes its disintegration. While many Haemosporidia (e.g. malarial parasites, with the exception of Halteridium) remain in connexion with the same corpuscle throughout the whole period of growth and schizogony, the new generation of merozoites first being set free from the broken-down cell, others (the Haemogregarines, 807 broadly speaking, and also Halteridium) leave one corpuscle after a short time, wander about free in the plasma, and then seek out another; and this may be repeated until the parasite is ready for schizogony, which generally occurs in the corpuscle.

The Haemosporidia are found widely and occur commonly among the main classes of Vertebrates. In Invertebrates, they seem to be restricted to bloodsucking insects, ticks, and leeches.2 As mentioned earlier, the usual habitat of these parasites in Vertebrates is the blood; therefore, they are present in the capillaries of almost all major organs in the body. It’s worth noting that while some stages (e.g., growing trophozoites, mature gametocytes) are found in the peripheral circulation, others (e.g., schizogonous “rosettes,” young gametocytes) are located in the internal organs like the liver and kidneys, where the circulation is slow. The relationship between the parasites and the blood cells varies significantly. Most likely attack, and probably exclusively target, the red blood cells (haematids); however, a few select the white blood cells and are referred to as Leucocytozoa. For Mammalian and Avian types (malarial parasites), Schaudinn and Argutinsky have demonstrated that the trophic and schizogonic phases are not actually within the blood cells but are closely attached to them, creating a depression or space where they settle; the gametocytes, on the other hand, are truly intercellular. Forms that are parasitic in cold-blooded Vertebrates, however, are always known to be inside the blood cells; and it seems the same applies to the Mammalian parasite, Piroplasma. Although no instance has been described where the parasite is actually intranuclear (as with certain Coccidia), in one or two cases (e.g., Karyolysus of lizards and some species of Haemogregarina) it has a significant effect on the nucleus, quickly leading to its disintegration. While many Haemosporidia (e.g., malarial parasites, except for Halteridium) remain connected to the same blood cell throughout their entire growth and schizogony period, where the new generation of merozoites is released from the broken cell, others (the Haemogregarines, generally speaking, and Halteridium) leave one blood cell after a short period, float freely in the plasma, and then look for another; and this process can repeat until the parasite is ready for schizogony, which typically happens in the blood cell.

As in the case of Trypanosomes (q.v.), normally—that is to say, when in an accustomed, tolerant host, and under natural conditions—Haemosporidia are non-pathogenic and do not give rise to any ill-effects in the animals harbouring them. When, however, the parasites gain an entry into the blood of man or other unadapted animals,3 they produce, as is well known, harmful and often very serious effects. There are three recognized types of malarial fever, each caused by a distinct form and characterized by the mode of manifestation. Two, the so-called benign fevers, are intermittent; namely, tertian and quartan fever, in which the fever recurs every second and third day respectively. This is due to the fact that schizogony takes different lengths of time in the two cases, 48 hours in the one, 72 in the other; the height of the fever-period coincides with the break-down of the corpuscle at the completion of the process, and the liberation of great numbers of merozoites in the blood. The third type is the dangerous aestivo-autumnal or pernicious malaria, in which the fever is irregular or continuous during long periods.

As with Trypanosomes (q.v.), under normal circumstances—specifically, when present in a familiar, tolerant host and in natural conditions—Haemosporidia are non-pathogenic and do not cause any negative effects in the animals that carry them. However, when these parasites enter the blood of humans or other unsuitable animals, they can, as is widely known, lead to harmful and often very serious consequences. There are three recognized types of malarial fever, each caused by a different form and characterized by its specific symptoms. Two of these are the so-called benign fevers, which are intermittent: tertian and quartan fever, where the fever recurs every second and third day, respectively. This occurs because schizogony takes different amounts of time in each case, 48 hours in one and 72 in the other; the peak of the fever coincides with the breakdown of the red blood cells at the end of the process, releasing a large number of merozoites into the bloodstream. The third type is the severe aestivo-autumnal or pernicious malaria, where the fever is irregular or continuous for extended periods.

A very general symptom is anaemia, which is sometimes present to a marked extent, when it may lead to a fatal termination. This is the result of the very considerable destruction of the blood-corpuscles which takes place, the haemoglobin of which is absorbed by the parasites as nutriment. A universal feature connected with this mode of nutrition is the production, in the cytoplasm of the parasite, of a brown pigment, termed melanin; this does not represent reserve material, but is an excreted by-product derived from the haemoglobin. These pigment-grains are at length liberated into the blood-stream and become deposited in the various organs, spleen, liver, kidneys, brain, causing pronounced pigmentation.

A common symptom is anemia, which can sometimes be severe and even lead to death. This happens because there's significant destruction of blood cells, which the parasites absorb as their food. A typical aspect of this nutritional process is the production of a brown pigment in the parasite's cytoplasm, called melanin. This pigment isn’t a reserve material; it’s a waste product from the hemoglobin. Eventually, these pigment grains are released into the bloodstream and get deposited in different organs, including the spleen, liver, kidneys, and brain, leading to noticeable pigmentation.

Another type of fever, more acute and more generally fatal, is that produced by forms belonging to the genus Piroplasma, in cattle, dogs, horses and other domestic animals in different regions of the globe; and recently Wilson and Chowning have stated that the “spotted fever of the Rockies” is a human piroplasmosis caused by P. hominis. The disease of cattle is known variously as Texas-fever, Tristeza, Red-water, Southern cattle-fever, &c. In this type of illness the endogenous multiplication of the parasites is very great and rapid, and brings about an enormous diminution in the number of healthy red blood corpuscles. Their sudden destruction results in the liberation of large quantities of haemoglobin in the plasma, which turns deep-red in colour; and hence haemoglobinuria, which occurs only rarely in malaria, is a constant symptom in piroplasmosis.

Another type of fever, which is more severe and tends to be more fatal, is caused by organisms in the genus Piroplasma, affecting cattle, dogs, horses, and other domestic animals in various regions around the world. Recently, Wilson and Chowning have reported that the “spotted fever of the Rockies” is a human piroplasmosis caused by P. hominis. The disease in cattle is referred to by various names like Texas-fever, Tristeza, Red-water, Southern cattle-fever, etc. In this type of illness, the parasites multiply rapidly within the host, leading to a significant decrease in the number of healthy red blood cells. Their sudden destruction releases large amounts of hemoglobin into the plasma, giving it a deep-red color; thus, hemoglobinuria, which is rarely seen in malaria, is a consistent symptom in piroplasmosis.

The parasite of pernicious malaria, here termed Laverania malariae, will serve very well as a type of the general life-cycle (fig. 1). Slight differences shown by the other malarial parasites (Plasmodium) will be mentioned in passing, but the Example of the life-history. main divergences which other Haemosporidian types exhibit are best considered separately. With the bite of an infected mosquito, the minute sickle-like sporozoites are injected into the blood. They rapidly penetrate into the blood corpuscles, in which they appear as small irregular, more or less amoeboid trophozoites. A vacuole next arises in the cytoplasm, which increases greatly in size, and gives rise to the well-known, much discussed ring-form of the parasite, in which it resembles a signet-ring, the nucleus forming a little thickening to one side. Some authorities (e.g. Argutinsky) have regarded this structure as being really a greatly distended vesicular nucleus, and, to a large extent, indeed, an artifact, resulting from imperfect fixation; but Schaudinn considers it is a true vacuole, and explains it on the ground of the rapid nutrition and growth. Later on this vacuole disappears, and the grains of pigment make their appearance. The trophozoite is now large and full-grown, and has become rounded and ready for schizogony. The nucleus of the schizont divides several times (more or less directly, by simple or multiple fission) to form a number of daughter-nuclei, which take up a regular position near the periphery. Around these the cytoplasm becomes segmented, giving rise to the well-known corps en rosace. Eventually the merozoites, in the form of little round uninuclear bodies, are liberated from the now broken-down corpuscle, leaving behind a certain amount of residual cytoplasm containing the pigment grains. Besides the difference in the time taken by the complete process of schizogony in the various species (see above), there are distinctions in the composition of the rosettes. Thus, in Laverania, the number of merozoites formed is very variable; in Plasmodium vivax (the tertian parasite) there are only few (9 to 12) merozoites, but in P. malariae (the quartan form) they are more numerous, from 12 to 24. The liberated merozoites proceed to infect fresh blood corpuscles and a new endogenous cycle is started.

The parasite of severe malaria, referred to here as Laverania malariae, serves as a great example of the general life cycle (fig. 1). Some minor differences seen with other malaria-causing parasites (Plasmodium) will be briefly noted, but the main differences that other Haemosporidian types show are best discussed separately. When an infected mosquito bites, tiny, sickle-shaped sporozoites are injected into the bloodstream. They quickly invade the blood cells, where they appear as small, irregular, and somewhat amoeba-like trophozoites. A vacuole forms in the cytoplasm, which grows significantly and leads to the well-known, often debated ring-form of the parasite, resembling a signet ring, with the nucleus creating a slight thickening on one side. Some researchers (e.g. Argutinsky) believe this structure is actually an enlarged vesicular nucleus, and to some extent, an artifact from poor fixation; however, Schaudinn argues it's a true vacuole, explaining it by the parasite's rapid growth and nutrition. Eventually, this vacuole disappears, and pigment grains appear. The trophozoite is now large and mature, becoming rounded and ready for schizogony. The nucleus of the schizont divides multiple times (either directly or through simple or multiple fission) to create several daughter nuclei, which arrange themselves near the edge. As the cytoplasm segments around these, it forms the well-known corps en rosace. Finally, the merozoites, small round uninuclear bodies, are released from the now-destroyed cell, leaving some residual cytoplasm containing the pigment grains. Besides the differences in the duration of the complete schizogony process among the various species (see above), there are also differences in the structure of the rosettes. In Laverania, the number of merozoites produced is quite variable; in Plasmodium vivax (the tertian parasite), there are only a few (9 to 12) merozoites, while in P. malariae (the quartan form), they tend to be more numerous, ranging from 12 to 24. The released merozoites go on to infect new blood cells, starting a new endogenous cycle.

After asexual multiplication has gone on for some time, sexual forms become developed. According to Schaudinn, the stimulus which determines the production of gametocytes instead of schizonts is the reaction of the host (at the height of a fever period) upon the parasites. A young trophozoite which is becoming a gametocyte is distinguished from one which gives rise to a schizont by its much slower rate of growth, and the absence of any vacuoles in its cytoplasm. The gametocytes themselves are characterized by their peculiar shape, like that of a sausage, whence they are very generally known as “crescents.” Male and female gametocytes are distinguished (roughly) by the arrangement of the pigment-grains; in the former, they are fairly evenly scattered throughout the cytoplasm, but in the megagametocytes the pigment tends to be aggregated centrally, around the nucleus. As they become full-grown and mature, however, the gametocytes lose their crescentic form and assume that of an oval, and finally of a sphere. At the same time, they are set free from the remains of the blood corpuscle. The spherical stage is practically the limit of development in the Vertebrate host, although, sometimes, the nucleus of the microgametocyte may proceed to division. The “crescents” of the pernicious parasite afford a very important diagnostic difference from the gametocytes of both species of Plasmodium, which have the ordinary, rounded shape of the schizonts. In the case of the latter, points such as their slower growth, their less amoeboid character, and their size furnish the means of distinction.

After a period of asexual reproduction, sexual forms start to develop. According to Schaudinn, the trigger for producing gametocytes instead of schizonts is the host's reaction during a fever. A young trophozoite that becomes a gametocyte grows much more slowly and lacks vacuoles in its cytoplasm, distinguishing it from one that produces a schizont. The gametocytes are uniquely shaped like sausages, which is why they are commonly referred to as “crescents.” Male and female gametocytes can be roughly differentiated by the arrangement of pigment grains; in males, the grains are evenly distributed throughout the cytoplasm, while in megagametocytes, the pigment tends to cluster around the nucleus. As they grow and mature, gametocytes lose their crescent shape and take on oval and then spherical forms. At the same time, they are released from the remnants of the blood cell. The spherical stage is practically the final stage of development in the vertebrate host, although the nucleus of the microgametocyte may sometimes divide. The “crescents” of this harmful parasite provide a significant diagnostic difference from the gametocytes of both species of Plasmodium, which have the typical rounded shape of schizonts. In the case of the latter, characteristics such as slower growth, less amoeboid behavior, and size serve as distinguishing factors.

When a gnat or mosquito sucks blood, all phases of the parasite in the peripheral circulation at that point may succeed in passing into the insect. If this occurs all trophic and schizogonic phases are forthwith digested, and the survival of the sexual phases depends entirely upon whether the insect is a gnat or mosquito. Only in the latter case can further development of the gametocytes go on; in other words, only the genus Anopheles, and not the genus Culex, furnishes specific hosts for the malarial parasites. This is a biological fact of considerable importance in connexion with the prophylactic measures against malaria. In the stomach of an Anopheles, the gametocytes quickly proceed to gamete-formation. The nucleus of the microgametocyte divides up, and the daughter-nuclei pass to the periphery. The surface of the body grows out into long, whip-like processes, of which there are usually 6 to 8 (probably the typical number is 8); each is very motile, in this respect strongly resembling a flagellum. This phase may also develop in drawn blood, which has, of course, become suddenly cooled by the exposure; and it seems evident that it is the change in temperature, from the warm to the cold-blooded host, which brings about the development of the actual sexual elements. Earlier observers regarded the phase just described as representing another parasite altogether, of a Flagellate nature—whence the well-known term, Polymitus-form; and even more recent workers, such as Labbé who connected it with the malarial parasite, 808 failed to appreciate its true significance, and considered it rather as a degeneration-appearance. The micro-gametes soon liberate themselves from the residual cytoplasm of the parent and swim away in search of a megagamete; each is a very slender, wavy filament, composed largely of chromatic substance. The finer details of structure of the microgamete of a malarial parasite cannot be said, however, to be thoroughly known, and it is by no means impossible that its structure is really trypaniform, as, according to Schaudinn’s great work, is the case with the merozoites and sporozoites.

When a gnat or mosquito drinks blood, all stages of the parasite in the blood circulation at that moment can enter the insect. If this happens, all the growth and division stages are immediately digested, and the survival of the sexual stages only depends on whether the insect is a gnat or a mosquito. Only in the case of the mosquito can the further development of the gametocytes occur; in other words, only the genus Anopheles, and not the genus Culex, provides specific hosts for the malaria parasites. This is a significant biological fact related to preventive measures against malaria. Inside the stomach of an Anopheles, the gametocytes quickly proceed to form gametes. The nucleus of the microgametocyte divides, and the daughter nuclei move to the edges. The surface of the body extends into long, whip-like projections, usually 6 to 8 in number (likely the typical number is 8); each one is very active, strongly resembling a flagellum in this respect. This phase can also develop in drawn blood, which, of course, has rapidly cooled due to exposure; it seems clear that the temperature change from the warm host to the cold one triggers the development of the actual sexual elements. Earlier researchers thought this phase represented a completely different parasite of a Flagellate nature—hence the well-known term, Polymitus-form; and even more recent scientists, like Labbé, who linked it to the malaria parasite, 808 did not fully grasp its true significance and instead viewed it as a degenerative appearance. The microgametes soon break free from the leftover cytoplasm of the parent and swim off in search of a megagamete; each is a very thin, wavy filament made largely of chromatic substance. However, the finer structural details of the microgamete of a malaria parasite are not completely understood, and it’s quite possible that its structure is actually trypaniform, as Schaudinn’s extensive work indicates is the case with merozoites and sporozoites.

From Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology.
Fig. 1.—Diagram of the complete life-cycle of the parasite of pernicious malaria, Laverania malariae, Gr. et Fel. The stages on the upper side of the dotted line are those found in human blood; below the dotted line are seen the phases through which the parasite passes in the intermediate host, the mosquito. Plan and arrangement chiefly after Neveu-Lemaire; details of the figures founded on those of Grassi, Schaudinn (Leuckart’s Zoologische Wandtafeln), Ross and others.

I.-V. and 6-10 show the schizogony.

I.-V. and 6-10 show the process of schizogony.

VI.-XII., The sexual generation.

VI.-XII., Sexual reproduction.

XIII., The motile zygote.

XIII., The moving zygote.

XIV.-XIX., Sporogony.

XIV-XIX, Sporogony.

I.-III., Young amoebulae in blood-corpuscles.

I.-III., Young amoebas in blood cells.

IV., Older, actively amoeboid trophozoite.

IV., Older, active amoeboid trophozoite.

V., Still older, less amoeboid trophozoite.

V., Still older, less amoeba-like trophozoite.

6, Mature schizont.

6, Mature schizont.

7, Schizont, with nucleus dividing up.

7, Schizont, with the nucleus dividing.

8, Young rosette stage.

8, Young rosette stage.

9, Fully formed rosette stage.

9, Fully developed rosette stage.

10, Merozoites free in the blood by breaking down of the corpuscle.

10, Merozoites released into the bloodstream by the breakdown of the corpuscle.

VI., Young indifferent gametocyte.

VI., Young indifferent gametocyte.

VII., a, Male crescent.

VII., a, Male crescent moon.

VII., b, Female crescent.

VII., b, Female moon.

VIII., a and b, The gametocytes becoming oval.

VIII., a and b, The gametocytes are becoming oval.

IX., a and b, Spherical gametocytes; in the male (IX. a) the nucleus has divided up.

IX., a and b, Spherical gametocytes; in the male (IX. a), the nucleus has divided.

X., a and b, Formation of gametes; in the male (X. a) the so-called flagella or male gametes (fl) are thrown out, one of them is seen detached; in the female (X. b) a portion of the nucleus has been expelled.

X., a and b, Formation of gametes; in the male (X. a), the so-called flagella or male gametes (fl) are released, one of them is seen detached; in the female (X. b), a portion of the nucleus has been expelled.

XI., A male gamete penetrating a female gamete at a cone of reception formed near the nucleus.

XI., A male gamete entering a female gamete at a reception cone located near the nucleus.

XII., Zygote with two pronuclei in proximity.

XII., Zygote with two nearby pronuclei.

XIII., Zygote in the motile stage (vermicule or oökinete).

XIII., Zygote in the moving stage (vermicule or oökinete).

XIV., Encysted zygote (oöcyst).

XIV., Encysted zygote (oöcyst).

XV., Commencing multiplication of the nuclei in the oöcyst.

XV., Starting the multiplication of the nuclei in the oöcyst.

XVI., Oöcyst with numerous sporoblasts.

XVI., Oöcyst with many sporoblasts.

XVII., Commencing formation of sporozoites.

XVII., Starting formation of sporozoites.

XVIII., Full-grown oocyst crammed with ripe sporozoites; on one side the cyst has burst and the sporozoites are escaping.

XVIII., A mature oocyst filled with ripe sporozoites; on one side, the cyst has burst and the sporozoites are escaping.

XIX., Free sporozoites, showing their changes of form.

XIX., Free sporozoites, demonstrating their shape changes.

n, Nucleus of the parasite.

Nucleus of the parasite.

p, Melanin pigment.

Melanin pigment.

fl, “Flagella.”

“Flagella.”

sp. bl., Sporoblasts.

Sporoblasts.

r. n., Residual nuclei.

Residual nuclei.

r. p., Residual protoplasm.

r. p., Residual protoplasm.

From Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology.
Fig. 2.—Stomach of a mosquito, with cysts of Haemosporidia. (After Ross.)

oes, Oesophagus.

oes, Esophagus.

st, Stomach.

St., Stomach.

cy, Cysts.

Cysts.

Mt, Malpighian tubules.

Mt, Malpighian tubes.

int, Intestine.

int, Intestine.

The megagametocyte becomes a megagamete directly after a process of maturation, which consists in the expulsion of a certain amount of nuclear substance. The actual conjugation is quite similar to the process in Coccidia, and the resulting zygote perfectly homologous. In the present case, however, the zygote does not at once secrete an oöcyst, with a thick resistant wall; on the contrary, it changes its shape, and becomes markedly gregariniform and active, and is known for this reason as an ookinete. The ookinete passes through the epithelial layer of the stomach, the thinner and more pointed end leading the way, and comes to rest in the connective tissue forming the outer layer of the stomach-wall (fig. 2). Here it becomes rounded and cyst-like, and grows considerably; for only a thin, delicate cyst-membrane is secreted, which does not impede the absorption of nutriment. Meanwhile, the nucleus has divided into several, around each of which the cytoplasm becomes segmented. Each of these segments (“blastophores,” “zoidophores”) is entirely comparable to a sporoblast in the Coccidian oocyst, the chief difference being that it never forms a spore; moreover the segments or sporoblasts in the oocyst of a malarial parasite are irregular in shape and do not become completely separated from one another, but remain connected by thin cytoplasmic strands. Repeated multiplication of the sporoblast-nuclei next takes place, with the result that a great number of little nuclei are found all round the periphery. A corresponding number of fine cytoplasmic processes grow out from the surface, each carrying a nucleus with it, and in this manner a 809 huge number of slender, slightly sickle-shaped germs or sporozoites (“blasts,” “zoids,” &c.) are formed. Each oocyst may contain from hundreds to thousands of sporozoites.

The megagametocyte becomes a megagamete right after a maturation process, which involves the expulsion of some nuclear material. The actual conjugation is quite similar to the process in Coccidia, and the resulting zygote is perfectly homologous. In this case, however, the zygote doesn't immediately secrete an oöcyst with a thick, resistant wall; instead, it changes shape, becoming noticeably gregarine-like and active, and is referred to as an ookinete. The ookinete moves through the epithelial layer of the stomach, with the thinner and more pointed end leading the way, and settles in the connective tissue that forms the outer layer of the stomach wall (fig. 2). Here, it becomes rounded and cyst-like, growing significantly; only a thin, delicate cyst membrane is secreted, which does not hinder nutrient absorption. Meanwhile, the nucleus divides into several, around each of which the cytoplasm segments. Each of these segments (“blastophores,” “zoidophores”) is comparable to a sporoblast in the Coccidian oocyst, with the main difference being that it never forms a spore; furthermore, the segments or sporoblasts in the oocyst of a malarial parasite are irregularly shaped and do not completely separate from each other, but remain connected by thin cytoplasmic strands. The sporoblast nuclei multiply repeatedly, resulting in a large number of small nuclei found around the periphery. A corresponding number of fine cytoplasmic processes grow from the surface, each carrying a nucleus, and in this way a huge number of slender, slightly sickle-shaped germs or sporozoites (“blasts,” “zoids,” etc.) are formed. Each oocyst can contain hundreds to thousands of sporozoites.

When the sporogony (which lasts about 10 days) is completed, the oocyst ruptures and the sporozoites are set free into the body-cavity, leaving behind a large quantity of residual cytoplasm, including pigment grains, &c. The sporozoites are carried about by the blood-stream; ultimately, however, apparently by virtue of some chemotactic attraction, they practically all collect in the salivary glands, filling the secretory cells and also invading the ducts. When the mosquito next bites a man, numbers of them are injected, together with the minute drop of saliva, into his blood, where they begin a fresh endogenous cycle.

When the sporogony (which lasts about 10 days) is finished, the oocyst breaks open and releases the sporozoites into the body cavity, leaving behind a large amount of residual cytoplasm, including pigment grains, etc. The sporozoites are carried around by the bloodstream; however, ultimately, it seems that due to some chemical attraction, they almost all gather in the salivary glands, filling the secretory cells and also invading the ducts. When the mosquito bites a person again, many of them are injected, along with a tiny drop of saliva, into the bloodstream, where they start a new endogenous cycle.

There is only one other point with regard to the life-history that need be mentioned. With the lapse of time all trophic and schizogonic (asexual) phases of the parasite in the blood die off. But it has long been known that malarial patients, apparently quite cured, may suddenly exhibit all the symptoms again, without having incurred a fresh infection. Schaudinn has investigated the cause of this recurrence, and finds that it is due to the power of the megagametocytes, which are very resistant and long-lived, to undergo a kind of parthenogenesis under favourable conditions and give rise to the ordinary asexual schizonts, which in turn can repopulate the host with all the other phases. Microgametocytes, on the other hand, die off in time if they cannot pass into a mosquito.

There is only one other point regarding the life-cycle that needs to be mentioned. Over time, all the trophic and schizogonic (asexual) phases of the parasite in the blood die off. However, it's been known for a long time that malaria patients, who seem completely cured, can suddenly show all the symptoms again without having contracted a new infection. Schaudinn has looked into the cause of this recurrence and found that it's due to the resilience and longevity of the megagametocytes, which can undergo a form of parthenogenesis under favorable conditions and produce ordinary asexual schizonts. These, in turn, can repopulate the host with all the other phases. On the other hand, microgametocytes eventually die off if they can't infect a mosquito.

From Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology.
Fig. 3.Haemogregarina bigemina, Laveran, from the blood of blennies. (After Laveran, magnified about 1800 diameters.)

a, The form of the parasite found free in the blood-plasma.

a, The type of the parasite found floating in the blood plasma.

b, Parasite within a blood-corpuscle, preparing for division; the nucleus has already divided.

b, Parasite inside a blood cell, getting ready to divide; the nucleus has already divided.

c, The parasite has divided into two rounded corpuscles, which assume the form of the free parasite, as seen in d, e and f.

c, The parasite has split into two round bodies, which take on the shape of the independent parasite, as shown in d, e, and f.

N, Nucleus of the blood-corpuscle.

N, Blood cell nucleus.

n, Nucleus of the parasite. The outline of the blood-corpuscle is indicated by a thick black line.

n, Nucleus of the parasite. The shape of the blood cell is shown by a thick black line.

Various types of form are to be met with among the Haemosporidia. In one, characteristic of most (though not of absolutely all) parasites of warm-blooded Vertebrates, the trophozoites are of irregular amoeboid shape; hence this section Comparative Morphology; variations in the life-cycle where known. is generally known as the Haemamoebidae. In another type, characteristic of the parasites of cold-blooded Vertebrates, the body possesses a definite, vermiform, i.e. gregariniform shape, which is retained during the intracorpuscular as well as during the free condition; this section comprises the Haemogregarinidae. Allied to this latter type of form are the trophozoites of Piroplasma, which are normally pear-shaped; they differ, however, in being very minute, and, moreover, exhibit considerable polymorphism, rod-like (so-called bacillary) and ring-forms being of common occurrence. It is important to note that in a certain species of Haemogregarina (fig. 3) the young trophozoites markedly resemble Piroplasma in their pyriform appearance; and a further point of agreement between the two forms is mentioned below. Lastly there is the Avian genus Halteridium, the trophozoites of which are characteristically bean-shaped or reniform. True Haemogregarines also differ in other slight points from “Haemamoebae.” Thus the young endoglobular trophozoite does not exhibit a ring (vacuolar) phase; and the cytoplasm never contains, at any period, the characteristic melanin pigment above noted. In some species of Haemogregarina the parasite, while intracorpuscular, becomes surrounded by a delicate membrane, the cytocyst; on entering upon an active, “free” period, the cytocyst is ruptured and left behind with the remains of the corpuscle. A very interesting cytological feature is the occurrence, in one or two Haemosporidia, of nuclear dimorphism, i.e. of a larger and smaller chromatic body, probably comparable to the trophic and kinetic nuclei of a Trypanosome, or of the “Leishman-Donovan” bodies. Schaudinn was the first to notice this character, in Piroplasma canis, and his observation has since been confirmed by Lühe.4 Moreover, Brumpt has also noticed nuclear dimorphism in the ookinete of a species of Haemogregarina in a leech (as the Invertebrate host)—a highly important observation.

There are various types of forms found among the Haemosporidia. In one type, typical of most (but not all) parasites of warm-blooded vertebrates, the trophozoites are irregular and amoeba-like. This section is usually referred to as the Haemamoebidae. In another type, which is typical of parasites of cold-blooded vertebrates, the body has a defined, worm-like, or gregarine-like shape, which it retains both inside the host and in a free state; this section includes the Haemogregarinidae. Closely related to this type are the trophozoites of Piroplasma, which are usually pear-shaped; however, they are very small and show a lot of variation, with rod-shaped (often called bacillary) and ring forms commonly seen. It's important to mention that in a certain species of Haemogregarina (fig. 3), the young trophozoites closely resemble Piroplasma in their pear-like shape; there is also a further similarity between the two forms discussed below. Lastly, there is the avian genus Halteridium, whose trophozoites are typically bean-shaped or kidney-shaped. True Haemogregarines also differ slightly from “Haemamoebae.” For example, the young endoglobular trophozoite does not show a ring (vacuolar) phase; and the cytoplasm never contains the melanin pigment mentioned earlier. In some species of Haemogregarina, while in the host's blood, the parasite is surrounded by a thin membrane called a cytocyst; when it becomes active and enters a “free” phase, the cytocyst breaks and is left behind with the remnants of the blood cell. A fascinating cytological feature found in one or two Haemosporidia is nuclear dimorphism, characterized by a larger and smaller chromatic body, likely akin to the trophic and kinetic nuclei of a Trypanosome or the “Leishman-Donovan” bodies. Schaudinn was the first to observe this trait in Piroplasma canis, and his finding has been confirmed by Lühe. Moreover, Brumpt has also noted nuclear dimorphism in the ookinete of a species of Haemogregarina found in a leech (acting as the invertebrate host)—a highly significant observation.

As regards the life-history, the endogenous (schizogonous) cycle is known in many cases. Sometimes schizogony takes the primitive form of simple binary (probably) longitudinal fission; this is the case in Piroplasma (fig. 4) and also in Haemogregarina bigemina just referred to. From this result the pairs of individuals (“twins”) so often found in the corpuscles. In addition, however, at any rate in Piroplasma, it is probable that multiple division (more allied to ordinary schizogony) also takes place; such is the case, according to Laveran, in P. equi, and the occurrence at times of four parasites in a corpuscle, arranged in a cruciform manner, is most likely to be thus explained. Labbé has described schizogony in Halteridium danilewskyi as taking place in a rather peculiar manner; the parasite becomes much drawn-out and halter-like, and the actual division is restricted to its two ends, two clumps of merozoites being formed, at first connected by a narrow strand of unused cytoplasm, which subsequently disappears. Some doubt, however, attaches to this account, as no one else appears to have seen the process. For the rest, schizogony takes place more or less in the customary way, allowing for variations in the mode of arrangement of the merozoites. It remains to be noted that in Karyolysus lacertarum, according to Labbé, two kinds of schizont are developed, which give rise, respectively, to micromerozoites and megamerozoites, in either case enclosed in a delicate cytocyst. This probably corresponds to an early sexual differentiation (such as is found among certain Coccidia (q.v.), the micromerozoites producing eventually micro-gametocytes, the others megagametocytes.

As for the life cycle, the internal (schizogonous) process is known in many instances. Sometimes schizogony occurs in a simple binary form, likely longitudinal fission; this is seen in Piroplasma (fig. 4) and also in Haemogregarina bigemina mentioned earlier. This results in pairs of individuals (“twins”) frequently found in the cells. Additionally, at least in Piroplasma, it's likely that multiple division (more similar to typical schizogony) also happens; according to Laveran, this is true for P. equi, and the occasional appearance of four parasites in a cell, positioned in a cross shape, can probably be explained this way. Labbé described schizogony in Halteridium danilewskyi occurring in a rather unusual way; the parasite becomes elongated and halter-like, and the actual division is limited to its two ends, forming two clusters of merozoites, initially connected by a thin strand of unused cytoplasm, which later disappears. However, some doubts exist about this account, as no one else seems to have observed the process. Otherwise, schizogony occurs in a more or less standard way, with some variations in how the merozoites are arranged. It should also be noted that in Karyolysus lacertarum, as reported by Labbé, two types of schizonts develop, which produce, respectively, micromerozoites and megamerozoites, each enclosed in a delicate cytocyst. This likely corresponds to an early form of sexual differentiation (similar to what is found in certain Coccidia (q.v.), with micromerozoites eventually forming micro-gametocytes, while the others develop into megagametocytes.

From Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology.
Fig. 4.—Development and schizogony of Piroplasma bigeminum in the blood-corpuscles of the ox. (After Laveran and Nicolle.)

a, Youngest form.

a, Youngest version.

b, Slightly older.

b, A bit older.

c and d. Division of the nucleus.

Nuclear division.

e and f, Division of the body of the parasite.

e and f, Division of the body of the parasite.

g, h, i, j, Various forms of the twin parasite.

g, h, i, j, Different types of the twin parasite.

k and l, Doubly infected corpuscles.

k and l, doubly infected cells.

It has now been recognized for some time that the sexual (exogenous) part of the life-cycle of all the Haemamoebidae takes place in an Invertebrate (Insectan) host, and is fundamentally similar to that above described in those cases where it has been followed. In contradistinction to the malarial parasites, this host, in the Avian forms (Haemoproteus and Halteridium)5 is a species of Culex and not of Anopheles; in other words, gamete-formation, conjugation and subsequent sporozoite-formation in these cases will only go on in the former. On the other hand, in the case of the Haemogregarines, it was thought until quite lately that the entire life-history, including conjugation and sporogony, went on in the Vertebrate host; and only in 1902 Hintze described what purported to be the complete life-history of Lankesterella (Drepanidium) ranarum undergone in the frog. This view was rendered obsolete by the work of Siegel and Schaudinn, who demonstrated the occurrence of an alternation of hosts and of generations in the case of Haemogregarina stepanovi, parasitic in a tortoise, and in Karyolysus lacertarum; the Invertebrate hosts, in which, in both cases, the sexual process is undergone, being respectively a leech (Placobdella) and a tick (Ixodes). With this discovery the main distinction (as supposed) between the Haemosporidia of warm and of cold-blooded Vertebrates vanished. It was further acknowledged by Schaudinn (under whom Hintze 810 had worked) that the latter had been misled by Coccidian cysts and spores, which he took for those of Lankesterella. The gametogony and sporogony of Haemogregarina stepanovi in the leech agree in essential particulars with the process above described. The microgametes are extremely minute, and the sporozoites, which are developed in the salivary glands, where the motile ookinetes finally come to rest, are extremely “spirochaetiform”—the full significance of this latter fact being, perhaps, not appreciated.

It has been recognized for some time that the sexual (exogenous) part of the life cycle of all the Haemamoebidae occurs in an invertebrate (insect) host and is fundamentally similar to those cases that have been studied. Unlike malarial parasites, this host in the avian forms (Haemoproteus and Halteridium)5 is a species of Culex rather than Anopheles. In other words, gamete formation, conjugation, and subsequent sporozoite formation in these cases will only occur in the former. On the other hand, it was believed until recently that the entire life history of the Haemogregarines, including conjugation and sporogony, occurred in the vertebrate host. It was only in 1902 that Hintze described what was thought to be the complete life history of Lankesterella (Drepanidium) ranarum as happening in frogs. This view was rendered outdated by the research of Siegel and Schaudinn, who showed that there is an alternation of hosts and generations in the case of Haemogregarina stepanovi, which parasitizes tortoises, and Karyolysus lacertarum. The invertebrate hosts in both cases, where the sexual process occurs, are a leech (Placobdella) and a tick (Ixodes), respectively. With this discovery, the main supposed distinction between the Haemosporidia of warm-blooded and cold-blooded vertebrates disappeared. Schaudinn (under whom Hintze had worked) also acknowledged that Hintze was misled by Coccidian cysts and spores, which he mistook for those of Lankesterella. The gametogony and sporogony of Haemogregarina stepanovi in the leech are essentially similar to the process described earlier. The microgametes are extremely tiny, and the sporozoites, which develop in the salivary glands where the motile ookinetes ultimately settle, are extremely “spirochaetiform”—the full significance of this latter fact may not be fully understood.

Christophers recently described some remarkable phases which he regarded as belonging to the cycle of Haemogregarina gerbilli (one of the few Mammalian Haemogregarines known) in a louse (Haematopinus). In a private communication, however, the author states that he has probably mistaken phases in the development of an ordinary gregarine parasite in the louse for part of the life-cycle of this Haemogregarine.

Christophers recently described some interesting phases that he thought were part of the cycle of Haemogregarina gerbilli (one of the few mammalian Haemogregarines known) in a louse (Haematopinus). However, in a private message, the author mentions that he probably confused phases in the development of a typical gregarine parasite in the louse for a part of the life cycle of this Haemogregarine.

The Mammalian parasite Piroplasma is the one about whose life-history our knowledge is most vague. Besides the typical and generally occurring forms, others have also been observed in the blood, but it is doubtful how far these are to be looked upon as normal; for instance, Bowhill and Le Doux have described, in various species, a phase in which a long, slender pseudopodial-like outgrowth is present, with a swelling at the distal end. It is, moreover, quite uncertain which are the sexual forms, comparable to gametocytes. Doflein regards large pear-shaped forms as such (megagametocytes?), which become spherical when maturing; and Nocard and Motas have figured amoeboid, irregular forms, with the nucleus fragmented and possessing flagella-like processes (possibly microgametes?). The Invertebrate host is well known to be, in the case of all species, a tick; thus bovine piroplasmosis (P. bigeminum) in America is conveyed by Rhipicephalus annulatus (Boophilus bovis), canine piroplasmosis (P. canis) in South Africa by Haemaphysalis leachi (and perhaps Dermacentor reticulatus), and so on. The manner in which the infection is transmitted by the tick varies greatly. In some cases (e.g. P. bigeminum and P. canis) only the generation subsequent to that which receives the infection (by feeding on an infected ox) can transmit it back again to another ox; in other words, true hereditary infection of the ova in the mother-tick is found to occur. The actual period in the life of the daughter-tick at which it can convey the infection apparently varies. On the other hand, in the case of East African coast-fever, Theiler found that hereditary infection does not occur, the same generation transmitting the parasite (P. parvum) at different periods of life. Little is certainly known regarding the phases of the parasite which are passed through in the tick. Lignières has observed a kind of multiple fission in the stomach, several very minute bodies, consisting mostly of chromatin, being formed, which may serve for endogenous reproduction. Koch has published an account of certain curious forms of P. bigeminum, in which the body is produced into many stiff, ray-like processes, giving the appearance of a star; according to him fusion of such forms takes place, and the resulting zygote becomes rounded, perhaps transitional to the pear-shaped forms.

The mammalian parasite Piroplasma is the one about which we have the least clear understanding of its life cycle. Beyond the usual and commonly seen forms, others have also been found in the blood, but it's unclear how normal these are; for example, Bowhill and Le Doux have described a phase in various species where there’s a long, slender pseudopod-like extension with a swell at the tip. Furthermore, it’s quite uncertain which forms are sexual, similar to gametocytes. Doflein considers large, pear-shaped forms as such (megagametocytes?), which become round as they mature; and Nocard and Motas have illustrated amoeboid, irregular forms with a fragmented nucleus and flagella-like projections (possibly microgametes?). The invertebrate host is well-known to be a tick in all species; for instance, bovine piroplasmosis (P. bigeminum) in America is transmitted by Rhipicephalus annulatus (Boophilus bovis), and canine piroplasmosis (P. canis) in South Africa is spread by Haemaphysalis leachi (and perhaps Dermacentor reticulatus), among others. The way the infection is transmitted by the tick varies widely. In some cases (e.g. P. bigeminum and P. canis), only the generation after the one that acquired the infection (by feeding on an infected ox) can pass it on to another ox; in other words, true hereditary infection of the eggs in the mother tick occurs. The actual point in the life of the daughter tick when it can pass on the infection seems to differ. On the other hand, in the case of East African coast-fever, Theiler found that hereditary infection does not occur, with the same generation transmitting the parasite (P. parvum) at different life stages. Very little is known about the phases of the parasite that occur in the tick. Lignières has noted a type of multiple fission in the stomach, where several tiny bodies made mostly of chromatin are formed, which may be used for endogenous reproduction. Koch has described some unusual forms of P. bigeminum, where the body extends into many stiff, ray-like projections, resembling a star; according to him, fusion of these forms occurs, and the resulting zygote becomes rounded, possibly transitioning to the pear-shaped forms.

The classification and nomenclature of the Haemosporidia are in a very unsettled condition. For an account of the various systems and modifications hitherto adopted, the article of Minchin (see under Sporozoa: Bibliography) should be consulted. Classification. With the realization that the life-history in the case of the “Haemamoebae” and the Haemogregarines is fundamentally similar in type, the chief reason for grouping them as distinct suborders has disappeared. It is most convenient to regard them as separate, but closely allied families, the Plasmodidae (“Haemamoebidae”) and the Haemogregarinidae. The Piroplasmata, on the other hand, constitute another family, which is better placed in a distinct section or sub-order. In addition there are, as already noted, two or three genera whose systematic position must be considered as quite uncertain. One is the well-known Halteridium of Labbé, parasitic in various birds; the type-species is H. danilewskyi (Gt. and Fel.). Another is the much-debated parasite of white blood-corpuscles (leucocytes), originally described in birds by Danilewsky under the name of Leucocytozoon, a form of which has been recently observed in Mammals.

The classification and naming of the Haemosporidia are currently quite unclear. For a detailed review of the various systems and changes that have been applied so far, check out the article by Minchin (see under Sporozoa: Bibliography). Classification. With the understanding that the life cycle of the “Haemamoebae” and the Haemogregarines is fundamentally similar, the main reason for treating them as separate suborders has lost its validity. It makes more sense to view them as separate but closely related families, the Plasmodidae (“Haemamoebidae”) and the Haemogregarinidae. The Piroplasmata, however, form another family that is better placed in a distinct section or sub-order. Additionally, there are two or three genera whose systematic position remains quite uncertain. One is the well-known Halteridium of Labbé, which is parasitic in various birds; the type species is H. danilewskyi (Gt. and Fel.). Another is the much-debated parasite of white blood cells (leucocytes), originally described in birds by Danilewsky as Leucocytozoon, a form of which has recently been observed in mammals.

In conclusion, the chief members of the above-mentioned families may be enumerated.

In conclusion, the main members of the families mentioned above can be listed.

Fam. Plasmodidae (“Haemamoebidae”).

Fam. Plasmodidae (“Haemamoebidae”).

Genus Laverania, Gr. and Fel. (syn. Haemamoenas, Ross), for L. malariae, Gr. and Fel. (synn. L. s. Plasmodium, s. “Haemamoeba,” &c., praecox s. immaculatum, &c.), the parasite of pernicious malaria. Genus Plasmodium, March. and Celli (syn. “Haemamoeba”) for P. vivax and P. malariae, the tertian and quartan parasite, respectively. There is also a form known in apes, P. kochi. Genus Haemoproteus, Kruse (syn. Proteosoma), for H. danilewskyi (syn. Proteosoma grassi, Plasmodium praecox, &c.), parasitic in numerous birds. Recently, another form has been described, from reptiles, which Castellani and Willey have termed Haemocystidium simondi.

Genus Laverania, Gr. and Fel. (also known as Haemamoenas, Ross), for L. malariae, Gr. and Fel. (also referred to as L. s. Plasmodium, previously “Haemamoeba,” etc., praecox or immaculatum, etc.), is the parasite responsible for severe malaria. Genus Plasmodium, March. and Celli (also known as “Haemamoeba”), includes P. vivax and P. malariae, which are the parasites for tertian and quartan malaria, respectively. There is also a form found in apes, P. kochi. Genus Haemoproteus, Kruse (also referred to as Proteosoma), includes H. danilewskyi (also known as Proteosoma grassi, Plasmodium praecox, etc.), which is parasitic in many birds. Recently, another form has been identified in reptiles, which Castellani and Willey have named Haemocystidium simondi.

Remarks.—The distinguishing characters of the malarial parasites have been mentioned above. Some authorities would include Laverania in the genus Plasmodium, as differing only specifically from the other two forms. It has, moreover, been suggested by Sergent that all three are merely different phases of the same parasite, predominating at different seasons; this idea cannot be regarded, however, as in any way proved so far. From what is known of the morphology and mode of manifestation of these forms, the differences between Laverania and the two species of Plasmodium are considerably more pronounced than those between P. vivax and P. malariae; if the latter are to be considered as distinct species, the first-named is probably generically distinct. Lühe, it may be noted, in his recent comprehensive account of the Haematozoa, also takes this view. Lastly, whatever be the correct solution of the above problem, there is certainly not sufficient justification for including the Avian genus Haemoproteus, as also only a species of Plasmodium, which is done by some. Its different Vertebrate habitat, and also the fact that its Insectan definitive host is Culex and not Anopheles, differentiate it sharply from Laverania and Plasmodium.

Remarks.—The key features of the malarial parasites have been mentioned above. Some experts would categorize Laverania within the genus Plasmodium, as it only differs in specific ways from the other two forms. Additionally, Sergent has suggested that all three are just different stages of the same parasite, predominating in various seasons; however, this idea can't be considered proven at this point. Based on what we know about the structure and behavior of these forms, the differences between Laverania and the two species of Plasmodium are much more pronounced than those between P. vivax and P. malariae; if we regard the latter as distinct species, the first-named is likely to be generically different. Lühe, in his recent detailed account of the Haematozoa, also supports this perspective. Lastly, regardless of the correct resolution of this issue, there is certainly not enough reason to classify the Avian genus Haemoproteus as just another species of Plasmodium, as some do. Its different vertebrate habitat, along with the fact that its definitive insect host is Culex instead of Anopheles, sets it apart clearly from Laverania and Plasmodium.

From Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology.
Fig. 5.Haemoproteus danilewskyi, Kruse (parasite of various birds). × about 1200. a, b, c and d from the chaffinch; d and e from the lark. (After Labbé.)

a, Young trophozoite in a blood-corpuscle,

a, Young trophozoite in a blood cell,

b and c, Older trophozoite.

b and c, older trophozoite.

d and e, Sporulation.

d and e, Spore formation.

d, Precocious sporulation with few merozoites.

d, Early sporulation with few merozoites.

e, Sporulation of a full-grown schizont, with numerous merozoites.

e, The process of sporulation in a fully developed schizont, containing many merozoites.

f, Gametocyte.

Gametocyte.

N, Nucleus of blood-corpuscle.

N, Center of blood cell.

n, Nucleus of parasite.

n, Parasite's nucleus.

p, Pigment.

p, Color.

mz, Merozoites.

mz, Merozoites.

r.p, Residual protoplasm.

Residual protoplasm.

From Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology.
Fig. 6.Haemogregarina stepanovi, Danilewsky (par. Emys and Cistudo), phases of the schizogony. (a-e and j after Laveran; f-i after Börner.) × 1000 to 1200 diameters.

a, Blood-corpuscle with young trophozoite.

a, Blood cell with young trophozoite.

b, Older trophozoite.

b, Mature trophozoite.

c, Full-grown trophozoite, ready to leave the corpuscle.

c, fully grown trophozoite, ready to leave the cell.

d and e, Trophozoites free in the blood-plasma, showing changes of form.

d and e, Trophozoites free in the blood plasma, showing changes in shape.

f-i, Trophozoites, still within the blood-corpuscle (not drawn), showing the structure of the nucleus, the coarse chromatoid granules in the protoplasm and the manner in which the parasite grows into the U-shaped Haemogregarine without increase of body-mass.

f-i, Trophozoites, still inside the blood cell (not depicted), showing the structure of the nucleus, the coarse chromatoid granules in the cytoplasm, and how the parasite develops into the U-shaped Haemogregarine without an increase in body mass.

j, Commencement of sporulation; the nucleus has divided into eight nuclei, and the body of the parasite is beginning to divide up into as many merozoites within a blood-corpuscle.

j, Start of sporulation; the nucleus has split into eight nuclei, and the parasite's body is starting to divide into the same number of merozoites within a blood cell.

N, Nucleus of the blood-corpuscle.

N, Nucleus of the blood cell.

n, Nucleus of the parasite.

Nucleus of the parasite.

Fam. Haemogregarinidae.—The different genera are characterized chiefly by their size relative to the blood-corpuscles, and their disposition in the latter. Here, again, it has been suggested to unite the various types all in one genus, Haemogregarina, but this seems at least premature when it is remembered how little is known in most cases of the life-cycle, which may prove to exhibit important divergences.

Fam. Haemogregarinidae.—The different genera are mainly defined by their size compared to blood cells and how they arrange themselves within those cells. There has been a proposal to combine all the various types into one genus, Haemogregarina, but this seems to be at least a bit premature when we consider how little is known in most cases about the life cycle, which may reveal significant differences.

Genus Haemogregarina, Danilewsky (syn. Danilewskya, Labbé). 811 The body of the parasite exceeds the blood-corpuscle in length, when adult, and is bent upon itself, like a U. A very great number of species are known, mostly from reptiles and fishes; among them may be mentioned H. stepanovi (fig. 6), from Emys and Cistudo, whose sexual-cycle in a leech has been worked out by Siegel (see above), H. delagei, from Raja, H. bigemina, from blennies, and H. simondi, from soles. Recently one or two Mammalian forms have been observed, H. gerbilli, from an Indian rat (Gerbillus), and H. jaculi, from the jerboa.

Genus Haemogregarina, Danilewsky (syn. Danilewskya, Labbé). 811 The parasite's body is longer than a blood cell when fully developed and is curved like a U. There are many known species, mostly from reptiles and fish; among these are H. stepanovi (fig. 6), found in Emys and Cistudo, whose sexual cycle in a leech has been studied by Siegel (see above), H. delagei from Raja, H. bigemina from blennies, and H. simondi from soles. Recently, one or two mammalian forms have been identified, including H. gerbilli from an Indian rat (Gerbillus) and H. jaculi from the jerboa.

Genus Lankesterella, Labbé (syn. Drepanidium, Lankester). The parasite is not more than three-quarters the length of the corpuscle. L. ranarum from Rana is the type-species; another, recently described by Fantham, is L. tritonis, from the newt.

Genus Lankesterella, Labbé (syn. Drepanidium, Lankester). The parasite is no more than three-quarters the length of the cell. L. ranarum from Rana is the type species; another, recently described by Fantham, is L. tritonis, from the newt.

From Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology.
Fig. 7.Karyolysus lacertarum (Danil.), in the blood-corpuscles of Lacerta muralis, showing the effects of the parasite upon the nucleus of the corpuscle. In c and d the nucleus is broken up. N, Nucleus of the corpuscle; n, nucleus of the parasite, seen as a number of masses of chromatin, not enclosed by a distinct membrane. (After Marceau.)

Genus Karyolysus, Labbé. The parasite does not exceed the corpuscle in length; the forms included in this genus, moreover, although not actually intranuclear, have a marked karyolytic and disintegrating action upon the nucleus of the corpuscle. The type-species is the well-known K. lacertarum, of lizards; another is K. (Haemogregarina) viperini, from Tropidonotus.

Genus Karyolysus, Labbé. The parasite is no longer than the cell it infects; the species within this genus, while not directly inside the nucleus, significantly disrupt and damage the nucleus of the cell. The type species is the well-known K. lacertarum, found in lizards; another is K. (Haemogregarina) viperini, from Tropidonotus.

In the section of the Piroplasmata there is only the genus Piroplasma, Patton (synn. Babesia, Starcovici, Pyrosoma, Smith and Kilborne), the principal species of which are as follows: P. bigeminum, the cause of Texas cattle-fever, tick-fever (Rinder-malaria) of South Africa, and P. bovis, causing haemoglobinuria of cattle in Southern Europe; there is some uncertainty as to whether these two are really distinct; P. canis, P. ovis and P. equi associated, respectively, with those animals. Lately, a very small form, P. parvum, has been described by Theiler in Rhodesia, which causes East-African coast-fever; and another, P. muris, has been observed in white rats by Fantham.

In the section of the Piroplasmata, there is only the genus Piroplasma, Patton (also known as Babesia, Starcovici, Pyrosoma, Smith and Kilborne). The main species include P. bigeminum, which causes Texas cattle fever and tick fever (Rinder-malaria) in South Africa, and P. bovis, responsible for haemoglobinuria in cattle in Southern Europe. There’s some debate about whether these two are truly different species. P. canis, P. ovis, and P. equi are linked to their respective animals. Recently, a very small form, P. parvum, was described by Theiler in Rhodesia, which causes east African coast fever; and another, P. muris, has been found in white rats by Fantham.

Bibliography.—(The older literature is enumerated in most treatises on Sporozoa—see bibliography under Sporozoa). P. Argutinsky, “Malariastudien,” Arch. mikr. Anat. 59, p. 315, pls. 18-21 (1901), and op. cit. 61, p. 331, pl. 18 (1902); A. Balfour, “Haemogregarine of Mammals,” J. Trop. Med. 8, p. 241, 8 figs. (1905); C. A. Bentley, “Leucocytozoan of the Dog,” B.M.J. (1905), 1, pp. 988 and 1078; N. Berestneff, “Über einen neuen Blutparasiten der indischen Frösche,” Arch. Protistenk. 2, p. 343, pl. 8 (1903); “Über das ’Leucocytozoan’ danilewskyi,” op. cit. 3, p. 376, pl. 15 (1904); A. Billet, “Contribution à l’étude du paludisme et de son hématozoaire en Algérie,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 16, p. 186 (1902); (Notes on various Haemogregarines). C. R. Soc. Biol. 56, pp. 482, 484, 607 and 741 (1904); C. Börner, “Untersuchungen über Hämosporidien,” Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. 69, p. 398, 1 pl. (1901); T. Bowhill, “Equine piroplasmosis,” &c., J. Hyg. 5, p. 7, pls. 1-3 (1905); Bowhill and C. le Doux, “Contribution to the Study of ’Piroplasmosis canis,’” op. cit. 4, p. 217, pl. 11 (1904); E. Brumpt and C. Lebailly, “Description de quelques nouvelles espèces de trypanosomes et d’hémogrégarines,” &c., C. R. Ac. Sci. 139, p. 613 (1904); A. Castellani and A. Willey, “Observations on the Haematozoa of Vertebrates in Ceylon,” Spolia Zeylan. 2, p. 78, 1 pl. (1904), and Q. J. Micr. Sci. 49, p. 383, pl. 24 (1905); S. R. Christophers, “Haemogregarina gerbilli,” Sci. Mem. India, 18, 15 pp., 1 pl. (1905); H. B. Fantham, “Lankesterella tritonis, n. sp.,” &c., Zool. Anz. 29, p. 257, 17 figs. (1905); “Piroplasma muris,” &c., Q. J. Micr. Sci. 50, p. 493, pl. 28 (1906); C. Graham-Smith, “A new Form of Parasite found in the Red Blood-Corpuscles of Moles,” J. Hyg. 5, p. 453, pls. 13 and 14 (1905); R. Hintze, “Lebensweise und Entwickelung von Lankesterella minima,” Zool. Jahrb. Anat. 15, p. 693, pl. 36 (1902); S. James, “On a Parasite found in the White Blood-Corpuscles of Dogs,” Sci. Mem. India, 14, 12 pp. 1 pl. (1905); R. Koch, “Vorläufige Mitteilungen über die Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise nach Ostafrika,” Deutsch. med. Wochenschr., 1905, p. 1865, 24 figs.; A. Labbé, “Recherches sur les parasites endoglobulaires du sang des vertébrés,” Arch. zool. exp. (3) ii. p. 55, 10 pls. (1894); A. Laveran, “Sur quelques hémogrégarines des ophidiens,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 135, p. 1036, 13 figs. (1902); “Sur une Haemamoeba d’une mésange (Parus major),” C. R. Soc. Biol. 54, p. 1121, 10 figs. (1902); “Sur la piroplasmose bovine bacilliforme,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 138, p. 648, 18 figs. (1903); “Contribution à l’étude de Haemamoeba ziemanni,” C. R. Soc. Biol. 55, p. 620, 7 figs. (1903); “Sur une hémogrégarine des gerboises,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 141, p. 295, 9 figs. (1905); (On different Haemogregarines) C. R. Soc. Biol. 59, pp. 175, 176, with figs. (1905); “Haemocytozoa. Essai de classification,” Bull. Inst. Pasteur, 3, p. 809 (1905); Laveran and F. Mesnil, “Sur les hématozoaires des poissons marins,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 135, p. 567 (1902); “Sur quelques protozoaires parasites d’une tortue d’Asie,” t.c. p. 609, 14 figs. (1902); Laveran and Nègre, “Sur un protozoaire parasite de Hyalomma aegyptium,” C. R. Soc. Biol. 58, p. 964, 6 figs. (1905); (for various earlier papers by these authors, reference should be made to the C. R. Ac. Sci. and C R. Soc. Biol. for previous years); C. Lebailly (On Piscine Haemogregarines) C. R. Ac. Sci. 139, p. 576 (1904), and C. R. Soc. Biol. 59, p. 304 (1905); J. Lignières, “Sur la ‘Tristeza,’” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 15, p. 121, pl. 6 (1901); “La Piroplasmose bovine; nouvelles recherches,” &c., Arch. parasit. 7, p. 398, pl. 4 (1903); M. Lühe, “Die im Blute schmarotzenden Protozoen,” in Mense’s Handbuch der Tropenkrankheiten (Leipzig, 1906), 3, 1; F. Marceau, “Note sur le Karyolysus lacertarum,” Arch. parasitol. 4, p. 135, 46 figs. (1901); W. MacCallum, “On the Haematozoan Infection of Birds,” J. Exp. Med. 3, p. 117, pl. 12 (1898); G. Mauser, “Die Malaria perniciosa,” Centrbl. Bakter. (1) 32, Orig. p. 695, 3 pls. (1902); C. Nicolle (On various Reptilian Haemogregarines), C. R. Soc. Biol. 56, pp. 330, 608 and 912, with figs. (1904); Nicolle and C. Comte, “Sur le rôle ... de Hyalomma ... dans l’infection hémogrégarinienne,” op. cit. 58, p. 1045 (1905); Norcard and Motas, “Contribution à l’étude de la piroplasmose canine,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 16, p. 256, pls. 5 and 6 (1902); G. Nuttall and G. Graham-Smith, “Canine piroplasmosis,” J. Hygiene, p. 237, pl. 9 (1905); F. Schaudinn, “Der Generationswechsel der Coccidien und Hämosporidien,” Zool. Centrbl. 6, p. 675 (1899); “Studien über krankheitserregende Protozoen—II. Plasmodium vivax,” Arb. Kais. Gesundheitsamte, 19, p. 169, pls. 4-6 (1902); E. and E. Sergent (On different Haemogregarines), C. R. Soc. Biol. 56, pp. 130, 132 (1904), op. cit. 58, pp. 56, 57, 670 (1905); J. Siegel, “Die geschlechtliche Entwickelung von Haemogregarina,” &c., Arch. Protistenk. 2, p. 339, 7 figs. (1903); P. L. Simond, “Contribution à l’étude des hématozoaires endoglobulaires des reptiles,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 15, p. 319, 1 pl. (1901); T. Smith and F. Kilborne, “Investigations into the Nature, Causation and Prevention of Texas Cattle Fever,” Rep. Bureau Animal Industry, U.S.A., 9 and 10, p. 177, pls. (1893); A. Theiler, “The Piroplasma bigeminum of the Immune Ox,” J. Army Med. Corps, 3, pp. 469, 599, 1 pl. (1904); J. Vassal, “Sur une hématozoaire endoglobulaire nouveau d’un mammifère,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 19, p. 224, pl. 10 (1905); L. B. Wilson and W. Chowning, “Studies in Piroplasmosis hominis,” J. Infect. Diseases, 1, p. 31, 2 pls. (1904).

References.—(You can find older literature listed in most studies on Sporozoa—see bibliography under Sporozoa). P. Argutinsky, “Malaria Studies,” Arch. mikr. Anat. 59, p. 315, pls. 18-21 (1901), and op. cit. 61, p. 331, pl. 18 (1902); A. Balfour, “Haemogregarine of Mammals,” J. Trop. Med. 8, p. 241, 8 figs. (1905); C. A. Bentley, “Leucocytozoan of the Dog,” B.M.J. (1905), 1, pp. 988 and 1078; N. Berestneff, “On a New Blood Parasite of Indian Frogs,” Arch. Protistenk. 2, p. 343, pl. 8 (1903); “On ‘Leucocytozoan’ danilewskyi,” op. cit. 3, p. 376, pl. 15 (1904); A. Billet, “Contribution to the Study of Malaria and Its Hematozoa in Algeria,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 16, p. 186 (1902); (Notes on Various Haemogregarines). C. R. Soc. Biol. 56, pp. 482, 484, 607 and 741 (1904); C. Börner, "Studies on Haemosporidia," Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. 69, p. 398, 1 pl. (1901); T. Bowhill, “Equine Piroplasmosis,” &c., J. Hyg. 5, p. 7, pls. 1-3 (1905); Bowhill and C. le Doux, “Contribution to the Study of 'Piroplasmosis canis',” op. cit. 4, p. 217, pl. 11 (1904); E. Brumpt and C. Lebailly, “Description of Some New Species of Trypanosomes and Haemogregarines,” &c., C. R. Ac. Sci. 139, p. 613 (1904); A. Castellani and A. Willey, “Observations on the Haematozoa of Vertebrates in Ceylon,” Spolia Zeylan. 2, p. 78, 1 pl. (1904), and Q. J. Micr. Sci. 49, p. 383, pl. 24 (1905); S. R. Christophers, “Haemogregarina gerbilli,” Sci. Mem. India, 18, 15 pp., 1 pl. (1905); H. B. Fantham, “Lankesterella tritonis, n. sp.,” &c., Zool. Anz. 29, p. 257, 17 figs. (1905); “Piroplasma muris,” &c., Q. J. Micr. Sci. 50, p. 493, pl. 28 (1906); C. Graham-Smith, “A New Form of Parasite Found in the Red Blood Cells of Moles,” J. Hyg. 5, p. 453, pls. 13 and 14 (1905); R. Hintze, “Life Cycle and Development of Lankesterella minima,” Zool. Jahrb. Anat. 15, p. 693, pl. 36 (1902); S. James, “On a Parasite Found in the White Blood Cells of Dogs,” Sci. Mem. India, 14, 12 pp. 1 pl. (1905); R. Koch, “Preliminary Reports on the Results of a Research Trip to East Africa,” Deutsch. med. Wochenschr., 1905, p. 1865, 24 figs.; A. Labbé, “Research on the Endoglobular Blood Parasites of Vertebrates,” Arch. zool. exp. (3) ii. p. 55, 10 pls. (1894); A. Laveran, “On Some Haemogregarines of Snakes,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 135, p. 1036, 13 figs. (1902); “On a Haemamoeba from a Great Tit (Parus major),” C. R. Soc. Biol. 54, p. 1121, 10 figs. (1902); “On Bovine Bacilliform Piroplasmosis,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 138, p. 648, 18 figs. (1903); “Contribution to the Study of Haemamoeba ziemanni,” C. R. Soc. Biol. 55, p. 620, 7 figs. (1903); “On a Haemogregarine of Jerboas,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 141, p. 295, 9 figs. (1905); (On Different Haemogregarines) C. R. Soc. Biol. 59, pp. 175, 176, with figs. (1905); “Haemocytozoa. Classification Essay,” Bull. Inst. Pasteur, 3, p. 809 (1905); Laveran and F. Mesnil, “On the Hematozoa of Marine Fish,” C. R. Ac. Sci. 135, p. 567 (1902); “On Some Protozoan Parasites of an Asian Turtle,” t.c. p. 609, 14 figs. (1902); Laveran and Nègre, “On a Protozoan Parasite of Hyalomma aegyptium,” C. R. Soc. Biol. 58, p. 964, 6 figs. (1905); (for various earlier papers by these authors, refer to C. R. Ac. Sci. and C R. Soc. Biol. for previous years); C. Lebailly (On Piscine Haemogregarines) C. R. Ac. Sci. 139, p. 576 (1904), and C. R. Soc. Biol. 59, p. 304 (1905); J. Lignières, “On 'Tristeza,'” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 15, p. 121, pl. 6 (1901); “Bovine Piroplasmosis; New Researches,” &c., Arch. parasit. 7, p. 398, pl. 4 (1903); M. Lühe, “The Protozoans Parasitizing the Blood,” in Mense’s Handbuch der Tropenkrankheiten (Leipzig, 1906), 3, 1; F. Marceau, “Note on Karyolysus lacertarum,” Arch. parasitol. 4, p. 135, 46 figs. (1901); W. MacCallum, “On the Haematozoan Infection of Birds,” J. Exp. Med. 3, p. 117, pl. 12 (1898); G. Mauser, “The Pernicious Malaria,” Centrbl. Bakter. (1) 32, Orig. p. 695, 3 pls. (1902); C. Nicolle (On Various Reptilian Haemogregarines), C. R. Soc. Biol. 56, pp. 330, 608 and 912, with figs. (1904); Nicolle and C. Comte, “On the Role of Hyalomma in Haemogregarine Infection,” op. cit. 58, p. 1045 (1905); Norcard and Motas, “Contribution to the Study of Canine Piroplasmosis,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 16, p. 256, pls. 5 and 6 (1902); G. Nuttall and G. Graham-Smith, “Canine Piroplasmosis,” J. Hygiene, p. 237, pl. 9 (1905); F. Schaudinn, “The Generational Change of Coccidia and Haemosporidia,” Zool. Centrbl. 6, p. 675 (1899); “Studies on Pathogenic Protozoa—II. Plasmodium vivax,” Arb. Kais. Gesundheitsamte, 19, p. 169, pls. 4-6 (1902); E. and E. Sergent (On Different Haemogregarines), C. R. Soc. Biol. 56, pp. 130, 132 (1904), op. cit. 58, pp. 56, 57, 670 (1905); J. Siegel, “The Sexual Development of Haemogregarina,” &c., Arch. Protistenk. 2, p. 339, 7 figs. (1903); P. L. Simond, “Contribution to the Study of Endoglobular Haematozoa of Reptiles,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 15, p. 319, 1 pl. (1901); T. Smith and F. Kilborne, “Investigations into the Nature, Causation, and Prevention of Texas Cattle Fever,” Rep. Bureau Animal Industry, U.S.A., 9 and 10, p. 177, pls. (1893); A. Theiler, “The Piroplasma bigeminum of the Immune Ox,” J. Army Med. Corps, 3, pp. 469, 599, 1 pl. (1904); J. Vassal, “On a New Endoglobular Haematozoan of a Mammal,” Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 19, p. 224, pl. 10 (1905); L. B. Wilson and W. Chowning, “Studies in Piroplasmosis hominis,” J. Infect. Diseases, 1, p. 31, 2 pls. (1904).

(H. M. Wo.)

1 Compare, for example, the flagellated granules of certain Coccidia, which point unmistakably to a Flagellate ancestry.

1 Compare, for instance, the flagellated particles of some Coccidia, which clearly indicate a Flagellate background.

2 A possible exception is a doubtful species of Haemogregarina, which has been described from the walls of the blood-vessels of an Annelid.

2 A possible exception is a questionable type of Haemogregarina, which has been reported from the walls of the blood vessels of an Annelid.

3 For an interesting account of the biological relations between parasites and their hosts, and the penalty Man pays for his roving propensities, the reader should see Lankester’s article in the Quarterly Review, July 1904.

3 For an engaging look at the biological connections between parasites and their hosts, as well as the consequences humanity faces due to its wandering nature, readers should check out Lankester’s article in the Quarterly Review, July 1904.

4 This does away with one of the principal reasons on account of which some authorities consider Piroplasma (Leishmania) donovani as quite distinct from other Piroplasmata (see Trypanosomes).

4 This eliminates one of the main reasons why some experts view Piroplasma (Leishmania) donovani as significantly different from other Piroplasmata (see Trypanosomes).

5 It must not be forgotten that one species of Halteridium (H. [Trypanomorpha] noctuae) is said to have well-marked trypaniform phases in its life-cycle; these are preferably considered under Trypanosomes (q.v.), and therefore, to avoid repetition, are only thus alluded to here. Whether H. danilewskyi also becomes trypaniform in certain phases, and how far it really agrees with the criteria of a Haemosporidian above postulated, are matters which are not yet definitely known.

5 It's important to remember that one type of Halteridium (H. [Trypanomorpha] noctuae) is said to have distinct trypaniform stages in its life cycle; these are generally categorized under Trypanosomes (q.v.), and to avoid repeating information, I’ll only mention them here. Whether H. danilewskyi also has trypaniform stages at certain points in its life cycle, and how closely it meets the criteria for a Haemosporidian as described above, are questions that remain unanswered.


HAETZER, or Hetzer, LUDWIG (d. 1529), Swiss divine, was born in Switzerland, at Bischofszell, in Thurgau. He studied at Freiburg-im-Breisgau, and began his career in a chaplaincy at Wadenswil, on the Lake of Zürich. At this time his attachment to the old faith was tempered by a mystical turn, and by a devotion to the prophetical writings of the Old Testament, which he studied in the original. By 1523 we find him in Zürich, where he published, at first anonymously and in Latin (Judicium Dei), later with his name and in German (Sept. 24, 1523), a small tract against the religious use of images, and bearing the motto attached to all his subsequent works, “O Got erlösz die (or dein) Gefangnen” (“O God, set the prisoners free”). An attempt to give effect to the teaching of this (frequently reprinted) tract was followed by a public religious disputation, of which Haetzer drew up the official account. In 1524 he brought out a tract on the conversion of the Jews, and published a German version of Johann Bugenhagen’s brief exposition of the epistles of St Paul (Ephesians to Hebrews); in the dedication (dated Zürich, June 29, 1524) he undertakes to translate Bugenhagen’s comment on the Psalter. He then went to Augsburg, bearing Zwingli’s introduction to Johann Frosch. Here he came for a time under the influence of Urbanus Regius, and was for a short time the guest of Georg Regel. Returning to Zürich, he was in intercourse with leading Anabaptists (though his own position was simply the disuse of infant baptism) till their expulsion in January 1525. Again resorting to Augsburg, and resuming work as corrector of the press for his printer Silvan Ottmar, he pushed his views to the extreme of rejecting all sacraments, reaching something like the mystical standpoint of the early Quakers. He was expelled from Augsburg in the autumn of 1525, and made his way through Constance to Basel, where Oecolampadius received him kindly. He translated into German the first treatise of Oecolampadius on the Lord’s Supper (in which the words of institution are taken figuratively), and proceeding to Zürich in November, published 812 his version there in February 1526, with a preface disclaiming connexion with the Anabaptists. His relations with Zwingli were difficult; returning to Basel he published (July 18, 1526) his translation of Malachi, with Oecolampadius’s exposition, and with a preface reflecting on Zwingli. This he followed by a version of Isaiah xxxvi.-xxxvii. He next went to Strassburg, and was received by Wolfgang Capito. At Strassburg in the late autumn of 1526 he fell in with Hans Dengk or Denck, who collaborated with him in the production of his opus magnum, the translation of the Hebrew Prophets, Alle Propheten nach hebraischer Sprach vertuetscht. The preface is dated Worms, 3 April 1527; and there are editions, Worms, 13 April 1527, folio; Augsburg, 22 June 1527, folio; Worms, 7 Sept. 1527, 16º; and Augsburg, 1528, folio. It was the first Protestant version of the prophets in German, preceding Luther’s by five years, and highly spoken of by him. Haetzer and Denck now entered on a propagandist mission from place to place, with some success, but of short duration. Denck died at Basel in November 1527. Haetzer was arrested at Constance in the summer of 1528. After long imprisonment and many examinations he was condemned on the 3rd of February 1529 to die by the sword, and the sentence was executed on the following day. His demeanour on the scaffold impressed impartial witnesses, Hans Zwick and Thomas Blaurer, who speak warmly of his fervour and courage. The Dutch Baptist Martyrology describes him as “a servant of Jesus Christ.” The Moravian Chronicle says “he was condemned for the sake of divine truth.” His papers included an unpublished treatise against the essential deity of Christ, which was suppressed by Zwingli; the only extant evidence of his anti-trinitarian views being contained in eight quaint lines of German verse preserved in Sebastian Frank’s Chronica. The discovery of his heterodox Christology (which has led modern Unitarians to regard him as their proto-martyr) was followed by charges of loose living, never heard of in his lifetime, and destitute of evidence or probability.

HAETZER, or Hetzer, LUDWIG (d. 1529), Swiss theologian, was born in Switzerland, in Bischofszell, Thurgau. He studied at Freiburg-im-Breisgau and began his career as a chaplain in Wadenswil, by Lake Zurich. At that time, his commitment to the old faith was softened by a mystical inclination and a passion for the prophetic writings of the Old Testament, which he studied in their original language. By 1523, he was in Zurich, where he initially published a small tract against the religious use of images anonymously in Latin (Judicium Dei), later with his name in German (Sept. 24, 1523). This tract carried the motto that would appear on all his future works, “O Gott erlös die (or dein) Gefangnen” (“O God, set the prisoners free”). He attempted to put the teachings of this frequently reprinted tract into practice, which led to a public religious debate, for which Haetzer wrote the official record. In 1524, he released a tract on the conversion of the Jews and published a German translation of Johann Bugenhagen’s brief commentary on the epistles of St. Paul (Ephesians to Hebrews); in the dedication (dated Zurich, June 29, 1524), he committed to translating Bugenhagen’s commentary on the Psalms. He then went to Augsburg, carrying Zwingli’s introduction to Johann Frosch. There, he was influenced for a time by Urbanus Regius and briefly stayed with Georg Regel. Returning to Zurich, he interacted with leading Anabaptists (although his own position was simply against infant baptism) until their expulsion in January 1525. He went back to Augsburg and resumed work as a proofreader for his printer Silvan Ottmar, pushing his beliefs to the point of rejecting all sacraments, reaching a viewpoint similar to the early Quakers. He was expelled from Augsburg in the fall of 1525 and traveled through Constance to Basel, where Oecolampadius welcomed him warmly. He translated into German the first treatise by Oecolampadius on the Lord’s Supper (where the words of institution are taken figuratively), and he published his version in Zurich in February 1526, with a preface disavowing any connection with the Anabaptists. His relationship with Zwingli was strained; upon returning to Basel, he published (July 18, 1526) his translation of Malachi, with Oecolampadius’s commentary, alongside a preface criticizing Zwingli. He followed this with a version of Isaiah chapters 36-37. Next, he went to Strassburg, where Wolfgang Capito received him. In late 1526, he collaborated with Hans Dengk or Denck in creating his opus magnum, the translation of the Hebrew Prophets, titled Alle Propheten nach hebraischer Sprach vertuetscht. The preface is dated Worms, April 3, 1527, with editions released in Worms on April 13, 1527, folio; Augsburg, June 22, 1527, folio; Worms, September 7, 1527, 16º; and Augsburg, 1528, folio. This was the first Protestant version of the prophets in German, released five years before Luther’s and highly regarded by him. Haetzer and Denck then undertook a mission to spread their views from place to place, achieving some success but for a short time. Denck passed away in Basel in November 1527. Haetzer was arrested in Constance in the summer of 1528. After long imprisonment and numerous interrogations, he was sentenced to death by sword on February 3, 1529, and the sentence was carried out the next day. His demeanor on the scaffold impressed unbiased witnesses, Hans Zwick and Thomas Blaurer, who spoke highly of his fervor and bravery. The Dutch Baptist Martyrology describes him as “a servant of Jesus Christ.” The Moravian Chronicle notes, “he was condemned for the sake of divine truth.” His papers included an unpublished treatise against the essential divinity of Christ, which Zwingli suppressed; the only remaining evidence of his anti-trinitarian views is found in eight quaint lines of German verse preserved in Sebastian Frank’s Chronica. The discovery of his nontraditional Christology (which has led modern Unitarians to see him as their proto-martyr) was followed by accusations of immoral behavior, which were never known during his life and lacked evidence or plausibility.

See Breitinger, “Anecdota quaedam de L. H.” in Museum Helveticum (1746), parts 21 and 23; Wallace, Antitrinitarian Biography (1850); Dutch Martyrology (Hanserd Knollys Society) (1856); Th. Keim, in Hauck’s Realencyklopädie (1899).

See Breitinger, “Some Anecdotes About L. H.” in Museum Helveticum (1746), parts 21 and 23; Wallace, Antitrinitarian Biography (1850); Dutch Martyrology (Hanserd Knollys Society) (1856); Th. Keim, in Hauck’s Realencyklopädie (1899).

(A. Go.*)

HĀFIZ. Shams-ud-din Mahommed, better known by his takhallus or nom de plume of Hāfiz, was one of the most celebrated writers of Persian lyrical poetry. He was born at Shiraz, the capital of Fars, in the early part of the 8th century of the Mahommedan era, that is to say, in the 14th of our own. The exact date of his birth is uncertain, but he attained a ripe old age and died in 791 A.H. (A.D. 1388). This is the date given in the chronogram which is engraved on his tomb, although several Persian biographers give a different year. Very little is actually known about his life, which appears to have been passed in retirement in Shiraz, of which he always speaks in terms of affectionate admiration. He was a subject of the Muzaffar princes, who ruled in Shiraz, Yazd, Kirman and Ispahan, until the dynasty was overthrown by Timur (Tamerlane). Of these princes his especial patrons were Shah Shujā’ and Shah Mansūr. He early devoted himself to the study of poetry and theology, and also became learned in mystic philosophy, which he studied under Shaik Mahmūd ‘Aṭṭār, chief of an order of dervishes. Hāfiz afterwards enrolled himself in the same order and became a professor of Koranic exegesis in a college which his friend and patron Haji Kiwam-ud-din, the vizier, specially founded for him. This was probably the reason of his adopting the sobriquet of Hāfiz (“one who remembers”), which is technically applied to any person who has learned the Koran by heart. The restraints of an ascetic life seem to have been very little to Hāfiz’s taste, and his loose conduct and wine-bibbing propensities drew upon him the severe censure of his monastic colleagues. In revenge he satirizes them unmercifully in his verses, and seldom loses an opportunity of alluding to their hypocrisy. Hāfiz’s fame as a poet was soon rapidly spread throughout the Mahommedan world, and several powerful monarchs sent him presents and pressing invitations to visit them. Amongst others he was invited by Mahmūd Shah Bahmani, who reigned in the south of India. After crossing the Indus and passing through Lahore he reached Hurmuz, and embarked on board a vessel sent for him by the Indian prince. He seems, however, to have been a bad sailor, and, having invented an excuse for being put ashore, made the best of his way back to Shiraz. Some biographies narrate a story of an interview between Hāfiz and the invader Timur. The latter sent for him and asked angrily, “Art thou he who was so bold as to offer my two great cities Samarkand and Bokhara for the black mole on thy mistress’s cheek?” alluding to a well-known verse in one of his odes. “Yes, sire,” replied Hāfiz, “and it is by such acts of generosity that I have brought myself to such a state of destitution that I have now to solicit your bounty.” Timur was so pleased at his ready wit that he dismissed the poet with a handsome present. Unfortunately for the truth of this story Timur did not capture Shiraz till A.D. 1393, while the latest date that can be assigned to Hāfiz’s death is 1391. Of his private life little or nothing is known. One of his poems is said to record the death of his wife, another that of a favourite unmarried son, and several others speak of his love for a girl called Shākh i Nabat, “Sugar-cane branch,” and this is almost all of his personal history that can be gathered from his writings. He was, like most Persians, a Shi‘ite by religion, believing in the transmission of the office of Imām (head of the Moslem Church) in the family of Ali, cousin of the prophet, and rejecting the Hadith (traditional sayings) of Mahomet, which form the Sunna or supplementary code of Mahommedan ceremonial law. One of his odes which contains a verse in praise of Ali is engraved on the poet’s tomb, but is omitted by Sudi, the Turkish editor and commentator, who was himself a rigid Sunnite. Hāfiz’s heretical opinions and dissipated life caused difficulties to be raised by the ecclesiastical authorities on his death as to his interment in consecrated ground. The question was at length settled by Hāfiz’s own works, which had then already begun to be used, as they are now throughout the East, for the purposes of divination, in the same manner as Virgil was employed in the middle ages for the divination called Sortes Virgilianae. Opening the book at random after pronouncing the customary formula asking for inspiration, the objectors hit upon the following verse—“Turn not away thy foot from the bier of Hāfiz, for though immersed in sin, he will be admitted into Paradise.” He was accordingly buried in the centre of a small cemetery at Shiraz, now included in an enclosure called the Hāfiziyeh.

HAFIZ. Shams-ud-din Mahommed, better known by his takhallus or pen name Hāfiz, was one of the most celebrated writers of Persian lyrical poetry. He was born in Shiraz, the capital of Fars, in the early part of the 8th century of the Islamic calendar, which corresponds to the 14th century in our calendar. The exact date of his birth is uncertain, but he lived to a ripe old age and died in 791 A.H. (CE 1388). This is the date inscribed on the chronogram on his tomb, although several Persian biographers cite a different year. Very little is actually known about his life, which seems to have been spent in seclusion in Shiraz, a place he always speaks of with affection and admiration. He was a subject of the Muzaffar princes, who ruled in Shiraz, Yazd, Kirman, and Ispahan, until the dynasty was overthrown by Timur (Tamerlane). Of these princes, his special patrons were Shah Shujā’ and Shah Mansūr. He dedicated himself to the study of poetry and theology from a young age, and also became knowledgeable in mystic philosophy, which he studied under Shaik Mahmūd ‘Aṭṭār, head of an order of dervishes. Hāfiz later joined the same order and became a professor of Koranic exegesis at a college that his friend and patron Haji Kiwam-ud-din, the vizier, specifically founded for him. This was likely the reason he adopted the nickname Hāfiz (“one who remembers”), which is technically used for anyone who has memorized the Koran. The limitations of an ascetic life didn't seem to suit Hāfiz, and his carefree behavior and love for wine led to harsh criticism from his monastic peers. In retaliation, he mercilessly satirizes them in his verses and often points out their hypocrisy. Hāfiz’s fame as a poet quickly spread throughout the Islamic world, and several powerful kings sent him gifts and invitations to visit them. One of these was Mahmūd Shah Bahmani, who ruled in southern India. After crossing the Indus and passing through Lahore, he arrived at Hurmuz, where he boarded a ship sent for him by the Indian prince. However, he seems to have been a poor sailor, and after making an excuse to be put ashore, he quickly returned to Shiraz. Some biographies recount a story of a meeting between Hāfiz and the invader Timur. Timur summoned him and asked angrily, “Are you the one bold enough to offer my two great cities, Samarkand and Bokhara, for the black mole on your mistress’s cheek?” referring to a well-known line from one of his poems. “Yes, sire,” Hāfiz replied, “and it is by such acts of generosity that I have brought myself to a state of destitution, making me now seek your favor.” Timur was so impressed by his quick wit that he dismissed the poet with a generous gift. Unfortunately for the truth of this story, Timur did not capture Shiraz until AD 1393, while the latest date attributed to Hāfiz’s death is 1391. Little to nothing is known about his private life. One of his poems reportedly marks the death of his wife, another that of a favorite unwed son, and several others speak of his love for a girl called Shākh i Nabat, “Sugar-cane branch,” and this is nearly all that can be gathered about his personal history from his writings. Like most Persians, he was a Shi‘ite by faith, believing in the continuation of the office of Imām (leader of the Muslim community) within the family of Ali, the prophet’s cousin, and rejecting the Hadith (traditional sayings) of Mahomet, which form the Sunna or additional code of Islamic ceremonial law. One of his odes that contains a verse praising Ali is inscribed on the poet’s tomb, but is left out by Sudi, the Turkish editor and commentator, who was himself a strict Sunnite. Hāfiz’s unorthodox views and dissolute life led to complications raised by church authorities regarding his burial in consecrated ground. The issue was eventually resolved by Hāfiz’s own works, which had begun to be used, as they are now throughout the East, for divination, similar to how Virgil was used in the Middle Ages for the practice known as Sortes Virgilianae. By opening the book at random after reciting the usual formula seeking inspiration, the objectors came across the following verse—“Turn not away thy foot from the bier of Hāfiz, for although immersed in sin, he will be admitted into Paradise.” He was thus buried in the center of a small cemetery in Shiraz, now part of an area called the Hāfiziyeh.

His principal work is the Dīwān, that is, a collection of short odes or sonnets called ghazals, and consisting of from five to sixteen baits or couplets each, all the couplets in each ode having the same rhyme in the last hemistich, and the last couplet always introducing the poet’s own nom de plume. The whole of these are arranged in alphabetical order, an arrangement which certainly facilitates reference but makes it absolutely impossible to ascertain their chronological order, and therefore detracts from their value as a means of throwing light upon the growth and development of his genius or the incidents of his career. They are often held together by a very slender thread of continuous thought, and few editions agree exactly in the order of the couplets. Still, a careful study of them, especially from the point of view indicated by the Sufiistic system of philosophy, will always show that a single idea does run throughout the whole. The nature of these poems has been the subject of much discussion in the West, some scholars seeing in their anacreontic utterances nothing but sensuality and materialism, while others, following the Oriental school, maintain that they are wholly and entirely mystic and philosophic. Something between the two would probably be nearer the truth. It must be remembered that Hāfiz was a professed dervish and Sūfi, and that his ghazals were in all probability published from a takia, and arranged with at least a view to Sufiistic interpretation. At the same time it is ridiculous to suppose that the glowing imagery, the gorgeous and often tender descriptions of natural beauties, the fervent love passages, and the roystering drinking songs were composed in cool blood or with deliberate ascetic purpose. The beauty of Hāfiz’s poetry is that it is natural. It is the outcome 813 of a fervent soul and a lofty genius delighting in nature and enjoying life; and it is the poet’s misfortune that he lived in an age and amongst a people where rigid conventionality demanded that his free and spontaneous thoughts should be recast in an artificial mould.

His main work is the Dīwān, which is a collection of short poems or sonnets called ghazals, each consisting of five to sixteen baits or couplets. All the couplets in each poem share the same rhyme in the final hemistich, with the last couplet always featuring the poet’s own nom de plume. They are arranged in alphabetical order, which makes it easy to reference them but completely prevents us from understanding their chronological order, thus diminishing their value for illuminating the growth and development of his talent or significant events in his life. Often, the couplets are connected by a tenuous thread of continuous thought, and few editions agree on the exact order of the couplets. Nevertheless, a thorough study of them, particularly from the perspective suggested by Sufi philosophy, will reveal that a single idea runs throughout the collection. The nature of these poems has sparked much debate in the West; some scholars interpret their playful themes as nothing more than sensuality and materialism, while others, adhering to the Oriental perspective, argue that they are entirely mystic and philosophical. A position somewhere in between would likely be closer to the truth. It’s important to remember that Hāfiz was a practicing dervish and Sūfi, and his ghazals were likely published from a takia with at least some intent for Sufi interpretation. At the same time, it's absurd to think that the vivid imagery, rich and often delicate depictions of nature, passionate love passages, and lively drinking songs were written in a detached or deliberately ascetic mindset. The beauty of Hāfiz’s poetry lies in its naturalness. It emerges from a passionate soul and a great genius reveling in nature and embracing life; it is a misfortune for the poet that he lived in an era and among a society where strict conventions required his free and spontaneous thoughts to be reshaped into an artificial format.

Besides the Dīwān, Hāfiz wrote a number of other poems; the Leipzig edition of his works contains 573 ghazals (forming the Dīwān), 42 kit‘as or fragments, 69 ruba‘iyāt or tetrastics, 6 masnaviyāt or poems in rhyming couplets, 2 kasāïd, idylls or panegyrics, and 1 mukhammes or poem in five-line strophes. Other editions contain several tarji‘-band or poems with a refrain. The whole Dīwān was translated into English prose by H. Wilberforce Clarke in 1891, with introduction and exhaustive commentary and bibliography; a few rhyming versions of single poems by Sir William Jones, J. Nott, J. Hindley, Falconer, &c., are to be found scattered through the pages of the Oriental Miscellany and other periodicals, and a fine edition containing a verse rendering of the principal poems by H. Bicknell appeared in 1875. Other selections by S. Robinson (1875), A. Rogers (1889), J. H. M‘Carthy (1893), and Gertrude L. Bell (1897). The principal German versions are by von Hammer Purgstall (1812), which gave the first impulse to Goethe’s Westöstlicher Diwan; a rhyming and rhythmical translation of a large portion of Hāfiz’s works by Vincenz von Rosenzweig of Vienna (Vienna, 1858), which contains also the Persian text and notes; Der Diwan des Schemseddīn Muhammed Hāfis, by G. H. F. Nesselmann (Berlin, 1865), in which the rhyming system of the original is imitated. Besides these, the reader may consult d’Herbelot, Bibliothèque orientale, article “Hafiz”; Sir William Ouseley’s Oriental Collections (1797-1798); A Specimen of Persian Poetry, or Odes of Hafiz, by John Richardson (London, 1802); Biographical Notices of Persian Poets, by Sir Gore Ouseley (Oriental Translation Fund, 1846); and an excellent article by Professor E. B. Cowell in Macmillan’s Magazine (No. 177, July 1874); J. A. Vullers, Vitae poëtarum Persicorum (1839, translated from Daulatshah); S. Robinson, Persian Poetry for English Readers (1883). The best edition of the text is perhaps that edited by Hermann Brockhaus of Leipzig (1854-1856). which is based on the recension of the Turkish editor Sudi, and contains his commentary in Turkish on the first eighty ghazals. See also H. Ethé in Grundriss der iranischen Philologie, ii. (Strassburg, 1896); P. Horn, Geschichte der persischen Literatur (Leipzig, 1901).

Besides the Dīwān, Hāfiz wrote several other poems; the Leipzig edition of his works includes 573 ghazals (making up the Dīwān), 42 kit‘as or fragments, 69 ruba‘iyāt or tetrastics, 6 masnaviyāt or poems in rhyming couplets, 2 kasāïd, which are idylls or panegyrics, and 1 mukhammes or poem in five-line strophes. Other editions feature several tarji‘-band or poems with a refrain. The entire Dīwān was translated into English prose by H. Wilberforce Clarke in 1891, complete with an introduction, thorough commentary, and bibliography; a few rhyming versions of individual poems by Sir William Jones, J. Nott, J. Hindley, Falconer, etc., can be found spread throughout the Oriental Miscellany and other periodicals, and a remarkable edition featuring a verse translation of the main poems by H. Bicknell was published in 1875. Other selections were made by S. Robinson (1875), A. Rogers (1889), J. H. M‘Carthy (1893), and Gertrude L. Bell (1897). The main German translations include the one by von Hammer Purgstall (1812), which inspired Goethe’s Westöstlicher Diwan; a rhyming and rhythmic translation of a significant portion of Hāfiz’s works by Vincenz von Rosenzweig of Vienna (Vienna, 1858), which also includes the Persian text and notes; Der Diwan des Schemseddīn Muhammed Hāfis, by G. H. F. Nesselmann (Berlin, 1865), which mimics the rhyming structure of the original. Additionally, readers might refer to d’Herbelot, Bibliothèque orientale, article “Hafiz”; Sir William Ouseley’s Oriental Collections (1797-1798); A Specimen of Persian Poetry, or Odes of Hafiz, by John Richardson (London, 1802); Biographical Notices of Persian Poets, by Sir Gore Ouseley (Oriental Translation Fund, 1846); and an excellent article by Professor E. B. Cowell in Macmillan’s Magazine (No. 177, July 1874); J. A. Vullers, Vitae poëtarum Persicorum (1839, translated from Daulatshah); S. Robinson, Persian Poetry for English Readers (1883). The best edition of the text may be the one edited by Hermann Brockhaus of Leipzig (1854-1856), which is based on the version by the Turkish editor Sudi, and includes his commentary in Turkish on the first eighty ghazals. For more information, see H. Ethé in Grundriss der iranischen Philologie, ii. (Strassburg, 1896); P. Horn, Geschichte der persischen Literatur (Leipzig, 1901).

(E. H. P.)

HAG. (1) (Probably a shortened form of the O. Eng. hægtesse, hegtes, cognate with Ger. Hexe, witch, Dutch hecse), a word common during the 16th and 17th centuries for a female demon or evil spirit, and so particularly applied to such supernatural beings as the harpies and fairies of classical mythology, and also to witches. In modern usage the word is generally used of a hideous old woman whose repulsive exterior is accompanied by malice or wickedness. The name is also used of an eel-like parasitic fish, Myxine glutinosa, allied to the lamprey.

HAG. (1) (Probably a shortened form of the Old English hægtesse, hegtes, related to the German Hexe, witch, and the Dutch hecse), a term that was common in the 16th and 17th centuries for a female demon or evil spirit, particularly used to refer to supernatural beings like the harpies and fairies of classical mythology, as well as witches. In modern usage, the word typically describes an ugly old woman whose disgusting appearance is matched by malice or wickedness. The name is also used for an eel-like parasitic fish, Myxine glutinosa, which is related to the lamprey.

(2) A word common in Scottish and northern English dialects for an enclosed piece of wood, a copse. This is the same word as “hedge” (see Hedges) and “haw.” “Hag” also means “to cut,” and is used in Scotland of an extent of woodland marked out for felling, and of a quantity of felled wood. This word is also used of a cutting in the peat of a “moss” or “bog,” and hence applied to the small plots of firm ground or heather in a bog; it is common in the form “moss-hags.”

(2) A term frequently used in Scottish and northern English dialects for a small, enclosed area of woodland, known as a copse. This is the same word as “hedge” (see Hedges) and “haw.” “Hag” also means “to cut” and is used in Scotland to refer to an area of woodland designated for logging and to describe a quantity of cut wood. This word is also used to denote a cutting in the peat of a “moss” or “bog,” and is consequently applied to the small patches of solid ground or heather found in a bog; it is commonly seen in the form “moss-hags.”


HAGEDORN, FRIEDRICH VON (1708-1754), German poet, was born on the 23rd of April 1708 at Hamburg, where his father, a man of scientific and literary taste, was Danish minister. He was educated at the gymnasium of Hamburg, and later (1726) became a student of law at Jena. Returning to Hamburg in 1729, he obtained the appointment of unpaid private secretary to the Danish ambassador in London, where he lived till 1731. Hagedorn’s return to Hamburg was followed by a period of great poverty and hardship, but in 1733 he was appointed secretary to the so-called “English Court” (Englischer Hof) in Hamburg, a trading company founded in the 13th century. He shortly afterwards married, and from this time had sufficient leisure to pursue his literary occupations till his death on the 28th of October 1754. Hagedorn is the first German poet who bears unmistakable testimony to the nation’s recovery from the devastation wrought by the Thirty Years’ War. He is eminently a social poet. His light and graceful love-songs and anacreontics, with their undisguised joie de vivre, introduced a new note into the German lyric; his fables and tales in verse are hardly inferior in form and in delicate persiflage to those of his master La Fontaine, and his moralizing poetry re-echoes the philosophy of Horace. He exerted a dominant influence on the German lyric until late in the 18th century.

HAGEDORN, FRIEDRICH VON (1708-1754), German poet, was born on April 23, 1708, in Hamburg, where his father, a man with a passion for science and literature, served as the Danish minister. He was educated at the Hamburg gymnasium and later (1726) studied law at Jena. After returning to Hamburg in 1729, he became the unpaid private secretary to the Danish ambassador in London, where he lived until 1731. Hagedorn's return to Hamburg was marked by a challenging period of poverty, but in 1733 he was appointed secretary to the "English Court" (Englischer Hof) in Hamburg, a trading company established in the 13th century. Soon after, he got married, allowing him enough time to focus on his literary work until he passed away on October 28, 1754. Hagedorn is the first German poet to clearly reflect the nation’s recovery from the destruction caused by the Thirty Years’ War. He is primarily a social poet. His light and charming love songs and anacreontics, brimming with an unmistakable joie de vivre, brought a fresh tone to German lyric poetry; his fables and verse tales are nearly as refined and witty as those of his master La Fontaine, and his moral poetry echoes the philosophy of Horace. He had a significant influence on German lyric poetry well into the late 18th century.

The first collection of Hagedorn’s poems was published at Hamburg shortly after his return from Jena in 1729, under the title Versuch einiger Gedichte (reprinted by A. Sauer, Heilbronn, 1883). In 1738 appeared Versuch in poetischen Fabeln und Erzählungen; in 1742 a collection of his lyric poems, under the title Sammlung neuer Oden und Lieder; and his Moralische Gedichte in 1750. A collection of his entire works was published at Hamburg after his death in 1757. The best is J. J. Eschenburg’s edition (5 vols., Hamburg, 1800). Selections of his poetry with an excellent introduction in F. Muncker’s Anakreontiker und preussisch-patriotische Lyriker (Stuttgart, 1894). See also H. Schuster, F. von Hagedorn und seine Bedeutung für die deutsche Literatur (Leipzig, 1882); W. Eigenbrodt, Hagedorn und die Erzählung in Reimversen (Berlin, 1884).

The first collection of Hagedorn’s poems was published in Hamburg shortly after he returned from Jena in 1729, titled Versuch einiger Gedichte (reprinted by A. Sauer, Heilbronn, 1883). In 1738, Versuch in poetischen Fabeln und Erzählungen came out; in 1742, a collection of his lyrics titled Sammlung neuer Oden und Lieder; and his Moralische Gedichte was released in 1750. A complete collection of his works was published in Hamburg after his death in 1757. The best edition is J. J. Eschenburg’s (5 vols., Hamburg, 1800). Selections of his poetry with a great introduction can be found in F. Muncker’s Anakreontiker und preussisch-patriotische Lyriker (Stuttgart, 1894). Also see H. Schuster, F. von Hagedorn und seine Bedeutung für die deutsche Literatur (Leipzig, 1882); W. Eigenbrodt, Hagedorn und die Erzählung in Reimversen (Berlin, 1884).


HAGEN, FRIEDRICH HEINRICH VON DER (1780-1856), German philologist, chiefly distinguished for his researches in Old German literature, was born at Schmiedeberg In Brandenburg on the 19th of February 1780. After studying law at the university of Halle, he obtained a legal appointment in the state service at Berlin, but in 1806 resigned this office in order to devote himself exclusively to letters. In 1810 he was appointed professor extraordinarius of German literature in the university of Berlin; in the following year he was transferred in a similar capacity to Breslau, and in 1821 returned to Berlin as professor ordinarius. He died at Berlin on the 11th of June 1856. Although von der Hagen’s critical work is now entirely out of date, the chief merit of awakening an interest in old German poetry belongs to him.

HAGEN, FRIEDRICH HEINRICH VON DER (1780-1856), German philologist, best known for his research in Old German literature, was born in Schmiedeberg, Brandenburg, on February 19, 1780. After studying law at the University of Halle, he secured a legal position in the state service in Berlin, but in 1806 he resigned to focus entirely on literature. In 1810, he was appointed as an extraordinary professor of German literature at the University of Berlin; the following year, he moved to Breslau in a similar role, and in 1821, he returned to Berlin as an ordinary professor. He passed away in Berlin on June 11, 1856. Although von der Hagen’s critical work is now considered outdated, he is credited with sparking interest in old German poetry.

His principal publications are the Nibelungenlied, of which he issued four editions, the first in 1810 and the last in 1842; the Minnesinger (Leipzig, 1838-1856, 4 vols, in 5 parts); Lieder der ältern Edda (Berlin, 1812); Gottfried von Strassburg (Berlin, 1823); a collection of Old German tales under the title Gesamtabenteuer (Stuttgart, 1850, 3 vols.) and Das Heldenbuch (Leipzig, 1855). He also published Über die ältesten Darstellungen der Faustsage (Berlin, 1844); and from 1835 he edited Das neue Jahrbuch der Berlinischen Gesellschaft für deutsche Sprache und Altertumskunde. His correspondence with C. G. Heyne and G. F. Benecke was published by K. Dziatzko (Leipzig, 1893).

His main publications are the Nibelungenlied, for which he released four editions, the first in 1810 and the last in 1842; the Minnesinger (Leipzig, 1838-1856, 4 vols, in 5 parts); Lieder der ältern Edda (Berlin, 1812); Gottfried von Strassburg (Berlin, 1823); a collection of Old German tales titled Gesamtabenteuer (Stuttgart, 1850, 3 vols.); and Das Heldenbuch (Leipzig, 1855). He also published Über die ältesten Darstellungen der Faustsage (Berlin, 1844); and from 1835 he edited Das neue Jahrbuch der Berlinischen Gesellschaft für deutsche Sprache und Altertumskunde. His correspondence with C. G. Heyne and G. F. Benecke was published by K. Dziatzko (Leipzig, 1893).


HAGEN, a town of Germany, In the Prussian province of Westphalia. Pop. (1905), 77,498. It lies amid well-wooded hills at the confluence of the Ennepe with the Volme, 15 m. N.E. of Elberfeld, on the main line to Brunswick and Berlin, and at the junction of important lines of railway, connecting it with the principal towns of the Westphalian iron district. It has five Evangelical churches, a Roman Catholic church, an Old Catholic church, a synagogue, a gymnasium, realgyrnnasium, and a technical school with special classes for machine-building. There are also a museum, a theatre, and a prettily arranged municipal park. Hagen is one of the most flourishing commercial towns in Westphalia, and possesses extensive iron and steel works, large cotton print works, woollen and cotton factories, manufactures of leather, paper, tobacco, and iron and steel wares, breweries and distilleries. There are large limestone quarries in the vicinity and also an alabaster quarry.

HAGEN, is a town in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Westphalia. Population (1905): 77,498. It sits among well-wooded hills at the meeting point of the Ennepe and Volme rivers, 15 miles northeast of Elberfeld. Hagen is on the main route to Brunswick and Berlin and is at the intersection of major railway lines connecting it with the key towns in the Westphalian iron district. The town features five Evangelical churches, a Roman Catholic church, an Old Catholic church, a synagogue, a gymnasium, a realgymnasium, and a technical school that offers special classes for machine-building. There’s also a museum, a theater, and a nicely arranged municipal park. Hagen is one of the most prosperous commercial towns in Westphalia, with extensive iron and steel manufacturing, large cotton printing facilities, wool and cotton factories, and produces leather, paper, tobacco, iron and steel goods, breweries, and distilleries. Nearby, there are large limestone quarries as well as an alabaster quarry.


HAGENAU, a town of Germany, in the imperial province of Alsace-Lorraine, situated in the middle of the Hagenau Forest, on the Moder, and on the railway from Strassburg to Weissenburg, 10 m. N.N.E. of the former city. Pop. (1905), 18,500. It has two Evangelical and two ancient Catholic churches (one dating from the 12th, the other from the 13th century), a gymnasium, a public library, a hospital, and a theatre. The principal industries are wool and cotton spinning, and the manufacture of porcelain, earthenware, boots, soap, oil, sparkling wines and beer. There is also considerable trade in hops and vegetables. Hagenau is an important military centre and has a large garrison, including three artillery battalions.

HAGENAU, is a town in Germany, located in the imperial province of Alsace-Lorraine, right in the middle of the Hagenau Forest, along the Moder River, and on the railway line from Strassburg to Weissenburg, 10 miles N.N.E. of Strassburg. Its population in 1905 was 18,500. The town features two Evangelical churches and two ancient Catholic churches (one from the 12th century and the other from the 13th century), a gymnasium, a public library, a hospital, and a theatre. The main industries include wool and cotton spinning, as well as the production of porcelain, earthenware, boots, soap, oil, sparkling wines, and beer. There is also significant trade in hops and vegetables. Hagenau serves as an important military center and houses a large garrison that includes three artillery battalions.

Hagenau dates from the beginning of the 12th century, and owes its origin to the erection of a hunting lodge by the dukes of Swabia. The emperor Frederick I. surrounded it with walls and gave it town rights in 1154. On the site of the hunting lodge he founded an imperial palace, in which were preserved the jewelled imperial crown, sceptre, imperial globe, and sword of Charlemagne. Subsequently it became the seat of the Landvogt 814 of Hagenau, the imperial advocatus in Lower Alsace. Richard of Cornwall, king of the Romans, made it an imperial city in 1257. In 1648 it came into the possession of France, and in 1673 Louis XIV. caused the fortifications to be razed. In 1675 it was captured by imperial troops, but in 1677 it was retaken by the French and nearly all destroyed by fire. In 1871 it fell, with the rest of Alsace-Lorraine, into the possession of Germany.

Hagenau dates back to the early 12th century and was founded when the dukes of Swabia built a hunting lodge. Emperor Frederick I surrounded it with walls and granted it town rights in 1154. On the site of the hunting lodge, he established an imperial palace, which housed the jeweled imperial crown, scepter, imperial globe, and sword of Charlemagne. It later became the seat of the Landvogt 814 of Hagenau, the imperial advocatus in Lower Alsace. Richard of Cornwall, king of the Romans, declared it an imperial city in 1257. In 1648, it came under French control, and in 1673, Louis XIV ordered the fortifications to be torn down. In 1675, it was captured by imperial troops, but in 1677, the French retook it and it was almost completely destroyed by fire. In 1871, it fell, along with the rest of Alsace-Lorraine, into German hands.


HAGENBACH, KARL RUDOLF (1801-1874). German church historian, was born on the 4th of March 1801 at Basel, where his father was a practising physician. His preliminary education was received at a Pestalozzian school, and afterwards at the gymnasium, whence in due course he passed to the newly reorganized local university. He early devoted himself to theological studies and the service of the church, while at the same time cherishing and developing broad “humanistic” tendencies which found expression in many ways and especially in an enthusiastic admiration for the writings of Herder. The years 1820-1823 were spent first at Bonn, where G. C. F. Lücke (1791-1855) exerted a powerful influence on his thought, and afterwards at Berlin, where Schleiermacher and Neander became his masters. Returning in 1823 to Basel, where W. M. L. de Wette had recently been appointed to a theological chair, he distinguished himself greatly by his trial-dissertation, Observationes historico-hermeneuticae circa Origenis methodum interpretendae sacrae Scripturae; in 1824 he became professor extraordinarius, and in 1829 professor ordinarius of theology. Apart from his academic labours in connexion with the history of dogma and of the church, he lived a life of great and varied usefulness as a theologian, a preacher and a citizen; and at his “jubilee” in 1873, not only the university and town of Basel but also the various churches of Switzerland united to do him honour. He died at Basel on the 7th of June 1874.

Hagenbach, Karl Rudolf (1801-1874). German church historian, was born on March 4, 1801, in Basel, where his father was a practicing physician. He received his early education at a Pestalozzian school and later at the gymnasium, from which he eventually moved on to the newly reorganized local university. He dedicated himself early to theological studies and the church, while also nurturing broad “humanistic” interests that found expression in various ways, especially in his enthusiastic admiration for Herder's writings. The years 1820-1823 were spent first at Bonn, where G. C. F. Lücke (1791-1855) had a significant impact on his thinking, and later at Berlin, where Schleiermacher and Neander became his mentors. Upon returning to Basel in 1823, where W. M. L. de Wette had recently been appointed to a theological chair, he made a mark with his trial dissertation, Observationes historico-hermeneuticae circa Origenis methodum interpretendae sacrae Scripturae; in 1824 he became a professor extraordinarius, and in 1829 a professor ordinarius of theology. Beyond his academic work related to the history of dogma and the church, he led a life of significant and diverse contributions as a theologian, preacher, and citizen; and at his “jubilee” in 1873, not only the university and town of Basel but also various churches in Switzerland came together to honor him. He died in Basel on June 7, 1874.

Hagenbach was a voluminous author in many departments, but he is specially distinguished as a writer on church history. Though neither so learned and condensed as the contributions of Gieseler, nor so original and profound as those of Neander, his lectures are clear, attractive and free from narrow sectarian prejudice. In dogmatics, while avowedly a champion of the “mediation theology” (Vermittelungstheologie), based upon the fundamental conceptions of Herder and Schleiermacher, he was much less revolutionary than were many others of his school. He sought to maintain the old confessional documents, and to make the objective prevail over the purely subjective manner of viewing theological questions. But he himself was aware that in the endeavour to do so he was not always successful, and that his delineations of Christian dogma often betrayed a vacillating and uncertain hand.

Hagenbach was a prolific author in many fields, but he is especially noted as a writer on church history. While not as scholarly and concise as Gieseler’s work, nor as original and deep as Neander’s, his lectures are clear, engaging, and free from narrow sectarian bias. In dogmatics, openly a supporter of “mediation theology” (Vermittelungstheologie), founded on the core ideas of Herder and Schleiermacher, he was far less radical than many others from his school. He aimed to uphold the old confessional documents and to prioritize the objective over the purely subjective approach to theological issues. However, he was aware that in trying to achieve this, he wasn’t always successful, and that his descriptions of Christian dogma often showed a hesitating and uncertain touch.

His works include Tabellarische Übersicht der Dogmengeschichte (1828); Encyclopädie u. Methodologie der theol. Wissenschaften (1833); Vorlesungen über Wesen u. Geschichte der Reformation u. des Protestantismus (1834-1843); Lehrbuch der Dogmengeschichte (1840-1841, 5th ed., 1867; English transl., 1850); Vorlesungen über die Geschichte der alien Kirche (1853-1855); Vorlesungen über die Kirchengeschichte des Mittelalters (1860-1861); Grundlinien der Homiletik u. Liturgik (1863); biographies of Johannes Oecolampadius (1482-1564) and Oswald Myconius (1488-1552) and a Geschichte der theol. Schule Basels (1860); his Predigten (1858-1875), two volumes of poems entitled Luther u. seine Zeit (1838), and Gedichte (1846). The lectures on church history under the general title Vorlesungen über die Kirchengeschichte von der ältesten Zeit bis zum 19ten Jahrhundert were reissued in seven volumes (1868-1872).

His works include Tabular Overview of Dogma History (1828); Encyclopedia and Methodology of Theological Sciences (1833); Lectures on the Nature and History of the Reformation and Protestantism (1834-1843); Textbook of Dogma History (1840-1841, 5th ed., 1867; English transl., 1850); Lectures on the History of the Ancient Church (1853-1855); Lectures on the Church History of the Middle Ages (1860-1861); Fundamentals of Homiletics and Liturgics (1863); biographies of Johannes Oecolampadius (1482-1564) and Oswald Myconius (1488-1552) and a History of the Theological School of Basel (1860); his Speeches (1858-1875), two volumes of poems titled Luther and His Time (1838), and Poems (1846). The lectures on church history under the general title Lectures on Church History from the Earliest Times to the 19th Century were reissued in seven volumes (1868-1872).

See especially the article in Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopädie.

See especially the article in Herzog-Hauck, Realencyclopedia.


HAGENBECK, CARL (1844-  ), wild-animal collector and dealer, was born at Hamburg in 1844. In 1848 his father purchased some seals and a Polar bear brought to Hamburg by a whaler, and subsequently acquired many other wild animals. At the age of twenty-one Carl Hagenbeck was given the whole collection, and before long had greatly extended the business, so that in 1873 he had to erect large buildings in Hamburg to house his animals. In 1875 he began to exhibit a collection of the representative animals of many countries, accompanied by troupes of the natives of the respective countries, throughout all the large cities of Europe. The educational value of these exhibitions was officially recognized by the French government, which in 1891 awarded Hagenbeck the diploma of the Academy. Most of the wild animals exhibited in music-halls and other popular places of entertainment throughout the world have come from Hagenbeck’s collection at Stellingen, near Hamburg.

Hagenbeck, Carl (1844-  ), wild-animal collector and dealer, was born in Hamburg in 1844. In 1848, his father bought some seals and a polar bear that a whaler had brought to Hamburg, and later acquired many other wild animals. By the time he turned twenty-one, Carl Hagenbeck took over the entire collection and soon expanded the business significantly, leading to the construction of large buildings in Hamburg to house his animals in 1873. In 1875, he started showcasing a collection of representative animals from various countries, along with groups of natives from those countries, across all the major cities in Europe. The educational value of these exhibitions was officially recognized by the French government, which awarded Hagenbeck the diploma of the Academy in 1891. Most of the wild animals displayed in music halls and other popular entertainment venues around the world have come from Hagenbeck’s collection in Stellingen, near Hamburg.


HAGERSTOWN, a city and the county-seat of Washington county, Maryland, U.S.A., near Antietam Creek, about 86 m. by rail W.N.W. from Baltimore. Pop. (1890), 10,118; (1900), 13,591, of whom 1277 were negroes; (1910, census), 16,507. Hagerstown is served by the Baltimore & Ohio, the Western Maryland, the Norfolk & Western, and the Cumberland Valley railways, and by an interurban electric line. It lies in a fertile valley overlooked by South Mountain to the E. and North Mountain, more distant, to the W. The city is the seat of Kee Mar College (1852; non-sectarian) for women. Hagerstown is a business centre for the surrounding agricultural district, has good water power, and as a manufacturing centre ranked third in the state in 1905, its factory products being valued in that year at $3,026,901, an increase of 66.3% over their value in 1900. Among the manufactures are flour, shirts, hosiery, gloves, bicycles, automobiles, agricultural implements, print paper, fertilizers, sash, doors and blinds, furniture, carriages, spokes and wheels. The municipality owns and operates its electric lighting plant. Hagerstown was laid out as a town in 1762 by Captain Jonathan Hager (who had received a patent to 200 acres here from Lord Baltimore in 1739), and was incorporated in 1791. It was an important station on the old National (or Cumberland) Road. General R. E. Lee concentrated his forces at Hagerstown before the battle of Gettysburg.

HAGERSTOWN, is a city and the county seat of Washington County, Maryland, U.S.A., located near Antietam Creek, about 86 miles by rail northwest of Baltimore. Population (1890) was 10,118; (1900) 13,591, of which 1,277 were African Americans; (Census 1910) 16,507. Hagerstown is served by the Baltimore & Ohio, the Western Maryland, the Norfolk & Western, and the Cumberland Valley railways, along with an interurban electric line. It sits in a fertile valley bordered by South Mountain to the east and North Mountain, farther away, to the west. The city is home to Kee Mar College (1852; non-sectarian) for women. Hagerstown acts as a business hub for the surrounding agricultural area, has good water power, and ranked third in the state for manufacturing in 1905, with factory products valued that year at $3,026,901, a 66.3% increase from their value in 1900. The city's manufacturing includes flour, shirts, hosiery, gloves, bicycles, automobiles, agricultural tools, print paper, fertilizers, sashes, doors and blinds, furniture, carriages, spokes, and wheels. The municipality owns and operates its electric lighting plant. Hagerstown was laid out as a town in 1762 by Captain Jonathan Hager (who received a patent for 200 acres here from Lord Baltimore in 1739) and was incorporated in 1791. It was a critical station on the old National (or Cumberland) Road. General R. E. Lee gathered his forces in Hagerstown before the Battle of Gettysburg.


HAG-FISH, Glutinous Hag, Or Borer (Myxine), a marine fish which forms with the lampreys one of the lowest orders of vertebrates (Cyclostomata). Similar in form to a lamprey, it is usually found within the body of dead cod or haddock, on the flesh of which it feeds after having buried itself in the abdomen. When caught, it secretes a thick glutinous slime in such quantity that it is commonly believed to have the power of converting water into glue. It is found in the North Atlantic and other temperate seas of the globe, being taken in some localities in large numbers, e.g. off the east coast of Scotland and the west coast of California (see Cyclostomata).

Hagfish, Sticky Witch, or Borer (Myxine) is a marine fish that, along with lampreys, belongs to one of the most primitive groups of vertebrates (Cyclostomata). It resembles a lamprey and is typically found inside the bodies of dead cod or haddock, feeding on their flesh after burrowing into the abdomen. When caught, it releases a thick, slippery slime in such large amounts that it's commonly thought to have the ability to turn water into glue. This fish is found in the North Atlantic and other temperate seas around the world, often caught in significant numbers, such as off the east coast of Scotland and the west coast of California (see Cyclostomata).


HAGGADA, or ’Agada (literally “narrative”), includes the more homiletic elements of rabbinic teaching. It is not logically distinguishable from the halakha (q.v.), for the latter or forensic element makes up with the haggada the Midrash (q.v.), but, being more popular than the halakha, is often itself styled the Midrash. It may be described as the poetical and ethical element as contrasted with the legal element in the Talmud (q.v.), but the two elements are always closely connected. From one point of view the haggada, amplifying and developing the contents of Hebrew scripture in response to a popular religious need, may be termed a rabbinical commentary on the Old Testament, containing traditional stories and legends, sometimes amusing, sometimes trivial, and often beautiful. The haggada abounds in parables. The haggadic passages of the Talmud were collected in the Eye of Jacob, a very popular compilation completed by Jakob ibn Habib in the 16th century.

HAGGADA, or ’Agada (which means “narrative”), includes the more homiletic aspects of rabbinic teaching. It isn't logically separate from the halakha (q.v.), as the latter or legal element combines with the haggada to form the Midrash (q.v.); however, since it is more accessible than the halakha, it is often referred to as the Midrash itself. It can be described as the poetic and ethical aspect in contrast to the legal aspect in the Talmud (q.v.), but both aspects are always closely linked. From one perspective, the haggada expands on and develops the content of Hebrew scripture in response to a popular religious need, serving as a rabbinical commentary on the Old Testament. It contains traditional stories and legends that are sometimes funny, occasionally trivial, and often beautiful. The haggada is rich in parables. The haggadic sections of the Talmud were gathered in the Eye of Jacob, a very popular compilation completed by Jakob ibn Habib in the 16th century.


HAGGAI, in the Bible, the tenth in order of the “minor prophets,” whose writings are preserved in the Old Testament. The name Haggai (חגי, Gr. Ἀγγαῖος, whence Aggeus in the English version of the Apocrypha) perhaps means “born on the feast day,” “festive.” But Wellhausen1 is probably right in taking the word as a contraction for Hagariah (“Yahweh hath girded”), just as Zaccai (Zacchaeus) is known to be a contraction of Zechariah.

HAGGAI, in the Bible, is the tenth of the “minor prophets,” with his writings found in the Old Testament. The name Haggai (חגי, Gr. Αγγείος, which is Aggeus in the English version of the Apocrypha) possibly means “born on the feast day” or “festive.” However, Wellhausen1 is likely correct in interpreting the word as a shortened form of Hagariah (“Yahweh has girded”), similar to how Zaccai (Zacchaeus) is recognized as a shorthand for Zechariah.

The book of Haggai contains four short prophecies delivered between the first day of the sixth month and the twenty-fourth day of the ninth month—that is, between September and December—of the second year of Darius the king. The king in question must be Darius Hystaspis (521-485 B.C.). The language of the prophet in ii. 3 suggests the probability that he was himself one of those whose memories reached across the seventy years of the captivity, and that his prophetic work began in extreme 815 old age. This supposition agrees well with the shortness of the period covered by his book, and with the fact that Zechariah, who began to prophesy in the same autumn and was associated with Haggai’s labours (Ezra v. 1), afterwards appears as the leading prophet in Jerusalem (Zech. vii. 1-4). We know nothing further of the personal history of Haggai from the Bible. Later traditions may be read in Carpzov’s Introductio, pars 3, cap. xvi. Epiphanius (Vitae prophetarum) says that he came up from Babylon while still young, prophesied the return, witnessed the building of the temple and received an honoured burial near the priests. Haggai’s name is mentioned in the titles of several psalms in the Septuagint (Psalms cxxxvii., cxlv.-cxlviii.) and other versions, but these titles are without value, and moreover vary in MSS. Eusebius did not find them in the Hexaplar Septuagint.2

The book of Haggai contains four brief prophecies given between the first day of the sixth month and the twenty-fourth day of the ninth month—that is, between September and December—of the second year of King Darius. This king is likely Darius Hystaspis (521-485 B.C.). The language of the prophet in ii. 3 suggests that he was likely one of those who remembered the seventy years of captivity and that his prophetic work began in very old age. This assumption aligns with the short time span covered by his book and the fact that Zechariah, who started prophesying in the same autumn and worked alongside Haggai (Ezra v. 1), later became the main prophet in Jerusalem (Zech. vii. 1-4). The Bible does not provide any further details about Haggai's personal life. Later traditions can be found in Carpzov’s Introductio, pars 3, cap. xvi. Epiphanius (Vitae prophetarum) states that he came from Babylon while still young, prophesied the return, witnessed the temple being built, and received a respected burial near the priests. Haggai’s name appears in the titles of several psalms in the Septuagint (Psalms cxxxvii., cxlv.-cxlviii.) and other versions, but these titles are not considered reliable and also vary in manuscripts. Eusebius did not find them in the Hexaplar Septuagint.2

In his first prophecy (i. 1-11) Haggai addresses Zerubbabel and Joshua, rebuking the people for leaving the temple unbuilt while they are busy in providing panelled houses for themselves. The prevalent famine and distress are due to Yahweh’s indignation at such remissness. Let them build the house, and Yahweh will take pleasure in it and acknowledge the honour paid to Him. The rebuke took effect, and the people began to work at the temple, strengthened by the prophet’s assurance that the Lord was with them (i. 12-15). In a second prophecy (ii. 1-9) delivered in the following month, Haggai forbids the people to be disheartened by the apparent meanness of the new temple. The silver and gold are the Lord’s. He will soon shake all nations and their choicest gifts will be brought to adorn His house. Its glory shall be greater than that of the former temple, and in this place He will give peace. A third prophecy (ii. 10-19) contains a promise, enforced by a figure drawn from the priestly ritual, that God will remove famine and bless the land from the day of the foundation of the temple onwards. Finally, in ii. 20-23, Zerubbabel is assured of God’s special love and protection in the impending catastrophe of kingdoms and nations to which the prophet had formerly pointed as preceding the glorification of God’s house on Zion. In thus looking forward to a shaking of all nations Haggai agrees with earlier prophecies, especially Isa. xxiv.-xxvii., while his picture of the glory and peace of the new Zion and its temple is drawn from the great anonymous prophet who penned Isa. lx and lxvi. The characteristic features of the book are the importance assigned to the personality of Zerubbabel, who, though a living contemporary, is marked out as the Messiah; and the almost sacramental significance attached to the temple. The hopes fixed on Zerubbabel, the chosen of the Lord, dear to Him as His signet ring (cf. Jer. xxii. 24), are a last echo in Old Testament prophecy of the theocratic importance of the house of David. In the book of Zechariah Zerubbabel has already fallen into the background and the high priest is the leading figure of the Judean community.3 The stem of David is superseded by the house of Zadok, the kingship has yielded to the priesthood, and the extinction of national hopes gives new importance to that strict organization of the hierarchy for which Ezekiel had prepared the way by his sentence of disfranchisement against the non-Zadokite priests.

In his first prophecy (i. 1-11), Haggai speaks to Zerubbabel and Joshua, criticizing the people for neglecting to build the temple while they focus on creating luxurious homes for themselves. The ongoing famine and hardships are a result of Yahweh’s anger at their negligence. If they build the house, Yahweh will find joy in it and recognize the honor given to Him. The criticism had an effect, and the people started working on the temple, encouraged by the prophet's assurance that the Lord was with them (i. 12-15). In a second prophecy (ii. 1-9), delivered the following month, Haggai tells the people not to lose heart over the humble appearance of the new temple. The silver and gold belong to the Lord. He will soon shake all nations, and their best offerings will be brought to decorate His house. Its glory will be greater than that of the previous temple, and He will provide peace in this place. A third prophecy (ii. 10-19) offers a promise, supported by an illustration from the priestly rituals, that God will eliminate famine and bless the land from the day the temple is founded onwards. Finally, in ii. 20-23, Zerubbabel is assured of God’s special love and protection in the coming disaster of kingdoms and nations that the prophet previously mentioned, which will occur before the glorification of God’s house on Zion. By anticipating the upheaval of all nations, Haggai aligns with earlier prophecies, particularly Isa. xxiv.-xxvii., while his depiction of the glory and peace of the new Zion and its temple draws from the great anonymous prophet who wrote Isa. lx and lxvi. The main features of the book include the significance placed on the personality of Zerubbabel, who, though a contemporary, is designated as the Messiah; and the almost sacramental importance attributed to the temple. The hopes placed on Zerubbabel, the Lord’s chosen one, beloved as His signet ring (cf. Jer. xxii. 24), echo the theocratic significance of the house of David in Old Testament prophecy. In the book of Zechariah, Zerubbabel has already faded into the background, with the high priest taking the lead in the Judean community. 3 The line of David is overshadowed by the house of Zadok, the kingship has given way to the priesthood, and the loss of national aspirations adds importance to the strict hierarchy organization prepared by Ezekiel's disenfranchisement of non-Zadokite priests.

The indifference of the Jews to the desolate conditions of their sanctuary opens up a problem of some difficulty. It is strange that neither Haggai nor his contemporary Zechariah mentions or implies any return of exiles from Babylon, and the suggestion has accordingly been made that the return under Cyrus described in Ezra i.-iv. is unhistorical, and that the community addressed by Haggai consisted of the remnant that had been left in Jerusalem and its neighbourhood after the majority had gone into exile or fled to Egypt (Jer. xliii.). Such a remnant, amongst whom might be members of the priestly and royal families, would gather strength and boldness as the troubles of Babylon increased and her vigilance was relaxed, and might receive from Babylon and other lands both refugees and some account at least of the writings of Ezekiel and the Second Isaiah. Stimulated by such causes and obtaining formal permission from the Persian government, they would arise as a new Israel and enter on a new phase of national life and divine revelation.

The Jews' indifference to the neglected state of their sanctuary presents a challenging issue. It's odd that neither Haggai nor his contemporary Zechariah mentions or hints at any return of exiles from Babylon. This has led to the idea that the return under Cyrus described in Ezra i.-iv. may not be historical, and that the community Haggai addressed consisted of the remnant that remained in Jerusalem and its surroundings after most had gone into exile or fled to Egypt (Jer. xliii.). Such a remnant, which might include members of the priestly and royal families, would gain strength and confidence as Babylon's troubles grew and its vigilance weakened. They might also receive refugees from Babylon and other regions, as well as some knowledge of the writings of Ezekiel and the Second Isaiah. Motivated by these factors and obtaining formal permission from the Persian government, they would rise as a new Israel and embark on a new chapter of national life and divine revelation.

In spite, however, of the plausibility of this theory, it seems preferable to adhere to the story of Ezra i.-iv. Apart from the weighty objections that the Edomites would have frustrated such a recrudescence of the remnant Jews as has been described, it must be remembered that the main stream of Jewish life and thought had been diverted to Babylon. Thence, when the opportunity came under Cyrus, some 50,000 Jews, the spiritual heirs of the best elements of the old Israel, returned to found the new community. With them were all the resources, and the only people they found at Jerusalem were hostile gentiles and Samaritans. Full of enthusiasm, they set about rebuilding the temple and realizing the glowing promises about the prosperity and dominance of Zion that had fallen from the lips of the Second Isaiah (xlix. 14-26, xlv. 14). Bitter disappointment, however, soon overcame them, the Samaritans were strong enough to thwart and hinder their temple-building, and it seemed as though the divine favour was withdrawn. Apathy took the place of enthusiasm, and sordid worries succeeded to high hopes. “The like collapse has often been experienced in history when bands of religious men, going forth, as they thought, to freedom and the immediate erection of a holy commonwealth, have found their unity wrecked and their enthusiasm dissipated by a few inclement seasons on a barren and hostile shore.”4

In spite of how believable this theory is, it seems better to stick with the story in Ezra i.-iv. Besides the strong objections that the Edomites would have stopped such a revival of the remnant Jews as described, we must remember that the main flow of Jewish life and thought had shifted to Babylon. From there, when the chance arose under Cyrus, about 50,000 Jews, the spiritual successors of the best parts of old Israel, returned to establish the new community. They brought all the resources with them, and the only people they found in Jerusalem were hostile gentiles and Samaritans. Filled with enthusiasm, they began rebuilding the temple and trying to fulfill the bright promises about the prosperity and dominance of Zion that had come from the Second Isaiah (xlix. 14-26, xlv. 14). However, they soon faced bitter disappointment; the Samaritans were strong enough to disrupt and hinder their temple-building efforts, and it seemed like divine favor had been withdrawn. Apathy replaced enthusiasm, and mundane worries took over from great hopes. “A similar collapse has often been seen in history when groups of religious people, believing they were heading towards freedom and the immediate establishment of a holy community, found their unity shattered and their enthusiasm drained by a few harsh seasons on a barren and hostile shore.”4

From this torpor they were roused by tidings which might well be interpreted as the restoration of divine favour. Away in the East Cyrus had been succeeded in 529 B.C. by Cambyses, who had annexed Egypt and on whose death in 522 a Magian impostor, Gaumata, had seized the throne. The fraud was short-lived, and Darius I. became king and the founder of a new dynasty. These events shook the whole Persian empire; Babylon and other subject states rose in revolt, and to the Jews it seemed that Persia was tottering and that the Messianic era was nigh. It was therefore natural that Haggai and Zechariah should urge the speedy building of the temple, in order that the great king might be fittingly received.

They were awakened from their daze by news that could easily be seen as a sign of restored divine favor. In the East, Cyrus had been succeeded by Cambyses in 529 BCE, who took control of Egypt. After Cambyses died in 522, a Magian imposter named Gaumata took the throne. However, this deception was short-lived, and Darius I became king, founding a new dynasty. These events sent shockwaves throughout the Persian empire; Babylon and other conquered regions revolted, and to the Jews, it seemed that Persia was on the brink of collapse and that the Messianic age was approaching. Therefore, it made sense for Haggai and Zechariah to push for the quick rebuilding of the temple, so that they could properly welcome the great king.

It is sometimes levied as a reproach against Haggai that he makes no direct reference to moral duties. But it is hardly fair to contrast his practical counsel with the more ethical and spiritual teaching of the earlier Hebrew prophets. One thing was needful—the temple. “Without a sanctuary Yahweh would have seemed a foreigner to Israel. The Jews would have thought that He had returned to Sinai, the holy mountain; and that they were deprived of the temporal blessings which were the gifts of a God who literally dwelt in the midst of his people.” Haggai argued that material prosperity was conditioned by zeal in worship; the prevailing distress was an indication of divine anger due to the people’s religious apathy. Haggai’s reproofs touched the conscience of the Jews, and the book of Zechariah enables us in some measure to follow the course of a religious revival which, starting with the restoration of the temple, did not confine itself to matters of ceremony and ritual worship. On the other hand, Haggai’s treatment of his theme, practical and effective as it was for the purpose in hand, moves on a far lower level than the aspirations of the prophet who wrote the closing chapters of Isaiah. To the latter the material temple is no more than a detail in the picture of a work of restoration eminently ideal and spiritual, and he expressly warns his hearers against attaching intrinsic importance to it (Isa. lxvi. 1). To Haggai the temple appears so essential that he teaches that while it lay waste, the people and all their works and offerings were unclean (Hag. ii. 14). In this he betrays his affinity with Ezekiel, who taught that it is by the possession of the sanctuary that Israel is sanctified (Ezek. xxxvii. 28). In truth the new movement of religious thought and feeling which started from the fall of the Hebrew state took two distinct lines, of which Ezekiel and the anonymous 816 authors of Isa. xl.-lxvi. are the respective representatives. While the latter developed their great picture of Israel the mediatorial nation, the systematic and priestly mind of Ezekiel had shaped a more material conception of the religious vocation of Israel in that picture of the new theocracy where the temple and its ritual occupy the largest place, with a sanctity which is set in express contrast to the older conception of the holiness of the city of Jerusalem (cf. Ezek. xliii. 7 seq. with Jer. xxxi. 40, Isa. iv. 5), and with a supreme significance for the religious life of the people which is expressed in the figure of the living waters issuing from under the threshold of the house (Ezek. xlvii.). It was the conception of Ezekiel which permanently influenced the citizens of the new Jerusalem, and took final shape in the institutions of Ezra. To this consummation, with its necessary accompaniment in the extinction of prophecy, the book of Haggai already points.

It’s sometimes criticized that Haggai doesn’t mention moral duties. However, it’s unfair to compare his practical advice with the more ethical and spiritual teachings of earlier Hebrew prophets. One thing was essential—the temple. “Without a sanctuary, Yahweh would have seemed like a stranger to Israel. The Jews would have thought He had returned to Sinai, the holy mountain, and that they were missing out on the temporal blessings that came from a God who literally lived among His people.” Haggai argued that material success depended on devotion in worship; the widespread distress was a sign of divine anger due to the people’s religious indifference. Haggai’s criticisms resonated with the Jews, and the book of Zechariah allows us to track a religious revival that, starting with the restoration of the temple, went beyond just ceremony and ritual worship. On the other hand, Haggai’s approach to his topic, while practical and effective for its purpose, operates on a much simpler level than the aspirations of the prophet who authored the last chapters of Isaiah. To that prophet, the physical temple is merely a detail in an ideal and spiritual restoration, and he specifically warns his audience against placing too much intrinsic value on it (Isa. lxvi. 1). To Haggai, the temple is so critical that he teaches that while it remains in ruins, the people and their actions and offerings are unclean (Hag. ii. 14). In this, he shows a connection to Ezekiel, who taught that Israel is sanctified through the temple (Ezek. xxxvii. 28). In reality, the new wave of religious thought and emotion that emerged after the fall of the Hebrew state took two different directions, represented by Ezekiel and the anonymous authors of Isa. xl.-lxvi. While the latter developed their grand vision of Israel as a mediating nation, Ezekiel’s systematic and priestly perspective created a more tangible understanding of Israel's religious mission with the new theocracy’s image, where the temple and its rituals play a central role, contrasting the previous understanding of Jerusalem's holiness (cf. Ezek. xliii. 7 seq. with Jer. xxxi. 40, Isa. iv. 5), and holds significant importance for the religious life of the people, illustrated by the image of living waters flowing from under the temple's threshold (Ezek. xlvii.). Ezekiel’s interpretation had a lasting effect on the residents of the new Jerusalem and eventually shaped the institutions established by Ezra. The book of Haggai already points to this culmination, along with the inevitable decline of prophecy.

Authorities.—The elaborate and valuable German commentary of A. Köhler (Erlangen, 1860) forms the first part of his work on the Nachexilische Propheten. Reinke’s Commentary (Münster, 1868) is the work of a scholarly Roman Catholic. Haggai has generally been treated in works on all the prophets, as by Ewald (2nd ed., 1868; Eng. trans., vol. iii., 1878); or along with the other minor prophets, as by Hitzig (3rd ed., by H. Steiner, Leipzig, 1881), Keil (1866, 3rd ed., 1888, Eng. trans., Edinburgh, 1868), and Pusey (1875), S. R. Driver (1906), W. Nowack (2nd ed., 1905), K. Marti (1904), J. Wellhausen (3rd ed., 1898); or with the other post-exile prophets, as by Köhler, Pressel (Gotha, 1870), Dods (1879) and others. The older literature will be found in books of introduction or in Rosenmüller’s Scholia. The learned commentary of Marckius may be specially mentioned. On the place of Haggai in the history of Old Testament prophecy, see Duhm, Theologie der Propheten (Bonn, 1875); A. B. Davidson, The Theology of the Old Testament (1904); A. F. Kirkpatrick, The Doctrine of the Prophets; G. A. Smith, The Book of the Twelve Prophets, vol. 2 (1903); Tony Andrée, Le Prophète Aggée; Ed. Meyer, Entstehung des Judentums (1896).

Authorities.—The comprehensive and valuable German commentary by A. Köhler (Erlangen, 1860) is the first part of his work on the Nachexilische Propheten. Reinke’s Commentary (Münster, 1868) is authored by a scholarly Roman Catholic. Haggai has generally been addressed in works on all the prophets, such as by Ewald (2nd ed., 1868; Eng. trans., vol. iii., 1878); or alongside other minor prophets, as done by Hitzig (3rd ed., by H. Steiner, Leipzig, 1881), Keil (1866, 3rd ed., 1888, Eng. trans., Edinburgh, 1868), and Pusey (1875), S. R. Driver (1906), W. Nowack (2nd ed., 1905), K. Marti (1904), J. Wellhausen (3rd ed., 1898); or with the other post-exile prophets, as by Köhler, Pressel (Gotha, 1870), Dods (1879), and others. Older literature can be found in introductory texts or in Rosenmüller’s Scholia. The scholarly commentary of Marckius deserves special mention. For the place of Haggai in the history of Old Testament prophecy, see Duhm, Theologie der Propheten (Bonn, 1875); A. B. Davidson, The Theology of the Old Testament (1904); A. F. Kirkpatrick, The Doctrine of the Prophets; G. A. Smith, The Book of the Twelve Prophets, vol. 2 (1903); Tony Andrée, Le Prophète Aggée; Ed. Meyer, Entstehung des Judentums (1896).

(W. R. S.; A. J. G.)

1 In Bleek’s Einleitung, 4th ed., p. 434.

1 In Bleek’s Introduction, 4th ed., p. 434.

2 See the note on Ps. cxlv. 1 in Field’s Hexapla; Köhler, Weissagungen Haggai’s, 32; Wright, Zechariah and his Prophecies, xix.

2 Check the note on Ps. 145:1 in Field’s Hexapla; Köhler, Haggai's Prophecies, 32; Wright, Zechariah and his Prophecies, xix.

3 After the foundation of the temple Zerubbabel disappears from history and lives only in legend, which continued to busy itself with his story, as we see from the apocryphal book of Esdras (cf. Derenbourg, Hist. de la Palestine, chap. i).

3 After the temple was built, Zerubbabel vanished from history and became a legend. His story continued to engage people, as seen in the apocryphal book of Esdras (cf. Derenbourg, Hist. de la Palestine, chap. i).

4 G. A. Smith, Minor Prophets, ii. 235.

4 G. A. Smith, Minor Prophets, ii. 235.


HAGGARD, HENRY RIDER (1856-  ), English novelist, was born at Bradenham Hall, Norfolk, on the 22nd of June 1856. When he was nineteen he went to South Africa as secretary to Sir Henry Bulwer, governor of Natal. At the time of the first annexation of the Transvaal (1877), he was on the staff of the special commissioner, Sir Theophilus Shepstone; and he subsequently became a master of the high court of the Transvaal. He married in 1879 a Norfolk heiress, Miss Margitson, but returned to the Transvaal in time to witness its surrender to the Boers and the overthrow of the policy of his former chief. He returned to England and read for the bar, but soon took to literary work; he published Cetywayo and his White Neighbours (1882), written in defence of Sir T. Shepstone’s policy. This was followed by the novels Dawn (1884), The Witch’s Head (1885), which contains an account of the British defeat at Isandhlwana; and in 1886 King Solomon’s Mines, suggested by the Zimbabwe ruins, which first made him popular. She (1887), another fantastic African story, was also very successful, a sequel, Ayesha, or the Return of She, being published in 1905. The scene of Jess (1887) and of Allan Quatermain (1888) was also laid in Africa. In 1895 he unsuccessfully contested the East Norfolk parliamentary division in the Unionist interest; he showed great interest in rural and agricultural questions, being a practical gardener and farmer on his estate in Norfolk. In his Rural England (2 vols., 1902) he exposed the evils of depopulation in country districts. In 1905 he was commissioned by the colonial office to inquire into the Salvation Army settlements at Fort Romie, S. California, and Fort Amity, Colorado, with a view to the establishment of similar colonies in South Africa. His report on the subject was first published as a blue book, and afterwards, in an enlarged form, as The Poor and the Land (1905), with suggestions for a scheme of national land settlement in Great Britain itself.

Haggard, Henry Rider (1856-  ), English novelist, was born at Bradenham Hall, Norfolk, on June 22, 1856. When he was nineteen, he went to South Africa as the secretary to Sir Henry Bulwer, the governor of Natal. During the first annexation of the Transvaal in 1877, he was part of the special commissioner’s team, led by Sir Theophilus Shepstone; he later became a high court master in the Transvaal. He married a Norfolk heiress, Miss Margitson, in 1879 but returned to the Transvaal to witness its surrender to the Boers and the collapse of his former chief’s policies. After returning to England, he studied law but soon shifted to writing; he published Cetywayo and his White Neighbours (1882) in defense of Sir T. Shepstone’s policies. This was followed by the novels Dawn (1884) and The Witch’s Head (1885), which includes an account of the British defeat at Isandhlwana, and in 1886 he wrote King Solomon’s Mines, inspired by the Zimbabwe ruins, which earned him popularity. She (1887), another thrilling African tale, was also a big hit, leading to a sequel, Ayesha, or the Return of She, published in 1905. Jess (1887) and Allan Quatermain (1888) were also set in Africa. In 1895, he ran unsuccessfully for the East Norfolk parliamentary seat as a Unionist; he was very interested in rural and agricultural issues, being a hands-on gardener and farmer on his estate in Norfolk. In his work Rural England (2 vols., 1902), he highlighted the problems of depopulation in rural areas. In 1905, the colonial office commissioned him to investigate the Salvation Army settlements at Fort Romie, S. California, and Fort Amity, Colorado, to consider the establishment of similar colonies in South Africa. His report on this was initially published as a blue book and later expanded into The Poor and the Land (1905), which included suggestions for a national land settlement scheme in Great Britain itself.

His other books include Maiwa’s Revenge (1888), Mr Meeson’s Will (1888), Colonel Quaritch, V.C. (1888), Cleopatra (1889), Eric Brighteyes (1891), The World’s Desire (1890), a romance of Helen of Troy, written with Mr Andrew Lang; Nada the Lily (1892), Montezuma’s Daughter (1894), The People of the Mist (1894), Joan Haste (1895), Heart of the World (1896), Dr Therne (1898), A Farmer’s Year (1899), The New South Africa (1900), Lysbeth, A Tale of the Dutch (1901). Stella Fregelius (1903), A Gardener’s Year (1905), A Farmer’s Year (1899, revised ed., 1906), The Way of the Spirit (1906).

His other books include Maiwa’s Revenge (1888), Mr Meeson’s Will (1888), Colonel Quaritch, V.C. (1888), Cleopatra (1889), Eric Brighteyes (1891), The World’s Desire (1890), a romance about Helen of Troy, written with Mr. Andrew Lang; Nada the Lily (1892), Montezuma’s Daughter (1894), The People of the Mist (1894), Joan Haste (1895), Heart of the World (1896), Dr Therne (1898), A Farmer’s Year (1899), The New South Africa (1900), Lysbeth, A Tale of the Dutch (1901), Stella Fregelius (1903), A Gardener’s Year (1905), A Farmer’s Year (1899, revised ed., 1906), The Way of the Spirit (1906).


HAGGIS, a dish consisting of a calf’s, sheep’s or other animal’s heart, liver and lungs, and also sometimes of the smaller intestines, boiled in the stomach of the animal with seasoning of pepper, salt, onions, &c., chopped fine with suet and oatmeal. It is considered peculiarly a Scottish dish, but was common in England till the 18th century. The derivation of the word is obscure. The Fr. hachis, English “hash,” is of later appearance than “haggis.” It may be connected with a verb “to hag,” meaning to cut in small pieces, and would then be cognate ultimately with “hash.”

HAGGIS, is a dish made from the heart, liver, and lungs of a calf, sheep, or other animals, and sometimes includes smaller intestines. It's boiled inside the animal's stomach with seasonings like pepper, salt, and finely chopped onions, along with suet and oatmeal. While it's mainly recognized as a Scottish dish, it was also popular in England until the 18th century. The origin of the word is unclear. The French word hachis, which means "hash" in English, appeared later than "haggis." It might be related to the verb "to hag," meaning to cut into small pieces, and would then be ultimately linked to "hash."


HAGIOLOGY (from Gr. ἅγιος, saint, λόγος, discourse), that branch of the historical sciences which is concerned with the lives of the saints. If hagiology be considered merely in the sense in which the term has come to be understood in the later stages of its development, i.e. the critical study of hagiographic remains, there would be no such science before the 17th century. But the bases of hagiology may fairly be said to have been laid at the time when hagiographic documents, hitherto dispersed, were first brought together into collections. The oldest collection of this kind, the συναγωγὴ τῶν ἀρχαίων μαρτυρίων of Eusebius, to which the author refers in several passages in his writings (Hist. Eccl., v. proem 2; v. 20, 5), and which has left more than one trace in Christian literature, is unfortunately lost in its entirety. The Martyrs of Palestine, as also the writings of Theodoret, Palladius and others, on the origins of the monastic life, and, similarly, the Dialogues of St Gregory (Pope Gregory I.), belong to the category of sources rather than to that of hagiologic collections. The In gloria martyrum and In gloria confessorum of Gregory of Tours are valuable for the sources used in their compilation. The most important collections are those which comprise the Acts of the Martyrs and the lives of saints, arranged in the order of the calendar. In the Greek Church these are called menologies (from Gr. μήν, month, λόγος, discourse), and their existence can be traced back with certainty to the 9th century (Theodore of Studium, Epist. i. 2). One of them, the menology of Metaphrastes, compiled in the second half of the 10th century, enjoyed a universal vogue (see Symeon Metaphrastes). The corresponding works in the Western Church are the passionaries or legendaries, varieties of which are dispersed in libraries and have not been studied collectively. They generally draw from a common source, the Roman legendary, and the lives of the local saints, i.e. those specially honoured in a church, a province or a country. One of the best known is the Austrian legendary (De magno legendario Austriaco in the Analecta Bollandiana, xvii. 24-264). From the menologies and legendaries various compilations were made: in the Greek Church, the Synaxaria (see Synaxarium); in the Western Church, abridgments and extracts such as the Speculum hisloriale of Vincent de Beauvais; the Legenda aurea of Jacobus de Voragine; the Sanctorale of Bernard Guy [d. 1331] (see L. Delisle, Notice sur les manuscrits de Bernard Guy, Paris, 1879); the Sanctilogium of John of Tynemouth (c. 1366), utilized by John Capgrave, and published in 1516 under the name of Nova legenda Angliae (new edition by C. Horstman, Oxford, 1901); and the Catalogus sanctorum of Petrus de Natalibus (c. 1375), published at Vicenza in 1493, and many times reprinted. The Sanctuarium of B. Mombritius, published at Milan about 1480, is particularly valuable because it gives a faithful reproduction of the ancient texts according to the manuscripts. One of the most zealous collectors of lives of saints was John Gielemans of Brabant (d. 1487), whose work is of great value (Bollandists, De codicibus hagiographicis Iohannis Gielemans, Brussels, 1895), and with him must be associated Anton Geens, or Gentius, of Groenendael, who died in 1543 (Analecta Bollandiana, vi. 31-34).

Hagiography (from Gr. holy, saint, reason, discourse), is the branch of historical science that focuses on the lives of saints. If we view hagiology in the sense that the term is understood today, specifically as the critical study of hagiographic texts, then this science didn't exist before the 17th century. However, the groundwork for hagiology was laid when hagiographic documents, previously scattered, were first compiled into collections. The oldest collection of this kind, the collection of ancient testimonies by Eusebius, which the author mentions in several of his writings (Hist. Eccl., v. proem 2; v. 20, 5), and which has influenced Christian literature, has unfortunately been completely lost. The Martyrs of Palestine, along with the writings of Theodoret, Palladius, and others on the origins of monastic life, as well as the Dialogues of St Gregory (Pope Gregory I.), are more about sources than being part of hagiologic collections. The In gloria martyrum and In gloria confessorum by Gregory of Tours are valuable for the sources they reference. The most significant collections include the Acts of the Martyrs and the lives of saints, organized according to the calendar. In the Greek Church, these are referred to as menologies (from Gr. μήν, month, word, discourse), with their existence confirmed back to the 9th century (Theodore of Studium, Epist. i. 2). One such menology, compiled by Metaphrastes in the latter half of the 10th century, became widely popular (see Symeon Metaphrastes). In the Western Church, similar works are known as passionaries or legendaries, with various forms found in libraries that haven't been collectively studied. They generally originate from a common source, the Roman legendary, and the lives of local saints, specifically those honored in a church, province, or country. One of the best-known examples is the Austrian legendary (De magno legendario Austriaco in the Analecta Bollandiana, xvii. 24-264). Out of the menologies and legendaries, various compilations were produced: in the Greek Church, the Synaxaria (see Synaxarium); in the Western Church, abridgments and extracts like the Speculum hisloriale by Vincent de Beauvais; the Legenda aurea by Jacobus de Voragine; the Sanctorale by Bernard Guy [d. 1331] (see L. Delisle, Notice sur les manuscrits de Bernard Guy, Paris, 1879); the Sanctilogium by John of Tynemouth (c. 1366), used by John Capgrave, published in 1516 as Nova legenda Angliae (new edition by C. Horstman, Oxford, 1901); and the Catalogus sanctorum by Petrus de Natalibus (c. 1375), published in Vicenza in 1493 and reprinted many times. The Sanctuarium by B. Mombritius, published in Milan around 1480, is especially important as it faithfully reproduces the ancient texts based on manuscripts. One of the most dedicated collectors of saints' lives was John Gielemans of Brabant (d. 1487), whose work is highly regarded (Bollandists, De codicibus hagiographicis Iohannis Gielemans, Brussels, 1895), and he is associated with Anton Geens, or Gentius, of Groenendael, who died in 1543 (Analecta Bollandiana, vi. 31-34).

Hagiology entered on a new development with the publication of the Sanctorum priscorum patrum vitae (Venice and Rome, 1551-1560) of Aloysius Lipomanus (Lippomano), bishop of Verona. As a result of the co-operation of humanist scholars a great number of Greek hagiographic texts became for the first time accessible to the West in a Latin translation. The Carthusian, Laurentius Surius, carried on the work of Lippomano, completed it, and arranged the materials strictly in the order 817 of the calendar (De probatis sanctorum historiis, Cologne, 1570-1575). What prevents the work of Surius from being regarded as an improvement upon Lippomano’s is that Surius thought it necessary to retouch the style of those documents which appeared to him badly written, without troubling himself about the consequent loss of their documentary value.

Hagiology entered a new phase with the release of the Sanctorum priscorum patrum vitae (Venice and Rome, 1551-1560) by Aloysius Lipomanus (Lippomano), the bishop of Verona. Thanks to the collaboration of humanist scholars, many Greek hagiographic texts became accessible to the West for the first time in Latin translation. The Carthusian monk, Laurentius Surius, continued and completed Lipomanus's work, organizing the materials strictly by the calendar order (De probatis sanctorum historiis, Cologne, 1570-1575). However, Surius's work is not seen as an improvement over Lipomanus's because he felt it necessary to edit the style of documents he deemed poorly written, which resulted in a loss of their documentary value.

The actual founder of hagiologic criticism was the Flemish Jesuit, Heribert Rosweyde (d. 1629), who, besides his important works on the martyrologies (see Martyrology), published the celebrated collection of the Vitae patrum (Antwerp, 1615), a veritable masterpiece for the time at which it appeared. It was he, too, who conceived the plan of a great collection of lives of saints, compiled from the manuscripts and augmented with notes, from which resulted the collection of the Acta sanctorum (see Bollandists). This last enterprise gave rise to others of a similar character but less extensive in scope.

The true founder of hagiologic criticism was the Flemish Jesuit, Heribert Rosweyde (d. 1629), who, in addition to his significant works on the martyrologies (see Martyrology), published the famous collection of the Vitae patrum (Antwerp, 1615), a real masterpiece for its time. He was also the one who came up with the idea for a comprehensive collection of saints' lives, put together from manuscripts and expanded with notes, which led to the collection of the Acta sanctorum (see Bollandists). This final project inspired others of a similar nature, though less extensive in scope.

Dom T. Ruinart collected the best Acta of the martyrs in his Acta martyrum sincera (Paris, 1689). The various religious orders collected the Acta of their saints, often increasing the lists beyond measure. The best publication of this kind, the Acta sanctorum ordinis S. Benedicti (Paris, 1668-1701) of d’Achery and Mabillon, does not entirely escape this reproach. Countries, provinces and dioceses also had their special hagiographic collections, conceived according to various plans and executed with more or less historical sense. Of these, the most important collections are those of O. Caietanus, Vitae sanctorum Siculorum (Palermo, 1657); G. A. Lobineau, Vie des saints de Bretagne (Rennes, 1725); and J. H. Ghesquière, Acta sanctorum Belgii (Brussels and Tongerloo, 1783-1794). The principal lives of the German saints are published in the Monumenta Germaniae, and a special section of the Scriptores rerum Merovingicarum is devoted to the lives of the saints. For Scotland and Ireland mention must be made of T. Messingham’s Florilegium insulae sanctorum (Paris, 1624); I. Colgan’s Acta sanctorum veteris et maioris Scotiae seu Hiberniae (Louvain, 1645-1647); John Pinkerton’s Vitae antiquae sanctorum ... (London, 1789, of which a revised and enlarged edition was published by W. M. Metcalfe at Paisley in 1889, under the title of Lives of the Scottish Saints); W. J. Rees’s Lives of the Cambro-British Saints (Llandovery, 1853); Acta sanctorum Hiberniae (Edinburgh, 1888); Whitley Stokes’s Lives of Saints from the Book of Lismore (Oxford, 1890); and J. O’Hanlon’s Lives of the Irish Saints (Dublin, 1875-1904). Towards the 13th century vernacular collections of lives of saints began to increase. This literature is more interesting from the linguistic than from the hagiologic point of view, and comes rather within the domain of the philologist.

Dom T. Ruinart gathered the best Acta of the martyrs in his Acta martyrum sincera (Paris, 1689). Different religious orders compiled the Acta of their saints, often expanding the lists excessively. The top publication of this type, the Acta sanctorum ordinis S. Benedicti (Paris, 1668-1701) by d’Achery and Mabillon, isn't completely free from this criticism. Countries, provinces, and dioceses also had their own hagiographic collections, created according to various plans and executed with varying degrees of historical accuracy. Among these, the most significant collections are by O. Caietanus, Vitae sanctorum Siculorum (Palermo, 1657); G. A. Lobineau, Vie des saints de Bretagne (Rennes, 1725); and J. H. Ghesquière, Acta sanctorum Belgii (Brussels and Tongerloo, 1783-1794). The main biographies of the German saints are published in the Monumenta Germaniae, and a special section of the Scriptores rerum Merovingicarum focuses on the lives of the saints. For Scotland and Ireland, it's worth mentioning T. Messingham’s Florilegium insulae sanctorum (Paris, 1624); I. Colgan’s Acta sanctorum veteris et maioris Scotiae seu Hiberniae (Louvain, 1645-1647); John Pinkerton’s Vitae antiquae sanctorum ... (London, 1789, of which a revised and expanded edition was published by W. M. Metcalfe in Paisley in 1889, titled Lives of the Scottish Saints); W. J. Rees’s Lives of the Cambro-British Saints (Llandovery, 1853); Acta sanctorum Hiberniae (Edinburgh, 1888); Whitley Stokes’s Lives of Saints from the Book of Lismore (Oxford, 1890); and J. O’Hanlon’s Lives of the Irish Saints (Dublin, 1875-1904). By the 13th century, vernacular collections of saints' lives started to grow. This literature is more interesting from a linguistic perspective than a hagiographic one and relates more to the field of philology.

The hagiography of the Eastern and the Greek church also has been the subject of important publications. The Greek texts are very much scattered. Of them, however, may be mentioned J. B. Malou’s “Symeonis Metaphrastae opera omnia” (Patrologia Graeca, 114, 115, 116) and Theophilos Ioannu, Μνημεῖα ἁγιολογικά (Venice, 1884). For Syriac, there are S. E. Assemani’s Acta sanctorum martyrum orientalium (Rome, 1748) and P. Bedjan’s Acta martyrum et sanctorum (Paris, 1890-1897); for Armenian, the acts of martyrs and lives of saints, published in two volumes by the Mechitharist community of Venice in 1874; for Coptic, Hyvernat’s Les Actes des martyrs de l’Égypte (Paris, 1886); for Ethiopian, K. Conti Rossini’s Scriptores Aethiopici, vitae sanctorum (Paris, 1904 seq.); and for Georgian, Sabinin’s Paradise of the Georgian Church (St Petersburg, 1882).

The hagiography of the Eastern and Greek churches has also been the focus of significant publications. The Greek texts are quite scattered. However, notable works include J. B. Malou’s “Symeonis Metaphrastae opera omnia” (Patrologia Graeca, 114, 115, 116) and Theophilos Ioannu’s Saint commemorations (Venice, 1884). In Syriac, there are S. E. Assemani’s Acta sanctorum martyrum orientalium (Rome, 1748) and P. Bedjan’s Acta martyrum et sanctorum (Paris, 1890-1897); for Armenian, the acts of martyrs and lives of saints published in two volumes by the Mechitharist community of Venice in 1874; for Coptic, Hyvernat’s Les Actes des martyrs de l’Égypte (Paris, 1886); for Ethiopian, K. Conti Rossini’s Scriptores Aethiopici, vitae sanctorum (Paris, 1904 seq.); and for Georgian, Sabinin’s Paradise of the Georgian Church (St Petersburg, 1882).

In addition to the principal collections must be mentioned the innumerable works in which the hagiographic texts have been subjected to detailed critical study.

In addition to the main collections, it's important to mention the countless works where the hagiographic texts have been analyzed in detail.

To realize the present state of hagiology, the Bibliotheca hagiographica, both Latin and Greek, published by the Bollandists, and the Bulletin hagiographique, which appears in each number of the Analecta Bollandiana (see Bollandists), must be consulted. Thanks to the combined efforts of a great number of scholars, the classification of the hagiographic texts has in recent years made notable progress. The criticism of the sources, the study of literary styles, and the knowledge of local history now render it easier to discriminate in this literature between what is really historical and what is merely the invention of the genius of the people or of the imagination of pious writers (see H. Delehaye, Les Légendes hagiographiques, 2nd ed., pp. 121-141, Brussels, 1906). “Though the lives of saints,” says a recent historian, “are filled with miracles and incredible stories, they form a rich mine of information concerning the life and customs of the people. Some of them are ‘memorials of the best men of the time written by the best scholars of the time,’” (C. Gross, The Sources and Literature of English History, p. 34, London, 1900).

To understand the current state of hagiology, you need to check out the Bibliotheca hagiographica, in both Latin and Greek, published by the Bollandists, along with the Bulletin hagiographique, which is included in each issue of the Analecta Bollandiana (see Bollandists). Thanks to the collaborative efforts of many scholars, there has been significant progress in classifying hagiographic texts in recent years. The analysis of sources, examination of literary styles, and understanding of local history now make it easier to differentiate in this literature between what is genuinely historical and what is simply the product of popular imagination or the creativity of devout writers (see H. Delehaye, Les Légendes hagiographiques, 2nd ed., pp. 121-141, Brussels, 1906). “Even though the lives of saints,” a recent historian notes, “are filled with miracles and extraordinary tales, they provide a wealth of information about the life and customs of the people. Some of them are ‘memorials of the best men of the time written by the best scholars of the time,’” (C. Gross, The Sources and Literature of English History, p. 34, London, 1900).

(H. De.)

HAGIOSCOPE (from Gr. ἅγιος, holy, and σκοπεῖν, to see), in architecture, an opening through the wall of a church in an oblique direction, to enable the worshippers in the transepts or other parts of the church, from which the altar was not visible, to see the elevation of the Host. As a rule these hagioscopes, or “squints” as they are sometimes called, are found on one or both sides of the chancel arch. In some cases a series of openings has been cut in the walls in an oblique line to enable a person standing in the porch (as in Bridgewater church, Somerset) to see the altar; in this case and in other instances such openings were sometimes provided for an attendant, who had to ring the Sanctus bell when the Host was elevated. Though rarely met with on the continent of Europe, there are occasions where they are found, so as to enable a monk in one of the vestries to follow the service and communicate with the bell-ringers.

Hagioscope (from Gr. holy, holy, and σκοπεῖν, to see), in architecture, an opening through the wall of a church at an angle, allowing worshippers in the transepts or other areas of the church, where the altar isn't visible, to see the elevation of the Host. Typically, these hagioscopes, or “squints” as they are sometimes called, are located on one or both sides of the chancel arch. In some cases, a series of openings has been created in the walls at an angle so that someone standing in the porch (like at Bridgewater church, Somerset) can see the altar; in such cases and others, these openings were sometimes made for an attendant who needed to ring the Sanctus bell when the Host was elevated. Although they are rarely seen in continental Europe, there are instances where they can be found, allowing a monk in one of the vestries to follow the service and communicate with the bell-ringers.


HAGONOY, a town of the province of Bulacan, Luzon, Philippine Islands, on Manila Bay and on the W. branch and the delta of the Pampanga Grande river, about 25 m. N.W. of Manila. Pop. (1903), 21,304. Hagonoy is situated in a rich agricultural region, producing rice, Indian corn, sugar and a little coffee. Alcohol is made in considerable quantities from the fermented juice of the nipa palm, which grows in the neighbouring swamps, and from the leaves of which the nipa thatch is manufactured. There is good fishing. The women of the town are very skilful in weaving the native fabrics. The language is Tagalog. Hagonoy was founded in 1581.

HAGONOY, is a town in Bulacan province, Luzon, Philippines, located on Manila Bay and on the western branch and delta of the Pampanga Grande River, about 25 miles northwest of Manila. The population in 1903 was 21,304. Hagonoy is situated in a fertile agricultural area that produces rice, corn, sugar, and a little coffee. Alcohol is produced in significant amounts from the fermented juice of the nipa palm, which grows in nearby swamps, and the nipa leaves are used for thatching roofs. The fishing is good here. The women of the town are skilled in weaving traditional fabrics. The local language is Tagalog. Hagonoy was established in 1581.


HAGUE, THE (in Dutch, ’s Gravenhage, or, abbreviated, den Haag; in Fr. La Haye; and in Late Lat. Haga Comitis), the chief town of the province of South Holland, about 2½ m. from the sea, with a junction station 9½ m. by rail S.W. by S. of Leiden. Steam tramways connect it with the seaside villages of Scheveningen, Kykduin and ’s Gravenzande, as well as with Delft, Wassenaar and Leiden, and it is situated on a branch of the main canal from Rotterdam to Amsterdam. Pop. (1900), 212,211. The Hague is the chief town of the province, the usual residence of the court and diplomatic bodies, and the seat of the government, the states-general, the high council of the Netherlands, the council of state, the chamber of accounts and various other administrative bodies. The characteristics of the town are quite in keeping with its political position; it is as handsome as it is fashionable, and was rightly described by de Amicis in his Olanda as half Dutch, half French. The Hague has grown very largely in modern times, especially on its western side, which is situated on the higher and more sandy soil, the south-eastern half of the town comprising the poorer and the business quarters. The main features in a plan of the town are its fine streets and houses and extensive avenues and well-planted squares; while, as a city, the neighbourhood of an attractive seaside resort, combined with the advantages and importance of a large town, and the possession of beautiful and wooded surroundings, give it a distinction all its own.

HAGUE, THE (in Dutch, ’s Gravenhage, or, abbreviated, den Haag; in French, La Haye; and in Late Latin, Haga Comitis), the main city of the province of South Holland, is about 2½ miles from the sea, with a train junction station 9½ miles southwest of Leiden. Electric trams connect it with the beach towns of Scheveningen, Kykduin, and ’s Gravenzande, as well as with Delft, Wassenaar, and Leiden. It’s located on a branch of the main canal running from Rotterdam to Amsterdam. Population (1900): 212,211. The Hague is the principal city of the province, often the home of the royal court and diplomatic missions, and the center of the government, the states-general, the high council of the Netherlands, the council of state, the chamber of accounts, and various other administrative bodies. The town's characteristics match its political status; it is as beautiful as it is stylish and was aptly described by de Amicis in his Olanda as being half Dutch, half French. The Hague has significantly expanded in modern times, particularly on its western side, which sits on higher, sandier ground, while the southeastern part of the city includes poorer neighborhoods and business areas. The city plan features fine streets and houses, broad avenues, and well-maintained squares. Additionally, the proximity to a charming seaside resort, combined with the benefits and significance of a large city, along with its lovely, wooded surroundings, gives The Hague a unique charm.

The medieval-looking group of government buildings situated in the Binnenhof (or “inner court”), their backs reflected in the pretty sheet of water called the Vyver, represent both historically and topographically the centre of the Hague. On the opposite side of the Vyver lies the parallelogram formed by the fine houses and magnificent avenue of trees of the Lange Voorhout, the Kneuterdyk and the Vyverburg, representing the fashionable kernel of the city. Close by lies the entrance to the Haagsche Bosch, or the wood, on one side of which is situated the deer-park, and a little beyond on the other the zoological gardens (1862). Away from the Lange Voorhout the fine Park Straat stretches to the “1813 Plein” or square, in the centre of which rises the large monument (1869) by Jaquet commemorating the jubilee of the restoration of Dutch independence in 1813. Beyond this is the Alexander Veld, used as a military drill ground, and close by is the entrance to the beautiful road called the Scheveningensche Weg, which leads through the “little woods” to Scheveningen. Parallel to the Park Straat is the busy Noordeinde, in which is situated the royal palace. The palace was purchased by the States in 1595, rebuilt by the stadtholder William III., and extended by King William I. in the beginning of the 19th century. In front of the building is an equestrian statue of William I. of Orange by Count Nieuerkerke (1845), and behind are the gardens and extensive stables. The Binnenhof, which has been already mentioned, was once surrounded by 818 a moat, and is still entered through ancient gateways. The oldest portion was founded in 1249 by William II., count of Holland, whose son, Florens V., enlarged it and made it his residence. Several centuries later the stadtholders also lived here. The fine old hall of the knights, built by Florens, and now containing the archives of the home office, is the historic chamber in which the states of the Netherlands abjured their allegiance to Philip II. of Spain, and in front of which the grey-headed statesman Johan van Oldenbarneveldt was executed in 1619. Close by on the one side are the courts of justice, and on the other the first and second chambers of the states-general, containing some richly painted ceilings and the portraits of various stadtholders. Government offices occupy the remainder of the buildings, and in the middle of the court is a fountain surmounted by a statuette of William II., count of Holland (1227-1256). In the adjoining Buitenhof, or “outer court,” is a statue of King William II. (d. 1849), and the old Gevangen Poort, or prison gate (restored 1875), consisting of a tower and gateway. It was here that the brothers Cornelis and Jan de Witt were killed by the mob in 1672. On the opposite side of the Binnenhof is the busy square called the Plein, where all the tram-lines meet. Round about it are the buildings of the ministry of justice and other government buildings, including one to contain the state archives, the large club-house of the Witte Societeit, and the Mauritshuis. The Mauritshuis was built in 1633-1644 by Count John Maurice of Nassau, governor of Brazil, and contains the famous picture gallery of the Hague. The nucleus of this collection was formed by the princes of Orange, notably by the stadtholder William V. (1748-1806). King William I. did much to restore the losses caused by the removal of many of the pictures during the French occupation. Other artistic collections in the Hague are the municipal museum (Gernsente Museum), containing paintings by both ancient and modern Dutch artists, and some antiquities; the fine collection of pictures in the Steengracht gallery, belonging to Jonkheer Steengracht; the museum Meermanno-Westreenianum, named after Count Meermann and Baron Westreenen (d. 1850), containing some interesting MSS. and specimens of early typography and other curiosities; and the Mesdag Museum, containing the collection of the painter H. W. Mesdag (b. 1831) presented by him to the state. The royal library (1798) contains upwards of 500,000 volumes, including some early illuminated MSS., a valuable collection of coins and medals and some fine antique gems. In addition to the royal palace already mentioned, there are the palaces of the queen-dowager, of the prince of Orange (founded about 1720 by Count Unico of Wassenaar Twiekels) and of the prince von Wied, dating from 1825, and containing some good early Dutch and Flemish masters. There are numerous churches of various denominations in the Hague as well as an English church, a Russian chapel and two synagogues, one of which is Portuguese. The Groote Kerk of St James (15th and 16th centuries) has a fine vaulted interior, and contains some old stained glass, a carved wooden pulpit (1550), a large organ and interesting sepulchral monuments, and some escutcheons of the knights of the Golden Fleece, placed here after the chapter of 1456. The Nieuwe Kerk, or new church (first half 17th century), contains the tombs of the brothers De Witt and of the philosopher Spinoza. Spinoza is further commemorated by a monument in front of the house in which he died in 1677. The picturesque town hall (built in 1565 and restored and enlarged in 1882) contains a historical picture gallery. The principal other buildings are the provincial government offices, the royal school of music, the college of art, the large building (1874) of the society for arts and sciences, the ethnographical institute of the Netherlands Indies with fine library, the theatres, civil and military hospitals, orphanage, lunatic asylum and other charitable institutions; the fine modern railway station (1892), the cavalry and artillery and the infantry barracks, and the cannon foundry. The chief industries of the town are iron casting, copper and lead smelting, cannon founding, the manufacture of furniture and carriages, liqueur distilling, lithographing and printing.

The medieval-style group of government buildings located in the Binnenhof (or “inner court”), with their reflections in the lovely body of water known as the Vyver, represent both the historical and geographical center of The Hague. On the other side of the Vyver is the parallelogram created by the elegant houses and impressive tree-lined avenue of Lange Voorhout, Kneuterdyk, and Vyverburg, representing the upscale heart of the city. Nearby, you can find the entrance to the Haagsche Bosch, or the woods, one side of which features a deer park, and a bit further on the other side is the zoo (1862). Moving away from Lange Voorhout, the beautiful Park Straat leads to the “1813 Plein” or square, which has a large monument (1869) by Jaquet commemorating the anniversary of the restoration of Dutch independence in 1813. Beyond this is the Alexander Veld, used as a military drill ground, and close to that is the entrance to the stunning road known as Scheveningensche Weg, which takes you through the “little woods” to Scheveningen. Parallel to Park Straat is the busy Noordeinde, where the royal palace is located. The palace was bought by the States in 1595, rebuilt by Stadhouder William III, and expanded by King William I in the early 19th century. In front of the palace stands an equestrian statue of William I of Orange by Count Nieuerkerke (1845), and behind it are the gardens and large stables. The Binnenhof, as mentioned earlier, was once surrounded by a moat and is still accessed through ancient gateways. The oldest part was established in 1249 by William II, Count of Holland, whose son, Florens V, added to it and made it his residence. Centuries later, the stadholders also lived here. The impressive old hall of knights, built by Florens and now housing the home office archives, is the historic chamber where the states of the Netherlands renounced their allegiance to Philip II of Spain, and in front of which the gray-haired statesman Johan van Oldenbarneveldt was executed in 1619. Close by, on one side, are the courts of justice, and on the other side are the first and second chambers of the states-general, featuring some richly painted ceilings and portraits of various stadholders. Government offices occupy the rest of the buildings, and in the middle of the court stands a fountain topped by a statuette of William II, Count of Holland (1227-1256). In the adjoining Buitenhof, or “outer court,” is a statue of King William II (d. 1849) and the old Gevangen Poort, or prison gate (restored 1875), which consists of a tower and gateway. It was here that brothers Cornelis and Jan de Witt were killed by the mob in 1672. Across from the Binnenhof is the lively square known as the Plein, where all the tram lines converge. Surrounding it are the buildings of the Ministry of Justice and other government offices, including one for the state archives, the large club house of the Witte Societeit, and the Mauritshuis. The Mauritshuis was built between 1633 and 1644 by Count John Maurice of Nassau, governor of Brazil, and it houses the famous picture gallery of The Hague. The core of this collection was created by the Princes of Orange, especially by Stadhouder William V (1748-1806). King William I contributed significantly to restoring the losses incurred while many paintings were removed during the French occupation. Other art collections in The Hague include the municipal museum (Gernsente Museum), which contains paintings by both old and modern Dutch artists, and some antiquities; the impressive collection of paintings in the Steengracht gallery, owned by Jonkheer Steengracht; the Meermanno-Westreenianum museum, named after Count Meermann and Baron Westreenen (d. 1850), with interesting manuscripts and examples of early printing and other curiosities; and the Mesdag Museum, which holds the collection of painter H. W. Mesdag (b. 1831), donated by him to the state. The royal library (1798) contains over 500,000 volumes, including some early illuminated manuscripts, a valuable collection of coins and medals, and fine antique gemstones. In addition to the royal palace already mentioned, there are the palaces of the queen dowager, the prince of Orange (established around 1720 by Count Unico of Wassenaar Twiekels), and the prince von Wied, built in 1825, featuring work by renowned early Dutch and Flemish masters. There are many churches of different denominations in The Hague, as well as an English church, a Russian chapel, and two synagogues, one of which is Portuguese. The Groote Kerk of St. James (15th and 16th centuries) boasts a beautiful vaulted interior and contains some old stained glass, a carved wooden pulpit (1550), a large organ, and notable tombs, along with coats of arms from the Knights of the Golden Fleece placed here after the assembly in 1456. The Nieuwe Kerk, or new church (early 17th century), is home to the tombs of the De Witt brothers and philosopher Spinoza, who is also remembered by a monument in front of the house where he died in 1677. The picturesque town hall (built in 1565 and restored and expanded in 1882) contains a historical picture gallery. Other notable buildings include the provincial government offices, the royal school of music, the college of art, the large building (1874) for the society of arts and sciences, the ethnographic institute of the Netherlands Indies with an excellent library, theaters, civil and military hospitals, an orphanage, a psychiatric hospital, and various other charitable institutions; the well-designed modern railway station (1892), barracks for cavalry and artillery, infantry barracks, and a cannon foundry. The main industries in the city are iron casting, copper and lead smelting, cannon founding, furniture and carriage manufacturing, liqueur distillation, lithography, and printing.

The Hague wood has been described as the city’s finest ornament. It is composed chiefly of oaks and alders and magnificent avenues of gigantic beech-trees. Together with the Haarlem wood it is thought to be a remnant of the immense forest which once extended along the coast. At the end of one of the avenues which penetrates into it from the town is the large summer club-house of the Witte Societeit, under whose auspices concerts are given here in summer. Farther into the wood are some pretty little lakes, and the famous royal villa called the Huis ten Bosch, or “house in the wood.” This villa was built by Pieter Post for the Princess Amelia of Solms, in memory of her husband the stadtholder, Frederick Henry of Orange (d. 1647), and wings were added to it by Prince William IV. in 1748. The chief room is the Orange Saloon, an octagonal hall 50 ft. high, covered with paintings by Dutch and Flemish artists, chiefly of incidents in the life of Prince Frederick. In this room the International Peace Conference had its sittings in the summer of 1899. The collections in the Chinese and Japanese rooms, and the grisailles in the dining-room painted by Jacobus de Wit (1695-1754), are also noteworthy.

The Hague wood is considered the city's best feature. It's mainly made up of oaks and alders, along with impressive avenues of huge beech trees. Along with the Haarlem wood, it's believed to be a remnant of the vast forest that once stretched along the coast. At the end of one avenue that leads in from the town is the large summer clubhouse of the Witte Societeit, where concerts are held in the summer. Deeper in the wood, there are some lovely little lakes and the famous royal villa known as the Huis ten Bosch, or “house in the wood.” This villa was built by Pieter Post for Princess Amelia of Solms in memory of her husband, the stadtholder Frederick Henry of Orange (d. 1647), and was expanded by Prince William IV in 1748. The main room is the Orange Saloon, an octagonal hall 50 ft. high, decorated with paintings by Dutch and Flemish artists, primarily depicting events from Prince Frederick's life. In this room, the International Peace Conference met during the summer of 1899. The collections in the Chinese and Japanese rooms, as well as the grisailles in the dining room painted by Jacobus de Wit (1695-1754), are also notable.

The history of the Hague is in some respects singular. In the 13th century it was no more than a hunting-lodge of the counts of Holland, and though Count Floris V. (b. 1254-1296) made it his residence and it thus became the seat of the supreme court of justice of Holland and the centre of the administration, and from the time of William of Orange onward the meeting-place of the states-general, it only received the status of a town, from King Louis Bonaparte, early in the 19th century.

The history of The Hague is unique in some ways. In the 13th century, it was just a hunting lodge for the counts of Holland. Although Count Floris V (b. 1254-1296) made it his home, turning it into the seat of the highest court of justice in Holland and the center of administration, and from the time of William of Orange onward it became the meeting place for the states-general, it wasn’t officially recognized as a town until King Louis Bonaparte granted it that status in the early 19th century.

In the latter part of the 17th and the first half of the 18th century the Hague was the centre of European diplomacy. Among the many treaties and conventions signed here may be mentioned the treaty of the Triple Alliance (January 23, 1688) between England, Sweden and the Netherlands; the concert of the Hague (March 31, 1710) between the Emperor, England and Holland, for the maintenance of the neutrality of the Swedish provinces in Germany during the war of the northern powers against Sweden; the Triple Alliance (January 4, 1717) between France, England and Holland for the guarantee of the treaty of Utrecht; the treaty of peace (Feb. 17, 1717) between Spain, Savoy and Austria, by which the first-named acceded to the principles of the Triple Alliance; the treaty of peace between Holland and France (May 16, 1795); the first “Hague Convention,” the outcome of the “peace conference” assembled on the initiative of the emperor Nicholas II. of Russia (July 27, 1899), and the series of conventions, the results of the second peace conference (June 15-October 18, 1907). The International court of arbitration or Hague Tribunal was established in 1899 (see Europe: History; Arbitration, International). The Palace of Peace designed to be completed in 1913 as the seat of the tribunal, on the Scheveningen avenue, is by a French architect, L. M. Cordonnier, and A. Carnegie contributed £300,000 towards its cost.

In the late 17th century and the first half of the 18th century, The Hague was the hub of European diplomacy. Some key treaties and agreements signed here include the Treaty of the Triple Alliance (January 23, 1688) between England, Sweden, and the Netherlands; the Concert of The Hague (March 31, 1710) involving the Emperor, England, and Holland, aimed at maintaining the neutrality of the Swedish provinces in Germany during the Northern War against Sweden; the Triple Alliance (January 4, 1717) between France, England, and Holland to guarantee the Treaty of Utrecht; the peace treaty (February 17, 1717) between Spain, Savoy, and Austria, in which Spain agreed to the principles of the Triple Alliance; the peace treaty between Holland and France (May 16, 1795); the first "Hague Convention," resulting from the "peace conference" initiated by Emperor Nicholas II of Russia (July 27, 1899); and the series of conventions from the second peace conference (June 15-October 18, 1907). The International Court of Arbitration, also known as the Hague Tribunal, was established in 1899 (see Europe: History; Arbitration, International). The Palace of Peace, which was supposed to be completed in 1913 as the tribunal's headquarters on Scheveningen Avenue, was designed by French architect L. M. Cordonnier, and A. Carnegie donated £300,000 towards its construction.


HAHN, AUGUST (1792-1863), German Protestant theologian, was born on the 27th of March 1792 at Grossosterhausen near Eisleben, and studied theology at the university of Leipzig. In 1819 he was nominated professor extraordinarius of theology and pastor of Altstadt in Königsberg, and in 1820 received a superintendency in that city. In 1822 he became professor ordinarius. In 1826 he removed as professor of theology to Leipzig, where, hitherto distinguished only as editor of Bardesanes, Marcion (Marcion’s Evangelium in seiner ursprünglichen Gestalt, 1823), and Ephraem Syrus, and the joint editor of a Syrische Chrestomathie (1824), he came into great prominence as the author of a treatise, De rationalismi qui dicitur vera indole et qua cum naturalismo contineatur ratione (1827), and also of an Offene Erklärung an die Evangelische Kirche zunächst in Sachsen u. Preussen (1827), in which, as a member of the school of E. W. Hengstenberg, he endeavoured to convince the rationalists that it was their duty voluntarily and at once to withdraw from the national church. In 1833 Hahn’s pamphlet against K. G. Bretschneider (Über die Lage des Christenthums in unserer Zeit, 1832) having attracted the notice of Friedrich Wilhelm III., he was called to Breslau as theological professor and consistorial councillor, and in 1843 became “general superintendent” of 819 the province of Silesia. He died at Breslau on the 13th of May 1863. Though uncompromising in his “supra-naturalism,” he did not altogether satisfy the men of his own school by his own doctrinal system. The first edition of his Lehrbuch des christlichen Glaubens (1828) was freely characterized as lacking in consistency and as detracting from the strength of the old positions in many important points. Many of these defects, however, he is considered to have remedied in his second edition (1857). Among his other works are his edition of the Hebrew Bible (1833), his Bibliothek der Symbole und Glaubensregeln der apostolisch-katholischen Kirche (1842; 2nd ed. 1877) and Predigten (1852).

HAHN, AUGUST (1792-1863), a German Protestant theologian, was born on March 27, 1792, in Grossosterhausen near Eisleben and studied theology at the University of Leipzig. In 1819, he was appointed professor extraordinarius of theology and pastor of Altstadt in Königsberg, and in 1820, he received a superintendency in that city. In 1822, he became professor ordinarius. In 1826, he moved as a professor of theology to Leipzig, where, previously recognized only as the editor of Bardesanes, Marcion (Marcion’s Evangelium in seiner ursprünglichen Gestalt, 1823), and Ephraem Syrus, and co-editor of a Syrische Chrestomathie (1824), he gained significant attention as the author of a treatise, De rationalismi qui dicitur vera indole et qua cum naturalismo contineatur ratione (1827), and also of an Offene Erklärung an die Evangelische Kirche zunächst in Sachsen und Preussen (1827), in which he, as a member of E. W. Hengstenberg's school, tried to persuade rationalists that they should voluntarily and immediately leave the national church. In 1833, Hahn’s pamphlet against K. G. Bretschneider (Über die Lage des Christenthums in unserer Zeit, 1832) caught the attention of Friedrich Wilhelm III., leading to his appointment in Breslau as a theological professor and consistorial councillor, and in 1843 he became the “general superintendent” of the province of Silesia. He died in Breslau on May 13, 1863. Although he was unwavering in his "supra-naturalism," he did not fully satisfy members of his own school with his doctrinal system. The first edition of his Lehrbuch des christlichen Glaubens (1828) was openly criticized for lacking consistency and undermining the strength of traditional positions on many key points. Many of these shortcomings, however, are believed to have been addressed in his second edition (1857). Among his other works are his edition of the Hebrew Bible (1833), his Bibliothek der Symbole und Glaubensregeln der apostolisch-katholischen Kirche (1842; 2nd ed. 1877), and Predigten (1852).

His eldest son, Heinrich August Hahn (1821-1861), after studying theology at Breslau and Berlin, became successively Privatdozent at Breslau (1845), professor ad interim (1846) at Königsberg on the death of Heinrich Hävernick, professor extraordinarius (1851) and professor ordinarius (1860) at Greifswald. Amongst his published works were a commentary on the Book of Job (1850), a translation of the Song of Songs (1852), an exposition of Isaiah xl.-lxvi. (1857) and a commentary on the Book of Ecclesiastes (1860).

His eldest son, Heinrich August Hahn (1821-1861), after studying theology at Breslau and Berlin, became a lecturer at Breslau (1845), an acting professor at Königsberg (1846) following the death of Heinrich Hävernick, an extraordinary professor (1851), and a full professor (1860) at Greifswald. Among his published works were a commentary on the Book of Job (1850), a translation of the Song of Songs (1852), an exposition of Isaiah chapters 40-66 (1857), and a commentary on the Book of Ecclesiastes (1860).

See the articles in Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopädie, and the Allgemeine deutsche Biographie.

See the articles in Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopädie, and the Allgemeine deutsche Biographie.


HAHNEMANN, SAMUEL CHRISTIAN FRIEDRICH (1755-1843), German physician and founder of “homoeopathy,” was born at Meissen in Saxony on the 10th of April 1755. He was educated at the “elector’s school” of Meissen, and studied medicine at Leipzig and Vienna, taking the degree of M.D. at Erlangen in 1779. After practising in various places, he settled in Dresden in 1784, and thence removed to Leipzig in 1789. In the following year, while translating W. Cullen’s Materia medica into German, he was struck by the fact that the symptoms produced by quinine on the healthy body were similar to those of the disordered states it was used to cure. He had previously felt dissatisfied with the state of the science of medicine, and this observation led him to assert the truth of the “law of similars,” similia similibus curantur or curenturi.e. diseases are cured (or should be treated) by those drugs which produce symptoms similar to them in the healthy. He promulgated his new principle in a paper published in 1796 in C. W. Hufeland’s Journal, and four years later, convinced that drugs in much smaller doses than were generally employed effectually exerted their curative powers, he advanced his doctrine of their potentization or dynamization. In 1810 he published his chief work, Organon der rationellen Heilkunde, containing an exposition of his system, which he called homoeopathy (q.v.), and in the following years appeared the six volumes of his Reine Arzneimittellehre, which detailed the symptoms produced by “proving” a large number of drugs, i.e. by systematically administering them to healthy subjects. In 1821 the hostility of established interests, and especially of the apothecaries, whose services were not required under his system, forced him to leave Leipzig, and at the invitation of the grand-duke of Anhalt-Cöthen he went to live at Cöthen. Fourteen years later he removed to Paris, where he practised with great success until his death on the 2nd of July 1843. Statues were erected to his memory at Leipzig in 1851 and at Cöthen in 1855. He also wrote, in addition to the works already mentioned, Fragmenta de viribus medicamentorum positivis (1805) and Die chronischen Krankheiten (1828-1830).

HAHNEMANN, SAMUEL C. FRIEDRICH (1755-1843), German physician and the founder of "homoeopathy," was born in Meissen, Saxony, on April 10, 1755. He attended the "elector's school" in Meissen and studied medicine at Leipzig and Vienna, earning his M.D. degree at Erlangen in 1779. After practicing in various locations, he settled in Dresden in 1784 and then moved to Leipzig in 1789. The following year, while translating W. Cullen's Materia medica into German, he realized that the symptoms caused by quinine in a healthy body were similar to the symptoms of the disorders it was used to treat. Previously, he had been dissatisfied with the state of medical science, and this observation led him to propose the "law of similars," similia similibus curantur or curentur—meaning diseases are treated (or should be treated) with drugs that produce similar symptoms in healthy individuals. He published this new principle in a paper in 1796 in C. W. Hufeland's Journal, and four years later, convinced that drugs in much smaller doses than were typically used effectively exerted their healing properties, he introduced his theory of potentization or dynamization. In 1810, he published his main work, Organon der rationellen Heilkunde, which explained his system called homoeopathy (q.v.), and in the following years, he released six volumes of his Reine Arzneimittellehre, detailing the symptoms produced by "proving" a large number of drugs, that is, by systematically administering them to healthy subjects. In 1821, the opposition from established interests, particularly the pharmacists whose services were not needed under his system, forced him to leave Leipzig, and at the invitation of the grand-duke of Anhalt-Cöthen, he moved to Cöthen. Fourteen years later, he relocated to Paris, where he practiced successfully until his death on July 2, 1843. Statues were erected in his honor in Leipzig in 1851 and in Cöthen in 1855. He also wrote, in addition to the works already mentioned, Fragmenta de viribus medicamentorum positivis (1805) and Die chronischen Krankheiten (1828-1830).

See the article Homoeopathy; also Albrecht, Hahnemann’s Leben und Werken (Leipzig, 1875); Bradford, Hahnemann’s Life and Letters (Philadelphia, 1895).

See the article Homoeopathy; also Albrecht, Hahnemann’s Life and Works (Leipzig, 1875); Bradford, Hahnemann’s Life and Letters (Philadelphia, 1895).


HAHN-HAHN, IDA, Countess Von (1805-1880), German author, was born at Tressow, in Mecklenburg-Schwerin, on the 22nd of June 1805, daughter of Graf (Count) Karl Friedrich von Hahn (1782-1857), well known for his enthusiasm for the stage, upon which he squandered a large portion of his fortune. She married in 1826 her wealthy cousin Count Adolf von Hahn-Hahn. With him she had an extremely unhappy life, and in 1829 her husband’s irregularities led to a divorce. The countess travelled, produced some volumes of poetry indicating true lyrical feeling, and in 1838 appeared as a novelist with Aus der Gesellschaft, a title which, proving equally applicable to her subsequent novels, was retained as that of a series, the book originally so entitled being renamed Ida Schönholm. For several years the countess continued to produce novels bearing a certain subjective resemblance to those of George Sand, but less hostile to social institutions, and dealing almost exclusively with aristocratic society. The author’s patrician affectations at length drew upon her the merciless ridicule of Fanny Lewald in a parody of her style entitled Diogena (1847), and this and the revolution of 1848 together seem to have co-operated in inducing her to embrace the Roman Catholic religion in 1850. She justified her step in a polemical work entitled Von Babylon nach Jerusalem (1851), which elicited a vigorous reply from H. Abeken. In 1852 she retired into a convent at Angers, which she, however, soon left, taking up her residence at Mainz where she founded a nunnery, in which she lived without joining the order, and continued her literary labours. For many years her novels were the most popular works of fiction in aristocratic circles; many of her later publications, however, passed unnoticed as mere party manifestoes. Her earlier works do not deserve the neglect into which they have fallen. If their sentimentalism is sometimes wearisome, it is grounded on genuine feeling and expressed with passionate eloquence. Ulrich and Gräfin Faustine, both published in 1841, mark the culmination of her power; but Sigismund Forster (1843), Cecil (1844), Sibylle (1846) and Maria Regina (1860) also obtained considerable popularity. She died at Mainz on the 12th of January 1880.

HAHN-HAHN, IDA, Countess Von (1805-1880), a German author, was born in Tressow, Mecklenburg-Schwerin, on June 22, 1805, as the daughter of Count Karl Friedrich von Hahn (1782-1857), well-known for his passion for the stage, on which he wasted a significant part of his fortune. She married her wealthy cousin Count Adolf von Hahn-Hahn in 1826. Her life with him was extremely unhappy, and in 1829, her husband’s indiscretions led to a divorce. The countess traveled, produced several volumes of poetry that showed genuine lyrical feeling, and debuted as a novelist in 1838 with Aus der Gesellschaft, a title that proved applicable to her later novels and became the name of a series, with the original book being retitled Ida Schönholm. For several years, she continued to write novels that had a certain subjective similarity to those of George Sand, but were less critical of social institutions and focused almost exclusively on aristocratic society. The author’s aristocratic pretensions eventually attracted the relentless ridicule of Fanny Lewald in a parody of her style called Diogena (1847), and this, along with the revolution of 1848, seems to have influenced her decision to convert to Roman Catholicism in 1850. She defended her decision in a polemical work titled Von Babylon nach Jerusalem (1851), which provoked a strong response from H. Abeken. In 1852, she withdrew to a convent in Angers but soon left, moving to Mainz where she founded a nunnery. She lived there without joining the order and continued her literary work. For many years, her novels were the most popular fiction in aristocratic circles; however, many of her later publications were overlooked as mere party manifestoes. Her earlier works do not deserve the neglect they have received. Although their sentimentalism can be tiring at times, it is based on genuine emotion and expressed with passionate eloquence. Ulrich and Gräfin Faustine, both published in 1841, represent the peak of her talent; but Sigismund Forster (1843), Cecil (1844), Sibylle (1846), and Maria Regina (1860) also gained significant popularity. She passed away in Mainz on January 12, 1880.

Her collected works, Gesammelte Werke, with an introduction by O. von Schaching, were published in two series, 45 volumes in all (Regensburg, 1903-1904). See H. Keiter, Gräfin Hahn-Hahn (Würzburg, undated); P. Haffner, Gräfin Ida Hahn-Hahn, eine psychologische Studie (Frankfort, 1880); A. Jacoby, Ida Gräfin Hahn-Hahn (Mainz, 1894).

Her collected works, Gesammelte Werke, with an introduction by O. von Schaching, were published in two series, totaling 45 volumes (Regensburg, 1903-1904). See H. Keiter, Gräfin Hahn-Hahn (Würzburg, undated); P. Haffner, Gräfin Ida Hahn-Hahn, eine psychologische Studie (Frankfort, 1880); A. Jacoby, Ida Gräfin Hahn-Hahn (Mainz, 1894).


HAI (939-1038), Jewish Talmudical scholar, was born in 939. He was educated by his father Sherira, gaon of Pombeditha (Pumbedita), whom he afterwards assisted in his work. They were cast into prison for a short time by the caliph Qadir, and subsequently on Sherira’s death Hai was appointed gaon in his place (998). This office he held till his death on the 28th of March 1038. He is famous chiefly for his answers to problems of ritual and civil law. He composed important treatises on Talmudic law and the Mishnah; many poems are also attributed to him on doubtful authority. In his responsa he laid stress on custom and tradition provided no infringement of the law were involved, and was essentially conservative in theology. He had considerable knowledge not only of religious movements within the Jewish body, but also of Mahommedan theology and controversial method, and frequently consulted theologians of other beliefs.

HAI (939-1038), a Jewish Talmudic scholar, was born in 939. He was educated by his father, Sherira, the gaon of Pombeditha (Pumbedita), whom he later assisted in his work. They were imprisoned for a short time by the caliph Qadir, and after Sherira’s death, Hai was appointed gaon in his place (998). He held this position until his death on March 28, 1038. He is mainly known for his responses to questions about ritual and civil law. He wrote important treatises on Talmudic law and the Mishnah; many poems are also wrongly attributed to him. In his responsa, he emphasized custom and tradition as long as they didn't violate the law and was generally conservative in theology. He had extensive knowledge not only of religious movements within the Jewish community but also of Islamic theology and methods of debate, and he frequently consulted theologians from other faiths.

See Steinschneider, Hebr. Übersetz. p. 910, and article in Jewish Encyclopedia, vi. 153.

See Steinschneider, Hebr. Übersetz. p. 910, and article in Jewish Encyclopedia, vi. 153.


HAIBAK, a town and khanate of Afghan Turkestan. The valley of Haibak, which is 3100 ft. above sea level, is fertile and richly cultivated. The town, which is famed in Persian legend, consists now of only a couple of streets, containing many Hindu shops and a small garrison. The inhabitants call themselves Jagatais, a Turki race, though now generally mixed with Tajiks and speaking Persian. In the neighbourhood of Haibak are some very typical Buddhist ruins. Haibak derives its importance from its position on the main line of communication between Kabul and Afghan Turkestan.

HAIBAK, is a town and khanate in Afghan Turkestan. The Haibak valley, which sits 3100 feet above sea level, is fertile and well cultivated. The town, famous in Persian legend, now consists of just a couple of streets with many Hindu shops and a small military presence. The people refer to themselves as Jagatais, a Turkic group, although they are mostly mixed with Tajiks and speak Persian. In the area around Haibak, there are some notable Buddhist ruins. Haibak's significance comes from its location on the main route connecting Kabul to Afghan Turkestan.


HAIDA, a tribe of North American Indians of Skittagetan stock. They still occupy their original home, the Queen Charlotte islands, British Columbia. They are skilful seamen, making long fishing expeditions in cedarwood canoes. They are noted for their carving and basket-work. They formerly made raids on the coast tribes. Slavery was hereditary, the slaves being prisoners of war. The population, some 7000 in the middle of the 19th century, is now reduced to a few hundreds.

HAIDA, a tribe of North American Indians of Skittagetan ancestry. They still live in their original home, the Queen Charlotte Islands in British Columbia. They are skilled seamen, undertaking long fishing trips in cedar canoes. They are known for their carving and basket weaving. In the past, they conducted raids on coastal tribes. Slavery was inherited, with slaves being prisoners of war. The population, which was about 7,000 in the mid-19th century, has now dwindled to a few hundred.

See Handbook of American Indians (Washington, 1907). For “Haida Texts and Myths,” see Bull. 29 Smithsonian Institution Bureau Amer. Ethnol. (1905).

See Handbook of American Indians (Washington, 1907). For “Haida Texts and Myths,” see Bull. 29 Smithsonian Institution Bureau Amer. Ethnol. (1905).

820

820


HAIDINGER, WILHELM KARL, Ritter von (1795-1871), Austrian mineralogist, geologist and physicist, was born at Vienna on the 5th of February 1795. His father, Karl Haidinger, contributed largely to the development of mineralogical science in the latter half of the 18th century. Having studied at the normal school of St Anne, and attended classes at the university, Wilhelm, at the age of seventeen, joined Professor F. Mohs at Gratz, and five years later accompanied the professor to Freiberg on the transfer of his labours to the mining academy of that town.

HAIDINGER, WILHELM KARL, Knight von (1795-1871), an Austrian mineralogist, geologist, and physicist, was born in Vienna on February 5, 1795. His father, Karl Haidinger, played a significant role in the advancement of mineralogical science in the late 18th century. After studying at the normal school of St. Anne and attending university classes, Wilhelm joined Professor F. Mohs in Graz at the age of seventeen. Five years later, he followed the professor to Freiberg when he transferred to the mining academy there.

In 1822 Haidinger visited France and England with Count Breunner, and, journeying northward, took up his abode in Edinburgh. He translated into English, with additions of his own, Mohs’s Grundriss der Mineralogie, published at Edinburgh in three volumes under the title Treatise on Mineralogy (1825). After a tour in northern Europe, including the Scandinavian mining districts, he undertook the scientific direction of the porcelain works at Elbogen, belonging to his brothers. In 1840 he was appointed counsellor of mines (Bergrat) at Vienna in the place of Professor Mohs, a post which included the charge of the imperial cabinet of minerals. He devoted himself to the rearrangement and enrichment of the collections, and the museum became the first in Europe. Shortly after (1843) Haidinger commenced a series of lectures on mineralogy, which was given to the world under the title Handbuch der bestimmenden Mineralogie (Vienna, 1845; tables, 1846). On the establishment of the imperial geological institute, he was chosen director (1849); and this important position he occupied for seventeen years. He was elected a member of the imperial board of agriculture and mines, and a member of the imperial academy of sciences of Vienna. He organized the society of the Freunde der Naturwissenschaften. As a physicist Haidinger ranked high, and he was one of the most active promoters of scientific progress in Austria. He was the discoverer of the interesting optical appearances which have been called after him “Haidinger’s brushes.” Knighted in 1865, the following year he retired to his estate at Dornbach near Vienna, where he died on the 19th of March 1871.

In 1822, Haidinger traveled to France and England with Count Breunner, and then headed north to settle in Edinburgh. He translated Mohs’s Grundriss der Mineralogie into English, adding his own contributions, which was published in Edinburgh as Treatise on Mineralogy (1825) in three volumes. After touring northern Europe, including the Scandinavian mining regions, he took on the scientific management of the porcelain works in Elbogen run by his brothers. In 1840, he was appointed counselor of mines (Bergrat) in Vienna, replacing Professor Mohs, a role that also included overseeing the imperial mineral cabinet. He focused on reorganizing and enhancing the collections, making the museum the top one in Europe. Shortly after (1843), Haidinger began a series of mineralogy lectures, which were published as Handbuch der bestimmenden Mineralogie (Vienna, 1845; tables, 1846). When the imperial geological institute was established, he was appointed director in 1849, a position he held for seventeen years. He became a member of the imperial board of agriculture and mines, as well as a member of the imperial academy of sciences in Vienna. He also organized the society of the Freunde der Naturwissenschaften. As a physicist, Haidinger was highly regarded and was a key advocate for scientific advancement in Austria. He discovered the fascinating optical phenomena now known as “Haidinger’s brushes.” Knighted in 1865, he retired the following year to his estate in Dornbach near Vienna, where he passed away on March 19, 1871.

In addition to the works already named, Haidinger published Anfangsgründe der Mineralogie (Leipzig, 1829); Geognostische Übersichtskarte der österreich. Monarchie (Vienna, 1847); Bemerkungen über die Anordnung der kleinsten Theilchen in Christallen (Vienna, 1853); Interferenzlinien am Glimmer (Vienna, 1855); Vergleichungen von Augit und Amphibol (Vienna, 1855). He also edited the Naturwissenschaftliche Abhandlungen (Vienna, 1847); the Berichte über die Mittheilungen von Freunden der Naturwissenschaften in Wien (Vienna, 1847-1851); and the Jahrbuch of the Vienna K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt (1850), &c. Some of his papers will be found in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh (vol. x.) and of the Wernerian Society (1822-1823), Edinburgh Phil. Journal, Brewster’s Journal of Science, and Poggendorff’s Annalen.

In addition to the works already mentioned, Haidinger published Anfangsgründe der Mineralogie (Leipzig, 1829); Geognostische Übersichtskarte der österreich. Monarchie (Vienna, 1847); Bemerkungen über die Anordnung der kleinsten Theilchen in Christallen (Vienna, 1853); Interferenzlinien am Glimmer (Vienna, 1855); and Vergleichungen von Augit und Amphibol (Vienna, 1855). He also edited the Naturwissenschaftliche Abhandlungen (Vienna, 1847); the Berichte über die Mittheilungen von Freunden der Naturwissenschaften in Wien (Vienna, 1847-1851); and the Jahrbuch of the Vienna K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt (1850), etc. Some of his papers can be found in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh (vol. x.) and of the Wernerian Society (1822-1823), Edinburgh Phil. Journal, Brewster’s Journal of Science, and Poggendorff’s Annalen.

(H. B. Wo.)

HAIDUK (also written Hayduk, Heiduc, Heyduke and Heyduque), a term which appears originally to have meant “robber” or “brigand,” a sense it retains in Servia and some other parts of the Balkan Peninsula. It is probably derived from the Turkish haidūd, “marauder,” but its origin is not absolutely certain. Most of the European races with which the Turks came into close contact during the 15th and 16th centuries seem to have adopted it as a loan-word, and it appears in Magyar as hajdú (plural hajduk), in Serbo-Croatian, Rumanian, Polish and Čech as hajduk, in Bulgarian as hajdutin and in Greek as χαιντούτης. By the beginning of the 17th century its use had spread north and west as far as Sweden and Great Britain. In Hungary it was applied to a class of mercenary foot-soldiers of Magyar stock. In 1605 these haiduks were rewarded for their fidelity to the Protestant party (see Hungary: History) with titles of nobility and territorial rights over a district situated on the left bank of the river Theiss, known thenceforward as the Haiduk region. This was enlarged in 1876 and converted into the county of Hajdú (Ger. Hajduken). Hajdú is also a common prefix in Hungarian place-names, e.g. Hajdú-Szoboszló, Hajdú-Námás. In Austria-Hungary, Germany, Poland, Sweden and some other countries, haiduk came to mean an attendant in a court of law, or a male servant, dressed in Hungarian semi-military costume. It is also occasionally used as a synonym for “footman” or “lackey.”

HAIDUK (also written Hayduk, Heiduc, Heyduke and Heyduque), a term that originally meant “robber” or “bandit,” a meaning it still holds in Serbia and some other parts of the Balkans. It likely comes from the Turkish haidūd, meaning “marauder,” though its exact origin isn’t completely clear. Most European groups that the Turks interacted with during the 15th and 16th centuries seem to have adopted it as a loanword, and it appears in Hungarian as hajdú (plural hajduk), in Serbo-Croatian, Romanian, Polish, and Czech as hajduk, in Bulgarian as hajdutin, and in Greek as χαιντούτης. By the early 17th century, its usage had spread north and west to places like Sweden and Great Britain. In Hungary, it referred to a class of mercenary foot soldiers of Hungarian descent. In 1605, these haiduks were honored for their loyalty to the Protestant cause (see Hungary: History) with titles of nobility and territorial rights over an area located on the left bank of the river Tisza, which then became known as the Haiduk region. This area was expanded in 1876 and turned into the county of Hajdú (Ger. Hajduken). Hajdú is also a common prefix in Hungarian place names, e.g. Hajdú-Szoboszló, Hajdú-Námás. In Austria-Hungary, Germany, Poland, Sweden, and some other countries, haiduk came to mean an attendant in a court of law, or a male servant dressed in Hungarian semi-military attire. It is also sometimes used as a synonym for “footman” or “lackey.”


HAIFA, a town of Palestine at the foot of Mt. Carmel, on the south of the Bay of Acre. It represents the classical Sycaminum, but the present town is entirely modern. It has developed since about 1890 into an important port, and is connected by railway with Damascus. The population is estimated at 12,000 (Moslems 6000, Christians 4000, Jews 1500, Germans 500; the last belong for the greater part to the Unitarian sect of the “Templars,” who have colonies also at Jaffa and Jerusalem). The exports (grain and oil) were valued at £178,738 in 1900. Much of the trade that formerly went to Acre has been attracted to Haifa. This port is the best natural harbour on the Palestine coast.

HAIFA, is a town in Palestine at the base of Mt. Carmel, to the south of the Bay of Acre. It represents the classic Sycaminum, but the current town is completely modern. Since around 1890, it has grown into an important port and is connected by railway to Damascus. The population is estimated to be 12,000 (6,000 Muslims, 4,000 Christians, 1,500 Jews, 500 Germans; most of the Germans belong to the Unitarian sect known as the “Templars,” who also have colonies in Jaffa and Jerusalem). The exports (grain and oil) were valued at £178,738 in 1900. Much of the trade that used to go to Acre has now shifted to Haifa. This port is the best natural harbor along the Palestine coast.


HAIK (an Arabic word, from hak, to weave), a piece of cloth, usually of coarse hand-woven wool, worn by Arabs, Moors and other Mahommedan peoples. It is generally 6 to 6½ yds. long, and about 2 broad. It is either striped or plain, and is worn equally by both sexes, usually as an outer covering; but it is often the only garment of the poorer classes. By women the “haik” is arranged to cover the head and, in the presence of men, is held so as to conceal the face. A thin “haik” of silk, like a veil, is used by brides at their marriage.

HAIK (an Arabic word, from hak, meaning to weave), is a piece of fabric, typically made of coarse hand-woven wool, worn by Arabs, Moors, and other Muslim communities. It's usually 6 to 6½ yards long and about 2 yards wide. The fabric can be either striped or solid and is worn by both men and women, usually as an outer garment; however, for poorer individuals, it may be the only piece of clothing they have. Women style the “haik” to cover their heads, and in the presence of men, they hold it in a way that conceals their faces. A lighter “haik” made of silk, similar to a veil, is worn by brides during their wedding.


HAIL (O. Eng. hægl and hagol,1 cf. the cognate Teutonic hagel, as in German, Dutch, Swedish, &c.; the Gr. κάχληξ, pebble, is probably allied), the name for rounded masses or single pellets of ice falling from the clouds in a shower. True hail has a concentric structure caused by the frozen particles of moisture first descending into a warm cloud, whence they are carried upwards on an ascending current of heated air into a cold stratum where the fresh coating of water vapour deposited in the cloud is frozen. The hailstone descends again, receives a fresh coating, is carried up once more, refrozen, and again descends. Thus the hailstone grows until the current is no longer strong enough to support it when it falls to the ground. At times masses of hail are frozen together, and a very sudden cooling will sometimes result in the formation of ragged masses of ice that fall with disastrous results. Hail must be distinguished from the frozen snow, “soft-hail” or “graupel,” that often falls at the rear of a spring cyclone, since true hail is almost entirely a summer phenomenon, and falls most frequently in thunderstorms which are produced under the conditions that are favourable to the formation of hail, i.e. great heat, a still atmosphere, the production of strong local convection currents in consequence, and the passage of a cold upper drift.

Hail (Old English hægl and hagol, 1 cf. the related Teutonic hagel, as in German, Dutch, Swedish, etc.; the Greek κάχληξ, meaning pebble, is probably related), is the term for rounded masses or individual pellets of ice that fall from the clouds in a shower. True hail has a layered structure formed when frozen moisture particles first drop into a warm cloud, where they are lifted again by an upward flow of warm air into a colder area, causing the new layer of water vapor in the cloud to freeze. The hailstone falls again, gets another layer, is lifted up once more, freezes again, and then descends again. This process continues until the upward current can no longer hold the hailstone, causing it to fall to the ground. Sometimes, masses of hail can freeze together, and a rapid drop in temperature can lead to the creation of jagged chunks of ice that can cause significant damage when they fall. Hail should be distinguished from frozen snow, known as “soft-hail” or “graupel,” which often falls behind a spring cyclone, as true hail primarily occurs in the summer and is most common during thunderstorms that happen under conditions conducive to hail formation, such as high heat, a calm atmosphere, strong local convection currents, and the movement of a cold upper drift.


1 “Hail,” a call of greeting or salutation, a shout to attract attention, must, of course, be distinguished. This word represents the Old Norwegian heill, prosperity, cognate with O. Eng. hāl, whence “hale,” “whole,” and hæl, whence “health,” “heal.”

1 “Hail,” a way to greet someone or get their attention, needs to be understood clearly. This word comes from the Old Norwegian heill, meaning prosperity, which is related to the Old English hāl, leading to “hale,” “whole,” and hæl, which gives us “health” and “heal.”


HAILES, DAVID DALRYMPLE, Lord (1726-1792), Scottish lawyer and historian, was born at Edinburgh on the 28th of October 1726. His father, Sir James Dalrymple, Bart., of Hailes, in the county of Haddington, auditor-general of the exchequer of Scotland, was a grandson of James, first Viscount Stair; and his mother, Lady Christian Hamilton, was a daughter of Thomas, 6th earl of Haddington. David was the eldest of sixteen children. He was educated at Eton, and studied law at Utrecht, being intended for the Scottish bar, to which he was admitted shortly after his return to Scotland in 1748. As a pleader he attained neither high distinction nor very extensive practice, but he rapidly established a well-deserved reputation for sound knowledge, unwearied application and strict probity; and in 1766 he was elevated to the bench, when he assumed the title of Lord Hailes. Ten years later he was appointed a lord of justiciary. He died on the 29th of November 1792. He was twice married, and had a daughter by each wife. The baronetcy to which he had succeeded passed to the son of his brother John, provost of Edinburgh. Another brother was Alexander Dalrymple (1737-1808), the first admiralty hydrographer, who distinguished himself in the East India Company’s service and as a geographer. Lord Hailes’s younger daughter married Sir 821 James Fergusson; and their grandson, Sir Charles Dalrymple, 1st Bart. (cr. 1887), M.P. for Bute from 1868 to 1885, afterwards came into Lord Hailes’s estate and took his family name.

HAILES, DAVID DALRYMPLE, Lord (1726-1792), was a Scottish lawyer and historian, born in Edinburgh on October 28, 1726. His father, Sir James Dalrymple, Bart., of Hailes in Haddington, was the auditor-general of the exchequer of Scotland and a grandson of James, the first Viscount Stair. His mother, Lady Christian Hamilton, was the daughter of Thomas, the 6th Earl of Haddington. David was the eldest of sixteen children. He was educated at Eton and studied law at Utrecht, aiming for the Scottish bar, to which he was admitted shortly after returning to Scotland in 1748. As a pleader, he didn't achieve much distinction or a large practice, but he quickly built a solid reputation for his knowledge, hard work, and integrity; in 1766, he was appointed to the bench, taking on the title of Lord Hailes. Ten years later, he became a lord of justiciary. He passed away on November 29, 1792. He was married twice and had a daughter with each wife. The baronetcy he inherited went to the son of his brother John, who was the provost of Edinburgh. Another brother, Alexander Dalrymple (1737-1808), was the first admiralty hydrographer, making his mark in the East India Company’s service and as a geographer. Lord Hailes’s younger daughter married Sir 821 James Fergusson; their grandson, Sir Charles Dalrymple, 1st Bart. (created 1887), was an M.P. for Bute from 1868 to 1885 and later inherited Lord Hailes’s estate, adopting his family name.

Lord Hailes’s most important contribution to literature was the Annals of Scotland, of which the first volume, “From the accession of Malcolm III., surnamed Canmore, to the accession of Robert I.,” appeared in 1776, and the second, “From the accession of Robert I., surnamed Bruce, to the accession of the house of Stewart,” in 1779. It is, as Dr Johnson justly described this work at the time of its appearance, a “Dictionary” of carefully sifted facts, which tells all that is wanted and all that is known, but without any laboured splendour of language or affected subtlety of conjecture. The other works of Lord Hailes include Historical Memoirs concerning the Provincial Councils of the Scottish Clergy (1769); An Examination of some of the Arguments for the High Antiquity of Regiam Majestatem (1769); three volumes entitled Remains of Christian Antiquity (“Account of the Martyrs of Smyrna and Lyons in the Second Century,” 1776; “The Trials of Justin Martyr, Cyprian, &c.,” 1778; “The History of the Martyrs of Palestine, translated from Eusebius,” 1780); Disquisitions concerning the Antiquities of the Christian Church (1783); and editions or translations of portions of Lactantius, Tertullian and Minucius Felix. In 1786 he published An Inquiry into the Secondary Causes which Mr Gibbon has assigned for the Rapid Growth of Christianity (Dutch translation, Utrecht, 1793), one of the most respectable of the very many replies which were made to the famous 15th and 16th chapters of the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire.

Lord Hailes’s most significant contribution to literature was the Annals of Scotland, with the first volume, “From the accession of Malcolm III., known as Canmore, to the accession of Robert I.,” published in 1776, and the second, “From the accession of Robert I., known as Bruce, to the accession of the house of Stewart,” released in 1779. It is, as Dr. Johnson accurately described this work at the time of its release, a “Dictionary” of carefully selected facts, providing everything that is needed and everything that is known, but without any elaborate flourish of language or pretentious subtlety of speculation. Lord Hailes's other works include Historical Memoirs concerning the Provincial Councils of the Scottish Clergy (1769); An Examination of some of the Arguments for the High Antiquity of Regiam Majestatem (1769); three volumes titled Remains of Christian Antiquity (“Account of the Martyrs of Smyrna and Lyons in the Second Century,” 1776; “The Trials of Justin Martyr, Cyprian, &c.,” 1778; “The History of the Martyrs of Palestine, translated from Eusebius,” 1780); Disquisitions concerning the Antiquities of the Christian Church (1783); and editions or translations of works by Lactantius, Tertullian, and Minucius Felix. In 1786, he published An Inquiry into the Secondary Causes which Mr. Gibbon has assigned for the Rapid Growth of Christianity (Dutch translation, Utrecht, 1793), regarded as one of the most respectable of the numerous responses to the famous 15th and 16th chapters of the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire.

A “Memoir” of Lord Hailes is prefixed to the 1808 reprint of his Inquiry into the Secondary Causes.

A “Memoir” of Lord Hailes is included in the 1808 reprint of his Inquiry into the Secondary Causes.


HAILSHAM, a market-town in the Eastbourne parliamentary division of Sussex, England, 54 m. S.S.E. from London by the London, Brighton & South Coast railway. Pop. (1901), 4197. The church of St Mary is Perpendicular. The picturesque Augustinian priory of Michelham lies 2 m. W. by the Cuckmere river; it is altered into a dwelling house, but retains a gate-house, crypt and other portions of Early English date. There was also a Premonstratensian house at Otham, 3 m. S., but the remains are scanty. Hailsham has a considerable agricultural trade, and manufactures of rope and matting are carried on.

HAILSHAM, is a market town in the Eastbourne parliamentary division of Sussex, England, located 54 miles south-southeast of London by the London, Brighton & South Coast railway. The population was 4,197 in 1901. The church of St. Mary features a Perpendicular style. The charming Augustinian priory of Michelham is 2 miles west by the Cuckmere River; it has been converted into a house but still has a gatehouse, crypt, and other parts dating back to the Early English period. There was also a Premonstratensian house at Otham, 3 miles south, but its remains are limited. Hailsham has a significant agricultural industry and produces rope and matting.


HAINAN, or, as it is usually called in Chinese, K’iung-chow-fu, a large island belonging to the Chinese province of Kwang-tung, and situated between the Chinese Sea and the Gulf of Tong-king from 20° 8′ to 17° 52′ N., and from 108° 32′ to 111° 15′ E. It measures 160 m. from N.E. to S.W., and the average breadth is about 90 m. The area is estimated at from 1200 to 1400 sq. m., or two-thirds the size of Sicily. From the peninsula of Lei-chow on the north it is separated by the straits of Hainan, which have a breadth of 15 or 20 m.

HAINAN, or, as it's commonly referred to in Chinese, K’iung-chow-fu, is a large island that belongs to the Chinese province of Kwang-tung, located between the Chinese Sea and the Gulf of Tong-king, ranging from 20° 8′ to 17° 52′ N., and from 108° 32′ to 111° 15′ E. It measures 160 km from northeast to southwest, with an average width of about 90 km. The area is estimated to be between 1200 to 1400 square km, which is about two-thirds the size of Sicily. It is separated from the Lei-chow peninsula in the north by the Hainan straits, which are 15 to 20 km wide.

With the exception of a considerable area in the north, and broad tracts on the north-east and north-west sides, the whole island is occupied by jungle-covered mountains, with rich valleys between. The central range bears the name of Li-mou shan or Wu-tchi shan (the Five-Finger Mountain), and attains a height of 6000 or 7000 ft. Its praises are celebrated in a glowing ode by Ch‘iu, a native poet. The island appears to be well watered, and some of its rivers are not without importance as possible highways of commerce; but the details of its hydrography are very partially ascertained. A navigable channel extends in an irregular curve from the bay of Hoi-how (Hai-K‘ow) in the north to Tan-chow on the west coast. Being exposed to the winter monsoon, the northern parts of the island enjoy much the same sort of temperate climate as the neighbouring provinces of the mainland, but in the southern parts, protected from the monsoon by the mountain ranges, the climate is almost or entirely tropical. Snow falls so rarely that its appearance in 1684 is reported in the native chronicles as a remarkable event. Earthquakes are a much more familiar phenomenon, having occurred, according to the same authority, in 1523, 1526, 1605, 1652, 1677, 1681, 1684, 1702, 1704, 1725, 1742, 1816, 1817 and 1822. Excellent timber of various kinds—eagle-wood, rose-wood, liquidambar, &c.—is one of the principal products of the island, and has even been specially transported to Peking for imperial purposes. The coco palm flourishes freely even in the north, and is to be found growing in clumps with the Pinus sinensis. Rice, cotton, sugar, indigo, cinnamon, betel-nuts, sweet potatoes, ground-nuts and tobacco are all cultivated in varying quantities. The aboriginal inhabitants collect a kind of tea called t’ien ch’a, or celestial tea, which looks like the leaves of a wild camellia, and has an earthy taste when infused. Lead, silver, copper and iron occur in the Shi-lu shan or “stone-green-hill”; the silver at least was worked till 1850. Gold and lapis lazuli are found in other parts of the island.

With the exception of a large area in the north and wide stretches on the northeast and northwest sides, the entire island is covered by jungle-clad mountains, with lush valleys in between. The central range is known as Li-mou shan or Wu-tchi shan (the Five-Finger Mountain) and reaches a height of 6,000 to 7,000 feet. Its beauty is celebrated in an enthusiastic poem by Chiu, a local poet. The island seems to have plenty of water, and some of its rivers are quite significant as potential trade routes; however, the specifics of its waterways are only partially understood. A navigable channel runs in an irregular curve from Hoi-how Bay (Hai-Kow) in the north to Tan-chow on the west coast. The northern parts of the island, affected by the winter monsoon, experience a temperate climate similar to the nearby mainland provinces, while the southern areas, sheltered from the monsoon by the mountain ranges, have a climate that is almost entirely tropical. Snow is extremely rare, with its occurrence in 1684 noted in local chronicles as a significant event. Earthquakes are much more common, having reportedly happened in 1523, 1526, 1605, 1652, 1677, 1681, 1684, 1702, 1704, 1725, 1742, 1816, 1817, and 1822. The island produces excellent timber of various kinds—such as eagle-wood, rose-wood, liquidambar, etc.—which has even been specifically transported to Beijing for imperial use. The coco palm grows abundantly even in the north, often found in clusters with the Pinus sinensis. Rice, cotton, sugar, indigo, cinnamon, betel nuts, sweet potatoes, ground nuts, and tobacco are all grown in various amounts. The indigenous inhabitants gather a type of tea called t’ien ch’a, or celestial tea, which resembles the leaves of a wild camellia and has an earthy taste when brewed. Lead, silver, copper, and iron can be found in the Shi-lu shan or “stone-green-hill,” with silver having been mined until 1850. Gold and lapis lazuli are located in other areas of the island.

The ordinary cattle of Hainan are apparently a cross between the little yellow cow of south China and the zebu of India. Buffaloes are common, and in the neighbourhood of Nanlu at least they are frequently albinos. Horses are numerous but small. Hogs and deer are both common wild animals, and of the latter there are three species, Cervus Eldi, Cervus hippelaphus and Cervus vaginalis. Among the birds, of which 172 species are described by Mr Swinhoe in his paper in The Ibis (1870), there are eagles, notably a new species Spilornis Rutherfordi, buzzards, harriers, kites, owls, goatsuckers and woodpeckers. The Upupa ceylonensis is familiar to the natives as the “bird of the Li matrons,” and the Palaeornis javanica as the “sugar-cane bird.”

The local cattle in Hainan are a mix of the small yellow cow from southern China and the zebu from India. Buffaloes are common, and around Nanlu, many of them are albinos. There are a lot of horses, but they are on the smaller side. Wild hogs and deer are also common, with three species of the latter: Cervus Eldi, Cervus hippelaphus, and Cervus vaginalis. Among the birds, Mr. Swinhoe documented 172 species in his paper in The Ibis (1870), including eagles, especially a new species called Spilornis Rutherfordi, along with buzzards, harriers, kites, owls, goatsuckers, and woodpeckers. The Upupa ceylonensis is known to the locals as the “bird of the Li matrons,” and the Palaeornis javanica is called the “sugar-cane bird.”

Hainan forms a fu or department of the province of Kwang-tung, though strictly it is only a portion of the island that is under Chinese administration, the remainder being still occupied by unsubjugated aborigines. The department contains three chow and ten hien districts. K‘iung-chow-hien, in which the capital is situated; Ting-an-hien, the only inland district; Wen-ch‘ang-hien, in the north-east of the island; Hui-t‘ung-hien, Lo-hui-hien, Ling-shu-hien, Wan-chow, Yai-chow (the southmost of all), Kan-ēn-hien, Ch’ang-hwa-hien, Tan-chow, Lin-kao-hien and Ch‘ēng-mai-hien. The capital K’iung-chow-fu is situated in the north about 10 li (or 3 m.) from the coast on the river. It is a well-built compact city, and its temples and examination halls are in good preservation. Carved articles in coco-nuts and scented woods are its principal industrial product. In 1630 it was made the seat of a Roman Catholic mission by Benoit de Mathos, a Portuguese Jesuit, and the old cemetery still contains about 113 Christian graves. The port of K‘iung-chow-fu at the mouth of the river, which is nearly dry at low water, is called simply Hoi-how, or in the court dialect Hai-K‘ow, i.e. seaport. The two towns are united by a good road, along which a large traffic is maintained partly by coolie porters but more frequently by means of wheel-barrows, which serve the purpose of cabs and carts. The value of the trade of the port has risen from £670,600 in 1899 to £719,333 in 1904. In the same year 424 vessels, representing a tonnage of 312,554, visited the port. This trade is almost entirely with the British colony of Hong-Kong, with which the port is connected by small coasting steamers, but since 1893 it has had regular steamboat communication with Haiphong in Tongking. The population of K‘iung-chow, including its shipping port of Hoi-how, is estimated at 52,000. The number of foreign residents in 1900 was about 30, most of them officials or missionaries.

Hainan is a department of the province of Guangdong, but technically, only part of the island is under Chinese administration, while the rest is still occupied by ungoverned indigenous people. The department includes three districts and ten smaller administrative areas. K‘iung-chow-hien, where the capital is located; Ting-an-hien, the only inland district; Wen-ch‘ang-hien, in the northeast of the island; Hui-t‘ung-hien, Lo-hui-hien, Ling-shu-hien, Wan-chow, Yai-chow (the southernmost of all), Kan-ēn-hien, Ch’ang-hwa-hien, Tan-chow, Lin-kao-hien, and Ch‘ēng-mai-hien. The capital K’iung-chow-fu is located about 10 li (or 3 miles) from the coast, along the river in the north. It is a well-constructed, compact city, and its temples and examination halls are well-maintained. The main industrial product is carved items made from coconuts and scented woods. In 1630, it became the base for a Roman Catholic mission led by Benoit de Mathos, a Portuguese Jesuit, and the old cemetery still has around 113 Christian graves. The port of K‘iung-chow-fu at the river's mouth, which nearly dries up at low tide, is simply called Hoi-how, or in court dialect, Hai-K‘ow, meaning seaport. The two towns are linked by a good road that supports a lot of traffic, primarily carried by coolie porters but mostly by wheelbarrows, which act as cabs and carts. The value of the port's trade increased from £670,600 in 1899 to £719,333 in 1904. In the same year, 424 ships with a combined tonnage of 312,554 visited the port. This trade is almost exclusively with the British colony of Hong Kong, connected by small coastal steamers, and since 1893, there has been regular steamboat service to Haiphong in Tonkin. The population of K‘iung-chow, including its shipping port Hoi-how, is estimated to be 52,000. In 1900, there were about 30 foreign residents, mostly officials or missionaries.

The inhabitants of Hainan may be divided into three classes, the Chinese immigrants, the civilized aborigines or Shu-li and the wild aborigines or Sheng-li. The Chinese were for the most part originally from Kwang-si and the neighbouring provinces, and they speak a peculiar dialect, of which a detailed account by Mr Swinhoe was given in The Phoenix, a Monthly Magazine for China, &c. (1870). The Shu-li as described by Mr Taintor are almost of the same stature as the Chinese, but have a more decided copper colour, higher cheek-bones and more angular features, while their eyes are not oblique. Their hair is long, straight and black, and their beards, if they have any, are very scanty. They till the soil and bring rice, fuel, timber, grass-cloth, &c., to the Chinese markets. The Sheng-li or Li proper, called also La, Le or Lauy, are probably connected with the Laos of Siam and the Lolos of China. Though not gratuitously aggressive, they are highly intractable, and have given great trouble to the Chinese authorities. Among themselves they carry on 822 deadly feuds, and revenge is a duty and an inheritance. Though they are mainly dependent on the chase for food, their weapons are still the spear and the bow, the latter being made of wood and strung with bamboo. In marriage no avoidance of similarity of name is required. The bride’s face is tattooed according to a pattern furnished by the bridegroom. Their funeral mourning consists of abstaining from drink and eating raw beef, and they use a wooden log for a coffin. When sick they sacrifice oxen. In the spring-time there is a festival in which the men and women from neighbouring settlements move about in gay clothing hand in hand and singing songs. The whole population of the island is estimated at about 2½ millions. At its first conquest 23,000 families were introduced from the mainland. In 1300 the Chinese authorities assign 166,257 inhabitants; in 1370, 291,000; in 1617, 250,524; and in 1835, 1,350,000.

The people of Hainan can be divided into three groups: the Chinese immigrants, the civilized indigenous people known as Shu-li, and the wild indigenous group called Sheng-li. Most of the Chinese originally came from Guangxi and nearby provinces, and they speak a unique dialect, which Mr. Swinhoe detailed in The Phoenix, a Monthly Magazine for China, & c. (1870). The Shu-li, as described by Mr. Taintor, are roughly the same height as the Chinese but have a more pronounced copper skin tone, higher cheekbones, and more angular features, while their eyes are not slanted. Their hair is long, straight, and black, and if they have beards, they are quite sparse. They farm the land and supply rice, firewood, timber, grass-cloth, etc., to the Chinese markets. The Sheng-li, or Li people, also known as La, Le, or Lauy, are likely related to the Laos of Siam and the Lolos of China. While they aren’t unnecessarily aggressive, they are quite difficult to manage and have caused significant issues for Chinese authorities. Among themselves, they engage in intense feuds, and seeking revenge is seen as both a duty and a tradition. They primarily rely on hunting for food, and their weapons are still spears and bows, with the latter made of wood and strung with bamboo. There are no name restrictions in marriage. The bride’s face is tattooed according to a design provided by the groom. Their mourning practices include abstaining from alcohol and eating raw beef, and they use a wooden log as a coffin. When someone is sick, they sacrifice oxen. In spring, there is a festival where men and women from nearby villages dress in colorful clothing, hold hands, and sing songs. The total population of the island is estimated to be around 2.5 million. At the time of its initial conquest, 23,000 families were brought in from the mainland. In 1300, Chinese authorities recorded 166,257 inhabitants; in 1370, the number was 291,000; in 1617, it was 250,524; and in 1835, it reached 1,350,000.

It was in 111 B.C. that Lu-Po-Teh, general of the emperor Wu-ti, first made the island of Hainan subject to the Chinese, who divided it into the two prefectures, Tan-urh or Drooping Ear in the south, so-called from the long ears of the native “king,” and Chu-yai or Pearl Shore in the north. During the decadence of the elder branch of the Han dynasty the Chinese supremacy was weakened, but in A.D. 43 the natives were led by the success of Ma-yuan in Tong-king to make a new tender of their allegiance. About this time the whole island took the name of Chu-yai. In A.D. 627 the name of K‘iung-chow came into use. On its conquest by the generals of Kublai Khan in 1278 the island was incorporated with the western part of the province of Kwang-tung in a new satrapy, Hai-peh Hai-nan Tao, i.e. the circuit north of the sea and south of the sea. It was thus that Hai-nan-Tao, or district south of the sea or strait, came into use as the name of the island, which, however, has borne the official title of K‘iung-chow-fu, probably derived from the Kiung shan or Jade Mountains, ever since 1370, the date of its erection into a department of Kwang-tung. For a long time Hainan was the refuge of the turbulent classes of China and the place of deportation for delinquent officials. It was there, for example, that Su-She or Su-Tung-po was banished in 1097. From the 15th to the 19th century pirates made the intercourse with the mainland dangerous, and in the 17th they were considered so formidable that merchants were allowed to convey their goods only across the narrow Hainan Strait. Since 1863 the presence of English men-of-war has put an end to this evil. According to the treaty of Tientsin, the capital K’iung-chow and the harbour Hoi-how (Hai-Kow) were opened to European commerce; but it was not till 1876 that advantage was taken of the permission.

It was in 111 BCE that Lu-Po-Teh, the general of Emperor Wu-ti, first brought the island of Hainan under Chinese control. They split it into two prefectures: Tan-urh, or Drooping Ear in the south, named after the long ears of the native “king,” and Chu-yai, or Pearl Shore in the north. During the decline of the older branch of the Han dynasty, Chinese authority weakened, but in A.D. 43, inspired by Ma-yuan's success in Tong-king, the locals decided to pledge their loyalty again. Around this time, the entire island began to be called Chu-yai. In CE 627, the name K‘iung-chow came into use. After it was conquered by Kublai Khan’s generals in 1278, the island was incorporated into the western part of Kwang-tung province in a new administrative region called Hai-peh Hai-nan Tao, meaning the circuit north and south of the sea. This is how Hai-nan-Tao, or the district south of the sea or strait, became the name of the island, which has officially been called K‘iung-chow-fu, probably derived from the Kiung shan or Jade Mountains, since 1370, when it was established as a department of Kwang-tung. For a long time, Hainan served as a refuge for the unruly classes of China and a place for exiled officials. For instance, Su-She or Su-Tung-po was banished there in 1097. Between the 15th and 19th centuries, pirates made travel to the mainland dangerous, and in the 17th century, they were so threatening that merchants were only allowed to transport their goods across the narrow Hainan Strait. Since 1863, the presence of English warships has put an end to this issue. According to the Treaty of Tientsin, the capital K’iung-chow and the harbor Hoi-how (Hai-Kow) were opened to European trade; however, it wasn't until 1876 that the opportunity was finally utilized.


HAINAU (officially Haynau), a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Silesia, on the Schnelle Deichsa and the railway from Breslau to Dresden, 12 m. N.W. of Liegnitz. Pop. 10,500. It has an Evangelical and a Roman Catholic church, manufactories of gloves, patent leather, paper, metal ware and artificial manures, and a considerable trade in cereals. Near Hainau the Prussian cavalry under Blücher inflicted a defeat on the French rearguard on the 26th of May 1813.

HAINAU (officially Haynau) is a town in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Silesia, along the Schnelle Deichsa and the railway connecting Breslau to Dresden, 12 miles northwest of Liegnitz. Its population is 10,500. The town has an Evangelical church and a Roman Catholic church, as well as factories producing gloves, patent leather, paper, metal goods, and artificial fertilizers, along with a significant trade in cereals. Near Hainau, the Prussian cavalry under Blücher defeated the French rearguard on May 26, 1813.


HAINAUT (Flem. Henegouwen, Ger. Hennegau), a province of Belgium formed out of the ancient county of Hainaut. Modern Hainaut is famous as containing the chief coal and iron mines of Belgium. There are about 150,000 men and women employed in the mines, and about as many more in the iron and steel works of the province. About 1880 these numbers were not more than half their present totals. The principal towns of Hainaut are Mons, the capital, Charleroi, Tournai, Jumet and La Louvière. The province is watered by both the Scheldt and the Sambre, and is connected with Flanders by the Charleroi-Ghent canal. The area of the province is computed at 930,405 acres or 1453 sq. m. In 1904 the population was 1,192,967, showing an average of 821 per square mile.

HAINAUT (Flem. Henegouwen, Ger. Hennegau), a province of Belgium that was formed from the historic county of Hainaut. Today, Hainaut is known for having the main coal and iron mines in Belgium. About 150,000 men and women work in the mines, with roughly the same number employed in the province's iron and steel industries. Around 1880, these figures were not more than half of what they are now. The main towns in Hainaut include Mons, the capital, as well as Charleroi, Tournai, Jumet, and La Louvière. The province is drained by both the Scheldt and the Sambre rivers and is linked to Flanders via the Charleroi-Ghent canal. The area of the province is estimated at 930,405 acres or 1,453 square miles. In 1904, the population was 1,192,967, averaging 821 people per square mile.

Under the successors of Clovis Hainaut formed part, first of the kingdom of Metz, and then of that of Lotharingia. It afterwards became part of the duchy of Lorraine. The first to bear the title of count of Hainaut was Reginar “Long-Neck” (c. 875), who, later on, made himself master of the duchy of Lorraine and died in 916. His eldest son inherited Lower Lorraine, the younger, Reginar II., the countship of Hainaut, which remained in the male line of his descendants, all named Reginar, until the death of Reginar V. in 1036. His heiress, Richildis, married en secondes noces Baldwin VI. of Flanders, and, by him, became the ancestress of the Baldwin (VI. of Hainaut) who in 1204 was raised by the Crusaders to the empire of Constantinople. The emperor Baldwin’s elder daughter Jeanne brought the countship of Hainaut to her husbands Ferdinand of Portugal (d. 1233) and Thomas of Savoy (d. 1259). On her death in 1244, however, it passed to her sister Margaret, on whose death in 1279 it was inherited by her grandson, John of Avesnes, count of Holland (d. 1304). The countship of Hainaut remained united with that of Holland during the 14th and 15th centuries. It was under the counts William I. “the Good” (1304-1337), whose daughter Philippa married Edward III. of England, and William II. (1337-1345) that the communes of Hainaut attained great political importance. Margaret, who succeeded her brother William II. in 1345, by her marriage with the emperor Louis IV. brought Hainaut with the rest of her dominions to the house of Wittelsbach. Finally, early in the 15th century, the countess Jacqueline was dispossessed by Philip the Good of Burgundy, and Hainaut henceforward shared the fate of the rest of the Netherlands.

Under the successors of Clovis, Hainaut was initially part of the kingdom of Metz and later of Lotharingia. Eventually, it became part of the duchy of Lorraine. The first to hold the title of Count of Hainaut was Reginar “Long-Neck” (c. 875), who later took control of the duchy of Lorraine and died in 916. His eldest son inherited Lower Lorraine, while the younger son, Reginar II, inherited the countship of Hainaut, which remained in the male line of his descendants— all named Reginar—until the death of Reginar V in 1036. His heiress, Richildis, remarried Baldwin VI of Flanders, and through him, she became the ancestor of Baldwin VI of Hainaut, who was elevated by the Crusaders to the empire of Constantinople in 1204. The emperor Baldwin's elder daughter, Jeanne, brought the countship of Hainaut to her husbands Ferdinand of Portugal (d. 1233) and Thomas of Savoy (d. 1259). However, upon her death in 1244, it passed to her sister Margaret, and upon her death in 1279, it was inherited by her grandson, John of Avesnes, Count of Holland (d. 1304). The countship of Hainaut remained united with that of Holland during the 14th and 15th centuries. Under Counts William I “the Good” (1304-1337), whose daughter Philippa married Edward III of England, and William II (1337-1345), the communes of Hainaut gained significant political importance. Margaret, who succeeded her brother William II in 1345, brought Hainaut with the rest of her territories to the house of Wittelsbach through her marriage to Emperor Louis IV. Finally, in the early 15th century, Countess Jacqueline was dispossessed by Philip the Good of Burgundy, and Hainaut subsequently shared the fate of the rest of the Netherlands.

Authorities.—The Chronicon Hanoniense or Chronica Honnoniae of Giselbert of Mons (d. 1223-1225), chancellor of Count Baldwin V., covering the period between 1040 and 1195, is published in Pertz, Monum. Germ. (Hanover, 1840, &c.). The Chronicon Hanoniense, ascribed to Baldwin, count of Avesnes (d. 1289), and written between 1278 and 1281, was published under the title Hist. genealogica comitum Hannoniae, &c., at Antwerp (1691 and 1693) and Brussels (1722). The Annals of Jacques de Guise (b. 1334; d. 1399) were published by de Fortia d’Urban under the title, Histoire de Hainault par Jacques de Guyse, in 19 vols. (Paris, 1826-1838); C. Delacourt, “Bibliographie de l’hist. du Hainaut,” in the Annales du cercle archéologique de Mons, vol. v. (Mons, 1864); T. Bernier, Dict. géograph. historique, &c., de Hainault (Mons, 1891). See also Ulysse Chevalier, Répertoire des sources s.v.

Authorities.—The Chronicon Hanoniense or Chronica Honnoniae by Giselbert of Mons (d. 1223-1225), chancellor to Count Baldwin V., which spans the years 1040 to 1195, was published in Pertz, Monum. Germ. (Hanover, 1840, &c.). The Chronicon Hanoniense, attributed to Baldwin, Count of Avesnes (d. 1289), and written between 1278 and 1281, was published under the title Hist. genealogica comitum Hannoniae, &c., in Antwerp (1691 and 1693) and Brussels (1722). The Annals of Jacques de Guise (b. 1334; d. 1399) were published by de Fortia d’Urban under the title Histoire de Hainault par Jacques de Guyse, in 19 volumes (Paris, 1826-1838); C. Delacourt, “Bibliographie de l’hist. du Hainaut,” in the Annales du cercle archéologique de Mons, vol. v. (Mons, 1864); T. Bernier, Dict. géograph. historique, &c., de Hainault (Mons, 1891). See also Ulysse Chevalier, Répertoire des sources s.v.


HAINBURG, or Haimburg, a town of Austria, in Lower Austria, 38 m. E.S.E of Vienna by rail. Pop. (1900), 5134. It is situated on the Danube, only 2½ m. from the Hungarian frontier, and since the fire of 1827 Hainburg has been much improved, being now a handsomely built town. It has one of the largest tobacco manufactories in Austria, employing about 2000 hands, and a large needle factory. It occupies part of the site of the old Celtic town Carnuntum (q.v.). It is still surrounded by ancient walls, and has a gate guarded by two old towers. There are numerous Roman remains, among which may be mentioned the altar and tower at the town-house, on the latter of which is a statue, said to be of Attila. A Roman aqueduct is still used to bring water to the town. On the neighbouring Hainberg is an old castle, built of Roman remains, which appears in German tradition under the name of Heimburc; it was wrested from the Hungarians in 1042 by the emperor Henry III. At the foot of the same hill is a castle of the 12th century, where Ottakar of Bohemia was married to Margaret of Austria in 1252; earlier it was the residence of the dukes of Babenberg. Outside the town, on an island in the Danube, is the ruined castle of Röthelstein or Rothenstein, held by the Knights Templars. Hainburg was besieged by the Hungarians in 1477, was captured by Matthias Corvinus in 1482, and was sacked and its inhabitants massacred by the Turks in 1683.

HAINBURG, or Haimburg, is a town in Austria, located in Lower Austria, 38 miles east-southeast of Vienna by train. Population (1900), 5,134. It sits on the Danube River, only 2.5 miles from the Hungarian border. Since the fire in 1827, Hainburg has seen significant improvements and is now a well-constructed town. It hosts one of the largest tobacco factories in Austria, employing around 2,000 people, along with a large needle factory. The town occupies part of the old Celtic site of Carnuntum (q.v.). It is still surrounded by ancient walls, and features a gate flanked by two old towers. There are numerous Roman ruins, including the altar and tower at the town hall, with a statue said to depict Attila. A Roman aqueduct continues to supply water to the town. On the nearby Hainberg hill stands an old castle made from Roman remains, known in German tradition as Heimburc; it was taken from the Hungarians in 1042 by Emperor Henry III. At the base of the hill is a 12th-century castle, where Ottakar of Bohemia married Margaret of Austria in 1252; it was previously the residence of the Babenberg dukes. Just outside the town, on an island in the Danube, lies the ruined castle of Röthelstein or Rothenstein, which was held by the Knights Templars. Hainburg was besieged by the Hungarians in 1477, captured by Matthias Corvinus in 1482, and was looted with its inhabitants massacred by the Turks in 1683.


HAINICHEN, a town of Germany, in the kingdom of Saxony, on the Kleine Striegis, 15 m. N.E. of Chemnitz, on the railway to Rosswein. Pop. (1905), 7752. It has two Evangelical churches, a park, and commercial and technical schools. Hainichen is a place of considerable industry. Its chief manufacture is that of flannels, baize, and similar fabrics; indeed it may be called the centre of this industry in Germany. The special whiteness and excellence of the flannel made in Hainichen are due to the peculiar nature of the water used in the manufacture. There are also large dye-works and bleaching establishments. Hainichen is the birthplace of Gellert, to whose memory a bronze statue was erected in the market-place in 1865. The Gellert institution for the poor was erected in 1815.

HAINICHEN, is a town in Germany, located in the kingdom of Saxony, along the Kleine Striegis, 15 miles northeast of Chemnitz, on the railway to Rosswein. Its population was 7,752 in 1905. The town has two Evangelical churches, a park, and commercial and technical schools. Hainichen has a strong industrial presence, mainly producing flannels, baize, and similar fabrics; in fact, it can be considered the center of this industry in Germany. The unique whiteness and quality of the flannel made in Hainichen are attributed to the special characteristics of the water used in its production. There are also large dye works and bleaching facilities. Hainichen is the birthplace of Gellert, in whose honor a bronze statue was erected in the market square in 1865. The Gellert institution for the poor was established in 1815.

823

823


HAI-PHONG, a seaport of Tongking, French Indo-China, on the Cua-Cam, a branch of the Song-koi (Red river) delta. The population numbers between 21,000 and 22,000, of whom 12,500 are Annamese, 7500 Chinese (attracted by the rice trade of the port) and 1200 Europeans. It is situated about 20 m. from the Gulf of Tongking and 58 m. E. by S. of Hanoi, with which it communicates by river and canal and by railway. It is the second commercial port of French Indo-China, is a naval station, and has government and private ship-building yards. The harbour is accessible at all times to vessels drawing 19 to 20 ft., but is obstructed by a bar. Hai-phong is the seat of a resident who performs the functions of mayor, and the residency is the chief building of the town. A civil tribunal, a tribunal of commerce and a branch of the Bank of Indo-China are also among its institutions. It is the headquarters of the river steamboat service (Messageries fluviales) of Tongking, which plies as far as Lao-kay on the Song-koi, to the other chief towns of Tongking and northern Annam, and also to Hong-kong. Cotton-spinning and the manufacture of cement are carried on.

HAI PHONG, is a seaport in Tonkin, French Indo-China, located on the Cua-Cam, a branch of the Red River delta. The population is around 21,000 to 22,000, with 12,500 Annamese, 7,500 Chinese (drawn by the rice trade), and 1,200 Europeans. It lies about 20 miles from the Gulf of Tonkin and 58 miles E. by S. of Hanoi, which it connects to via river, canal, and railway. It’s the second-largest commercial port in French Indo-China, serves as a naval station, and has both government and private shipbuilding yards. The harbor is accessible at all times to vessels drawing 19 to 20 feet, though it is blocked by a bar. Hai-phong has a resident who acts as mayor, and the residency is the main building in the town. The city also hosts a civil court, a commercial court, and a branch of the Bank of Indo-China. It serves as the headquarters for the river steamboat service (Messageries fluviales) in Tonkin, which operates to Lao-kay on the Red River, connecting to other major towns in Tonkin and northern Annam, as well as to Hong Kong. Cotton spinning and cement manufacturing are also conducted here.


HAIR (a word common to Teutonic languages), the general term for the characteristic outgrowth of the epidermis forming the coat of mammals. The word is also applied by analogy to the filamentous outgrowths from the body of insects, &c., plants, and metaphorically to anything of like appearance.

HAIR (a term used in Teutonic languages), refers to the typical growth from the skin that makes up the covering of mammals. The term is also used by analogy for the hair-like structures on insects, plants, and metaphorically for anything that looks similar.

For anatomy, &c. of animal hair see Skin and Exoskeleton; Fibres and allied articles; Fur, and Leather.

For the anatomy, etc. of animal hair, see Skin and Exoskeleton; Fibres and related articles; Fur, and Leather.

Anthropology.—The human hair has an important place among the physical criteria of race. While its general structure and quantity vary comparatively little, its length in individuals and relatively in the two sexes, its form, its colour, its general consistency and the appearance under the microscope of its transverse section show persistent differences in the various races. It is the persistence of these differences and specially in regard to its colour and texture, which has given to hair its ethnological importance. So obvious a racial differentiation had naturally long ago attracted the attention of anthropologists. But it was not until the 19th century that microscopic examination showed the profound difference in structure between the hair characteristic of the great divisions of mankind. It was in 1863 that Dr Pruner-Bey read a paper before the Paris Anthropological Society entitled “On the Human Hair as a Race Character, examined by aid of the Microscope.” This address established the importance of hair as a racial criterion. He demonstrated that the structure of the hair is threefold:—

Anthropology.—Human hair plays a significant role among the physical characteristics used to define race. While its overall structure and amount vary only slightly, differences can be seen in its length among individuals and between the two sexes, as well as in its shape, color, general texture, and the look of its cross-section under a microscope. These consistent differences, especially concerning color and texture, give hair its ethnological significance. Such clear racial distinctions had certainly caught the attention of anthropologists long ago. However, it wasn't until the 19th century that microscopic analysis revealed the substantial differences in structure among the hairs characteristic of mankind's major divisions. In 1863, Dr. Pruner-Bey presented a paper to the Paris Anthropological Society titled “On the Human Hair as a Race Character, examined by aid of the Microscope.” This presentation highlighted the importance of hair as a racial marker. He demonstrated that the structure of hair is threefold:—

(1) Short and crisp, generally termed “woolly,” elliptical or kidney-shaped in section, with no distinguishable medulla or pith. Its colour is almost always jet black, and it is characteristic of all the black races except the Australians and aborigines of India. This type of hair has two varieties. When the hairs are relatively long and the spiral of the curls large, the head has the appearance of being completely covered, as with some of the Melanesian races and most of the negroes. Haeckel has called this “eriocomous” or “woolly” proper. In some negroid peoples, however, such as the Hottentots and Bushmen, the hair grows in very short curls with narrow spirals and forms little tufts separated by spaces which appear bare. The head looks as if it were dotted over with pepper-seed, and thus this hair has gained the name of “peppercorn-growth.” Haeckel has called it “lophocomous” or “crested.” Most negroes have this type of hair in childhood and, even when fully grown, signs of it around the temples. The space between each tuft is not bald, as was at one time generally assumed. The hair grows uniformly over the head, as in all races.

(1) Short and compact, often referred to as “woolly,” elliptical or kidney-shaped in cross-section, with no noticeable medulla or pith. Its color is almost always deep black, and it is typical of all black races except for the Australians and Indigenous people of India. This type of hair has two variations. When the hairs are relatively long and the spirals of the curls are large, the head appears completely covered, as seen in some Melanesian groups and most Black people. Haeckel referred to this as “eriocomous” or “true woolly.” In some Negroid populations, such as the Hottentots and Bushmen, the hair grows in very short curls with tight spirals, creating little tufts that are spaced apart, which makes the scalp look bare. The head resembles being dotted with pepper seeds, leading to the nickname “peppercorn growth.” Haeckel called it “lophocomous” or “crested.” Most Black people have this hair type in childhood, and even as adults, there are signs of it around the temples. The area between each tuft is not bald, as was once commonly believed. The hair grows uniformly across the head, similar to all races.

2. Straight, lank, long and coarse, round or nearly so in section, with the medulla or pith easily distinguishable, and almost without exception black. This is the hair of the yellow races, the Chinese, Mongols and Indians of the Americas.

2. Straight, long, and coarse, round or nearly round in shape, with the medulla or pith easily visible, and almost always black. This is the hair of the yellow races, the Chinese, Mongols, and Indigenous peoples of the Americas.

3. Wavy and curly, or smooth and silky, oval in section, with medullary tube but no pith. This is the hair of Europeans, and is mainly fair, though black, brown, red or towy varieties are found.

3. Wavy and curly, or smooth and silky, oval in shape, with a medullary tube but no pith. This is the hair of Europeans, and is mostly light-colored, although black, brown, red, or blonde variations are also present.

There is a fourth type of hair describable as “frizzy.” It is easily distinguishable from the Asiatic and European types, but not from the negroid wool. It is always thick and black, and is characteristic of the Australians, Nubians, and certain of the Mulattos. Generally hair curls in proportion to its flatness. The rounder it is the stiffer and lanker. These extremes are respectively represented by the Papuans and the Japanese. Of all hair the woolly type is found to be the most persistent, as in the case of the Brazilian Cafusos, negro and native hybrids. Quatrefages quotes the case of a triple hybrid, “half negro, quarter Cherokee, quarter English,” who had short crisp furry-looking hair.

There is a fourth type of hair known as “frizzy.” It’s easily recognizable compared to the Asian and European types, but not as much from the woolly type found in Black individuals. This hair is always thick and black, and is typical of Australians, Nubians, and some mixed-race individuals. Generally, hair curls more if it is flatter. The rounder it is, the stiffer and straighter it becomes. These extremes are reflected in the hair types of Papuans and Japanese people. Of all hair types, the woolly type is the most persistent, as seen in the Brazilian Cafusos, who are hybrids of Black and Indigenous ancestry. Quatrefages mentions the case of a triple hybrid—“half Black, a quarter Cherokee, a quarter English”—who had short, crisp, furry-looking hair.

Wavy types of hair vary most in colour: almost the deepest hue of black being found side by side with the most flaxen and towy. Colour varies less in the lank type, and scarcely at all in the woolly. The only important exception to the uniform blackness of the negroid wool is to be found among the Wochuas, a tribe of African pigmies whose hair is described by Wilhelm Junker (Travels in Africa, iii. p. 82) as “of a dark, rusty brown hue.” Fair hair in all its shades is frequent among the populations of northern Europe, but much rarer in the south. According to Dr John Beddoe there are sixteen blonds out of every hundred Scotch, thirteen out of every hundred English, and two only out of a hundred Italians. The percentage of brown hair is 75% among Spaniards, 39 among French and 16 only in Scandinavia. Among the straight-haired races fair hair is far rarer; it is, however, found among the western Finns. Among those races with frizzy hair, red is almost as common as among those with wavy hair. Red hair, however, is an individual anomaly associated ordinarily with freckles. There are no red-haired races.

Wavy hair types show the most variation in color, with deep black alongside the lightest blonde. Color is less varied in straight hair and barely changes in curly hair. The only notable exception to the consistent blackness of African curly hair is found among the Wochuas, a tribe of African pygmies whose hair, as described by Wilhelm Junker (Travels in Africa, iii. p. 82), is “a dark, rusty brown.” Light hair in all its shades is common among northern Europeans but much less so in the south. Dr. John Beddoe notes that there are sixteen blonds for every hundred Scots, thirteen for every hundred English, and only two out of a hundred Italians. The percentage of brown hair is 75% among Spaniards, 39% among French, and just 16% in Scandinavia. Among straight-haired groups, light hair is much rarer; however, it can be found among the western Finns. In groups with curly hair, red hair is almost as common as in those with wavy hair. However, red hair is usually an individual rarity and is often linked to freckles. There are no distinct races with red hair.

A certain correlation appears to exist between the nature of hair and its absolute or relative length in the two sexes. Thus straight hair is the longest (Chinese, Red Indians), while woolly is shortest. Wavy hair holds an intermediate position. In the two extremes the difference of length in man and woman is scarcely noticeable. In some lank-haired races, men’s tresses are as long as women’s, e.g. the Chinese pigtail, and the hair of Redskins which grows to the length sometimes of upwards of 9 ft. In the frizzy-haired peoples, men and women have equally short growths. Bushwomen, the female Hottentot and negresses have hair no longer than men’s. It is only in the wavy, and now and again in the frizzy types, that the difference in the sexes is marked. Among European men the length rarely exceeds 12 to 16 in., while with women the mean length is between 25 and 30 in. and in some cases has been known to reach 6 ft. or more.

A certain correlation seems to exist between the type of hair and its length, whether absolute or relative, in the two genders. Straight hair tends to be the longest (like in Chinese and Red Indian populations), while woolly hair is usually the shortest. Wavy hair falls somewhere in between. At both extremes, the difference in length between men and women is barely noticeable. In some straight-haired groups, men's hair is as long as women's, for instance, the Chinese pigtail and the hair of Native Americans, which can grow over 9 ft long. In groups with tightly curled hair, men and women have similarly short hair. Bushwomen, female Hottentots, and Black women have hair that isn’t longer than men’s. It's mainly in the wavy and occasionally in the tightly curled hair types that the difference between the sexes is notable. Among European men, hair length rarely exceeds 12 to 16 inches, while for women, the average length is between 25 and 30 inches, and in some cases, it has been known to reach 6 ft or more.

The growth of hair on the body corresponds in general with that on the head. The hairiest races are the Australians and Tasmanians, whose heads are veritable mops in the thickness and unkempt luxuriance of the locks. Next to them are the Todas, and other hill-tribesmen of India, and the Hairy Ainu of Japan. Traces, too, of the markedly hairy race, now extinct, supposed to be the ancestor of Toda and Ainu alike, are to be found here and there in Europe, especially among the Russian peasantry. The least hairy peoples are the yellow races, the men often scarcely having rudimentary beards, e.g. Indians of America and the Mongols. Negroid peoples may be said to be intermediate, but usually incline to hairlessness. The wavy-haired populations hold also an intermediate position, but somewhat incline to hairiness. Among negroes especially no rule can be formulated. Bare types such as the Bushmen and western negroes are found contiguous to hairy types such as the inhabitants of Ashantee. Neither is there any rule as to baldness. From statistics taken in America it would seem that it is ten times less frequent among negroes than among whites between the ages of thirty-three and forty-five years, and thirty times less between twenty-one and thirty-two years. Among Mulattos it is more frequent than among negroes but less than among whites. It is rarer among Redskins than among negroes. The lanugo or downy hairs, with which the human foetus is covered for some time before birth and which is mostly shed in the womb, and the minute hairs which cover nearly every part of the adult human body, may be regarded as rudimentary remains of a complete hairy covering in the ancestors of mankind. The Pliocene, or 824 at all events Miocene precursor of man, was a furred creature. The discovery of Egyptian mummies six thousand years old or more has proved that this physical criterion remains unchanged, and that it is to-day what it was so many scores of centuries back. Perhaps, then, the primary divisions of mankind were distinguished by hair the same in texture and colour as that which characterizes to-day the great ethnical groups. The wavy type bridges the gulf between the lank and woolly types, all in turn derived from a common hair-covered being. In this connexion it is worth mention, as pointed out by P. Topinard, that though the regions occupied by the negroid races are the habitat of the anthropoid apes, the hair of the latter is real hair, not wool. Further in the eastern section of the dark domain, while the Papuan is still black and dolichocephalic, his presumed progenitor, the orang-utan, is brachycephalic with decidedly red hair. Thus the white races are seen to come nearest the higher apes in this respect, yellow next, and black farthest removed.

The growth of body hair generally matches that of head hair. The hairiest populations are the Australians and Tasmanians, whose heads are thick and messy with hair. Following them are the Todas and other hill tribes of India, as well as the hairy Ainu from Japan. There are also remnants of a notably hairy race, now extinct, believed to be the ancestor of both the Todas and Ainu, found sporadically in Europe, particularly among Russian peasants. The least hairy groups are the yellow races, where men often barely have any facial hair, like American Indians and Mongols. Negroid people tend to be in between, usually leaning towards hairlessness. Populations with wavy hair also fall into this intermediate category, but tend slightly more towards hairiness. Among black people, there isn’t a consistent pattern. Hairless individuals like the Bushmen and western black people are seen next to hairier groups such as those in Ashantee. There’s no clear rule regarding baldness either. Statistics from America suggest that baldness is ten times less common among black people than white people between the ages of thirty-three and forty-five, and thirty times less common between twenty-one and thirty-two. Among Mulattos, baldness is more common than among black people but less so than among white people. It’s rarer among Native Americans compared to black people. The lanugo, or fine hairs, that cover the human fetus for a time before birth and are mostly lost in the womb, along with the tiny hairs that cover almost every part of the adult human body, can be seen as remnants of a fully hairy covering in our ancestors. The Pliocene, or Miocene, predecessors of humans were furry beings. The discovery of Egyptian mummies over six thousand years old shows that this physical characteristic has remained unchanged, just as it was many centuries ago. So, perhaps, the major divisions of mankind were originally distinguished by hair similar in texture and color to what we see today among the main ethnic groups. The wavy-haired type connects the straight and curly types, all of which stem from a common hairy ancestor. It is also worth noting, as P. Topinard pointed out, that while the regions inhabited by Negroid races are also home to anthropoid apes, the hair of those apes is real hair, not wool. Further to the east, while the Papuan remains black and dolichocephalic, his presumed ancestor, the orangutan, is brachycephalic with distinctly red hair. Thus, the white races appear to be closest to the higher apes in this regard, followed by yellow races, and black races being the farthest removed.

No test has proved, on repeated examination, to be a safer one of racial purity than the quality of hair, and Pruner-Bey goes so far as to suggest that “a single hair presenting the average form characteristic of the race might serve to define it.” At any rate a hair of an individual bears the stamp of his origin.

No test has consistently shown to be a more reliable indicator of racial purity than hair quality, and Pruner-Bey even suggests that “a single hair showing the average shape typical of the race could define it.” In any case, a person’s hair reflects their heritage.

See Dr Pruner-Bey in Mémoires de la société d’anthropologie, ii. P. A. Brown, Classification of Mankind by the Hair; P. Topinard, L’Homme dans la nature (1891), chap. vi.

See Dr. Pruner-Bey in Mémoires de la société d’anthropologie, ii. P. A. Brown, Classification of Mankind by the Hair; P. Topinard, L’Homme dans la nature (1891), chap. vi.

Commerce.—Hair enters into a considerable variety of manufactures. Bristles are the stout elastic hairs obtained from the backs of certain breeds of pigs. The finest qualities, and the greatest quantities as well, are obtained from Russia, where a variety of pig is reared principally on account of its bristles. The best and most costly bristles are used by shoemakers, secondary qualities being employed for toilet and clothes-brushes, while inferior qualities are worked up into the commoner kinds of brushes used by painters and for many mechanical purposes. For artists’ use and for decorative painting, brushes or pencils of hair from the sable, camel, badger, polecat, &c., are prepared. The hair of various animals which is too short for spinning into yarn is utilized for the manufacture of felt. For this use the hair of rabbits, hares, beavers and of several other rodents is largely employed, especially in France, in making the finer qualities of felt hats. Cow hair, obtained from tanneries, is used in the preparation of roofing felts, and felt for covering boilers or steam-pipes, and for other similar purposes. It is also largely used by plasterers for binding the mortar of the walls and roofs of houses; and it is to some extent being woven up into coarse friezes, horse-cloths, railway rugs and inferior blankets. The tail hair of oxen is also of value for stuffing cushions and other upholstery work, for which purpose, as well as for making the official wigs of law officers, barristers, &c., the tail and body hair of the yak or Tibet ox is also sometimes imported into Europe. The tail and mane hair of horses is in great demand for various purposes. The long tail hair is especially valuable for weaving into hair-cloth, mane hair and the short tail hair being, on the other hand, principally prepared and curled for stuffing the chairs, sofas and couches which are covered with the cloth manufactured from the long hair. The horse hair used in Great Britain is principally obtained from South America, Germany and Russia, and its sorting, cleaning and working up into the various manufactures dependent on the material are industries of some importance. In addition to the purposes already alluded to, horse hair is woven into crinoline for ladies’ bonnets, plaited into fishing lines, woven into bags for oil and cider pressers, and into straining cloths for brewers, &c., and for numerous other minor uses. The manufactures which arise in connexion with human hair are more peculiar than important, although occasionally fashions arise which cause a large demand for human hair. The fluctuations of such fashions determine the value of hair; but at all times long tresses are of considerable value. Grey, light, pale and auburn hair are distinguished as extra colours, and command much higher prices than the common shades. The light-coloured hair is chiefly obtained in Germany and Austria, and the south of France is the principal source of the darker shades. In the south of France the cultivation and sale of heads of hair by peasant girls is a common practice; and hawkers attend fairs for the special purpose of engaging in this traffic. Hair 5 and even 6 ft. long is sometimes obtained. Scarcely any of the “raw material” is obtained in the United Kingdom except in the form of ladies’ “combings.” Bleaching of hair by means of peroxide of hydrogen is extensively practised, with the view of obtaining a supply of golden locks, or of preparing white hair for mixing to match grey shades; but in neither case is the result very successful. Human hair is worked up into a great variety of wigs, scalps, artificial fronts, frizzets and curls, all for supplementing the scanty or failing resources of nature. The plaiting of human hair into articles of jewellery, watch-guards, &c., forms a distinct branch of trade.

Commerce.—Hair is involved in a wide range of products. Bristles are the strong, flexible hairs taken from the backs of certain pig breeds. The best quality and largest quantities come from Russia, where a specific type of pig is raised mainly for its bristles. The highest quality bristles are used by shoemakers, while lower qualities are used for toilet and clothing brushes, and the lowest quality is made into common brushes for painters and various mechanical uses. For artists and decorative painting, brushes or pencils made from hair of sable, camel, badger, polecat, etc., are produced. Hair from various animals that is too short to spin into yarn is used to make felt. Rabbit, hare, beaver, and several other rodent hairs are particularly used in France for fine felt hats. Cow hair obtained from tanneries is used for roofing felt and covering boilers or steam pipes, as well as for other similar purposes. It is also extensively used by plasterers to bind mortar in the walls and roofs of houses, and is somewhat woven into coarse friezes, horse blankets, railway rugs, and low-quality blankets. The tail hair of oxen is useful for stuffing cushions and other upholstery items, while the tail and body hair of the yak or Tibetan ox is sometimes imported into Europe for making official wigs for law officers, barristers, etc. Horse tail and mane hair are in high demand for various uses. The long tail hair particularly is valuable for creating hair-cloth, while the mane and short tail hair are mainly processed and curled for stuffing chairs, sofas, and couches covered with hair-cloth made from the long hair. The horse hair used in the UK mainly comes from South America, Germany, and Russia, and sorting, cleaning, and preparing it for various products is a significant industry. Besides the uses mentioned, horse hair is woven into crinoline for women's bonnets, braided into fishing lines, made into bags for oil and cider presses, and used for strainers in brewing, among many other minor applications. The industries that develop from human hair are more unique than crucial, although sometimes fashions emerge that create a high demand for human hair. These changing fashions influence the value of hair; however, long strands are valuable at all times. Grey, light, pale, and auburn hair are considered special colors and fetch much higher prices than common shades. Light-colored hair is primarily sourced from Germany and Austria, while darker shades mainly come from southern France. In southern France, it's common for peasant girls to grow and sell their hair, and vendors go to fairs specifically to buy and sell hair. Strands measuring 5 to 6 ft. long are occasionally found. Very little of the "raw material” is sourced in the UK, except for ladies’ “combings.” Hair bleaching using hydrogen peroxide is widely practiced to create golden locks or to prepare white hair for blending with grey shades, though the results are often not very successful. Human hair is crafted into a variety of wigs, scalps, artificial fronts, frizzets, and curls, all meant to complement thinning or sparse hair. The art of braiding human hair into jewelry, watch guards, etc., is a distinct trade.


HAIR-TAIL (Trichiurus), a marine fish belonging to the Acanthopterygii scombriformes, with a long band-like body terminating in a thread-like tail, and with strong prominent teeth in both jaws. Several species are known, of which one, common in the tropical Atlantic, not rarely reaches the British Islands.

HAIR-TAIL (Trichiurus) is a marine fish that belongs to the Acanthopterygii scombriformes, characterized by a long, band-like body that ends in a thin, thread-like tail, and it has strong, noticeable teeth in both jaws. There are several known species, with one, often found in the tropical Atlantic, commonly reaching the British Islands.


HAITI [Haïti, Hayti, San Domingo, or Hispaniola], an island in the West Indies. It lies almost in the centre of the chain and, with the exception of Cuba, is the largest of the group. Its greatest length between Cape Engano on the east and Cape des Irois on the west is 407 m., and its greatest breadth between Cape Beata on the south and Cape Isabella on the north 160 m. The area is 28,000 sq. m., being rather less than that of Ireland. From Cuba, 70 m. W.N.W., and from Jamaica, 130 m. W.S.W., it is separated by the Windward Passage; and from Porto Rico, 60 m. E., by the Mona Passage. It lies between 17° 37′ and 20° 0′ N. and 68° 20′ and 74° 28′ W. From the west coast project two peninsulas. The south-western, of which Cape Tiburon forms the extremity, is the larger. It is 150 m. long and its width varies from 20 to 40 m. Columbus landed at Mole St Nicholas at the point of the north-western peninsula, which is 50 m. long, with an average breadth of 40 m. Between these lies the Gulf of Gonaïve, a triangular bay, at the apex of which stands the city of Port-au-Prince. The island of Gonaïve, opposite the city at a distance of 27 m., divides the entrance to Port-au-Prince into two fine channels, and forms an excellent harbour, 200 sq. m. In extent, the coral reefs along the coast being its only defect. On the north-east coast is the magnificent Bay of Samana, formed by the peninsula of that name, a mountain range projecting into the sea; its mouth is protected by a coral reef stretching 8½m. from the south coast. There is however, a good passage for ships, and within lies a safe and beautiful expanse of water 300 sq. m. in extent. Beyond Samana, with the exception of the poor harbour of Santo Domingo, there are no inlets on the east and south coasts until the Bays of Ocoa and Neyba are reached. The south coast of the Tiburon peninsula has good harbours at Jacmel, Bainet, Aquin and Les Cayes or Aux Cayes. The only inlets of any importance between Aux Cayes and Port-au-Prince are Jeremie and the Bay of Baraderes. The coast line is estimated at 1250 m.

HAITI [Haiti, Haiti, Santo Domingo, or Hispaniola], is an island in the West Indies. It’s located almost in the center of the island chain and, except for Cuba, is the largest in the group. Its longest stretch, from Cape Engano in the east to Cape des Irois in the west, is 407 miles, and its widest point, from Cape Beata in the south to Cape Isabella in the north, is 160 miles. The total area is 28,000 square miles, which is slightly less than that of Ireland. It’s 70 miles W.N.W. from Cuba and 130 miles W.S.W. from Jamaica, separated by the Windward Passage; it’s also 60 miles E. from Puerto Rico, separated by the Mona Passage. The island is situated between 17° 37′ and 20° 0′ N and 68° 20′ and 74° 28′ W. Two peninsulas extend from the west coast. The larger, the south-western one, has Cape Tiburon as its tip and is 150 miles long, with a width ranging from 20 to 40 miles. Columbus landed at Mole St Nicholas, located at the tip of the north-western peninsula, which is 50 miles long and averages 40 miles in width. Between these two peninsulas lies the Gulf of Gonaïve, a triangular bay where the city of Port-au-Prince is located at the apex. The island of Gonaïve, situated 27 miles away across from the city, splits the entrance to Port-au-Prince into two beautiful channels and creates a fantastic harbor, covering 200 square miles, with coral reefs along the coast being its only downside. On the north-east coast is the stunning Bay of Samana, formed by the peninsula of the same name, which is a mountain range that juts out into the sea; its mouth is shielded by a coral reef stretching 8½ miles from the south coast. However, there is a good passage for ships, and inside lies a safe and beautiful expanse of water, covering 300 square miles. Beyond Samana, apart from the poor harbor of Santo Domingo, there are no inlets along the east and south coasts until reaching the Bays of Ocoa and Neyba. The southern coast of the Tiburon peninsula has good harbors at Jacmel, Bainet, Aquin, and Les Cayes or Aux Cayes. The only significant inlets between Aux Cayes and Port-au-Prince are Jeremie and the Bay of Baraderes. The coastline is estimated to be 1250 miles long.

Haiti is essentially a mountainous island. Steep escarpments, leading to the rugged uplands of the interior, reach almost everywhere down to the shores, leaving only here and there a few strips of beach. There are three fairly distinct mountain ranges, the northern, central and southern, with parallel axes from E. to W.; while extensive and fertile plains lie between them. The northern range usually called the Sierra de Monti Cristi, extends from Cape Samana on the east to Cape Fragata on the west. It has a mean elevation of 3000 ft., culminating in the Loma Diego Campo (3855 ft.), near the centre of the range. The central range runs from Cape Engano to Cape St Nicholas, some 400 m. in an oblique direction from E. to W. Towards the centre of the island it broadens and forms two distinct chains; the northern, the Sierra del Cibao, constituting the backbone of Haiti; the southern curving first S.W., then N.W., and reaching the sea near St Marc. In addition to these there are a number of secondary crests, difficult to trace to the backbone of the system, since the loftiest peaks are usually on some lateral ridge. Such for instance is Loma Tina (10,300 ft.) the highest 825 elevation on the island, which rises as a spur N.W. of the city of Santo Domingo. In the Sierra del Cibao, the highest summit is the Pico del Yaqui (9700 ft.). The southern range runs from the Bay of Neyba due W. to Cape Tiburon. Its highest points are La Selle (8900 ft.) and La Hotte (7400 ft.). The plain of Seybo or Los Llanos is the largest of the Haitian plains. It stretches eastwards from the river Ozama for 95 m. and has an average width of 16 m. It is perfectly level, abundantly watered, and admirably adapted for the rearing of cattle. But perhaps the grandest is the Vega Real, or Royal Plain, as it was called by Columbus, which lies between the Cibao and Monti Cristi ranges. It stretches from Samana Bay to Manzanillo Bay, a distance of 140 m., but is interrupted in the centre by a range of hills in which rise the rivers which drain it. The northern part of this plain, however, is usually known as the Valley of Santiago. Most of the large valleys are in a state of nature, in part savanna, in part wooded, and all very fertile.

Haiti is primarily a mountainous island. Steep cliffs lead to the rugged interior highlands, almost reaching the shores and leaving just a few narrow strips of beach scattered here and there. There are three fairly distinct mountain ranges: the northern, central, and southern, all oriented parallel from east to west. Between these ranges lie extensive and fertile plains. The northern range, typically called the Sierra de Monti Cristi, stretches from Cape Samana in the east to Cape Fragata in the west. It has an average elevation of 3,000 feet, peaking at Loma Diego Campo (3,855 feet) near the center of the range. The central range runs from Cape Engano to Cape St. Nicholas, about 400 miles diagonally from east to west. Toward the island’s center, it broadens and forms two distinct chains: the northern chain, the Sierra del Cibao, which serves as Haiti’s backbone, and the southern chain, which curves first southwest, then northwest, reaching the sea near St. Marc. In addition, there are several secondary crests that are hard to connect to the main system since the highest peaks usually sit on lateral ridges. For example, Loma Tina (10,300 feet) is the highest point on the island, rising as a spur northwest of Santo Domingo. In the Sierra del Cibao, the highest peak is Pico del Yaqui (9,700 feet). The southern range extends from the Bay of Neyba directly west to Cape Tiburon, with its tallest points being La Selle (8,900 feet) and La Hotte (7,400 feet). The Seybo or Los Llanos plain is the largest plain in Haiti, stretching eastward from the Ozama River for 95 miles and averaging 16 miles in width. It is perfectly flat, well-watered, and excellent for raising cattle. However, perhaps the most impressive is the Vega Real, or Royal Plain, named by Columbus, lying between the Cibao and Monti Cristi ranges. It stretches 140 miles from Samana Bay to Manzanillo Bay, but is interrupted in the center by a range of hills from which the rivers that drain it originate. The northern section of this plain is usually known as the Valley of Santiago. Most of the large valleys are in their natural state, partly savanna and partly wooded, and all are very fertile.

There are four large rivers. The Yaqui, rising in the Pico del Yaqui, falls, after a tortuous north-westerly course through the valley of Santiago, into Manzanillo Bay; its mouth is obstructed by shallows, and it is navigable only for canoes. The Neyba, or South Yaqui, also rises in the Pico del Yaqui and flows S. into the Bay of Neyba. In the mountains within a few miles from the sources of these rivers, rise the Yuna and the Artibonite. The Yuna drains the Vega Real, flows into Samana Bay, and is navigable by light-draught vessels for some distance from its mouth. The Artibonite flows through the valley of its name into the Gulf of Gonaïve. Of the smaller rivers the Ozama, on which the city of Santo Domingo stands, is the most important. The greatest lake is that of Enriquillo or Xaragua, at a height of 300 ft. above sea-level. It is 27 m. long by 8 m. broad and very deep. Though 25 m. from the sea its waters are salt, and the Haitian negroes call it Etang Salé. After heavy rains it occasionally forms a continuous sheet of water with another lake called Azuey, or Etang Saumatre, which is 16 m. long by 4 m. broad; on these occasions the united lake has a total length of 60 m. and is larger than the Lake of Geneva. Farther S. is the Icoten de Limon, 5 m. long by 2 m. broad, a fresh-water lake with no visible outlet. Smaller lakes are Rincon and Miragoane. There are no active volcanoes, but earthquakes are not infrequent.

There are four major rivers. The Yaqui, which starts in the Pico del Yaqui, flows in a winding northwestern direction through the Santiago valley and empties into Manzanillo Bay; its mouth is blocked by shallow waters, making it navigable only by canoes. The Neyba, or South Yaqui, also begins in the Pico del Yaqui and flows south into Neyba Bay. In the mountains just a few miles from where these rivers originate, the Yuna and the Artibonite rivers also begin. The Yuna drains the Vega Real, flows into Samana Bay, and can be navigated by small vessels for some distance from its mouth. The Artibonite runs through the valley that shares its name and empties into the Gulf of Gonaïve. Among the smaller rivers, the Ozama, on which the city of Santo Domingo is located, is the most significant. The largest lake is Enriquillo or Xaragua, sitting 300 feet above sea level. It is 27 kilometers long and 8 kilometers wide, and very deep. Despite being 25 kilometers from the sea, its waters are salty, and the Haitian locals refer to it as Etang Salé. After heavy rain, it can occasionally merge into a continuous body of water with another lake called Azuey or Etang Saumatre, which is 16 kilometers long and 4 kilometers wide; during these times, the combined lake measures 60 kilometers in length, making it larger than Lake Geneva. Further south is Icoten de Limon, which is 5 kilometers long and 2 kilometers wide, a freshwater lake with no visible outlet. Smaller lakes include Rincon and Miragoane. There are no active volcanoes, but earthquakes do occur quite often.

Geology.—The geology of Haiti is still very imperfectly known, and large tracts of the island have never been examined by a geologist. It is possible that the schists that have been observed in some parts of the island may be of Pre-cretaceous age, but the oldest rocks in which fossils have yet been found belong to the Cretaceous System, and the geological sequence is very similar to that of Jamaica. Excluding the schists of doubtful age, the series begins with sandstones and conglomerates, containing pebbles of syenite, granite, diorite, &c.; and these are overlaid by marls, clays and limestones containing Hippurites. Then follows a series of sandstones, clays and limestones with occasional seams of lignite, evidently of shallow-water origin. These are referred by R. T. Hill to the Eocene, and they are succeeded by chalky beds which were laid down in a deeper sea and which probably correspond with the Montpelier beds of Jamaica (Oligocene). Finally, there are limestones and marls composed largely of corals and molluscs, which are probably of very late Tertiary or Post-tertiary age. Until, however, the island has been more thoroughly examined, the correlation of the various Tertiary and Post-tertiary deposits must remain doubtful. Some of the beds which Hill has placed in the Eocene have been referred by earlier writers to the Miocene. Tippenhauer describes extensive eruptions of basalt of Post-pliocene age.

Geology.—The geology of Haiti is still not well understood, and large areas of the island have never been studied by a geologist. It's possible that the schists observed in some regions might be from before the Cretaceous period, but the oldest rocks containing fossils that have been found belong to the Cretaceous System, and the geological sequence is quite similar to that of Jamaica. Excluding the uncertain age schists, the series starts with sandstones and conglomerates that include pebbles of syenite, granite, diorite, etc.; these are topped by marls, clays, and limestones containing Hippurites. Next, there's a series of sandstones, clays, and limestones with occasional layers of lignite, clearly of shallow-water origin. R. T. Hill attributes these to the Eocene, followed by chalky layers that were deposited in deeper water and likely correspond to the Montpelier beds of Jamaica (Oligocene). Finally, there are limestones and marls largely made up of corals and mollusks, probably of very late Tertiary or Post-tertiary age. However, until the island is studied more thoroughly, the correlation of the various Tertiary and Post-tertiary deposits will remain uncertain. Some beds that Hill has classified as Eocene have been assigned by earlier writers to the Miocene. Tippenhauer describes extensive basalt eruptions from the Post-pliocene era.

Fauna and Flora.—The fauna is not extensive. The agouti is the largest wild mammal. Birds are few, excepting water-fowl and pigeons. Snakes abound, though few are venomous. Lizards are numerous, and insects swarm in the low parts, with tarantulas, scorpions and centipedes. Caymans are found in the lakes and rivers, and the waters teem with fish and other sea food. Wild cattle, hogs and dogs, descendants of those brought from Europe, roam at large on the plains and in the forests. The wild hogs furnish much sport to the natives, who hunt them with dogs trained for the purpose.

Fauna and Flora.—The wildlife is not very diverse. The agouti is the biggest wild mammal. There aren’t many birds, except for waterfowl and pigeons. Snakes are plentiful, but only a few are venomous. Lizards are common, and insects are abundant in the low areas, including tarantulas, scorpions, and centipedes. Caymans live in the lakes and rivers, and the waters are filled with fish and other seafood. Wild cattle, pigs, and dogs, which are descendants of those brought from Europe, roam freely on the plains and in the forests. The wild pigs provide plenty of excitement for the locals, who hunt them with dogs that are trained for this purpose.

In richness and variety of vegetable products Haiti is not excelled by any other country in the world. All tropical plants and trees grow in perfection, and nearly all the vegetables and fruits of temperate climates may be successfully cultivated in the highlands. Among indigenous products are cotton, rice, maize, tobacco, cocoa, ginger, native indigo (indigo marron or sauvage), arrowroot, manioc or cassava, pimento, banana, plantain, pine-apple, artichoke, yam and sweet potato. Among the important plants and fruits are sugarcane, coffee, indigo (called indigo franc, to distinguish it from the native), melons, cabbage, lucerne, guinea grass and the bread-fruit, mango, caimite, orange, almond, apple, grape, mulberry and fig. Most of the imported fruits have degenerated from want of care, but the mango, now spread over nearly the whole island, has become almost a necessary article of food; the bread-fruit has likewise become common, but is not so much esteemed. Haiti is also rich in woods, especially in cabinet and dye woods; among the former are mahogany, manchineel, satinwood, rosewood, cinnamon wood (Canella alba), yellow acoma (Sideroxylon mastichodendron) and gri-gri; and among the latter are Brazil wood, logwood, fustic and sassafras. On the mountains are extensive forests of pine and a species of oak; and in various parts occur the locust, ironwood, cypress or Bermuda cedar, palmetto and many kinds of palms.

Haiti is unmatched in the richness and variety of its vegetable products when compared to any other country in the world. Tropical plants and trees thrive there perfectly, and nearly all vegetables and fruits from temperate climates can be successfully grown in the highlands. Indigenous products include cotton, rice, corn, tobacco, cocoa, ginger, native indigo (known as indigo marron or sauvage), arrowroot, manioc or cassava, allspice, banana, plantain, pineapple, artichoke, yam, and sweet potato. Important plants and fruits include sugarcane, coffee, indigo (referred to as indigo franc to differentiate it from the native variety), melons, cabbage, alfalfa, guinea grass, and various fruits like breadfruit, mango, caimite, orange, almond, apple, grape, mulberry, and fig. Most imported fruits have suffered from neglect, but the mango has spread nearly across the entire island and has become a staple food; the breadfruit is now common but is not as highly valued. Haiti is also rich in woods, especially cabinet and dye woods; among the cabinet woods are mahogany, manchineel, satinwood, rosewood, cinnamon wood (Canella alba), yellow acoma (Sideroxylon mastichodendron), and gri-gri; among the dye woods are Brazil wood, logwood, fustic, and sassafras. The mountains are home to extensive forests of pine and a type of oak, while various regions feature locust, ironwood, cypress or Bermuda cedar, palmetto, and many types of palms.

Climate.—Owing to the great diversity of its relief Haiti presents a wider range of climate than any other part of the Antilles. The yearly rainfall is abundant, averaging about 120 in., but the wet and dry seasons are clearly divided. At Port-au-Prince the rainy season lasts from April to October, but varies in other parts of the island, so that there is never a season when rain is general. The mountain districts are constantly bathed in dense mists and heavy dews, while other districts are almost rainless. Owing to its sheltered position the heat at Port-au-Prince is greater than elsewhere. In summer the temperature there ranges between 80° and 95° F. and in winter between 70° and 80° F. Even in the highlands the mercury never falls below 45° F. Hurricanes are not so frequent as in the Windward Isles, but violent gales often occur. The prevailing winds are from the east.

Climate.—Because of the great diversity of its terrain, Haiti has a wider range of climate than any other part of the Antilles. The yearly rainfall is plentiful, averaging about 120 inches, but the wet and dry seasons are clearly defined. In Port-au-Prince, the rainy season lasts from April to October, but this can vary in other parts of the island, so there’s never a time when rain is widespread. The mountainous areas are often enveloped in thick mist and heavy dew, while other regions receive almost no rain. Due to its sheltered location, the heat in Port-au-Prince is higher than in other areas. In summer, temperatures there range from 80° to 95° F, and in winter, they range from 70° to 80° F. Even in the highlands, the temperature never drops below 45° F. Hurricanes aren't as frequent as in the Windward Islands, but strong gales often occur. The prevailing winds come from the east.

The Republic of Haiti.—Haiti is divided into two parts, the negro republic of Haiti owning the western third of the island, while the remainder belongs to Santo Domingo (q.v.) or the Dominican Republic. Between these two governments there exists the strongest political antipathy.

The Republic of Haiti.—Haiti is split into two regions: the Black republic of Haiti controls the western third of the island, while the rest is part of Santo Domingo (q.v.) or the Dominican Republic. There is a deep political hostility between these two governments.

Although but a small state, with an area of only 10,204 sq. m., the republic of Haiti is, in many respects, one of the most interesting communities in the world, as it is the earliest and most successful example of a state peopled, and governed on a constitutional model, by negroes. At its head is a president assisted by two chambers, the members of which are elected and hold office under a constitution of 1889. This constitution, thoroughly republican in form, is French in origin, as are also the laws, language, traditions and customs of Haiti. In practice, however, the government resolves itself into a military despotism, the power being concentrated in the hands of the president. The Haitians seem to possess everything that a progressive and civilized nation can desire, but corruption is spread through every portion and branch of the government. Justice is venal, and the police are brutal and inefficient. Since 1869 the Roman Catholic has been the state religion, but all classes of society seem to be permeated with a thinly disguised adherence to the horrid rites of Voodoo (q.v.), although this has been strenuously denied. The country is divided into 5 départements, 23 arrondissements and 67 communes. Each département and arrondissement is governed by a general in the army. The army numbers about 7000 men, and the navy consists of a few small vessels. Elementary education is free, and there are some 400 primary schools; secondary education is mainly in the hands of the church. The Sisters of Charity and the Christian Brothers have schools at Port-au-Prince, where there is also a lyceum, a medical and a law school. The children of the wealthier classes are usually sent to France for their education. The unit of money is the gourde, the nominal value of which is the same as the American dollar, but it is subject to great fluctuations. The revenue is almost entirely derived from customs, paid both on imports and exports. There being a lack of capital and enterprise, the excessive customs dues produce a very depressed condition of trade. Imports are consequently confined to bare necessaries, the cheapest sorts of dry and fancy goods, matches, flour, salt beef and pork, codfish, lard, butter and similar provisions. The exports are coffee, cocoa, logwood, cotton, gum, honey, tobacco and sugar. The island is one of the most fertile in the world, and if it had an enlightened and stable government, an energetic people, and a little capital, its agricultural possibilities would seem to be endless. Communications are bad; the roads constructed during the French occupation have degenerated into mere bridle tracks. There is a coast service of steamers, maintained since 1863, and 26 ports are regularly visited every ten days. Foreign communication is excellent, more foreign steamships visiting this island than any other in the West Indies. A railway from Port-au-Prince runs through the Plain of Cul de Sac for 28 m. to Manneville on the Etang Saumatre, another runs from Cap Haitien to La Grande Rivière, 15 m. distant.

Although it’s a small country, covering only 10,204 sq. m., the Republic of Haiti is, in many ways, one of the most fascinating communities in the world. It's the first and most successful example of a nation populated and governed by Black people on a constitutional model. At the top is a president who is supported by two elected chambers, operating under a constitution from 1889. This constitution, which is fully republican in format, is of French origin, as are the laws, language, traditions, and customs of Haiti. In practice, however, the government turns into a military dictatorship, with power concentrated in the hands of the president. The Haitians seem to have everything a progressive and civilized nation could want, but corruption pervades every part of the government. Justice is for sale, and the police are brutal and ineffective. Since 1869, Roman Catholicism has been the state religion, but all levels of society appear to have a thinly veiled connection to the dreadful practices of Voodoo (q.v.), though this is often denied. The country is divided into 5 départements, 23 arrondissements, and 67 communes. Each département and arrondissement is overseen by a general in the army. The army consists of about 7,000 men, and the navy has a few small vessels. Basic education is free, with around 400 primary schools, while secondary education is primarily run by the church. The Sisters of Charity and the Christian Brothers have schools in Port-au-Prince, where there's also a lyceum, a medical school, and a law school. Children from wealthier families are often sent to France for their education. The currency is the gourde, which has the same nominal value as the American dollar, but it can fluctuate greatly. Most revenue comes from customs on imports and exports. Due to a lack of capital and enterprise, high customs duties create a depressed trade environment. Imports are limited to basic necessities, the cheapest types of dry and fancy goods, matches, flour, salt beef and pork, codfish, lard, butter, and similar provisions. Exports include coffee, cocoa, logwood, cotton, gum, honey, tobacco, and sugar. The island is one of the most fertile in the world, and with a stable government, an active population, and some capital, its agricultural potential seems limitless. Infrastructure is poor; the roads built during French rule have turned into mere bridle paths. There’s a coastal steamship service, active since 1863, with 26 ports visited every ten days. Foreign communication is excellent, with more foreign steamships visiting this island than any other in the West Indies. A railway runs from Port-au-Prince through the Plain of Cul de Sac for 28 miles to Manneville on the Etang Saumatre, and another line goes from Cap Haitien to La Grande Rivière, 15 miles away.

The people are almost entirely pure-blooded negroes, the mulattoes, who form about 10% of the population, being a rapidly diminishing and much-hated class. The negroes are a kindly, hospitable people, but ignorant and lazy. They have 826 a passion for dancing weird African dances to the accompaniment of the tom-tom. Marriage is neither frequent nor legally prescribed, since children of looser unions are regarded by the state as legitimate. In the interior polygamy is frequent. The people generally speak a curious but not unattractive patois of French origin, known as Creole. French is the official language, and by a few of the educated natives it is written and spoken in its purity. On the whole it must be owned that, after a century of independence and self-government, the Haitian people have made no progress, if they have not actually shown signs of retrogression. The chief towns ate Port-au-Prince (pop. 75,000), Cap Haitien (29,000), Les Cayes (25,000), Gonaïve (18,000), and Port de Paix (10,000). Jeremie was the birthplace of the elder Dumas. The ruins of the wonderful palace of Sans-Souci and of the fortress of La Ferrière, built by King Henri Christophe (1807-1825), can be seen near Millot, a town 9 m. inland from Cap Haitien. Plaisance (25,000), Gros Morne (22,000) and La Croix des Bouquets (20,000) are the largest towns in the interior. The entire population of the republic is about 1,500,000.

The population is primarily made up of pure-blooded Black people, with mulattoes—who make up about 10% of the population—being a declining and often despised group. The Black community is friendly and welcoming, but they are also seen as uneducated and lazy. They have a strong passion for dancing to unique African rhythms accompanied by the drum. Marriage is neither common nor legally required, as children born from informal unions are recognized as legitimate by the state. In the rural areas, polygamy is common. The people generally speak a distinctive yet appealing dialect of French origin known as Creole. French is the official language, and a few educated locals speak and write it correctly. Overall, it must be acknowledged that after a century of independence and self-governance, the people of Haiti have made little progress and may have even regressed. The main towns are Port-au-Prince (population 75,000), Cap Haitien (29,000), Les Cayes (25,000), Gonaïve (18,000), and Port de Paix (10,000). Jeremie is where the elder Dumas was born. The ruins of the magnificent Sans-Souci Palace and the La Ferrière fortress, built by King Henri Christophe (1807-1825), can be found near Millot, which is 9 miles inland from Cap Haitien. Plaisance (25,000), Gros Morne (22,000), and La Croix des Bouquets (20,000) are the largest towns in the interior. The total population of the republic is about 1,500,000.

History.—The history of Haiti begins with its discovery by Columbus, who landed from Cuba at Mole St Nicholas on the 6th of December 1492. The natives called the country Haiti (mountainous country), and Quisquica (vast country). Columbus named it Espagnola (Little Spain), which was latinized into Hispaniola. At the time of its discovery, the island was inhabited by about 2,000,000 Indians, who are described by the Spaniards as feeble in intellect and physically defective. They were, however, soon exterminated, and their place was supplied (as early as 1512) by slaves imported from Africa, the descendants of whom now possess the land. Six years after its discovery Columbus had explored the interior of the island, founded the present capital, and had established flourishing settlements at Isabella, Santiago, La Vega, Porto Plata and Bonao. Mines had been opened up, and advances made in agriculture. Sugar was introduced in 1506, and in a few years became the staple product. About 1630, a mixed company of French and English, driven by the Spaniards from St Kitts, settled on the island of Tortuga, where they became formidable under the name of Buccaneers. They soon obtained a footing on the mainland of Haiti, and by the treaty of Ryswick, 1697, the part they occupied was ceded to France. This new colony, named Saint Dominique, subsequently attained a high degree of prosperity, and was in a flourishing state when the French Revolution broke out in 1789. The population was then composed of whites, free coloured people (mostly mulattoes) and negro slaves. The mulattoes demanded civil rights, up to that time enjoyed only by the whites; and in 1791 the National Convention conferred on them all the privileges of French citizens. The whites at once adopted the most violent measures, and petitioned the home government to reverse the decree, which was accordingly revoked. In August 1791, the plantation slaves broke out into insurrection, and the mulattoes threw in their lot with them. A period of turmoil followed, lasting for several years, during which both parties were responsible for acts of the most revolting cruelty. Commissioners were sent out from France with full powers to settle the dispute, but although in 1793 they proclaimed the abolition of slavery, they could effect nothing. To add further to the troubles of the colony, it was invaded by a British force, which, in spite of the climate and the opposition of the colonists, succeeded in maintaining itself until driven out in 1798 by Toussaint l’Ouverture. By treaty with Spain, in 1795, France had acquired the title to the entire island.

History.—The history of Haiti starts with its discovery by Columbus, who arrived from Cuba at Mole St Nicholas on December 6, 1492. The locals called the country Haiti (mountainous country) and Quisquica (vast country). Columbus named it Espagnola (Little Spain), which was later Latinized to Hispaniola. At the time of its discovery, around 2,000,000 Native Americans lived on the island, whom the Spaniards described as weak-minded and physically inadequate. However, they were soon wiped out, and as early as 1512, slaves from Africa were brought in, and their descendants now occupy the land. Six years after the discovery, Columbus explored the island's interior, founded the current capital, and established thriving settlements in Isabella, Santiago, La Vega, Porto Plata, and Bonao. Mines were opened, and agriculture progressed. Sugar was introduced in 1506 and quickly became the main product. Around 1630, a mixed group of French and English who had been driven from St Kitts settled on Tortuga, where they became a powerful group known as Buccaneers. They soon established a presence on the mainland of Haiti, and by the Treaty of Ryswick in 1697, the area they occupied was ceded to France. This new colony, named Saint Dominique, became very prosperous and was thriving when the French Revolution began in 1789. At that time, the population included whites, free people of color (mostly mulattoes), and enslaved Africans. The mulattoes demanded civil rights that were previously only granted to whites, and in 1791, the National Convention granted them all the rights of French citizens. The whites immediately responded with extreme measures and petitioned the French government to reverse the decree, which was done. In August 1791, the enslaved workers revolted, and the mulattoes joined them. A period of chaos ensued that lasted several years, during which both sides committed horrendous acts of cruelty. Commissioners were sent from France with full authority to resolve the conflict, but even after they declared the abolition of slavery in 1793, they achieved little. To make matters worse, the colony was invaded by British forces, which managed to hold their ground despite the harsh climate and local opposition until they were expelled in 1798 by Toussaint l’Ouverture. By a treaty with Spain in 1795, France gained the rights to the entire island.

By 1801, Toussaint l’Ouverture, an accomplished negro of remarkable military genius, had succeeded in restoring order. He then published, subject to the approval of France, a form of constitutional government, under which he was to be governor for life. This step, however, roused the suspicions of Bonaparte, then first consul, who determined to reduce the colony and restore slavery. He sent out his brother-in-law, General Leclerc, with 25,000 troops; but the colonists offered a determined, and often ferocious, resistance. At length, wearied of the struggle, Leclerc proposed terms, and Toussaint, induced by the most solemn guarantees on the part of the French, laid down his arms. He was seized and sent to France, where he died in prison in 1803. The blacks, infuriated by this act of treachery, renewed the struggle, under Jean Jacques Dessalines (1758-1806), with a barbarity unequalled in previous contests. The French, further embarrassed by the appearance of a British fleet, were only too glad to evacuate the island in November 1803.

By 1801, Toussaint l’Ouverture, an impressive Black leader with incredible military skill, had managed to restore order. He then published a draft of a constitutional government, which required approval from France, under which he would serve as governor for life. This action, however, raised suspicions with Bonaparte, who was then the first consul, and he decided to conquer the colony and reinstate slavery. He sent his brother-in-law, General Leclerc, with 25,000 troops; however, the colonists fought back with fierce and often brutal resistance. Eventually, worn down by the fight, Leclerc offered terms, and Toussaint, encouraged by serious promises from the French, laid down his arms. He was captured and sent to France, where he died in prison in 1803. The enslaved people, outraged by this betrayal, renewed the fight under Jean Jacques Dessalines (1758-1806), with a brutality unmatched in previous battles. The French, further challenged by the arrival of a British fleet, were more than happy to leave the island in November 1803.

The opening of the following year saw the declaration of independence, and the restoration of the aboriginal name of Haiti. Dessalines, made governor for life, inaugurated his rule with a bloodthirsty massacre of all the whites. In October 1804, he proclaimed himself emperor and was crowned with great pomp; but in 1806 his subjects, growing tired of his tyranny, assassinated him. His position was now contended for by several chiefs, one of whom, Henri Christophe (1767-1820), established himself in the north, while Alexandre Sabes Pétion (1770-1818) took possession of the southern part. The Spaniards re-established themselves in the eastern part of the island, retaining the French name, modified to Santo Domingo. Civil war now raged between the adherents of Christophe and Pétion, but in 1810 hostilities were suspended. Christophe declared himself king of Haiti under the title of Henry I.; but his cruelty caused an insurrection, and in 1820 he committed suicide. Pétion was succeeded in 1818 by General Jean Pierre Boyer (1776-1850), who, after Christophe’s death, made himself master of all the French part of the island. In 1821 the eastern end of the island proclaimed its independence of Spain, and Boyer, taking advantage of dissensions there, invaded it, and in 1822 the dominion of the whole island fell into his hands. Boyer held the presidency of the new government, which was called the republic of Haiti, until 1843, when he was driven from the island by a revolution. In 1844 the people at the eastern end of the island again asserted their independence. The republic of Santo Domingo was established, and from that time the two political divisions have been maintained. Meanwhile in Haiti revolution followed revolution, and president succeeded president, in rapid succession. Order, however, was established in 1849, when Soulouque, who had previously obtained the presidency, proclaimed himself emperor, under the title of Faustin I. After a reign of nine years he was deposed and exiled, the republic being restored under the mulatto president Fabre Geffrard. His firm and enlightened rule rendered him so unpopular that in 1867 he was forced to flee to Jamaica. He was succeeded by Sylvestre Salnave, who, after a presidency of two years, was shot. Nissage-Saget (1870), Dominique (1874), and Boisrond-Canal (1876) followed, each to be driven into exile by revolution. The next president, Salomon, maintained himself in office for ten years, but he too was driven from the country and died in exile. Civil war raged in 1888-1889 between Generals Légitime and Hippolyte, and the latter succeeded in obtaining the vacant presidency. He ruled with the most absolute authority till his death in 1896. General Tiresias Simon Sam followed and ruled till his flight to Paris in 1902. The usual civil war ensued, and after nine months of turmoil, order was restored by the election of Nord Alexis in December 1902.

The beginning of the new year saw the declaration of independence and the return to the original name of Haiti. Dessalines, appointed governor for life, kicked off his rule with a brutal massacre of all the whites. In October 1804, he declared himself emperor and was crowned with great ceremony; however, in 1806, his subjects, fed up with his tyranny, assassinated him. His position was then contested by various leaders, one of whom, Henri Christophe (1767-1820), took control of the north, while Alexandre Sabes Pétion (1770-1818) claimed the southern part. The Spaniards reestablished their presence in the eastern region of the island, keeping the French name, slightly altered to Santo Domingo. Civil war raged between the supporters of Christophe and Pétion, but in 1810, fighting stopped. Christophe declared himself king of Haiti, taking the title Henry I; however, his cruelty sparked an uprising, and in 1820 he committed suicide. Pétion was succeeded in 1818 by General Jean Pierre Boyer (1776-1850), who, after Christophe’s death, took control of all the French territory on the island. In 1821, the eastern side of the island declared its independence from Spain, and Boyer, seizing on the conflicts there, invaded it, so by 1822, he had dominion over the entire island. Boyer served as president of the new government, known as the Republic of Haiti, until 1843, when he was ousted by a revolution. In 1844, the people on the eastern side again declared their independence. The Republic of Santo Domingo was established, and from then on, the two political divisions continued to exist. Meanwhile, in Haiti, a series of revolutions occurred, with presidents rapidly coming and going. Order was finally established in 1849, when Soulouque, who had previously secured the presidency, declared himself emperor with the title Faustin I. After nine years of rule, he was deposed and exiled, leading to the restoration of the republic under the mulatto president Fabre Geffrard. His strong but unpopular leadership forced him to flee to Jamaica in 1867. He was succeeded by Sylvestre Salnave, who was shot after two years in office. Nissage-Saget (1870), Dominique (1874), and Boisrond-Canal (1876) followed, each being expelled by revolutions. The next president, Salomon, held office for ten years but was also forced into exile, where he died. Civil war erupted in 1888-1889 between Generals Légitime and Hippolyte, with the latter eventually securing the presidency. He ruled with absolute power until his death in 1896. General Tiresias Simon Sam took over and governed until he fled to Paris in 1902. The usual civil unrest followed, and after nine months of chaos, order was restored with the election of Nord Alexis in December 1902.

Alexis’ administration was unsuccessful, and was marked by many disturbances, culminating in his expulsion. In 1904 there was an attack by native soldiery on the French and German representatives, and punishment was exacted by these powers. In December 1904 ex-president Sam, his wife and members of his ministry were sentenced to long terms of imprisonment for fraudulently issuing bonds. In December 1907 a conspiracy against the government was reported and the ringleaders were sentenced to death. But in January 1908 the revolution spread, and Gonaïve and St Marc and other places were reported to be in the hands of the insurgents. Prompt measures were taken, the rising was checked, and Alexis announced the pardon of the revolutionaries. In March, however, this pacific policy was reversed by a new ministry; some suspects were summarily executed, and the attitude of the government was only modified when the powers sent war-ships to Port-au-Prince. In September 827 the criminal court at the capital sentenced to death, by default, a large number of persons implicated in the risings earlier in the year, and in November revolution broke out again. General Antoine Simon raised his standard at Aux Cayes. Disaffection was rife among the government troops, who deserted to him in great numbers. On the 2nd of December Port-au-Prince was occupied without bloodshed by the revolutionaries, and Alexis took to flight, escaping violence with some difficulty, and finding refuge on a French ship. General Simon then assumed the presidency. At the end of April 1910 Alexis died in Jamaica, in circumstances of some obscurity; it had just been discovered that a plot was on foot to depose Simon, and further trouble was threatened.

Alexis' administration was unsuccessful and was marked by many disturbances, ending in his expulsion. In 1904, there was an attack by local soldiers on the French and German representatives, and these powers took punitive action. In December 1904, ex-president Sam, his wife, and members of his cabinet were sentenced to long prison terms for fraudulently issuing bonds. In December 1907, a conspiracy against the government was reported, and the ringleaders were sentenced to death. But in January 1908, the revolution spread, with Gonaïve, St Marc, and other areas reported to be under the control of insurgents. Prompt actions were taken, the uprising was suppressed, and Alexis announced a pardon for the revolutionaries. However, in March, this peaceful approach was reversed by a new cabinet; several suspects were executed on the spot, and the government's stance only changed when foreign powers sent warships to Port-au-Prince. In September 827, the criminal court in the capital sentenced a large number of individuals implicated in the earlier uprisings to death in absentia, and in November, the revolution broke out again. General Antoine Simon raised his banner in Aux Cayes. Discontent was widespread among the government troops, who deserted to him in large numbers. On December 2nd, Port-au-Prince was occupied without bloodshed by the revolutionaries, and Alexis fled, narrowly escaping violence and finding refuge on a French ship. General Simon then took over the presidency. By the end of April 1910, Alexis died in Jamaica under somewhat unclear circumstances; it had just been uncovered that a plot was underway to depose Simon, and further unrest was looming.

Authorities.—B. Edwards, Hist. Survey of the Island of S. Domingo (London, 1801); Jordan, Geschichte der Insel Haiti (Leipzig, 1846); Linstant Pradin, Recueil général des lois et actes du gouvernement d’Haiti (Paris, 1851-1865); Monte y Tejada, Historia de Santo Domingo (Havana, 1853); Saint Amand, Hist. des révolutions d’Haiti (Paris, 1859); Sam. Hazard, Santo Domingo, Past and Present (London, 1873), with bibliography; Sir Spencer St John, Haiti, or the Black Republic (London, 1889); L. Gentil Tippenhauer, Die Insel Haiti (Leipzig, 1893); Marcelin, Haiti, études économiques, sociales, et politiques; and Haiti, ses guerres civiles, leurs causes (Paris, 1893); Hesketh Pritchard, Where Black Rules White (London, 1900). For geology, see W. M. Gabb, “On the Topography and Geology of Santo Domingo,” Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., Philadelphia, new series, vol. xv. (1881). pp. 49-259, with map; L. G. Tippenhauer, Die Insel Haiti (Leipzig, 1893); see also several articles by L. G. Tippenhauer in Peterm. Mitt. 1899 and 1901. A comparison with the Jamaican succession will be found in R. T. Hill, “The Geology and Physical Geography of Jamaica,” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, vol. xxxiv. (1899).

Authorities.—B. Edwards, Historical Survey of the Island of S. Domingo (London, 1801); Jordan, History of the Island of Haiti (Leipzig, 1846); Linstant Pradin, General Collection of Laws and Acts of the Government of Haiti (Paris, 1851-1865); Monte y Tejada, History of Santo Domingo (Havana, 1853); Saint Amand, History of the Revolutions in Haiti (Paris, 1859); Sam. Hazard, Santo Domingo, Past and Present (London, 1873), with bibliography; Sir Spencer St John, Haiti, or the Black Republic (London, 1889); L. Gentil Tippenhauer, The Island of Haiti (Leipzig, 1893); Marcelin, Haiti, Economic, Social, and Political Studies; and Haiti, Its Civil Wars, Their Causes (Paris, 1893); Hesketh Pritchard, Where Black Rules White (London, 1900). For geology, see W. M. Gabb, “On the Topography and Geology of Santo Domingo,” Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, new series, vol. xv. (1881). pp. 49-259, with map; L. G. Tippenhauer, The Island of Haiti (Leipzig, 1893); see also several articles by L. G. Tippenhauer in Peterman's Mitteilungen 1899 and 1901. A comparison with the Jamaican succession can be found in R. T. Hill, “The Geology and Physical Geography of Jamaica,” Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard, vol. xxxiv. (1899).


HAJIPUR, a town of British India, in the Muzaffarpur district of Bengal, on the Gandak, just above its confluence with the Ganges opposite Patna. Pop. (1901), 21,398. Hajipur figures conspicuously in the history of the struggles between Akbar and his rebellious Afghan governors of Bengal, being twice besieged and captured by the imperial troops, in 1572 and 1574. Within the limits of the old fort is a small stone mosque, very plain, but of peculiar architecture, and attributed to Hājī Ilyās, its traditional founder (c. 1350). Its command of water traffic in three directions makes the town a place of considerable commercial importance. Hajipur has a station on the main line of the Bengal and North-western railway.

HAJIPUR, is a town in British India, located in the Muzaffarpur district of Bengal, by the Gandak River, just above where it meets the Ganges across from Patna. The population in 1901 was 21,398. Hajipur plays a significant role in the history of the conflicts between Akbar and his rebellious Afghan governors of Bengal, having been besieged and taken by imperial troops twice, in 1572 and 1574. Inside the old fort, there's a small stone mosque that is quite simple but has a unique architectural style, believed to be founded by Hājī Ilyās, around 1350. Its strategic position for water traffic in three directions gives the town considerable commercial importance. Hajipur also has a station on the main line of the Bengal and North-western railway.


HAJJ or Hadj, the Arabic word, meaning literally a “setting out,” for the greater pilgrimage of Mahommedans to Mecca, which takes place from the 8th to the 10th of the twelfth month of the Mahommedan year; the lesser pilgrimage, called umrah or omra, may be made to the mosque at Mecca at any time other than that of the hajj proper, and is also a meritorious act. The term hajji or hadji is given to those who have performed the greater pilgrimage. The word hajj is sometimes loosely used of any Mahommedan pilgrimage to a sacred place or shrine, and is also applied to the pilgrimages of Christians of the East to the Holy Sepulchre at Jerusalem (see Mecca; Mahommedan Religion).

HAJJ or Hajj is the Arabic term that literally means “setting out,” referring to the major pilgrimage of Muslims to Mecca, which occurs from the 8th to the 10th of the twelfth month in the Islamic calendar. The lesser pilgrimage, known as umrah or omra, can be undertaken at any time other than during the main hajj period and is also considered a significant act. The title hajji or hadji is given to those who have completed the major pilgrimage. The word hajj is often loosely used to refer to any Muslim pilgrimage to a sacred site or shrine and is also applied to the pilgrimages that Eastern Christians make to the Holy Sepulchre in Jerusalem (see Mecca; Mahommedan Religion).


HĀJJĪ KHALĪFA [in full Muṣṭafā ibn ‘Abdallāh Kātib Chelebī Hājjī Khalīfa] (ca. 1599-1658), Arabic and Turkish author, was born at Constantinople. He became secretary to the commissariat department of the Turkish army in Anatolia, was with the army in Bagdad in 1625, was present at the siege of Erzerum, and returned to Constantinople in 1628. In the following year he was again in Bagdad and Hamadān, and in 1633 at Aleppo, whence he made the pilgrimage to Mecca (hence his title Hājjī). The following year he was in Erivān and then returned to Constantinople. Here he obtained a post in the head office of the commissariat department, which afforded him time for study. He seems to have attended the lectures of great teachers up to the time of his death, and made a practice of visiting bookshops and noting the titles and contents of all books he found there. His largest work is the Bibliographical Encyclopaedia written in Arabic. In this work, after five chapters dealing with the sciences generally, the titles of Arabian, Persian and Turkish books written up to his own time are arranged in alphabetical order. With the titles are given, where possible, short notes on the author, his date, and sometimes the introductory words of his work. It was edited by G. Flügel with Latin translation and a useful appendix (7 vols. Leipzig, 1835-1858). The text alone of this edition has been reproduced at Constantinople (1893).

Hājjī Khalīfa [full name Muṣṭafā ibn ‘Abdallāh Kātib Chelebī Hājjī Khalīfa] (circa 1599-1658), an Arabic and Turkish author, was born in Constantinople. He became a secretary in the Turkish army's commissariat department in Anatolia, was part of the army in Baghdad in 1625, was present during the siege of Erzerum, and returned to Constantinople in 1628. The next year, he was again in Baghdad and Hamadān, and in 1633, he was in Aleppo, from which he made the pilgrimage to Mecca (which earned him the title Hājjī). The following year, he was in Erivān before returning to Constantinople. There, he secured a position in the head office of the commissariat department, which allowed him time to study. He seems to have attended lectures from renowned teachers up until his death and often visited bookshops to note the titles and contents of all the books he encountered. His most significant work is the Bibliographical Encyclopaedia, written in Arabic. This work begins with five chapters discussing sciences in general, followed by a list of Arabian, Persian, and Turkish books written up to his time, organized in alphabetical order. Where possible, brief notes on the author, their dates, and sometimes the introductory words of their work are included. It was edited by G. Flügel with a Latin translation and a helpful appendix (7 vols. Leipzig, 1835-1858). The text of this edition has been reproduced in Constantinople (1893).

Hājjī Khalīfa also wrote in Turkish: a chronological conspectus of general history (translated into Italian by G. R. Carli, Venice, 1697); a history of the Turkish empire from 1594 to 1655 (Constantinople, 1870); a history of the naval wars of the Turks (Constantinople, 1729; chapters 1-4 translated by J. Mitchell, London, 1831); a general geography published at Constantinople, 1732 (Latin trans. by M. Norberg, London and Gotha, 1818; German trans. of part by J. von Hammer, Vienna, 1812; French trans. of part by V. de St Martin in his Geography of Asia Minor, vol. I).

Hājjī Khalīfa also wrote in Turkish: a timeline of general history (translated into Italian by G. R. Carli, Venice, 1697); a history of the Turkish empire from 1594 to 1655 (Constantinople, 1870); a history of the naval wars of the Turks (Constantinople, 1729; chapters 1-4 translated by J. Mitchell, London, 1831); a general geography published in Constantinople, 1732 (Latin trans. by M. Norberg, London and Gotha, 1818; German trans. of part by J. von Hammer, Vienna, 1812; French trans. of part by V. de St Martin in his Geography of Asia Minor, vol. I).

For his life see the preface to Flügel’s edition; list of his works in C. Brockelmann’s Gesch. d. arabischen Literatur (Berlin, 1902), vol. ii., pp. 428-429.

For his life, see the preface to Flügel’s edition; a list of his works can be found in C. Brockelmann’s Gesch. d. arabischen Literatur (Berlin, 1902), vol. ii., pp. 428-429.

(G. W. T.)

HAKE, EDWARD (fl. 1579), English satirist, was educated under John Hopkins, the part-author of the metrical version of the Psalms. He resided in Gray’s Inn and Barnard’s Inn, London. In the address “To the Gentle Reader” prefixed to his Newes out of Powles Churchyard ... Otherwise entitled Syr Nummus (2nd ed., 1579) he mentions the “first three yeeres which I spent in the Innes of Channcery, being now about a dosen of yeeres passed.” In 1585 and 1586 he was mayor of New Windsor, and in 1588 he represented the borough in parliament. His last work was published in 1604. He was protected by the earl of Leicester, whose policy it was to support the Puritan party, and who no doubt found a valuable ally in so vigorous a satirist of error in clerical places as was Hake. Newes out of Paules Churchyarde, A Trappe for Syr Monye, first appeared in 1567, but no copy of this impression is known, and it was re-issued in 1579 with the title quoted above. The book takes the form of a dialogue between Bertulph and Paul, who meet in the aisles of the cathedral, and is divided into eight “satyrs,” dealing with the corruption of the higher clergy and of judges, the greed of attorneys, the tricks of physicians and apothecaries, the sumptuary laws, extravagant living, Sunday sports, the abuse of St Paul’s cathedral as a meeting-place for business and conversation, usury, &c. It is written in rhymed fourteen-syllable metre, which is often more comic than the author intended. It contains, amid much prefatory matter, a note to the “carping and scornefull Sicophant,” in which he attacks his enemies with small courtesy and much alliteration. One is described as a “carping careless cankerd churle.”

HAKE, EDWARD (fl. 1579), was an English satirist educated under John Hopkins, who co-authored the metrical version of the Psalms. He lived in Gray’s Inn and Barnard’s Inn, London. In the address “To the Gentle Reader” at the beginning of his Newes out of Powles Churchyard ... Otherwise entitled Syr Nummus (2nd ed., 1579), he mentions the “first three years which I spent in the Inns of Chancery, being now about a dozen years passed.” In 1585 and 1586, he served as the mayor of New Windsor, and in 1588, he represented the borough in parliament. His last work was published in 1604. He was supported by the Earl of Leicester, who aimed to back the Puritan party and likely found a strong ally in Hake, a sharp satirist of corruption in clerical positions. Newes out of Paules Churchyarde, A Trappe for Syr Monye first appeared in 1567, but no copies of that edition are known; it was reissued in 1579 with the title mentioned above. The book is written as a dialogue between Bertulph and Paul, who meet in the aisles of the cathedral, and is divided into eight “satyrs.” It addresses the corruption among higher clergy and judges, the greed of attorneys, the tricks of doctors and pharmacists, sumptuary laws, extravagant lifestyles, Sunday sports, the misuse of St Paul’s cathedral for business and conversation, usury, etc. It is written in a rhymed fourteen-syllable meter, often more humorous than the author intended. It includes, along with much introductory material, a note to the “carping and scornful Sicophant,” where he criticizes his enemies with little courtesy and lots of alliteration, describing one as a “carping careless cankered churl.”

He also wrote a translation from Thomas à Kempis, The Imitation, or Following of Christ (1567, 1568); A Touchstone for this Time Present (1574), a scurrilous attack on the Roman Catholic Church, followed by a treatise on education; A Commemoration of the ... Raigne of ... Elizabeth (1575), enlarged in 1578 to A Joyfull Continuance of the Commemoration, &c.; and of Gold’s Kingdom, and this Unhelping Age (1604), a collection of pieces in prose and verse, in which the author inveighs against the power of gold. A bibliography of these and of Hake’s other works was compiled by Mr Charles Edmonds for his edition in 1872 of the Newes (Isham Reprints, No. 2, 1872).

He also translated works by Thomas à Kempis, The Imitation, or Following of Christ (1567, 1568); A Touchstone for this Time Present (1574), a harsh critique of the Roman Catholic Church, followed by a treatise on education; A Commemoration of the ... Raigne of ... Elizabeth (1575), which was expanded in 1578 to A Joyfull Continuance of the Commemoration, &c.; and Gold’s Kingdom, and this Unhelping Age (1604), a collection of prose and poetry where the author criticizes the influence of gold. A bibliography of these and Hake’s other works was compiled by Mr. Charles Edmonds for his 1872 edition of the Newes (Isham Reprints, No. 2, 1872).


HAKE, THOMAS GORDON (1800-1895), English poet, was born at Leeds, of an old Devonshire family, on the 10th of March 1809. His mother was a Gordon of the Huntly branch. He studied medicine at St George’s hospital and at Edinburgh and Glasgow, but had given up practice for many years before his death, and had devoted himself to a literary life. In 1839 he published a prose epic Vates, republished in Ainsworth’s magazine as Valdarno, which attracted the attention of D. G. Rossetti. In after years he became an intimate member of the circle of friends and followers gathered round Rossetti, who so far departed from his usual custom as to review Hake’s poems in the Academy and in the Fortnightly Review. In 1871 he published Madeline; 1872, Parables and Tales; 1883, The Serpent Play; 1890, New Day Sonnets; and in 1892 his Memoirs of Eighty Years. Dr Hake’s works had much subtlety and felicity of expression, and were warmly appreciated in a somewhat restricted literary circle. In his last published verse, the sonnets, he shows an advance in facility on the occasional harshness of his earlier work. He was given a Civil List literary pension in 1893, and died on the 11th of January 1895.

HAKE, THOMAS GORDON (1800-1895), English poet, was born in Leeds, coming from an old Devonshire family, on March 10, 1809. His mother was a Gordon from the Huntly branch. He studied medicine at St George’s Hospital and at Edinburgh and Glasgow, but had given up practicing for many years before he died, dedicating himself to a literary career. In 1839, he published a prose epic Vates, which was republished in Ainsworth’s magazine as Valdarno, catching the attention of D. G. Rossetti. Later, he became a close member of the group of friends and followers around Rossetti, who, breaking from his usual practices, reviewed Hake’s poems in the Academy and the Fortnightly Review. In 1871, he published Madeline; in 1872, Parables and Tales; in 1883, The Serpent Play; in 1890, New Day Sonnets; and in 1892, Memoirs of Eighty Years. Dr. Hake’s works were known for their subtlety and grace, and they were warmly received within a somewhat niche literary community. In his last published verse, the sonnets, he demonstrated improvement in smoothness compared to the occasional roughness of his earlier work. He was granted a Civil List literary pension in 1893 and passed away on January 11, 1895.

828

828


HAKE (Merluccius vulgaris), a fish which differs from the cod in having only two dorsal fins, and one anal. It is very common on the coasts of Europe and eastern North America, but its flesh is much less esteemed than that of the true Gadi. Specimens 4 ft. in length are not scarce. There are local variations in the use of “hake” as a name; in America the “silver hake” (Merluccius bilinearis), sometimes called “whiting,” and “Pacific hake” (Merluccius productus) are also food-fishes of inferior quality.

HAKE (Merluccius vulgaris), a fish that differs from cod by having only two dorsal fins and one anal fin. It is very common along the coasts of Europe and eastern North America, but its flesh isn’t as highly regarded as that of true Gadi. Specimens that are 4 ft. long are not uncommon. There are local variations in the use of the name “hake”; in America, “silver hake” (Merluccius bilinearis), sometimes referred to as “whiting,” and “Pacific hake” (Merluccius productus) are also edible fish but of lower quality.


HAKKAS (“Guests,” or “Strangers”), a people of S.W. China, chiefly found in Kwang-Tung, Fu-Kien and Formosa. Their origin is doubtful, but there is some ground for believing that they may be a cross between the aboriginal Mongolic element of northern China and the Chinese proper. According to their tradition, they were in Shantung and northern China as early as the 3rd century B.C. In disposition, appearance and customs they differ from the true Chinese. They speak a distinct dialect. Their women, who are prettier than the pure Chinese, do not compress their feet, and move freely about in public. The Hakkas are a most industrious people and furnish at Canton nearly all the coolie labour employed by Europeans. Their intelligence is great, and many noted scholars have been of Hakka birth. Hung Sin-tsuan, the leader in the Taiping rebellion, was a Hakka. In Formosa they serve as intermediaries between the Chinese and European traders and the natives. From time immemorial they seem to have been persecuted by the Chinese, whom they regard as “foreigners,” and with whom their means of communication is usually “pidgin English.” The earliest persecution occurred under the “first universal emperor” of China, Shi-Hwang-ti (246-210 B.C.). From this time the Hakkas appear to have become wanderers. Sometimes for generations they were permitted to live unmolested, as under the Han dynasty, when some of them held high official posts. During the Tang dynasty (7th, 8th, and 9th centuries) they settled in the mountains of Fu-kien and on the frontiers of Kwang-Tung. On the invasion of Kublai Khan, the Hakkas distinguished themselves by their bravery on the Chinese side. In the 14th century further persecutions drove them into Kwang-Tung.

HAKKAS (“Guests” or “Strangers”) are a group from southwestern China, primarily found in Guangdong, Fujian, and Taiwan. Their origins are uncertain, but there is some reason to believe they may be a blend of the indigenous Mongolic population of northern China and the Han Chinese. According to their history, they were in Shandong and northern China as early as the 3rd century B.C. In terms of character, appearance, and traditions, they are different from the Han Chinese. They speak a unique dialect. Their women, who are often considered more attractive than pure Han women, do not bind their feet and freely move about in public. The Hakkas are extremely hardworking and provide almost all of the coolie labor employed by Europeans in Canton. They are highly intelligent, and many prominent scholars have come from the Hakka community. Hung Sin-tsuan, the leader of the Taiping rebellion, was Hakka. In Taiwan, they act as go-betweens for Chinese, European traders, and the indigenous people. They have faced persecution from the Chinese for centuries, whom they view as “foreigners,” and often communicate using “pidgin English.” The earliest instance of such persecution occurred under the “first universal emperor” of China, Shi Huangdi (246-210 B.C.). From this point, the Hakkas seem to have become wanderers. At times, they were allowed to live without harassment, as during the Han dynasty when some held high-ranking official positions. During the Tang dynasty (7th to 9th centuries), they settled in the mountains of Fujian and on the borders of Guangdong. When Kublai Khan invaded, the Hakkas showed remarkable bravery fighting for the Chinese. In the 14th century, further persecutions forced them into Guangdong.

See “An Outline History of the Hakkas,” China Review (London, 1873-1874), vol. ii.; Pitou, “On the Origin and History of the Hakkas,” ib.; Dyer Ball, Easy Lessons in the Hakka Dialect (1884), Things Chinese (London, 1893); Schaub, “Proverbs in Daily Use among the Hakkas,” in China Review (London, 1894-1895), vol. xxi.; Rev. J. Edkins, China’s Place in Philology; Girard de Rialle, Rev. d. anthrop. (Jan. and April, 1885); G. Taylor, “The Aborigines of Formosa,” China Review, xiv. p. 198 seq., also xvi. No. 3, “A Ramble through Southern Formosa.”

See “An Outline History of the Hakkas,” China Review (London, 1873-1874), vol. ii.; Pitou, “On the Origin and History of the Hakkas,” ib.; Dyer Ball, Easy Lessons in the Hakka Dialect (1884), Things Chinese (London, 1893); Schaub, “Proverbs in Daily Use among the Hakkas,” in China Review (London, 1894-1895), vol. xxi.; Rev. J. Edkins, China’s Place in Philology; Girard de Rialle, Rev. d. anthrop. (Jan. and April, 1885); G. Taylor, “The Aborigines of Formosa,” China Review, xiv. p. 198 seq., also xvi. No. 3, “A Ramble through Southern Formosa.”


HAKLUYT, RICHARD (c. 1553-1616), British geographer, was born of good family in or near London about 1553. The Hakluyts were of Welsh extraction, not Dutch as has been supposed. They appear to have settled in Herefordshire as early as the 13th century. The family seat was Eaton, 2 m. S.E. of Leominster. Hugo Hakelute was returned M.P. for that borough in 1304/5. Richard went to school at Westminster, where he was a queen’s scholar; while there his future bent was determined by a visit to his cousin and namesake, Richard Hakluyt of the Middle Temple. His cousin ’s discourse, illustrated by “certain bookes of cosmographie, an universall mappe, and the Bible,” made young Hakluyt resolve to “prosecute that knowledge and kind of literature.” Entering Christ Church, Oxford, in 1570, “his exercises of duty first performed,” he fell to his intended course of reading, and by degrees perused all the printed or written voyages and discoveries that he could find. He took his B.A. In 1573/4. It is probable that, shortly after taking his M.A. (1577), he began at Oxford the first public lectures in geography that “shewed both the old imperfectly composed and the new lately reformed mappes, globes, spheares, and other instruments of this art.” That this was not in London is certain, as we know that the first lecture of the kind was delivered in the metropolis on the 4th of November 1588 by Thomas Hood.

HAKLUYT, RICHARD (c. 1553-1616), British geographer, was born into a well-off family in or around London around 1553. The Hakluyts were of Welsh descent, not Dutch as has been commonly thought. They seem to have settled in Herefordshire as early as the 13th century. The family home was Eaton, 2 miles southeast of Leominster. Hugo Hakelute was elected as a Member of Parliament for that borough in 1304/5. Richard attended Westminster School, where he was a queen’s scholar; during his time there, his future direction was influenced by a visit to his cousin and namesake, Richard Hakluyt of the Middle Temple. His cousin’s talks, illustrated by “certain books of cosmography, a universal map, and the Bible,” inspired young Hakluyt to pursue “that knowledge and kind of literature.” He enrolled at Christ Church, Oxford, in 1570, and after completing his initial duties, he focused on his planned reading, gradually going through all the printed or written voyages and discoveries he could find. He earned his B.A. in 1573/4. Shortly after obtaining his M.A. in 1577, he likely began giving the first public lectures on geography at Oxford, which showcased both the old imperfectly made and the newly reformed maps, globes, spheres, and other tools of this discipline. It is certain that this did not happen in London, as we know that the first lecture of this kind in the capital was given on November 4, 1588, by Thomas Hood.

Hakluyt’s first published work was his Divers Voyages touching the Discoverie of America (London, 1582, 4to.). This brought him to the notice of Lord Howard of Effingham, and so to that of Sir Edward Stafford, Lord Howard’s brother-in-law; accordingly at the age of thirty, being acquainted with “the chiefest captaines at sea, the greatest merchants, and the best mariners of our nation,” he was selected as chaplain to accompany Stafford, now English ambassador at the French court, to Paris (1583). In accordance with the instructions of Secretary Walsingham, he occupied himself chiefly in collecting information of the Spanish and French movements, and “making diligent inquirie of such things as might yield any light unto our westerne discoverie in America.” The first fruits of Hakluyt’s labours in Paris are embodied in his important work entitled A particuler discourse concerning Westerne discoveries written in the yere 1584, by Richarde Hackluyt of Oxforde, at the requeste and direction of the righte worshipfull Mr Walter Raghly before the comynge home of his twoo barkes. This long-lost MS. was at last printed in 1877. Its object was to recommend the enterprise of planting the English race in the unsettled parts of North America. Hakluyt’s other works consist mainly of translations and compilations, relieved by his dedications and prefaces, which last, with a few letters, are the only material we possess out of which a biography of him can be framed. Hakluyt revisited England in 1584, laid before Queen Elizabeth a copy of the Discourse “along with one in Latin upon Aristotle’s Politicks,” and obtained, two days before his return to Paris, the grant of the next vacant prebend at Bristol, to which he was admitted in 1586 and held with his other preferments till his death.

Hakluyt’s first published work was his Divers Voyages touching the Discoverie of America (London, 1582, 4to.). This caught the attention of Lord Howard of Effingham, which led to Sir Edward Stafford, Lord Howard’s brother-in-law, noticing him as well. At the age of thirty, and being acquainted with “the chief captains at sea, the greatest merchants, and the best mariners of our nation,” he was chosen as chaplain to accompany Stafford, who was now the English ambassador at the French court, to Paris (1583). Following the instructions of Secretary Walsingham, he focused mainly on gathering information about Spanish and French activities, and “making diligent inquiry into matters that could shed light on our western discoveries in America.” The first results of Hakluyt’s efforts in Paris are found in his significant work titled A particuler discourse concerning Westerne discoveries written in the yere 1584, by Richarde Hackluyt of Oxforde, at the requeste and direction of the righte worshipfull Mr Walter Raghly before the comynge home of his twoo barkes. This long-lost manuscript was finally published in 1877. Its purpose was to advocate for the establishment of the English race in the unsettled regions of North America. Hakluyt’s other works mainly comprise translations and compilations, supplemented by his dedications and prefaces, which, along with a few letters, provide the only material we have to construct a biography of him. Hakluyt returned to England in 1584, presented Queen Elizabeth with a copy of the Discourse “along with one in Latin on Aristotle’s Politicks,” and received, two days before his return to Paris, the grant of the next available prebend at Bristol, which he took up in 1586 and held alongside his other positions until his death.

While in Paris Hakluyt interested himself in the publication of the MS. journal of Laudonnière, the Histoire notable de la Florida, edited by Bassanier (Paris, 1586, 8vo.). This was translated by Hakluyt and published in London under the title of A notable historie containing foure voyages made by certayne French captaynes into Florida (London, 1587, 4to.). The same year De orbe novo Petri Martyris Anglerii decades octo illustratae labore et industria Richardi Hackluyti saw the light at Paris. This work contains the exceedingly rare copperplate map dedicated to Hakluyt and signed F. G. (supposed to be Francis Gualle); it is the first on which the name of “Virginia” appears.

While in Paris, Hakluyt became interested in publishing the manuscript journal of Laudonnière, the Histoire notable de la Florida, edited by Bassanier (Paris, 1586, 8vo). Hakluyt translated it and published it in London under the title A notable historie containing foure voyages made by certayne French captaynes into Florida (London, 1587, 4to). That same year, De orbe novo Petri Martyris Anglerii decades octo illustratae labore et industria Richardi Hackluyti was published in Paris. This work includes the extremely rare copperplate map dedicated to Hakluyt and signed F. G. (believed to be Francis Gualle); it is the first where the name “Virginia” appears.

In 1588 Hakluyt finally returned to England with Lady Stafford, after a residence in France of nearly five years. In 1589 he published the first edition of his chief work, The Principall Navigations, Voiages and Discoveries of the English Nation (fol., London, 1 vol.). In the preface to this we have the announcement of the intended publication of the first terrestrial globe made in England by Molyneux. In 1598-1600 appeared the final, reconstructed and greatly enlarged edition of The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques and Discoveries of the English Nation (fol., 3 vols.). Some few copies contain an exceedingly rare map, the first on the Mercator projection made in England according to the true principles laid down by Edward Wright. Hakluyt’s great collection, though but little read, has been truly called the “prose epic of the modern English nation.” It is an invaluable treasure of material for the history of geographical discovery and colonization, which has secured for its editor a lasting reputation. In 1601 Hakluyt edited a translation from the Portuguese of Antonio Galvano, The Discoveries of the World (4to., London). In the same year his name occurs as an adviser to the East India Company, supplying them with maps, and informing them as to markets. Meantime in 1590 (April 20th) he had been instituted to the rectory of Withering-sett-cum-Brockford, Suffolk. In 1602, on the 4th of May, he was installed prebendary of Westminster, and in the following year he was elected archdeacon of Westminster. In the licence of his second marriage (30th of March 1604) he is also described as one of the chaplains of the Savoy, and his will contains a reference to chambers occupied by him there up to the time of his death; in another official document he is styled D.D. In 1605 he secured the prospective living of James Town, the intended capital of the intended colony of Virginia. This benefice he supplied, when the colony was at last established in 1607, by a curate, one Robert Hunt. In 1606 he appears as one 829 of the chief promoters of the petition to the king for patents to colonize Virginia. He was also a leading adventurer in the London or South Virginia Company. His last publication was a translation of Fernando de Soto’s discoveries in Florida, entitled Virginia richly valued by the description of Florida her next neighbour (London, 1609, 4to). This work was intended to encourage the young colony of Virginia; to Hakluyt, it has been said, “England is more indebted for its American possession than to any man of that age.” We may notice that it was at Hakluyt’s suggestion that Robert Parke translated Mendoza’s History of China (London, 1588-1589) and John Pory made his version of Leo Africanus (A Geographical History of Africa, London, 1600). Hakluyt died in 1616 (November 23rd) and was buried in Westminster Abbey (November 26th); by an error in the abbey register his burial is recorded under the year 1626. Out of his various emoluments and preferments (of which the last was Gedney rectory, Lincolnshire, in 1612) he amassed a small fortune, which was squandered by a son. A number of his MSS., sufficient to form a fourth volume of his collections of 1598-1600, fell into the hands of Samuel Purchas, who inserted them in an abridged form in his Pilgrimes (1625-1626, fol.). Others are preserved at Oxford (Bib. Bod. MS. Seld. B. 8). which consist chiefly of notes gathered from contemporary authors.

In 1588, Hakluyt finally returned to England with Lady Stafford after living in France for nearly five years. In 1589, he published the first edition of his main work, The Principall Navigations, Voiages and Discoveries of the English Nation (fol., London, 1 vol.). The preface announces the upcoming publication of the first terrestrial globe made in England by Molyneux. Between 1598 and 1600, the final, reconstructed, and significantly expanded edition of The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques and Discoveries of the English Nation was released (fol., 3 vols.). A few copies include an extremely rare map, the first Mercator projection created in England based on the true principles outlined by Edward Wright. Hakluyt's major collection, although not widely read, has rightly been called the “prose epic of the modern English nation.” It is an invaluable resource for the history of geographical discovery and colonization, ensuring lasting recognition for its editor. In 1601, Hakluyt edited a translation from Portuguese by Antonio Galvano, The Discoveries of the World (4to., London). That same year, he is listed as an adviser to the East India Company, providing them with maps and information about markets. In the meantime, on April 20, 1590, he was appointed to the rectory of Withering-sett-cum-Brockford, Suffolk. On May 4, 1602, he became a prebendary of Westminster, and in the following year, he was elected archdeacon of Westminster. In the license for his second marriage (March 30, 1604), he is also described as one of the chaplains of the Savoy, and his will mentions chambers he occupied there until his death; in another official document, he is referred to as D.D. In 1605, he obtained the prospective living for James Town, the planned capital of the intended colony of Virginia. He provided this benefice through a curate named Robert Hunt when the colony was finally established in 1607. In 1606, he was one of the key promoters of the petition to the king for patents to colonize Virginia. He was also a leading adventurer in the London or South Virginia Company. His last publication was a translation of Fernando de Soto’s discoveries in Florida, titled Virginia richly valued by the description of Florida her next neighbour (London, 1609, 4to). This work aimed to encourage the young colony of Virginia; it has been said that “England is more indebted to Hakluyt for its American possession than to any man of that age.” It’s worth noting that it was Hakluyt’s suggestion that Robert Parke translate Mendoza’s History of China (London, 1588-1589) and that John Pory create his version of Leo Africanus (A Geographical History of Africa, London, 1600). Hakluyt passed away on November 23, 1616, and was buried in Westminster Abbey on November 26; due to an error in the abbey register, his burial is recorded under the year 1626. From his various incomes and positions (the last being Gedney rectory, Lincolnshire, in 1612), he accumulated a small fortune, which was wasted by a son. Some of his manuscripts, enough to form a fourth volume of his collections from 1598-1600, were taken by Samuel Purchas, who included them in an abridged form in his Pilgrimes (1625-1626, fol.). Others are kept at Oxford (Bib. Bod. MS. Seld. B. 8), consisting mainly of notes gathered from contemporary authors.

Besides the MSS. or editions noticed in the text (Divers Voyages (1582); Particuler Discourse (1584); Laudonnière’s Florida (1587); Peter Martyr, Decades (1587); Principal Navigations (1589 and 1598-1600); Galvano’s Discoveries (1601); De Soto’s Florida record, the Virginia richly valued (1609, &c.), we may notice the Hakluyt Society’s London edition of the Divers Voyages in 1850, the edition of the Particuler Discourse, by Charles Deane in the Collections of the Maine Historical Society (Cambridge, Mass., 1870, with an introduction by Leonard Woods); also, among modern issues of the Principal Navigations, those of 1809 (5 vols., with much additional matter), and of 1903-1905 (Glasgow, 12 vols.). The new title-page issued for the first volume of the final edition of the Principal Navigations, in 1599, merely cancelled the former 1598 title with its reference to the Cadiz expedition of 1596; but from this has arisen the mistaken supposition that a new edition was then (1599) published. Hakluyt’s Galvano was edited for the Hakluyt Society by Admiral C. R. D. Bethune in 1862. This Society, which was founded in 1846 for printing rare and unpublished voyages and travels, includes the Glasgow edition of the Principal Navigations in its extra series, as well as C. R. Beazley’s edition of Carpini, Rubruquis, and other medieval texts from Hakluyt (Cambridge, 1903, 1 vol.). Reckoning in these and an issue of Purchas’s Pilgrimes by the Glasgow publisher of the Hakluyt of 1903-1905, the society has now published or “fathered” 150 vols. See also Voyages of the Elizabethan Seamen to America, being Select Narratives from the Principal Navigations, by E. J. Payne (Oxford, 1880; 1893; new edition by C. R. Beazley, 1907).

Besides the manuscripts or editions mentioned in the text (Divers Voyages (1582); Particuler Discourse (1584); Laudonnière’s Florida (1587); Peter Martyr, Decades (1587); Principal Navigations (1589 and 1598-1600); Galvano’s Discoveries (1601); De Soto’s Florida record, the Virginia richly valued (1609, &c.), we should also highlight the Hakluyt Society’s London edition of the Divers Voyages from 1850, the edition of the Particuler Discourse by Charles Deane in the Collections of the Maine Historical Society (Cambridge, Mass., 1870, with an introduction by Leonard Woods); furthermore, among modern editions of the Principal Navigations, those from 1809 (5 volumes, with a lot of additional material) and from 1903-1905 (Glasgow, 12 volumes). The new title page released for the first volume of the final edition of the Principal Navigations in 1599 simply replaced the former 1598 title with its mention of the Cadiz expedition of 1596; however, this led to the incorrect assumption that a new edition was published then (1599). Hakluyt’s Galvano was edited for the Hakluyt Society by Admiral C. R. D. Bethune in 1862. This Society, which was established in 1846 to publish rare and unpublished voyages and travels, also includes the Glasgow edition of the Principal Navigations in its extra series, as well as C. R. Beazley’s edition of Carpini, Rubruquis, and other medieval texts from Hakluyt (Cambridge, 1903, 1 volume). Counting these and an issue of Purchas’s Pilgrimes published by the Glasgow publisher of the Hakluyt from 1903-1905, the society has now published or “supported” 150 volumes. See also Voyages of the Elizabethan Seamen to America, being Select Narratives from the Principal Navigations, by E. J. Payne (Oxford, 1880; 1893; new edition by C. R. Beazley, 1907).

For Hakluyt’s life the dedications of the 1589 and 1598 editions of the Principal Navigations should be especially consulted; also Winter Jones’s introduction to the Kakluyt Society edition of the Divers Voyages; Fuller’s Worthies of England, “Herefordshire”; Oxford Univ. Reg. (Oxford Hist. Soc), ii., iii. 39; Historical MSS. Commission, 4th report, appendix, p. 614, the last giving us the Towneley MSS. referring to payments (prizes?) awarded to Hakluyt when at Oxford, May 12th and June 4th, 1575.

For information about Hakluyt’s life, the dedications in the 1589 and 1598 editions of the Principal Navigations should be checked out, along with Winter Jones’s introduction to the Hakluyt Society edition of the Divers Voyages; Fuller's Worthies of England, “Herefordshire”; Oxford Univ. Reg. (Oxford Hist. Soc), ii., iii. 39; and Historical MSS. Commission, 4th report, appendix, p. 614, the last one providing the Towneley MSS. that refer to payments (prizes?) given to Hakluyt while he was at Oxford, on May 12th and June 4th, 1575.

(C. H. C; C. R. B.)

HAKODATE, a town on the south of the island of Yezo, Japan, for many years regarded as the capital of the island until Sapporo was officially raised to that rank. Pop. (1903) 84,746. Its position, as has been frequently remarked, is not unlike that of Gibraltar, as the town is built along the north-western base of a rocky promontory (1157 ft. in height) which forms the eastern boundary of a spacious bay, and is united to the mainland by a narrow sandy isthmus. The summit of the rock, called the Peak, is crowned by a fort. Hakodate is one of the ports originally opened to foreign trade. The Bay of Hakodate, an inlet of Tsugaru Strait, is completely land-locked, easy of access and spacious, with deep water almost up to the shore, and good holding-ground. The Russians formerly used Hakodate as a winter port. The staple exports are beans, pulse and peas, marine products, sulphur, furs and timber; the staple imports, comestibles (especially salted fish), kerosene and oil-cake. The town is not situated so as to profit largely by the development of the resources of Yezo, and as a port of foreign trade its outlook is indifferent. Frequent steamers connect Hakodate and Yokohama and other ports, and there is daily communication with Aomori, 56 m. distant, whence there is rail-connexion with Tokyo. Hakodate was opened to American commerce in 1854. In the civil war of 1868 the town was taken by the rebel fleet, but it was recovered by the mikado in 1869.

HAKODATE, is a town on the southern part of the island of Yezo, Japan, that was for many years considered the capital of the island until Sapporo was officially designated that title. Population (1903) was 84,746. Its location, as has often been noted, is somewhat similar to that of Gibraltar, as the town is built along the northwestern base of a rocky promontory (1157 ft. high) that forms the eastern boundary of a spacious bay, and it’s connected to the mainland by a narrow sandy isthmus. The top of the rock, known as the Peak, is topped by a fort. Hakodate is one of the ports that was originally opened to foreign trade. The Bay of Hakodate, which is an inlet of Tsugaru Strait, is completely land-locked, easy to access, and spacious, with deep water extending almost to the shore, and solid holding ground. The Russians used to utilize Hakodate as a winter port. The main exports include beans, lentils, and peas, marine products, sulfur, furs, and timber; the main imports consist of food items (especially salted fish), kerosene, and oil cake. The town is not positioned to greatly benefit from the development of Yezo’s resources, and as a foreign trade port, its prospects are not great. There are regular steamers connecting Hakodate with Yokohama and other ports, and there’s daily service to Aomori, 56 miles away, which has rail connections to Tokyo. Hakodate was opened to American trade in 1854. During the civil war of 1868, the town was captured by the rebel fleet, but it was retaken by the mikado in 1869.


HAL, a town of Brabant, Belgium, about 9 m. S.W. of Brussels, situated on the river Senne and the Charleroi canal. Pop. (1904) 13,541. The place is interesting chiefly on account of its fine church of Notre Dame, formerly dedicated to St Martin. This church, a good example of pure Gothic, was begun in 1341 and finished in 1409. Its principal ornament is the alabaster altar, by J. Mone, completed in 1533. The bronze font dates from 1446. Among the monuments is one in black marble to the dauphin Joachim, son of Louis XI., who died in 1460. In the treasury of the church are many costly objects presented by illustrious personages, among others by the emperor Charles V., King Henry VIII. of England, Charles the Bold of Burgundy, and several popes. The church is chiefly celebrated, however, for its miraculous image of the Virgin. Legend says that during a siege the bullets fired into the town were caught by her in the folds of her dress. Some of these are still shown in a chest that stands in a side chapel. In consequence of this belief a great pilgrimage, attended by many thousands from all parts of Belgium, is paid annually to this church. The hôtel de ville dates from 1616 and has been restored with more than ordinary good taste.

HAL, is a town in Brabant, Belgium, about 9 miles southwest of Brussels, located on the river Senne and the Charleroi canal. Population (1904) 13,541. The town is mainly notable for its beautiful church of Notre Dame, which was formerly dedicated to St. Martin. This church, a great example of pure Gothic architecture, started construction in 1341 and was completed in 1409. Its main feature is the alabaster altar made by J. Mone, finished in 1533. The bronze font dates back to 1446. Among the monuments is a black marble one dedicated to the dauphin Joachim, son of Louis XI, who died in 1460. The church's treasury holds many valuable items given by prominent figures, including Emperor Charles V, King Henry VIII of England, Charles the Bold of Burgundy, and several popes. However, the church is mostly famous for its miraculous image of the Virgin. Legend has it that during a siege, bullets fired into the town were caught by her in the folds of her dress. Some of these bullets are still displayed in a chest in a side chapel. Because of this belief, a large pilgrimage takes place annually, drawing thousands from all over Belgium to this church. The town hall dates back to 1616 and has been restored with exceptional taste.


HALA, or Halla (formerly known as Murtazabad), a town of British India in Hyderabad district, Sind. Pop. (1901) 4985. It has long been famous for its glazed pottery and tiles, made from a fine clay obtained from the Indus, mixed with powdered flints. The town has also a manufacture of susis or striped trouser-cloths.

HALA, or Holla (previously called Murtazabad), is a town in British India located in the Hyderabad district of Sind. Population (1901) was 4,985. It has been well-known for its glazed pottery and tiles, made from high-quality clay sourced from the Indus, combined with powdered flints. The town also produces susis, which are striped trouser-cloths.


HALAESA, an ancient town on the north coast of Sicily, about 14 m. E. of Cephaloedium [Cefalu], to the east of the modern Castel di Tusa, founded in 403 B.C. by Archonides, tyrant of Herbita, whose name it sometimes bore: we find, e.g. Halaisa Archonida on a coin of the time of Augustus (Corp. inscrip. Lat. x., Berlin, 1883, p. 768). It was the first town to surrender to the Romans in the First Punic War, and was granted freedom and immunity from tithe. It became a place of some importance in Roman days, especially as a port, and entirely outstripped its mother city. Halaesa is the only place in Sicily where an inscription dedicated to a Roman governor of the republican period (perhaps in 93 B.C.) has come to light.

HALAESA, is an ancient town on the north coast of Sicily, about 14 miles east of Cefalù and east of the modern Castel di Tusa. It was founded in 403 BCE by Archonides, the tyrant of Herbita, whose name it occasionally carried. For instance, we find Halaisa Archonida on a coin from the time of Augustus (Corp. inscrip. Lat. x., Berlin, 1883, p. 768). It was the first town to surrender to the Romans during the First Punic War and was granted freedom and exemption from taxes. Halaesa gained significant importance during Roman times, especially as a port, outpacing its mother city. It is the only place in Sicily where an inscription dedicated to a Roman governor from the republican period (possibly from 93 BCE) has been discovered.

(T. As.)

HALAKHA, or Halacha (literally “rule of conduct”), the rabbinical development of the Mosaic law; with the haggada it makes up the Talmud and Midrash (q.v.). As the haggada is the poetic, so the halakha is the legal element of the Talmud (q.v.), and arose out of the faction between the Sadducees, who disputed the traditions, and the Pharisees, who strove to prove their derivation from scripture. Among the chief attempts to codify the halakha were the Great Rules (Halakhoth Gedoloth) of Simon Kayyara (9th century), based on the letters written by the Gaonim, the heads of the Babylonian schools, to Jewish inquirers in many lands, the work of Jacob Alfassi (1013-1103), the Strong Hand of Maimonides (1180), and the Table Prepared (Shulḥan Aruch) of Joseph Qaro (1565), which from its practical scope and its clarity as a work of general reference became the universal handbook of Jewish life in many of its phases.

HALAKHA, or Jewish law (literally “rule of conduct”), is the rabbinical interpretation of the Mosaic law. Along with the haggada, it forms the Talmud and Midrash (q.v.). While the haggada is the poetic aspect, the halakha represents the legal component of the Talmud (q.v.). It emerged from the conflict between the Sadducees, who challenged the traditions, and the Pharisees, who aimed to establish their basis in scripture. Key efforts to codify the halakha include the Great Rules (Halakhoth Gedoloth) by Simon Kayyara (9th century), which was based on letters written by the Gaonim, leaders of the Babylonian schools, to Jewish seekers in various regions, as well as the work of Jacob Alfassi (1013-1103), Maimonides' Strong Hand (1180), and the Table Prepared (Shulḥan Aruch) by Joseph Qaro (1565). Due to its practical approach and clarity as a general reference, it became the universal guide for Jewish life in many areas.

(I. A.)

HALBERSTADT, a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Saxony, 56 m. by rail N.W. of Halle, and 29 S.W. of Magdeburg. It lies in a fertile country to the north of the Harz Mountains, on the Holzemme, at the junction of railways to Halle, Goslar and Thale. Pop. (1905) 45,534. The town has a medieval appearance, many old houses decorated with beautiful wood-carving still surviving. The Gothic cathedral (now Protestant), dating from the 13th and 14th centuries, is remarkable for the majestic impression made by the great height of the interior, with its slender columns and lofty, narrow aisles. The treasure, preserved in the former chapter-house, is rich in reliquaries, vestments and other objects of medieval church art. The beautiful spires, which had become unsafe, were rebuilt in 1890-1895. Among the other churches the only one of special interest is the Liebfrauenkirche (Church of Our Lady), 830 a basilica, with four towers, in the later Romanesque style, dating from the 12th and 13th centuries and restored in 1848, containing old mural frescoes and carved figures. Remarkable among the other old buildings are the town-hall, of the 14th century and restored in the 17th century, with a crypt, and the Petershof, formerly the episcopal palace, but now utilized as law courts and a prison. The principal educational establishment is the gymnasium, with a library of 40,000 volumes. Close to the cathedral lies the house of the poet Gleim (q.v.), since 1899 the property of the municipality and converted into a museum. It contains a collection of the portraits of the friends of the poet-scholar and some valuable manuscripts. The principal manufactures of the town are sugar, cigars, paper, gloves, chemical products, beer and machinery. About a mile and a half distant are the Spiegelsberge, from which a fine view of the surrounding country is obtained, and the Klusberge, with prehistoric cave-dwellings cut out in the sandstone rocks.

HALBERSTADT, a town in Germany, in the Prussian province of Saxony, is located 56 miles by rail northwest of Halle and 29 miles southwest of Magdeburg. It sits in a fertile area north of the Harz Mountains, along the Holzemme River, at the intersection of railways leading to Halle, Goslar, and Thale. The population in 1905 was 45,534. The town has a medieval look, with many old houses featuring beautiful wood carvings still intact. The Gothic cathedral (now Protestant), built in the 13th and 14th centuries, is notable for its impressive height, featuring slender columns and tall, narrow aisles. The treasure located in the former chapter house is abundant in reliquaries, vestments, and other medieval church art. The beautiful spires, which had become unsafe, were rebuilt between 1890 and 1895. Among the other churches, the one of particular interest is the Liebfrauenkirche (Church of Our Lady), 830 a basilica with four towers in the later Romanesque style, built in the 12th and 13th centuries and restored in 1848, featuring old mural frescoes and carved figures. Notable among the other historic buildings are the town hall from the 14th century, restored in the 17th century, which includes a crypt, and the Petershof, once the episcopal palace but now used as law courts and a prison. The main educational institution is the gymnasium, which has a library of 40,000 volumes. Close to the cathedral is the house of the poet Gleim (q.v.), which has been owned by the municipality since 1899 and turned into a museum. It houses a collection of portraits of the poet-scholar's friends and some valuable manuscripts. The town's main industries include sugar, cigars, paper, gloves, chemical products, beer, and machinery. About a mile and a half away are the Spiegelsberge, offering a great view of the surrounding area, and the Klusberge, which features prehistoric cave dwellings carved into the sandstone rocks.

The history of Halberstadt begins with the transfer to it, by Bishop Hildegrim I., in 820 of the see founded by Charlemagne at Seligenstadt. At the end of the 10th century the bishops were granted by the emperors the right to exercise temporal jurisdiction over their see, which became one of the most considerable of the ecclesiastical principalities of the Empire. As such it survived the introduction of the Reformation in 1542; but in 1566, on the death of Sigismund of Brandenburg (also archbishop of Madgeburg from 1552 to 1566), the last Catholic bishop, the chapter from motives of economy elected the infant Henry Julius of Brunswick-Lüneburg. In 1589 he became duke of Brunswick, and two years later he abolished the Catholic rites in Halberstadt. The see was governed by lay bishops until 1648, when it was formally converted by the treaty of Westphalia into a secular principality for the elector of Brandenburg. By the treaty of Tilsit in 1807 it was annexed to the kingdom of Westphalia, but came again to Prussia on the downfall of Napoleon.

The history of Halberstadt starts with the transfer of the see founded by Charlemagne at Seligenstadt to Bishop Hildegrim I. in 820. By the end of the 10th century, the emperors granted bishops the right to have temporal authority over their see, making it one of the most significant ecclesiastical principalities in the Empire. It managed to survive the Reformation that began in 1542, but in 1566, following the death of Sigismund of Brandenburg (who was also the archbishop of Magdeburg from 1552 to 1566), the chapter, looking to save money, chose the infant Henry Julius of Brunswick-Lüneburg as their new bishop. In 1589, he became the duke of Brunswick, and two years later, he eliminated the Catholic rituals in Halberstadt. The see was ruled by lay bishops until 1648, when the Treaty of Westphalia officially turned it into a secular principality for the elector of Brandenburg. It was annexed to the Kingdom of Westphalia by the Treaty of Tilsit in 1807 but returned to Prussia after Napoleon's defeat.

The town received a charter from Bishop Arnulf in 998. In 1113 it was burnt by the emperor Henry V., and in 1179 by Henry the Lion. During the Thirty Years’ War it was occupied alternately by the Imperialists and the Swedes, the latter of whom handed it over to Brandenburg.

The town got a charter from Bishop Arnulf in 998. In 1113, it was burned by Emperor Henry V, and in 1179 by Henry the Lion. During the Thirty Years' War, it was taken over alternately by the Imperialists and the Swedes, who eventually gave it to Brandenburg.

See Lucanus, Der Dom zu Halberstadt (1837), Wegweiser durch Halberstadt (2nd ed., 1866) and Die Liebfrauenkirche zu Halberstadt (1872); Scheffer, Inschriften und Legenden halberstädtischer Bauten (1864); Schmidt, Urkundenbuch der Stadt Halberstadt (Halle, 1878); and Zschiesche, Halberstadt, sonst und jetzi (1882).

See Lucanus, Der Dom zu Halberstadt (1837), Wegweiser durch Halberstadt (2nd ed., 1866) and Die Liebfrauenkirche zu Halberstadt (1872); Scheffer, Inschriften und Legenden halberstädtischer Bauten (1864); Schmidt, Urkundenbuch der Stadt Halberstadt (Halle, 1878); and Zschiesche, Halberstadt, sonst und jetzi (1882).


HALBERT, Halberd or Halbard, a weapon consisting of an axe-blade balanced by a pick and having an elongated pike-head at the end of the staff, which was usually about 5 or 6 ft. in length. The utility of such a weapon in the wars of the later middle ages lay in this, that it gave the foot soldier the means of dealing with an armoured man on horseback. The pike could do no more than keep the horseman at a distance. This ensured security for the foot soldier but did not enable him to strike a mortal blow, for which firstly a long-handled and secondly a powerful weapon, capable of striking a heavy cleaving blow, was required. Several different forms of weapon responding to these requirements are described and illustrated below; it will be noticed that the thrusting pike is almost always combined with the cutting-bill hook or axe-head, so that the individual billman or halberdier should not be at a disadvantage if caught alone by a mounted opponent, or if his first descending blow missed its object. It will be noticed further that, concurrently with the disuse of complete armour and the development of firearms, the pike or thrusting element gradually displaces the axe or cleaving element in these weapons, till at last we arrive at the court halberts and partizans of the late 16th and early 17th centuries and the so-called “halbert” of the infantry officer and sergeant in the 18th, which can scarcely be classed even as partizans.

HALBERT, Halberd or Halberd, a weapon that features an axe-blade paired with a pick and has a long pike-head at the end of a staff, which was typically about 5 or 6 feet long. This weapon was useful in the wars of the later middle ages because it allowed foot soldiers to confront armored horsemen. The pike would only keep the horseman at bay, providing safety for the foot soldier but not allowing for a lethal strike, which required a long-handled and powerful weapon able to deliver a strong cleaving blow. Various forms of weapons that meet these needs are described and illustrated below; you’ll see that the thrusting pike is almost always combined with a cutting-bill hook or axe-head, ensuring that a billman or halberdier wouldn’t be at a disadvantage if faced alone by a mounted opponent or if their initial downward strike missed its target. Additionally, it’s noteworthy that as complete armor fell out of use and firearms evolved, the pike or thrusting element gradually replaced the axe or cleaving element in these weapons until we ultimately see the court halberds and partizans of the late 16th and early 17th centuries and the so-called “halbert” of infantry officers and sergeants in the 18th century, which can hardly be classified even as partizans.

Figs. 1-6 represent types of these long cutting, cut and thrust weapons of the middle ages, details being omitted for the sake of clearness. The most primitive is the voulge (fig. 1), which is simply a heavy cleaver on a pole, with a point added. The next form, the gisarme or guisarme (fig. 2), appears in infinite variety but is always distinguished from voulges, &c. by the hook, which was used to pull down mounted men, and generally resembles the agricultural bill-hook of to-day. The glaive (fig. 3 is late German) is a broad, heavy, slightly curved sword-blade on a stave; it is often combined with the hooked gisarme as a glaive-gisarme (fig. 4, Burgundian, about 1480). A gisarme-voulge is shown in fig. 5 (Swiss, 14th century).

Figs. 1-6 show types of these long cutting, cut-and-thrust weapons from the Middle Ages, with some details left out for clarity. The most basic is the voulge (fig. 1), which is just a heavy cleaver on a pole, with a point added. The next type, the gisarme or guisarme (fig. 2), comes in many variations but is always recognized by the hook, which was used to pull down mounted soldiers, and it typically resembles today’s agricultural bill-hook. The glaive (fig. 3 is late German) has a wide, heavy, slightly curved sword blade on a staff; it is often paired with the hooked gisarme as a glaive-gisarme (fig. 4, Burgundian, about 1480). A gisarme-voulge is illustrated in fig. 5 (Swiss, 14th century).

Figs. 1-6.
Figs. 7-12.

The weapon best known to Englishmen is the bill, which was originally a sort of scythe-blade, sharp on the concave side (whereas the glaive has the cutting edge on the convex side), but in its best-known form it should be called a bill-gisarme (fig. 6). The partizans, ranseurs and halberts proper developed naturally from the earlier types. The feature common to all, as has been said, is the combination of spear and axe. In the halberts the axe predominates, as the examples (fig. 10, Swiss, early 15th century; fig. 11, Swiss, middle 16th century; and fig. 12, German court halbert of the same period as fig. 11) show. In the partizan the pike is the more important, the axe-heads being reduced to little more than an ornamental feature. A south German specimen (fig. 9, 1615) shows how this was compensated by the broadening of the spear-head, the edges of which in such weapons were sharpened. Fig. 8, a service weapon of simple form, merely has projections on either side, and from this developed the ranseur (fig. 7), a partizan with a very long and narrow point, like the blade of a rapier, and with fork-like projections intended to act as “sword-breakers,” instead of the atrophied axe-heads of the partizan proper.

The weapon most recognized by Englishmen is the bill, which was originally a type of scythe blade, sharp on the inside edge (while the glaive has the cutting edge on the outside). In its most recognized form, it’s called a bill-gisarme (fig. 6). The partizans, ranseurs, and halberts developed naturally from earlier types. A common feature among all of them, as mentioned, is the combination of a spear and axe. In halberts, the axe part is predominant, as shown in the examples (fig. 10, Swiss, early 15th century; fig. 11, Swiss, mid-16th century; and fig. 12, German court halbert from the same period as fig. 11). In the partizan, the pike is the main focus, with the axe heads reduced to mostly decorative elements. A south German specimen (fig. 9, 1615) shows this offset by the widening of the spear head, with sharpened edges in such weapons. Fig. 8, a service weapon of simple design, just has projections on either side, and from this, the ranseur (fig. 7) developed—a partizan with a very long and narrow point, similar to a rapier blade, featuring fork-like projections meant to act as “sword-breakers,” instead of the diminished axe heads of the proper partizan.

The halbert played almost as conspicuous a part in the military history of Middle Europe during the 15th and early 16th centuries as the pike. But, even in a form distinguishable from the voulge and the glaive, it dates from the early part of the 13th century, and for many generations thereafter it was the special weapon of the Swiss. Fauchet, in his Origines des dignitez, printed in 1600, states that Louis XI. of France ordered certain new weapons of war called hallebardes to be made at Angers and other places in 1475. The Swiss had a mixed armament of pikes and halberts at the battle of Morat in 1476. In the 15th and 16th centuries the halberts became larger, and the blades were formed in many varieties of shape, often engraved, inlaid, or pierced in open work, and exquisitely finished as works of art. This weapon was in use in England from the reign of Henry VII. to the reign of George III., when it was still carried (though in shape it had certainly lost its original characteristics, and had become half partizan and half pike) by sergeants in the guards and other infantry regiments. It is still retained as the symbol of authority borne before the magistrates on public occasions in some of the burghs of Scotland. The Lochaber axe may be called a species of halbert furnished with a hook on the end of the staff at the back of the blade. The godendag (Fr. godendart) is the Flemish name of the halbert in its original form.

The halberd played an almost as prominent role in the military history of Central Europe during the 15th and early 16th centuries as the pike. However, even in a form distinct from the voulge and the glaive, it dates back to the early 13th century, and for many generations afterward, it was the go-to weapon for the Swiss. Fauchet, in his Origines des dignitez, published in 1600, notes that Louis XI of France commissioned certain new weapons of war called hallebardes to be made in Angers and other locations in 1475. The Swiss used a mix of pikes and halberds at the Battle of Morat in 1476. In the 15th and 16th centuries, halberds grew larger, and the blades were created in many different shapes, often engraved, inlaid, or crafted with intricate designs, and beautifully finished as pieces of art. This weapon was in use in England from the reign of Henry VII to the reign of George III, where it was still carried (though it had definitely lost its original characteristics, evolving into a mix of partizan and pike) by sergeants in the guards and other infantry regiments. It continues to be used as a symbol of authority carried before magistrates on public occasions in some of the burghs of Scotland. The Lochaber axe can be considered a type of halberd with a hook on the end of the staff at the back of the blade. The godendag (Fr. godendart) is the Flemish name for the halberd in its original form.

The derivation of the word is as follows. The O. Fr. hallebarde, of which the English “halberd,” “halbert,” is an adaptation, was itself adapted from the M.H.G. helmbarde, mod. Hellebarde; the second part is the O.H.G. barta or parta, broad-axe, probably the same word as Bart, beard, and so called from its shape; the first part is either helm, handle, cf. “helm,” tiller of a ship, the word meaning “hafted axe,” or else helm, helmet, an axe for smiting the helmet. A common derivation was to take the word as representing a Ger. halb-barde, half-axe; the early German form shows this to be an erroneous guess.

The origin of the word is as follows. The Old French hallebarde, from which the English “halberd” and “halbert” are derived, came from the Middle High German helmbarde, modern Hellebarde; the latter part comes from the Old High German barta or parta, meaning broad-axe, which is probably the same word as Bart, meaning beard, and named for its shape; the first part is either helm, meaning handle, comparable to “helm,” the tiller of a ship, so the word means “hafted axe,” or it could refer to helm, meaning helmet, indicating an axe used for striking a helmet. A common belief was that the word represented a German halb-barde, half-axe; however, the early German form shows this to be a mistaken assumption.

831

831


HALDANE, JAMES ALEXANDER (1768-1851), Scottish divine, the younger son of Captain James Haldane of Airthrey House, Stirlingshire, was born at Dundee on the 14th of July 1768. Educated first at Dundee and afterwards at the high school and university of Edinburgh, at the age of seventeen he joined the “Duke of Montrose” East Indiaman as a midshipman. After four voyages to India he was nominated to the command of the “Melville Castle” in the summer of 1793; but having during a long and unexpected detention of his ship begun a careful study of the Bible, and also come under the evangelical influence of David Bogue of Gosport, one of the founders of the London Missionary Society, he abruptly resolved to quit the naval profession for a religious life, and returned to Scotland before his ship had sailed. About the year 1796 he became acquainted with the celebrated evangelical divine, Charles Simeon of Cambridge, in whose society he made several tours through Scotland, endeavouring by tract-distribution and other means to awaken others to some of that interest in religious subjects which he himself so strongly felt. In May 1797 he preached his first sermon, at Gilmerton near Edinburgh, with encouraging success. In the same year he established a non-sectarian organization for tract distribution and lay preaching called the “Society for the Propagation of the Gospel at Home.” During the next few years he made repeated missionary journeys, preaching wherever he could obtain hearers, and generally in the open air. Not originally disloyal to the Church of Scotland, he was gradually driven by the hostility of the Assembly and the exigencies of his position into separation. In 1799 he was ordained as pastor of a large Independent congregation in Edinburgh. This was the first congregational church known by that name in Scotland. In 1801 a permanent building replaced the circus in which the congregation had at first met. To this church he continued to minister gratuitously for more than fifty years. In 1808 he made public avowal of his conversion to Baptist views. As advancing years compelled him to withdraw from the more exhausting labours of itineracy and open-air preaching, he sought more and more to influence the discussion of current religious and theological questions by means of the press. He died on the 8th of February 1851.

HALDANE, JAMES ALEXANDER (1768-1851), Scottish theologian, the younger son of Captain James Haldane of Airthrey House, Stirlingshire, was born in Dundee on July 14, 1768. He was educated first in Dundee and then at the high school and university in Edinburgh. At seventeen, he joined the “Duke of Montrose” East Indiaman as a midshipman. After four trips to India, he was appointed to command the “Melville Castle” in the summer of 1793; however, during a long and unexpected delay of his ship, he began a thorough study of the Bible and came under the evangelical influence of David Bogue of Gosport, one of the founders of the London Missionary Society. This led him to abruptly decide to leave the naval profession for a religious life and return to Scotland before his ship had set sail. Around 1796, he met the famous evangelical theologian, Charles Simeon of Cambridge, and they traveled together through Scotland, trying to spark interest in religious topics through tract distribution and other means. In May 1797, he preached his first sermon in Gilmerton near Edinburgh, which was well-received. That same year, he founded a non-sectarian organization for tract distribution and lay preaching called the “Society for the Propagation of the Gospel at Home.” In the following years, he took on various missionary trips, preaching wherever he could find an audience, often in the open air. Though he was initially loyal to the Church of Scotland, he eventually felt pushed towards separation due to the Assembly's hostility and his situation. In 1799, he was ordained as pastor of a large Independent congregation in Edinburgh, which was the first church with that name in Scotland. In 1801, a permanent building replaced the circus where the congregation had originally met. He continued to serve this church for over fifty years without pay. In 1808, he publicly announced his conversion to Baptist beliefs. As he aged and found it harder to keep up with the demanding work of itinerant and outdoor preaching, he increasingly focused on influencing the discussion of contemporary religious and theological issues through writing. He passed away on February 8, 1851.

His son, Daniel Rutherford Haldane (1824-1887), by his second wife, a daughter of Professor Daniel Rutherford, was a prominent Scottish physician, who became president of the Edinburgh College of Physicians.

His son, Daniel Rutherford Haldane (1824-1887), from his second wife, who was a daughter of Professor Daniel Rutherford, was a well-known Scottish doctor and later served as president of the Edinburgh College of Physicians.

Among J. A. Haldane’s numerous contributions to current theological discussions were: The Duty of Christian Forbearance in Regard to Points of Church Order (1811); Strictures on a Publication upon Primitive Christianity by Mr John Walker (1819); Refutation of Edward Irving’s Heretical Doctrines respecting the Person and Atonement of Jesus Christ. His Observations on Universal Pardon, &c., was a contribution to the controversy regarding the views of Thomas Erskine of Linlathen and Campbell of Row; Man’s Responsibility (1842) is a reply to Howard Hinton on the nature and extent of the Atonement. He also published: Journal of a Tour in the North; Early Instruction Commended (1801); Views of the Social Worship of the First Churches (1805); The Doctrine and Duty of Self-Examination (1806); The Doctrine of the Atonement (1845); Exposition of the Epistle to the Galatians (1848).

Among J. A. Haldane’s many contributions to contemporary theological discussions were: The Duty of Christian Forbearance in Regard to Points of Church Order (1811); Strictures on a Publication upon Primitive Christianity by Mr John Walker (1819); Refutation of Edward Irving’s Heretical Doctrines Regarding the Person and Atonement of Jesus Christ. His Observations on Universal Pardon, &c., was a contribution to the debate surrounding the views of Thomas Erskine of Linlathen and Campbell of Row; Man’s Responsibility (1842) is a response to Howard Hinton on the nature and extent of the Atonement. He also published: Journal of a Tour in the North; Early Instruction Commended (1801); Views of the Social Worship of the First Churches (1805); The Doctrine and Duty of Self-Examination (1806); The Doctrine of the Atonement (1845); Exposition of the Epistle to the Galatians (1848).


HALDANE, RICHARD BURDON (1856-  ), British statesman and philosopher, was the third son of Robert Haldane of Cloanden, Perthshire, a writer to the signet, and nephew of J. S. Burdon-Sanderson. He was a grand-nephew of the Scottish divines J. A. and Robert Haldane. He was educated at Edinburgh Academy and the universities of Edinburgh and Göttingen, where he studied philosophy under Lotze. He took first-class honours in philosophy at Edinburgh, and was Gray scholar and Ferguson scholar in philosophy of the four Scottish Universities (1876). He was called to the bar in 1879, and so early as 1890 became a queen’s counsel. In 1885 he entered parliament as liberal member for Haddingtonshire, for which he was re-elected continuously up to and including 1910. He was included in 1905 in Sir H. Campbell-Bannerman’s cabinet as secretary for war, and was the author of the important scheme for the reorganization of the British army, by which the militia and the volunteer forces were replaced by a single territorial force. Though always known as one of the ablest men of the Liberal party and conspicuous during the Boer War of 1899-1902 as a Liberal Imperialist, the choice of Mr Haldane for the task of thinking out a new army organization on business lines had struck many people as curious. Besides being a chancery lawyer, he was more particularly a philosopher, conspicuous for his knowledge of Hegelian metaphysics. But with German philosophy he had also the German sense of thoroughness and system, and his scheme, while it was much criticized, was recognized as the best that could be done with a voluntary army. Mr Haldane’s chief literary publications were: Life of Adam Smith (1887); Education and Empire (1902); The Pathway to Reality (1903). He also translated, jointly with J. Kemp, Schopenhauer’s Die Welt als Wille und Vorstellung (The World as Will and Idea, 3 vols., 1883-1886).

HALDANE, RICHARD BURDON (1856-  ), British statesman and philosopher, was the third son of Robert Haldane of Cloanden, Perthshire, a writer to the signet, and nephew of J. S. Burdon-Sanderson. He was a grand-nephew of Scottish theologians J. A. and Robert Haldane. He studied at Edinburgh Academy and the universities of Edinburgh and Göttingen, where he learned philosophy under Lotze. He graduated with first-class honors in philosophy at Edinburgh and was a Gray scholar and Ferguson scholar in philosophy among the four Scottish universities (1876). He was called to the bar in 1879 and, as early as 1890, became a queen’s counsel. In 1885, he entered parliament as a Liberal member for Haddingtonshire, serving continuously until 1910. In 1905, he was appointed to Sir H. Campbell-Bannerman’s cabinet as secretary for war and was the author of a significant plan for reorganizing the British army, which combined the militia and volunteer forces into a single territorial force. Although he was always recognized as one of the most capable figures in the Liberal party and was prominent during the Boer War of 1899-1902 as a Liberal Imperialist, many found it surprising that Mr. Haldane was chosen to devise a new army organization based on business principles. In addition to being a chancery lawyer, he was primarily a philosopher noted for his expertise in Hegelian metaphysics. However, along with his understanding of German philosophy, he also embraced a German sense of thoroughness and system, and while his plan faced much criticism, it was acknowledged as the best possible solution for a voluntary army. Mr. Haldane’s main literary works included: Life of Adam Smith (1887); Education and Empire (1902); The Pathway to Reality (1903). He also co-translated with J. Kemp Schopenhauer’s Die Welt als Wille und Vorstellung (The World as Will and Idea, 3 vols., 1883-1886).


HALDANE, ROBERT (1764-1842), Scottish divine, elder brother of J. A. Haldane (q.v.), was born in London on the 28th of February 1764. After attending classes in the Dundee grammar school and in the high school and university of Edinburgh in 1780, he joined H.M.S. “Monarch,” of which his uncle Lord Duncan was at that time in command, and in the following year was transferred to the “Foudroyant,” on board of which, during the night engagement with the “Pegase,” he greatly distinguished himself. Haldane was afterwards present at the relief of Gibraltar, but at the peace of 1783 he finally left the navy, and soon afterwards settled on his estate of Airthrey, near Stirling. He put himself under the tuition of David Bogue of Gosport and carried away deep impressions from his academy. The earlier phases of the French Revolution excited his deepest sympathy, a sympathy which induced him to avow his strong disapproval of the war with France. As his over-sanguine visions of a new order of things to be ushered in by political change disappeared, he began to direct his thoughts to religious subjects. Resolving to devote himself and his means wholly to the advancement of Christianity, his first proposal for that end, made in 1796, was to organize a vast mission to Bengal, of which he was to provide the entire expense; with this view the greater part of his estate was sold, but the East India Company refused to sanction the scheme, which therefore had to be abandoned. In December 1797 he joined his brother and some others in the formation of the “Society for the Propagation of the Gospel at Home,” in building chapels or “tabernacles” for congregations, in supporting missionaries, and in maintaining institutions for the education of young men to carry on the work of evangelization. He is said to have spent more than £70,000 in the course of the following twelve years (1798-1810). He also initiated a plan for evangelizing Africa by bringing over native children to be trained as Christian teachers to their own countrymen. In 1816 he visited the continent, and first at Geneva and afterwards in Montauban (1817) he lectured and interviewed large numbers of theological students with remarkable effect; among them were Malan, Monod and Merle d’Aubigné. Returning to Scotland in 1819, he lived partly on his estate of Auchengray and partly in Edinburgh, and like his brother took an active part, chiefly through the press, in many of the religious controversies of the time. He died on the 12th of December 1842.

HALDANE, ROBERT (1764-1842), Scottish clergyman, older brother of J. A. Haldane (q.v.), was born in London on February 28, 1764. After attending classes at the Dundee grammar school and the high school and university of Edinburgh in 1780, he joined H.M.S. “Monarch,” which was then commanded by his uncle Lord Duncan. The following year, he was transferred to the “Foudroyant,” where he distinguished himself during the night engagement with the “Pegase.” Haldane was later present at the relief of Gibraltar, but after the peace of 1783, he left the navy and soon settled on his estate at Airthrey, near Stirling. He studied under David Bogue of Gosport and took away deep impressions from his academy. The early phases of the French Revolution deeply moved him, leading him to strongly disapprove of the war with France. As his overly optimistic visions of political change faded, he shifted his focus to religious matters. Committed to advancing Christianity, his first plan in 1796 was to organize a large mission to Bengal, which he intended to fully fund. He sold most of his estate for this purpose, but the East India Company refused to approve the scheme, forcing him to abandon it. In December 1797, he teamed up with his brother and others to form the “Society for the Propagation of the Gospel at Home,” building chapels or “tabernacles” for congregations, supporting missionaries, and maintaining institutions to educate young men for evangelization work. It is reported that he spent over £70,000 in the following twelve years (1798-1810). He also initiated a plan to evangelize Africa by bringing native children over to be trained as Christian teachers for their communities. In 1816, he visited the continent, where he lectured and met many theological students, notably Malan, Monod, and Merle d’Aubigné, with great success in Geneva and later in Montauban (1817). After returning to Scotland in 1819, he lived partly on his estate at Auchengray and partly in Edinburgh, actively engaging, primarily through the press, in many religious debates of the time. He passed away on December 12, 1842.

In 1816 he published a work on the Evidences and Authority of Divine Revelation, and in 1819 the substance of his theological prelections in a Commentaire sur l’Épître aux Romains. Among his later writings, besides numerous pamphlets on what was known as “the Apocrypha controversy,” are a treatise On the Inspiration of Scripture (1828), which has passed through many editions, and a later Exposition of the Epistle to the Romans (1835), which has been frequently reprinted, and has been translated into French and German.

In 1816, he published a work on the Evidences and Authority of Divine Revelation, and in 1819, he presented the core of his theological lectures in a Commentaire sur l’Épître aux Romains. Among his later writings, in addition to many pamphlets on what was called “the Apocrypha controversy,” are a treatise On the Inspiration of Scripture (1828), which has gone through many editions, and a later Exposition of the Epistle to the Romans (1835), which has been frequently reprinted and translated into French and German.

See Memoirs of R. and J. A. Haldane, by Alexander Haldane (1852).

See Memoirs of R. and J. A. Haldane, by Alexander Haldane (1852).


HALDEMAN, SAMUEL STEHMAN (1812-1880), American naturalist and philologist, was born on the 12th of August 1812 at Locust Grove, Pa. He was educated at Dickinson College, and in 1851 was appointed professor of the natural sciences in the university of Pennsylvania. In 1855 he went to Delaware College, where he filled the same position, but in 1869 he returned to the university of Pennsylvania as professor of 832 comparative philology and remained there till his death, which occurred at Chickies, Pa., on the 10th of September 1880. His writings include Freshwater Univalve Mollusca of the United States (1840); Zoological Contributions (1842-1843); Analytic Orthography (1860); Tours of a Chess Knight (1864); Pennsylvania Dutch, a Dialect of South German with an Infusion of English (1872); Outlines of Etymology (1877); and Word-Building (1881).

HALDEMAN, SAMUEL STEHMAN (1812-1880), American naturalist and linguist, was born on August 12, 1812, in Locust Grove, PA. He was educated at Dickinson College, and in 1851 he was appointed professor of natural sciences at the University of Pennsylvania. In 1855, he moved to Delaware College, where he held the same position, but in 1869 he returned to the University of Pennsylvania as a professor of 832 comparative philology and stayed there until his death on September 10, 1880, in Chickies, PA. His publications include Freshwater Univalve Mollusca of the United States (1840); Zoological Contributions (1842-1843); Analytic Orthography (1860); Tours of a Chess Knight (1864); Pennsylvania Dutch, a Dialect of South German with an Infusion of English (1872); Outlines of Etymology (1877); and Word-Building (1881).


HALDIMAND, SIR FREDERICK (1718-1791), British general and administrator, was born at Yverdun, Neuchâtel, Switzerland, on the 11th of August 1718, of Huguenot descent. After serving in the armies of Sardinia, Russia and Holland, he entered British service in 1754, and subsequently naturalized as an English citizen. During the Seven Years’ War he served in America, was wounded at Ticonderoga (1758) and was present at the taking of Montreal (1760). After filling with credit several administrative positions in Canada, Florida and New York, in 1778 he succeeded Sir Guy Carleton (afterwards Lord Dorchester) as governor-general of Canada. His measures against French sympathizers with the Americans have incurred extravagant strictures from French-Canadian historians, but he really showed moderation as well as energy. In 1785 he returned to London. He died at his birthplace on the 5th of June 1791.

HALDIMAND, SIR FREDERICK (1718-1791), British general and administrator, was born in Yverdun, Neuchâtel, Switzerland, on August 11, 1718, of Huguenot descent. After serving in the armies of Sardinia, Russia, and Holland, he joined the British army in 1754 and later became a naturalized British citizen. During the Seven Years’ War, he served in America, was wounded at Ticonderoga (1758), and participated in the capture of Montreal (1760). After successfully holding several administrative positions in Canada, Florida, and New York, he became the governor-general of Canada in 1778, succeeding Sir Guy Carleton (later Lord Dorchester). His actions against French sympathizers supporting the Americans drew harsh criticism from French-Canadian historians, but he actually displayed both moderation and decisiveness. In 1785, he returned to London. He passed away in his birthplace on June 5, 1791.

His life has been well written by Jean McIlwraith in the “Makers of Canada” series (Toronto, 1904). His Correspondence and Diary fill 262 volumes in the Canadian Archives, and are catalogued in the Annual Reports (1884-1889).

His life has been thoroughly documented by Jean McIlwraith in the “Makers of Canada” series (Toronto, 1904). His Correspondence and Diary make up 262 volumes in the Canadian Archives and are listed in the Annual Reports (1884-1889).


HALE, EDWARD EVERETT (1822-1909), American author, was born in Boston on the 3rd of April 1822, son of Nathan Hale (1784-1863), proprietor and editor of the Boston Daily Advertiser, nephew of Edward Everett, the orator and statesman, and grand-nephew of Nathan Hale, the martyr spy. He graduated from Harvard in 1839; was pastor of the church of the Unity, Worcester, Massachusetts, in 1846-1856, and of the South Congregational (Unitarian) church, Boston, in 1856-1899; and in 1903 became chaplain of the United States Senate. He died at Roxbury (Boston), Massachusetts, on the 10th of June 1909. His forceful personality, organizing genius, and liberal practical theology, together with his deep interest in the anti-slavery movement (especially in Kansas), popular education (especially Chautauqua work), and the working-man’s home, were active in raising the tone of American life for half a century. He was a constant and voluminous contributor to the newspapers and magazines. He was an assistant editor of the Boston Daily Advertiser, and edited the Christian Examiner, Old and New (which he assisted in founding in 1869; in 1875 it was merged in Scribner’s Magazine), Lend a Hand (founded by him in 1886 and merged in the Charities Review in 1897), and the Lend a Hand Record; and he was the author or editor of more than sixty books—fiction, travel, sermons, biography and history.

HALE, EDWARD EVERETT (1822-1909), American author, was born in Boston on April 3, 1822, the son of Nathan Hale (1784-1863), who was the owner and editor of the Boston Daily Advertiser, and the nephew of Edward Everett, the famous speaker and politician, as well as the great-nephew of Nathan Hale, the martyr spy. He graduated from Harvard in 1839 and served as the pastor of the Church of the Unity in Worcester, Massachusetts, from 1846 to 1856, and then of the South Congregational (Unitarian) Church in Boston from 1856 to 1899. In 1903, he became the chaplain of the United States Senate. He passed away in Roxbury (Boston), Massachusetts, on June 10, 1909. His dynamic personality, organizational talent, and progressive practical theology, along with his strong commitment to the anti-slavery movement (especially in Kansas), public education (particularly in Chautauqua), and the welfare of working-class families, played a significant role in uplifting American society for fifty years. He was a regular and prolific contributor to various newspapers and magazines. He served as an assistant editor for the Boston Daily Advertiser, and edited the Christian Examiner, Old and New (which he helped establish in 1869; it was merged into Scribner’s Magazine in 1875), Lend a Hand (which he founded in 1886 and merged into the Charities Review in 1897), and the Lend a Hand Record; in addition, he authored or edited over sixty books encompassing fiction, travel, sermons, biography, and history.

He first came into notice as a writer in 1859, when he contributed the short story “My Double and How He Undid Me” to the Atlantic Monthly. He soon published in the same periodical other stories, the best known of which was “The Man Without a Country” (1863), which did much to strengthen the Union cause in the North, and in which, as in some of his other non-romantic tales, he employed a minute realism which has led his readers to suppose the narrative a record of fact. The two stories mentioned, and such others as “The Rag-Man and the Rag-Woman” and “The Skeleton in the Closet,” gave him a prominent position among the short-story writers of America. The story Ten Times One is Ten (1870), with its hero Harry Wadsworth, and its motto, first enunciated in 1869 in his Lowell Institute lectures, “Look up and not down, look forward and not back, look out and not in, and lend a hand,” led to the formation among young people of “Lend-a-Hand Clubs,” “Look-up Legions” and “Harry Wadsworth Clubs.” Out of the romantic Waldensian story In His Name (1873) there similarly grew several other organizations for religious work, such as “King’s Daughters,” and “King’s Sons.”

He first gained attention as a writer in 1859 when he contributed the short story “My Double and How He Undid Me” to the Atlantic Monthly. He quickly published other stories in the same magazine, the best known of which was “The Man Without a Country” (1863). This story significantly boosted support for the Union cause in the North, and like some of his other non-romantic tales, it used detailed realism that led readers to believe the narrative was a true account. The two mentioned stories, along with others like “The Rag-Man and the Rag-Woman” and “The Skeleton in the Closet,” established his reputation among America's short-story writers. The story Ten Times One is Ten (1870), featuring the hero Harry Wadsworth and its motto—first stated in 1869 during his Lowell Institute lectures—“Look up and not down, look forward and not back, look out and not in, and lend a hand,” inspired the formation of “Lend-a-Hand Clubs,” “Look-up Legions,” and “Harry Wadsworth Clubs” among young people. Similarly, the romantic Waldensian story In His Name (1873) led to the creation of several other organizations for religious work, such as “King’s Daughters” and “King’s Sons.”

Among his other books are Kansas and Nebraska (1854); The Ingham Papers (1869); His Level Best, and Other Stories (1870); Sybaris and Other Homes (1871); Philip Nolan’s Friends (1876), his best-known novel, and a sequel to The Man Without a Country; The Kingdom of God (1880); Christmas at Narragansett (1885); East and West, a novel (1892); For Fifty Years (poems, 1893); Ralph Waldo Emerson (1899); We, the People (1903); Prayers Offered in the Senate of the United States (1904), and Tarry-at-Home Travels (1906). He edited Lingard’s History of England (1853), and contributed to Winsor’s Memorial History of Boston (1880-1881), and to his Narrative and Critical History of America (1886-1889). With his son, Edward Everett Hale, Jr., he published Franklin in France (2 vols., 1887-1888), based largely on original research. The most charming books of his later years were A New England Boyhood (1893), James Russell Lowell and His Friends (1899), and Memories of a Hundred Years (1902).

Among his other books are Kansas and Nebraska (1854); The Ingham Papers (1869); His Level Best, and Other Stories (1870); Sybaris and Other Homes (1871); Philip Nolan’s Friends (1876), his best-known novel, and a sequel to The Man Without a Country; The Kingdom of God (1880); Christmas at Narragansett (1885); East and West, a novel (1892); For Fifty Years (poems, 1893); Ralph Waldo Emerson (1899); We, the People (1903); Prayers Offered in the Senate of the United States (1904); and Tarry-at-Home Travels (1906). He edited Lingard’s History of England (1853) and contributed to Winsor’s Memorial History of Boston (1880-1881) and his Narrative and Critical History of America (1886-1889). With his son, Edward Everett Hale, Jr., he published Franklin in France (2 vols., 1887-1888), largely based on original research. The most delightful books of his later years were A New England Boyhood (1893), James Russell Lowell and His Friends (1899), and Memories of a Hundred Years (1902).

A uniform and revised edition of his principal writings, in ten volumes, appeared in 1899-1901.

A consistent and updated edition of his main writings, in ten volumes, was released between 1899 and 1901.


HALE, HORATIO (1817-1896), American ethnologist, was born in Newport, New Hampshire, on the 3rd of May 1817. He was the son of David Hale, a lawyer, and of Sarah Josepha Hale (1790-1879), a popular poet, who, besides editing Godey’s Lady’s Magazine for many years and publishing some ephemeral books, is supposed to have written the verses “Mary had a little lamb,” and to have been the first to suggest the national observance of Thanksgiving Day. The son graduated in 1837 at Harvard, and during 1838-1842 was philologist to the United States Exploring Expedition, which under Captain Charles Wilkes sailed around the world. Of the reports of that expedition Hale prepared the sixth volume, Ethnography and Philology (1846), which is said to have “laid the foundations of the ethnography of Polynesia.” He was admitted to the Chicago bar in 1855, and in the following year removed to Clinton, Ontario, Canada, where he practised his profession, and where on the 28th of December 1896 he died. He made many valuable contributions to the science of ethnology, attracting attention particularly by his theory of the origin of the diversities of human languages and dialects—a theory suggested by his study of “child-languages,” or the languages invented by little children. He also emphasized the importance of languages as tests of mental capacity and as “criteria for the classification of human groups.” He was, moreover, the first to discover that the Tutelos of Virginia belonged to the Siouan family, and to identify the Cherokee as a member of the Iroquoian family of speech. Besides writing numerous magazine articles, he read a number of valuable papers before learned societies. These include: Indian Migrations as Evidenced by Language (1882); The Origin of Languages and the Antiquity of Speaking Man (1886); The Development of Language (1888); and Language as a Test of Mental Capacity: Being an Attempt to Demonstrate the True Basis of Anthropology (1891). He also edited for Brinton’s “Library of Aboriginal Literature,” the Iroquois Book of Rites (1883).

HALE, HORATIO (1817-1896), was an American ethnologist born in Newport, New Hampshire, on May 3, 1817. He was the son of David Hale, a lawyer, and Sarah Josepha Hale (1790-1879), a well-known poet who edited Godey’s Lady’s Magazine for many years and published several short-lived books. She is believed to have written the lines “Mary had a little lamb” and was one of the first to propose a national Thanksgiving Day. Hale graduated from Harvard in 1837 and served as a philologist for the United States Exploring Expedition from 1838 to 1842, which sailed around the world under Captain Charles Wilkes. He contributed to the sixth volume of the expedition's reports, Ethnography and Philology (1846), which is credited with "laying the foundations of the ethnography of Polynesia." He was admitted to the bar in Chicago in 1855 and moved to Clinton, Ontario, Canada, the following year, where he practiced law until his death on December 28, 1896. Hale made significant contributions to ethnology, notably with his theory on the origins of the diversity of human languages and dialects—drawing insights from his study of “child-languages,” or languages created by young children. He also stressed the importance of languages as indicators of mental ability and as “criteria for classifying human groups.” Additionally, he was the first to identify the Tutelos of Virginia as part of the Siouan family and to classify Cherokee as part of the Iroquoian language family. In addition to his numerous articles in magazines, he presented several important papers to scholarly societies, including: Indian Migrations as Evidenced by Language (1882); The Origin of Languages and the Antiquity of Speaking Man (1886); The Development of Language (1888); and Language as a Test of Mental Capacity: Being an Attempt to Demonstrate the True Basis of Anthropology (1891). He also edited the Iroquois Book of Rites (1883) for Brinton’s “Library of Aboriginal Literature.”


HALE, JOHN PARKER (1806-1873), American statesman, was born at Rochester, New Hampshire, on the 31st of March 1806. He graduated at Bowdoin College in 1827, was admitted to the New Hampshire bar in 1830, was a member of the state House of Representatives in 1832, and from 1834 to 1841 was United States district attorney for New Hampshire. In 1843-1845 he was a Democratic member of the national House of Representatives, and, though his earnest co-operation with John Quincy Adams in securing the repeal of the “gag rule” directed against the presentation to Congress of anti-slavery petitions estranged him from the leaders of his party, he was renominated without opposition. In January 1845, however, he refused in a public statement to obey a resolution (28th of December 1844) of the state legislature directing him and his New Hampshire associates in Congress to support the cause of the annexation of Texas, a Democratic measure which Hale regarded as being distinctively in the interest of slavery. The Democratic State convention was at once reassembled, Hale was denounced, and his nomination withdrawn. In the election which followed Hale ran independently, and, although the Democratic candidates were elected in the other three congressional districts of the state, his vote was large enough to prevent any choice (for which a majority was necessary) in his own. Hale then set out in the face of apparently hopeless odds to win over his state to the anti-slavery cause. The remarkable canvass which he conducted 833 is known in the history of New Hampshire as the “Hale Storm of 1845.” The election resulted in the choice of a legislature controlled by the Whigs and the independent Democrats, he himself being chosen as a member of the state House of Representatives, of which in 1846 he was speaker. He is remembered, however, chiefly for his long service in the United States Senate, of which he was a member from 1847 to 1853 and again from 1855 to 1865. At first he was the only out-and-out anti-slavery senator,—he alone prevented the vote of thanks to General Taylor and General Scott for their Mexican war victories from being made unanimous in the Senate (February 1848)—but in 1849 Salmon P. Chase and William H. Seward, and in 1851 Charles Sumner joined him, and the anti-slavery cause became for the first time a force to be reckoned with in that body. In October 1847 he had been nominated for president by the Liberty party, but he withdrew in favour of Martin Van Buren, the Free Soil candidate, in 1848. In 1851 he was senior counsel for the rescuers of the slave Shadrach in Boston. In 1852 he was the Free Soil candidate for the presidency, but received only 156,149 votes. In 1850 he secured the abolition of flogging in the U.S. navy, and through his efforts in 1862 the spirit ration in the navy was abolished. He was one of the organizers of the Republican party, and during the Civil War was an eloquent supporter of the Union and chairman of the Senate naval committee. From 1865 to 1869 he was United States minister to Spain. He died at Dover, New Hampshire, on the 19th of December 1873. A statue of Hale, presented by his son-in-law William Eaton Chandler (b. 1835), U.S. senator from New Hampshire in 1887-1901, was erected in front of the Capitol in Concord, New Hampshire, in 1892.

HALE, JOHN PARKER (1806-1873), American statesman, was born in Rochester, New Hampshire, on March 31, 1806. He graduated from Bowdoin College in 1827, was admitted to the New Hampshire bar in 1830, and became a member of the state House of Representatives in 1832. From 1834 to 1841, he served as the United States district attorney for New Hampshire. In 1843-1845, he was a Democratic member of the national House of Representatives. Although his strong collaboration with John Quincy Adams to repeal the “gag rule” against submitting anti-slavery petitions to Congress put him at odds with his party leaders, he was renominated without opposition. In January 1845, however, he publicly refused to follow a resolution (December 28, 1844) from the state legislature directing him and his New Hampshire colleagues in Congress to support the annexation of Texas, a Democratic proposal that Hale believed was primarily in favor of slavery. The Democratic State convention quickly reconvened, Hale was condemned, and his nomination was revoked. In the subsequent election, Hale ran as an independent, and although the Democratic candidates won in the other three congressional districts of the state, his vote was significant enough to prevent any winner (who needed a majority) in his own district. Hale then embarked on an apparently impossible mission to rally his state to the anti-slavery movement. His remarkable campaign is known in New Hampshire history as the “Hale Storm of 1845.” The election resulted in a legislature controlled by the Whigs and the independent Democrats, and he was elected to the state House of Representatives, serving as speaker in 1846. He is mostly remembered for his long service in the United States Senate, where he served from 1847 to 1853 and again from 1855 to 1865. Initially, he was the only outright anti-slavery senator—he was the sole senator who prevented the unanimous vote of thanks to General Taylor and General Scott for their victories in the Mexican War (February 1848)—but in 1849, Salmon P. Chase and William H. Seward, followed by Charles Sumner in 1851, joined him, marking the first time the anti-slavery cause had significant influence in the Senate. In October 1847, he was nominated for president by the Liberty party but withdrew in favor of Martin Van Buren, the Free Soil candidate, in 1848. In 1851, he served as the senior counsel for the rescuers of the slave Shadrach in Boston. In 1852, he was the Free Soil candidate for president but only received 156,149 votes. In 1850, he achieved the abolition of flogging in the U.S. Navy, and in 1862, the spirit ration in the Navy was eliminated thanks to his efforts. He was one of the organizers of the Republican Party and was an eloquent supporter of the Union during the Civil War, serving as chairman of the Senate naval committee. From 1865 to 1869, he was the United States minister to Spain. He died in Dover, New Hampshire, on December 19, 1873. A statue of Hale, presented by his son-in-law William Eaton Chandler (b. 1835), a U.S. senator from New Hampshire from 1887-1901, was erected in front of the Capitol in Concord, New Hampshire, in 1892.


HALE, SIR MATTHEW (1609-1676), lord chief justice of England, was born on the 1st of November 1609 at Alderley in Gloucestershire, where his father, a retired barrister, had a small estate. His paternal grandfather was a rich clothier of Wotton-under-Edge; on his mother’s side he was connected with the noble family of the Poyntzes of Acton. Left an orphan when five years old, he was placed by his guardian under the care of the Puritan vicar of Wotton-under-Edge, with whom he remained till he attained his sixteenth year, when he entered Magdalen Hall, Oxford. At Oxford, Hale studied for several terms with a view to holy orders, but suddenly there came a change. The diligent student, at first attracted by a company of strolling players, threw aside his studies, and plunged carelessly into gay society. He soon decided to change his profession; and resolved to trail a pike as a soldier under the prince of Orange in the Low Countries. Before going abroad, however, Hale found himself obliged to proceed to London in order to give instructions for his defence in a legal action which threatened to deprive him of his patrimony. His leading counsel was the celebrated Serjeant Glanville (1586-1661), who, perceiving in the acuteness and sagacity of his youthful client a peculiar fitness for the legal profession, succeeded, with much difficulty, in inducing him to renounce his military for a legal career, and on the 8th of November 1629 Hale became a member of the honourable society of Lincoln’s Inn.

HALE, SIR MATTHEW (1609-1676), lord chief justice of England, was born on November 1, 1609, in Alderley, Gloucestershire, where his father, a retired barrister, owned a small estate. His grandfather on his father's side was a wealthy cloth merchant from Wotton-under-Edge; on his mother's side, he was connected to the noble Poyntz family of Acton. Orphaned at the age of five, he was placed under the care of the Puritan vicar of Wotton-under-Edge by his guardian, staying with him until he turned sixteen when he entered Magdalen Hall, Oxford. While at Oxford, Hale studied for several terms intending to join the clergy, but then everything changed. The diligent student, initially captivated by a troupe of traveling actors, abandoned his studies and immersed himself in a lively social scene. He soon decided to switch careers and planned to become a soldier under the prince of Orange in the Low Countries. However, before heading abroad, Hale had to travel to London to arrange for his defense in a legal case that jeopardized his inheritance. His main lawyer was the famous Serjeant Glanville (1586-1661), who, recognizing the intelligence and sharpness of his young client, managed, with great effort, to convince him to give up military aspirations for a legal career, and on November 8, 1629, Hale became a member of the honorable society of Lincoln’s Inn.

He immediately resumed his habits of intense application. The rules which he laid down for himself, and which are still extant in his handwriting, prescribe sixteen hours a day of close application, and prove, not only the great mental power, but also the extraordinary physical strength he must have possessed, and for which indeed, during his residence at the university, he had been remarkable. During the period allotted to his preliminary studies, he read over and over again all the yearbooks, reports, and law treatises in print, and at the Tower of London and other antiquarian repositories examined and carefully studied the records from the foundation of the English monarchy down to his own time. But Hale did not confine himself to law. He dedicated no small portion of his time to the study of pure mathematics, to investigations in physics and chemistry, and even to anatomy and architecture; and there can be no doubt that this varied learning enhanced considerably the value of many of his judicial decisions.

He quickly went back to his intense work habits. The rules he set for himself, which are still available in his handwriting, demand sixteen hours a day of focused effort, showcasing not just his incredible mental strength but also the remarkable physical stamina he must have had, which he was known for during his time at the university. During the time he spent on his preliminary studies, he repeatedly read all the yearbooks, reports, and law treatises available, and at the Tower of London and other historical archives, he examined and studied records from the beginning of the English monarchy up to his own era. But Hale didn't limit himself to just law. He also devoted a significant amount of time to studying pure mathematics, exploring physics and chemistry, and even anatomy and architecture; and it’s clear that this diverse knowledge greatly improved the quality of many of his judicial decisions.

Hale was called to the bar in 1637, and almost at once found himself in full practice. Though neither a fluent speaker nor bold pleader, in a very few years he was at the head of his profession. He entered public life at perhaps the most critical period of English history. Two parties were contending in the state, and their obstinacy could not fail to produce a most direful collision. But amidst the confusion Hale steered a middle course, rising in reputation, and an object of solicitation from both parties. Taking Pomponius Atticus as his political model, he was persuaded that a man, a lawyer and a judge could best serve his country and benefit his countrymen by holding aloof from partisanship and its violent prejudices, which are so apt to distort and confuse the judgment. But he is best vindicated from the charges of selfishness and cowardice by the thoughts and meditations contained in his private diaries and papers, where the purity and honour of his motives are clearly seen. It has been said, but without certainty, that Hale was engaged as counsel for the earl of Strafford; he certainly acted for Archbishop Laud, Lord Maguire, Christopher Love, the duke of Hamilton and others. It is also said that he was ready to plead on the side of Charles I. had that monarch submitted to the court. The parliament having gained the ascendancy, Hale signed the Solemn League and Covenant, and was a member of the famous assembly of divines at Westminster in 1644; but although he would undoubtedly have preferred a Presbyterian form of church government, he had no serious objection to the system of modified Episcopacy, proposed by Usher. Consistently with his desire to remain neutral, Hale took the engagement to the Commonwealth as he had done to the king, and in 1653, already serjeant, he became a judge in the court of common pleas. Two years afterwards he sat in Cromwell’s parliament as one of the members for Gloucestershire. After the death of the protector, however, he declined to act as a judge under Richard Cromwell, although he represented Oxford in Richard’s parliament. At the Restoration in 1660 Hale was very graciously received by Charles II., and in the same year was appointed chief baron of the exchequer, and accepted, with extreme reluctance, the honour of knighthood. After holding the office of chief baron for eleven years he was raised to the higher dignity of lord chief justice, which he held till February 1676, when his failing health compelled him to resign. He retired to his native Alderley, where he died on the 25th of December of the same year. He was twice married and survived all his ten children save two.

Hale was called to the bar in 1637 and quickly found himself in full practice. Although he wasn’t a fluent speaker or a bold advocate, within a few years he was leading his profession. He entered public life during one of the most critical periods in English history. Two factions were at odds in the state, and their stubbornness was bound to lead to a devastating clash. But amid the chaos, Hale navigated a middle path, gaining a solid reputation and becoming sought after by both sides. Inspired by Pomponius Atticus as his political model, he believed that a man, lawyer, and judge could best serve and benefit his country by staying away from partisanship and its harsh biases, which often cloud judgment. His private diaries and writings offer a clear defense against charges of selfishness and cowardice, showcasing the purity and honor of his motives. There are claims, though unconfirmed, that Hale served as counsel for the Earl of Strafford; he certainly represented Archbishop Laud, Lord Maguire, Christopher Love, the Duke of Hamilton, and others. It is also claimed that he was prepared to plead on behalf of Charles I if that monarch had accepted the court's authority. After Parliament gained power, Hale signed the Solemn League and Covenant and became a member of the notable assembly of divines at Westminster in 1644; while he would have likely preferred a Presbyterian form of church governance, he had no serious objections to the modified Episcopacy proposed by Usher. Sticking to his desire to remain neutral, Hale pledged loyalty to the Commonwealth just as he had to the king, and in 1653, already a serjeant, he became a judge in the Court of Common Pleas. Two years later, he served in Cromwell’s parliament as one of the representatives for Gloucestershire. However, after the protector’s death, he refused to serve as a judge under Richard Cromwell, although he did represent Oxford in Richard’s parliament. When the monarchy was restored in 1660, Hale was warmly received by Charles II, and later that year, he was appointed chief baron of the exchequer and reluctantly accepted the honor of knighthood. After serving eleven years as chief baron, he was promoted to the position of lord chief justice, a role he held until February 1676 when declining health forced him to resign. He retired to his hometown of Alderley, where he passed away on December 25 of the same year. He was married twice and outlived all ten of his children except for two.

As a judge Sir Matthew Hale discharged his duties with resolute independence and careful diligence. His sincere piety made him the intimate friend of Isaac Barrow, Archbishop Tillotson, Bishop Wilkins and Bishop Stillingfleet, as well as of the Nonconformist leader, Richard Baxter. He is chargeable, however, with the condemnation and execution of two poor women tried before him for witchcraft in 1664, a kind of judicial murder then falling under disuse. He is also reproached with having hastened the execution of a soldier for whom he had reason to believe a pardon was preparing.

As a judge, Sir Matthew Hale carried out his responsibilities with strong independence and careful attention. His genuine faith led him to become close friends with Isaac Barrow, Archbishop Tillotson, Bishop Wilkins, and Bishop Stillingfleet, as well as with the Nonconformist leader, Richard Baxter. However, he is criticized for the condemnation and execution of two poor women tried for witchcraft in 1664, a practice that was becoming outdated. He is also blamed for rushing the execution of a soldier for whom he believed a pardon was on the way.

Of Hale’s legal works the only two of importance are his Historia placitorum coronae, or History of the Pleas of the Crown (1736); and the History of the Common Law of England, with an Analysis of the Law, &c. (1713). Among his numerous religious writings the Contemplations, Moral and Divine, occupy the first place. Others are The Primitive Origination of Man (1677); Of the Nature of True Religion, &c. (1684); A Brief Abstract of the Christian Religion (1688). One of his most popular works is the collection of Letters of Advice to his Children and Grandchildren. He also wrote an Essay touching the Gravitation or Nongravitation of Fluid Bodies (1673); Difficiles Nugae, or Observations touching the Torricellian Experiment, &c. (1675); and a translation of the Life of Pomponius Atticus, by Cornelius Nepos (1677). His efforts in poetry were inauspicious. He left his valuable collection of MSS. and records to the library of Lincoln’s Inn. His life has been written by G. Burnet (1682); by J. B. Williams (1835); by H. Roscoe, in his Lives of Eminent Lawyers, in 1838; by Lord Campbell, in his Lives of the Chief Justices, in 1849; and by E. Foss in his Lives of the Judges (1848-1870).

Of Hale’s legal works, the only two that matter are his Historia placitorum coronae, or History of the Pleas of the Crown (1736) and the History of the Common Law of England, with an Analysis of the Law, & c. (1713). Among his many religious writings, the Contemplations, Moral and Divine take the top spot. Others include The Primitive Origination of Man (1677), Of the Nature of True Religion, & c. (1684), and A Brief Abstract of the Christian Religion (1688). One of his most popular works is the collection of Letters of Advice to his Children and Grandchildren. He also wrote an Essay on the Gravitation or Nongravitation of Fluid Bodies (1673), Difficiles Nugae, or Observations on the Torricellian Experiment, & c. (1675), and a translation of the Life of Pomponius Atticus by Cornelius Nepos (1677). His attempts at poetry were not successful. He left his valuable collection of manuscripts and records to the library of Lincoln’s Inn. His life has been documented by G. Burnet (1682), J. B. Williams (1835), H. Roscoe in his Lives of Eminent Lawyers (1838), Lord Campbell in his Lives of the Chief Justices (1849), and by E. Foss in his Lives of the Judges (1848-1870).


HALE, NATHAN (1756-1776). American hero of the War of Independence, was born at Coventry, Conn., and educated 834 at Yale, then becoming a school teacher. He joined a Connecticut regiment after the breaking out of the war, and served in the siege of Boston, being commissioned a captain at the opening of 1776. When Heath’s brigade departed for New York he went with them, and the tradition is that he was one of a small and daring band who captured an English provision sloop from under the very guns of a man-of-war. But on the 21st of September, having volunteered to enter the British lines to obtain information concerning the enemy, he was captured in his disguise of a Dutch school-teacher and on the 22nd was hanged. The penalty was in accordance with military law, but young Hale’s act was a brave one, and he has always been glorified as a martyr. Tradition attributes to him the saying that he only regretted that he had but one life to lose for his country; and it is said that his request for a Bible and the services of a minister was refused by his captors. There is a fine statue of Hale by Macmonnies in New York.

HALE, NATHAN (1756-1776). American hero of the War of Independence, was born in Coventry, Connecticut, and educated at Yale before becoming a school teacher. He joined a Connecticut regiment after the war broke out and served during the siege of Boston, receiving a captain's commission at the start of 1776. When Heath's brigade went to New York, he went with them, and it's said that he was part of a small, brave group that captured an English supply ship right under the guns of a warship. However, on September 21, after volunteering to infiltrate the British lines for information about the enemy, he was captured while disguised as a Dutch school teacher and was hanged on the 22nd. The punishment was in line with military law, but young Hale's act was courageous, and he has always been honored as a martyr. Tradition has it that he famously said he only regretted that he had one life to give for his country; it's also said that his request for a Bible and a minister was denied by his captors. There is a remarkable statue of Hale by Macmonnies in New York.

See H. P. Johnston, Nathan Hale (1901).

See H. P. Johnston, Nathan Hale (1901).


HALE, WILLIAM GARDNER (1849-  ), American classical scholar, was born on the 9th of February 1849 in Savannah, Georgia. He graduated at Harvard University in 1870, and took a post-graduate course in philosophy there in 1874-1876; studied classical philology at Leipzig and Göttingen in 1876-1877; was tutor in Latin at Harvard from 1877 to 1880, and professor of Latin in Cornell University from 1880 to 1892, when he became professor of Latin and head of the Latin department of the University of Chicago. From 1894 to 1899 he was chairman and in 1895-1896 first director of the American School of Classical Studies at Rome. He is best known as an original teacher on questions of syntax. In The Cum-Constructions: Their History and Functions, which appeared in Cornell University Studies in Classical Philology (1888-1889; and in German version by Neizert in 1891), he attacked Hoffmann’s distinction between absolute and relative temporal clauses as published in Lateinische Zeitpartikeln (1874); Hoffmann replied in 1891, and the best summary of the controversy is in Wetzel’s Der Streit zwischen Hoffmann und Hale (1892). Hale wrote also The Sequence of Tenses in Latin (1887-1888), The Anticipatory Subjunctive in Greek and Latin (1894), and a Latin Grammar (1903), to which the parts on sounds, inflection and word-formation were contributed by Carl Darling Buck.

HALE, WILLIAM GARDNER (1849-  ), American classical scholar, was born on February 9, 1849, in Savannah, Georgia. He graduated from Harvard University in 1870 and pursued a post-graduate course in philosophy there from 1874 to 1876; he studied classical philology at Leipzig and Göttingen in 1876-1877; he served as a tutor in Latin at Harvard from 1877 to 1880, and he was a professor of Latin at Cornell University from 1880 to 1892, when he became a professor of Latin and head of the Latin department at the University of Chicago. From 1894 to 1899, he was chairman and, in 1895-1896, the first director of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome. He is best known as an innovative teacher on syntax issues. In The Cum-Constructions: Their History and Functions, published in Cornell University Studies in Classical Philology (1888-1889; and in a German version by Neizert in 1891), he critiqued Hoffmann’s distinction between absolute and relative temporal clauses, which was detailed in Lateinische Zeitpartikeln (1874); Hoffmann responded in 1891, and the best summary of their debate is found in Wetzel’s Der Streit zwischen Hoffmann und Hale (1892). Hale also authored The Sequence of Tenses in Latin (1887-1888), The Anticipatory Subjunctive in Greek and Latin (1894), and a Latin Grammar (1903), with contributions on sounds, inflection, and word formation from Carl Darling Buck.


HALEBID, a village in Mysore state, southern India; pop. (1901), 1524. The name means “old capital,” being the site of Dorasamudra, the capital of the Hoysala dynasty founded early in the 11th century. In 1310 and again in 1326 it was taken and plundered by the first Mahommedan invader of southern India. Two temples, still standing, though never completed and greatly ruined, are regarded as the finest examples of the elaborately carved Chalukyan style of architecture.

HALEBID, is a village in Mysore state, southern India; population (1901), 1,524. The name means “old capital,” as it was the site of Dorasamudra, the capital of the Hoysala dynasty founded in the early 11th century. In 1310 and again in 1326, it was captured and looted by the first Muslim invader of southern India. Two temples, which still stand although they were never finished and are in ruins, are considered the finest examples of the intricately carved Chalukyan style of architecture.


HALES, or Hayles, JOHN (d. 1571), English writer and politician, was a son of Thomas Hales of Hales Place, Halden, Kent. He wrote his Highway to Nobility about 1543, and was the founder of a free school at Coventry for which he wrote Introductiones ad grammaticam. In political life Hales, who was member of parliament for Preston, was specially concerned with opposing the enclosure of land, being the most active of the commissioners appointed in 1548 to redress this evil; but he failed to carry several remedial measures through parliament. When the protector, the duke of Somerset, was deprived of his authority in 1550, Hales left England and lived for some time at Strassburg and Frankfort, returning to his own country on the accession of Elizabeth. However he soon lost the royal favour by writing a pamphlet, A Declaration of the Succession of the Crowne Imperiall of Inglande, which declared that the recent marriage between Lady Catherine Grey and Edward Seymour, earl of Hertford, was legitimate, and asserted that, failing direct heirs to Elizabeth, the English crown should come to Lady Catherine as the descendant of Mary, daughter of Henry VII. The author was imprisoned, but was quickly released, and died on the 28th of December 1571. The Discourse of the Common Weal, described as “one of the most informing documents of the age,” and written about 1549, has been attributed to Hales. This has been edited by E. Lamond (Cambridge, 1893).

HALES, or Hayles, JOHN (d. 1571), was an English writer and politician, born to Thomas Hales of Hales Place, Halden, Kent. He wrote his Highway to Nobility around 1543 and established a free school in Coventry, for which he authored Introductiones ad grammaticam. In his political career, Hales served as a Member of Parliament for Preston and was particularly focused on fighting against land enclosure, being the most active commissioner appointed in 1548 to address this issue; however, he struggled to pass several corrective measures in Parliament. When the protector, the Duke of Somerset, lost his power in 1550, Hales left England and spent some time in Strassburg and Frankfurt before returning to England when Elizabeth came to the throne. However, he soon lost royal favor after publishing a pamphlet titled A Declaration of the Succession of the Crowne Imperiall of Inglande, which claimed the recent marriage between Lady Catherine Grey and Edward Seymour, Earl of Hertford, was legitimate and argued that if Elizabeth had no direct heirs, the English crown should pass to Lady Catherine as a descendant of Mary, daughter of Henry VII. Hales was imprisoned but was released shortly afterward and died on December 28, 1571. The Discourse of the Common Weal, regarded as "one of the most informative documents of the age," was written around 1549 and is attributed to Hales. This work has been edited by E. Lamond (Cambridge, 1893).

Hales is often confused with another John Hales, who was clerk of the hanaper under Henry VIII. and his three immediate successors.

Hales is often mixed up with another John Hales, who was the clerk of the hanaper under Henry VIII and his three direct successors.


HALES, JOHN (1584-1656), English scholar, frequently referred to as “the ever memorable,” was born at Bath on the 19th of April 1584, and was educated at Corpus Christi College, Oxford. He was elected a fellow of Merton in 1605, and in 1612 he was appointed public lecturer on Greek. In 1613 he was made a fellow of Eton. Five years later he went to Holland, as chaplain to the English ambassador, Sir Dudley Carleton, who despatched him to Dort to report upon the proceedings of the synod then sitting. In 1619 he returned to Eton and spent his time among his books and in the company of literary men, among whom he was highly reputed for his common sense, his erudition and his genial charity. Andrew Marvell called him “one of the clearest heads and best-prepared breasts in Christendom.” His eirenical tract entitled Schism and Schismaticks (1636) fell into the hands of Archbishop Laud, and Hales, hearing that he had disapproved of it, is said to have written to the prelate a vindication of his position. This led to a meeting, and in 1639 Hales was made one of Laud’s chaplains and also a canon of Windsor. In 1642 he was deprived of his canonry by the parliamentary committee, and two years later was obliged to hide in Eton with the college documents and keys. In 1649 he refused to take the “Engagement” and was ejected from his fellowship. He then retired to Buckinghamshire, where he found a home with Mrs Salter, the sister of the bishop of Salisbury (Brian Duppa), and acted as tutor to her son. The issue of the order against harbouring malignants led him to return to Eton. Here, having sold his valuable library at great sacrifice, he lived in poverty until his death on the 19th of May 1656.

HALES, JOHN (1584-1656), an English scholar often called "the ever memorable," was born in Bath on April 19, 1584, and studied at Corpus Christi College, Oxford. He became a fellow of Merton in 1605, and in 1612, he was named the public lecturer on Greek. In 1613, he became a fellow of Eton. Five years later, he went to Holland as chaplain to the English ambassador, Sir Dudley Carleton, who sent him to Dort to report on the proceedings of the synod taking place there. In 1619, he returned to Eton, spending his time among books and with literary figures, where he was highly regarded for his common sense, knowledge, and kind nature. Andrew Marvell called him "one of the clearest heads and best-prepared minds in Christendom." His peace-oriented pamphlet titled Schism and Schismaticks (1636) reached Archbishop Laud, and upon hearing that Laud disapproved of it, Hales reportedly wrote a defense of his stance to the archbishop. This led to a meeting, and in 1639, Hales became one of Laud's chaplains and a canon of Windsor. In 1642, the parliamentary committee removed him from his canonry, and two years later, he was forced to hide in Eton with the college documents and keys. In 1649, he refused to take the "Engagement" and was expelled from his fellowship. He then retreated to Buckinghamshire, where he found a home with Mrs. Salter, the sister of the bishop of Salisbury (Brian Duppa), and served as tutor to her son. A directive against sheltering malignants drove him back to Eton. There, after selling his valuable library at great personal cost, he lived in poverty until his death on May 19, 1656.

His collected works (3 vols.) were edited by Lord Hailes, and published in 1765.

His collected works (3 vols.) were edited by Lord Hailes and published in 1765.


HALES, STEPHEN (1677-1761), English physiologist, chemist and inventor, was born at Bekesbourne in Kent on the 7th or 17th of September 1677, the fifth (or sixth) son of Thomas Hales, whose father, Sir Robert Hales, was created a baronet by Charles II. in 1670. In June 1696 he was entered as a pensioner of Benet (now Corpus Christi) College, Cambridge, with the view of taking holy orders, and in February 1703 was admitted to a fellowship. He received the degree of master of arts in 1703 and of bachelor of divinity in 1711. One of his most intimate friends was William Stukeley (1687-1765) with whom he studied anatomy, chemistry, &c. In 1708-1709 Hales was presented to the perpetual curacy of Teddington in Middlesex, where he remained all his life, notwithstanding that he was subsequently appointed rector of Porlock in Somerset, and later of Faringdon in Hampshire. In 1717 he was elected fellow of the Royal Society, which awarded him the Copley medal in 1739. In 1732 he was named one of a committee for establishing a colony in Georgia, and the next year he received the degree of doctor of divinity from Oxford. He was appointed almoner to the princess-dowager of Wales in 1750. On the death of Sir Hans Sloane in 1753, Hales was chosen foreign associate of the French Academy of Sciences. He died at Teddington on the 4th of January 1761.

HALES, STEPHEN (1677-1761), was an English physiologist, chemist, and inventor. He was born in Bekesbourne, Kent, on either September 7th or 17th, 1677, as the fifth (or sixth) son of Thomas Hales. His grandfather, Sir Robert Hales, was made a baronet by Charles II in 1670. In June 1696, he became a pensioner at Benet (now Corpus Christi) College, Cambridge, intending to pursue holy orders, and in February 1703, he was admitted to a fellowship. He earned his master of arts degree in 1703 and his bachelor of divinity in 1711. One of his closest friends was William Stukeley (1687-1765), with whom he studied anatomy and chemistry, among other subjects. In 1708-1709, Hales was appointed to the perpetual curacy of Teddington in Middlesex, where he lived for the rest of his life, even after being appointed rector of Porlock in Somerset and later of Faringdon in Hampshire. In 1717, he was elected a fellow of the Royal Society, which awarded him the Copley Medal in 1739. In 1732, he joined a committee to establish a colony in Georgia, and the following year, he received an honorary doctor of divinity degree from Oxford. In 1750, he was appointed almoner to the princess-dowager of Wales. After the death of Sir Hans Sloane in 1753, Hales was selected as a foreign associate of the French Academy of Sciences. He passed away in Teddington on January 4, 1761.

Hales is best known for his Statical Essays. The first volume, Vegetable Staticks (1727), contains an account of numerous experiments in plant-physiology—the loss of water in plants by evaporation, the rate of growth of shoots and leaves, variations in root-force at different times of the day, &c. Considering it very probable that plants draw “through their leaves some part of their nourishment from the air,” he undertook experiments to show in “how great a proportion air is wrought into the composition of animal, vegetable and mineral substances”; though this “analysis of the air” did not lead him to any very clear ideas about the composition of the atmosphere, in the course of his inquiries he collected gases over water in vessels separate from those in which they were generated, and thus used what was to all intents and purposes a “pneumatic trough.” The second volume (1733) on Haemostaticks, containing experiments 835 on the “force of the blood” in various animals, its rate of flow, the capacity of the different vessels, &c., entitles him to be regarded as one of the originators of experimental physiology. But he did not confine his attention to abstract inquiries. The quest of a solvent for calculus in the bladder and kidneys was pursued by him as by others at the period, and he devised a form of forceps which, on the testimony of John Ranby (1703-1773), sergeant-surgeon to George II., extracted stones with “great ease and readiness.” His observations of the evil effect of vitiated air caused him to devise a “ventilator” (a modified organ-bellows) by which fresh air could be conveyed into gaols, hospitals, ships’-holds, &c.; this apparatus was successful in reducing the mortality in the Savoy prison, and it was introduced into France by the aid of H. L. Duhamel du Monceau. Among other things Hales invented a “sea-gauge” for sounding, and processes for distilling fresh from sea water, for preserving corn from weevils by fumigation with brimstone, and for salting animals whole by passing brine into their arteries. His Admonition to the Drinkers of Gin, Brandy, &c., published anonymously in 1734, has been several times reprinted.

Hales is best known for his Statical Essays. The first volume, Vegetable Staticks (1727), includes a series of experiments in plant physiology—such as the loss of water in plants due to evaporation, the growth rate of shoots and leaves, and variations in root force at different times of the day, etc. Believing that plants likely draw "some part of their nourishment from the air through their leaves," he conducted experiments to determine "how much air is involved in the composition of animal, vegetable, and mineral substances." Although this "analysis of the air" didn’t provide him with any clear insights about the atmosphere’s composition, during his research, he collected gases over water in vessels separate from where they were produced, effectively using what we would now call a "pneumatic trough." The second volume (1733) on Haemostaticks, which includes experiments on the "force of the blood" in various animals, its flow rate, and the capacity of different vessels, establishes him as one of the pioneers of experimental physiology. However, he didn't limit himself to abstract studies. He, like others of his time, sought a solution for calculus in the bladder and kidneys and created a type of forceps that, according to John Ranby (1703-1773), the sergeant-surgeon to George II, removed stones with "great ease and readiness." His observations about the harmful effects of poor air quality led him to invent a "ventilator" (a modified organ bellows) to supply fresh air to prisons, hospitals, ship holds, etc.; this device effectively reduced mortality in the Savoy prison and was introduced in France with the help of H. L. Duhamel du Monceau. Among other inventions, Hales created a "sea gauge" for sounding, methods for distilling fresh water from seawater, techniques for preserving grain from weevils using sulfur fumigation, and a process for salting animals whole by injecting brine into their arteries. His Admonition to the Drinkers of Gin, Brandy, &c., published anonymously in 1734, has been reprinted several times.


HALESOWEN, a market town in the Oldbury parliamentary division of Worcestershire, England, on a branch line of the Great Western and Midland railways, 6½ m. W.S.W. of Birmingham. Pop. (1901), 4057. It lies in a pleasant country among the eastern foothills of the Lickey Hills. There are extensive iron and steel manufactures. The church of SS Mary and John the Baptist has rude Norman portions; and the poet William Shenstone, buried in 1763 in the churchyard, has a memorial in the church. His delight in landscape gardening is exemplified in the neighbouring estate of the Leasowes, which was his property. There is a grammar school founded in 1652, and in the neighbourhood is the Methodist foundation of Bourne College (1883). Close to the town, on the river Stour, which rises in the vicinity, are slight ruins of a Premonstratensian abbey of Early English date. Within the parish and 2 m. N.W. of Halesowen is Cradley, with iron and steel works, fire-clay works and a large nail and chain industry.

HALESOWEN, is a market town in the Oldbury parliamentary division of Worcestershire, England, located on a branch line of the Great Western and Midland railways, 6½ miles W.S.W. of Birmingham. Population (1901), 4,057. It is situated in a lovely countryside among the eastern foothills of the Lickey Hills. There are extensive iron and steel manufacturing industries. The church of SS Mary and John the Baptist features some rough Norman architecture, and the poet William Shenstone, who was buried in 1763 in the churchyard, has a memorial inside the church. His passion for landscape gardening is showcased in the nearby estate of the Leasowes, which belonged to him. There’s a grammar school that was founded in 1652, and in the area, there’s the Methodist institution of Bourne College (1883). Near the town, along the river Stour, which starts in the area, are the remains of a Premonstratensian abbey dating back to the Early English period. Within the parish and 2 miles N.W. of Halesowen is Cradley, home to iron and steel works, fire-clay works, and a large nail and chain industry.


HALEVI, JUDAH BEN SAMUEL (c. 1085-c. 1140), the greatest Hebrew poet of the middle ages, was born in Toledo c. 1085, and died in Palestine after 1140. In his youth he wrote Hebrew love poems of exquisite fancy, and several of his Wedding Odes are included in the liturgy of the Synagogue. The mystical connexion between marital affection and the love of God had, in the view of older exegesis, already expressed itself in the scriptural Song of Songs and Judah Halevi used this book as his model. In this aspect of his work he found inspiration also in Arabic predecessors. The second period of his literary career was devoted to more serious pursuits. He wrote a philosophical dialogue in five books, called the Cuzari, which has been translated into English by Hirschfeld. This book bases itself on the historical fact that the Crimean Kingdom of the Khazars adopted Judaism, and the Hebrew poet-philosopher describes what he conceives to be the steps by which the Khazar king satisfied himself as to the claims of Judaism. Like many other medieval Jewish authors, Judah Halevi was a physician. His real fame depends on his liturgical hymns, which are the finest written in Hebrew since the Psalter, and are extensively used in the Septardic rite. A striking feature of his thought was his devotion to Jerusalem. To the love of the Holy City he devoted his noblest genius, and he wrote some memorable Odes to Zion, which have been commemorated by Heine, and doubly appreciated recently under the impulse of Zionism (q.v.). He started for Jerusalem, was in Damascus in 1140, and soon afterwards died. Legend has it that he was slain by an Arab horseman just as he arrived within sight of what Heine called his “Woebegone poor darling, Desolation’s very image,—Jerusalem.”

HALEVI, JUDAH BEN SAMUEL (c. 1085-c. 1140), the greatest Hebrew poet of the Middle Ages, was born in Toledo around 1085 and died in Palestine after 1140. In his youth, he wrote beautiful Hebrew love poems, and several of his Wedding Odes are included in the synagogue liturgy. The mystical connection between marital love and the love of God was already expressed in the scriptural Song of Songs, which Judah Halevi used as his model. In this aspect of his work, he also found inspiration in Arabic predecessors. The second period of his literary career focused on more serious subjects. He wrote a philosophical dialogue in five books called the Cuzari, which has been translated into English by Hirschfeld. This book is based on the historical fact that the Crimean Kingdom of the Khazars adopted Judaism, and the Hebrew poet-philosopher describes the steps by which the Khazar king came to accept Judaism. Like many other medieval Jewish authors, Judah Halevi was a physician. His true fame rests on his liturgical hymns, which are the finest written in Hebrew since the Psalms and are widely used in the Sephardic rite. A notable aspect of his thought was his devotion to Jerusalem. He dedicated his greatest genius to the love of the Holy City, writing memorable Odes to Zion that have been celebrated by Heine and are especially appreciated today in the context of Zionism (q.v.). He set out for Jerusalem, was in Damascus in 1140, and soon afterward died. Legend has it that he was killed by an Arab horseman just as he arrived within sight of what Heine called his “Woebegone poor darling, Desolation’s very image,—Jerusalem.”

Excellent English renderings of some of Judah Halevi’s poems may be read in Mrs H. Lucas’s The Jewish Year, and Mrs R. N. Solomon’s Songs of Exile.

Excellent English versions of some of Judah Halevi’s poems can be found in Mrs. H. Lucas’s The Jewish Year and Mrs. R. N. Solomon’s Songs of Exile.

(I. A.)

HALÉVY, JACQUES FRANÇOIS FROMENTAL ÉLIE (1799-1862), French composer, was born on the 27th of May 1799, at Paris, of a Jewish family. He studied at the Paris Conservatoire under Berton and Cherubini, and in 1819 gained the grand prix de Rome with his cantata Herminie. In accordance with the conditions of his scholarship he started for Rome, where he devoted himself to the study of Italian music, and wrote an opera and various minor works. In 1827 his opera L’Artisan was performed at the Théâtre Feydeau in Paris, apparently without much success. Other works of minor importance, and now forgotten, followed, amongst which Manon Lescaut, a ballet, produced in 1830, deserves mention. In 1834 the Opéra-Comique produced Ludovic, the score of which had been begun by Hérold and had been completed by Halévy. In 1835 Halévy composed the tragic opera La Juive and the comic opera L’Éclair, and on these works his fame is mainly founded. The famous air of Eléazar and the anathema of the cardinal in La Juive soon became popular all over France. L’Éclair is a curiosity of musical literature. It is written for two tenors and two soprani, without a chorus, and displays the composer’s mastery over the most refined effects of instrumentation and vocalization in a favourable light. After these two works he wrote numerous operas of various genres, amongst which only La Reine de Chypre, a spectacular piece analyzed by Wagner in one of his Paris letters (1841), and La Tempesta, in three acts, written for Her Majesty’s theatre, London (1850), need be mentioned. In addition to his productive work Halévy also rendered valuable services as a teacher. He was professor at the Conservatoire from 1827 till his death—some of the most successful amongst the younger composers in France, such as Gounod, Victor Massé and Georges Bizet, the author of Carmen, being amongst his pupils. He was maestro al cembalo at the Théâtre Italien from 1827 to 1829; then director of singing at the Opera House in Paris until 1845, and in 1836 he succeeded Reicha at the Institut de France. Halévy also tried his hand at literature. In 1857 he became permanent secretary to the Académie des Beaux Arts, and there exists an agreeable volume of Souvenirs et portraits from his pen. He died at Nice, on the 17th of March 1862.

HALÉVY, JACQUES FRANÇOIS FROMENTAL ÉLIE (1799-1862), French composer, was born on May 27, 1799, in Paris, to a Jewish family. He studied at the Paris Conservatoire under Berton and Cherubini, and in 1819 won the grand prix de Rome with his cantata Herminie. Following the conditions of his scholarship, he traveled to Rome, where he focused on studying Italian music and wrote an opera along with various minor works. In 1827, his opera L’Artisan premiered at the Théâtre Feydeau in Paris, apparently without much success. Other minor works, now forgotten, followed, but Manon Lescaut, a ballet produced in 1830, is worth mentioning. In 1834, the Opéra-Comique produced Ludovic, which had originally been started by Hérold and completed by Halévy. In 1835, Halévy composed the tragic opera La Juive and the comic opera L’Éclair, which are the main basis of his fame. The famous aria of Eléazar and the cardinal’s anathema in La Juive quickly became popular throughout France. L’Éclair is a unique work in musical literature; it is composed for two tenors and two sopranos, without a chorus, showcasing the composer’s skillful use of refined instrumentation and vocal techniques. After these two works, he wrote numerous operas in various styles, among which only La Reine de Chypre, a spectacular piece analyzed by Wagner in one of his Paris letters (1841), and La Tempesta, a three-act opera written for Her Majesty’s Theatre in London (1850), need be mentioned. In addition to his prolific output, Halévy also made significant contributions as a teacher. He was a professor at the Conservatoire from 1827 until his death—among his pupils were some of France's most successful younger composers, such as Gounod, Victor Massé, and Georges Bizet, the composer of Carmen. He served as maestro al cembalo at the Théâtre Italien from 1827 to 1829; then he was the director of singing at the Opera House in Paris until 1845, and in 1836, he replaced Reicha at the Institut de France. Halévy also dabbled in literature. In 1857, he became the permanent secretary to the Académie des Beaux Arts, and there exists a pleasing volume of Souvenirs et portraits authored by him. He died in Nice on March 17, 1862.


HALÉVY, LUDOVIC (1834-1908), French author, was born in Paris on the 1st of January 1834. His father, Léon Halévy (1802-1883), was a clever and versatile writer, who tried almost every branch of literature—prose and verse, vaudeville, drama, history—without, however, achieving decisive success in any. His uncle, J. F. Fromental E. Halévy (q.v.), was for many years associated with the opéra; hence the double and early connexion of Ludovic Halévy with the Parisian stage. At the age of six he might have been seen playing in that Foyer de la danse with which he was to make his readers so familiar, and, when a boy of twelve, he would often, of a Sunday night, on his way back to the College Louis le Grand, look in at the Odéon, where he had free admittance, and see the first act of the new play. At eighteen he joined the ranks of the French administration and occupied various posts, the last being that of secrétaire-rédacteur to the Corps Législatif. In that capacity he enjoyed the special favour and friendship of the famous duke of Morny, then president of that assembly. In 1865 Ludovic Halévy’s increasing popularity as an author enabled him to retire from the public service. Ten years earlier he had become acquainted with the musician Offenbach, who was about to start a small theatre of his own in the Champs Élysées, and he wrote a sort of prologue, Entrez, messieurs, mesdames, for the opening night. Other little productions followed, Ba-ta-clan being the most noticeable among them. They were produced under the pseudonym of Jules Servières. The name of Ludovic Halévy appeared for the first time on the bills on the 1st of January 1856. Soon afterwards the unprecedented run of Orphée aux enfers, a musical parody, written in collaboration with Hector Crémieux, made his name famous. In the spring of 1860 he was commissioned to write a play for the manager of the Variétés in conjunction with another vaudevillist, Lambert Thiboust. The latter having abruptly retired from the collaboration, Halévy was at a loss how to carry out the contract, when on the steps of the theatre he met Henri Meilhac (1831-1897), then comparatively a stranger to him. He proposed to Meilhac the task rejected by Lambert Thiboust, and the proposal was immediately accepted. Thus 836 began a connexion which was to last over twenty years, and which proved most fruitful both for the reputation of the two authors and the prosperity of the minor Paris theatres. Their joint works may be divided into three classes: the opérettes, the farces, the comedies. The opérettes afforded excellent opportunities to a gifted musician for the display of his peculiar humour. They were broad and lively libels against the society of the time, but savoured strongly of the vices and follies they were supposed to satirize. Amongst the most celebrated works of the joint authors were La Belle Hélène (1864), Barbe Bleue (1866), La Grande Duchesse de Gerolstein (1867), and La Périchole (1868). After 1870 the vogue of Parody rapidly declined. The decadence became still more apparent when Offenbach was no longer at hand to assist the two authors with his quaint musical irony, and when they had to deal with interpreters almost destitute of singing powers. They wrote farces of the old type, consisting of complicated intrigues, with which they cleverly interwove the representation of contemporary whims and social oddities. They generally failed when they attempted comedies of a more serious character and tried to introduce a higher sort of emotion. A solitary exception must be made in the case of Frou-frou (1869), which, owing perhaps to the admirable talent of Aimée Desclée, remains their unique succès de larmes.

HALÉVY, LUDOVIC (1834-1908), a French author, was born in Paris on January 1, 1834. His father, Léon Halévy (1802-1883), was a smart and versatile writer who explored nearly every genre—prose, poetry, vaudeville, drama, and history—though he never achieved significant success in any. His uncle, J. F. Fromental E. Halévy (q.v.), was involved with the opera for many years, establishing Ludovic's early connection to the Parisian stage. At six, he could be seen performing in the Foyer de la danse, which he would later make well-known to his readers. By the age of twelve, he often stopped after school on Sunday nights at the Odéon, where he had free entry, to watch the first act of the latest play. At eighteen, he entered the French administration and held various jobs, the last being secretary to the Corps Législatif. In that role, he enjoyed the particular favor and friendship of the famous Duke of Morny, who was then the president of that assembly. In 1865, Ludovic Halévy's rising popularity as an author allowed him to leave public service. Ten years earlier, he had met the composer Offenbach, who was about to open a small theater on the Champs Élysées, for which he wrote a sort of prologue, Entrez, messieurs, mesdames, for opening night. More small productions followed, with Ba-ta-clan being the most notable. These were produced under the pseudonym Jules Servières. The name Ludovic Halévy first appeared on posters on January 1, 1856. Soon after, the unprecedented success of Orphée aux enfers, a musical parody written in collaboration with Hector Crémieux, made his name famous. In the spring of 1860, he was tasked with writing a play for the manager of the Variétés alongside another vaudevillist, Lambert Thiboust. When Thiboust abruptly backed out, Halévy was unsure how to fulfill the contract until he met Henri Meilhac (1831-1897) on the steps of the theater, who was then relatively unknown to him. He suggested the task that Thiboust had rejected, and Meilhac quickly accepted. Thus began a partnership that would last over twenty years, proving highly successful for both authors' reputations and the minor Paris theaters' prosperity. Their joint works can be divided into three categories: opérettes, farces, and comedies. The opérettes provided a great platform for talented musicians to showcase their unique sense of humor. They served as lively and broad critiques of the society of the time but were also heavily influenced by the flaws and absurdities they aimed to satirize. Among their most celebrated works are La Belle Hélène (1864), Barbe Bleue (1866), La Grande Duchesse de Gerolstein (1867), and La Périchole (1868). After 1870, parody's popularity quickly faded. This decline became more evident when Offenbach was no longer there to lend his unique musical irony to the two authors, and they had to work with performers lacking singing talent. They created farces of the traditional type, filled with intricate plots, skillfully woven with depictions of contemporary fads and social quirks. Their attempts at more serious comedies, trying to evoke deeper emotions, generally fell short, with one notable exception being Frou-frou (1869), which, perhaps thanks to the exceptional talent of Aimée Desclée, remains their sole succès de larmes.

Meilhac and Halévy will be found at their best in light sketches of Parisian life, Les Sonnettes, Le Roi Candaule, Madame attend Monsieur, Toto chez Tata. In that intimate association between the two men who had met so opportunely on the perron des variétés, it was often asked who was the leading partner. The question was not answered until the connexion was finally severed and they stood before the public, each to answer for his own work. It was then apparent that they had many gifts in common. Both had wit, humour, observation of character. Meilhac had a ready imagination, a rich and whimsical fancy; Halévy had taste, refinement and pathos of a certain kind. Not less clever than his brilliant comrade, he was more human. Of this he gave evidence in two delightful books, Monsieur et Madame Cardinal (1873) and Les Petites Cardinal, in which the lowest orders of the Parisian middle class are faithfully described. The pompous, pedantic, venomous Monsieur Cardinal will long survive as the true image of sententious and self-glorifying immorality. M. Halévy’s peculiar qualities are even more visible in the simple and striking scenes of the Invasion, published soon after the conclusion of the Franco-German War, in Criquette (1883) and L’Abbé Constantin (1882), two novels, the latter of which went through innumerable editions. Zola had presented to the public an almost exclusive combination of bad men and women; in L’Abbé Constantin all are kind and good, and the change was eagerly welcomed by the public. Some enthusiasts still maintain that the Abbé will rank permanently in literature by the side of the equally chimerical Vicar of Wakefield. At any rate, it opened for M. Ludovic Halévy the doors of the French Academy, to which he was elected in 1884.

Meilhac and Halévy shine in their light sketches of Parisian life, Les Sonnettes, Le Roi Candaule, Madame attend Monsieur, Toto chez Tata. In their close partnership, which began coincidentally on the perron des variétés, people often wondered who was the main contributor. This question remained unanswered until their collaboration ended and they faced the public individually, each responsible for his own work. It then became clear that they shared many talents. Both had wit, humor, and keen observation of character. Meilhac had a vivid imagination and a quirky sense of creativity, while Halévy brought taste, refinement, and a certain kind of emotional depth. Though just as clever as his brilliant partner, he was more relatable. This was evident in two delightful books, Monsieur et Madame Cardinal (1873) and Les Petites Cardinal, which portray the lower tiers of the Parisian middle class with authenticity. The pompous, pedantic, and spiteful Monsieur Cardinal will long endure as a true depiction of self-righteous and self-serving immorality. M. Halévy's distinctive qualities are even more apparent in the simple yet impactful scenes of the Invasion, published shortly after the Franco-German War, in Criquette (1883) and L’Abbé Constantin (1882), the latter going through countless editions. Zola had mainly introduced the public to unlikable characters; in L’Abbé Constantin, everyone is kind and good, and this shift was eagerly received by audiences. Some fans still assert that the Abbé will hold a lasting place in literature alongside the equally fanciful Vicar of Wakefield. At any rate, it opened the doors of the French Academy for M. Ludovic Halévy, who was elected in 1884.

Halévy remained an assiduous frequenter of the Academy, the Conservatoire, the Comédie Française, and the Society of Dramatic Authors, but, when he died in Paris on the 8th of May 1908, he had produced practically nothing new for many years. His last romance, Kari Kari, appeared in 1892.

Halévy was a regular visitor to the Academy, the Conservatoire, the Comédie Française, and the Society of Dramatic Authors, but when he passed away in Paris on May 8, 1908, he hadn't created much new work for many years. His last romance, Kari Kari, was published in 1892.

The Théâtre of MM. Meilhac and Halévy was published in 8 vols. (1900-1902).

The Théâtre by Meilhac and Halévy was published in 8 volumes from 1900 to 1902.


HALFPENNY, WILLIAM, English 18th-century architectural designer—he described himself as “architect and carpenter.” He was also known as Michael Hoare; but whether his real name was William Halfpenny or Michael Hoare is uncertain. His books, of which he published a score, deal almost entirely with domestic architecture, and especially with country houses in those Gothic and Chinese fashions which were so greatly in vogue in the middle of the 18th century. His most important publications, from the point of view of their effect upon taste, were New Designs for Chinese Temples, in four parts (1750-1752); Rural Architecture in the Gothic Taste (1752); Chinese and Gothic Architecture Properly Ornamented (1752); and Rural Architecture in the Chinese Taste (1750-1752). These four books were produced in collaboration with John Halfpenny, who is said to have been his son. New Designs for Chinese Temples is a volume of some significance in the history of furniture, since, having been published some years before the books of Thomas Chippendale and Sir Thomas Chambers, it disproves the statement so often made that those designers introduced the Chinese taste into this country. Halfpenny states distinctly that “the Chinese manner” had been “already introduced here with success.” The work of the Halfpennys was by no means all contemptible. It is sometimes distinctly graceful, but is marked by little originality.

HALFPENNY, WILLIAM, English 18th-century architectural designer—he referred to himself as “architect and carpenter.” He was also known as Michael Hoare; however, it's unclear whether his real name was William Halfpenny or Michael Hoare. He published about twenty books, which mostly focus on residential architecture, especially country houses in the Gothic and Chinese styles that were very popular in the mid-18th century. His most significant publications, in terms of their influence on taste, were New Designs for Chinese Temples, in four parts (1750-1752); Rural Architecture in the Gothic Taste (1752); Chinese and Gothic Architecture Properly Ornamented (1752); and Rural Architecture in the Chinese Taste (1750-1752). These four books were created in collaboration with John Halfpenny, who is thought to be his son. New Designs for Chinese Temples holds some importance in the history of furniture, as it was published several years before the works of Thomas Chippendale and Sir Thomas Chambers, challenging the common belief that those designers brought Chinese style to this country. Halfpenny clearly states that “the Chinese manner” had been “already introduced here with success.” The work of the Halfpennys was by no means all worthless. It sometimes has a distinctly graceful quality, though it lacks much originality.


HALF-TIMBER WORK, an architectural term given to those buildings in which the framework is of timber with vertical studs and cross pieces filled in between with brickwork, rubble masonry or plaster work on oak laths; in the first two, brick nogging or nogging are the terms occasionally employed (see Carpentry). Sometimes the timber structure is raised on a stone or brick foundation, as at Ledbury town hall in Herefordshire, where the lower storey is open on all sides; but more often it is raised on a ground storey, either in brick or stone, and in order to give additional size to the upper rooms projects forward, being carried on the floor joists. Sometimes the masonry or brickwork rises through two or three storeys and the half-brick work is confined to the gables. There seems to be some difference of opinion as to whether the term applies to the mixture of solid walling with the timber structure or to the alternation of wood posts and the filling in, but the latter definition is that which is generally understood. The half-timber throughout England is of the most picturesque description, and the earliest examples date from towards the close of the 15th century. In the earliest example, Newgate House, York (c. 1450), the timber framing is raised over the ground floor. The finest specimen is perhaps that of Moreton Old Hall, Cheshire (1570), where there is only a stone foundation about 12 in. high, and the same applies to Bramall Hall, near Manchester, portions of which are very early. Among other examples are Speke Hall, Lancashire; Park Hall, Shropshire (1553-1558); Hall i’ th’ Wood, Lancashire (1591); St Peter’s Hospital, Bristol (1607); the Ludlow Feather’s Inn (1610); many of the streets at Chester and Shrewsbury; the Sparrowe’s Home, Ipswich; and Staple Inn, Holborn, from which in recent years the plaster coat which was put on many years ago has been removed, displaying the ancient woodwork. A similar fate has overtaken a very large number of half-timber buildings to keep out the driving winds; thus in Lewes nearly all the half-timbered houses have had slates hung on the timbers, others tiles, the greater number having been covered with plaster or stucco. Although there are probably many more half-timber houses in England than on the continent of Europe, in the north of France and in Germany are examples in many of the principal towns, and in some cases in better preservation than in England. They are also enriched with carving of a purer and better type, especially in France; thus at Chartres, Angers, Rouen, Caen, Lisieux, Bayeux, St Lô and Beauvais, are many extremely fine examples of late Flamboyant and early Transitional examples. Again on the borders of the Rhine in all the small towns most of the houses are in half-timber work, the best examples being at Bacharach, Rhense and Boppart. Far more elaborate examples, however, are found in the vicinity of the Harz Mountains; the supply of timber from the forests there being very abundant; thus at Goslar, Wernigerode and Quedlingburg there is an endless variety, as also farther on at Gelnhausen and Hameln, the finest series of all being at Hildesheim. In Bavaria at Nuremberg, Rothenburg and Dinkelsbühl, half-timber houses dating from the 16th century are still well preserved; and throughout Switzerland the houses constructed in timber and plaster are the most characteristic features of the country.

HALF-TIMBERED WORK, is an architectural term for buildings that have a timber framework with vertical studs and cross pieces filled in with brickwork, rubble masonry, or plaster on oak laths. In the first two cases, brick nogging or nogging are terms that are sometimes used (see Carpentry). Sometimes, the timber structure is built on a stone or brick foundation, like at Ledbury town hall in Herefordshire, where the lower level is open on all sides. More often, it sits on a ground floor made of brick or stone, projecting forward to make the upper rooms larger, supported by the floor joists. Occasionally, the masonry or brickwork extends through two or three stories, with the half-brick work mainly on the gables. There seems to be some disagreement over whether the term refers to the mix of solid walls with the timber structure or to the alternating wood posts and fill, but the latter is generally accepted. The half-timber style found all over England is quite picturesque, with the earliest examples dating back to around the end of the 15th century. One of the oldest examples, Newgate House in York (c. 1450), has timber framing above the ground floor. A notable example is Moreton Old Hall in Cheshire (1570), which only has a stone foundation about 12 inches high, similar to parts of Bramall Hall near Manchester, which also features very early construction. Other examples include Speke Hall in Lancashire; Park Hall in Shropshire (1553-1558); Hall i’ th’ Wood in Lancashire (1591); St Peter’s Hospital in Bristol (1607); the Ludlow Feather’s Inn (1610); many streets in Chester and Shrewsbury; the Sparrowe’s Home in Ipswich; and Staple Inn in Holborn, which recently had an old plaster coat removed, revealing its ancient woodwork. Many half-timber buildings have undergone similar changes to withstand fierce winds; in Lewes, nearly all the half-timbered houses have been covered with slates, tiles, or have been plastered or stuccoed. Although there are probably more half-timber houses in England than in continental Europe, there are examples in northern France and Germany in many major towns, some of which are better preserved than those in England, often featuring more refined carvings, especially in France. Towns like Chartres, Angers, Rouen, Caen, Lisieux, Bayeux, St Lô, and Beauvais showcase many impressive late Flamboyant and early Transitional examples. Moreover, in small towns near the Rhine, most houses are of half-timber construction, with the best examples in Bacharach, Rhense, and Boppart. More elaborate structures can be found around the Harz Mountains, where timber is abundant; towns like Goslar, Wernigerode, and Quedlinburg feature a wide variety, as do Gelnhausen and Hameln, with the most impressive series located in Hildesheim. In Bavaria, towns like Nuremberg, Rothenburg, and Dinkelsbühl have well-preserved half-timber houses from the 16th century, and throughout Switzerland, timber and plaster houses are a defining characteristic of the landscape.


HALFWAY COVENANT, an expedient adopted in the Congregational churches of New England between 1657 and 1662. Under its terms baptized persons of moral life and orthodox belief might receive the privilege of baptism for their children and other church benefits, without the full enrolment in membership which admitted them to the communion of the Lord’s Supper.

HALFWAY COVENANT, a practical solution used in the Congregational churches of New England between 1657 and 1662. According to this agreement, baptized individuals who lived morally upright lives and held orthodox beliefs could have their children baptized and access other church benefits, without having to fully enroll as members, which was necessary to participate in the Lord’s Supper.

See Congregationalism: American.

837

837


HALHED, NATHANIEL BRASSEY (1751-1830), English Orientalist and philologist, was born at Westminster on the 25th of May 1751. He was educated at Harrow, where he began his intimacy with Richard Brinsley Sheridan (see Sheridan Family) continued after he entered Christ Church, Oxford, where, also, he made the acquaintance of Sir William Jones, the famous Orientalist, who induced him to study Arabic. Accepting a writership in the service of the East India Company, Halhed went out to India, and here, at the suggestion of Warren Hastings, by whose orders it had been compiled, translated the Gentoo code from a Persian version of the original Sanskrit. This translation was published in 1776 under the title A Code of Gentoo Laws. In 1778 he published a Bengali grammar, to print which he set up, at Hugli, the first press in India. It is claimed for him that he was the first writer to call attention to the philological connexion of Sanskrit with Persian, Arabic, Greek and Latin. In 1785 he returned to England, and from 1790-1795 was M.P. for Lymington, Hants. For some time he was a disciple of Richard Brothers (q.v.), and his unwise speech in parliament in defence of Brothers made it impossible for him to remain in the House, from which he resigned in 1795. He subsequently obtained a home appointment under the East India Company. He died in London on the 18th of February 1830.

HALHED, NATHANIEL BRASSEY (1751-1830), an English Orientalist and philologist, was born in Westminster on May 25, 1751. He was educated at Harrow, where he formed a close friendship with Richard Brinsley Sheridan (see Sheridan Family), which continued after he entered Christ Church, Oxford. There, he also met Sir William Jones, the well-known Orientalist, who encouraged him to study Arabic. After accepting a writership for the East India Company, Halhed traveled to India. At the suggestion of Warren Hastings, who commissioned it, he translated the Gentoo Code from a Persian version of the original Sanskrit. This translation was published in 1776 under the title A Code of Gentoo Laws. In 1778, he published a Bengali grammar and established the first printing press in India in Hugli for this purpose. He is credited with being the first to highlight the philological connection between Sanskrit and Persian, Arabic, Greek, and Latin. In 1785, he returned to England and served as M.P. for Lymington, Hants from 1790 to 1795. For a time, he was a follower of Richard Brothers (q.v.), and his imprudent remarks in parliament defending Brothers made it impossible for him to continue in the House, leading to his resignation in 1795. He later secured a position at home with the East India Company. He died in London on February 18, 1830.

His collection of Oriental manuscripts was purchased by the British Museum, and there is an unfinished translation by him of the Mahābhārata in the library of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

His collection of Oriental manuscripts was bought by the British Museum, and there is an incomplete translation by him of the Mahābhārata in the library of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.


HALIBURTON, THOMAS CHANDLER (1796-1865), British writer, long a judge of Nova Scotia, was born at Windsor, Nova Scotia, in 1796, and received his education there, at King’s College. He was called to the bar in 1820, and became a member of the House of Assembly. He distinguished himself as a barrister, and in 1828 was promoted to the bench as a chief-justice of the common pleas. In 1829 he published An Historical and Statistical Account of Nova Scotia. But it is as a brilliant humourist and satirist that he is remembered, in connexion with his fictitious character “Sam Slick.” In 1835 he contributed anonymously to a local paper a series of letters professedly depicting the peculiarities of the genuine Yankee. These sketches, which abounded in clever picturings of national and individual character, drawn with great satirical humour, were collected in 1837, and published under the title of The Clockmaker, or Sayings and Doings of Samuel Slick of Slickville. A second series followed in 1838, and a third in 1840. The Attaché, or Sam Slick in England (1843-1844), was the result of a visit there in 1841. His other works include: The Old Judge, or Life in a Colony (1843); The Letter Bag of the Great Western (1839); Rule and Misrule of the English in America (1851); Traits of American Humour (1852); and Nature and Human Nature (1855).

HALIBURTON, THOMAS CHANDLER (1796-1865), British writer and long-time judge of Nova Scotia, was born in Windsor, Nova Scotia, in 1796 and received his education there at King’s College. He was called to the bar in 1820 and became a member of the House of Assembly. He made a name for himself as a barrister and in 1828 was promoted to chief justice of the common pleas. In 1829, he published An Historical and Statistical Account of Nova Scotia. However, he is best remembered as a brilliant humorist and satirist, particularly for his fictional character “Sam Slick.” In 1835, he contributed anonymously to a local newspaper a series of letters that depicted the quirks of the true Yankee. These sketches, filled with clever portrayals of both national and individual character, drawn with sharp satirical humor, were collected in 1837 and published as The Clockmaker, or Sayings and Doings of Samuel Slick of Slickville. A second series was released in 1838, followed by a third in 1840. The Attaché, or Sam Slick in England (1843-1844) was based on a visit there in 1841. His other works include: The Old Judge, or Life in a Colony (1843); The Letter Bag of the Great Western (1839); Rule and Misrule of the English in America (1851); Traits of American Humour (1852); and Nature and Human Nature (1855).

Meanwhile he continued to secure popular esteem in his judicial capacity. In 1840 he was promoted to be a judge of the supreme court; but within two years he resigned his seat on the bench, removed to England, and in 1859 entered parliament as the representative of Launceston, in the Conservative interest. But the tenure of his seat for Launceston was brought to an end by the dissolution of the parliament in 1865, and he did not again offer himself to the constituency. He died on the 27th of August of the same year, at Gordon House, Isleworth, Middlesex.

Meanwhile, he continued to earn public respect in his role as a judge. In 1840, he was promoted to judge of the supreme court; however, within two years, he resigned from the bench, moved to England, and in 1859, he entered parliament as the representative of Launceston, supporting the Conservative party. His time as Launceston's representative ended with the dissolution of parliament in 1865, and he did not run for the constituency again. He died on August 27th of the same year, at Gordon House, Isleworth, Middlesex.

A memoir of Haliburton, by F. Blake Crofton, appeared in 1889.

A memoir of Haliburton by F. Blake Crofton was published in 1889.


HALIBUT, or Holibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris), the largest of all flat-fishes, growing to a length of 10 ft. or more, specimens of 5 ft. in length and of 100 ℔ in weight being frequently exposed for sale in the markets. Indeed, specimens under 2 ft. in length are very rarely caught, and singularly enough, no instance is known of a very young specimen having been obtained. Small ones are commonly called “chicken halibut.” The halibut is much more frequent in the higher latitudes of the temperate zone than in its southern portion; it is a circumpolar species, being found on the northern coasts of America, Europe and Asia, extending in the Pacific southwards to California. On the British coasts it keeps at some distance from the shore, and is generally caught in from 50 to 150 fathoms. Its flesh is generally considered coarse, but it is white and firm, and when properly served is excellent for the table. The name is derived from “holy” (M.E. haly), and recalls its use for food on holy days.

HALIBUT, or Halibut (Hippoglossus vulgaris), is the largest flatfish, growing to over 10 ft. long, with 5 ft. specimens and 100 lb. fish frequently available in markets. In fact, fish under 2 ft. are very rarely caught, and interestingly, there are no known cases of very young halibut being captured. Smaller ones are commonly called “chicken halibut.” Halibut is more commonly found in the higher latitudes of the temperate zone than in the southern parts; it is a circumpolar species, located along the northern coasts of America, Europe, and Asia, extending south in the Pacific to California. Along the British coasts, it stays at a distance from the shoreline and is usually caught in depths of 50 to 150 fathoms. Its flesh is generally thought to be coarse, but it is white and firm, and when prepared properly, it’s excellent for eating. The name comes from “holy” (M.E. haly), reflecting its use for food on holy days.


HALICARNASSUS (mod. Budrum), an ancient Greek city on the S.W. coast of Caria, Asia Minor, on a picturesque and advantageous site on the Ceramic Gulf or Gulf of Cos. It originally occupied only the small island of Zephyria close to the shore, now occupied by the great castle of St Peter, built by the Knights of Rhodes in 1404; but in course of time this island was united to the mainland and the city extended so as to incorporate Salmacis, an older town of the Leleges and Carians.

HALICARNASSUS (now known as Budrum) was an ancient Greek city located on the southwest coast of Caria in Asia Minor, set on a beautiful and advantageous location by the Ceramic Gulf, also called the Gulf of Cos. Initially, it was situated only on the small island of Zephyria, which is now home to the large castle of St. Peter, built by the Knights of Rhodes in 1404. Over time, this island was connected to the mainland, and the city expanded to include Salmacis, an older town of the Leleges and Carians.

About the foundation of Halicarnassus various traditions were current; but they agree in the main point as to its being a Dorian colony, and the figures on its coins, such as the head of Medusa, Athena and Poseidon, or the trident, support the statement that the mother cities were Troezen and Argos. The inhabitants appear to have accepted as their legendary founder Anthes, mentioned by Strabo, and were proud of the title of Antheadae. At an early period Halicarnassus was a member of the Doric Hexapolis, which included Cos, Cnidus, Lindus, Camirus and Ialysus; but one of the citizens, Agasicles, having taken home the prize tripod which he had won in the Triopian games instead of dedicating it according to custom to the Triopian Apollo, the city was cut off from the league. In the early 5th century Halicarnassus was under the sway of Artemisia, who made herself famous at the battle of Salamis. Of Pisindalis, her son and successor, little is known; but Lygdamis, who next attained to power, is notorious for having put to death the poet Panyasis and caused Herodotus, the greatest of Halicarnassians, to leave his native city (c. 457 B.C.). In the 5th century B.C. Halicarnassus and other Dorian cities of Asia were to some extent absorbed by the Delian League, but the peace of Antalcidas in 387 made them subservient to Persia; and it was under Mausolus, a Persian satrap who assumed independent authority, that Halicarnassus attained its highest prosperity. Struck by the natural strength and beauty of its position, Mausolus removed to Halicarnassus from Mylasa, increasing the population of the city by the inhabitants of six towns of the Leleges. He was succeeded by Artemisia, whose military ability was shown in the stratagem by which she captured the Rhodian vessels attacking her city, and whose magnificence and taste have been perpetuated by the “Mausoleum,” the monument she erected to her husband’s memory (see Mausolus). One of her successors, Pixodarus, tried to ally himself with the rising power of Macedon, and is said to have gained the momentary consent of the young Alexander to wed his daughter. The marriage, however, was forbidden by Philip. Alexander, as soon as he had reduced Ionia, summoned Halicarnassus, where Memnon, the paramount satrap of Asia Minor, had taken refuge with the Persian fleet, to surrender; and on its refusal took the city after hard fighting and devastated it, but not being able to reduce the citadel, was forced to leave it blockaded. He handed the government of the city back to the family of Mausolus, as represented by Ada, sister of the latter. Not long afterwards we find the citizens receiving the present of a gymnasium from Ptolemy, and building in his honour a stoa or portico; but the city never recovered altogether from the disasters of the siege, and Cicero describes it as almost deserted. The site is now occupied in part by the town of Budrum; but the ancient walls can still be traced round nearly all their circuit, and the position of several of the temples, the theatre, and other public buildings can be fixed with certainty.

About the foundation of Halicarnassus, various stories have circulated, but they mainly agree that it was a Dorian colony. The images on its coins, like the heads of Medusa, Athena, and Poseidon, or the trident, support the idea that the founding cities were Troezen and Argos. The locals seem to have claimed Anthes, mentioned by Strabo, as their legendary founder and took pride in the name Antheadae. Early on, Halicarnassus was part of the Doric Hexapolis, which included Cos, Cnidus, Lindus, Camirus, and Ialysus. However, one citizen, Agasicles, brought home the prize tripod he won at the Triopian games instead of dedicating it to Triopian Apollo as custom dictated, causing the city to be cut off from the league. In the early 5th century, Halicarnassus was ruled by Artemisia, who became famous at the Battle of Salamis. Little is known about her son and successor, Pisindalis, but Lygdamis, who next came to power, is infamous for executing the poet Panyasis and causing Herodotus, the most notable Halicarnassian, to leave his hometown (c. 457 B.C.). In the 5th century B.C., Halicarnassus and other Dorian cities in Asia were partly absorbed by the Delian League, but the Peace of Antalcidas in 387 made them subject to Persia. It was under Mausolus, a Persian satrap who took on independent authority, that Halicarnassus reached its peak prosperity. Impressed by its natural strength and beauty, Mausolus moved to Halicarnassus from Mylasa, increasing the city's population by bringing in residents from six Leleges towns. He was succeeded by Artemisia, whose military skill was demonstrated when she used a clever tactic to capture the Rhodian vessels attacking her city, and whose grandeur and taste are immortalized by the "Mausoleum," the monument she built in memory of her husband (see Mausolus). One of her successors, Pixodarus, tried to align himself with the growing power of Macedon and supposedly gained the temporary agreement of the young Alexander to marry his daughter. However, Philip forbade the marriage. After conquering Ionia, Alexander demanded the surrender of Halicarnassus, where Memnon, the leading satrap of Asia Minor, had taken refuge with the Persian fleet. When they refused, he captured the city after fierce fighting and devastated it, but he couldn’t seize the citadel and had to leave it under siege. He returned the city’s governance to the Mausolus family, represented by Ada, the sister of Mausolus. Shortly after, the citizens received a gymnasium from Ptolemy and built a portico in his honor; however, the city never fully recovered from the siege's destruction, and Cicero described it as nearly deserted. Today, part of the site is occupied by the town of Bodrum, but the ancient walls can still be traced around most of their circuit, and the locations of several temples, the theater, and other public buildings can be identified with certainty.

From the ruins of the Mausoleum sufficient has been recovered by the excavations carried out in 1857 by C. T. Newton to enable a fairly complete restoration of its design to be made. The building consisted of five parts—a basement or podium, a pteron or enclosure of columns, a pyramid, a pedestal and a chariot group. The basement, covering an area of 114 ft. by 92, was built of blocks of greenstone and cased with marble. Round the base of it were probably disposed groups of statuary. The 838 pteron consisted (according to Pliny) of thirty-six columns of the Ionic order, enclosing a square cella. Between the columns probably stood single statues. From the portions that have been recovered, it appears that the principal frieze of the pteron represented combats of Greeks and Amazons. In addition to these, there are also many life-size fragments of animals, horsemen, &c., belonging probably to pedimental sculptures, but formerly supposed to be parts of minor friezes. Above the pteron rose the pyramid, mounting by 24 steps to an apex or pedestal. On this apex stood the chariot with the figure of Mausolus himself and an attendant. The height of the statue of Mausolus in the British Museum is 9 ft. 9½ in. without the plinth. The hair rising from the forehead falls in thick waves on each side of the face and descends nearly to the shoulder; the beard is short and close, the face square and massive, the eyes deep set under overhanging brows, the mouth well formed with settled calm about the lips. The drapery is grandly composed. All sorts of restorations of this famous monument have been proposed. The original one, made by Newton and Pullan, is obviously in error in many respects; and that of Oldfield, though to be preferred for its lightness (the Mausoleum was said anciently to be “suspended in mid-air”), does not satisfy the conditions postulated by the remains. The best on the whole is that of the veteran German architect, F. Adler, published in 1900; but fresh studies have since been made (see below).

From the ruins of the Mausoleum, enough has been recovered from the excavations done in 1857 by C. T. Newton to allow for a fairly complete restoration of its design. The building had five parts—a basement or podium, a pteron or column enclosure, a pyramid, a pedestal, and a chariot group. The basement, covering an area of 114 ft. by 92, was constructed from greenstone blocks and covered with marble. Groups of statues were likely arranged around its base. The 838 pteron had (according to Pliny) thirty-six Ionic columns surrounding a square cella. It's probable that single statues were positioned between the columns. From the recovered portions, it seems the main frieze of the pteron depicted battles between Greeks and Amazons. Additionally, there are several life-size fragments of animals and horsemen, likely part of the pedimental sculptures, previously thought to belong to smaller friezes. Above the pteron rose the pyramid, accessed by 24 steps leading to an apex or pedestal. At this apex stood the chariot featuring the figure of Mausolus himself and an attendant. The statue of Mausolus in the British Museum measures 9 ft. 9½ in. without the plinth. The hair from the forehead falls in thick waves on either side of the face and cascades nearly to the shoulder; the beard is short and close, the face is square and solid, the eyes are deeply set beneath prominent brows, and the mouth is well-formed, giving an impression of calm around the lips. The drapery is impressively designed. Many restorations of this famous monument have been suggested. The original one, created by Newton and Pullan, is clearly mistaken in several areas; while Oldfield’s version, though lighter (the Mausoleum was said to be “suspended in mid-air”), does not meet the requirements suggested by the remains. The best overall is that of the experienced German architect, F. Adler, published in 1900; however, new studies have been conducted since then (see below).

See C T. Newton and R. P. Pullan, History of Discoveries at Halicarnassus (1862-1863); J. Fergusson, The Mausoleum at Halicarnassus restored (1862); E. Oldfield, “The Mausoleum,” in Archaeologia (1895); F. Adler, Mausoleum zu Halikarnass (1900); J. P. Six in Journ. Hell. Studies (1905); W. B. Dinsmoor, in Amer. Journ. of Arch. (1908); J. J. Stevenson, A Restoration of the Mausoleum of Halicarnassus (1909); J. B. K. Preedy, “The Chariot Group of the Mausoleum,” in Journ. Hell. Stud., 1910.

See C. T. Newton and R. P. Pullan, History of Discoveries at Halicarnassus (1862-1863); J. Fergusson, The Mausoleum at Halicarnassus Restored (1862); E. Oldfield, “The Mausoleum,” in Archaeologia (1895); F. Adler, Mausoleum zu Halikarnass (1900); J. P. Six in Journ. Hell. Studies (1905); W. B. Dinsmoor, in Amer. Journ. of Arch. (1908); J. J. Stevenson, A Restoration of the Mausoleum of Halicarnassus (1909); J. B. K. Preedy, “The Chariot Group of the Mausoleum,” in Journ. Hell. Stud., 1910.

(D. G. H.)

HALICZ, a town of Austria, in Galicia, 70 m. by rail S.S.E. of Lemberg. Pop. (1900), 4809. It is situated at the confluence of the Luckow with the Dniester and its principal resources are the recovery of salt from the neighbouring brine wells, soap-making and the trade in timber. In the neighbourhood are the ruins of the old castle, the seat of the ruler of the former kingdom from which Galicia derived its Polish name. Halicz, which is mentioned in annals as early as 1113, was from 1141 to 1255 the residence of the princes of that name, one of the principalities into which western Russia was then divided. The town was then much larger, as is shown by excavations in the neighbourhood made during the 19th century, and probably met its doom during the Mongol invasion of 1240. In 1349 it was incorporated in the kingdom of Poland.

HALICZ, a town in Austria, located in Galicia, 70 miles by rail southeast of Lemberg. Population (1900) was 4,809. It sits at the meeting point of the Luckow River and the Dniester River, with its main industries being salt extraction from nearby brine wells, soap production, and timber trade. Nearby, you can find the ruins of an old castle, which was once the home of the ruler of the previous kingdom that gave Galicia its Polish name. Halicz is mentioned in historical records as early as 1113 and served as the residence of the princes of that name from 1141 to 1255, during a time when western Russia was divided into principalities. The town was much larger back then, as revealed by excavations conducted in the 19th century, and it likely fell into decline during the Mongol invasion in 1240. In 1349, it became part of the kingdom of Poland.


HALIFAX, CHARLES MONTAGUE, Earl of (1661-1715), English statesman and poet, fourth son of the Hon. George Montague, fifth son of the first earl of Manchester, was born at Horton, Northamptonshire, on the 16th of April 1661. In his fourteenth year he was sent to Westminster school, where he was chosen king’s scholar in 1677, and distinguished himself in the composition of extempore epigrams made according to custom upon theses appointed for king’s scholars at the time of election. In 1679 he entered Trinity College, Cambridge, where he acquired a solid knowledge of the classics and surpassed all his contemporaries at the university in logic and ethics. Latterly, however, he preferred to the abstractions of Descartes the practical philosophy of Sir Isaac Newton; and he was one of the small band of students who assisted Newton in forming the Philosophical Society of Cambridge. But it was his facility in verse-writing, and neither his scholarship nor his practical ability, that first opened up to him the way to fortune. His clever but absurdly panegyrical poem on the death of Charles II. secured for him the notice of the earl of Dorset, who invited him to town and introduced him to the principal wits of the time; and in 1687 his joint authorship with Prior of the Hind and Panther transversed to the Story of the Country Mouse and the City Mouse, a parody of Dryden’s political poem, not only increased his literary reputation but directly helped him to political influence.

HALIFAX, CHARLES MONTAGUE, Earl of (1661-1715), English statesman and poet, fourth son of the Hon. George Montague, fifth son of the first earl of Manchester, was born in Horton, Northamptonshire, on April 16, 1661. At age fourteen, he was sent to Westminster school, where he became a king’s scholar in 1677 and excelled in writing impromptu epigrams based on topics assigned for kings’ scholars during elections. In 1679, he enrolled at Trinity College, Cambridge, where he gained a solid understanding of the classics and outperformed his peers in logic and ethics. However, later on, he preferred the practical philosophy of Sir Isaac Newton over the abstractions of Descartes and was part of a small group of students who helped Newton establish the Philosophical Society of Cambridge. Yet, it was his talent for writing verse, rather than his scholarly achievements or practical skills, that initially paved his way to success. His clever but excessively flattering poem on Charles II's death caught the attention of the Earl of Dorset, who brought him to the city and introduced him to the leading intellectuals of the time; and in 1687, his collaboration with Prior on the Hind and Panther transversed to the Story of the Country Mouse and the City Mouse, a parody of Dryden’s political poem, not only boosted his literary reputation but also directly enhanced his political influence.

In 1689, through the patronage of the earl of Dorset, he entered parliament as member for Maldon, and sat in the convention which resolved that William and Mary should be declared king and queen of England. About this time he married the countess-dowager of Manchester, and it would appear, according to Johnson, that it was still his intention to take orders; but after the coronation he purchased a clerkship to the council. On being introduced by Earl Dorset to King William, after the publication of his poetical Epistle occasioned by his Majesty’s Victory in Ireland, he was ordered to receive an immediate pension of £500 per annum, until an opportunity should present itself of “making a man of him.” In 1691 he was chosen chairman of the committee of the House of Commons appointed to confer with a committee of the Lords in regard to the bill for regulating trials in cases of high treason; and he displayed in these conferences such tact and debating power that he was made one of the commissioners of the treasury and called to the privy council. But his success as a politician was less due to his oratorical gifts than to his skill in finance, and in this respect he soon began to manifest such brilliant talents as completely eclipsed the painstaking abilities of Godolphin. Indeed it may be affirmed that no other statesman has initiated schemes which have left a more permanent mark on the financial history of England. Although perhaps it was inevitable that England should sooner or later adopt the continental custom of lightening the annual taxation in times of war by contracting a national debt, the actual introduction of the expedient was due to Montague, who on the 15th of December 1692 proposed to raise a million of money by way of loan. Previous to this the Scotsman William Paterson (q.v.) had submitted to the government his plan of a national bank, and when in the spring of 1694 the prolonged contest with France had rendered another large loan absolutely necessary, Montague introduced a bill for the incorporation of the Bank of England. The bill after some opposition passed the House of Lords in May, and immediately after the prorogation of parliament Montague was rewarded by the chancellorship of the exchequer. In 1695 he was triumphantly returned for the borough of Westminster to the new parliament, and succeeded in passing his celebrated measure to remedy the depreciation which had taken place in the currency on account of dishonest manipulations. To provide for the expense of recoinage, Montague, instead of reviving the old tax of hearth money, introduced the window tax, and the difficulties caused by the temporary absence of a metallic currency were avoided by the issue for the first time of exchequer bills. His other expedients for meeting the emergencies of the financial crisis were equally successful, and the rapid restoration of public credit secured him a commanding influence both in the House of Commons and at the board of the treasury; but although Godolphin resigned office in October 1696, the king hesitated for some time between Montague and Sir Stephen Fox as his successor, and it was not till 1697 that the former was appointed first lord. In 1697 he was accused by Charles Duncombe, and in 1698 by a Col. Granville, of fraud, but both charges broke down, and Duncombe was shown to have been guilty of extreme dishonesty himself. In 1698 and 1699 he acted as one of the council of regency during the king’s absence from England. With the accumulation of his political successes his vanity and arrogance became, however, so offensive that latterly they utterly lost him the influence he had acquired by his administrative ability and his masterly eloquence; and when his power began to be on the wane he set the seal to his political overthrow by conferring the lucrative sinecure office of auditor of the exchequer on his brother in trust for himself should he be compelled to retire from power. This action earned him the offensive nickname of “Filcher,” and for some time afterwards, in attempting to lead the House of Commons, he had to submit to constant mortifications, often verging on personal insults. After the return of the king in 1699 he resigned his offices in the government and succeeded his brother in the auditorship.

In 1689, thanks to the support of the Earl of Dorset, he became a member of Parliament for Maldon and participated in the convention that decided William and Mary should be proclaimed king and queen of England. Around this time, he married the Dowager Countess of Manchester, and according to Johnson, he still intended to pursue a religious career; however, after the coronation, he bought a clerkship in the council. After being introduced to King William by the Earl of Dorset following the publication of his poetic Epistle occasioned by his Majesty’s Victory in Ireland, he was granted an immediate pension of £500 a year until an opportunity arose for “making a man of him.” In 1691, he was elected chairman of the House of Commons committee tasked with collaborating with a committee from the Lords regarding legislation for regulating treason trials. He showed such skill and debating ability in these discussions that he was appointed as one of the treasury commissioners and made a member of the privy council. However, his political success relied more on his financial skills than on his speaking talents, and he quickly began to demonstrate exceptional abilities that overshadowed those of Godolphin. In fact, it can be said that no other politician has implemented plans that have left such a lasting impact on England's financial history. While it was perhaps inevitable that England would eventually adopt the European practice of easing annual taxes during wartime by accumulating national debt, the actual introduction of this method was due to Montague, who on December 15, 1692, proposed raising a million pounds through loans. Before this, the Scotsman William Paterson (q.v.) had presented his national bank proposal to the government, and when the drawn-out conflict with France in the spring of 1694 made another large loan necessary, Montague introduced a bill to establish the Bank of England. After some opposition, the bill passed the House of Lords in May, and right after Parliament’s prorogation, Montague was appointed chancellor of the exchequer. In 1695, he was elected for the borough of Westminster to the new Parliament and successfully passed his famous measure to address the currency devaluation caused by dishonest practices. To fund the recoinage, instead of reviving the old hearth tax, Montague introduced the window tax, and he avoided issues caused by a temporary lack of metallic currency by issuing exchequer bills for the first time. His other strategies for dealing with the financial crisis were equally effective, and the swift restoration of public credit gave him significant influence in both the House of Commons and the treasury board; however, although Godolphin stepped down in October 1696, the king took time to decide between Montague and Sir Stephen Fox for his successor, and it wasn't until 1697 that Montague became the first lord. In 1697, he faced accusations of fraud from Charles Duncombe and in 1698 from Colonel Granville, but both allegations fell apart, revealing Duncombe’s own extreme dishonesty. In 1698 and 1699, he served on the council of regency during the king’s absence from England. Nonetheless, with his growing political success, his vanity and arrogance became so bothersome that they ultimately cost him the influence he had gained from his administrative skills and impressive speaking; and as his power started to fade, he sealed his political decline by giving the profitable sinecure position of auditor of the exchequer to his brother in trust for himself in case he needed to step down from power. This act earned him the insulting nickname “Filcher,” and for a time afterward, while trying to lead the House of Commons, he faced constant humiliation, often bordering on personal insults. After the king returned in 1699, he resigned from his government positions and took over the auditorship from his brother.

On the accession of the Tories to power he was removed in 1701 to the House of Lords by the title of Lord Halifax. In the same year he was impeached for malpractices along with Lord 839 Somers and the earls of Portland and Oxford, but all the charges were dismissed by the Lords; and in 1703 a second attempt to impeach him was still more unsuccessful. He continued out of office during the reign of Queen Anne, but in 1706 he was named one of the commissioners to negotiate the union with Scotland; and after the passing of the Act of Settlement in favour of the house of Hanover, he was appointed ambassador to the elector’s court to convey the insignia of order of the garter to George I. On the death of Anne (1714) he was appointed one of the council of regency until the arrival of the king from Hanover; and after the coronation he received the office of first lord of the treasury in the new ministry, being at the same time created earl of Halifax and Viscount Sunbury. He died on the 19th of May 1715 and left no issue. He was buried in the vault of the Albemarle family in Westminster Abbey. His nephew George (d. 1739) succeeded to the barony, and was created Viscount Sunbury and earl of Halifax in 1715.

On the rise of the Tories to power, he was moved in 1701 to the House of Lords with the title of Lord Halifax. That same year, he was impeached for misconduct alongside Lord 839 Somers and the earls of Portland and Oxford, but all the charges were dismissed by the Lords; and in 1703, a second attempt to impeach him was even less successful. He remained out of office during Queen Anne's reign, but in 1706, he was appointed one of the commissioners to negotiate the union with Scotland. After the Act of Settlement was passed in favor of the House of Hanover, he was named ambassador to the elector’s court to deliver the insignia of the Order of the Garter to George I. After Anne's death in 1714, he was appointed to the council of regency until the king arrived from Hanover; and following the coronation, he was given the position of First Lord of the Treasury in the new ministry, while also being created Earl of Halifax and Viscount Sunbury. He died on May 19, 1715, and had no children. He was buried in the vault of the Albemarle family in Westminster Abbey. His nephew George (d. 1739) inherited the barony and was created Viscount Sunbury and Earl of Halifax in 1715.

Montague’s association with Prior in the travesty of Dryden’s Hind and Panther has no doubt largely aided in preserving his literary reputation; but he is perhaps indebted for it chiefly to his subsequent influential position and to the fulsome flattery of the men of letters who enjoyed his friendship, and who, in return for his liberal donations and the splendid banqueting which they occasionally enjoyed at his villa on the Thames, “fed him,” as Pope says, “all day long with dedications.” Swift says he gave them nothing but “good words, and good dinners.” That, however, his beneficence to needy talent, if sometimes attributable to an itching ear for adulation, was at others prompted by a sincere appreciation of intellectual merit, is sufficiently attested by the manner in which he procured from Godolphin a commissionership for Addison, and also by his life-long intimacy with Newton, for whom he obtained the mastership of the mint. The small fragments of poetry which he left behind him, and which were almost solely the composition of his early years, display a certain facility and vigour of diction, but their thought and fancy are never more than commonplace, and not unfrequently in striving to be eloquent and impressive he is only grotesquely and extravagantly absurd. In administrative talent he was the superior of all his contemporaries, and his only rival in parliamentary eloquence was Somers; but the skill with which he managed measures was superior to his tact in dealing with men, and the effect of his brilliant financial successes on his reputation was gradually almost nullified by the affected arrogance of his manner and by the eccentricities of his sensitive vanity. So eager latterly was his thirst for fame and power that perhaps Marlborough did not exaggerate when he said that “he had no other principle but his ambition, so that he would put all in distraction rather than not gain his point.”

Montague’s partnership with Prior in the parody of Dryden’s Hind and Panther has certainly helped maintain his literary reputation; however, he likely owes it mainly to his later influential role and to the excessive praise from the writers who were his friends. In exchange for his generous donations and the extravagant dinners they occasionally enjoyed at his villa on the Thames, they “fed him,” as Pope puts it, “all day long with dedications.” Swift claims he offered them nothing but “good words, and good dinners.” Nonetheless, his generosity towards struggling talent, while sometimes driven by a desire for flattery, was at other times motivated by a genuine appreciation for intellectual achievement, as evidenced by how he secured a commissionership for Addison from Godolphin and his lifelong friendship with Newton, for whom he obtained the head position at the mint. The few poems he left behind, mostly written in his youth, show a certain ease and energy in his language, but their ideas and imagination are mostly unremarkable, and often in his attempts to be eloquent and impressive, he comes off as bizarre and overly dramatic. In terms of administrative skills, he was better than all his contemporaries, and his only rival in parliamentary speaking was Somers; however, his talent for managing policies was greater than his ability to interact with people, and the impact of his impressive financial achievements on his reputation was gradually diminished by the affected arrogance in his behavior and the eccentricities of his sensitive pride. In his later years, his thirst for fame and power was so intense that Marlborough perhaps was not exaggerating when he said, “he had no other principle but his ambition, so that he would put all in chaos rather than not achieve his goals.”

Among the numerous notices of Halifax by contemporaries may be mentioned the eulogistic reference which concludes Addison’s account of the “greatest of English poets”; the dedications by Steel to the second volume of the Spectator and to the fourth of the Tatler; Pope’s laudatory mention of him in the epilogue to his Satires and in the preface to the Iliad, and his portrait of him as “Full-blown Bufo” in the Epistle to Arbuthnot. Various allusions to him are to be found in Swift’s works and in Marlborough’s Letters. See also Burnet’s History of his Own Times; The Parliamentary History; Howell’s State Trials; Johnson’s Lives of the Poets; and Macaulay’s History of England. His Miscellaneous Works were published at London in 1704; his Life and Miscellaneous Works in 1715; and his Poetical Works, to which also his “Life” is attached, in 1716. His poems were reprinted in the 9th volume of Johnson’s English Poets.

Among the many comments on Halifax by his contemporaries, we can highlight the praise that wraps up Addison’s account of the “greatest of English poets”; the dedications by Steele to the second volume of the Spectator and to the fourth volume of the Tatler; Pope’s commendation of him in the epilogue to his Satires and in the preface to the Iliad, along with his depiction of him as “Full-blown Bufo” in the Epistle to Arbuthnot. There are various references to him in Swift’s works and in Marlborough’s Letters. Also, see Burnet’s History of his Own Times; The Parliamentary History; Howell’s State Trials; Johnson’s Lives of the Poets; and Macaulay’s History of England. His Miscellaneous Works were published in London in 1704; his Life and Miscellaneous Works in 1715; and his Poetical Works, which also includes his “Life,” in 1716. His poems were reprinted in the 9th volume of Johnson’s English Poets.


HALIFAX, GEORGE MONTAGU DUNK, 2nd Earl of (1716-1771), son of George Montagu, 1st earl of Halifax (of the second creation), was born on the 5th or 6th of October 1716, becoming earl of Halifax on his father’s death in 1739. Educated at Eton and at Trinity College, Cambridge, he was married in 1741 to Anne Richards (d. 1753), a lady who had inherited a great fortune from Sir Thomas Dunk, whose name was taken by Halifax. After having been an official in the household of Frederick, prince of Wales, the earl was made master of the buckhounds, and in 1748 he became president of the Board of Trade. While filling this position he helped to found Halifax, the capital of Nova Scotia, which was named after him, and in several ways he rendered good service to trade, especially with North America. About this time he sought to become a secretary of state, but in vain, although he was allowed to enter the cabinet in 1757. In March 1761 Halifax was appointed lord-lieutenant of Ireland, and during part of the time which he held this office he was also first lord of the admiralty. He became secretary of state for the northern department under the earl of Bute in October 1762, retaining this post under George Grenville and being one of the three ministers to whom George III. entrusted the direction of affairs. He signed the general warrant under which Wilkes was arrested in 1763, for which action he was mulcted in damages by the courts of law in 1769, and he was mainly responsible for the exclusion of the name of the king’s mother, Augusta, princess of Wales, from the Regency Bill of 1765. With his colleagues the earl left office in July 1765, returning to the cabinet as lord privy seal under his nephew, Lord North, in January 1770. He had just been transferred to his former position of secretary of state when he died on the 8th of June 1771. Halifax, who was lord-lieutenant of Northamptonshire and a lieutenant-general in the army, showed some disinterestedness in money matters, but was very extravagant. He left no children, and his titles became extinct on his death. Horace Walpole speaks slightingly of the earl, and says he and his mistress, Mary Anne Faulkner, “had sold every employment in his gift.”

HALIFAX, GEORGE MONTAGU DUNK, 2nd Earl of (1716-1771), son of George Montagu, 1st Earl of Halifax (of the second creation), was born on October 5th or 6th, 1716. He became the Earl of Halifax after his father's death in 1739. He was educated at Eton and Trinity College, Cambridge, and married Anne Richards in 1741 (she died in 1753), a woman who had inherited a significant fortune from Sir Thomas Dunk, whose name was adopted by Halifax. After working in the household of Frederick, Prince of Wales, the earl became master of the buckhounds and was appointed president of the Board of Trade in 1748. In this role, he helped establish Halifax, the capital of Nova Scotia, which was named after him, and contributed positively to trade, particularly with North America. Around this time, he attempted to become a secretary of state, but failed, although he did enter the cabinet in 1757. In March 1761, Halifax was appointed lord lieutenant of Ireland, and during part of his term, he also served as first lord of the admiralty. He became secretary of state for the northern department under the Earl of Bute in October 1762, retaining this position under George Grenville and being one of the three ministers George III. trusted to direct affairs. He signed the general warrant for the arrest of Wilkes in 1763, which led to him being fined damages by the courts in 1769, and he was mainly responsible for leaving out the name of the king’s mother, Augusta, princess of Wales, from the Regency Bill of 1765. He and his colleagues left office in July 1765, and he returned to the cabinet as lord privy seal under his nephew, Lord North, in January 1770. He had just been moved back to his previous role as secretary of state when he died on June 8th, 1771. Halifax, who was lord lieutenant of Northamptonshire and a lieutenant general in the army, showed some selflessness regarding money matters but was quite extravagant. He left no children, and his titles became extinct upon his death. Horace Walpole speaks disparagingly of the earl, stating that he and his mistress, Mary Anne Faulkner, “sold every job in his gift.”

See the Memoirs of his secretary, Richard Cumberland (1807).

See the Memoirs of his secretary, Richard Cumberland (1807).


HALIFAX, GEORGE SAVILE, 1st Marquess of (1633-1695), English statesman and writer, great-grandson of Sir George Savile of Lupset and Thornhill in Yorkshire (created baronet in 1611), was the eldest son of Sir William Savile, 3rd baronet, who distinguished himself in the civil war in the royalist cause and who died in 1644, and of Anne, eldest daughter of Lord Keeper Coventry. He was thus nephew of Sir William Coventry, who is said to have influenced his political opinions, and of Lord Shaftesbury, afterwards his most bitter opponent, and great-nephew of the earl of Strafford; by his marriage with the Lady Dorothy Spencer, he was brother-in-law to Lord Sunderland. He entered public life with all the advantages of lineage, political connexions, great wealth and estates, and uncommon abilities. He was elected member of the Convention parliament for Pontefract in 1660, and this was his only appearance in the Lower House. A peerage was sought for him by the duke of York in 1665, but was successfully opposed by Clarendon, on the ground of his “ill-reputation amongst men of piety and religion,” the real motives of the chancellor’s hostile attitude being probably Savile’s connexion with Buckingham and Coventry. The honours were, however, only deferred for a short time and were obtained after the fall of Clarendon on the 31st of December 1667,1 when Savile was created Baron Savile of Eland and Viscount Halifax.

HALIFAX, GEORGE SAVILE, 1st Marquess of (1633-1695), English statesman and writer, great-grandson of Sir George Savile of Lupset and Thornhill in Yorkshire (made baronet in 1611), was the eldest son of Sir William Savile, 3rd baronet, who distinguished himself during the civil war supporting the royalists and who died in 1644, and of Anne, the eldest daughter of Lord Keeper Coventry. He was thus the nephew of Sir William Coventry, who is said to have shaped his political views, and of Lord Shaftesbury, later his fiercest rival, as well as the great-nephew of the earl of Strafford; through his marriage to Lady Dorothy Spencer, he became brother-in-law to Lord Sunderland. He entered public life with significant advantages from his lineage, political connections, great wealth and estates, and exceptional abilities. He was elected as a member of the Convention parliament for Pontefract in 1660, marking his only time in the Lower House. The duke of York sought a peerage for him in 1665, but Clarendon successfully opposed it, claiming he had an “ill-reputation amongst men of piety and religion,” likely motivated by Savile’s connections with Buckingham and Coventry. Nonetheless, the honors were only postponed briefly and were granted following Clarendon’s fall on December 31, 1667, when Savile was made Baron Savile of Eland and Viscount Halifax.

He supported zealously the anti-French policy formulated in the Triple Alliance of January 1668. He was at this time in favour at court, was created a privy councillor in 1672, and, while ignorant of the disgraceful secret clauses in the treaty of Dover, was chosen envoy to negotiate terms of peace with Louis XIV. and the Dutch at Utrecht. His mission was still further deprived of importance by Arlington and Buckingham, who were in the king’s counsels, and who anticipated his arrival and took the negotiations out of his hands; and though he signed the compact, he had no share in the harsh terms imposed upon the Dutch, and henceforth became a bitter opponent of the policy of subservience to French interests and of the Roman Catholic claims.

He passionately supported the anti-French policy set out in the Triple Alliance of January 1668. At this time, he was favored at court, became a privy councillor in 1672, and, unaware of the disgraceful secret clauses in the Treaty of Dover, was chosen as the envoy to negotiate peace terms with Louis XIV and the Dutch at Utrecht. His mission was further undermined by Arlington and Buckingham, who were in the king’s council, as they anticipated his arrival and took over the negotiations. Although he signed the agreement, he played no role in the severe terms imposed on the Dutch and subsequently became a strong opponent of the policy of submitting to French interests and the claims of the Roman Catholic Church.

He took an active part in passing through parliament the great Test Act of 16732 and forfeited in consequence his friendship with James. In 1674 he brought forward a motion for 840 disarming “popish recusants,” and supported one by Lord Carlisle for restricting the marriages in the royal family to Protestants; but he opposed the bill introduced by Lord Danby (see Leeds, 1st Duke of) in 1675, which imposed a test oath on officials and members of parliament, speaking “with that quickness, learning and elegance that are inseparable from all his discourses,” and ridiculing the multiplication of oaths, since “no man would ever sleep with open doors ... should all the town be sworn not to rob.” He was now on bad terms with Danby, and a witty sally at that minister’s expense caused his dismissal from the council in January 1676. In 1678 he took an active part in the investigation of the “Popish Plot,” to which he appears to have given excessive credence, but opposed the bill which was passed on the 30th of October 1678, to exclude Roman Catholics from the House of Lords.

He played a key role in getting the significant Test Act of 1673 passed through parliament and as a result, lost his friendship with James. In 1674, he proposed a motion to disarm “popish recusants,” and supported one from Lord Carlisle aimed at restricting marriages within the royal family to Protestants; however, he opposed the bill introduced by Lord Danby (see Leeds, 1st Duke of) in 1675, which required officials and members of parliament to take a test oath. He spoke “with that quickness, learning, and elegance that are inseparable from all his discourses,” mocking the increasing number of oaths since “no man would ever sleep with open doors ... if everyone in the town had sworn not to rob.” He was now on bad terms with Danby, and a clever remark at the minister's expense led to his dismissal from the council in January 1676. In 1678, he actively participated in the investigation of the “Popish Plot,” which he seemed to believe in too much, but he opposed the bill passed on October 30, 1678, that aimed to exclude Roman Catholics from the House of Lords.

In 1679, as a consequence of the fall of Danby, he became a member of the newly constituted privy council. With Charles, who had at first “kicked at his appointment,” he quickly became a favourite, his lively and “libertine” (i.e. free or sceptical) conversation being named by Bishop Burnet as his chief attraction for the king. His dislike of the duke of York and of the Romanist tendencies of the court did not induce him to support the rash attempt of Lord Shaftesbury to substitute the illegitimate duke of Monmouth for James in the succession. He feared Shaftesbury’s ascendancy in the national councils and foresaw nothing but civil war and confusion as a result of his scheme. He declared against the exclusion of James, was made an earl in 1679, and was one of the “Triumvirate” which now directed public affairs. He assisted in passing into law the Habeas Corpus Bill. According to Sir W. Temple he showed great severity in putting into force the laws against the Roman Catholics, but this statement is considered a misrepresentation.3 In 1680 he voted against the execution of Lord Stafford.

In 1679, following Danby's downfall, he joined the newly formed Privy Council. He quickly became a favorite of Charles, who had initially been reluctant about his appointment. His lively and "libertine" (i.e., free or skeptical) conversation was noted by Bishop Burnet as the main reason the king was drawn to him. Although he disliked the Duke of York and the Roman Catholic leanings of the court, he did not support Lord Shaftesbury's reckless attempt to replace the illegitimate Duke of Monmouth with James in the line of succession. He was worried about Shaftesbury's influence in national politics and predicted that his plan would lead to civil war and chaos. He opposed James's exclusion, became an earl in 1679, and was part of the "Triumvirate" that now managed public affairs. He contributed to the passing of the Habeas Corpus Bill. According to Sir W. Temple, he was very strict in enforcing laws against Roman Catholics, but this claim is seen as a misrepresentation.3 In 1680, he voted against the execution of Lord Stafford.

Meanwhile (1679) his whole policy had been successfully directed towards uniting all parties with the object of frustrating Shaftesbury’s plans. Communications were opened with the prince of Orange, and the illness of the king was made the occasion for summoning James from Brussels. Monmouth was compelled to retire to Holland, and Shaftesbury was dismissed. On the other hand, while Halifax was so far successful, James was given an opportunity of establishing a new influence at the court. It was with great difficulty that his retirement to Scotland was at last effected; the ministers lost the confidence and support of the “country party,” and Halifax, fatigued and ill, at the close of this year, retired to Rufford Abbey, the country home of the Saviles since the destruction of Thornhill Hall in 1648, and for some time took little part in affairs. He returned in September 1680 on the occasion of the introduction of the Exclusion Bill in the Lords. The debate which followed, one of the most famous in the whole annals of parliament, became a duel of oratory between Halifax and his uncle Shaftesbury, the finest two speakers of the day, watched by the Lords, the Commons at the bar, and the king, who was present. It lasted seven hours. Halifax spoke sixteen times, and at last, regardless of the menaces of the more violent supporters of the bill, who closed round him, vanquished his opponent. The rejection of the bill by a majority of 33 was attributed by all parties entirely to the eloquence of Halifax. His conduct transformed the allegiance to him of the Whigs into bitter hostility, the Commons immediately petitioning the king to remove him from his councils for ever, while any favour which he might have regained with James was forfeited by his subsequent approval of the regency scheme.

Meanwhile (1679), his entire strategy had been focused on uniting all factions to thwart Shaftesbury's plans. He opened communication with the prince of Orange, and the king's illness was used as a reason to summon James from Brussels. Monmouth was forced to retreat to Holland, and Shaftesbury was dismissed. On the other hand, while Halifax found some success, James had the chance to establish a new influence at court. It was challenging for him to eventually retire to Scotland; the ministers lost the confidence and support of the "country party," and Halifax, exhausted and ill, retired to Rufford Abbey, the Saviles' country home since the destruction of Thornhill Hall in 1648, where he took a step back from politics for a while. He returned in September 1680 when the Exclusion Bill was introduced in the Lords. The following debate, one of the most famous in parliamentary history, turned into a battle of speeches between Halifax and his uncle Shaftesbury, the two finest speakers of the time, watched by the Lords, the Commons at the bar, and the king, who was present. It lasted seven hours. Halifax spoke sixteen times, and despite the threats from the more aggressive supporters of the bill who surrounded him, he ultimately defeated his opponent. The bill was rejected by a majority of 33, and all parties credited Halifax's eloquence for this outcome. His actions turned the Whigs' allegiance to him into fierce hostility, with the Commons promptly petitioning the king to remove him from his council permanently, while any favor he might have regained with James was lost due to his later endorsement of the regency plan.

He retired to Rufford again in January 1681, but was present at the Oxford parliament, and in May returned suddenly to public life and held for a year the chief control of affairs. The arrest of Shaftesbury on the 2nd of July was attributed to his influence, but in general, during the period of Tory reaction, he seems to have urged a policy of conciliation and moderation upon the king. He opposed James’s return from Scotland and, about this time (Sept.), made a characteristic but futile attempt to persuade the duke to attend the services of the Church of England and thus to end all difficulties. He renewed relations with the prince of Orange, who in July paid a visit to England to seek support against the French designs upon Luxemburg. The influence of Halifax procured for the Dutch a formal assurance from Charles of his support; but the king informed the French ambassador that he had no intention of fulfilling his engagements, and made another secret treaty with Louis. Halifax opposed in 1682 James’s vindictive prosecution of the earl of Argyll, arousing further hostility in the duke, while the same year he was challenged to a duel by Monmouth, who attributed to him his disgrace.

He retired to Rufford again in January 1681, but was present at the Oxford parliament. In May, he suddenly returned to public life and took charge of affairs for a year. The arrest of Shaftesbury on July 2 was linked to his influence, but during the Tory reaction period, he generally encouraged a policy of conciliation and moderation to the king. He opposed James’s return from Scotland and around this time (September), made a typical but unsuccessful attempt to persuade the duke to attend the Church of England services to resolve all issues. He reestablished connections with the prince of Orange, who visited England in July to seek support against the French plans for Luxembourg. Halifax's influence secured a formal assurance of support from Charles for the Dutch; however, the king informed the French ambassador that he had no intention of honoring his commitments and made another secret treaty with Louis. In 1682, Halifax opposed James’s vengeful prosecution of the earl of Argyll, which increased the duke's hostility towards him, while that same year, he was challenged to a duel by Monmouth, who blamed him for his disgrace.

His short tenure of power ended with the return of James in May. Outwardly he still retained the king’s favour and was advanced to a marquisate (Aug. 17) and to the office of lord privy seal (Oct. 25). Being still a member of the administration he must share responsibility for the attack now made upon the municipal franchises, a violation of the whole system of representative government, especially as the new charters passed his office. In January 1684 he was one of the commissioners “who supervise all things concerning the city and have turned out those persons who are whiggishly inclined” (N. Luttrell’s Diary, i. 295). He made honourable but vain endeavours to save Algernon Sidney and Lord Russell. “My Lord Halifax,” declared Tillotson in his evidence before the later inquiry, “showed a very compassionate concern for my Lord Russell and all the readiness to serve them that could be wished.”4 The Rye-House Plot, in which it was sought to implicate them, was a disastrous blow to his policy, and in order to counteract its consequences he entered into somewhat perilous negotiations with Monmouth, and endeavoured to effect his reconciliation with the king. On the 12th of February 1684, he procured the release of his old antagonist, Lord Danby. Shortly afterwards his influence at the court revived. Charles was no longer in receipt of his French pension and was beginning to tire of James and Rochester. The latter, instead of becoming lord treasurer, was, according to the epigram of Halifax which has become proverbial, “kicked upstairs,” to the office of lord president of the council. Halifax now worked to establish intimate relations between Charles and the prince of Orange and opposed the abrogation of the recusancy laws. In a debate in the cabinet of November 1684, on the question of the grant of a fresh constitution to the New England colonies, he urged with great warmth “that there could be no doubt whatever but that the same laws which are in force in England should also be established in a country inhabited by Englishmen and that an absolute government is neither so happy nor so safe as that which is tempered by laws and which sets bounds to the authority of the prince,” and declared that he could not “live under a king who should have it in his power to take, whenever he thought proper, the money he has in his pocket.” The opinions thus expressed were opposed by all the other ministers and highly censured by Louis XIV., James and Judge Jeffreys.

His brief time in power came to an end with the return of James in May. On the surface, he still had the king’s favor and was promoted to a marquisate (Aug. 17) and appointed lord privy seal (Oct. 25). As a member of the administration, he had to take responsibility for the attack on municipal franchises, a violation of the entire system of representative government, especially since the new charters went through his office. In January 1684, he was one of the commissioners "who oversee everything concerning the city and have removed those who lean towards Whiggism" (N. Luttrell’s Diary, i. 295). He made honorable but futile attempts to save Algernon Sidney and Lord Russell. "My Lord Halifax," Tillotson testified during the later inquiry, "showed a very compassionate concern for my Lord Russell and all the willingness to help them that one could wish."4 The Rye-House Plot, which sought to implicate them, was a severe setback to his policy, and to counter its effects, he engaged in somewhat risky negotiations with Monmouth and tried to reconcile him with the king. On February 12, 1684, he arranged for the release of his old rival, Lord Danby. Soon after, his influence at court was revived. Charles was no longer receiving his French pension and was starting to grow tired of James and Rochester. Instead of becoming lord treasurer, Rochester was, as Halifax famously put it, "kicked upstairs" to the position of lord president of the council. Halifax now worked to build close ties between Charles and the Prince of Orange and opposed the repeal of the recusancy laws. In a cabinet debate in November 1684 about giving a new constitution to the New England colonies, he passionately argued "that there could be no doubt that the same laws in effect in England should also be established in a country inhabited by Englishmen and that an absolute government is neither as happy nor as safe as one restricted by laws that limit the authority of the prince," and stated that he could not "live under a king who could take, whenever he deemed fit, the money he has in his pocket." His views were opposed by all the other ministers and heavily criticized by Louis XIV., James, and Judge Jeffreys.

At the accession of James he was immediately deprived of all power and relegated to the presidency of the council. He showed no compliance, like other Lords, with James’s Roman Catholic preferences. He was opposed to the parliamentary grant to the king of a revenue for life; he promoted the treaty of alliance with the Dutch in August 1685; he expostulated with the king on the subject of the illegal commissions in the army given to Roman Catholics; and finally, on his firm refusal to support the repeal of the Test and Habeas Corpus Acts, he was dismissed, and his name was struck out of the list of the privy council (Oct. 1685). He corresponded with the prince of Orange, conferred with Dykveldt, the latter’s envoy, but held aloof from plans which aimed at the prince’s personal interference in English affairs. In 1687 he published the famous Letter to a Dissenter, in which he warns the Nonconformists against being beguiled by the “Indulgence” into joining the court party, sets in a clear light the fatal results of such a step, and reminds them that under their next sovereign their grievances would in 841 all probability be satisfied by the law. The tract, which has received general and unqualified admiration, must be classed amongst the few known writings which have actually and immediately altered the course of history. Copies to the number of 20,000 were circulated through the kingdom, and a great party was convinced of the wisdom of remaining faithful to the national traditions and liberties. He took the popular side on the occasion of the trial of the bishops in June 1688, visited them in the Tower, and led the cheers with which the verdict of “not guilty” was received in court; but the same month he refrained from signing the invitation to William, and publicly repudiated any share in the prince’s plans. On the contrary he attended the court and refused any credence to the report that the prince born to James was supposititious. After the landing of William he was present at the council called by James on the 27th of November. He urged the king to grant large concessions, but his speech, in contrast to the harsh and overbearing attitude of the Hydes, was “the most tender and obliging ... that ever was heard.” He accepted the mission with Nottingham and Godolphin to treat with William at Hungerford, and succeeded in obtaining moderate terms from the prince. The negotiations, however, were abortive, for James had from the first resolved on flight. In the crisis which ensued, when the country was left without a government, Halifax took the lead. He presided over the council of Lords which assembled and took immediate measures to maintain public order. On the return of James to London on the 16th of November, after his capture at Faversham, Halifax repaired to William’s camp and henceforth attached himself unremittingly to his cause. On the 17th he carried with Lords Delamere and Shrewsbury a message from William to the king advising his departure from London, and, after the king’s second flight, directed the proceedings of the executive. On the meeting of the convention on the 22nd of January 1689, he was formally elected speaker of the House of Lords. He voted against the motion for a regency (Jan. 20), which was only defeated by two votes. The moderate and comprehensive character of the settlement at the revolution plainly shows his guiding hand, and it was finally through his persuasion that the Lords yielded to the Commons and agreed to the compromise whereby William and Mary were declared joint sovereigns. On the 13th of February in the Banqueting House at Whitehall, he tendered the crown to them in the name of the nation, and conducted the proclamation of their accession in the city.

At the start of James's reign, he was immediately stripped of all power and moved to the presidency of the council. Unlike other Lords, he did not go along with James’s Roman Catholic preferences. He opposed the parliamentary grant of a lifetime revenue to the king; he supported an alliance treaty with the Dutch in August 1685; he confronted the king about the illegal commissions in the army given to Roman Catholics; and finally, when he firmly refused to support the repeal of the Test and Habeas Corpus Acts, he was dismissed, and his name was removed from the privy council list (Oct. 1685). He communicated with the prince of Orange and met with Dykveldt, the prince's envoy, but distanced himself from plans that intended for the prince to get personally involved in English affairs. In 1687, he published the notable Letter to a Dissenter, in which he warns Nonconformists against being misled by the “Indulgence” into joining the court party, clearly outlines the disastrous consequences of such a decision, and reminds them that their grievances would likely be addressed by law under their next sovereign. The pamphlet, which has received widespread acclaim, is one of the few writings known to have directly and immediately changed the course of history. A total of 20,000 copies were distributed across the kingdom, convincing many that it was wise to stay loyal to national traditions and freedoms. He supported the bishops during their trial in June 1688, visited them in the Tower, and led the cheers when the “not guilty” verdict was announced in court; however, that same month he did not sign the invitation to William and publicly distanced himself from the prince’s plans. Instead, he attended the court and dismissed reports suggesting that the prince born to James was illegitimate. After William landed, he was present at the council called by James on the 27th of November. He urged the king to make significant concessions, and his speech, in contrast to the harsh and domineering demeanor of the Hydes, was “the most tender and obliging ... that ever was heard.” He accepted a mission with Nottingham and Godolphin to negotiate with William at Hungerford and managed to obtain moderate terms from the prince. However, the negotiations failed because James had always planned to flee. During the ensuing crisis, when the country was left without a government, Halifax took charge. He led the council of Lords that met and took quick actions to maintain public order. After James returned to London on the 16th of November, following his capture at Faversham, Halifax went to William’s camp and committed himself completely to William's cause. On the 17th, he, along with Lords Delamere and Shrewsbury, delivered a message from William to the king advising him to leave London, and after the king’s second escape, he directed the executive’s actions. At the gathering of the convention on the 22nd of January 1689, he was formally elected speaker of the House of Lords. He voted against a motion for a regency (Jan. 20), which was defeated by only two votes. The moderate and inclusive nature of the resolution at the revolution clearly reflects his influence, and it was ultimately through his persuasion that the Lords agreed to the Commons' compromise to declare William and Mary as joint sovereigns. On the 13th of February in the Banqueting House at Whitehall, he presented the crown to them on behalf of the nation and oversaw the proclamation of their accession in the city.

At the opening of the new reign he had considerable influence, was made lord privy seal, while Danby his rival was obliged to content himself with the presidency of the council, and controlled the appointments to the new cabinet which were made on a “trimming” or comprehensive basis. His views on religious toleration were as wide as those of the new king. He championed the claims of the Nonconformists as against the high or rigid Church party, and he was bitterly disappointed at the miscarriage of the Comprehension Bill. He thoroughly approved also at first of William’s foreign policy; but, having excited the hostility of both the Whig and Tory parties, he now became exposed to a series of attacks in parliament which finally drove him from power. He was severely censured, as it seems quite unjustly, for the disorder in Ireland, and an attempt was made to impeach him for his conduct with regard to the sentences on the Whig leaders. The inquiry resulted in his favour; but notwithstanding, and in spite of the king’s continued support, he determined to retire. He had already resigned the speakership of the House of Lords, and he now (Feb. 8, 1690) quitted his place in the cabinet. He still nominally retained his seat in the privy council, but in parliament he became a bitter critic of the administration; and the rivalry of Halifax (the Black Marquess) with Danby, now marquess of Carmarthen (the White Marquess) threw the former at this time into determined opposition. He disapproved of William’s total absorption in European politics, and his open partiality for his countrymen. In January 1691 Halifax had an interview with Henry Bulkeley, the Jacobite agent, and is said to have promised “to do everything that lay in his power to serve the king.” This was probably merely a measure of precaution, for he had no serious Jacobite leanings. He entered bail for Lord Marlborough, accused wrongfully of complicity in a Jacobite plot in May 1692, and in June, during the absence of the king from England, his name was struck off the privy council.

At the start of the new reign, he held significant influence and was appointed lord privy seal, while his rival Danby had to settle for the presidency of the council, controlling the appointments to the new cabinet which were made on a broad or inclusive basis. His ideas on religious tolerance were as progressive as those of the new king. He advocated for the rights of Nonconformists against the rigid Church faction and was deeply disappointed by the failure of the Comprehension Bill. Initially, he fully supported William’s foreign policy; however, after provoking hostility from both the Whig and Tory parties, he faced a series of attacks in parliament that ultimately forced him out of power. He was harshly criticized, seemingly unfairly, for the unrest in Ireland, and an attempt was made to impeach him over his handling of the sentences against the Whig leaders. The inquiry ruled in his favor; nonetheless, despite the king’s ongoing support, he chose to step down. He had already resigned from the speakership of the House of Lords and on February 8, 1690, he left his position in the cabinet. He still technically held his seat in the privy council, but in parliament, he became a harsh critic of the administration. The rivalry between Halifax (the Black Marquess) and Danby, now Marquess of Carmarthen (the White Marquess), pushed Halifax into strong opposition. He disapproved of William’s complete focus on European affairs and his open favoritism for his fellow countrymen. In January 1691, Halifax met with Henry Bulkeley, the Jacobite agent, and reportedly promised “to do everything that lay in his power to serve the king.” This was likely just a precaution, as he had no genuine Jacobite sympathies. He bailed out Lord Marlborough, who was wrongly accused of involvement in a Jacobite plot in May 1692, and in June, while the king was out of England, his name was removed from the privy council.

He spoke in favour of the Triennial Bill (Jan. 12, 1693) which passed the legislature but was vetoed by William, suggested a proviso in the Licensing Act, which restricted its operation to anonymous works, approved the Place Bill (1694), but opposed, probably on account of the large sums he had engaged in the traffic of annuities, the establishment of the bank of England in 1694. Early in 1695 he delivered a strong attack on the administration in the House of Lords, and, after a short illness arising from a neglected complaint, he died on the 5th of April at the age of sixty-one. He was buried in Henry VII.’s chapel in Westminster Abbey.

He supported the Triennial Bill (Jan. 12, 1693) that passed the legislature but was vetoed by William, proposed a provision in the Licensing Act that limited its application to anonymous works, approved the Place Bill (1694), but opposed, likely due to the significant money he had invested in annuities, the establishment of the Bank of England in 1694. Early in 1695, he launched a strong criticism of the government in the House of Lords, and after a brief illness from a neglected condition, he died on April 5th at the age of sixty-one. He was buried in Henry VII’s chapel in Westminster Abbey.

The influence of Halifax, both as orator and as writer, on the public opinion of his day was probably unrivalled. His intellectual powers, his high character, his urbanity, vivacity and satirical humour made a great impression on his contemporaries, and many of his witty sayings have been recorded. But the superiority of his statesmanship could not be appreciated till later times. Maintaining throughout his career a complete detachment from party, he never acted permanently or continuously with either of the two great factions, and exasperated both in turn by deserting their cause at the moment when their hopes seemed on the point of realization. To them he appeared weak, inconstant, untrustworthy. They could not see what to us now is plain and clear, that Halifax was as consistent in his principles as the most rabid Whig or Tory. But the principle which chiefly influenced his political action, that of compromise, differed essentially from those of both parties, and his attitude with regard to the Whigs or Tories was thus by necessity continually changing. Measures, too, which in certain circumstances appeared to him advisable, when the political scene had changed became unwise or dangerous. Thus the regency scheme, which Halifax had supported while Charles still reigned, was opposed by him with perfect consistency at the revolution. He readily accepted for himself the character of a “trimmer,” desiring, he said, to keep the boat steady, while others attempted to weigh it down perilously on one side or the other; and he concluded his tract with these assertions: “that our climate is a Trimmer between that part of the world where men are roasted and the other where they are frozen; that our Church is a Trimmer between the frenzy of fanatic visions and the lethargic ignorance of Popish dreams; that our laws are Trimmers between the excesses of unbounded power and the extravagance of liberty not enough restrained; that true virtue hath ever been thought a Trimmer, and to have its dwelling in the middle between two extremes; that even God Almighty Himself is divided between His two great attributes, His Mercy and His Justice. In such company, our Trimmer is not ashamed of his name....”5

The influence of Halifax, both as a speaker and a writer, on public opinion of his time was likely unmatched. His intelligence, strong character, charm, lively spirit, and sharp humor made a huge impression on his peers, and many of his clever remarks have been noted. However, his exceptional skills as a statesman weren’t truly appreciated until later. Throughout his career, he maintained complete independence from political parties, never fully committing to either of the two major factions, which frustrated both by abandoning their causes just when they seemed close to success. To them, he seemed weak, inconsistent, and unreliable. They failed to see what is now obvious to us: that Halifax was as steadfast in his principles as any passionate Whig or Tory. The principle that guided his political actions—compromise—was fundamentally different from the principles of both parties, which meant his stance regarding the Whigs or Tories was constantly shifting. Measures that seemed wise under certain conditions became unwise or risky when political circumstances changed. For instance, the regency plan that Halifax supported while Charles was still king, he opposed with unwavering consistency during the revolution. He readily accepted the label of a “trimmer,” stating he wanted to keep the situation stable while others tried to tip it dangerously to one side or the other. He concluded his writings with assertions like: “Our climate is a Trimmer between that part of the world where people are roasted and the other where they are frozen; our Church is a Trimmer between the frenzy of fanatical visions and the lethargic ignorance of Popish dreams; our laws are Trimmers between the extremes of unlimited power and the excess of insufficiently restrained liberty; true virtue has always been considered a Trimmer, residing in the middle between two extremes; even God Almighty Himself is divided between His two great attributes, Mercy and Justice. In such company, our Trimmer is not ashamed of his name....”5

His powerful mind enabled him to regard the various political problems of his time from a height and from a point of view similar to that from which distance from the events enables us to consider them at the present day; and the superiority of his vision appears sufficiently from the fact that his opinions and judgments on the political questions of his time are those which for the most part have ultimately triumphed and found general acceptance. His attitude of mind was curiously modern.6 Reading, writing and arithmetic, he thinks, should be taught to all and at the expense of the state. His opinions again on the constitutional relations of the colonies to the mother country, already cited, were completely opposed to those of his own period. For that view of his character which while allowing him the merit of a brilliant political theorist denies him the qualities of a man of action and of a practical politician, there is no solid basis. The truth is that while his political ideas are founded upon great moral or philosophical generalizations, often vividly 842 recalling and sometimes anticipating the broad conceptions of Burke, they are at the same time imbued with precisely those practical qualities which have ever been characteristic of English statesmenship, and were always capable of application to actual conditions. He was no star-gazing philosopher, with thoughts superior to the contemplation of mundane affairs. He had no taste for abstract political dogma. He seems to venture no further than to think that “men should live in some competent state of freedom,” and that the limited monarchical and aristocratic government was the best adapted for his country. “Circumstances,” he writes in the Rough Draft of a New Model at Sea, “must come in and are to be made a part of the matter of which we are to judge; positive decisions are always dangerous, more especially in politics.” Nor was he the mere literary student buried in books and in contemplative ease. He had none of the “indecisiveness which commonly renders literary men of no use in the world” (Sir John Dalrymple). The incidents of his career show that there was no backwardness or hesitation in acting when occasion required. The constant tendency of his mind towards antithesis and the balancing of opinions did not lead to paralysis in time of action. He did not shrink from responsibility, nor show on any occasion lack of courage. At various times of crisis he proved himself a great leader. He returned to public life to defeat the Exclusion Bill. At the revolution it was Halifax who seized the reins of government, flung away by James, and maintained public security. His subsequent failure in collaborating with William is, it is true, disappointing. But the cause was one that has not perhaps received sufficient attention. Party government had come to the birth during the struggles over the Exclusion Bill, and there had been unconsciously introduced into politics a novel element of which the nature and importance were not understood or suspected. Halifax had consistently ignored and neglected party; and it now had its revenge. Detested by the Whigs and by the Tories alike, and defended by neither, the favour alone of the king and his own transcendent abilities proved insufficient to withstand the constant and violent attacks made upon him in parliament, and he yielded to the superior force. He seems indeed himself to have been at last convinced of the necessity in English political life of party government, for though in his Cautions to electors he warns them against men “tied to a party,” yet in his last words he declares “If there are two parties a man ought to adhere to that which he disliked least though in the whole he doth not approve it; for whilst he doth not list himself in one or the other party, he is looked upon as such a straggler that he is fallen upon by both.... Happy those that are convinced so as to be of the general opinions” (Political Thoughts and Reflections of Parties).

His strong intellect allowed him to view the various political challenges of his time from a distance, much like how we consider them today; his clear perspective is evident in how his opinions and judgments on political matters are largely the ones that have ultimately succeeded and been widely accepted. His mindset was intriguingly modern. He believed that reading, writing, and math should be taught to everyone at the state's expense. His views on the constitutional relationship between the colonies and the mother country were completely against those of his time. The perception of him as a brilliant political theorist, but lacking the qualities of a man of action and a practical politician, is unfounded. The truth is that while his political ideas are based on significant moral or philosophical principles—often echoing and sometimes anticipating the broad ideas of Burke—they also possess the practical qualities typical of English statesmanship, always applicable to real-world situations. He wasn’t an idealistic philosopher, lost in thoughts above ordinary matters. He had no interest in abstract political doctrine. He seemed to think that "men should live in some adequate state of freedom" and that a limited monarchy and aristocracy were best suited for his country. "Circumstances," he wrote in the Rough Draft of a New Model at Sea, "must be taken into account and included in our judgments; definitive decisions are always risky, especially in politics." He wasn’t just a bookish student caught up in contemplation. He lacked the "indecisiveness that often makes literary men ineffective in the world" (Sir John Dalrymple). His career shows that he acted decisively when the situation called for it. His inclination for opposing views and weighing opinions didn’t paralyze him in times of action. He didn’t shy away from responsibility nor show cowardice. During various crises, he proved to be a great leader. He returned to public life to defeat the Exclusion Bill. At the revolution, it was Halifax who took control of the government, left behind by James, and ensured public security. His eventual failure to work with William is indeed disappointing, but the reasons have perhaps not been given enough attention. Party government emerged during the struggles over the Exclusion Bill, introducing a new element into politics that was not fully understood. Halifax consistently overlooked and disregarded party politics; now it had its revenge. Hated by both the Whigs and Tories, and with neither side defending him, the king's favor and his own exceptional talents were not enough to withstand the ongoing and intense attacks in parliament, and he succumbed to the greater force. He seems to have ultimately recognized the necessity of party government in English politics, for although he warned the voters against men "tied to a party" in his Cautions to electors, he stated in his last remarks, "If there are two parties, a man ought to align with the one he dislikes least, even if he doesn't fully approve; for while he doesn’t commit to either side, he’s seen as such an outsider that he’ll be attacked by both... Fortunate are those who are convinced enough to share general opinions" (Political Thoughts and Reflections of Parties).

The private character of Lord Halifax was in harmony with the greatness of his public career. He was by no means the “voluptuary” described by Macaulay. He was on the contrary free from self-indulgence; his manner of life was decent and frugal, and his dress proverbially simple. He was an affectionate father and husband. “His heart,” says Burnet (i. 492-493, ed. 1833), “was much set on raising his family”—his last concern even while on his deathbed was the remarriage of his son Lord Eland to perpetuate his name; and this is probably the cause of his acceptance of so many titles for which he himself affected a philosophical indifference. He was estimable in his social relations and habits. He showed throughout his career an honourable independence, and was never seen to worship the rising sun. In a period when even great men stooped to accept bribes, Halifax was known to be incorruptible; at a time when animosities were especially bitter, he was too great a man to harbour resentments. “Not only from policy,” says Reresby (Mem. p. 231), “(which teaches that we ought to let no man be our enemy when we can help it), but from his disposition I never saw any man more ready to forgive than himself.” Few were insensible to his personal charm and gaiety. He excelled especially in quick repartee, in “exquisite nonsense,” and in spontaneous humour. When quite a young man, just entering upon political life he is described by Evelyn as “a witty gentleman, if not a little too prompt and daring.” The latter characteristic was not moderated by time but remained through life. He was incapable of controlling his spirit of raillery, from jests on Siamese missionaries to sarcasms at the expense of the heir to the throne and ridicule of hereditary monarchy, and his brilliant paradoxes, his pungent and often profane epigrams were received by graver persons as his real opinions and as evidences of atheism. This latter charge he repudiated, assuring Burnet that he was “a Christian in submission,” but that he could not digest iron like an ostrich nor swallow all that the divines sought to impose upon the world.

The private side of Lord Halifax matched the greatness of his public life. He was far from the “pleasure-seeker” that Macaulay described. Instead, he was disciplined and not self-indulgent; he lived a modest and frugal life, and his clothing was famously simple. He was a caring father and husband. “His heart,” says Burnet (i. 492-493, ed. 1833), “was much set on raising his family”—even on his deathbed, his main concern was his son Lord Eland's remarriage to carry on the family name; this likely explains why he accepted so many titles for which he otherwise pretended to be indifferent. He was well-regarded in his social interactions and habits. Throughout his career, he demonstrated honorable independence and was never seen to flatter those in power. In a time when even prominent figures accepted bribes, Halifax was known for his integrity; during a period of especially bitter conflicts, he was too great a man to hold grudges. “Not only for political reasons,” says Reresby (Mem. p. 231), “(which teach us to avoid making enemies when we can), but by nature, I never encountered anyone as ready to forgive as he was.” Few could resist his personal charm and sense of humor. He particularly excelled at quick comebacks, “exquisite nonsense,” and spontaneous wit. When he was young and just starting in politics, Evelyn described him as “a witty gentleman, perhaps a bit too eager and audacious.” That latter trait didn’t fade with age; it remained throughout his life. He couldn’t restrain his playful teasing, making jokes about Siamese missionaries and sarcastic remarks about the heir to the throne, as well as poking fun at hereditary monarchy. His brilliant paradoxes and sharp, often irreverent epigrams were taken by more serious people as his true beliefs and signs of atheism. He denied this accusation, telling Burnet that he was “a Christian in submission,” but he couldn’t just swallow everything that the theologians wanted to impose on the world, like an ostrich swallowing iron.

The speeches of Halifax have not been preserved, and his political writings on this account have all the greater value. The Character of a Trimmer (1684 or 1685), the authorship of which, long doubtful, is now established,7 was his most ambitious production, written seemingly as advice to the king and as a manifesto of his own opinions. In it he discusses the political problems of the time and their solution on broad principles. He supports the Test Act and, while opposing the Indulgence, is not hostile to the repeal of the penal laws against the Roman Catholics by parliament. Turning to foreign affairs he contemplates with consternation the growing power of France and the humiliation of England, exclaiming indignantly at the sight of the “Roses blasted and discoloured while lilies triumph and grow insolent upon the comparison.” The whole is a masterly and comprehensive summary of the actual political situation and its exigencies; while, when he treats such themes as liberty, or discusses the balance to be maintained between freedom and government in the constitution, he rises to the political idealism of Bolingbroke and Burke. The Character of King Charles II. (printed 1750), to be compared with his earlier sketch of the king in the Character of a Trimmer, is perhaps from the literary point of view the most admirable of his writings. The famous Letter to a Dissenter (1687) was thought by Sir James Mackintosh to be unrivalled as a political pamphlet. The Lady’s New Year’s Gift: or Advice to a Daughter, refers to his daughter Elizabeth, afterwards wife of the 3rd and mother of the celebrated 4th earl of Chesterfield (1688). In The Anatomy of an Equivalent (1688) he treats with keen wit and power of analysis the proposal to grant a “perpetual edict” in favour of the Established Church in return for the repeal of the test and penal laws. Maxims of State appeared about 1692. The Rough Draft of a New Model at Sea (c. 1694), though apparently only a fragment, is one of the most interesting and characteristic of his writings. It opens with the question: “’What shall we do to be saved in this world?’ There is no other answer but this, ‘Look to your moat.’ The first article of an Englishman’s political creed must be that he believeth in the sea.” He discusses the naval establishment, not from the naval point of view alone, but from the general aspect of the constitution of which it is a detail, and is thus led on to consider the nature of the constitution itself, and to show that it is not an artificial structure but a growth and product of the natural character. We may also mention Some Cautions to the electors of the parliament (1694), and Political, Moral and Miscellaneous Thoughts and Reflections (n.d.), a collection of aphorisms in the style of the maxims of La Rochefoucauld, inferior in style—but greatly excelling the French author in breadth of view and in moderation. (For other writings attributed to Halifax, see Foxcroft, Life of Sir G. Savile, ii. 529 sqq.).

The speeches of Halifax haven't been preserved, so his political writings are even more valuable. The Character of a Trimmer (1684 or 1685), whose authorship was long uncertain but is now confirmed, was his most ambitious work, seemingly written as advice to the king and as a declaration of his opinions. In it, he addresses the political issues of the time and their solutions on broad principles. He supports the Test Act and, while opposing the Indulgence, doesn't object to the repeal of the penal laws against Roman Catholics by parliament. Turning to foreign affairs, he expresses alarm at the increasing power of France and England's humiliation, indignantly exclaiming at the sight of the “Roses blasted and discolored while lilies triumph and grow arrogant in comparison.” The piece is a masterful and comprehensive summary of the current political situation and its necessities; when he talks about topics like liberty or discusses the balance between freedom and government in the constitution, he reaches the political idealism of Bolingbroke and Burke. The Character of King Charles II. (printed 1750), compared to his earlier portrayal of the king in The Character of a Trimmer, is perhaps the most impressive of his writings from a literary perspective. The famous Letter to a Dissenter (1687) was considered by Sir James Mackintosh to be unmatched as a political pamphlet. The Lady’s New Year’s Gift: or Advice to a Daughter refers to his daughter Elizabeth, later the wife of the 3rd and mother of the famous 4th Earl of Chesterfield (1688). In The Anatomy of an Equivalent (1688), he cleverly and powerfully analyzes the proposal to grant a “perpetual edict” in favor of the Established Church in exchange for repealing the test and penal laws. Maxims of State was published around 1692. The Rough Draft of a New Model at Sea (c. 1694), though apparently just a fragment, is one of the most interesting and characteristic of his works. It begins with the question: “What shall we do to be saved in this world?” The only answer is, “Look to your moat.” The first rule of an Englishman’s political beliefs must be that he believes in the sea.” He discusses the navy, not just from a naval perspective but also in relation to the constitution of which it is a part, leading him to consider the very nature of the constitution itself, showing it as a natural development rather than an artificial construct. We can also mention Some Cautions to the electors of parliament (1694), and Political, Moral and Miscellaneous Thoughts and Reflections (n.d.), a collection of aphorisms similar to La Rochefoucauld’s maxims, though lower in style—yet greatly surpassing the French author in breadth of perspective and moderation. (For other writings attributed to Halifax, see Foxcroft, Life of Sir G. Savile, ii. 529 sqq.).

Halifax was twice married, first in 1656 to the Lady Dorothy Spencer—daughter of the 1st earl of Sunderland and of Dorothy Sidney, “Sacharissa”—who died in 1670, leaving a family; and secondly, in 1672, to Gertrude, daughter of William Pierrepont of Thoresby, who survived him, and by whom he had one daughter, Elizabeth, Lady Chesterfield, who seems to have inherited a considerable portion of her father’s intellectual abilities. On the death of his son William, 2nd marquess of Halifax, in August 1700 without male issue, the peerage became extinct, and the baronetcy passed to the Saviles of Lupset, the whole 843 male line of the Savile family ending in the person of Sir George Savile, 8th baronet, in 1784. Henry Savile, British envoy at Versailles, who died unmarried in 1687, was a younger brother of the first marquess. Halifax has been generally supposed to have been the father of the illegitimate Henry Carey, the poet, but this is doubtful.

Halifax was married twice, first in 1656 to Lady Dorothy Spencer—the daughter of the 1st Earl of Sunderland and Dorothy Sidney, known as “Sacharissa”—who died in 1670, leaving behind a family. His second marriage was in 1672 to Gertrude, the daughter of William Pierrepont of Thoresby, who outlived him. They had one daughter, Elizabeth, Lady Chesterfield, who seems to have inherited a significant part of her father’s intellectual talents. When his son William, the 2nd Marquess of Halifax, died in August 1700 without any male heirs, the peerage became extinct, and the baronetcy passed to the Saviles of Lupset, with the entire male line of the Savile family coming to an end with Sir George Savile, the 8th Baronet, in 1784. Henry Savile, the British envoy at Versailles, who died unmarried in 1687, was a younger brother of the first Marquess. It's commonly believed that Halifax was the father of the illegitimate Henry Carey, the poet, but this is uncertain.

See Life and Letters of Sir George Savile, 1st Marquis of Halifax (2 vols., 1898), by Miss H. C. Foxcroft, who has collected and made excellent use of all the material available at that date, including hitherto unexplored Savile MSS., at Devonshire House, in the Spencer Archives, in the Longleat and other collections, and who has edited the works of Halifax and printed a memorandum of conversations with King William of 1688-1690, left in MS. by Halifax. Macaulay, in his History of England, misjudged Halifax on some points, but nevertheless understood and did justice to the greatness of his statesmanship, and pronounced on him a well-merited and eloquent eulogy (iv. 545). Contemporary characters of Halifax which must be accepted with caution are Burnet’s in the History of His Own Times (ed. 1833, vol. i. pp. 491-493, and iv. 268), that by the author of “Savilianal,” identified as William Mompesson, and “Sacellum Apollinare,” a panegyric in verse by Elkanah Settle (1695).

See Life and Letters of Sir George Savile, 1st Marquis of Halifax (2 vols., 1898), by Miss H. C. Foxcroft, who has gathered and effectively utilized all the material available at that time, including previously unexplored Savile manuscripts at Devonshire House, in the Spencer Archives, in the Longleat, and other collections. She has also edited Halifax's works and published a memorandum of conversations with King William from 1688-1690, which was left in manuscript form by Halifax. Macaulay, in his History of England, misunderstood Halifax on some points but still recognized and praised the greatness of his statesmanship, delivering a well-deserved and eloquent tribute (iv. 545). Contemporary views of Halifax that should be taken with caution include Burnet’s in the History of His Own Times (ed. 1833, vol. i. pp. 491-493, and iv. 268), that by the author of “Savilianal,” identified as William Mompesson, and “Sacellum Apollinare,” a poetic tribute by Elkanah Settle (1695).

(P. C. Y.)

1 Cal. State Papers, Dom. (Nov. 1667-Sep. 1668). p. 106.

1 Cal. State Papers, Dom. (Nov. 1667-Sep. 1668). p. 106.

2 Lords’ Journals, 12, p. 567; Savile Correspondence, ed. by W. D. Cooper, p. 136; “Character of a Trimmer,” in Life of Sir G. Savile, by H. C. Foxcroft, ii. 316.

2 Lords’ Journals, 12, p. 567; Savile Correspondence, edited by W. D. Cooper, p. 136; “Character of a Trimmer,” in Life of Sir G. Savile, by H. C. Foxcroft, ii. 316.

3 Foxcroft i. 160, where Hallam is quoted to this effect.

3 Foxcroft i. 160, where Hallam is quoted to this effect.

4 Hist. MSS. Comm. House of Lords MSS. 1689-1690, p. 287.

4 Hist. MSS. Comm. House of Lords MSS. 1689-1690, p. 287.

5 Character of a Trimmer, conclusion.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Character of a Trimmer, wrap-up.

6 Saviliana quoted by Foxcroft i. 115.

6 Saviliana cited by Foxcroft i. 115.

7 Foxcroft, ii. 273 et seq., and Hist. MSS. Comm. MSS. of F. W. Leyborne-Popham, p. 264.

7 Foxcroft, ii. 273 and following, and Hist. MSS. Comm. MSS. of F. W. Leyborne-Popham, p. 264.


HALIFAX, a city and port of entry, capital of the province of Nova Scotia, Canada. It is situated in 44° 59′ N. and 63° 35′ W., on the south-east coast of the province, on a fortified hill, 225 ft. in height, which slopes down to the waters of Chebucto Bay, now known as Halifax Harbour. The harbour, which is open all the year, is about 6 m. long by 1 m. in width, and has excellent anchorage in all parts; to the north a narrow passage connects it with Bedford Basin, 6 m. in length by 4 m., and deep enough for the largest men-of-war. At the harbour mouth lies McNab’s Island, thus forming two entrances; the eastern passage is only employed by small vessels, though in 1862 the Confederate cruiser, “Tallahassee,” slipped through by night, and escaped the northern vessels which were watching off the western entrance. The population in 1901 was 40,832.

HALIFAX, is a city and port of entry, and the capital of Nova Scotia, Canada. It is located at 44° 59′ N. and 63° 35′ W., on the southeast coast of the province, on a fortified hill that is 225 feet tall, sloping down to Chebucto Bay, now known as Halifax Harbour. The harbour is open year-round, measuring about 6 miles long and 1 mile wide, with excellent anchorage throughout. To the north, a narrow passage connects it to Bedford Basin, which is 6 miles long and 4 miles wide, deep enough to accommodate the largest warships. At the mouth of the harbour is McNab’s Island, creating two entrances; the eastern passage is generally used only by small vessels, although in 1862, the Confederate cruiser “Tallahassee” managed to slip through at night, avoiding the northern ships monitoring the western entrance. The population in 1901 was 40,832.

The town was originally built of wood, plastered or stuccoed, but though the wooden houses largely remain, the public buildings are of stone. Inferior in natural strength to Quebec alone, the city and its approaches have been fortified till it has become the strongest position in Canada, and one of the strongest in the British Empire. Till 1906 it was garrisoned by British troops, but in that year, with Esquimalt, on the Pacific coast, it was taken over by the Canadian government, an operation necessitating a large increase in the Canadian permanent military force. At the same time, the royal dockyard, containing a dry-dock 610 ft. in length, and the residences in connexion, were also taken over for the use of the department of marine and fisheries. Till 1905 Halifax was the summer station of the British North American squadron. In that year, in consequence of a redistribution of the fleet, the permanent North American squadron was withdrawn; but Halifax is still visited periodically by powerful squadrons of cruisers.

The town was originally built with wood and covered in plaster or stucco, but while many of the wooden houses still stand, the public buildings are made of stone. Weaker in natural strength than Quebec alone, the city and its surroundings have been fortified to become the strongest position in Canada and one of the strongest in the British Empire. Until 1906, it was garrisoned by British troops, but that year, along with Esquimalt on the Pacific coast, it was taken over by the Canadian government, which required a significant increase in the Canadian permanent military force. At the same time, the royal dockyard, which includes a dry dock 610 ft. long, and the associated residences were also taken over for the department of marine and fisheries. Until 1905, Halifax was the summer station for the British North American squadron. In that year, due to a redistribution of the fleet, the permanent North American squadron was withdrawn; however, Halifax still occasionally hosts powerful squadrons of cruisers.

Though, owing to the growth of Sydney and other outports, it no longer monopolizes the foreign trade of the province, Halifax is still a thriving town, and has the largest export trade of the Dominion in fish and fish products, the export of fish alone, in 1904, amounting to over three-fifths that of the entire Dominion. Lumber (chiefly spruce deals) and agricultural products (especially apples) are also exported in large quantities. The chief imports are manufactures from Great Britain and the United States, and sugar, molasses, rum and fruit from the West Indies. Its industrial establishments include foundries, sugar refineries, manufactures of furniture and other articles of wood, a skate factory and rope and cordage works, the produce of which are all exported. It is the Atlantic terminus of the Intercolonial, Canadian Pacific and several provincial railways, and the chief winter port of Canada, numerous steamship lines connecting it with Great Britain, Europe, the West Indies and the United States. The public gardens, covering 14 acres, and Point Pleasant Park, left to a great extent in its natural state, are extremely beautiful. Behind the city is an arm of the sea (known as the North-West Arm), 5 m. in length and 1 m. in breadth, with high, well-wooded shores, and covered in summer with canoes and sailing craft. The educational institutions include a ladies’ college, several convents, a Presbyterian theological college and Dalhousie University, with faculties of arts, law, medicine and science. Established by charter in 1818 by the earl of Dalhousie, then lieutenant governor, and reorganized in 1863, it has since become much the most important seat of learning in the maritime provinces. Other prominent buildings are Government House, the provincial parliament and library, and the Roman Catholic cathedral. St Paul’s church (Anglican) dates from 1750, and though not striking architecturally, is interesting from the memorial tablets and the graves of celebrated Nova Scotians which it contains. The city is the seat of the Anglican bishop of Nova Scotia and Prince Edward Island, and of the Roman Catholic bishop of Halifax.

Though, due to the growth of Sydney and other ports, it no longer has a monopoly on the foreign trade of the province, Halifax is still a bustling town. It has the largest export trade in fish and fish products for the Dominion, with fish exports alone in 1904 accounting for over three-fifths of the entire Dominion's total. Lumber (mainly spruce deals) and agricultural products (especially apples) are also exported in large quantities. The main imports are manufactured goods from Great Britain and the United States, along with sugar, molasses, rum, and fruit from the West Indies. Its industrial plants include foundries, sugar refineries, furniture manufacturing, a skate factory, and rope and cordage works, all of which produce items that are exported. It is the eastern terminus of the Intercolonial, Canadian Pacific, and several provincial railways, serving as Canada's main winter port, with numerous steamship lines linking it to Great Britain, Europe, the West Indies, and the United States. The public gardens, spanning 14 acres, and Point Pleasant Park, mostly left in its natural state, are incredibly beautiful. Behind the city is an arm of the sea (known as the North-West Arm) that is 5 miles long and 1 mile wide, with high, well-wooded shores filled with canoes and sailing boats in the summer. The educational institutions include a ladies’ college, several convents, a Presbyterian theological college, and Dalhousie University, which offers arts, law, medicine, and science programs. Established by charter in 1818 by the Earl of Dalhousie, who was then lieutenant governor, and reorganized in 1863, it has since become the most important center of learning in the maritime provinces. Other notable buildings include Government House, the provincial parliament and library, and the Roman Catholic cathedral. St. Paul’s Church (Anglican), dating back to 1750, while not architecturally striking, is interesting for its memorial tablets and the graves of notable Nova Scotians. The city is home to the Anglican bishop of Nova Scotia and Prince Edward Island, as well as the Roman Catholic bishop of Halifax.

Founded in 1749 by the Hon. Edward Cornwallis as a rival to the French town of Louisburg in Cape Breton, it was named after the 2nd earl of Halifax, president of the board of trade and plantations. In the following year it superseded Annapolis as capital of the province. Its privateers played a prominent part in the war of 1812-15 with the United States, and during the American Civil War it was a favourite base of operations for Confederate blockade-runners. The federation of the North American provinces in 1867 lessened its relative importance, but its merchants have gradually adapted themselves to the altered conditions.

Founded in 1749 by the Hon. Edward Cornwallis as a competitor to the French town of Louisburg in Cape Breton, it was named after the 2nd Earl of Halifax, who was the president of the board of trade and plantations. The following year, it became the capital of the province, replacing Annapolis. Its privateers played a significant role in the War of 1812-15 with the United States, and during the American Civil War, it became a popular base for Confederate blockade-runners. The federation of the North American provinces in 1867 reduced its relative importance, but its merchants have gradually adapted to the new circumstances.


HALIFAX, a municipal, county and parliamentary borough in the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, 194 m. N.N.W. from London and 7 m. S.W. from Bradford, on the Great Northern and the Lancashire & Yorkshire railways. Pop. (1891), 97,714; (1901) 104,936. It lies in a bare hilly district on and above the small river Hebble near its junction with the Calder. Its appearance is in the main modern, though a few picturesque old houses remain. The North Bridge, a fine iron structure, spans the valley, giving connexion between the opposite higher parts of the town. The principal public building is the town hall, completed in 1863 after the designs of Sir Charles Barry; it is a handsome Palladian building with a tower. Of churches the most noteworthy is that of St John the Baptist, the parish church, a Perpendicular building with lofty western tower. Two earlier churches are traceable on this side, the first perhaps pre-Norman, the second of the Early English period. The old woodwork is fine, part being Perpendicular, but the greater portion dates from 1621. All Souls’ church was built in 1859 from the designs of Sir Gilbert Scott, of whose work it is a good example, at the expense of Mr Edward Akroyd. The style is early Decorated, and a rich ornamentation is carried out in Italian marble, serpentine and alabaster. A graceful tower and spire 236 ft. high rise at the north-west angle. The Square chapel, erected by the Congregationalists in 1857, is a striking cruciform building with a tower and elaborate crocketed spire. Both the central library and museum and the Akroyd museum and art gallery occupy buildings which were formerly residences, the one of Sir Francis Crossley (1817-1872) and the other of Mr Edward Akroyd. Among charitable institutions the principal is the handsome royal infirmary, a Renaissance building. The Heath grammar school was founded in 1585 under royal charter for instruction in classical languages. It possesses close scholarships at Oxford and Cambridge universities. The Waterhouse charity school occupies a handsome set of buildings forming three sides of a quadrangle, erected in 1855. The Crossley almshouses were erected and endowed by Sir Francis and Mr Joseph Crossley, who also endowed the Crossley orphan home and school. Technical schools are maintained by the corporation. Among other public buildings may be noted the Piece-Hall, erected in 1799 for the lodgment and sale of piece goods, now used as a market, a great quadrangular structure occupying more than two acres; the bonding warehouse, court-house, and mechanics’ institute. There are six parks, of which the People’s Park of 12½ acres, presented by Sir Francis Crossley in 1858, is laid out in ornate style from designs by Sir Joseph Paxton.

HALIFAX, is a municipal, county, and parliamentary borough in West Yorkshire, England, located 194 miles north-northwest of London and 7 miles southwest of Bradford, accessible via the Great Northern and Lancashire & Yorkshire railways. Its population was 97,714 in 1891 and 104,936 in 1901. The town sits in a hilly area above the small River Hebble near its confluence with the Calder. Its overall look is mostly modern, although a few charming old houses still exist. The North Bridge, an impressive iron structure, crosses the valley, connecting the higher parts of the town. The main public building is the town hall, which was completed in 1863 based on designs by Sir Charles Barry; it's a beautiful Palladian building with a tower. The most notable church is St John the Baptist, the parish church, which is a Perpendicular style building with a tall western tower. Two earlier churches can be seen on this side, one possibly pre-Norman and the other from the Early English period. The old woodwork is exquisite, with some parts being Perpendicular, but most dates back to 1621. All Souls’ church was built in 1859, following designs by Sir Gilbert Scott, and it exemplifies his style, funded by Mr Edward Akroyd. It's in an early Decorated style and features rich decorations in Italian marble, serpentine, and alabaster. A graceful tower and spire rising 236 feet can be found at the northwest corner. The Square chapel, built by Congregationalists in 1857, is a striking cross-shaped structure with a tower and an intricate crocketed spire. Both the central library and museum and the Akroyd museum and art gallery occupy former residences, with the former belonging to Sir Francis Crossley (1817-1872) and the latter to Mr Edward Akroyd. Among charitable institutions, the main one is the beautiful royal infirmary, designed in the Renaissance style. Heath grammar school was founded in 1585 under a royal charter to teach classical languages and offers scholarships to Oxford and Cambridge universities. The Waterhouse charity school features an attractive set of buildings forming three sides of a quadrangle, built in 1855. The Crossley almshouses were built and funded by Sir Francis and Mr Joseph Crossley, who also established the Crossley orphan home and school. The corporation maintains technical schools as well. Other notable public buildings include the Piece-Hall, constructed in 1799 for trading piece goods and now used as a market; it’s an impressive quadrangular structure covering more than two acres, as well as the bonding warehouse, courthouse, and mechanics’ institute. There are six parks, with the People’s Park spanning 12½ acres, donated by Sir Francis Crossley in 1858, designed in an ornate style by Sir Joseph Paxton.

Halifax ranks with Leeds, Bradford and Huddersfield as a seat of the woollen and worsted manufacture. The manufacture of carpets is a large industry, one establishment employing some 844 5000 hands. The worsted, woollen and cotton industries, and the iron, steel and machinery manufactures are very extensive. There are collieries and freestone quarries in the neighbourhood.

Halifax is on par with Leeds, Bradford, and Huddersfield as a hub for wool and worsted production. The carpet manufacturing sector is significant, with one company employing around 5000 workers. The woolen, worsted, and cotton industries, along with iron, steel, and machinery production, are quite large. There are coal mines and freestone quarries in the area.

The parliamentary borough returns two members. The county borough was created in 1888. The municipal borough is under a mayor, 15 aldermen and 45 councillors. Area, 13,967 acres.

The parliamentary borough elects two members. The county borough was established in 1888. The municipal borough is governed by a mayor, 15 aldermen, and 45 councillors. Area, 13,967 acres.

At the time of the Conquest Halifax formed part of the extensive manor of Wakefield, which belonged to the king, but in the 13th century was in the hands of John, earl Warrenne (c. 1245-1305). The prosperity of the town began with the introduction of the cloth trade in the 15th century, when there are said to have been only thirteen houses, which before the end of the 16th century had increased to 520. Camden, about the end of the 17th century, wrote that “the people are very industrious, so that though the soil about it be barren and improfitable, not fit to live on, they have so flourished ... by the clothing trade that they are very rich and have gained a reputation for it above their neighbours.” The trade is said to have been increased by the arrival of certain merchants driven from the Netherlands by the persecution of the duke of Alva. Among the curious customs of Halifax was the Gibbet Law, which was probably established by a prescriptive right to protect the wool trade, and gave the inhabitants the power of executing any one taken within their liberty, who, when tried by a jury of sixteen of the frith-burgesses, was found guilty of the theft of any goods of the value of more than 13d. The executions took place on market days on a hill outside the town, the gibbet somewhat resembling a guillotine. The first execution recorded under this law took place in 1541, and the right was exercised in Halifax longer than in any other town, the last execution taking place in 1650. In 1635 the king granted the inhabitants of Halifax licence to found a workhouse in a large house given to them for that purpose by Nathaniel Waterhouse, and incorporated them under the name of the master and governors. Nathaniel Waterhouse was appointed the first master, his successors being elected every year by the twelve governors from among themselves. Halifax was a borough by prescription, its privileges growing up with the increased prosperity brought by the cloth trade, but it was not incorporated until 1848. Since the Reform Act of 1832 the burgesses have returned two members to parliament. In 1607 David Waterhouse, lord of the manor of Halifax, obtained a grant of two markets there every week on Friday and Saturday and two fairs every year, each lasting three days, one beginning on the 24th of June, the other on the 11th of November. Later these fairs and markets were confirmed with the addition of an extra market on Thursday to Sir William Ayloffe, baronet, who had succeeded David Waterhouse as lord of the manor. The market rights were sold to the Markets Company in 1810 and purchased from them by the corporation in 1853.

At the time of the Conquest, Halifax was part of the large manor of Wakefield, which belonged to the king but, in the 13th century, was controlled by John, Earl Warrenne (c. 1245-1305). The town began to thrive with the cloth trade in the 15th century, when there were said to be only thirteen houses, which grew to 520 by the end of the 16th century. Camden wrote around the end of the 17th century that “the people are very industrious, so that though the soil around it is barren and unproductive, not suitable for living, they have thrived ... through the clothing trade, which has made them quite wealthy and given them a reputation above their neighbors.” The trade is thought to have been boosted by the arrival of merchants fleeing from the Netherlands due to the persecution by the Duke of Alva. Among the strange customs of Halifax was the Gibbet Law, likely established as a right to protect the wool trade, allowing the locals to execute anyone caught within their jurisdiction who was found guilty by a jury of sixteen residents for stealing goods worth more than 13d. Executions happened on market days on a hill outside the town, with the gibbet resembling a guillotine. The first execution recorded under this law took place in 1541, and the right was used in Halifax longer than in any other town, with the last execution occurring in 1650. In 1635, the king granted the residents of Halifax permission to establish a workhouse in a large house donated by Nathaniel Waterhouse, incorporating them under the name of the master and governors. Nathaniel Waterhouse was named the first master, with his successors elected each year by the twelve governors from among themselves. Halifax was a borough by prescription, with its privileges growing alongside the prosperity of the cloth trade, but it wasn't officially incorporated until 1848. Since the Reform Act of 1832, the burgesses have elected two members to parliament. In 1607, David Waterhouse, lord of the manor of Halifax, obtained a grant for two markets every week on Friday and Saturday, as well as two annual fairs, each lasting three days, with one starting on June 24 and the other on November 11. Later, these fairs and markets were confirmed, with an additional market on Thursday granted to Sir William Ayloffe, baronet, who succeeded David Waterhouse as lord of the manor. The market rights were sold to the Markets Company in 1810 and were purchased from them by the corporation in 1853.

During the Civil War Halifax was garrisoned by parliament, and a field near it is still called the Bloody Field on account of an engagement which took place there between the forces of parliament and the Royalists.

During the Civil War, Halifax was occupied by Parliament, and a nearby field is still known as the Bloody Field because of a clash that occurred there between the Parliament forces and the Royalists.

See Victoria County History, “Yorkshire”; T. Wright, The Antiquities of the Town of Halifax (Leeds, 1738); John Watson, The History and Antiquities of the Parish of Halifax (London, 1775); John Crabtree, A Concise History of the Parish and Vicarage of Halifax (Halifax and London, 1836).

See Victoria County History, “Yorkshire”; T. Wright, The Antiquities of the Town of Halifax (Leeds, 1738); John Watson, The History and Antiquities of the Parish of Halifax (London, 1775); John Crabtree, A Concise History of the Parish and Vicarage of Halifax (Halifax and London, 1836).


ḤALIṢAH (Hebrew, חליצה “untying”), the ceremony by which a Jewish widow releases her brother-in-law from the obligation to marry her in accordance with Deuteronomy xxv. 5-10, and obtains her own freedom to remarry. By the law of Moses it became obligatory upon the brother of a man dying childless to take his widow as wife. If he refused, “then shall his brother’s wife come unto him in the presence of the elders and loose his shoe from off his foot, and spit in his face, and shall answer and say, So shall it be done unto that man that will not build up his brother’s house.” By Rabbinical law the ceremony was later made more complex. The parties appear before a court of three elders with two assessors. The place is usually the synagogue house, or that of the Rabbi, sometimes that of the widow. After inquiry as to the relationship of the parties and their status (for if either be a minor or deformed, ḥaliṣah cannot take place), the shoe is produced. It is usually the property of the community and made entirely of leather from the skin of a “clean” animal. It is of two pieces, the upper part and the sole, sewn together with leathern threads. It has three small straps in front, and two white straps to bind it on the leg. After it is strapped on, the man must walk four cubits in the presence of the court. The widow then loosens and removes the shoe, throwing it some distance, and spits on the ground, repeating thrice the Biblical formula “So shall it be done,” &c. Ḥaliṣah, which is still common among orthodox Jews, must not take place on the Sabbath, a holiday, or the eve of either, or in the evening. To prevent brothers-in-law from extorting money from a widow as a price for releasing her from perpetual widowhood, Jewish law obliges all brothers at the time of a marriage to sign a document pledging themselves to submit to ḥaliṣah without payment. (Compare Levirate).

ḤALIṢAH (Hebrew, חליצה “untying”), is the ceremony by which a Jewish widow frees her brother-in-law from the obligation to marry her, according to Deuteronomy xxv. 5-10, and gains her right to remarry. According to Moses' law, if a man dies without children, his brother must marry the widow. If he refuses, “then shall his brother’s wife come unto him in the presence of the elders and loose his shoe from off his foot, and spit in his face, and shall answer and say, So shall it be done unto that man that will not build up his brother’s house.” Later, Rabbinical law made the ceremony more complex. The involved parties present themselves before a court of three elders and two assessors, usually at the synagogue or the Rabbi's house, sometimes at the widow's home. They first check the relationship and status of both parties, as ḥaliṣah can't happen if either is a minor or disabled. The shoe used is generally community property, made entirely of leather from a “clean” animal. It has two parts, the upper part and the sole, stitched together with leather threads. It features three small straps in front and two white straps to secure it on the leg. After strapping it on, the man must walk four cubits in front of the court. The widow then loosens and removes the shoe, throwing it some distance away, and spits on the ground, repeating three times the Biblical phrase “So shall it be done,” etc. Ḥaliṣah, which is still practiced among Orthodox Jews, cannot take place on the Sabbath, a holiday, or the evening before either. To prevent brothers-in-law from demanding payment to release a widow from perpetual widowhood, Jewish law requires all brothers at the time of marriage to sign a document promising to comply with ḥaliṣah without any payment. (Compare Levirate).


HALKETT, HUGH, Freiherr von (1783-1863), British soldier and general of infantry in the Hanoverian service, was the second son of Major-General F. G. Halkett, who had served many years in the army, and whose ancestors had for several generations distinguished themselves in foreign services. With the “Scotch Brigade” which his father had been largely instrumental in raising, Hugh Halkett served in India from 1798 to 1801. In 1803 his elder brother Colin was appointed to command a battalion of the newly formed King’s German Legion, and in this he became senior captain and then major. Under his brother’s command he served with Cathcart’s expeditions to Hanover, Rügen and Copenhagen, where his bold initiative on outpost duty won commendation. He was in the Peninsula in 1808-1809, and at Walcheren. At Albuera, Salamanca, &c., he commanded the 2nd Light Infantry Battalion, K.G.L., in succession to his brother, and at Venta del Pozo in the Burgos retreat he greatly distinguished himself. In 1813 he left the Peninsula and was subsequently employed in the organization of the new Hanoverian army. He led a brigade of these troops in Count Wallmoden’s army, and bore a marked part in the battle of Göhrde and the action of Schestedt, where he took with his own hand a Danish standard. In the Waterloo campaign he commanded two brigades of Hanoverian militia which were sent to the front with the regulars, and during the fight with the Old Guard captured General Cambronne. After the fall of Napoleon he elected to stay in the Hanoverian service, though he retained his half-pay lieutenant-colonelcy in the English army. He rose to be general and inspector-general of infantry. In his old age he led the Xth Federal Army Corps in the Danish War of 1848, and defeated the Danes at Oversee. He had the G.C.H., the C.B. and many foreign orders, including the Prussian order of the Black Eagle and pour le Mérite and the Russian St Anne.

HALKETT, HUGH, Baron von (1783-1863), was a British soldier and general of infantry who served in the Hanoverian army. He was the second son of Major-General F. G. Halkett, who had a lengthy military career, and whose family had earned a reputation in foreign services for several generations. Hugh Halkett served in India from 1798 to 1801 with the “Scotch Brigade,” which his father helped to raise. In 1803, his older brother Colin was appointed to lead a battalion of the newly established King’s German Legion, eventually becoming a senior captain and then a major. Under his brother’s leadership, Hugh participated in Cathcart’s expeditions to Hanover, Rügen, and Copenhagen, where his bold actions on outpost duty received praise. He was active in the Peninsula in 1808-1809 and at Walcheren. At Albuera, Salamanca, and other battles, he commanded the 2nd Light Infantry Battalion, K.G.L., succeeding his brother, and distinguished himself notably at Venta del Pozo during the Burgos retreat. In 1813, he left the Peninsula and went on to help organize the new Hanoverian army. He led a brigade within Count Wallmoden’s forces and played a significant role in the battles of Göhrde and Schestedt, where he personally captured a Danish standard. During the Waterloo campaign, he commanded two brigades of Hanoverian militia sent to the front alongside regular troops and captured General Cambronne during the clash with the Old Guard. After Napoleon's defeat, he chose to remain in the Hanoverian service, while still holding his half-pay lieutenant-colonel position in the British army. He eventually rose to the rank of general and inspector-general of infantry. In his later years, he led the Xth Federal Army Corps in the Danish War of 1848, achieving victory over the Danes at Oversee. He was awarded the G.C.H., the C.B., and numerous foreign honors, including the Prussian Order of the Black Eagle, the pour le Mérite, and the Russian St. Anne.

See Knesebeck, Leben des Freiherrn Hugh von Halkett (Stuttgart, 1865).

See Knesebeck, Leben des Freiherrn Hugh von Halkett (Stuttgart, 1865).

His brother, Sir Colin Halkett (1774-1856), British soldier, began his military career in the Dutch Guards and served in various “companies” for three years, leaving as a captain in 1795. From 1800 to the peace of Amiens he served with the Dutch troops in English pay in Guernsey. In August 1803 Halkett was one of the first officers assigned to the service of raising the King’s German Legion, and he became major, and later lieutenant-colonel, commanding the 2nd Light Infantry Battalion. His battalion was employed in the various expeditions mentioned above, from Hanover to Walcheren, and in 1811 Colin Halkett succeeded Charles Alten in the command of the Light Brigade, K.G.L., which he held throughout the Peninsula War from Albuera to Toulouse. In 1815 Major-General Sir Colin Halkett commanded the 5th British Brigade of Alten’s division, and at Waterloo he received four wounds. Unlike his brother, he remained in the British service, in which he rose to general. At the time of his death he was governor of Chelsea 845 hospital. He had honorary general’s rank in the Hanoverian service, the G.C.B. and G.C.H., as well as numerous foreign orders.

His brother, Sir Colin Halkett (1774-1856), a British soldier, started his military career in the Dutch Guards and spent three years in various “companies,” leaving as a captain in 1795. From 1800 until the peace of Amiens, he served with the Dutch troops financed by England in Guernsey. In August 1803, Halkett was among the first officers assigned to help raise the King’s German Legion, where he became a major and later a lieutenant-colonel, leading the 2nd Light Infantry Battalion. His battalion took part in several expeditions mentioned earlier, from Hanover to Walcheren, and in 1811, Colin Halkett took over command of the Light Brigade, K.G.L., from Charles Alten, a position he maintained throughout the Peninsula War from Albuera to Toulouse. In 1815, Major-General Sir Colin Halkett led the 5th British Brigade of Alten’s division, and at Waterloo, he sustained four wounds. Unlike his brother, he continued in British service, eventually rising to the rank of general. At the time of his death, he was the governor of Chelsea 845 hospital. He held honorary general's rank in the Hanoverian service, the G.C.B. and G.C.H., along with numerous foreign honors.

For information about both the Halketts, see Beamish, History of the King’s German Legion (1832).

For information about both the Halketts, check out Beamish, History of the King’s German Legion (1832).


HALL, BASIL (1788-1844), British naval officer, traveller and miscellaneous writer, was born at Edinburgh on the 31st of December 1788. His father was Sir James Hall of Dunglass, the geologist. Basil Hall was educated at the High School, Edinburgh, and in 1802 entered the navy, where he rose to the rank of post-captain in 1817, after seeing active service in several fields. By observing the ethnological as well as the physical peculiarities of the countries he visited, he collected the materials for a very large number of scientific papers. In 1816 he commanded the sloop “Lyra,” which accompanied Lord Amherst’s embassy to China; and he described his cruise in An Account of a Voyage of Discovery to the West Coast of Corea and the Great Loo-choo Island in the Japan Sea (London, 1818). In 1820 he held a command on the Pacific coast of America, and in 1824 published two volumes of Extracts from a Journal written on the Coasts of Chili, Peru and Mexico in the Years 1820-21-22. Retiring on half-pay in 1824, Hall in 1825 married Margaret, daughter of Sir John Hunter, and in her company travelled (1827-1828) through the United States. In 1829 he published his Travels in North America in the Years 1827 and 1828, which was assailed by the American press for its views of American society. Schloss Hainfeld, or a Winter in Lower Styria (1836), is partly a romance, partly a description of a visit paid by the author to the castle of the countess Purgstall. Spain and the Seat of War in Spain appeared in 1837. The Fragments of Voyages and Travels (9 vols.) were issued in three detachments between 1831 and 1840. Captain Hall was a fellow of the Royal Societies of London and Edinburgh, and of the Royal Astronomical, Royal Geographical and Geological Societies. His last work, a collection of sketches and tales under the name of Patchwork (1841), had not been long published before its author became insane, and he died in Haslar hospital, Portsmouth, on the 11th of September 1844.

HALL, BASIL (1788-1844), a British naval officer, traveler, and various writer, was born in Edinburgh on December 31, 1788. His father was Sir James Hall of Dunglass, a geologist. Basil Hall was educated at the High School in Edinburgh and joined the navy in 1802, where he progressed to the rank of post-captain in 1817 after serving in various active roles. By studying the cultural and physical traits of the countries he explored, he gathered information for numerous scientific papers. In 1816, he commanded the sloop “Lyra,” which accompanied Lord Amherst’s embassy to China; he detailed his journey in An Account of a Voyage of Discovery to the West Coast of Corea and the Great Loo-choo Island in the Japan Sea (London, 1818). In 1820, he held a command on the Pacific coast of America, and in 1824 he published two volumes of Extracts from a Journal written on the Coasts of Chili, Peru and Mexico in the Years 1820-21-22. After retiring on half-pay in 1824, Hall married Margaret, the daughter of Sir John Hunter, in 1825, and together they traveled through the United States in 1827-1828. In 1829, he published Travels in North America in the Years 1827 and 1828, which faced criticism from the American press for its take on American society. Schloss Hainfeld, or a Winter in Lower Styria (1836) is partly a romance and partly a description of his visit to the castle of Countess Purgstall. Spain and the Seat of War in Spain came out in 1837. The Fragments of Voyages and Travels (9 vols.) were published in three parts between 1831 and 1840. Captain Hall was a fellow of the Royal Societies of London and Edinburgh, as well as the Royal Astronomical, Royal Geographical, and Geological Societies. His last work, a collection of sketches and stories titled Patchwork (1841), was published shortly before the author succumbed to insanity, and he died in Haslar hospital, Portsmouth, on September 11, 1844.


HALL, CARL CHRISTIAN (1812-1888), Danish statesman, son of the highly respected artisan and train-band colonel Mads Hall, was born at Christianshavn on the 25th of February 1812. After a distinguished career at school and college, he adopted the law as his profession, and in 1837 married the highly gifted but eccentric Augusta Marie, daughter of the philologist Peter Oluf Bröndsted. A natural conservatism indisposed Hall at first to take any part in the popular movement of 1848, to which almost all his friends had already adhered; but the moment he was convinced of the inevitability of popular government, he resolutely and sympathetically followed in the new paths. Sent to the Rigsforsamling of 1848 as member for the first district of Copenhagen, a constituency he continued to represent in the Folketing till 1881, he immediately took his place in the front rank of Danish politicians. From the first he displayed rare ability as a debater, his inspiring and yet amiable personality attracted hosts of admirers, while his extraordinary tact and temper disarmed opposition and enabled him to mediate between extremes without ever sacrificing principles.

HALL, CARL CHRISTIAN (1812-1888), Danish politician, son of the well-respected craftsman and militia colonel Mads Hall, was born in Christianshavn on February 25, 1812. After excelling in school and college, he chose law as his career and married the talented but unconventional Augusta Marie in 1837, who was the daughter of linguist Peter Oluf Bröndsted. Initially, Hall's natural conservatism made him hesitant to join the popular movement of 1848, which most of his friends had already embraced; however, once he recognized the inevitability of popular governance, he passionately and wholeheartedly embraced the new direction. He was elected to the Rigsforsamling of 1848 as a representative for the first district of Copenhagen, a position he maintained in the Folketing until 1881, quickly rising to prominence among Danish politicians. From the beginning, he showed exceptional skill as a debater; his charismatic and friendly personality drew many admirers, while his remarkable tact and temper diffused opposition and helped him bridge divides without compromising his principles.

Hall was not altogether satisfied with the fundamental law of June; but he considered it expedient to make the best use possible of the existing constitution and to unite the best conservative elements of the nation in its defence. The aloofness and sulkiness of the aristocrats and landed proprietors he deeply deplored. Failing to rally them to the good cause he determined anyhow to organize the great cultivated middle class into a political party. Hence the “June Union,” whose programme was progress and reform in the spirit of the constitution, and at the same time opposition to the one-sided democratism and party-tyranny of the Bondevenner or peasant party. The “Union” exercised an essential influence on the elections of 1852, and was, in fact, the beginning of the national Liberal party, which found its natural leader in Hall. During the years 1852-1854 the burning question of the day was the connexion between the various parts of the monarchy. Hall was “eiderdansk” by conviction. He saw in the closest possible union between the kingdom and a Schleswig freed from all risk of German interference the essential condition for Denmark’s independence; but he did not think that Denmark was strong enough to carry such a policy through unsupported, and he was therefore inclined to promote it by diplomatic means and international combinations, and strongly opposed to the Conventions of 1851-1852 (See Denmark: History), though he was among the first, subsequently, to accept them as an established fact and the future basis for Denmark’s policy.

Hall wasn't completely satisfied with the fundamental law of June, but he thought it was wise to make the most of the existing constitution and unite the best conservative elements of the country in its defense. He felt deeply troubled by the aloofness and sulkiness of the aristocrats and landowners. Since he couldn't rally them to the good cause, he decided to organize the educated middle class into a political party. Thus, the “June Union” was formed, with a program focused on progress and reform in the spirit of the constitution, while also opposing the one-sided democratism and party tyranny of the Bondevenner or peasant party. The “Union” had a significant influence on the elections of 1852 and was, in fact, the beginning of the national Liberal party, which naturally found its leader in Hall. During the years 1852-1854, the pressing issue of the time was the connection between the different parts of the monarchy. Hall was “eiderdansk” by conviction. He believed that the closest possible union between the kingdom and a Schleswig free from any risk of German interference was essential for Denmark’s independence; however, he thought Denmark wasn’t strong enough to pursue that policy alone, so he was inclined to promote it through diplomatic means and international alliances, and he strongly opposed the Conventions of 1851-1852 (See Denmark: History), even though he was among the first to later accept them as an established fact and the future basis for Denmark’s policy.

Hall first took office in the Bang administration (12th of December 1854) as minister of public worship. In May 1857 he became president of the council after Andrae, Bang’s successor, had retired, and in July 1858 he exchanged the ministry of public worship for the ministry of foreign affairs, while still retaining the premiership.

Hall first took office in the Bang administration (December 12, 1854) as the minister of public worship. In May 1857, he became the president of the council after Andrae, Bang’s successor, stepped down, and in July 1858, he swapped the ministry of public worship for the ministry of foreign affairs, while still keeping the premiership.

Hall’s programme, “den Konstitutionelle Helstat,” i.e. a single state with a common constitution, was difficult enough in a monarchy which included two nationalities, one of which, to a great extent, belonged to a foreign and hostile jurisdiction. But as this political monstrosity had already been guaranteed by the Conventions of 1851-1852, Hall could not rid himself of it, and the attempt to establish this “Helstat” was made accordingly by the Constitution of the 13th of November 1863. The failure of the attempt and its disastrous consequences for Denmark are described elsewhere. Here it need only be said that Hall himself soon became aware of the impossibility of the “Helstat,” and his whole policy aimed at making its absurdity patent to Europe, and substituting for it a constitutional Denmark to the Eider which would be in a position to come to terms with an independent Holstein. That this was the best thing possible for Denmark is absolutely indisputable, and “the diplomatic Seven Years’ War” which Hall in the meantime conducted with all the powers interested in the question is the most striking proof of his superior statesmanship. Hall knew that in the last resort the question must be decided not by the pen but by the sword. But he relied, ultimately, on the protection of the powers which had guaranteed the integrity of Denmark by the treaty of London, and if words have any meaning at all he had the right to expect at the very least the armed support of Great Britain.1 But the great German powers and the force of circumstances proved too strong for him. On the accession of the new king, Christian IX., Hall resigned rather than repeal the November Constitution, which gave Denmark something to negotiate upon in case of need. But he made matters as easy as he could for his successors in the Monrad administration, and the ultimate catastrophe need not have been as serious as it was had his advice, frankly given, been intelligently followed.

Hall’s program, “the Constitutional Helstate,” i.e. a single state with a shared constitution, was challenging enough in a monarchy that included two nationalities, one of which largely fell under a foreign and hostile authority. However, since this political issue had already been guaranteed by the Conventions of 1851-1852, Hall couldn’t escape it, and the attempt to establish this “Helstate” was made with the Constitution of November 13, 1863. The failure of this attempt and its disastrous consequences for Denmark are discussed elsewhere. Here, it’s only necessary to mention that Hall himself soon recognized the impossibility of the “Helstate,” and his entire policy aimed at making its absurdity clear to Europe, replacing it with a constitutional Denmark at the Eider that would be able to reach an agreement with an independent Holstein. That this was the best option for Denmark is absolutely undeniable, and “the diplomatic Seven Years’ War” that Hall conducted with all the powers involved in the issue is the strongest proof of his outstanding statesmanship. Hall understood that ultimately, the question would have to be decided not by diplomacy but by force. However, he ultimately relied on the support of the powers that had guaranteed Denmark's integrity by the treaty of London, and if words have any meaning, he had the right to expect at least the military backing of Great Britain. 1 But the major German powers and the circumstances proved too overwhelming for him. When the new king, Christian IX, came to the throne, Hall resigned instead of repealing the November Constitution, which provided Denmark with something to negotiate with if necessary. But he made things as easy as he could for his successors in the Monrad administration, and the final disaster could have been less severe had his candid advice been followed more wisely.

After 1864 Hall bore more than his fair share of the odium and condemnation which weighed so heavily upon the national Liberal party, making no attempt to repudiate responsibility and refraining altogether from attacking patently unscrupulous opponents. But his personal popularity suffered not the slightest diminution, while his clear, almost intuitive, outlook and his unconquerable faith in the future of his country made him, during those difficult years, a factor of incalculable importance in the public life of Denmark. In 1870 he joined the Holstein-Holsteinborg ministry as minister of public worship, and in that capacity passed many useful educational reforms, but on the fall of the administration, in 1873, he retired altogether from public life. In the summer of 1879 Hall was struck down by apoplexy, and for the remaining nine years of his life he was practically bedridden. He died on the 14th of August 1888. In politics Hall was a practical, sagacious “opportunist,” in the best sense of that much abused word, with an eye rather for things than for persons. Moreover, he had no very pronounced political ambition, and was an utter stranger to that longing for power, which drives so many men of talent to adopt extreme expedients. His urbanity and perfect 846 equilibrium at the very outset incited sympathy, while his wit and humour made him the centre of every circle within which he moved.

After 1864, Hall faced more than his fair share of the blame and criticism that weighed heavily on the national Liberal party. He didn’t try to escape responsibility and avoided attacking clearly unprincipled opponents. Despite this, his personal popularity didn’t diminish at all. His clear, almost instinctive perspective and unshakeable belief in his country's future made him, during those tough years, an incredibly significant figure in Denmark’s public life. In 1870, he joined the Holstein-Holsteinborg ministry as the minister of public worship, where he implemented many valuable educational reforms. However, after the administration fell in 1873, he stepped away from public life entirely. In the summer of 1879, Hall suffered a stroke, and for the last nine years of his life, he was mostly bedridden. He passed away on August 14, 1888. In politics, Hall was a practical, wise “opportunist” in the best sense of the term, focusing more on issues than individuals. Additionally, he didn’t have strong political ambitions and was completely unfamiliar with the desire for power that drives many talented individuals to use extreme measures. His charm and composure right from the start earned him sympathy, while his humor and wit made him the center of every social circle he was part of.

See Vilhelm Christian Sigurd Topsöe, Polit. Portraetstudier (Copenhagen, 1878); Schöller Parelius Vilhelm Birkedal, Personlige Oplevelser (Copenhagen, 1890-1891).

See Vilhelm Christian Sigurd Topsöe, Political Portrait Studies (Copenhagen, 1878); Schöller Parelius Vilhelm Birkedal, Personal Experiences (Copenhagen, 1890-1891).

(R. N. B.)

1 On this head see the 3rd marquess of Salisbury’s Political Essays, reprinted from the Quarterly Review.

1 For this topic, check out the 3rd marquess of Salisbury’s Political Essays, reprinted from the Quarterly Review.


HALL, CHARLES FRANCIS (1821-1871), American Arctic explorer, was born at Rochester, New Hampshire. After following the trade of blacksmith he became a journalist in Cincinnati; but his enthusiasm for Arctic exploration led him in 1859 to volunteer to the American Geographical Society to “go in search for the bones of Franklin.” With the proceeds of a public subscription he was equipped for his expedition and sailed in May 1860 on board a whaling vessel. The whaler being ice-bound, Hall took up his abode in the regions to the north of Hudson Bay, where he found relics of Frobisher’s 16th-century voyages, and living with the Eskimo for two years he acquired a considerable knowledge of their habits and language. He published an account of these experiences under the title of Arctic Researches, and Life among the Esquimaux (1864). Determined, however, to learn more about the fate of the Franklin expedition he returned to the same regions in 1864, and passing five years among the Eskimo was successful in obtaining a number of Franklin relics, as well as information pointing to the exact fate of 76 of the crew, whilst also performing some geographical work of interest. In 1871 he was given command of the North Polar expedition fitted out by the United States Government in the “Polaris.” Making a remarkably rapid passage up Smith Sound at the head of Baffin Bay, which was found to be ice-free, the “Polaris” reached on the 30th of August the lat. of 82° 11′, at that time, and until the English expedition of 1876 the highest northern latitude attained by vessel. The expedition went into winter quarters in a sheltered cove on the Greenland coast. On the 24th of October, Hall on his return from a successful sledge expedition to the north was suddenly seized by an illness of which he died on the 8th of November. Capt. S. O. Buddington (1823-1888) assumed command, and although the “Polaris” was subsequently lost after breaking out of the ice, with only part of the crew aboard, the whole were ultimately rescued, and the scientific results of the expedition proved to be of considerable importance.

HALL, CHARLES FRANCIS (1821-1871), American Arctic explorer, was born in Rochester, New Hampshire. After working as a blacksmith, he became a journalist in Cincinnati; however, his passion for Arctic exploration drove him in 1859 to volunteer with the American Geographical Society to “search for the bones of Franklin.” With funding from a public subscription, he prepared for his expedition and set sail in May 1860 on a whaling vessel. When the whaler got stuck in the ice, Hall settled in the areas north of Hudson Bay, where he discovered relics from Frobisher’s 16th-century voyages. Living with the Eskimo for two years, he gained significant knowledge of their culture and language. He published his experiences in a book titled Arctic Researches, and Life among the Esquimaux (1864). However, determined to uncover more about the fate of the Franklin expedition, he returned to the same areas in 1864. Spending five years among the Eskimo, he successfully gathered several Franklin relics and information about the exact fate of 76 crew members while also completing some interesting geographical work. In 1871, he was appointed to lead the North Polar expedition outfitted by the United States Government on the “Polaris.” The crew made an impressively swift journey up Smith Sound at the top of Baffin Bay, which turned out to be ice-free, and on August 30, they reached a latitude of 82° 11′, the highest northern latitude by vessel at that time, until the English expedition of 1876. The expedition settled for the winter in a protected cove on the Greenland coast. On October 24, Hall returned from a successful sledge journey to the north, but he was suddenly struck by an illness from which he died on November 8. Capt. S. O. Buddington (1823-1888) took command, and although the “Polaris” was later lost after breaking through the ice with only part of the crew aboard, everyone was eventually rescued, and the scientific findings of the expedition proved to be quite significant.


HALL, CHRISTOPHER NEWMAN (1816-1902), English Nonconformist divine, was born at Maidstone on the 22nd of May 1816. His father was John Vine Hall, proprietor and printer of the Maidstone Journal, and the author of a popular evangelical work called The Sinner’s Friend. Christopher was educated at University College, London, and took the London B.A. degree. His theological training was gained at Highbury College, whence he was called in 1842 to his first pastorate at the Albion Congregational Church, Hull. During the twelve years of his ministry there the membership was greatly increased, and a branch chapel and school were opened. At Hull Newman Hall first began his active work in temperance reform, and in defence of his position wrote The Scriptural Claims of Teetotalism. In 1854 he accepted a call to Surrey chapel, London, founded in 1783 by the Rev. Rowland Hill. A considerable sum had been bequeathed by Hill for the perpetuation of his work on the expiration of the lease; but, owing to some legal flaw in the will, the money was not available, and Newman Hall undertook to raise the necessary funds for a new church. By weekly offertories and donations the money for the beautiful building called Christ Church at the junction of the Kennington and Westminster Bridge Roads was collected, and within four years of opening (1876) the total cost (£63,000) was cleared. In 1892 Newman Hall resigned his charge and devoted himself to general evangelical work. Most of his writings are small booklets or tracts of a distinctly evangelical character. The best known of these is Come to Jesus, of which over four million copies have been circulated in forty different languages. Newman Hall visited the United States during the Civil War, and did much to promote a friendly understanding between England and America. A Liberal in politics, and a keen admirer of John Bright, few preachers of any denomination have exercised so far-reaching an influence as the “Dissenters’ Bishop,” as he came to be termed. He died on the 18th of February 1902.

HALL, CHRISTOPHER NEWMAN (1816-1902), was an English Nonconformist minister, born in Maidstone on May 22, 1816. His father, John Vine Hall, was the owner and printer of the Maidstone Journal and wrote a popular evangelical book called The Sinner’s Friend. Christopher studied at University College, London, and earned his London B.A. degree. He received his theological training at Highbury College and, in 1842, took his first pastorate at the Albion Congregational Church in Hull. During his twelve years there, the church's membership grew significantly, and a branch chapel and school were established. It was in Hull that Newman Hall started his active work in temperance reform and defended his stance in his writing The Scriptural Claims of Teetotalism. In 1854, he accepted a position at Surrey Chapel in London, which had been founded in 1783 by Rev. Rowland Hill. A substantial amount had been left by Hill to continue his work after the lease ended, but due to a legal issue with the will, the funds were unavailable. Newman Hall took on the responsibility to raise the necessary money for a new church. Through weekly collections and donations, the funds for the beautiful building called Christ Church, located at the junction of Kennington and Westminster Bridge Roads, were gathered, and within four years of its opening (1876), the total cost of £63,000 was paid off. In 1892, Newman Hall resigned and focused on general evangelical work. Most of his writings consist of small booklets or tracts with a distinctly evangelical focus, the most well-known being Come to Jesus, which has sold over four million copies in forty different languages. Newman Hall visited the United States during the Civil War and worked to foster better relations between England and America. A political liberal and admirer of John Bright, few preachers, regardless of denomination, have had as much influence as the “Dissenters' Bishop,” as he was often called. He passed away on February 18, 1902.

See his Autobiography (1898); obituary notice in The Congregational Year Book for 1903.

See his Autobiography (1898); obituary notice in The Congregational Year Book for 1903.


HALL, EDWARD (c. 1498-1547), English chronicler and lawyer, was born about the end of the 15th century, being a son of John Hall of Northall, Shropshire. Educated at Eton and King’s College, Cambridge, he became a barrister and afterwards filled the offices of common sergeant of the city of London and judge of the sheriff’s court. He was also member of parliament for Bridgnorth. Hall’s great work, The Union of the Noble and Illustre Famelies of Lancastre and York, commonly called Hall’s Chronicle, was first published in 1542. Another edition was issued by Richard Grafton in 1548, the year after Hall’s death, and another in 1550; these include a continuation from 1532 compiled by Grafton from the author’s notes. In 1809 an edition was published under the supervision of Sir Henry Ellis, and in 1904 the part dealing with the reign of Henry VIII. was edited by C. Whibley. The Chronicle begins with the accession of Henry IV. to the English throne in 1399; it follows the strife between the houses of Lancaster and York, and with Grafton’s continuation carries the story down to the death of Henry VIII. in 1547. Hall presents the policy of this king in a very favourable light and shows his own sympathy with the Protestants. For all kinds of ceremonial he has all a lawyer’s respect, and his pages are often adorned and encumbered with the pageantry and material garniture of the story. The value of the Chronicle in its early stages is not great, but this increases when dealing with the reign of Henry VII. and is very considerable for the reign of Henry VIII. Moreover, the work is not only valuable, it is attractive. To the historian it furnishes what is evidently the testimony of an eye-witness on several matters of importance which are neglected by other narrators; and to the student of literature it has the exceptional interest of being one of the prime sources of Shakespeare’s historical plays.

HALL, EDWARD (c. 1498-1547), English chronicler and lawyer, was born around the end of the 15th century as the son of John Hall from Northall, Shropshire. He was educated at Eton and King’s College, Cambridge, later becoming a barrister and serving as the common sergeant of the City of London and judge of the sheriff’s court. He also served as a member of parliament for Bridgnorth. Hall’s major work, The Union of the Noble and Illustre Famelies of Lancastre and York, commonly known as Hall’s Chronicle, was first published in 1542. Another edition was released by Richard Grafton in 1548, the year after Hall’s death, followed by another in 1550; these editions included a continuation from 1532 compiled by Grafton from the author's notes. An edition was published in 1809 under the supervision of Sir Henry Ellis, and in 1904, the section covering the reign of Henry VIII was edited by C. Whibley. The Chronicle starts with Henry IV’s accession to the English throne in 1399; it details the conflicts between the houses of Lancaster and York, and with Grafton’s continuation, carries the narrative through to the death of Henry VIII in 1547. Hall portrays the policies of this king in a very positive light and shows his own sympathy toward the Protestants. He has a lawyer's respect for all kinds of ceremonial, and his writing is often filled with the pageantry and material embellishments of the story. The early value of the Chronicle is limited, but it becomes more significant when discussing the reign of Henry VII and is quite substantial for Henry VIII’s reign. Furthermore, the work is not only valuable but also engaging. For historians, it provides what is clearly the account of an eyewitness regarding several important matters overlooked by other writers; for literature students, it holds exceptional interest as one of the primary sources for Shakespeare’s historical plays.

See J. Gairdner, Early Chroniclers of Europe; England (1879).

See J. Gairdner, Early Chroniclers of Europe; England (1879).


HALL, FITZEDWARD (1825-1901), American Orientalist, was born in Troy, New York, on the 21st of March 1825. He graduated with the degree of civil engineer from the Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute at Troy in 1842, and entered Harvard in the class of 1846; just before his class graduated he left college and went to India in search of a runaway brother. In January 1850 he was appointed tutor, and in 1853 professor of Sanskrit and English, in the government college at Benares; and in 1855 was made inspector of public instruction in Ajmere-Merwara and in 1856 in the Central Provinces. He settled in England in 1862 and received the appointment to the chair of Sanskrit, Hindustani and Indian jurisprudence in King’s College, London, and to the librarianship of the India Office. He died at Marlesford, Suffolk, on the 1st of February 1901. Hall was the first American to edit a Sanskrit text, the Vishnupurāna; his library of a thousand Oriental MSS. he gave to Harvard University.

HALL, FITZEDWARD (1825-1901), American Orientalist, was born in Troy, New York, on March 21, 1825. He graduated with a degree in civil engineering from the Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute in Troy in 1842 and entered Harvard in the class of 1846. Just before his class graduated, he left college and went to India to look for a brother who had run away. In January 1850, he was appointed as a tutor, and by 1853, he became a professor of Sanskrit and English at the government college in Benares. In 1855, he was made inspector of public instruction in Ajmere-Merwara and in 1856 in the Central Provinces. He settled in England in 1862 and was appointed to the chair of Sanskrit, Hindustani, and Indian jurisprudence at King’s College, London, as well as the librarianship of the India Office. He died in Marlesford, Suffolk, on February 1, 1901. Hall was the first American to edit a Sanskrit text, the Vishnupurāna; he donated his library of a thousand Oriental manuscripts to Harvard University.

His works include: in Sanskrit, Atmabodha (1852), Sānkhyaprāvachana (1856), Sāryasiddhānta (1859), Vāsavadattū (1859), Sānkhyasāra (1862) and Dasarūpa (1865); in Hindi, Ballantynes’ Hindi Grammar (1868) and a Reader (1870); on English philology, Recent Exemplifications of False Philology (1872), attacking Richard Grant White, Modern English (1873), “On English Adjectives in -able, with Special Reference to Reliable” (Am. Jour. Philology, 1877), Doctor Indoctus (1880).

His works include: in Sanskrit, Atmabodha (1852), Sānkhyaprāvachana (1856), Sāryasiddhānta (1859), Vāsavadattū (1859), Sānkhyasāra (1862), and Dasarūpa (1865); in Hindi, Ballantynes’ Hindi Grammar (1868) and a Reader (1870); on English philology, Recent Exemplifications of False Philology (1872), criticizing Richard Grant White, Modern English (1873), “On English Adjectives in -able, with Special Reference to Reliable” (Am. Jour. Philology, 1877), Doctor Indoctus (1880).


HALL, ISAAC HOLLISTER (1837-1896), American Orientalist, was born in Norwalk, Connecticut, on the 12th of December 1837. He graduated at Hamilton College in 1859, was a tutor there in 1859-1863, graduated at the Columbia Law School in 1865, practised law in New York City until 1875, and in 1875-1877 taught in the Syrian Protestant College at Beirut, where he discovered a valuable Syriac manuscript of the Philoxenian version of a large part of the New Testament, which he published in part in facsimile in 1884. He worked with General di Cesnola in classifying the famous Cypriote collection in the Metropolitan Museum of New York City, and was a curator of that museum from 1885 until his death in Mount Vernon, New York, on the 847 2nd of July 1896. He was an eminent authority on Oriental inscriptions. Following the scanty clues given by George Smith and Samuel Birch, and working on the data furnished by the di Cesnola collection, he succeeded about 1874 in deciphering an entire Cypriote inscription, and in establishing the Hellenic character of the dialect and the syllabic nature of the script.

HALL, ISAAC HOLLISTER (1837-1896), American Orientalist, was born in Norwalk, Connecticut, on December 12, 1837. He graduated from Hamilton College in 1859 and served as a tutor there from 1859 to 1863. He completed his degree at Columbia Law School in 1865 and practiced law in New York City until 1875. From 1875 to 1877, he taught at the Syrian Protestant College in Beirut, where he discovered a valuable Syriac manuscript of the Philoxenian version of a large part of the New Testament, which he partially published in facsimile in 1884. He collaborated with General di Cesnola in classifying the famous Cypriote collection at the Metropolitan Museum of New York City and served as a curator at the museum from 1885 until his death in Mount Vernon, New York, on July 2, 1896. He was a prominent expert on Oriental inscriptions. Following the limited clues provided by George Smith and Samuel Birch, and using data from the di Cesnola collection, he succeeded around 1874 in deciphering an entire Cypriote inscription and establishing the Hellenic nature of the dialect and the syllabic character of the script.

His work in Cypriote epigraphy is described in his articles in Scribner’s Magazine, vol. 20 (June, 1880), pp. 205-211 and in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. 10, No. 2 (1880), pp. 201-218. He published in facsimile the Antilegomena epistles (1886), which he deciphered from the W. F. Williams manuscript, and edited A Critical Bibliography of the Greek New Testament as Published in America (1884).

His work on Cypriote epigraphy is detailed in his articles in Scribner’s Magazine, vol. 20 (June 1880), pp. 205-211, and in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. 10, No. 2 (1880), pp. 201-218. He published a facsimile of the Antilegomena epistles (1886), which he deciphered from the W. F. Williams manuscript, and edited A Critical Bibliography of the Greek New Testament as Published in America (1884).


HALL, SIR JAMES (1761-1832), Scottish geologist and physicist, eldest son of Sir John Hall, Bart., was born at Dunglass on the 17th of January 1761; and became distinguished as the first to establish experimental research as an aid to geological investigation. He was intimately acquainted with James Hutton and John Playfair, and having studied rocks in various parts of Europe he was eventually led to accept and to demonstrate the truth of Hutton’s views with regard to intrusive rocks. He commenced a series of experiments to illustrate the fusion of rocks, their vitreous and crystalline characters, and the influence of molten rocks in altering adjacent strata. He thus assisted in proving that granitic veins had been injected into overlying deposits after their consolidation. He studied the volcanic rocks in Italy and recognized that the old lava flows and the numerous dikes in Scotland must have had a similar origin. He made further experiments to illustrate the contortions of rocks. The results were brought before the Royal Society of Edinburgh. He died at Edinburgh on the 23rd of June 1832. He represented in parliament (1807-1812) the old borough of Michael in Cornwall; he also wrote an Essay on the Origin, History and Principles of Gothic Architecture (1813).

HALL, SIR JAMES (1761-1832), Scottish geologist and physicist, the eldest son of Sir John Hall, Bart., was born in Dunglass on January 17, 1761. He became known as the first person to use experimental research to aid geological investigation. He was closely associated with James Hutton and John Playfair, and after studying rocks in various parts of Europe, he ultimately accepted and demonstrated the validity of Hutton’s theories regarding intrusive rocks. He started a series of experiments to show how rocks melt, their glassy and crystalline qualities, and how molten rocks can change nearby layers. This helped prove that granitic veins were forced into the overlying deposits after they had solidified. He studied volcanic rocks in Italy and recognized that the ancient lava flows and many dikes in Scotland likely had the same origin. He conducted more experiments to show how rocks can become distorted. The findings were presented to the Royal Society of Edinburgh. He passed away in Edinburgh on June 23, 1832. He served in Parliament (1807-1812) representing the old borough of Michael in Cornwall; he also wrote an Essay on the Origin, History and Principles of Gothic Architecture (1813).

His eldest son, John Hall (1787-1860), who succeeded him, was a Fellow of the Royal Society; the second son, Captain Basil Hall (q.v.), was the distinguished traveller; the third son, James Hall (1800-1854), was a painter, art-patron, and a friend of Sir David Wilkie.

His oldest son, John Hall (1787-1860), who took over after him, was a Fellow of the Royal Society; the second son, Captain Basil Hall (q.v.), was the notable traveler; the third son, James Hall (1800-1854), was a painter, art supporter, and a friend of Sir David Wilkie.


HALL, JAMES (1793-1868), American judge and man of letters, was born at Philadelphia on the 19th of August 1793. After for some time prosecuting the study of law, he in 1812 joined the army, and in the war with Great Britain distinguished himself in engagements at Lundy’s Lane, Niagara and Fort Erie. On the conclusion of the war he accompanied an expedition against Algiers, but in 1818 he resigned his commission, and continued the study of law at Pittsburg. In 1820 he removed to Shawneetown, Illinois, where he commenced practice at the bar and also edited the Illinois Gazette. Soon after he was appointed public prosecutor of the circuit, and in 1824 state circuit judge. In 1827 he became state treasurer, and held that office till 1831, but he continued at the same time his legal practice and also edited the Illinois Intelligencer. Subsequently he became editor of the Western Souvenir, an annual publication, and of the Illinois Monthly Magazine, afterwards the Western Monthly Magazine. He died near Cincinnati on the 5th of July 1868.

HALL, JAMES (1793-1868), American judge and writer, was born in Philadelphia on August 19, 1793. After studying law for a while, he joined the army in 1812 and distinguished himself in battles at Lundy’s Lane, Niagara, and Fort Erie during the war with Great Britain. After the war ended, he took part in an expedition against Algiers, but resigned his commission in 1818 and continued studying law in Pittsburgh. In 1820, he moved to Shawneetown, Illinois, where he started practicing law and also edited the Illinois Gazette. Soon after, he was appointed public prosecutor for the circuit, and in 1824 became a state circuit judge. In 1827, he became state treasurer, holding that position until 1831, while also practicing law and editing the Illinois Intelligencer. Later, he became the editor of the Western Souvenir, an annual publication, and of the Illinois Monthly Magazine, which later became the Western Monthly Magazine. He passed away near Cincinnati on July 5, 1868.

The following are his principal works:—Letters from the West, originally contributed to the Portfolio, and collected and published in London in 1828; Legends of the West (1832); The Soldier’s Bride and other Tales (1832); The Harpe’s Head, a Legend of Kentucky (1833); Sketches of the West (2 vols., 1835); Tales of the Border (1835); Notes on the Western States (1838); History of the Indian Tribes, in conjunction with T. L. M‘Keeney (3 vols., 1838-1844); The Wilderness and the War-Path (1845); Romance of Western History (1857).

The following are his main works:—Letters from the West, first published in the Portfolio, and collected and released in London in 1828; Legends of the West (1832); The Soldier’s Bride and Other Tales (1832); The Harpe’s Head, a Legend of Kentucky (1833); Sketches of the West (2 vols., 1835); Tales of the Border (1835); Notes on the Western States (1838); History of the Indian Tribes, co-authored with T. L. M‘Keeney (3 vols., 1838-1844); The Wilderness and the War-Path (1845); Romance of Western History (1857).


HALL, JAMES (1811-1898). American geologist and palaeontologist, was born at Hingham, Massachusetts, on the 12th of September 1811. In early life he became attached to the study of natural history, and he completed his education at the polytechnic institute at Troy in New York, where he graduated in 1832, and afterwards became professor of chemistry and natural science, and subsequently of geology. In 1836 he was appointed one of the geologists on the Geological Survey of the state of New York, and he was before long charged with the palaeontological work. Eventually he became state geologist and director of the museum of natural history at Albany. His published papers date from 1836, and include numerous reports on the geology and palaeontology of various portions of the United States and Canada. He dealt likewise with physical geology, and in 1859 discussed the connexion between the accumulation of sedimentary deposits and the elevation of mountain-chains. His chief work was the description of the invertebrate fossils of New York—in which he dealt with the graptolites, brachiopods, mollusca, trilobites, echini and crinoids of the Palaeozoic formations. The results were published in a series of quarto volumes entitled Palaeontology of New York (1847-1894), in which he was assisted in course of time by R. P. Whitfield and J. M. Clarke. He published also reports on the geology of Oregon and California (1845), Utah (1852), Iowa (1859) and Wisconsin (1862). He received the Wollaston medal from the Geological Society of London in 1858. He was a man of great energy and untiring industry, and in 1897, when in his eighty-sixth year, he journeyed to St Petersburg to take part in the International Geological Congress, and then joined the excursion to the Ural mountains. He died at Albany on the 7th of August 1898.

HALL, JAMES (1811-1898). American geologist and paleontologist, was born in Hingham, Massachusetts, on September 12, 1811. Early on, he developed a passion for natural history and completed his education at the Polytechnic Institute in Troy, New York, where he graduated in 1832. He later became a professor of chemistry and natural science, and then of geology. In 1836, he was appointed as one of the geologists for the Geological Survey of New York and soon took on responsibility for the paleontological work. Eventually, he became the state geologist and director of the natural history museum in Albany. His published papers began in 1836 and include numerous reports on the geology and paleontology of various areas in the United States and Canada. He also focused on physical geology and, in 1859, examined the connection between sedimentary deposits and the rise of mountain ranges. His main work was the description of invertebrate fossils in New York, covering graptolites, brachiopods, mollusks, trilobites, echinoderms, and crinoids from the Paleozoic formations. The findings were published in a series of quarto volumes called Paleontology of New York (1847-1894), with contributions from R. P. Whitfield and J. M. Clarke over time. He also published reports on the geology of Oregon and California (1845), Utah (1852), Iowa (1859), and Wisconsin (1862). In 1858, he received the Wollaston medal from the Geological Society of London. He was known for his tremendous energy and relentless work ethic, and in 1897, at the age of eighty-six, he traveled to St. Petersburg to participate in the International Geological Congress and subsequently joined an excursion to the Ural Mountains. He passed away in Albany on August 7, 1898.

See Life and Work of James Hall, by H. C. Hovey, Amer. Geol. xxiii., 1899, p. 137 (portraits).

See Life and Work of James Hall, by H. C. Hovey, Amer. Geol. xxiii., 1899, p. 137 (portraits).


HALL, JOSEPH (1574-1656), English bishop and satirist, was born at Bristow park, near Ashby de la Zouch, Leicestershire, on the 1st of July 1574. His father, John Hall, was agent in the town for Henry, earl of Huntingdon, and his mother, Winifred Bambridge, was a pious lady, whom her son compared to St Monica. Joseph Hall received his early education at the local school, and was sent (1589) to Emmanuel College, Cambridge. Hall was chosen for two years in succession to read the public lecture on rhetoric in the schools, and in 1595 became fellow of his college. During his residence at Cambridge he wrote his Virgidemiarum (1597), satires written after Latin models. The claim he put forward in the prologue to be the earliest English satirist:—

HALL, JOSEPH (1574-1656), an English bishop and satirist, was born at Bristow Park, near Ashby de la Zouch, Leicestershire, on July 1, 1574. His father, John Hall, served as the town's agent for Henry, Earl of Huntingdon, and his mother, Winifred Bambridge, was a devout woman whom her son likened to St. Monica. Joseph Hall received his early education at the local school and was sent to Emmanuel College, Cambridge, in 1589. He was selected to deliver the public lecture on rhetoric in the schools for two consecutive years, and in 1595, he became a fellow of his college. While at Cambridge, he wrote his Virgidemiarum (1597), a collection of satires modeled after Latin works. He claimed in the prologue to be the earliest English satirist:—

“I first adventure, follow me who list

“I first adventure, follow me who list

And be the second English satirist”—

And be the second English satirist—

gave bitter offence to John Marston, who attacks him in the satires published in 1598. The archbishop of Canterbury gave an order (1599) that Hall’s satires should be burnt with works of John Marston, Marlowe, Sir John Davies and others on the ground of licentiousness, but shortly afterwards Hall’s book, certainly unjustly condemned, was ordered to be “staied at the press,” which may be interpreted as reprieved (see Notes and Queries, 3rd series, xii. 436). Having taken holy orders, Hall was offered the mastership of Blundell’s school, Tiverton, but he refused it in favour of the living of Halsted, Essex, to which he was presented (1601) by Sir Robert Drury. In his parish he had an opponent in a Mr Lilly, whom he describes as “a witty and bold atheist.” In 1603 he married; and in 1605 he accompanied Sir Edmund Bacon to Spa, with the special aim, he says, of acquainting himself with the state and practice of the Romish Church. At Brussels he disputed at the Jesuit College on the authentic character of modern miracles, and his inquiring and argumentative disposition more than once threatened to produce serious results, so that his patron at length requested him to abstain from further discussion. His devotional writings had attracted the notice of Henry, prince of Wales, who made him one of his chaplains (1608). In 1612 Lord Denny, afterwards earl of Norwich, gave him the curacy of Waltham-Holy-Cross, Essex, and in the same year he received the degree of D.D. Later he received the prebend of Willenhall in the collegiate church of Wolverhampton, and in 1616 he accompanied James Hay, Lord Doncaster, afterwards earl of Carlisle, to France, where he was sent to congratulate Louis XIII. on his marriage, but Hall was compelled by illness to return. In his absence the king nominated him dean of Worcester, and in 1617 he accompanied James to Scotland, where he defended the five points of ceremonial which the king desired to impose upon the Scots. In the next year he was one of the English 848 deputies at the synod of Dort. In 1624 he refused the see of Gloucester, but in 1627 became bishop of Exeter.

gave bitter offense to John Marston, who attacked him in the satires published in 1598. The Archbishop of Canterbury ordered (1599) that Hall’s satires should be burned along with the works of John Marston, Marlowe, Sir John Davies, and others for being inappropriate, but shortly afterward Hall’s book, which was certainly unjustly condemned, was ordered to be “stayed at the press,” which can be seen as a reprieve (see Notes and Queries, 3rd series, xii. 436). After taking holy orders, Hall was offered the position of headmaster at Blundell’s School, Tiverton, but he turned it down in favor of the living at Halsted, Essex, which he was appointed to (1601) by Sir Robert Drury. In his parish, he faced opposition from a Mr. Lilly, whom he described as “a witty and bold atheist.” In 1603, he got married; and in 1605, he traveled with Sir Edmund Bacon to Spa, specifically to learn about the state and practices of the Roman Catholic Church. In Brussels, he debated at the Jesuit College on the authenticity of modern miracles, and his inquisitive and argumentative nature often threatened to create serious issues, leading his patron to eventually ask him to stop engaging in further discussions. His devotional writings caught the attention of Henry, Prince of Wales, who made him one of his chaplains (1608). In 1612, Lord Denny, who later became the Earl of Norwich, granted him the curacy of Waltham-Holy-Cross, Essex, and that same year he received a D.D. degree. Later on, he obtained the prebend of Willenhall in the collegiate church of Wolverhampton, and in 1616, he accompanied James Hay, Lord Doncaster, who later became the Earl of Carlisle, to France, where he was sent to congratulate Louis XIII. on his marriage, but Hall had to return due to illness. In his absence, the king appointed him Dean of Worcester, and in 1617 he went to Scotland with James, where he defended the five points of ceremony that the king wanted to impose on the Scots. The following year, he was one of the English deputies at the synod of Dort. In 1624, he refused the see of Gloucester, but in 1627 he became Bishop of Exeter.

He took an active part in the Arminian and Calvinist controversy in the English church. He did his best in his Via media, The Way of Peace, to persuade the two parties to accept a compromise. In spite of his Calvinistic opinions he maintained that to acknowledge the errors which had arisen in the Catholic Church did not necessarily imply disbelief in her catholicity, and that the Church of England having repudiated these errors should not deny the claims of the Roman Catholic Church on that account. This view commended itself to Charles I. and his episcopal advisers, but at the same time Archbishop Laud sent spies into Hall’s diocese to report on the Calvinistic tendencies of the bishop and his lenience to the Puritan and low-church clergy. Hall says he was thrice down on his knees to the King to answer Laud’s accusations and at length threatened to “cast up his rochet” rather than submit to them. He was, however, amenable to criticism, and his defence of the English Church, entitled Episcopacy by Divine Right (1640), was twice revised at Laud’s dictation. This was followed by An Humble Remonstrance to the High Court of Parliament (1640 and 1641), an eloquent and forceful defence of his order, which produced a retort from the syndicate of Puritan divines, who wrote under the name of “Smectymnuus,” and was followed by a long controversy to which Milton contributed five pamphlets, virulently attacking Hall and his early satires.

He actively participated in the Arminian and Calvinist debate within the English church. In his Via media, The Way of Peace, he tried to convince both sides to agree on a compromise. Despite his Calvinistic beliefs, he argued that acknowledging the mistakes that had occurred in the Catholic Church didn’t necessarily mean rejecting its overall validity, and that since the Church of England had rejected these errors, it shouldn't deny the claims of the Roman Catholic Church because of that. This perspective appealed to Charles I and his episcopal advisors, but at the same time, Archbishop Laud sent spies into Hall’s diocese to report on the bishop's Calvinistic leanings and his leniency towards Puritan and low-church clergy. Hall stated he went to the King on his knees three times to respond to Laud’s accusations and eventually threatened to “cast up his rochet” rather than give in to them. However, he was open to criticism, and his defense of the English Church, titled Episcopacy by Divine Right (1640), was revised twice at Laud’s request. This was followed by An Humble Remonstrance to the High Court of Parliament (1640 and 1641), a powerful defense of his position, which prompted a response from a group of Puritan divines writing under the name “Smectymnuus,” leading to a long controversy that Milton contributed five pamphlets to, aggressively attacking Hall and his earlier satires.

In 1641 Hall was translated to the see of Norwich, and in the same year sat on the Lords’ Committee on religion. On the 30th of December he was, with other bishops, brought before the bar of the House of Lords to answer a charge of high treason of which the Commons had voted them guilty. They were finally convicted of an offence against the Statute of Praemunire, and condemned to forfeit their estates, receiving a small maintenance from the parliament. They were immured in the Tower from New Year to Whitsuntide, when they were released on finding bail for £5000 each. On his release Hall proceeded to his new diocese at Norwich, the revenues of which he seems for a time to have received, but in 1643, when the property of the “malignants” was sequestrated, Hall was mentioned by name. Mrs Hall had difficulty in securing a fifth of the maintenance (£400) assigned to the bishop by the parliament; they were eventually ejected from the palace, and the cathedral was dismantled. Hall retired to the village of Higham, near Norwich, where he spent the time preaching and writing until “he was first forbidden by man, and at last disabled by God.” He bore his many troubles and the additional burden of much bodily suffering with sweetness and patience, dying on the 8th of September 1656. Thomas Fuller says: “He was commonly called our English Seneca, for the purenesse, plainnesse, and fulnesse of his style. Not unhappy at Controversies, more happy at Comments, very good in his Characters, better in his Sermons, best of all in his Meditations.”

In 1641, Hall was appointed the bishop of Norwich, and that same year, he served on the Lords’ Committee on religion. On December 30th, he, along with other bishops, was brought before the House of Lords to respond to a charge of high treason, which the Commons had deemed them guilty of. They were ultimately convicted of an offense against the Statute of Praemunire and were sentenced to forfeit their properties, receiving a small allowance from Parliament. They were imprisoned in the Tower from New Year until Whitsun, when they were released after posting bail of £5,000 each. After his release, Hall went to his new diocese in Norwich, where he initially managed to collect its revenues. However, in 1643, when the property of the “malignants” was confiscated, Hall was specifically mentioned. Mrs. Hall struggled to secure a fifth of the allowance (£400) that Parliament assigned to the bishop; they were eventually removed from the palace, and the cathedral was dismantled. Hall retreated to the village of Higham, near Norwich, where he spent his time preaching and writing until “he was first forbidden by man and ultimately disabled by God.” He faced his many challenges and the added burden of significant physical suffering with grace and patience, passing away on September 8, 1656. Thomas Fuller remarked: “He was commonly called our English Seneca, for the purity, clarity, and richness of his style. Not unhappy at Controversies, more fortunate at Comments, very good in his Characters, better in his Sermons, best of all in his Meditations.”

Bishop Hall’s polemical writings, although vigorous and effective, were chiefly of ephemeral interest, but many of his devotional writings have been often reprinted. It is by his early work as the censor of morals and the unsparing critic of contemporary literary extravagance and affectations that he is best known. Virgidemiarum. Sixe Bookes. First three Bookes. Of Toothlesse Satyrs. (1) Poeticall, (2) Academicall, (3) Morall (1597) was followed by an amended edition in 1598, and in the same year by Virgidemiarum. The three last bookes. Of byting Satyres (reprinted 1599). His claim to be reckoned the earliest English satirist, even in the formal sense, cannot be justified. Thomas Lodge, in his Fig for Momus (1593), had written four satires in the manner of Horace, and John Marston and John Donne both wrote satires about the same time, although the publication was in both cases later than that of Virgidemiae. But if he was not the earliest, Hall was certainly one of the best. He writes in the heroic couplet, which he manœuvres with great ease and smoothness. In the first book of his satires (Poeticall) he attacks the writers whose verses were devoted to licentious subjects, the bombast of Tamburlaine and tragedies built on similar lines, the laments of the ghosts of the Mirror for Magistrates, the metrical eccentricities of Gabriel Harvey and Richard Stanyhurst, the extravagances of the sonneteers, and the sacred poets (Southwell is aimed at in “Now good St Peter weeps pure Helicon, And both the Mary’s make a music moan”). In Book II. Satire 6 occurs the well-known description of the trencher-chaplain, who is tutor and hanger-on in a country manor. Among his other satirical portraits is that of the famished gallant, the guest of “Duke Humfray.”1 Book VI. consists of one long satire on the various vices and follies dealt with in the earlier books. If his prose is sometimes antithetical and obscure, his verse is remarkably free from the quips and conceits which mar so much contemporary poetry.

Bishop Hall's argumentative writings, while strong and impactful, were mostly of temporary interest, but many of his devotional works have been frequently reprinted. He is best known for his early role as a moral critic and his sharp criticism of the literary excesses and pretensions of his time. Virgidemiarum. Six Books. First three Books. Of Toothless Satyrs. (1) Poetic, (2) Academic, (3) Moral (1597) was followed by an updated edition in 1598, and in the same year by Virgidemiarum. The last three books. Of biting Satyrs (reprinted 1599). His claim to be considered the first English satirist, even in the formal sense, isn't entirely justified. Thomas Lodge, in his Fig for Momus (1593), had written four satires in the style of Horace, and John Marston and John Donne also wrote satires around the same time, though both published later than Virgidemiae. However, while he may not be the earliest, Hall was definitely one of the best. He writes in heroic couplets, which he handles with great ease and fluidity. In the first book of his satires (Poetic), he criticizes writers whose verses focused on immoral subjects, the bombast of Tamburlaine and similar tragedies, the laments of the ghosts in the Mirror for Magistrates, the metrical quirks of Gabriel Harvey and Richard Stanyhurst, the excesses of the sonneteers, and the sacred poets (with Southwell being targeted in “Now good St Peter weeps pure Helicon, And both the Mary’s make a music moan”). In Book II, Satire 6 contains the well-known depiction of the 'trencher-chaplain,' who serves as both tutor and hanger-on in a country manor. Among his other satirical portrayals is that of the starving gallant, a guest of “Duke Humfray.”1 Book VI consists of one long satire addressing the various vices and foolishness noted in the earlier books. While his prose can sometimes be contradictory and unclear, his poetry is notably free from the puns and clever twists that plague much of the contemporary poetry.

He also wrote The King’s Prophecie; or Weeping Joy (1603), a gratulatory poem on the accession of James I.; Epistles, both the first and second volumes of which appeared in 1608 and a third in 1611; Characters of Virtues and Vices (1608), versified by Nahum Tate (1691); Solomons Divine Arts ... (1609); and, probably Mundus alter et idem sive Terra Australis antehac semper incognita ... lustrata (1605? and 1607), by “Mercurius Britannicus,” translated into English by John Healy (1608) as The Discovery of a New World or A Description of the South Indies ... by an English Mercury. Mundus alter is an excuse for a satirical description of London, with some criticism of the Romish church, its manners and customs, and is said to have furnished Swift with hints for Gulliver’s Travels. It was not ascribed to him by name until 1674, when Thomas Hyde, the librarian of the Bodleian, identified “Mercurius Britannicus” with Joseph Hall. For the question of the authorship of this pamphlet, and the arguments that may be advanced in favour of the suggestion that it was written by Alberico Gentili, see E. A. Petherick, Mundus alter et idem, reprinted from the Gentleman’s Magazine (July 1896). His controversial writings, not already mentioned, include:—A Common Apology ... against the Brownists (1610), in answer to John Robinson’s Censorious Epistle; The Olde Religion: A treatise, wherein is laid downe the true state of the difference betwixt the Reformed and the Romane Church; and the blame of this schisme is cast upon the true Authors ... (1628); Columba Noae olivam adferens ..., a sermon preached at St Paul’s in 1623; Episcopacie by Divine Right (1640); A Short Answer to the Vindication of Smectymnuus (1641); A Modest Confutation of ... (Milton’s) Animadversions (1642).

He also wrote The King’s Prophecie; or Weeping Joy (1603), a congratulatory poem on the accession of James I.; Epistles, with the first and second volumes published in 1608 and a third in 1611; Characters of Virtues and Vices (1608), versified by Nahum Tate (1691); Solomons Divine Arts ... (1609); and likely Mundus alter et idem sive Terra Australis antehac semper incognita ... lustrata (1605? and 1607), authored by “Mercurius Britannicus,” which was translated into English by John Healy (1608) as The Discovery of a New World or A Description of the South Indies ... by an English Mercury. Mundus alter serves as a satirical take on London, criticizing the Catholic Church, its behaviors and traditions, and is thought to have inspired Swift for Gulliver’s Travels. It wasn’t attributed to him by name until 1674, when Thomas Hyde, the librarian at the Bodleian, identified “Mercurius Britannicus” as Joseph Hall. For the debate over the authorship of this pamphlet, as well as the arguments supporting the idea that it was written by Alberico Gentili, see E. A. Petherick, Mundus alter et idem, reprinted from the Gentleman’s Magazine (July 1896). His controversial writings, not already mentioned, include: A Common Apology ... against the Brownists (1610), in response to John Robinson’s Censorious Epistle; The Olde Religion: A treatise, wherein is laid downe the true state of the difference betwixt the Reformed and the Romane Church; and the blame of this schisme is cast upon the true Authors ... (1628); Columba Noae olivam adferens ..., a sermon preached at St Paul’s in 1623; Episcopacie by Divine Right (1640); A Short Answer to the Vindication of Smectymnuus (1641); A Modest Confutation of ... (Milton’s) Animadversions (1642).

His devotional works include:—Holy Observations Lib. I. Some few of David’s Psalmes Metaphrased (1607 and 1609); three centuries of Meditations and Vowes, Divine and Morall (1606, 1607, 1609), edited by Charles Sayle (1901); The Arte of Divine Meditation (1607); Heaven upon Earth, or of True Peace and Tranquillitie of Mind (1606), reprinted with some of his letters in John Wesley’s Christian Library, vol. iv. (1819); Occasional Meditations ... (1630), edited by his son Robert Hall; Henochisme; or a Treatise showing how to walk with God (1639), translated from Bishop Hall’s Latin by Moses Wall; The Devout Soul; or Rules of Heavenly Devotion (1644), often since reprinted; The Balm of Gilead ... (1646, 1752); Christ Mysticall; or the blessed union of Christ and his Members (1647), of which General Gordon was a student (reprinted from Gordon’s copy, 1893); Susurrium cum Deo (1659); The Great Mysterie of Godliness (1650); Resolutions and Decisions of Divers Practicall cases of Conscience (1649, 1650, 1654).

His devotional works include:—Holy Observations Lib. I. Some few of David’s Psalms Metaphrased (1607 and 1609); three volumes of Meditations and Vows, Divine and Moral (1606, 1607, 1609), edited by Charles Sayle (1901); The Art of Divine Meditation (1607); Heaven upon Earth, or True Peace and Tranquility of Mind (1606), republished with some of his letters in John Wesley’s Christian Library, vol. iv. (1819); Occasional Meditations ... (1630), edited by his son Robert Hall; Henochisme; or a Treatise on How to Walk with God (1639), translated from Bishop Hall’s Latin by Moses Wall; The Devout Soul; or Rules for Heavenly Devotion (1644), frequently reprinted; The Balm of Gilead ... (1646, 1752); Christ Mystical; or the Blessed Union of Christ and His Members (1647), of which General Gordon was a student (reprinted from Gordon’s copy, 1893); Susurrium cum Deo (1659); The Great Mystery of Godliness (1650); Resolutions and Decisions of Various Practical Cases of Conscience (1649, 1650, 1654).

Authorities.—The chief authority for Hall’s biography is to be found in his autobiographical tracts: Observations of some Specialities of Divine Providence in the Life of Joseph Hall, Bishop of Norwich, Written with his own hand; and his Hard Measure, a reprint of which may be consulted in Dr Christopher Wordsworth’s Ecclesiastical Biography. The best criticism of his satires is to be found in Thomas Warton’s History of English Poetry, vol. iv. pp. 363-409 (ed. Hazlitt, 1871), where a comparison is instituted between Marston and Hall. In 1615 Hall published A Recollection of such treatises as have been ... published ... (1615, 1617, 1621); in 1625 appeared his Works (reprinted 1627, 1628, 1634, 1662). The first complete Works appeared in 1808, edited by the Rev. Josiah Pratt. Other editions are by Peter Hall (1837) and by Philip Wynter (1863). See also Bishop Hall, his Life and Times (1826), by Rev. John Jones; Life of Joseph Hall, by Rev. George Lewis (1886); A. B. Grosart, The Complete Poems of Joseph Hall ... with introductions, &c. (1879); Satires, &c. (Early English Poets, ed. S. W. Singer, 1824). Many of Hall’s works were translated into French, and some into Dutch, and there have been numerous selections from his devotional works.

Authorities.—The main source for Hall’s biography is his autobiographical writings: Observations of some Specialties of Divine Providence in the Life of Joseph Hall, Bishop of Norwich, Written with his own hand; and his Hard Measure, a reprint of which can be found in Dr. Christopher Wordsworth’s Ecclesiastical Biography. The best analysis of his satires is in Thomas Warton’s History of English Poetry, vol. iv. pp. 363-409 (ed. Hazlitt, 1871), which compares Marston and Hall. In 1615, Hall published A Recollection of such treatises as have been ... published ... (1615, 1617, 1621); his Works were released in 1625 (reprinted 1627, 1628, 1634, 1662). The first complete collection of his Works came out in 1808, edited by Rev. Josiah Pratt. Other editions are by Peter Hall (1837) and by Philip Wynter (1863). Also see Bishop Hall, his Life and Times (1826), by Rev. John Jones; Life of Joseph Hall, by Rev. George Lewis (1886); A. B. Grosart, The Complete Poems of Joseph Hall ... with introductions, &c. (1879); Satires, &c. (Early English Poets, ed. S. W. Singer, 1824). Many of Hall’s works were translated into French, some into Dutch, and numerous collections of his devotional works have been published.


1 The tomb of Sir John Beauchamp (d. 1358) in old St Paul’s was commonly known, in error, as that of Duke Humphrey of Gloucester. “To dine with Duke Humphrey” was to go hungry among the debtors and beggars who frequented “Duke Humphrey’s Walk” in the cathedral.

1 The tomb of Sir John Beauchamp (d. 1358) in old St Paul’s was often mistakenly referred to as that of Duke Humphrey of Gloucester. “To dine with Duke Humphrey” meant to go hungry among the debtors and beggars who gathered in “Duke Humphrey’s Walk” at the cathedral.


HALL, MARSHALL (1790-1857). English physiologist, was born on the 18th of February 1790, at Basford, near Nottingham, where his father, Robert Hall, was a cotton manufacturer. Having attended the Rev. J. Blanchard’s academy at Nottingham, he entered a chemist’s shop at Newark, and in 1809 began to study medicine at Edinburgh University. In 1811 he was elected senior president of the Royal Medical Society; the following year he took the M.D. degree, and was immediately appointed resident house physician to the Royal Infirmary, Edinburgh. This appointment he resigned after two years, when he visited Paris and its medical schools, and, on a walking 849 tour, those also of Berlin and Göttingen. In 1817, when he settled at Nottingham, he published his Diagnosis, and in 1818 he wrote the Mimoses, a work on the affections denominated bilious, nervous, &c. The next year he was elected a fellow of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, and in 1825 he became physician to the Nottingham general hospital. In 1826 he removed to London, and in the following year he published his Commentaries on the more important diseases of females. In 1830 he issued his Observations on Blood-letting, founded on researches on the morbid and curative effects of loss of blood, which were acknowledged by the medical profession to be of vast practical value, and in 1831 his Experimental Essay on the Circulation of the Blood in the Capillary Vessels, in which he showed that the blood-channels intermediate between arteries and veins serve the office of bringing the fluid blood into contact with the material tissues of the system. In the following year he read before the Royal Society a paper “On the inverse ratio which subsists between Respiration and Irritability in the Animal Kingdom.” His most important work in physiology was concerned with the theory of reflex action, embodied in a paper “On the reflex Function of the Medulla Oblongata and the Medulla Spinalis” (1832), which was supplemented in 1837 by another “On the True Spinal Marrow, and the Excito-motor System of Nerves.” The “reflex function” excited great attention on the continent of Europe, though in England some of his papers were refused publication by the Royal Society. Hall thus became the authority on the multiform deranged states of health referable to an abnormal condition of the nervous system, and he gained a large practice. His “ready method” for resuscitation in drowning and other forms of suspended respiration has been the means of saving innumerable lives. He died at Brighton of a throat affection, aggravated by lecturing, on the 11th of August 1857.

HALL, MARSHALL (1790-1857). An English physiologist, was born on February 18, 1790, in Basford, near Nottingham, where his father, Robert Hall, was a cotton manufacturer. After attending the Rev. J. Blanchard’s academy in Nottingham, he started working at a chemist’s shop in Newark and began studying medicine at Edinburgh University in 1809. In 1811, he was elected senior president of the Royal Medical Society; the next year, he earned his M.D. degree and was immediately appointed resident house physician at the Royal Infirmary in Edinburgh. He resigned from this position after two years, during which he visited Paris and its medical schools, as well as those in Berlin and Göttingen on a walking tour. In 1817, after settling in Nottingham, he published his Diagnosis, and in 1818, he wrote Mimoses, a work on various conditions known as bilious, nervous, etc. The following year, he was elected a fellow of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, and in 1825, he became a physician at the Nottingham General Hospital. In 1826, he moved to London, and the next year, he published his Commentaries on significant diseases affecting females. In 1830, he released his Observations on Blood-letting, founded on researches on the morbid and curative effects of loss of blood, which the medical community recognized as extremely valuable, and in 1831, his Experimental Essay on the Circulation of the Blood in the Capillary Vessels, where he demonstrated that the blood vessels between arteries and veins function to bring fluid blood into contact with the body’s tissues. The following year, he presented a paper at the Royal Society titled “On the inverse ratio which exists between Respiration and Irritability in the Animal Kingdom.” His most significant work in physiology dealt with the theory of reflex action, presented in a paper “On the reflex Function of the Medulla Oblongata and the Medulla Spinalis” (1832), later followed in 1837 by another paper “On the True Spinal Marrow, and the Excito-motor System of Nerves.” The “reflex function” garnered considerable attention across Europe, although some of his papers were not published by the Royal Society in England. Hall thus became the go-to authority on various health issues linked to abnormal nervous system conditions, building a large medical practice. His “ready method” for resuscitating individuals who had drowned or experienced other forms of suspended respiration has saved countless lives. He passed away from a throat condition, worsened by his lecturing, on August 11, 1857.

A list of his works and details of his “ready method,” &c., are given in his Memoirs by his widow (London, 1861).

A list of his works and details of his “ready method,” etc., are provided in his Memoirs by his widow (London, 1861).


HALL, ROBERT (1764-1831), English Baptist divine, was born on the 2nd of May 1764, at Arnesby near Leicester, where his father, Robert Hall (1728-1791), a man whose cast of mind in some respects resembled closely that of the son, was pastor of a Baptist congregation. Robert was the youngest of a family of fourteen. While still at the dame’s school his passion for books absorbed the greater part of his time, and in the summer it was his custom after school hours to retire to the churchyard with a volume, which he continued to peruse there till nightfall, making out the meaning of the more difficult words with the help of a pocket dictionary. From his sixth to his eleventh year he attended the school of Mr Simmons at Wigston, a village four miles from Arnesby. There his precocity assumed the exceptional form of an intense interest in metaphysics, partly perhaps on account of the restricted character of his father’s library; and before he was nine years of age he had read and re-read Jonathan Edwards’s Treatise on the Will and Butler’s Analogy. This incessant study at such an early period of life seems, however, to have had an injurious influence on his health. After he left Mr Simmons’s school his appearance was so sickly as to awaken fears of the presence of phthisis. In order, therefore, to obtain the benefit of a change of air, he stayed for some time in the house of a gentleman near Kettering, who with an impropriety which Hall himself afterwards referred to as “egregious,” prevailed upon the boy of eleven to give occasional addresses at prayer meetings. As his health seemed rapidly to recover, he was sent to a school at Northampton conducted by the Rev. John Ryland, where he remained a year and a half, and “made great progress in Latin and Greek.” On leaving school he for some time studied divinity under the direction of his father, and in October 1778 he entered the Bristol academy for the preparation of students for the Baptist ministry. Here the self-possession which had enabled him in his twelfth year to address unfalteringly various audiences of grown-up people seems to have strangely forsaken him; for when, in accordance with the arrangements of the academy, his turn came to deliver an address in the vestry of Broadmead chapel, he broke down on two separate occasions and was unable to finish his discourse. On the 13th of August 1780 he was set apart to the ministry, but he still continued his studies at the academy; and in 1781, in accordance with the provisions of an exhibition which he held, he entered King’s College, Aberdeen, where he took the degree of master of arts in March 1785. At the university he was without a rival of his own standing in any of the classes, distinguishing himself alike in classics, philosophy and mathematics. He there formed the acquaintance of Mackintosh (afterwards Sir James), who, though a year his junior in age, was a year his senior as a student. While they remained at Aberdeen the two were inseparable, reading together the best Greek authors, especially Plato, and discussing, either during their walks by the sea-shore and the banks of the Don or in their rooms until early morning, the most perplexed questions in philosophy and religion.

HALL, ROBERT (1764-1831), was an English Baptist minister, born on May 2, 1764, in Arnesby near Leicester, where his father, Robert Hall (1728-1791), who had a similar mindset to his son, served as the pastor of a Baptist congregation. Robert was the youngest of fourteen siblings. From a young age, he was passionate about books, spending most of his time reading. During the summer, he would often go to the churchyard after school with a book, reading until sunset and using a pocket dictionary to figure out the difficult words. From ages six to eleven, he attended Mr. Simmons's school in Wigston, a village four miles from Arnesby. His extraordinary intelligence drove him to develop a keen interest in metaphysics, likely influenced by the limited selection in his father's library; by the age of nine, he had read and re-read Jonathan Edwards’s Treatise on the Will and Butler’s Analogy. However, this intense study early on appeared to harm his health. After leaving Mr. Simmons’s school, he looked so frail that people worried he had tuberculosis. To benefit from fresher air, he stayed for a while with a gentleman near Kettering, who, in a way that Hall later called “egregious,” convinced the eleven-year-old to occasionally speak at prayer meetings. As his health improved, he was sent to a school in Northampton run by Rev. John Ryland, where he stayed for a year and a half and “made great progress in Latin and Greek.” After leaving school, he studied theology under his father’s guidance for a while, and in October 1778, he enrolled at the Bristol academy to prepare for the Baptist ministry. However, the confidence he had previously displayed when addressing adult audiences at just twelve seemed to fade; when it was his turn to give a speech at Broadmead chapel, he faltered twice and couldn’t finish. On August 13, 1780, he was ordained as a minister but continued his studies at the academy. In 1781, benefiting from a scholarship he held, he entered King’s College in Aberdeen, where he earned a master’s degree in March 1785. At university, he was unmatched among his peers in any class, excelling in classics, philosophy, and mathematics. There, he became friends with Mackintosh (later Sir James), who, though a year younger, was ahead of him as a student. While at Aberdeen, they were inseparable, reading the great Greek authors, especially Plato, and debating complex philosophical and religious questions during their walks by the seaside or in their rooms until dawn.

During the vacation between his last two sessions at Aberdeen, Hall acted as assistant pastor to Dr Evans at Broadmead chapel, Bristol, and three months after leaving the university he was appointed classical tutor in the Bristol academy, an office which he held for more than five years. Even at this period his extraordinary eloquence had excited an interest beyond the bounds of the denomination to which he belonged, and when he preached the chapel was generally crowded to excess, the audience including many persons of intellectual tastes. Suspicions in regard to his orthodoxy having in 1789 led to a misunderstanding with his colleague and a part of the congregation, he in July 1790 accepted an invitation to make trial of a congregation at Cambridge, of which he became pastor in July of the following year. From a statement of his opinions contained in a letter to the congregation which he left, it would appear that, while a firm believer in the proper divinity of Christ, he had at this time disowned the cardinal principles of Calvinism—the federal headship of Adam, and the doctrine of absolute election and reprobation; and that he was so far a materialist as to “hold that man’s thinking powers and faculties are the result of a certain organization of matter, and that after death he ceases to be conscious till the resurrection.” It was during his Cambridge ministry, which extended over a period of fifteen years, that his oratory was most brilliant and most immediately powerful. At Cambridge the intellectual character of a large part of the audience supplied a stimulus which was wanting at Leicester and Bristol.

During the break between his last two terms at Aberdeen, Hall served as the assistant pastor to Dr. Evans at Broadmead Chapel in Bristol. Three months after graduating from the university, he was appointed as a classical tutor at the Bristol Academy, a position he held for more than five years. Even then, his remarkable eloquence drew interest beyond his own denomination, and when he preached, the chapel was usually packed, attracting many intellectually curious listeners. In 1789, suspicions about his beliefs led to a conflict with his colleague and some members of the congregation. In July 1790, he accepted an invitation to try out with a congregation in Cambridge, where he became the pastor the following July. In a letter to the congregation he left behind, he stated that while he firmly believed in the divinity of Christ, he had by this time rejected the core principles of Calvinism—the federal headship of Adam and the doctrines of absolute election and reprobation. He also indicated that he leaned toward materialism, believing that human thought processes and faculties result from the organization of matter and that after death, one ceases to be conscious until the resurrection. During his fifteen years at Cambridge, his preaching was at its most brilliant and impactful. The intellectual nature of a large part of the audience there provided a level of stimulation that was missing in Leicester and Bristol.

His first published compositions had a political origin. In 1791 appeared Christianity consistent with the Love of Freedom, in which he defended the political conduct of dissenters against the attacks of the Rev. John Clayton, minister of Weighhouse, and gave eloquent expression to his hopes of great political and social ameliorations as destined to result nearly or remotely from the subversion of old ideas and institutions in the maelstrom of the French Revolution. In 1793 he expounded his political sentiments in a powerful and more extended pamphlet entitled an Apology for the Freedom of the Press. On account, however, of certain asperities into which the warmth of his feelings had betrayed him, and his conviction that he had treated his subject in too superficial a manner, he refused to permit the publication of the pamphlet beyond the third edition, until the references of political opponents and the circulation of copies without his sanction induced him in 1821 to prepare a new edition, from which he omitted the attack on Bishop Horsley, and to which he prefixed an advertisement stating that his political opinions had undergone no substantial change. His other publications while at Cambridge were three sermons—On Modern Infidelity (1801), Reflections on War (1802), and Sentiments proper to the present Crisis (1803). He began, however, to suffer from mental derangement in November 1804. He recovered so speedily that he was able to resume his duties in April 1805, but a recurrence of the malady rendered it advisable for him on his second recovery to resign his pastoral office in March 1806.

His first published works had a political background. In 1791, he released Christianity Consistent with the Love of Freedom, where he defended the political actions of dissenters against the criticisms from Rev. John Clayton, the minister of Weighhouse. He expressed his hopes for significant political and social improvements resulting from the upheaval of old ideas and institutions during the French Revolution. In 1793, he shared his political views in a strong and more comprehensive pamphlet titled An Apology for the Freedom of the Press. However, due to certain harsh remarks that arose from his passionate feelings and his belief that he had addressed the subject too lightly, he decided not to allow the pamphlet to be published beyond the third edition. It wasn’t until political rivalries and the unauthorized circulation of copies prompted him, in 1821, to create a new edition, from which he removed the criticism of Bishop Horsley and included a note stating that his political views had not significantly changed. While at Cambridge, he also published three sermons—On Modern Infidelity (1801), Reflections on War (1802), and Sentiments Proper to the Present Crisis (1803). However, he began to experience mental issues in November 1804. He recovered quickly enough to return to his duties in April 1805, but another episode of the illness made it necessary for him to resign from his pastoral position in March 1806.

On leaving Cambridge he paid a visit to his relatives in Leicestershire, and then for some time resided at Enderby, preaching occasionally in some of the neighbouring villages. 850 Latterly he ministered to a small congregation in Harvey Lane, Leicester, from whom at the close of 1806 he accepted a call to be their stated pastor. In the autumn of 1807 he changed his residence from Enderby to Leicester, and in 1808 he married the servant of a brother minister. His proposal of marriage had been made after an almost momentary acquaintance, and, according to the traditionary account, in very abrupt and peculiar terms; but, judging from his subsequent domestic life, his choice did sufficient credit to his penetration and sagacity. His writings at Leicester embraced various tracts printed for private circulation; a number of contributions to the Eclectic Review, among which may be mentioned his articles on “Foster’s Essays” and on “Zeal without Innovation”; several sermons, including those On the Advantages of Knowledge to the Lower Classes (1810), On the Death of the Princess Charlotte (1817), and On the Death of Dr Ryland (1825); and his pamphlet on Terms of Communion, in which he advocated intercommunion with all those who acknowledged the “essentials” of Christianity. In 1819 he published an edition in one volume of his sermons formerly printed. On the death of Dr Ryland, Hall was invited to return to the pastorate of Broadmead chapel, Bristol, and as the peace of the congregation at Leicester had been to some degree disturbed by a controversy regarding several cases of discipline, he resolved to accept the invitation, and removed there in April 1826. The malady of renal calculus had for many years rendered his life an almost continual martyrdom, and henceforth increasing infirmities and sufferings afflicted him. Gradually the inability to take proper exercise, by inducing a plethoric habit of body and impeding the circulation, led to a diseased condition of the heart, which resulted in his death on the 21st of February 1831. He is remembered as a great pulpit orator, of a somewhat laboured, rhetorical style in his written works, but of undeniable vigour in his spoken sermons.

After leaving Cambridge, he visited his relatives in Leicestershire and then lived in Enderby for a while, occasionally preaching in nearby villages. 850 Later, he served a small congregation in Harvey Lane, Leicester, and at the end of 1806, he accepted their invitation to become their pastor. In the fall of 1807, he moved from Enderby to Leicester, and in 1808, he married the servant of a fellow minister. His marriage proposal came after a very brief acquaintance and, according to tradition, was made in quite abrupt and unusual terms; however, judging by his later family life, his choice showed considerable insight and judgment. While in Leicester, he wrote various tracts for private distribution, contributed several pieces to the Eclectic Review, including articles on “Foster’s Essays” and “Zeal without Innovation,” authored several sermons like On the Advantages of Knowledge to the Lower Classes (1810), On the Death of the Princess Charlotte (1817), and On the Death of Dr Ryland (1825), and produced a pamphlet called Terms of Communion, where he supported intercommunion with anyone who recognized the "essentials" of Christianity. In 1819, he published a single volume edition of his previously printed sermons. After Dr. Ryland's death, Hall was invited to return as the pastor of Broadmead chapel in Bristol, and since the peace in the Leicester congregation had been somewhat disturbed by a controversy over various disciplinary cases, he decided to accept the invitation and moved there in April 1826. A long-standing condition of kidney stones had caused him significant suffering for many years, and from then on, increasing health challenges afflicted him. Gradually, his inability to exercise properly led to a congested body and circulation problems, resulting in a heart condition that caused his death on February 21, 1831. He is remembered as a prominent pulpit speaker, known for a somewhat elaborate and rhetorical style in his writings, but with undeniable energy in his spoken sermons.

See Works of Robert Hall, A.M., with a Brief Memoir of his Life, by Olinthus Gregory, LL.D., and Observations on his Character as Preacher by John Foster, originally published in 6 vols. (London, 1832); Reminiscences of the Rev. Robert Hall, A.M., by John Greene, (London, 1832); Biographical Recollections of the Rev. Robert Hall, by J. W. Morris (1848); Fifty Sermons of Robert Hall from Notes taken at the time of their Delivery, by the Rev. Thomas Grinfield, M.A. (1843); Reminiscences of College Life in Bristol during the Ministry of the Rev. Robert Hall, A.M., by Frederick Trestrail (1879).

See Works of Robert Hall, A.M., with a Brief Memoir of his Life, by Olinthus Gregory, LL.D., and Observations on his Character as Preacher by John Foster, originally published in 6 vols. (London, 1832); Reminiscences of the Rev. Robert Hall, A.M., by John Greene, (London, 1832); Biographical Recollections of the Rev. Robert Hall, by J. W. Morris (1848); Fifty Sermons of Robert Hall from Notes taken at the time of their Delivery, by the Rev. Thomas Grinfield, M.A. (1843); Reminiscences of College Life in Bristol during the Ministry of the Rev. Robert Hall, A.M., by Frederick Trestrail (1879).


HALL, SAMUEL CARTER (1800-1889), English journalist, was born at Waterford on the 9th of May 1800, the son of an army officer. In 1821 he went to London, and in 1823 became a parliamentary reporter. From 1826 to 1837 he was editor of a great number and variety of public prints, and in 1839 he founded and edited The Art Journal. His exposure of the trade in bogus “Old Masters” earned for this publication a considerable reputation. Hall resigned the editorship in 1880, and was granted a Civil List pension “for his long and valuable services to literature and art.” He died in London on the 16th of March 1889. His wife, Anna Maria Fielding (1800-1881), became well known as Mrs S. C. Hall, for her numerous novels, sketches of Irish life, and plays. Two of the last, The Groves of Blarney and The French Refugee, were produced in London with success. She also wrote a number of children’s books, and was practically interested in various London charities, several of which she helped to found.

HALL, SAMUEL CARTER (1800-1889), English journalist, was born in Waterford on May 9, 1800, to an army officer. In 1821, he moved to London, and by 1823, he became a parliamentary reporter. From 1826 to 1837, he was the editor of many public publications, and in 1839, he founded and edited The Art Journal. His exposure of the trade in fake “Old Masters” earned this publication considerable acclaim. Hall stepped down from his editor position in 1880 and received a Civil List pension “for his long and valuable services to literature and art.” He passed away in London on March 16, 1889. His wife, Anna Maria Fielding (1800-1881), became well known as Mrs. S. C. Hall for her numerous novels, sketches of Irish life, and plays. Two of her last works, The Groves of Blarney and The French Refugee, were successfully produced in London. She also authored several children’s books and actively supported various London charities, many of which she helped establish.


HALL, WILLIAM EDWARD (1835-1894), English writer on international law, was the only child of William Hall, M.D., a descendant of a junior branch of the Halls of Dunglass, and of Charlotte, daughter of William Cotton, F.S.A. He was born on the 22nd of August 1835, at Leatherhead, Surrey, but passed his childhood abroad, Dr Hall having acted as physician to the king of Hanover, and subsequently to the British legation at Naples. Hence, perhaps, the son’s taste in after life for art and modern languages. He was educated privately till, at the early age of seventeen, he matriculated at Oxford, where in 1856 he took his degree with a first class in the then recently instituted school of law and history, gaining, three years afterwards, the chancellor’s prize for an essay upon “the effect upon Spain of the discovery of the precious metals in America.” In 1861 he was called to the bar at Lincoln’s Inn, but devoted his time less to any serious attempt to obtain practice than to the study of Italian art, and to travelling over a great part of Europe, always bringing home admirable water-colour drawings of buildings and scenery. He was an early and enthusiastic member of the Alpine Club, making several first ascents, notably that of the Lyskamm. He was always much interested in military matters, and was under fire, on the Danish side, in the war of 1864. In 1867 he published a pamphlet entitled “A Plan for the Reorganization of the Army,” and, many years afterwards, he saw as much as he was permitted to see of the expedition sent for the rescue of Gordon. He would undoubtedly have made his mark in the army, but in later life his ideal, which he realized, with much success, first at Llanfihangel in Monmouthshire, and then at Coker Court in Somersetshire, was, as has been said, “the English country gentleman, with cosmopolitan experiences, encyclopaedic knowledge, and artistic feeling.” His travels took him to Lapland, Egypt, South America and India. He had done good work for several government offices, in 1871 as inspector of returns under the Elementary Education Act, in 1877 by reports to the Board of Trade upon Oyster Fisheries, in France as well as in England; and all the time was amassing materials for ambitious undertakings upon the history of civilization, and of the colonies. His title to lasting remembrance rests, however, upon his labours in the realm of international law, recognized by his election as associé in 1875, and as membre in 1882, of the Institut de Droit International. In 1874 he published a thin 8vo upon the Rights and Duties of Neutrals, and followed it up in 1880 by his magnum opus, the Treatise on International Law, unquestionably the best book upon the subject in the English language. It is well planned, free from the rhetorical vagueness which has been the besetting vice of older books of a similar character, full of information, and everywhere bearing traces of the sound judgment and statesmanlike views of its author. In 1894 Hall published a useful monograph upon a little-explored topic, “the Foreign Jurisdictions of the British Crown,” but on the 30th of November of the same year, while apparently in the fullest enjoyment of bodily as well as mental vigour, he suddenly died. He married, in 1866, Imogen, daughter of Mr (afterwards Mr Justice) Grove, who died in 1886; and in 1891, Alice, daughter of Colonel Hill of Court Hill, Shropshire, but left no issue.

HALL, WILLIAM EDWARD (1835-1894), was an English writer on international law and the only child of William Hall, M.D., a descendant of a junior branch of the Halls of Dunglass, and Charlotte, the daughter of William Cotton, F.S.A. He was born on August 22, 1835, in Leatherhead, Surrey, but spent his childhood abroad since Dr. Hall served as the physician to the king of Hanover and later to the British legation in Naples. This might explain his later interests in art and modern languages. He was educated privately until, at just seventeen, he enrolled at Oxford, where in 1856 he graduated with a first-class degree from the newly established school of law and history, winning the chancellor’s prize three years later for an essay on “the effect upon Spain of the discovery of precious metals in America.” In 1861, he was called to the bar at Lincoln’s Inn, but he focused more on studying Italian art and traveling extensively throughout Europe, often returning with impressive watercolor drawings of buildings and landscapes. He was an early and passionate member of the Alpine Club, achieving several first ascents, including the Lyskamm. Always interested in military matters, he was under fire on the Danish side in the 1864 war. In 1867, he published a pamphlet titled “A Plan for the Reorganization of the Army,” and many years later, he observed as much as possible of the expedition sent to rescue Gordon. He would have certainly made a name for himself in the army, but later on, he achieved his ideal of being “the English country gentleman, with cosmopolitan experiences, encyclopedic knowledge, and artistic sensibility,” first at Llanfihangel in Monmouthshire and then at Coker Court in Somersetshire. His travels took him to Lapland, Egypt, South America, and India. He contributed significantly to various government offices, serving as inspector of returns under the Elementary Education Act in 1871, and reporting on oyster fisheries to the Board of Trade in France and England in 1877, all the while gathering materials for ambitious projects on the history of civilization and the colonies. However, he is primarily remembered for his work in international law, acknowledged by his election as associé in 1875 and membre in 1882 of the Institut de Droit International. In 1874, he published a brief book on the Rights and Duties of Neutrals, followed by his magnum opus, the Treatise on International Law, in 1880, which is undoubtedly the best book on the subject in English. It is well-structured, avoiding the rhetorical vagueness typical of older works on the topic, filled with information, and clearly reflects the sound judgment and statesmanlike perspective of its author. In 1894, Hall released a useful monograph on the little-explored subject of “the Foreign Jurisdictions of the British Crown,” but on November 30 of the same year, while seemingly enjoying robust health both physically and mentally, he suddenly passed away. He married Imogen, the daughter of Mr (later Mr. Justice) Grove, in 1866; she died in 1886. In 1891, he married Alice, the daughter of Colonel Hill of Court Hill, Shropshire, but he had no children.

See T. E. Holland in Law Quarterly Review, vol. xi. p. 113; and in Studies in International Law, p. 302.

See T. E. Holland in Law Quarterly Review, vol. xi. p. 113; and in Studies in International Law, p. 302.

(T. E. H.)

HALL, or Bad-Hall, a market-place and spa of Austria, in Upper Austria, 25 m. S. of Linz by rail. Pop. (1900) 984. It is renowned for its saline springs, strongly impregnated with iodine and bromine, which are considered very efficacious in scrofulous affections and venereal skin diseases. Although the springs are known since the 8th century, Hall attained its actual importance only since 1855, when the springs became the property of the government. The number of visitors in 1901 was 4300.

HALL, or Bad-Hall, is a marketplace and spa in Austria, located in Upper Austria, 25 miles south of Linz by train. Population (1900) was 984. It is famous for its salty springs, rich in iodine and bromine, which are believed to be very effective for treating scrofulous conditions and skin diseases transmitted through sexual contact. Although the springs have been known since the 8th century, Hall gained its current significance only after 1855, when the government took ownership of the springs. The number of visitors in 1901 was 4,300.


HALL (generally known as Schwäbisch-Hall, to distinguish it from the small town of Hall in Tirol and Bad-Hall, a health resort in Upper Austria), a town of Germany, in the kingdom of Württemberg, situated in a deep valley on both sides of the Kocher, and on the railway from Heilbronn to Krailsheim, 35 m. N.E. of Stuttgart. Pop. (1905) 9400. It possesses four Evangelical churches (of which the Michaeliskirche dates from the 15th century and has fine medieval carving), a Roman Catholic church, a handsome town hall and classical and modern schools. A short distance south from the town is the royal castle of Komburg, formerly a Benedictine abbey and now used as a garrison for invalid soldiers, with a church dating from the 12th century. The town is chiefly known for its production of salt, which is converted into brine and piped from Wilhelmsglück mine, 5 m. distant. Connected with the salt-works there is a salt-bath and whey-diet establishment. The industries of the town also include cotton-spinning, iron founding, tanning, and the manufacture of soap, starch, brushes, machines, carriages and metal ware.

HALL (commonly referred to as Schwäbisch Hall to differentiate it from the small town of Hall in Tirol and Bad-Hall, a health resort in Upper Austria) is a town in Germany, located in the kingdom of Württemberg. It's situated in a deep valley on both sides of the Kocher River and along the railway from Heilbronn to Krailsheim, 35 miles northeast of Stuttgart. The population (in 1905) was 9,400. The town features four Evangelical churches (including the Michaeliskirche, which dates back to the 15th century and showcases impressive medieval carvings), a Roman Catholic church, an attractive town hall, and various classical and modern schools. Just south of the town is the royal castle of Komburg, which was formerly a Benedictine abbey and is now used as a garrison for disabled soldiers, featuring a church that dates back to the 12th century. The town is primarily known for its salt production, which is turned into brine and piped from the Wilhelmsglück mine, located 5 miles away. Associated with the salt works is a salt bath and a whey diet facility. The town's industries also include cotton spinning, iron founding, tanning, and the production of soap, starch, brushes, machinery, carriages, and metal goods.

851

851

Hall was early of importance on account of its salt-mines, which were held as a fief of the Empire by the so-called Salzgrafen (Salt-graves), of whom the earliest known, the counts of Westheim, had their seat in the castle of Hall. Later the town belonged to the Knights Templars. It was made a free imperial city in 1276 by Rudolph of Habsburg. In 1802 it came into the possession of Württemberg.

Hall was significant early on due to its salt mines, which were held as a fief of the Empire by the so-called Salzgrafen (Salt-graves). The earliest known of these were the counts of Westheim, who were based in the castle of Hall. Later, the town was owned by the Knights Templars. In 1276, it was granted the status of a free imperial city by Rudolph of Habsburg. It came under the control of Württemberg in 1802.


HALL (O. E. heall, a common Teutonic word, cf. Ger. Halle), a term which has two significations in England and is applied sometimes to the manor house, the residence of the lord of the manor, which implied a territorial possession, but more often to the entrance hall of a mansion. In the latter case it was the one large room in the feudal castle up to the middle of the 15th century, when it served as audience chamber, dining-room, and dormitory. The hall was generally a parallelogram on plan, with a raised daïs at the farther end, a large bow window on one side, and in one or two cases on both sides. At the entrance end was a passage, which was separated from the hall by a partition screen often elaborately decorated, and over which was provided a minstrels’ gallery; on the opposite side of the passage were the hatches communicating with the serveries. This arrangement is still found in some of the colleges at Oxford and Cambridge, such as those of New College, Christchurch, Wadham and Magdalen, Oxford, and in Trinity College, Cambridge. In private mansions, however, the kitchen and offices have been removed to a greater distance, and the great hall is only used for banquets. Among the more remarkable examples are the halls of Audley End; Hatfield; Brougham Castle; Hardwick; Knole Stanway in Gloucestershire; Wollaton, where it is situated in the centre of the mansion and lighted by clerestory windows; Burton Agnes in Yorkshire; Canons Ashley, Northamptonshire; Westwood Park, Worcestershire; Fountains, Yorkshire; Sydenham House, Devonshire; Cobham, Kent; Montacute, Somersetshire; Bolsover Castle, Derbyshire (vaulted and with two columns in the centre of the hall to carry the vault); Longford Castle, Wiltshire; Barlborough, Derbyshire; Rushton Hall, Northamptonshire, with a bow window at each end of the daïs and a third bow window at the other end; Knole, Kent; and at Mayfield, Sussex (with stone arches across to carry the roof), now converted into a Roman Catholic chapel. Many of these halls have hammer-beam roofs, the most remarkable of which is found in the Middle Temple Hall, London, where both the tie and collar beams have hammer-beams. Of other halls, Westminster is the largest, being 238 ft. long; followed by the Banqueting Hall, Whitehall, 110 ft.; Wolsey’s Hall, Hampton Court, 106 ft.; the Egyptian Hall at the Mansion House; the hall at Lambeth, now the library; Crosby Hall; Gray’s Inn Hall; the Guildhall; Charterhouse; and the following halls of the London City Companies—Clothworkers, Brewers, Goldsmiths, Fishmongers. The term hall is also given to the following English mansions:—Haddon, Hardwick, Apethorpe, Aston, Blickling, Brereton, Burton Agnes, Cobham, Dingley, Rushton, Kirby, Litford and Wollaton; and it was the name of some of the earlier colleges at Oxford and Cambridge, most of which have now been absorbed in other colleges, so that there remain only St Edmund’s Hall, Oxford, and Trinity Hall, Cambridge.

HALL (O. E. heall, a common Teutonic word, cf. Ger. Halle), a term that has two meanings in England. It sometimes refers to the manor house, the residence of the lord of the manor, signifying a territorial possession, but more often it refers to the entrance hall of a mansion. In this latter case, it was the main room in the feudal castle up to the middle of the 15th century, serving as the audience chamber, dining room, and dormitory. The hall was typically a rectangular shape, with a raised platform at one end, a large bay window on one side, and sometimes on both sides. At the entrance, there was a passage separated from the hall by a partition screen, often beautifully decorated, above which was a gallery for musicians. On the opposite side of the passage were the hatches that connected to the serving areas. This layout can still be seen in some of the colleges at Oxford and Cambridge, such as New College, Christchurch, Wadham, and Magdalen in Oxford, and Trinity College in Cambridge. However, in private homes, the kitchen and service areas have been moved further away, and the grand hall is now mostly used for banquets. Notable examples include the halls at Audley End; Hatfield; Brougham Castle; Hardwick; Knole; Stanway in Gloucestershire; Wollaton, where it is centered in the mansion and lit by clerestory windows; Burton Agnes in Yorkshire; Canons Ashley in Northamptonshire; Westwood Park in Worcestershire; Fountains in Yorkshire; Sydenham House in Devon; Cobham in Kent; Montacute in Somerset; Bolsover Castle in Derbyshire (with a vaulted ceiling and two columns in the center of the hall to support the vault); Longford Castle in Wiltshire; Barlborough in Derbyshire; Rushton Hall in Northamptonshire, which has a bay window at each end of the platform and a third at the opposite end; Knole in Kent; and at Mayfield in Sussex (with stone arches to support the roof), now converted into a Roman Catholic chapel. Many of these halls feature hammer-beam roofs, with the most notable being in the Middle Temple Hall, London, where both the tie and collar beams have hammer-beams. Other notable halls include Westminster, the largest at 238 ft. long; followed by the Banqueting Hall at Whitehall, 110 ft.; Wolsey’s Hall at Hampton Court, 106 ft.; the Egyptian Hall at the Mansion House; the hall at Lambeth, now the library; Crosby Hall; Gray’s Inn Hall; the Guildhall; Charterhouse; and the halls of various London City Companies—Clothworkers, Brewers, Goldsmiths, Fishmongers. The term hall also refers to several English mansions: Haddon, Hardwick, Apethorpe, Aston, Blickling, Brereton, Burton Agnes, Cobham, Dingley, Rushton, Kirby, Litford, and Wollaton; and it was the name used for some of the earlier colleges at Oxford and Cambridge, most of which have since merged into other colleges, leaving only St Edmund’s Hall, Oxford, and Trinity Hall, Cambridge.


HALLAM, HENRY (1777-1859), English historian, was the only son of John Hallam, canon of Windsor and dean of Bristol, and was born on the 9th of July 1777. He was educated at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, where he graduated in 1799. Called to the bar, he practised for some years on the Oxford circuit; but his tastes were literary, and when, on the death of his father in 1812, he inherited a small estate in Lincolnshire, he gave himself up wholly to the studies of his life. He had early become connected with the brilliant band of authors and politicians who then led the Whig party, a connexion to which he owed his appointment to the well-paid and easy post of commissioner of stamps; but in practical politics, for which he was by nature unsuited, he took no active share. But he was an active supporter of many popular movements—particularly of that which ended in the abolition of the slave trade; and he was throughout his entire life sincerely and profoundly attached to the political principles of the Whigs, both in their popular and in their aristocratic aspect.

HALLAM, HENRY (1777-1859), was an English historian and the only son of John Hallam, a canon of Windsor and dean of Bristol, born on July 9, 1777. He was educated at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, where he graduated in 1799. After being called to the bar, he practiced for a few years on the Oxford circuit, but his interests leaned toward literature. When his father passed away in 1812, he inherited a small estate in Lincolnshire and dedicated himself entirely to his lifelong studies. He had previously connected with a talented group of authors and politicians who led the Whig party, a relationship that helped him secure the well-paying and relatively easy position of commissioner of stamps. However, he did not engage actively in practical politics, as he was not suited for it by nature. Still, he was a strong supporter of many popular movements, especially the one that resulted in the abolition of the slave trade. Throughout his life, he remained genuinely and deeply committed to the political principles of the Whigs, both in their popular and aristocratic forms.

Hallam’s earliest literary work was undertaken in connexion with the great organ of the Whig party, the Edinburgh Review, where his review of Scott’s Dryden attracted much notice. His first great work, The View of the State of Europe during the Middle Ages, was produced in 1818, and was followed nine years later by the Constitutional History of England. In 1838-1839 appeared the Introduction to the Literature of Europe in the 15th, 16th and 17th Centuries. These are the three works on which the fame of Hallam rests. They at once took a place in English literature which has never been seriously challenged. A volume of supplemental notes to his Middle Ages was published in 1848. These facts and dates represent nearly all the events of Hallam’s career. The strongest personal interest in his life was the affliction which befell him in the loss of his children, one after another. His eldest son, Arthur Henry Hallam,—the “A.H.H.” of Tennyson’s In Memoriam, and by the testimony of his contemporaries a man of the most brilliant promise,—died in 1833 at the age of twenty-two. Seventeen years later, his second son, Henry Fitzmaurice Hallam, was cut off like his brother at the very threshold of what might have been a great career. The premature death and high talents of these young men, and the association of one of them with the most popular poem of the age, have made Hallam’s family afflictions better known than any other incidents of his life. He survived wife, daughter and sons by many years. In 1834 Hallam published The Remains in Prose and Verse of Arthur Henry Hallam, with a Sketch of his Life. In 1852 a selection of Literary Essays and Characters from the Literature of Europe was published. Hallam was a fellow of the Royal Society, and a trustee of the British Museum, and enjoyed many other appropriate distinctions. In 1830 he received the gold medal for history, founded by George IV. He died on the 21st of January 1859.

Hallam’s earliest literary work was connected to the major publication of the Whig party, the Edinburgh Review, where his review of Scott’s Dryden gained significant attention. His first major work, The View of the State of Europe during the Middle Ages, was released in 1818 and was followed nine years later by the Constitutional History of England. In 1838-1839, he published the Introduction to the Literature of Europe in the 15th, 16th and 17th Centuries. These three works are the foundation of Hallam’s reputation, earning a lasting place in English literature that has never been seriously disputed. A volume of supplementary notes to his Middle Ages was released in 1848. These facts and dates cover nearly all the significant events of Hallam’s career. The most personal aspect of his life was the grief he experienced from losing his children, one after another. His eldest son, Arthur Henry Hallam—known as “A.H.H.” in Tennyson’s In Memoriam, and described by his contemporaries as a man of remarkable promise—died in 1833 at the age of twenty-two. Seventeen years later, his second son, Henry Fitzmaurice Hallam, was also taken from him at the brink of a potentially great career. The untimely deaths and exceptional talents of these young men, along with one of them being linked to the most popular poem of the time, have made Hallam’s family tragedies better known than any other events of his life. He outlived his wife, daughter, and sons by many years. In 1834, Hallam published The Remains in Prose and Verse of Arthur Henry Hallam, with a Sketch of his Life. In 1852, a selection of Literary Essays and Characters from the Literature of Europe was published. Hallam was a fellow of the Royal Society, a trustee of the British Museum, and held many other distinguished roles. In 1830, he received the gold medal for history awarded by George IV. He died on January 21, 1859.

The Middle Ages is described by Hallam himself as a series of historical dissertations, a comprehensive survey of the chief circumstances that can interest a philosophical inquirer during the period from the 5th to the 15th century. The work consists of nine long chapters, each of which is a complete treatise in itself. The history of France, of Italy, of Spain, of Germany, and of the Greek and Saracenic empires, sketched in rapid and general terms, is the subject of five separate chapters. Others deal with the great institutional features of medieval society—the development of the feudal system, of the ecclesiastical system, and of the free political system of England. The last chapter sketches the general state of society, the growth of commerce, manners, and literature in the middle ages. The book may be regarded as a general view of early modern history, preparatory to the more detailed treatment of special lines of inquiry carried out in his subsequent works, although Hallam’s original intention was to continue the work on the scale on which it had been begun.

The Middle Ages is characterized by Hallam as a series of historical essays, offering a thorough overview of the main elements that would interest a philosophical researcher during the period from the 5th to the 15th century. The work includes nine lengthy chapters, each of which serves as a complete discourse on its own. Five of these chapters provide a broad summary of the histories of France, Italy, Spain, Germany, and the Greek and Saracenic empires. The other chapters focus on the major institutional aspects of medieval society—the evolution of the feudal system, the ecclesiastical system, and the development of England's free political system. The final chapter outlines the general societal conditions, including the rise of commerce, social customs, and literature during the Middle Ages. The book can be seen as a broad overview of early modern history, setting the stage for more in-depth exploration of specific topics in his later works, even though Hallam initially planned to expand the work to match its original scope.

The Constitutional History of England takes up the subject at the point at which it had been dropped in the View of the Middle Ages, viz. the accession of Henry VII.,1 and carries it down to the accession of George III. Hallam stopped here for a characteristic reason, which it is impossible not to respect and to regret. He was unwilling to excite the prejudices of modern politics which seemed to him to run back through the whole period of the reign of George III. As a matter of fact they ran back much farther, as Hallam soon found. The sensitive impartiality which withheld him from touching perhaps the most interesting period in the history of the constitution did not save him from the charge of partisanship. The Quarterly Review for 1828 contains an article on the Constitutional History, written by Southey, full of railing and reproach. The work, he says, is the “production of a decided partisan,” who “rakes in the ashes of long-forgotten and a thousand times buried slanders, 852 for the means of heaping obloquy on all who supported the established institutions of the country.” No accusation made by a critic ever fell so wide of the mark. Absolute justice is the standard which Hallam set himself and maintained. His view of constitutional history was that it should contain only so much of the political and general history of the time as bears directly on specific changes in the organization of the state, including therein judicial as well as ecclesiastical institutions. But while abstaining from irrelevant historical discussions, Hallam dealt with statesmen and policies with the calm and fearless impartiality of a judge. It was his cool treatment of such sanctified names as Charles, Cranmer and Laud that provoked the indignation of Southey and the Quarterly, who forgot that the same impartial measure was extended to statesmen on the other side. If Hallam can ever be said to have deviated from perfect fairness, it was in the tacit assumption that the 19th-century theory of the constitution was the right theory in previous centuries, and that those who departed from it on one side or the other were in the wrong. He did unconsciously antedate the constitution, and it is clear from incidental allusions in his last work that he did not regard with favour the democratic changes which he thought to be impending. Hallam, like Macaulay, ultimately referred all political questions to the standard of Whig constitutionalism. But though his work is thus, like that of many historians, coloured by his opinions, this was not the outcome of a conscious purpose, and he was scrupulously conscientious in collecting and weighing his materials. In this he was helped by his legal training, and it was doubtless this fact which made the Constitutional History one of the text-books of English politics, to which men of all parties appealed, and which, in spite of all the work of later writers, still leaves it a standard authority.

The Constitutional History of England picks up where the View of the Middle Ages left off, specifically at the beginning of Henry VII's reign, and continues to the start of George III's reign. Hallam stopped at this point for a notable reason that is both understandable and regrettable. He didn’t want to stir up the biases of modern politics, which, to him, seemed to permeate the entire period of George III's rule. In reality, those biases stretched back much further, as Hallam soon discovered. His careful impartiality, which prevented him from addressing perhaps the most fascinating period in constitutional history, didn’t spare him from accusations of partisanship. The Quarterly Review for 1828 features an article on the Constitutional History written by Southey, filled with criticism and scorn. He claims it is the “work of a clear partisan,” who “digs up the ashes of long-forgotten and repeatedly buried slanders to heap shame on everyone who supported the established institutions of the country.” No accusation from a critic has ever missed the mark so widely. Hallam aimed for absolute fairness and achieved it. His perspective on constitutional history was that it should include only the political and general history relevant to specific changes in the state's organization, incorporating both judicial and ecclesiastical institutions. However, while steering clear of irrelevant historical debates, Hallam approached statesmen and policies with the calm and fearless neutrality of a judge. It was his even-handed treatment of esteemed figures like Charles, Cranmer, and Laud that sparked the outrage of Southey and the Quarterly, who overlooked that the same impartial approach was applied to figures on the opposite side. If Hallam ever strayed from perfect fairness, it was in his implicit belief that the 19th-century view of the constitution was the correct one for earlier centuries and that those who diverged from it—whether to the left or right—were wrong. He did unintentionally position the constitution in the past too early, and incidental remarks in his later work indicate he wasn’t in favor of the democratic changes he believed were looming. Hallam, like Macaulay, ultimately measured all political issues against the standards of Whig constitutionalism. Yet, while his work is, like that of many historians, influenced by his views, this wasn’t due to a deliberate intention, and he was meticulous in gathering and evaluating his sources. His legal training undoubtedly aided him in this, and it is likely this fact made the Constitutional History one of the foundational texts of English politics, referenced by people from all parties, and which, despite the contributions of later writers, remains a standard authority.

Like the Constitutional History, the Introduction to the Literature of Europe continues one of the branches of inquiry which had been opened in the View of the Middle Ages. In the first chapter of the Literature, which is to a great extent supplementary to the last chapter of the Middle Ages, Hallam sketches the state of literature in Europe down to the end of the 14th century: the extinction of ancient learning which followed the fall of the Roman empire and the rise of Christianity; the preservation of the Latin language in the services of the church; and the slow revival of letters, which began to show itself soon after the 7th century—“the nadir of the human mind”—had been passed. For the first century and a half of his special period he is mainly occupied with a review of classical learning, and he adopts the plan of taking short decennial periods and noticing the most remarkable works which they produced. The rapid growth of literature in the 16th century compels him to resort to a classification of subjects. Thus in the period 1520-1550 we have separate chapters on ancient literature, theology, speculative philosophy and jurisprudence, the literature of taste, and scientific and miscellaneous literature; and the subdivisions of subjects is carried further of course in the later periods. Thus poetry, the drama and polite literature form the subjects of separate chapters. One inconvenient result of this arrangement is that the same author is scattered over many chapters, according as his works fall within this category or that period of time. Names like Shakespeare, Grotius, Bacon, Hobbes appear in half a dozen different places. The individuality of great authors is thus dissipated except when it has been preserved by an occasional sacrifice of the arrangement—and this defect, if it is to be esteemed a defect, is increased by the very sparing references to personal history and character with which Hallam was obliged to content himself. His plan excluded biographical history, nor is the work, he tells us, to be regarded as one of reference. It is rigidly an account of the books which would make a complete library of the period,2 arranged according to the date of their publication and the nature of their subjects. The history of institutions like universities and academies, and that of great popular movements like the Reformation, are of course noticed in their immediate connexion with literary results; but Hallam had little taste for the spacious generalization which such subjects suggest. The great qualities displayed in this work have been universally acknowledged—conscientiousness, accuracy, judgment and enormous reading. Not the least striking testimony to Hallam’s powers is his mastery over so many diverse forms of intellectual activity. In science and theology, mathematics and poetry, metaphysics and law, he is a competent and always a fair if not a profound critic. The bent of his own mind is manifest in his treatment of pure literature and of political speculation—which seems to be inspired with stronger personal interest and a higher sense of power than other parts of his work display. Not less worthy of notice in a literary history is the good sense by which both his learning and his tastes have been held in control. Probably no writer ever possessed a juster view of the relative importance of men and things. The labour devoted to an investigation is with Hallam no excuse for dwelling on the result, unless that is in itself important. He turns away contemptuously from the mere curiosities of literature, and is never tempted to make a display of trivial erudition. Nor do we find that his interest in special studies leads him to assign them a disproportionate place in his general view of the literature of a period.

Like the Constitutional History, the Introduction to the Literature of Europe continues one of the lines of inquiry that was started in the View of the Middle Ages. In the first chapter of the Literature, which serves as a supplement to the last chapter of the Middle Ages, Hallam outlines the state of literature in Europe up to the end of the 14th century: the decline of ancient learning that followed the fall of the Roman Empire and the rise of Christianity; the preservation of the Latin language in church services; and the slow revival of letters, which began to surface soon after the 7th century—“the nadir of the human mind”—had been surpassed. For the first century and a half of his specific period, he mainly reviews classical learning, using a method of taking short ten-year periods and highlighting the most notable works produced in them. The rapid expansion of literature in the 16th century leads him to categorize subjects. So, in the period from 1520-1550, we have separate chapters on ancient literature, theology, speculative philosophy, jurisprudence, literature of taste, and scientific and miscellaneous literature; and the subdivisions of subjects are further expanded in the later periods. Thus, poetry, drama, and polite literature each have their own chapters. One downside of this setup is that the same author is spread across many chapters, depending on where their works fit into a category or time frame. Names like Shakespeare, Grotius, Bacon, and Hobbes appear in several different sections. The individuality of great authors is thus diluted, unless it's preserved by occasionally sacrificing the arrangement—and this flaw, if considered a flaw, is exacerbated by the limited references to personal history and character that Hallam managed to include. His approach excluded biographical history, and he notes that the work should not be viewed as a reference book. It is strictly an account of the books that would form a complete library of the period, arranged by their publication dates and the nature of their subjects. The history of institutions like universities and academies, as well as significant movements like the Reformation, is mentioned in connection with literary outcomes; however, Hallam had little interest in the broad generalizations such topics invite. The impressive qualities displayed in this work, such as conscientiousness, accuracy, judgment, and extensive reading, have been universally acknowledged. A significant testament to Hallam’s abilities is his mastery over various fields of intellectual activity. In science and theology, mathematics and poetry, metaphysics and law, he is a competent and always fair, if not deeply profound, critic. The inclination of his own mind is clear in his treatment of pure literature and political thought—which seem to be driven by a stronger personal interest and a greater sense of power than other parts of his work display. Equally important in this literary history is the good sense with which his learning and tastes have been balanced. Probably no writer ever had a fairer view of the relative significance of people and ideas. The effort spent on research does not excuse Hallam from fixating on the results unless they are important in themselves. He dismisses the mere curiosities of literature with disdain and is never tempted to showcase trivial scholarship. Nor do we see that his interest in specific studies leads him to give them an undue prominence in his overall view of the literature of a period.

Hallam is generally described as a “philosophical historian.” The description is justified not so much by any philosophical quality in his method as by the nature of his subject and his own temper. Hallam is a philosopher to this extent that both in political and in literary history he fixed his attention on results rather than on persons. His conception of history embraced the whole movement of society. Beside that conception the issue of battles and the fate of kings fall into comparative insignificance. “We can trace the pedigree of princes,” he reflects, “fill up the catalogue of towns besieged and provinces desolated, describe even the whole pageantry of coronations and festivals, but we cannot recover the genuine history of mankind.” But, on the other hand, there is no trace in Hallam of anything like a philosophy of history or society. Wise and generally melancholy reflections on human nature and political society are not infrequent in his writings, and they arise naturally and incidentally out of the subject he is discussing. His object is the attainment of truth in matters of fact. Sweeping theories of the movement of society, and broad characterizations of particular periods of history seem to have no attraction for him. The view of mankind on which such generalizations are usually based, taking little account of individual character, was highly distasteful to him. Thus he objects to the use of statistics because they favour that tendency to regard all men as mentally and morally equal which is so unhappily strong in modern times. At the same time Hallam by no means assumes the tone of the mere scholar. He is even solicitous to show that his point of view is that of the cultivated gentleman and not of the specialist of any order. Thus he tells us that Montaigne is the first French author whom an English gentleman is ashamed not to have read. In fact, allusions to the necessary studies of a gentleman meet us constantly, reminding us of the unlikely erudition of the schoolboy in Macaulay. Hallam’s prejudices, so far as he had any, belong to the same character. His criticism is apt to assume a tone of moral censure when he has to deal with certain extremes of human thought—scepticism in philosophy, atheism in religion and democracy in politics.

Hallam is often referred to as a “philosophical historian.” This label fits not so much because of any philosophical quality in his method, but more because of the nature of his subject matter and his personality. Hallam approaches history as a philosopher in that, in both political and literary history, he focuses on outcomes rather than individual figures. His view of history encompasses the entire movement of society. In comparison to this broader perspective, the outcomes of battles and the destinies of kings seem relatively minor. “We can track the lineage of princes,” he notes, “compile lists of besieged towns and devastated provinces, even describe the entire spectacle of coronations and celebrations, but we cannot recover the true history of humanity.” However, Hallam does not exhibit any trace of a comprehensive philosophy of history or society. His writings often include thoughtful and generally somber reflections on human nature and political society, which arise naturally from the topics he discusses. His aim is to uncover truths regarding factual matters. Broad theories about the progress of society and sweeping characterizations of specific historical periods do not seem to interest him. The view of humanity that such generalizations typically rely on—which gives little regard to individual character—was particularly unappealing to him. Consequently, he criticizes the use of statistics because they support the tendency to regard all people as mentally and morally equal, which he finds sadly prevalent in modern times. At the same time, Hallam does not adopt the tone of a mere academic. He even takes care to emphasize that his perspective is that of a cultured gentleman, not of any specialized expert. For instance, he notes that Montaigne is the first French author that an English gentleman feels embarrassed not to have read. In fact, references to the essential studies of a gentleman frequently appear, reminding readers of the unlikely learning of the schoolboy in Macaulay. Hallam's biases, if he had any, reflect this same character. His criticism tends to take on a tone of moral condemnation when he addresses certain extremes of human thought—skepticism in philosophy, atheism in religion, and democracy in politics.

Hallam’s style is singularly uniform throughout all his writings. It is sincere and straightforward, and obviously innocent of any motive beyond that of clearly expressing the writer’s meaning. In the Literature of Europe there are many passages of great imaginative beauty.

Hallam's style is consistently uniform across all his writings. It is genuine and straightforward, clearly free of any motives other than to express the writer's meaning. In the Literature of Europe, there are many passages with great imaginative beauty.

(E. R.)

1 Lord Brougham, overlooking the constitutional chapter in the Middle Ages, censured Hallam for making an arbitrary beginning at this point, and proposed to write a more complete history himself.

1 Lord Brougham, ignoring the constitutional chapter in the Middle Ages, criticized Hallam for starting arbitrarily at this point and suggested that he would write a more comprehensive history himself.

2 Technical subjects like painting or English law have been excluded by Hallam, and history and theology only partially treated.

2 Technical topics like painting or English law have been left out by Hallam, and history and theology are only covered in part.


HALLAM, ROBERT (d. 1417), bishop of Salisbury and English representative at the council of Constance, was educated at Oxford, and was chancellor of the university from 1403 to 1405. In the latter year the pope nominated him to be archbishop of York, but the king objected. However, in 1407 he was consecrated by Gregory XII. at Siena as bishop of Salisbury. At the council of Pisa in 1409 he was one of the English 853 representatives. On the 6th of June 1411 Pope John XXIII. made Hallam a cardinal, but there was some irregularity, and his title was not recognized. At the council of Constance (q.v.), which met in November 1414, Hallam was the chief English envoy. There he at once took a prominent position, as an advocate of the cause of Church reform, and of the superiority of the council to the pope. In the discussions which led up to the deposition of John XXIII. on the 29th of May 1415 he had a leading share. With the trials of John Hus and Jerome of Prague he had less concern. The emperor Sigismund, through whose influence the council had been assembled, was absent during the whole of 1416 on a diplomatic mission in France and England; but when he returned to Constance in January 1417, as the open ally of the English king, Hallam as Henry’s trusted representative obtained increased importance. Hallam contrived skilfully to emphasize English prestige by delivering the address of welcome to Sigismund on his formal reception. Afterwards, under his master’s direction, he gave the emperor vigorous support in the endeavour to secure a reform of the Church, before the council proceeded to the election of a new pope. This matter was still undecided when Hallam died suddenly, on the 4th of September 1417. After his death the direction of the English nation fell into less skilful hands, with the result that the cardinals were able to secure the immediate election of a new pope (Martin V., elected on the 11th of November). It has been supposed that the abandonment of the reformers by the English was due entirely to Hallam’s death; but it is more likely that Henry V., foreseeing the possible need for a change of front, had given Hallam discretionary powers which the bishop’s successors used with too little judgment. Hallam himself, who had the confidence of Sigismund and was generally respected for his straightforward independence, might have achieved a better result. Hallam was buried in the cathedral at Constance, where his tomb near the high altar is marked by a brass of English workmanship.

HALLAM, ROBERT (d. 1417), bishop of Salisbury and the English representative at the council of Constance, was educated at Oxford and served as chancellor of the university from 1403 to 1405. In 1405, the pope appointed him as archbishop of York, but the king opposed the decision. However, in 1407, he was consecrated by Gregory XII in Siena as bishop of Salisbury. At the council of Pisa in 1409, he was one of the English representatives. On June 6, 1411, Pope John XXIII made Hallam a cardinal, but due to some irregularities, his title wasn't recognized. At the council of Constance (q.v.), which convened in November 1414, Hallam was the chief English envoy. He quickly took a prominent role as an advocate for Church reform and for the council's authority over the pope. In the discussions leading to John XXIII's deposition on May 29, 1415, he played a key role. He was less involved in the trials of John Hus and Jerome of Prague. Emperor Sigismund, who had influenced the council's assembly, was absent throughout 1416 on a diplomatic mission to France and England, but when he returned to Constance in January 1417 as an open ally of the English king, Hallam, as Henry’s trusted representative, gained increased significance. Hallam skillfully highlighted English prestige by delivering the welcome address to Sigismund at his formal reception. Later, under the king's guidance, he provided strong support to the emperor in the push for Church reform before the council moved to elect a new pope. This matter remained unresolved when Hallam died suddenly on September 4, 1417. After his death, the leadership of the English delegation fell into less capable hands, allowing the cardinals to secure the quick election of a new pope (Martin V., elected on November 11). It has been suggested that the English abandoning the reformers was solely due to Hallam’s death, but it’s more plausible that Henry V, anticipating a potential need for a change in approach, had given Hallam discretionary powers that his successors executed without sufficient judgment. Hallam himself, having the confidence of Sigismund and being generally respected for his straightforward independence, might have achieved a better outcome. Hallam was buried in the cathedral at Constance, where his tomb near the high altar features a brass of English craftsmanship.

For the acts of the council of Constance see H. von der Hardt’s Concilium Constantiense, and H. Finke’s Acta concilii Constanciensis. For a modern account see Mandell Creighton’s History of the Papacy (6 vols., London, 1897).

For the actions of the council of Constance, check out H. von der Hardt’s Concilium Constantiense, and H. Finke’s Acta concilii Constanciensis. For a contemporary overview, see Mandell Creighton’s History of the Papacy (6 vols., London, 1897).

(C. L. K.)

HALLÉ, SIR CHARLES (originally Karl Halle) (1819-1895), English pianist and conductor, German by nationality, was born at Hagen, in Westphalia, on the 11th of April 1819. He studied under Rink at Darmstadt in 1835, and as early as 1836 went to Paris, where for twelve years he lived in constant intercourse with Cherubini, Chopin, Liszt and other musicians, and enjoyed the friendship of such great literary figures as Alfred de Musset and George Sand. He had started a set of chamber concerts with Alard and Franchomme with great success, and had completed one series of them when the revolution of 1848 drove him from Paris, and he settled, with his wife and two children, in London. His pianoforte recitals, given at first from 1850 in his own house, and from 1861 in St James’s Hall, were an important feature of London musical life, and it was due in great measure to them that a knowledge of Beethoven’s pianoforte sonatas became general in English society. At the Musical Union founded by John Ella, and at the Popular Concerts from their beginning, Hallé was a frequent performer, and from 1853 was director of the Gentlemen’s Concerts in Manchester, where, in 1857, he started a series of concerts of his own, raising the orchestra to a pitch of perfection quite unknown at that time in England. In 1888 he married Madame Norman Neruda (b. 1839), the violinist, widow of Ludwig Norman, and daughter of Josef Neruda, members of whose family had long been famous for musical talent. In the same year he was knighted; and in 1890 and 1891 he toured with his wife in Australia and elsewhere. He died at Manchester on the 25th of October 1895. Hallé exercised an important influence in the musical education of England; if his pianoforte-playing, by which he was mainly known to the public in London, seemed remarkable rather for precision than for depth, for crystal clearness rather than for warmth, and for perfect realization of the written text rather than for strong individuality, it was at least of immense value as giving the composer’s idea with the utmost fidelity. Those who were privileged to hear him play in private, like those who could appreciate the power, beauty and imaginative warmth of his conducting, would have given a very different verdict; and they were not wrong in judging Hallé to be a man of the widest and keenest artistic sympathies, with an extraordinary gift of insight into music of every school, as well as a strong sense of humour. He fought a long and arduous battle for the best music, and never forgot the dignity of his art. In spite of the fact that his technique was that of his youth, of the period before Liszt, the ease and certainty he attained in the most modern music was not the less wonderful because he concealed the mechanical means so completely.

HALLÉ, SIR CHARLES (originally Karl Halle) (1819-1895), English pianist and conductor, originally from Germany, was born in Hagen, Westphalia, on April 11, 1819. He studied under Rink in Darmstadt in 1835 and by 1836 moved to Paris, where he lived for twelve years and interacted regularly with Cherubini, Chopin, Liszt, and other musicians, enjoying friendships with prominent literary figures like Alfred de Musset and George Sand. He successfully launched a series of chamber concerts with Alard and Franchomme, finishing one series before the 1848 revolution forced him to leave Paris and settle in London with his wife and two children. His piano recitals, starting in his home in 1850 and moving to St James’s Hall in 1861, became a significant part of London’s music scene, playing a major role in popularizing Beethoven’s piano sonatas in English society. Hallé frequently performed at the Musical Union founded by John Ella and at the Popular Concerts from their inception; from 1853, he was the director of the Gentlemen’s Concerts in Manchester, where he started his own concert series in 1857, elevating the local orchestra to an exceptional standard previously unseen in England. In 1888, he married the violinist Madame Norman Neruda (b. 1839), widow of Ludwig Norman, and daughter of Josef Neruda, a family renowned for its musical talent. That same year, he was knighted; in 1890 and 1891, he toured Australia and other locations with his wife. He passed away in Manchester on October 25, 1895. Hallé had a significant impact on music education in England; although his piano playing, which was mainly recognized by the public in London, was notable for its precision rather than depth, clarity over warmth, and perfect execution of the written score over strong individuality, it was invaluable for faithfully conveying the composer’s intent. Those fortunate enough to hear him play privately or appreciate the power, beauty, and imaginative warmth of his conducting would have had a very different opinion; they were right to view Hallé as a person with broad and sharp artistic sympathies and an extraordinary ability to understand music from every genre, alongside a strong sense of humor. He waged a long and challenging fight for high-quality music and never lost sight of the dignity of his art. Despite the fact that his technique harked back to his youth, from before Liszt’s time, the ease and confidence he achieved in performing the most modern music was still remarkable, as he skillfully concealed the technical demands involved.

Lady Hallé, who from 1864 onwards had been one of the leading solo violinists of the time, was constantly associated with her husband on the concert stage till his death; and in 1896 a public subscription was organized in her behalf, under royal patronage. She continued to appear occasionally in public, notably as late as 1907, when she played at the Joachim memorial concert. In 1901 she was given by Queen Alexandra the title of “violinist to the queen.” A fine classical player and artist, frequently associated with Joachim, Lady Hallé was the first of the women violinists who could stand comparison with men.

Lady Hallé, who had been one of the top solo violinists since 1864, was often seen performing with her husband until his death. In 1896, a public subscription for her support was organized, backed by royal patronage. She still made occasional public appearances, with one of her last performances in 1907 at the Joachim memorial concert. In 1901, Queen Alexandra named her “violinist to the queen.” A skilled classical performer and artist frequently linked with Joachim, Lady Hallé was the first female violinist who could compete with male counterparts.


HALLE (known as Halle-an-der-Saale, to distinguish it from the small town of Halle in Westphalia), a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Saxony, situated in a sandy plain on the right bank of the Saale, which here divides into several arms, 21 m. N.W. from Leipzig by the railway to Magdeburg. Pop. (1875), 60,503; (1885) 81,982; (1895) 116,304; (1905) 160,031. Owing to its situation at the junction of six important lines of railway, bringing it into direct communication with Berlin, Breslau, Leipzig, Frankfort-on-Main, the Harz country and Hanover, it has greatly developed in size and in commercial and industrial importance. It consists of the old, or inner, town surrounded by promenades, which occupy the site of the former fortifications, and beyond these of two small towns, Glaucha in the south and Neumarkt in the north, and five rapidly increasing suburbs. The inner town is irregularly built and presents a somewhat unattractive appearance, but it has been much improved and modernized by the laying out of new streets.

HALLE (known as Halle (Saale) to differentiate it from the smaller town of Halle in Westphalia) is a town in Germany located in the Prussian province of Saxony. It's situated in a sandy plain on the right bank of the Saale River, which splits into several branches, 21 miles northwest of Leipzig via the railway to Magdeburg. The population was 60,503 in 1875, 81,982 in 1885, 116,304 in 1895, and 160,031 in 1905. Thanks to its position at the intersection of six major railway lines, connecting it directly to Berlin, Breslau, Leipzig, Frankfort-on-Main, the Harz region, and Hanover, it has significantly expanded in size as well as in commercial and industrial importance. The town consists of the old, or inner, section surrounded by promenades that occupy the former fortifications, and beyond these lies two small towns, Glaucha to the south and Neumarkt to the north, along with five rapidly growing suburbs. The inner town has an irregular layout and appears somewhat unattractive, but it has been greatly improved and modernized with the addition of new streets.

The centre of the town proper is occupied by the imposing market square, on which stand the fine medieval town hall (restored in 1883) and the handsome Gothic Marienkirche, dating mainly from the 16th century, with two towers connected by a bridge. In the middle of the square are a clock-tower (Der rote Turm) 276 ft. in height, and a bronze statue of Handel, the composer, a native of Halle. West of the market-square lies the Halle, or the Tal, where the brine springs (see below) issue. Among the eleven churches, nine Protestant and two Roman Catholic, may also be mentioned the St Moritzkirche, dating from the 12th century, with fine wood carvings and sculptures, and the cathedral (belonging since 1689 to the Reformed or Calvinistic church), built in the 16th century and containing an altar-piece representing Duke Augustus of Saxony and his family. Of secular buildings the most noticeable are the ruins of the castle of Moritzburg, formerly a citadel and the residence of the archbishops of Magdeburg, destroyed by fire in the Thirty Years’ War, with the exception of the left wing now used for military purposes, the university buildings, the theatre and the new railway station. The famous university was founded by the elector Frederick III. of Brandenburg (afterwards king of Prussia), in 1694, on behalf of the jurist, Christian Thomasius (1655-1728), whom many students followed to Halle, when he was expelled from Leipzig through the enmity of his fellow professors. It was closed by Napoleon in 1806 and again in 1813, but in 1815 was re-established and augmented by the removal to it of the university of Wittenberg, with which it thus became united. It has faculties of theology, law, medicine and philosophy. From the first it has been recognized as one of the principal seats of Protestant theology, originally of the pietistic and latterly of the rationalistic and critical school. In connexion with the university there are a botanical garden, a theological seminary, 854 anatomical, pathological and physical institutes, hospitals, an agricultural institute—one of the foremost institutions of the kind in Germany—a meteorological institute, an observatory and a library of 180,000 printed volumes and 800 manuscripts. Among other educational establishments must be mentioned the Francke’sche Stiftungen, founded in 1691 by August Hermann Francke (1663-1727), a bronze statue of whom by Rauch was erected in 1829 in the inner court of the building. They embrace an orphanage, a laboratory where medicines are prepared and distributed, a Bible press from which Bibles are issued at a cheap rate, and eight schools of various grades, attended in all by over 3000 pupils. The other principal institutions are the city gymnasium, the provincial lunatic asylum, the prison, the town hospital and infirmary, and the deaf and dumb institute. The salt-springs of Halle have been known from a very early period. Some rise within the town and others on an island in the Saale; and together their annual yield of salt is about 8500 tons.

The center of the town is dominated by the impressive market square, home to the beautiful medieval town hall (restored in 1883) and the stunning Gothic Marienkirche, mostly from the 16th century, featuring two towers connected by a bridge. In the middle of the square is a clock tower (Der rote Turm) standing 276 ft. tall, along with a bronze statue of Handel, the composer and a local of Halle. To the west of the market square is the Halle, or the Tal, where the brine springs can be found (see below). Among the eleven churches, nine Protestant and two Roman Catholic, the St Moritzkirche, dating back to the 12th century, is notable for its intricate wood carvings and sculptures, along with the cathedral (which has belonged to the Reformed or Calvinist church since 1689), constructed in the 16th century and featuring an altar piece depicting Duke Augustus of Saxony and his family. Among the secular buildings, the most prominent are the ruins of Moritzburg Castle, once a citadel and residence for the archbishops of Magdeburg, which was destroyed by fire during the Thirty Years’ War, except for the left wing currently used for military purposes, the university buildings, the theater, and the new railway station. The famous university was founded in 1694 by Elector Frederick III of Brandenburg (who later became King of Prussia) on behalf of the jurist Christian Thomasius (1655-1728), who attracted many students to Halle after being expelled from Leipzig due to conflict with other professors. It was closed by Napoleon in 1806 and again in 1813, but was re-established in 1815 and expanded by the relocation of the University of Wittenberg, thus merging the two. It offers faculties in theology, law, medicine, and philosophy. From the beginning, it has been recognized as a key center for Protestant theology, initially focusing on pietism and later on rationalism and critical study. Associated with the university are a botanical garden, a theological seminary, 854 anatomical, pathological, and physical institutes, hospitals, an agricultural institute—one of the leading institutions of its kind in Germany—a meteorological institute, an observatory, and a library with 180,000 printed volumes and 800 manuscripts. Among other educational institutions, the Francke’sche Stiftungen, established in 1691 by August Hermann Francke (1663-1727), should also be mentioned. A bronze statue of him by Rauch was erected in 1829 in the inner courtyard of the building. The foundations include an orphanage, a lab where medicines are prepared and distributed, a Bible press offering Bibles at affordable prices, and eight schools of varying levels, serving over 3,000 students in total. Other key institutions include the city gymnasium, the provincial mental health asylum, the prison, the town hospital and infirmary, and the school for the deaf and hard of hearing. The salt springs in Halle have been known since ancient times. Some are located within the town, while others are on an island in the Saale River; together, they produce about 8,500 tons of salt annually.

The workmen employed at the salt-works are of a peculiar race and are known as the Halloren. They have been usually regarded as descendants of the original Wendish inhabitants, or as Celtic immigrants, with an admixture of Frankish elements. They wear a distinct dress, the ordinary costume of about 1700, observe several ancient customs, and enjoy certain exemptions and privileges derived from those of the ancient Pfannerschaft (community of the salt-panners).

The workers at the salt mines are a unique group known as the Halloren. They are typically seen as descendants of the original Wendish inhabitants or Celtic immigrants, mixed with some Frankish influences. They wear distinctive clothing that's similar to what people wore around 1700, follow several old customs, and have specific rights and privileges that come from the ancient Pfannerschaft (community of the salt-panners).

Among the other industries of Halle are sugar refining, machine building, the manufacture of spirits, malt, chocolate, cocoa, confectionery, cement, paper, chicory, lubricating and illuminating oil, wagon grease, carriages and playing cards, printing, dyeing and coal mining (soft brown coal). The trade, which is supervised by a chamber of commerce, is very considerable, the principal exports being machinery, raw sugar and petroleum. Halle is also noted as the seat of several important publishing firms. The Bibelanstalt (Bible institution) of von Castein is the central authority for the revision of Luther’s Bible, of which it sells annually from 60,000 to 70,000 copies.

Among the various industries in Halle are sugar refining, machine building, the production of spirits, malt, chocolate, cocoa, confectionery, cement, paper, chicory, lubricating and lighting oil, wagon grease, carriages, and playing cards, as well as printing, dyeing, and coal mining (soft brown coal). The commerce, overseen by a chamber of commerce, is quite significant, with the main exports being machinery, raw sugar, and petroleum. Halle is also recognized as the hub for several important publishing firms. The Bibelanstalt (Bible institution) of von Castein serves as the central authority for revising Luther’s Bible, selling around 60,000 to 70,000 copies each year.

Halle is first mentioned as a fortress erected on the Saale in 806 by Charles, son of Charlemagne, during his expedition against the Sorbs. The place was, however, known long before, and owes its origin as well as its name to the salt springs (Halis). In 968 Halle, with the valuable salt works, was given by the emperor Otto I. to the newly founded archdiocese of Magdeburg, and in 981 Otto II. gave it a charter as a town. The interests of the archbishop were watched over by a Vogt (advocatus) and a burgrave, and from the first there were separate jurisdictions for the Halloren and the German settlers in the town, the former being under that of the Salzgraf (comes salis), the latter of a Schultheiss or bailiff, both subordinate to the burgrave. The conflict of interests and jurisdictions led to the usual internecine strife during the middle ages. The panners (Pfänner) of the Tal, feudatories or officials, became a close hereditary aristocracy in perpetual rivalry with the gilds in the town; and both resisted the pretensions of the archbishops. At the beginning of the 12th century Halle had attained considerable importance, and in the 13th and 14th centuries as a member of the Hanseatic League it carried on successful wars with the archbishops of Magdeburg; and in 1435 it resisted an army of 30,000 men under the elector of Saxony. Its liberty perished, however, as a result of the internal feud between the democratic gilds and the patrician panners. On the 20th of September 1478 a demagogue and cobbler named Jakob Weissak, a member of the town council, with his confederates opened the gates to the soldiers of the archbishop. The townsmen were subdued, and to hold them in check the archbishop, Ernest of Saxony, built the castle of Moritzburg. Notwithstanding the efforts of the archbishops of Mainz and Magdeburg, the Reformation found an entrance into the city in 1522; and in 1541 a Lutheran superintendent was appointed. After the peace of Westphalia in 1648 the city came into the possession of the house of Brandenburg. In 1806 it was stormed and taken by the French, after which, at the peace of Tilsit, it was united to the new kingdom of Westphalia. After the battle between the Prussians and French, in May 1813, it was taken by the Prussians. The rise of Leipzig was for a long time hurtful to the prosperity of Halle, and its present rapid increase in population and trade is principally due to its position as the centre of a network of railways.

Halle is first mentioned as a fortress built on the Saale in 806 by Charles, the son of Charlemagne, during his campaign against the Sorbs. However, the area was known long before that and gets its origin and name from the salt springs (Halis). In 968, Halle, along with its valuable salt works, was given by Emperor Otto I to the newly established archdiocese of Magdeburg, and in 981, Otto II granted it a town charter. The interests of the archbishop were monitored by a Vogt (advocatus) and a burgrave, and there were separate jurisdictions for the Halloren and the German settlers in the town, with the former under the Salzgraf (comes salis) and the latter under a Schultheiss or bailiff, both reporting to the burgrave. The conflict of interests and jurisdictions led to the usual internal strife during the Middle Ages. The panners (Pfänner) of the Tal, who were feudatories or officials, became a close hereditary aristocracy in constant rivalry with the town's guilds, and both resisted the archbishops' pretensions. By the early 12th century, Halle had gained significant importance, and in the 13th and 14th centuries, as a member of the Hanseatic League, it successfully fought against the archbishops of Magdeburg; in 1435, it resisted an army of 30,000 led by the elector of Saxony. However, its freedom was lost due to the internal conflict between the democratic guilds and the patrician panners. On September 20, 1478, a demagogue and cobbler named Jakob Weissak, who was part of the town council, along with his allies, opened the gates to the archbishop's soldiers. The town's people were subdued, and to keep them in check, Archbishop Ernest of Saxony built the castle of Moritzburg. Despite the efforts of the archbishops of Mainz and Magdeburg, the Reformation entered the city in 1522, and in 1541 a Lutheran superintendent was appointed. After the Peace of Westphalia in 1648, the city became part of the house of Brandenburg. In 1806, it was stormed and captured by the French, and at the Peace of Tilsit, it was incorporated into the new kingdom of Westphalia. After the battle between the Prussians and the French in May 1813, it was taken by the Prussians. The rise of Leipzig greatly harmed Halle's prosperity for a long time, and its current rapid growth in population and trade is mainly due to its position as a hub of railway connections.

See Dreyhaupt, Ausführliche Beschreibung des Saalkreises (Halle, 2 vols., 1755; 3rd edition, 1842-1844); Hoffbauer, Geschichte der Universität zu Halle (1806); Halle in Vorzeit und Gegenwart (1851); Knauth, Kurze Geschichte und Beschreibung der Stadt Halle (3rd ed., 1861); vom Hagen, Die Stadt Halle (1866-1867); Hertzberg, Geschichte der Vereinigung der Universitäten von Wittenberg und Halle (1867); Voss, Zur Geschichte der Autonomie der Stadt Halle (1874); Schrader, Geschichte der Friedrichs-Universität zu Halle (Berlin, 1894); Karl Hegel, Städte und Gilden der germanischen Völker (Leipzig, 1891), ii. 444-449.

See Dreyhaupt, Detailed Description of the Saalkreis (Halle, 2 vols., 1755; 3rd edition, 1842-1844); Hoffbauer, History of the University of Halle (1806); Halle in Ancient and Modern Times (1851); Knauth, Brief History and Description of the City of Halle (3rd ed., 1861); vom Hagen, The City of Halle (1866-1867); Hertzberg, History of the Union of the Universities of Wittenberg and Halle (1867); Voss, On the History of the Autonomy of the City of Halle (1874); Schrader, History of the Friedrich University of Halle (Berlin, 1894); Karl Hegel, Cities and Guilds of the Germanic Peoples (Leipzig, 1891), ii. 444-449.


HALLECK, FITZ-GREENE (1790-1867), American poet, was born at Guilford, Connecticut, on the 8th of July 1790. By his mother he was descended from John Eliot, the “Apostle to the Indians.” At an early age he became clerk in a store at Guilford, and in 1811 he entered a banking-house in New York. Having made the acquaintance of Joseph Rodman Drake, in 1819 he assisted him under the signature of “Croaker junior” in contributing to the New York Evening Post the humorous series of “Croaker Papers.” In 1821 he published his longest poem, Fanny, a satire on local politics and fashions in the measure of Byron’s Don Juan. He visited Europe in 1822-1823, and after his return published anonymously in 1827 Alnwick Castle, with other Poems. From 1832 to 1841 he was confidential agent of John Jacob Astor, who named him one of the trustees of the Astor library. In 1864 he published in the New York Ledger a poem of 300 lines entitled “Young America.” He died at Guilford, on the 19th of November 1867. The poems of Halleck are written with great care and finish, and manifest the possession of a fine sense of harmony and of genial and elevated sentiments.

HALLECK, FITZ-GREENE (1790-1867), American poet, was born in Guilford, Connecticut, on July 8, 1790. He was descended from John Eliot, the "Apostle to the Indians," through his mother. At a young age, he worked as a clerk in a store in Guilford, and in 1811, he joined a banking firm in New York. After meeting Joseph Rodman Drake, he collaborated with him in 1819 under the name "Croaker junior," contributing to the New York Evening Post with a humorous series called the "Croaker Papers." In 1821, he published his longest poem, Fanny, a satire on local politics and fashion modeled after Byron’s Don Juan. He traveled to Europe in 1822-1823, and upon returning, published Alnwick Castle, with other Poems anonymously in 1827. From 1832 to 1841, he served as a confidential agent for John Jacob Astor, who appointed him as one of the trustees of the Astor library. In 1864, he published a 300-line poem titled "Young America" in the New York Ledger. He passed away in Guilford on November 19, 1867. Halleck's poems are crafted with great care and precision, showcasing a strong sense of harmony along with warm and elevated sentiments.

His Life and Letters, by James Grant Wilson, appeared in 1869. His Poetical Writings, together with extracts from those of Joseph Rodman Drake, were edited by Wilson in the same year.

His Life and Letters, by James Grant Wilson, was published in 1869. His Poetical Writings, along with selections from those of Joseph Rodman Drake, were edited by Wilson in the same year.


HALLECK, HENRY WAGER (1815-1872), American general and jurist, was born at Westernville, Oneida county, N.Y., in 1815, entered the West Point military academy at the age of twenty, and on graduating in 1839 was appointed to the engineers, becoming at the same time assistant professor of engineering at the academy. In the following year he was made an assistant to the Board of Engineers at Washington, from 1841 to 1846 he was employed on the defence works at New York, and in 1845 he was sent by the government to visit the principal military establishments of Europe. After his return, Halleck delivered a course of lectures on the science of war, published in 1846 under the title Elements of Military Art and Science. A later edition of this work was widely used as a text-book by volunteer officers during the Civil War. On the outbreak of the Mexican War in 1846, he served with the expedition to California and the Pacific coast, in which he distinguished himself not only as an engineer, but by his skill in civil administration and by his good conduct before the enemy. He served for several years in California as a staff officer, and as secretary of state under the military government, and in 1849 he helped to frame the state constitution of California, on its being admitted into the Union. In 1852 he was appointed inspector and engineer of lighthouses, and in 1853 was employed in the fortification of the Pacific coast. In 1854 Captain Halleck resigned his commission and took up the practice of law with great success. He was also director of a quicksilver mine, and in 1855 he became president of the Pacific & Atlantic railway. On the outbreak of the Civil War he returned to the army as a major-general, and in November 1861 he was charged with the supreme command in the western theatre of war. There can be no question that his administrative skill was mainly instrumental in bringing order out of chaos in the hurried formation of large volunteer armies in 1861, but the strategical and tactical successes of the following spring were due rather to the skill and activity of his subordinate generals Grant, Buell and Pope, than to the plans of the supreme commander, and when he assumed command of the united forces of these three generals before Corinth, the methodical slowness of his advance aroused much criticism. In July, however, he was called to Washington as general-in-chief of the armies. At headquarters his administrative powers were conspicuous, but he proved to be utterly wanting in any large grasp of the military problem; the successive reverses of Generals McClellan, Pope, Burnside and Hooker in Virginia were not infrequently traceable to the defects of the general-in-chief. No co-ordination of the military efforts of the Union was seriously undertaken by Halleck, and eventually in March 1864 Grant was appointed to 855 replace him, Major-General Halleck becoming chief of staff at Washington. This post he occupied with credit until the end of the war. In April 1865 he held the command of the military division of the James and in August of the same year of the military division of the Pacific, which he retained till June 1869, when he was transferred to that of the South, a position he held till his death at Louisville, Ky., on the 9th of January 1872. Halleck’s position as a soldier is easily defined by bis uniform success as an administrative official, his equally uniform want of success as an officer at the head of large armies in the field, and the popularity of his theoretical writings on war. His influence, for good or evil, on the course of the greatest war of modern times was greater than that of any soldier on either side save Grant and Lee, and whilst his interference with the dispositions of the commanders in the field was often disastrous, his services in organizing and instructing the Union forces were always of the highest value, and in this respect he was indispensable.

HALLECK, HENRY WAGER (1815-1872), American general and jurist, was born in Westernville, Oneida County, N.Y., in 1815. He entered the West Point military academy at the age of twenty and graduated in 1839, then was appointed to the engineers while also serving as an assistant professor of engineering at the academy. The following year, he became an assistant to the Board of Engineers in Washington. From 1841 to 1846, he worked on the defense projects in New York, and in 1845, the government sent him to assess major military establishments in Europe. After returning, Halleck gave a series of lectures on military science, published in 1846 as Elements of Military Art and Science. A later edition of this book was commonly used as a textbook by volunteer officers during the Civil War. When the Mexican War broke out in 1846, he joined the expedition to California and the Pacific coast, where he stood out not just as an engineer, but also for his civil administration skills and his bravery in combat. He served several years in California as a staff officer and as secretary of state under the military government, and in 1849 he aided in drafting California's state constitution upon its admission to the Union. In 1852, he was appointed inspector and engineer of lighthouses, and in 1853, he worked on fortifying the Pacific coast. In 1854, Captain Halleck resigned his commission and successfully began practicing law. He also directed a quicksilver mine, and in 1855, he became president of the Pacific & Atlantic Railway. When the Civil War started, he returned to the army as a major-general, and in November 1861, he was given supreme command in the western theater of war. While his administrative abilities helped bring order during the hasty formation of large volunteer armies in 1861, the strategic and tactical victories in the following spring were more due to the skills and actions of his subordinate generals Grant, Buell, and Pope than to the plans of the supreme commander. When he took command of the united forces of these three generals before Corinth, the slow pace of his advance drew considerable criticism. However, in July, he was called to Washington as general-in-chief of the armies. At headquarters, his administrative skills stood out, but he showed a complete lack of insight into the larger military issues. The setbacks of Generals McClellan, Pope, Burnside, and Hooker in Virginia were often linked to the shortcomings of the general-in-chief. Halleck never seriously coordinated the Union's military efforts, and eventually, in March 1864, Grant was appointed to replace him, with Major-General Halleck becoming chief of staff in Washington. He held this position creditably until the end of the war. In April 1865, he commanded the military division of the James, and in August of that year, he oversaw the military division of the Pacific until June 1869, when he was moved to the South, a role he maintained until his death in Louisville, Ky., on January 9, 1872. Halleck's role as a soldier is marked by his consistent success as an administrative leader, his constant failure as a commander of large armies in the field, and the popularity of his theoretical writings on warfare. His influence, for better or worse, on the outcome of the greatest war of modern times surpassed that of any soldier on either side except Grant and Lee. While his interference with field commanders' strategies was often detrimental, his contributions to organizing and training the Union forces were invaluable, making him essential to the effort.

Besides Military Art and Science, Halleck wrote Bitumen, its Varieties, Properties and Uses (1841); The Mining Laws of Spain and Mexico (1859); International Law (1861; new edition, 1908); and Treatise on International Law and the Laws of War, prepared for the use of Schools and Colleges, abridged from the larger work. He translated Jomini’s Vie politique et militaire de Napoléon (1864) and de Fooz On the Law of Mines (1860). The works on international law mentioned above entitle General Halleck to be considered as one of the great jurists of the 19th century.

Besides Military Art and Science, Halleck wrote Bitumen, its Varieties, Properties and Uses (1841); The Mining Laws of Spain and Mexico (1859); International Law (1861; new edition, 1908); and Treatise on International Law and the Laws of War, prepared for the use of Schools and Colleges, which is a condensed version of the larger work. He also translated Jomini’s Vie politique et militaire de Napoléon (1864) and de Fooz’s On the Law of Mines (1860). The international law works mentioned above qualify General Halleck to be recognized as one of the great legal scholars of the 19th century.


HÄLLEFLINTA (a Swedish word meaning rock-flint), a white, grey, yellow, greenish or pink, fine-grained rock consisting of an intimate mixture of quartz and felspar. Many examples are banded or striated; others contain porphyritic crystals of quartz which resemble those of the felsites and porphyries. Mica, iron oxides, apatite, zircon, epidote and hornblende may also be present in small amount. The more micaceous varieties form transitions to granulite and gneiss. Hälleflinta under the microscope is very finely crystalline, or even cryptocrystalline, resembling the felsitic matrix of many acid rocks. It is essentially metamorphic and occurs with gneisses, schists and granulites, especially in the Scandinavian peninsula, where it is regarded as being very characteristic of certain horizons. Of its original nature there is some doubt, but its chemical composition and the occasional presence of porphyritic crystals indicate that it has affinities to the fine-grained acid intrusive rocks. In this group there may also have been placed metamorphosed acid tuffs and a certain number of adinoles (shales, contact altered by intrusions of diabase). The assemblage is not a perfectly homogeneous one but includes both igneous and sedimentary rocks, but the former preponderate. Rocks very similar to the typical Swedish hälleflintas occur in Tirol, in Galicia and eastern Bohemia.

HÄLLEFLINTA (a Swedish word meaning rock-flint) is a white, gray, yellow, greenish, or pink, fine-grained rock made up of a close mix of quartz and feldspar. Many examples are banded or striated; others have porphyritic quartz crystals that look like those found in felsites and porphyries. Mica, iron oxides, apatite, zircon, epidote, and hornblende can also be found in small quantities. The more micaceous types can transition into granulite and gneiss. Under a microscope, hälleflinta appears very finely crystalline or even cryptocrystalline, resembling the felsitic matrix of many acid rocks. It is primarily metamorphic and is found alongside gneisses, schists, and granulites, particularly in the Scandinavian peninsula, where it is considered characteristic of certain layers. There is some uncertainty about its original nature, but its chemical composition and the occasional presence of porphyritic crystals suggest it shares characteristics with fine-grained acid intrusive rocks. This group may also include metamorphosed acid tuffs and several adinoles (shales altered by diabase intrusions). The collection isn't perfectly uniform but contains both igneous and sedimentary rocks, with the igneous ones being more prevalent. Rocks very similar to typical Swedish hälleflinta can be found in Tirol, Galicia, and eastern Bohemia.


HALLEL (Heb. הלל a Mishnic derivative from הלל hillēl, “to praise”), a term in synagogal liturgy for (a) Psalms cxiii.-cxviii., often called “the Egyptian Hallel” because of its recitation during the paschal meal on the night of the Passover, (b) Psalm cxxxvi. “the Great Hallel.” C. A. Briggs1 points out that the term “Hallelujah” (Praise ye Yah) is found at the close of Pss. civ., cv., cxv., cxvi., cxvii., at the beginning of Pss. cxi., cxii. and at both ends of Pss. cvi., cxiii., cxxxv., cxlvi. to cl. The Septuagint also gives it at the beginning of Pss. cv., cvii., cxiv., cxvi. to cxix., cxxxvi. There are thus four groups of Hallel psalms:—civ.-cvii. (a tetralogy on creation, the patriarchal age, the Exodus, and the Restoration); cxi.-cxvii. which includes most of the “Egyptian Hallel”; cxxxv.-cxxxvi.; cxlvi.-cl. All of these Hallels (except cxlvii. and cxlix. which are Maccabean) belong to the Greek period, forming a collection of sixteen psalms composed for public use by the choirs, especially at the great feasts. Their distribution into four groups was the work of the final editor of the psalter. Later liturgical use regarded Pss. cxviii. and even cxix. as Hallels, as well as Pss. cxx. to cxxxiv.

HALLEL (Heb. הלל a Mishnic derivative from Hallel hillēl, “to praise”), a term in synagogue liturgy for (a) Psalms 113-118, often called “the Egyptian Hallel” because it's recited during the Passover meal on the night of Passover, (b) Psalm 136, known as “the Great Hallel.” C. A. Briggs1 notes that the term “Hallelujah” (Praise Yah) appears at the end of Psalms 104, 105, 115, 116, 117, at the beginning of Psalms 111, 112, and at both ends of Psalms 106, 113, 135, and 146 to 150. The Septuagint also lists it at the start of Psalms 105, 107, 114, 116 to 119, and 136. This gives us four groups of Hallel psalms:—104-107 (a tetralogy on creation, the patriarchal age, the Exodus, and the Restoration); 111-117, which includes most of the “Egyptian Hallel”; 135-136; and 146-150. All of these Hallels (except 147 and 149, which are Maccabean) belong to the Greek period, forming a collection of sixteen psalms created for public use by the choirs, especially during the major feasts. Their organization into four groups was done by the final editor of the psalter. Later liturgical practices considered Psalms 118 and even 119 as Hallels, along with Psalms 120 to 134.

It will be observed that the extent of the official Hallel varied from time to time. It would appear that in the time of Gamaliel (Pesahim x. 5) the custom of its recitation at the paschal meal was still of recent innovation. While the school of Shammai advised only Ps. cxiii., the school of Hillel favoured Pss. cxiii. and cxiv.2 The further extension so as to include Pss. cxv. to cxviii. probably dates from the first half of the 2nd century A.D., and these four psalms were recited after the pouring out of the fourth cup, the two earlier ones being taken at the beginning of the meal. From the 3rd century the use of the Hallel was extended to other occasions, and was gradually incorporated into the liturgy of eighteen festal days.

It can be noted that the official Hallel varied in its extent over time. It seems that during the time of Gamaliel (Pesahim x. 5), the practice of reciting it at the Passover meal was still a relatively new tradition. While the school of Shammai suggested only reciting Ps. cxiii., the school of Hillel preferred Pss. cxiii. and cxiv. 2 The additional extension to include Pss. cxv. to cxviii. probably originated in the first half of the 2nd century CE, with these four psalms being recited after pouring the fourth cup, while the first two were recited at the beginning of the meal. Starting from the 3rd century, the use of Hallel was expanded to other occasions and gradually included in the liturgy for eighteen festive days.

The “Great Hallel” (Ps. cxxxvi. and its later extension to cxx.-cxxxvi.) always served the wider purpose of a more general thanksgiving. According to Rabbi Johanan it derived its name from the allusion in v. 25 to the Holy One who sits in heaven and thence distributes food to all bis creatures.

The “Great Hallel” (Ps. cxxxvi. and its later extension to cxx.-cxxxvi.) has always served the broader purpose of a more general expression of gratitude. Rabbi Johanan said it got its name from the reference in verse 25 to the Holy One who sits in heaven and provides food to all his creations.


1 International Critical Commentary, “Psalms,” Intro. lxxviii.

1 International Critical Commentary, “Psalms,” Intro. lxxviii.

2 The reference to a hymn at the institution of the Eucharist (Matt. xxvi. 30, Mark xiv. 26) must be interpreted in the light of this inceptive stage of the Hallel.

2 The mention of a hymn during the institution of the Eucharist (Matt. xxvi. 30, Mark xiv. 26) needs to be understood in the context of this initial stage of the Hallel.





        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!